y,C-NRLF 


in^''-" .-;  -i^i 


THE  UNiVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


THE  PRESIDENT'S  REPORT 


^^U\'%-^: 


THE  PRESIDENT'S  REPORT 


Cbe  Tllntverslti?  of  (^btcaao 

FOUNDED  BY  JOHN  D.  ROCKEFELLER 


THE 

Presidents  Report 


JULY,  1892— JULY,  1902 


PART  II 


CHICAGO 

Zbc  inniverdftis  of  Cbicago  pceea 

1904 


Copyright  1903 
BY  THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CHICAGO 


\qo4- 


To  the  Trustees  of  the  University  of  Chicago: 

I  SUBMIT  herewith,  as  a  part  of  the  Decennial  Report  of  the  President,  the 
accompanying  list  of  the  publications  of  the  members  of  the  University,  printed  for 
convenience  as  a  separate  volume.  The  work  of  gathering  and  preparing  the  material 
and  seeing  the  volume  through  the  press  has  been  performed  by  the  Editorial  Com- 
mittee of  the  Faculty  which  has  had  charge  of  the  Decennial  Publications  as  a  whole. 

The  aim  has  been  to  include  the  publications,  from  1892  to  1902  inclusive,  of  all 
present  and  former  members  of  the  University  staff,  issued  during  the  term  of  their 
connection  with  the  University,  including  all  contributions  to  the  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, and  of  all  Graduate  Students  issued  while  in  residence.  All  students  have  been 
added  who  have  received  from  the  University  (down  to  October,  1902)  the  degree  of 
Doctor  of  Philosophy,  with  the  title  of  their  theses  even  when  still  impublished.  The 
regulations  of  the  University  require  the  publication  of  Doctors'  theses  within  one  year 
after  the  conferring  of  the  degree ;  but  it  has  been  found  impossible  always  to  enforce 
this  regulation  within  the  time  limit.  It  was  thought,  however,  that  a  thesis  soon  to 
be  published  might  legitimately  be  regarded  as  a  part  of  the  work  of  a  Department, 
and  that  a  complete  list  of  the  Doctors  and  their  subjects  would  in  itself  be  a  useful 
thing.  But  unpublished  theses  are  always  so  designated.  So  far  as  possible  the  pres- 
ent positions  of  the  Doctors  of  the  University  are  also  given,  as  well  as  of  former 
members  of  the  Faculties  who  now  hold  academic  or  professional  positions.  The  date 
in  square  brackets  after  the  name  indicates  the  term  of  service  of  present  and  former 
members  of  the  Faculties ;  the  dates  after  the  names  of  Doctors,  the  year  of  receiving 
the  degree.  The  explanation  should  be  added  that  the  School  of  Education,  the  Law 
School,  and  the  Medical  School  were  organized  either  towards  the  end  of  the  decen- 
nium  or  at  its  close;  this  bibliography  includes,  therefore,  only  the  Departments 
embraced  under  the  Faculties  of  Arts,  Literature,  Science,  and  Theology. 

The  bibliography  is  divided  into  two  parts.  Part  I,  "Departmental,"  is  intended 
to  include  the  publications  which  fall  more  especially  within  the  lines  of  activity 
of  a  person  as  member  of  a  departmental  staff.  The  attempt  has  been  made  to 
insert  under  this  head  only  such  books,  articles,  and  reviews  as  may  be  thought 
to  have  something  more  than  an  ephemeral  value.  The  character  of  the  medium  of 
publication  was  here  often  the  only  guide.  Some  inequality  in  the  selection  of  this 
material  has  naturally  been  unavoidable;  the  authors  themselves  are  in  the  main 
responsible  for  the  manner  in  which  the  Committee's  instructions  in  this  regard  have 
been  carried  out.  Brief  abstracts,  often  rather  in  the  nature  of  expanded  titles,  have 
been  given  in  this  Part  so  far  as  possible,  that  the  lists  might  thereby  gain  in  interest 
and  value  for  the  non-specialist.  Part  II,  "Literary,  Educational,  Miscellaneous," 
requires  little  explanation.  Elementary  or  secondary  text  books  have  been  entered  here, 
while  reviews  and  newspaper  articles  have  been  omitted  altogether.  In  some  cases 
items  which  reached  the  editors  too  late  to  be  included  in  Part  I  have  been  added  here, 
I  desire  to  express  to  the  Editorial  Committee  my  great  appreciation  of  the 
important  service  rendered  in  the  preparation  of  this  voliime. 

William  R.  Habpee,  President. 


■24383 


CONTENTS 

PART  I.    DEPARTMENTAL l_16i 

FACULTIES  OF  ARTS,  LITERATURE,  AND  SCIENCE 

lA.   Philosophy           -- 3 

IB.  Education    ---. _  ^2 

II.  Political  Economy 23 

III.  Political  Science 20 

IV.  History 24 

V.  Archeology 29 

VI.  Sociology  and  Anthropology 3q 

VII.  Comparative  Religion 33 

VIII.  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures 39 

IX.  Biblical  and  Patristic  Greek 45 

X.  Sanskrit  and  Indo-European  Comparative  Philology      -        -        .        .  49 

XI.  Greek  Language  and  Literature 51 

XII.  Latin  Language  and  Literature 55 

XIII.  Romance  Languages  and  Literatures 61 

XIV.  Germanic  Languages  and  Literatures 62 

XV.  English 67 

XVI.  Literature  in  English 72 

XVII.  Mathematics 73 

XVIII.  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics 33 

XIX.  Physics JOI 

XX.  Chemistry 1Q5 

XXL  Geology jl4 

XXII.  Zoology 125 

XXIII.  Anatomy 136 

XXIV.  Physiology 138 

XXV.  Neurology I43 

XXVI.  Pal-eontology .        ...        .  146 

XXVII.  Botany          -        - 148 

XXVIII.  Pathology  and  Bacteriology I54 

FACULTY  OF  THEOLOGY 

XLI.  Old  Testament  Literature  and  Interpretation 156 

XLII.  New  Testament  Literature  and  Interpretation 156 

XLIII.  Biblical  Theology      - 156 

XLIV.  Systematic  Theology I57 

XLV.  Church  History 158 

XL VI.  Homiletics,  Chubch'Polity,  and  Pastoral  Duties 160 

XL VII.  Sociology I61 

PART  II.    LITERARY,  EDUCATIONAL,  MISCELLANEOUS        -        -        -         163-182 

INDEX      - 183 


PART  I 
DEPARTMENTAL 


DEPARTMENTAL 


I  A.    PHILOSOPHY 


John  Dewey  [1894 — ],  Professor  and 
Head  of  the  Department  of  Philosophy ; 
Director  of  the  School  of  Education. 

The  Psychology  of  Number.  With  the  collabo- 
ration of  J.  A.  MacLellan.  8vo,  xiv  +  309. 
New  York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1895. 

A  discussion  of  the  psychological  development  of  the 
number-consciousness  as  a  basis  for  teaching  elemen- 
tary mathematics. 

The  Study  of  Ethics.  A  syllabus.  Second 
edition.  8vo,lM.  Ann  Arbor,  George  Wahr, 
1897. 

An  analysis,  from  the  psychological  side,  of  the  typical 
factors  in  conduct ;  with  bibliographical  references. 

The  Significance  of  the  Problem  of  Knowledge. 
8vo,  20.  University  of  Chicago  Contribu- 
tions to  Philosophy,  I,  No.  3,  1897. 

The  annual  address  of  the  honorary  president  before 
the  Philosophical  Society  of  the  University  of  Michi- 
gan, devoted  to  interpreting  the  interest  in  epistemo- 
logical  problems  in  terms  of  social  development. 

School  and  Society.  Three  lectures.  12mo,  129. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1899.  (Second 
edition,  1900;  third  edition,  1900;  both  im- 
changed.) 

A  discussion  of  changes  in  existing  school  methods, 
material,  and  organization  necessary  to  adapt  the 
school  to  contemporary  social  life. 

Psychology  and  Philosophic  Method.  Annual 
public  address  before  the  Philosophical 
Union  of  the  University  of  California. 
8vo,  23.    Berkeley,  University  Press,  1899. 

The  necessity  of  employing  psychological  data  to  con- 
struct a  rational  theory  of  human  experience. 

The  Educational  Situation.  12mo,  109.  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Contributions  to  Edu- 
cation, I,  No.  3,  1902. 

A  discussion  of  the  contemporary  situation  and  i)rob- 
lems  of  elementary,  secondary,  and  college  educations, 
resi)ectively,  in  the  light  of  historical  conditions  and 
contemporary  social  demands. 

The  Child  and  the  Curriculum.  12mo,  40. 
Ibid.,  No.  5,  1902. 

An  account  of  the  conflicting  contentions  of  two  op- 
posed schools  of  pedagogic  theory  as  to  the  proper 
basis  of  education,  and  an  attempt  to  lecoucUe  the 
opi>osed  positions. 


Studies  in  Logical  Theory.  With  the  collabo- 
ration of  members  and  fellows  of  the  De- 
partment of  Philosophy.  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  Second 
Series,  Vol.  X. 

Austin's  Theory  of  Sovereignty.  Political 
Science  Quarterly,  IX  (1894),  31-52. 

A  criticism  of  the  attempt  rigidly  to  separate  the  legal 
and  moral  aspects  of  sovereignty. 

Emotional  Attitudes.  Psychological  Review, 
I  (1894),  533-569. 

An  attempt  to  combine  Darwin's  and  James's  theories 
of  emotion. 

The  Ego  as  Cause.  Philosophical  Review,  III 
(1894),  337-341. 

A  criticism  of  one  form  of  the  free-will  theory. 

The  Significance  of  Emotions.  Psychological 
Review,  II  (1895),  13-32. 

A  continuation  of  the  discussion  of  emotions  with  a 
view  to  showing  their  position  in  the  reorganization  of 
instincts  and  habits. 

Interest  as  Related  to  Will.  Second  Supple- 
ment to  Herbart  Yearbook,  I  (1895),  1-23. 
(Second  edition,  revised,  1899.) 

A  psychological  investigation  of  the  nature  of  interest, 
with  conclusions  regarding  its  intellectual  and  moral 
use  in  education. 

The  Metaphysical  Method  in  Ethics.  Psy- 
chological Review,  III  (1896),  181-188. 

A  criticism  of  the  attempt  to  found  ethical  theory  upon 
metaphysical,  as  distinct  from  psychological  and  socio- 
logical, considerations. 

The  Reflex- Arc  Concept  in  Psychology.  Ibid., 
357-370. 

A  discussion  of  sensori-motor  co-ordination  as  the  unit 
of  psychological  theory. 

The  Culture  Epoch  Theory.  Herbart  Year 
Book,  II  (1896),  89-95. 

A  criticism  of  the  theory  of  the  recapitulation  of  the 
life  of  the  race  by  the  child. 

Imagination  and  Expression.  Kindergarten 
Magazine,  IX  (1896),  61-69. 

A  discussion  of  the  bearings  of  iDvestigation  upon  art 
instruction. 


Publications 


The  Psychology  of  Effort.  Philosophical  Be- 
view,  VI  (1897),  43-56. 

An  interpretation  of  efEort  in  terms  of  the  reconstruc- 
tion of  habits. 

The  Psychologic  Aspect  of  the  School  Curricu- 
lum. Educational  Review,  XIII  (1897), 
1-14. 

An  attempt  to  show  that  psycholo^  is  concerned  with 
the  subject-matter  as  well  as  with  the  method  of 
instruction. 

The  Interpretation  of  Child  Study.  Trans- 
actions of  the  Illinois  Society  for  Child 
Study,  II  (1897),  17-28. 

An  account  of  the  social  and  scientific  motives  involved 
in  the  development  of  a  science  of  genetic  psychology. 

Ethical  Principles  Underlying  Education.  Her- 
bart  Yearbook,  III  (1897),  1-14. 

A  discussion  of  the  relation  of  ethics,  social  life,  and 
education,  with  a  view  to  indicating  the  social,  and 
hence  ethical,  forces  operating  in  education. 

Evolution  and  Ethics.  Monist,  VIII  (1898), 
321-341. 

A  criticism  of  Huxley's  opposition  of  the  natural  and 
the  ethical,  together  with  an  interpretation  of  the 
meaning  of  selection,  survival,  etc.,  in  ethical  terms. 

Social  and  Ethical  Interpretations  in  Mental 
Development.  New  World,  VII  (1898), 
504r-522. 

An  account  of  the  bearing  of  the  social  factors  in  indi- 
vidual development  upon  moral  growth,  based  upon 
a  criticism  of  Baldwin  s  theories. 

Some  Remarks  on  the  Psychology  of  Number. 
Pedagogical  Seminary,  V  (1898),  427-434. 

A  criticism  of  Phillip's  investigations,  together  with  an 
estimate  of  the  place  of  the  serial  and  rational  factors 
in  the  number  concept. 

Harris's  Psychologic  Foundations  of  Educa- 
tion. Educational  Review,  XVI  (1898), 
356-369. 

An  estimate  of  various  elements  in  rational  and  genetic 
psychology  in  their  educational  bearings. 

A  Plan  for  the  Investigation  and  Report  upon 
Elementary  Education.  Proceedings  of  the 
National  Educational  Association,  1898, 
335-343. 

An  outline  for  a  systematic  co-operative  study  of  pro- 
gressive phases  of  elementary  education. 

Principles  of  Mental  Development.  Trans- 
actions of  the  Illinois  Society  for  Child- 
Study,  IV  (1899),  65-83. 

A  discussion  of  early  infancy  as  exemplifying  certain 
general  principles  or  growth. 

Psychology  and  Social  Practice.  Psychologi- 
cal Review,  VII  (1900),  105-124. 

The  president's  annual  address  before  the  American 
Psychological  Association,  devoted  to  showing  the 
bearing  of  psychological  theory  upon  questions  of 
social  control. 


Some  Stages  of  Logical  Thought.    Philosophi- 
cal Review,  IX  (1900),  465-489. 

An  account,  from  the  standxx)int  of  social  psychology, 

ine 


of  the  various  attitudes  of  inquiry  which  the  race  has 
progressively  assumed,  and  the  way  in  which  thes6  have 
determined  logical  theories. 

Educational  Psychology.  A  series  of  seven 
articles.  Elementary  School  Record,  I 
(1900),  12-15,  21-23,  48-52,  82-85,  111-113, 
143-151, 199-203,  221-231. 

Discussions  of  play,  attention,  occupation  work,  mental 
development,  etc. 

The  Place  of  Manual  Training  in  Elementary 
Course  of  Study.  Manual  Training  Maga- 
zine, II  (1901),  189-199. 

The  value  of  constructive  work  in  relation  to  its  organi- 
zation into  the  school  curriculum. 

The  Situation  as  Regards  the  Course  of  Study. 
Educational  Review,  XXII  (1901),  26-49. 
Also  in  Proceedings  of  the  National  Edu- 
cational Association,  1901,  332-348. 

An  account  of  the  conflict  between  the  institutional 
organization  of  the  present  elementary-school  system 
and  the  attempt  to  reform  the  subject-matter  of  in- 
struction. 

Simdry  articles  on  the  Schools  of  Philosophy 
and  on  Metaphysical  Terms  contributed  to 
the  Dictionary  of  Philosophy  and  Psy- 
chology, edited  by  J.  Mark  Baldwin.  New 
York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1901,  1902. 

Interpretation  of  Savage  Mind.  Psychologi- 
cal Review,  IX  (1902),  217-230. 

The  possibility  and  necessity  of  the  interpretation  of 
phenomena  of  savage  life  in  terms  of  the  mental  dispo- 
sition or  pattern  generated  in  the  pursuit  of  certain 
occupations. 

The  Evolutionary  Method  as  Applied  to  Mo- 
rality: Its  Scientific  Necessity.  Philosophi- 
cal Review,  XI  (1902),  107-124. 

An  attempt  to  show  that  the  historical  method  is  the 
analogue  in  the  spiritual-social  sciences  of  the  experi- 
mental in  the  physical  sciences. 

The  Evolutionary  Method  as  Applied  to  Moral- 
ity: Its  Ethical  Significance.  /6td.,  353-371. 

A  continuation  of  the  previous  article,  with  special 
reference  to  showing  that  a  scientific  treatment  of  mo- 
rality, upon  a  genetic  basis,  does  not  affect  moral 
interests  unfavorably  or  even  leave  them  indifferent, 
but  supplies  an  additional  moral  motive  and  sanction 
through  the  joint  rationalization  and  criticism  it  af- 
fords. 

The  Logical  Conditions  of  a  Scientific  Treat- 
ment of  Conduct.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
Vol.  Ill,  Part  2. 


Department  op  Philosophy 


Beviews  of 

Baldwin,  Mental  Development.  Philosophical 
Review,  VII  (1898),  398-409. 

A  criticism  of  Baldwin's  theory  of  the  individual  and 
social  factors  in  development. 

Ibid.,  629-630. 

A  rejoinder  to  Baldwin's  reply  to  the  foregoing. 

Royce,  The  World  and  the  Individual.  Ibid., 
IX  (1900),  311-324,  and  (second  volume) 
ibid.,  XI  (1902),  392-407. 


James  Hayden  Tufts  [1892 — ],  Professor 
of  Philosophy. 

The  Sources  and  Development  of  Kant's  Tele- 
ology. 8vo,  48.  Chicago,  University  Press, 
1892. 

An  attempt  to  consider  Kant's  teleology  in  its  relations 
to  previous  thought,  especially  to  that  of  Leibniz ;  to 
trace  the  development  of  this  teleolojary  through  Kant's 
works ;  and,  more  particularly,  to  utilize  recently  pub- 
lished fragments  which  throw  light  upon  certain  stages 
of  the  development. 

A  History  of  Philosophy,  with  especial  refer- 
ence to  the  formation  and  development  of 
its  problems  and  conceptions,  by  Professor 
W.  Windelband.  Translated  by  James  H. 
Tufts.  Svo,  xvii-}-659.  Second  edition, 
revised  and  enlarged,  with  additions  by  the 
translator,  xv-|-726,  1901.  New  York  and 
London,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1893. 

The  Individual  and  His  Relation  to  Society,  as 
Reflected  in  British  Ethics.  Part  I:  The 
Individual  in  Relation  to  Law  and  Institu- 
tions. With  the  collaboration  of  Helen  B. 
Thompson.  8vo,  52.  University  of  Chicago 
Contributions  to  Philosophy,  No.  5, 1898. 

A  study  of  British  ethical  writers,  chiefly  Hobbes, 
Cumberland,  and  Locke,  with  the  purpose  of  showing 
how  the  new  conception  of  the  individual  which  was 
emerging  in  the  life  of  the  Renaissance  and  Reforma- 
tion found  expression  in  their  ethical  and  political 
theories.  It  is  shown  that  this  involved  giving  new 
meanings  on  the  part  of  Hobbes  to  such  social  terms  as 
"law,"  "right,"  etc.,  and  that  with  Locke  we  find  the 
individual^ coming  to  consciousness  of  the  fact  that  the 
great  institutions,  law,  church,  and  state,  are  really 
the  product  of  the  individual  and  subject  to  the  author- 
ity of  reason.  The  hedonistic  theory  of  motives  is 
shown  to  signify  that,  although  the  law  may  be  imposed 
by  an  external  authority,  it  must  make  its  appeal  to 
the  individual  for  acceptance  through  the  motives  of 
pleasure  and  pain. 

Kant's  Refutations  of  Idealism  in  the  "Lose 
Blatter."    Philosoph.  Rev.,  V  (1896),  51-8. 

An  examination  of  the  recently  published  fragments  of 
Kant,  in  which  the  attempt  is  made  to  show  that  Kant's 


attitude  toward  idealism  is  not  so  unambiguous  as  has 
been  assumed  by  most  commentators.  It  is  shown 
from  these  fragments  that  he  explicitly  stated  that  he 
proved  the  existence,  not  merely  of  a  phenomenal  object, 
but  also  of  a  thing-in-itself.  Certain  other  fragments 
are  found  to  contain  an  explanation  of  how  such  a 
twofold  attitude  on  the  part  of  Kant  was  impossible, 
and  thus  previous  difficulties  of  Kant's  critics  are 
explained. 

Recent  Sociological  Tendencies  in  France. 
American  Journal  of  Sociology,  I  (1896), 
446-456. 

A  summary,  with  criticism,  of  certain  of  the  categories 
which  are  coming  into  use  in  sociological  theory. 

Can  Epistemology  Be  Based  on  Mental  States? 
Philosophical  Review,  VI  (1897),  577-592. 

An  attempt  to  show  that  current  discussions  in  episte- 
mology suffer  from  the  fallacy  of  supposing  that  mental 
states,  as  such,  exist.  It  is  maintained  that  certain 
difficulties  as  to  the  evidence  for  the  existence  of  an 
external  world  arise  from  failure  to  analyze  what  is 
meant  by  external  and  what  is  meant  by  the  self ;  an 
analysis  of  the  conception  of  the  self  is  undertaken. 

Sundry  articles  on  Esthetics  and  the  History 
of  Philosophy,  contributed  to  the  Diction- 
ary of  Philosophy  and  Psychology,  edited 
by  J.  Mark  Baldwin.  New  York,  The 
Macmillan  Co.,  1901,  1902. 

On  the  Genesis  of  the  -Esthetic  Categories. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  Vol.  Ill,  Part  2, 1-14. 

An  examination  of  the  commonly  reco^ized  aesthetic 
categories  from  the  point  of  view  of  social  psychology. 
The  paper  aims  to  show  that  such  categories  as  "objec- 
tivity,''^ "universality,"  "disinterestedness,"  etc., 
receive  their  most  satisfactory  explanation  from  the 
standpoint  of  social,  rather  than  from  that  of  indi- 
vidual, psychology. 

Reviews  of 

A.  Riehl,  Science  and  Metaphysics.  Trans- 
lated by  A.  Fairbanks.  Philosophical  Re- 
view, IV  (1895),  432^35. 

Reicke,  Lose  Blatter  aus  Kant's  Nachlass, 
Heft  II.  Adickes's  Kant-Studien.  Ibid.y 
V  (1896),  64r-69. 

Giddings,  Principles  of  Sociology  and  Theory 
of  Socialization.  Psychological  Review,  IV 
(1897),  660-664. 

Analysis  in  particular  of  the  author's  principles  of 
"consciousness  of  kind"  and  "sympathy,"  with  the 
purp>ose  of  showing  that,  while  these  principles  mark 
certain  important  conditions  for  socialization,  they  are 
yet  not  adequate  principles.  It  is  questioned  whether 
the  lower  animals,  or  even  primitive  man,  ever  had 
consciousness  of  kind ;  their  relations  are  probably  in 
many  cases  reflexes  and  in  others  are  the  result  of 
familiarity  as  contrasted  with  strangeness.  The  term 
"sympathy"  as  used  by  the  author  seems  to  mean 
merely  "  imitation  of  emotions,"  and  this  falls  short  of 
what  is  needed  for  genuine  unity  of  purpose. 


Publications 


Baldwin,  Social  and  Ethical  Interpretations. 
Ibid.,  V  (1898),  314-321. 

A  criticism  of  Baldwin's  conception  of  the  socius  and 
general  self.  The  author  has  not  distinguished  with 
suflBcient  clearness  between  the  two  possible  meanings 
of  the  social  and  general  self  as  signifying  either  (1) 
a  self  or  content  in  which  the  ego  and  the  alter  are  not 
as  yet  set  off  against  each  other  as  representing  con- 
flicting interests ;  or  (t)  a  self  in  which  the  interests  of 
others  have  been  really  recognized  as  such  and  taken 
up  and  adopted  as  the  end  of  desire.  The  ethical  pro- 
cess is  essentially  a  process  of  transition  from  the 
former  of  these  selves  to  the  latter.  The  further  sug- 
gestion is  presented  that  in  efifecting  this  transition 
from  the  customary  or  unreflective  self  to  the  more 
reflective  and  conscious  attitude,  suflicient  emphasis 
is  not  placed  by  the  author  upon  other  forces  than 
those  of  imitation. 

Willmann,  Geschichte  des  Idealismus.  Phi- 
losophical Review,  VII  (1898),  523-526. 

A  criticism  of  Willmann's  position  that  the  philosophy 
of  the  eighteenth  century  culminating  in  Kant  was  an 
absolute  individualism.  The  "  self  "  in  Kant's  doctrine 
of  autonomy  is  not  a  purely  individual  conception. 

Patten,  Development  of  English  Thought. 
Ibid.,  VIII  (1899),  518-524. 

An  examination  of  the  author's  treatment  of  the  philo- 
sophical writers,  and  an  attempt  to  show,  as  against 
Patten's  position,  that  Book  I  of  Hume's  treatise  was 
not  merely  secondary  to  the  following  portions. 

Ormond,  Foundations  of  Knowledge.  Ibid., 
X  (1901),  56-62. 

The  author's  criterion  of  knowledge  contains  two  fac- 
tors which  are  not  fully  adjusted  —  the  emotional  and 
the  cognitive.  The  term  "intuition"  as  used  by  the 
author  sometimes  rests  upon  one  of  these  supports  and 
sometimes  upon  the  other.  Further,  as  against  the 
author's  claim  that  the  demand  for  unity  in  knowledge 
is  ultimately  an  aesthetic  or  emotional  demand,  and 
consequently  that  the  ultimate  logical  criterion  is  emo- 
tional, it  is  maintained  that  the  practical  demand  for 
the  organization  of  knowledge  is  tne  more  fundamental, 
and  has  been  historically  the  more  efficient  in  shaping 
the  constitution  of  mind,  and  thereby  in  establishing 
the  criteria  of  logic  and  science. 

Graham,  English  Political  Philosophy,  from 
Hobbes  to  Maine.  American  Historical 
Review,  VI  (1901),  360-362. 

Kand,  Life,  Unpublished  Letters  and  Philo- 
sophical Regimen  of  Anthony,  Earl  of 
Shaftesbury.    Ibid.,  VI  (1901),  610  f. 


James  Kowland  Angell  [1894 — ],  As- 
sociate Professor  of  Experimental  Psy- 
chology. 

Reaction  Time:  A  Study  in  Attention  and 
Habit.  With  the  collaboration  of  A.  W. 
Moore,  assisted  by  J.  J.  Jegi.  Psychological 
Review,  III  (1896),  245-258.    Reprinted  in 


Vol.  I  of  University  of  Chicago  Contribu- 
tions to  Philosophy. 

An  account  of  experimentation,  furnishing  a  reconcili- 
ation of  the  antagonistic  theories  of  reaction,  i.  e.,  the 
Leipzig  theory  and  the  "type"  theory.  The  experi- 
ments show  that  the  rapidity  and  regularity  of  any 
special  mode  of  reaction  are  a  function  of  (1)  organic 
structure,  especially  as  regards  the  kind  of  imagery 
employed  and  the  kind  of  co-ordination  most  readily 
executed ;  and  (2}  practice.  When  experiments  are  con- 
ducted for  considerable  periods  of  time,  it  becomes 
possible  to  develop  essentially  any  mode  of  reaction, 
and  in  almost  all  cases  the  extreme  differences  among 
the  several  possible  methods  of  reacting  give  way  to  a 
high  degree  of  uniformity. 

The  Organic  Effects  of  Agreeable  and  Dis- 
agreeable Stimuli.  With  the  collaboration 
of  S.  F.  MacLennan.  Psychological  Review, 
III  (1896),  371-377.  Reprinted  in  Vol.  I  of 
University  of  Chicago  Contributions  to 
Philosophy. 

A  report  of  pneumographic  and  plethysmographic  ex- 
periments upon  the  peculiarities  of  respiration,  pulse, 
and  vaso-motor  activities  under  pleasure-pain  stimu- 
lations, showing  that  many  other  psychical  conditions 
besides  those  recognizable  as  pleasure  and  pain  are 
reflected  by  the  circulatory  and  respiratory  changes. 

Thought  and  Imagery.  Philosophical  Review, 
VI  (1897),  646-651. 

A  criticism  of  the  view  that  certain  ratiocinative 
thought  processes  are  destitute  of  imagery.  In  defense 
of  the  contrary  doctrine,  evidence,  both  logical  and 
psychological,  is  brought  forward  from  the  study  of 
language  as  a  medium  of  thought  processes. 

Habit  and  Attention.  Psychological  Review, 
V  (1898),  179-183. 

The  function  of  attention  as  an  adjuster  of  imperfect 
adaptations  _  of  the  organism  to  environmental  de- 
mands is  pointed  out,  and  the  manner  in  which  it  re- 
sults in  developing  effective  co-ordinations  in  response 
to  these  demands  is  exhibited. 

An  Investigation  of  Certain  Factors  Affecting 
the  Relations  of  Dermal  and  Optical  Space. 
In  collaboration  with  J.  N.  Spray  and  E. 
W.  Mahood.  Ibid.,  579-595.  Reprinted  in 
Vol.  I  of  University  of  Chicago  Contribu- 
tions to  Philosophy. 

A  report  of  experimentation,  showing  that  the  under- 
estimation of  dermal  linear  extents,  when  compared 
with  visual,  holds  only  for  thermally  indifferent  stimuli. 
When  the  stimulus  is  rendered  distinctly  hot  or  cold, 
the  underestimation  gives  way  to  overestimation. 

A  Study  of  the  Relations  between  Certain  Or- 
ganic Processes  and  Consciousness.  With 
the  collaboration  of  H.  B.  Thompson.  Psy- 
chological Review,  VI  (1899),  32-69.  Re- 
printed in  Vol.  II  of  University  of  Chi- 
cago Contributions  to  Philosophy. 

The  paper  reports  extensive  experiments  upon  the  be- 
havior of  the  heart,  the  vaso-motor  processes,  and  the 
respiration  under  psychical  conditions  of  the  most  vari- 
ous kinds.  Numerous  graphic  records  are  presented  to 
show  that  an  intimate  parallelism  exists  between  the 
regularity  or  irregularity  with  which  attention  oper- 
ates and  the  steadiness  or  instability  of  these  circula- 
tory-respiratory processes. 


Department  of  Philosophy 


Hypnotism  and  the  Will.  In  a  collection  of 
essays  entitled  "Hypnotism  and  Hypnotic 
Suggestion."  Kochester,  New  York  State 
Publishing  Co.,  1900,  pp.  246-255. 

Aff  analysis  of  the  elementary  facts  of  volition,  showing 
how  hypnotic  suggestion  becomes  effective  in  produ- 
cing movements,  and  also  exhibiting  its  limitations 
and  dangers. 

The  Monaural  Localization  of  Soimd.  With 
the  collaboration  of  W.  Fite.  Psychologi- 
cal Review,  VIII  (1901),  225-246. 

A  report  of  experiments  upon  a  man  suffering  from 
internal  ear  deafness  in  one  ear,  showing  that  he  could 
localize  complex  sounds  with  remarkable  accuracy  by 
reason  of  the  qualitative  changes  such  sounds  undergo, 
through  the  modifications  of  their  partial  tones,  caused 
by  the  interposition  of  the  bones  of  the  head,  the  pinnae, 
etc.  Pure  tones  he  could  not  localize  at  all,  because 
they  change  only  in  intensity,  and  such  change  may 
mean  alteration  of  either  direction  or  distance. 

The  Monaural  Localization  of  Sound.    Science, 

New  Series,  XIV  (1901),  775-777. 

A  briefer  and  less  technical  account  of  the  case  re- 
ported in  the  previous  paper. 

Further  Observations  on  the  Monaural  Locali- 
zation of  Sound.  With  the  collaboration  of 
W.  Fite.  Psychological  Review,  VIII  (1901), 
449^58. 

Four  other  cases  of  complete  deafness  in  one  ear  are 
reported  in  this  paper.  The  cases  ranged  from  thirty 
years  to  one  year  in  duration.  The  results  of  the  first 
paper  were  fully  confirmed,  and  the  effects  of  adapta- 
tion and  practice  were  clearly  shown  in  the  much 
greater  accuracy  in  localization  exhibited  by  the  per- 
sons who  had  been  longest  deaf. 

New  Apparatus.  With  the  collaboration  of 
W.  Fite.    /6i<i.,  459-467. 

A  description,  with  photographic  illustrations,  of  six 
pieces  of  apparatus  designed  and  used  with  success  in 
the  University  of  Chicago  laboratory. 

Simdry  articles  on  Psychology  and  iEsthetics 
in  the  Dictionary  of  Philosophy  and  Psy- 
chology, edited  by  J.  Mark  Baldwin.  New 
York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1901, 1902. 

A  Preliminary  Study  of  the  Significance  of 
Partial  Tones  in  the  Localization  of  Sound. 
Article  in  University  of  Chicago  Decennial 
Publications,  First  Series,  Vol.  Ill,  Part  2. 

The  Relations  of  Structural  and  Functional 
Psychology  to  Philosophy.    Ibid. 

Reviews  of 

Bourdon,  Influence  de  I'^ge  sur  la  m6moire 
immediate.  Psychological  Review,  I  (1894), 
641-642. 

A  critical  exposition  of  the  author's  study  of  the  mem- 
ory of  school  children. 


Scripture,  Thinking,  Feeling,  Doing.  Ibid., 
II  (1895),  606-609. 

A  critical  discussion  of  the  method  adopted  by  the 
author  for  jwpularizing  experimental  psychology. 

Titchener,  Translation  of  Kiilpe's  Outlines  of 
Psychology.  Philosophical  Review,  V 
(1896),  417-421. 

An  analysis  of  the  work,  with  a  critical  discussion  of  the 
relations  between  volition  as  a  psychological  category 
and  the  facts  of  psychical  activity.  The  relative  merits 
of  synthetic  and  analytic  method  in  psychology  are 
exhibited,  the  latter  alone  being  that  employed  by  the 
author. 

Hering,  Memory  and  the  Specific  Energies  of 
the  Nervous  System  (translation).  Psycho- 
logical Review,  III  (1896),  10&-109. 

A  criticism  of  the  failure  of  the  author  to  distinguish 
between  mere  reproduction  of  psychical  processes  and 
true  memory  involving  recognition. 

Baldwin,  Translation  of  Binet's  Alterations  of 
Personality.  American  Journal  of  Sociol- 
ogy, II  (1897),  614-617. 

A  critical  exposition  of  the  author's  studies  of  success- 
ive and  simultaneous  alternating  personalities.  His 
theory  of  the  former  as  explicable  along  the  lines  of 
the  psychical  synthesis  of  normal  personality  is  ac- 
cepted. His  view  of  the  latter  is  provisionally  dis- 
carded in  favor  of  an  explanation  in  purely  physiologi- 
cal and  cortical  terms. 

Stout,  Analytic  Psychology.  Philosophical 
Review,  VI  (1897),  532-539. 

A  detailed  notice  of  the  author's  notable  contribution 
to  psychology.  Critical  consideration  is  especially 
devoted  to  the  theories  of  analytic  and  genetic  method, 
the  doctrine  of  thought  and  imagerv,  the  conception  oi 
mental  activity,  and  the  principle  of  psychological 
classification. 

Ribot,  Psychology  of  the  Emotions.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Theology,  II  (1898),  641- 
644. 

A  brief  critical  exposition  of  the  author's  effort  to  sys- 
tematize the  facts  of  feeling  from  the  evolutionary 
point  of  view,  especial  emphasis  being  laid  upon  the 
distinction  between  philosophical  materialism  and  the 
apparently  materialistic  tendencies  of  such  psychologi- 
cal doctrines  as  that  of  Ribot,  for  whom  feeling  is 
simply  an  expression  of  the  vegetative  portions  of  the 
organism. 

Patten,  Development  of  English  Thought. 
[An  examination  of  Professor  Patten's  Psy- 
chology.] American  Journal  of  Sociology, 
IV  (1898),  823-830. 

The  distinction  between  sensory  and  motor  ideas  is 
employed  to  exhibit  the  fallacies  of  the  author's  psy- 
chological principles  and  the  fatal  consequences  aris- 
ing from  his  application  of  these  to  the  analysis  of 
social  conditions. 

Binet,  Reaction  Time  of  the  Heart,  of  the 
Vaso-Motor  Nerves,  and  of  the  Blood;  Va- 
schide.  The  Influence  of  Prolonged  Intel- 
lectual Work  upon  the  Rate  of  the  Pulse; 


Publications 


Bourdon,  Application  of  the  Graphic  Method 
to  the  Study  of  the  Intensity  of  the  Voice. 
Psychological  Review,  VI  (1899),  195-196. 

(1)  Some  reflections  and  a  hypothesis  upon  the  form  of 

the  capillary  pulse. 

(3)  Reports  of  the  technical  procedure  and  the  results 

obtained. 

Studies  from  the  Yale  Psychological  Labora- 
tory, V.    16i*d.,  196-199. 

A  critical  discussion  of  general  papers,  largely  devoted 
to  a  consideration  of  exx>eriments  ux>on  the  localization 
of  sound. 

Ladd,  Outline  of  Descriptive  Psychology. 
Philosophical  Review,  VIII  (1899),  204r-205. 

A  comparison  of  the  present  work  with  the  author's 
previous  texts  and  a  discussion  of  the  prevalent  tend- 
ency to  introduce  dynamic  categories  more  extensively 
into  psychology. 

Steffens,  Experimentelle  Beitrflge  zur  Lehre 
vom  Okonomischen  Lernen.  Psychological 
Review,  VII  (1900),  522-524. 

A  critical  report  of  the  author's  experiments  upon  the 
memorizing  of  verse  and  similar  subject-matter. 

Weir,  Dawn  of  Reason.  American  Journal 
of  Theology,  IV  (1900),  564-565. 

A  criticism  of  the  author's  work  as  anachronistic  and 
out  of  touch  with  contemporary  points  of  view. 

Jastrow,  Fact  and  Fable  in  Psychology.  Dial, 
XXX  (1901),  264-265. 

Chiefly  a  discussion  of  the  merits  of  the  controversy 
between  exact  science  and  the  various  modern  forms  of 
occultism. 

Titchener,  Experimental  Psychology,  (1)  In- 
structor's Manual,  (2)  Student's  Manual. 
American  Journal  of  Psychology,  XII 
(1901),  596-600. 

A  consideration  of  the  desiderata  at  the  present  time 
in  laboratory  instruction  and  an  expository  examina- 
tion of  the  author's  efiEort  to  meet  these  needs. 

Pierce,  Studies  in  Space  Perception.  Psycho- 
logical Review,  IX  (1902),  397^1:01. 

Critical  exposition  of  the  author's  theories  of  audi- 
tory and  visual  space. 


Addison  W.  Mooee  [1895 — ],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Philosophy. 

Reaction  Time.  In  collaboration  with  Profes- 
sor James  Rowland  Angell.    (See  above.) 

The  Representational  versus  the  Functional 
Conception  of  Knowledge  in  Locke's  Essay 
on  the  Human  Understanding.  Doctor's 
thesis.     8vo,  75.     University  of  Chicago 


Contributions  to  Philosophy,  Vol.  Ill,  No. 
1, 1902. 

An  attempt  to  show  that  the  main  "  difiBculties  "  and 
inconsistencies  in  Locke's  Essay  can  all  be  traced  to  a 
confusion  of  two  very  different  views  of  the  nature  and 
function  of  knowledge:  the  one  regarding  knowledge 
as  a  process  of  imagery  copying  or  representing  in  alge- 
braic fashion  a  fixed,  determined  world  of  reality  ex- 
ternal to  the  process  of  knowing;  the  other  viewing 
knowledge  as  a  process  of  imagery  arising  in  response 
to,  and  having  its  sole  validity  in  relation  to,  problems 
of  action ;  truth  being  the  value  —  the  efficiency  of  this 
imagery  in  meeting  the  problem;  reality  being  the 
whole  concrete  process  of  experience  in  which  knowl- 
edge arises  and  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 

Existence,  Meaning,  and  Reality  in  Locke's  and 
in  Present  Epistemology.  Article  in  The 
University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, First  Series,  Vol.  Ill,  Part  2. 


Edwabd  Scribnee  Ames   [1896 — ],  In- 
structor in  Philosophy. 

Modern  Agnosticism.    An  Historical  and  Crit- 
ical Study.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpubhshed. 

Agnosticism  denies  the  power  of  human  knowledge  to 
solve  certain  questions  concerning  the  ultimate  nature 
of  material  substance,  the  soul,  and  God.  This  atti- 
tude has  been  maintained  in  various  characteristic 
ways  by  English  empiricism,  Kantian  criticism,  and 
the  modern  scientific  spirit.  Recent  psychology  and 
logic  tend  to  show  that  the  difficulty  lies  in  the  nature 
of  the  questions  rather  than  in  the  disability  of  reason. 


Warner  Fite  [1897 — ] ,  Instructor  in  Ex- 
perimental Psychology. 

Professor  Patten's  Psychological  Doctrines. 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  VII  (1899), 
384^391. 

A  criticista  of  the  theory  of  environmental  influences 
contained  in  Patten's  Development  of  English  Thought. 

The  Associational  Conception  of  Experience. 
Philosophical  Review,  IX  (1900),  268-292. 

An  argument  to  show  that  the  "order  of  experience" 
assumed  by  associational  psychology  is  not  the  ob- 
served order  of  sensations,  but  the  inferred  order  of 
sense-stimuli. 

Contiguity  and  Similarity.    Ibid.,  613-629. 

An  argument  to  show  that  the  law  of  contiguity  is  iden- 
tical with  the  law  of  association,  and  that  association 
by  similarity  is  incompatible  with  the  fundamental 
assumptions  of  associational  psychology. 

Art,  Industry  and  Science:  A  Suggestion  to- 
ward a  Psychological  Definition  of  Art. 
Psychological  Revieiv,  VIII  (1901),  128-144. 

Monaural  Localization.  In  collaboration  with 
James  Rowland  Angell.    (See  above.) 


Depabtment  op  Philosophy 


9 


Further  Observations  on  Monaural  Localiza- 
tion. In  collaboration  with  James  Rowland 
Angell.    (See  above.) 

New  Apparatus.  In  collaboration  with  James 
Rowland  Angell.    (See  above.) 

Reviews  of 

Kulpe,  Introduction  to  Philosophy.  Trans- 
lated by  Pillsbury  and  Titchener.  Psycho- 
logical Review,  V  (1898),  209-211.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Theology,  II  (1898),  391. 

Halleux,  L'6volutionnisme  en  morale.  Psy- 
chological Review,  IX  (1902),  204-205. 

ChaelesA.  Steong  [1892-95],  Associate 
Professor  of  Psychology;  Lecturer  on 
Psychology,  Columbia  University. 

A  Sketch  of  the  History  of  Psychology  among 
the  Greeks.  American  Journal  of  Psy- 
chology, IV  (1891),  177-197. 

Mr.  James  Ward  on  Modern  Psychology.  Psy- 
chological Review,  I  (1894),  73-81. 

The  Psychology  of  Pain.  Ibid.,  II  (1895), 
329-347. 

Physical  Pain  and  Pain  Nerves.  Ibid.,  Ill 
(1896),  64-68. 

Consciousness  and  Time.    Ibid.,  149-157. 

Sidney  E.  Mezes  [1893-94],  Instructor 
in  Philosophy;  Professor  of  Philos- 
ophy, University  of  Texas. 

Pleasiure  and  Pain  Defined.  Philosophical 
Review  II  (1895),  22-46. 

Amy  Eliza  Tanner  [1899-1902],  Asso- 
ciate in  Philosophy. 

Association  of  Ideas.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo, 
62.  University  of  Chicago  Contributions 
to  Philosophy,  Vol.  II,  No.  3,  1900. 

A  criticism  of  the  laws  of  association  as  usually  stated, 
and  a  discussion  of  the  movement  of  images  in  atten- 
tion. 


Simultaneous  Sense  Stimulations.  In  collabo- 
ration with  Kate  Anderson.  Psychological 
Review,  III  (1896),  378-383.  Reprinted  in 
University  of  Chicago  Contributions  to 
Philosophy,  I,  No.  1. 

A  study  of  the  effect  of  a  second  sensation  upon  a  first, 
barely  perceptible,  one. 


Simon  F.  MacLennan  [1896-97],  Assist- 
ant in  Experimental  Psychology;  Pro- 
fessor of  Philosophy,  Oberlin  College. 

Emotion,  Desire  and  Interest:  Descriptive. 
Psychological  Review,  II  (1895),  462-474. 

The  Organic  Effects  of  Agreeable  and  Dis- 
agreeable Stimuli.  In  collaboration  with 
James  Rowland  Angell.    (See  above.) 

The  Impersonal  Judgment :  Its  Nature,  Origin, 
and  Significance.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  49. 
University  of  Chicago  Contributions  to 
Philosophy,  I,  No.  3, 1897. 

Method  in  Child-Study,  with  Special  Reference 
to  the  Psychological  Aspect.  Transactions 
af  the  Illinois  Society  for  Child-Study,  III, 
No.  1  (1897),  29-45. 

William  Aethur  Heidel  [1895-96], 
Decent  in  Philosophy;  Professor  of 
Latin,  Iowa  College. 

The  Necessary  and  the  Contingent  in  the  Aris- 
totelian System.  8vo,  46.  University  of 
Chicago  Contributions  to  Philosophy,  I, 
No.  2, 1896. 

Albeet  F.  Buck  [1897-98],  Assistant 
in  Experimental  Psychology;  In- 
structor in  Erasmus  Hall  High  School, 
Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

Observations  on  the  Overestimation  of  Vertical 
as  Compared  with  Horizontal  Lines.  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Contributions  to  Philos- 
ophy, II,  No.  2,  7-11, 1899. 

A  report  of  experiments  tending  to  show  that_  the  com- 
mon phenomenon  of  overestimation  of  vertical  lines 
does  not  depend  exclusively  upon  the  action  of  the  eye 
muscles. 


10 


Publications 


Edward  Sceibnee  Ames,  Ph.D.,  1895. 
(See  above.) 

Myron  L.  Ashley,  Ph.D.  1901. 

Concerning  the  Significance  of  Intensity  of 
Light  in  Visual  Estimates  of  Depth.  Psy- 
chological Review,  V  (1898),  595-615. 

An  experimental  investigation  in  which  it  is  shown 
that,  besides  the  well-known  factors  of  convergence, 
accommodation,  etc.,  the  brightness  of  an  object  plays 
an  important  part  in  our  estimates  of  its  distance  from 
us. 

Origin,  Structure,  and  Function  of  the  Hy- 
pothesis.   Doctor's  thesis.     Unpublished, 

A  short  historical  sketch  introduces  an  attempt  to  show 
that  the  hypothesis  is  an  essential  factor,  not  only  in 
scientific  investigation,  but  also  in  the  knowing  pro- 
cess itself.  Certain  relations  of  the  hypothesis  to  epis- 
temology  and  metaphysics  are  exhibited. 


Henry  Heath  Bawden,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Professor  of  Philosophy,  Vassar  Col- 
lege. 

The  Theory  of  the  Criterion.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

A  critical  examination  of  historical  theories  of  the  cri- 
terion, with  a  defense  of  the  doctrine  that  a  true  cri- 
terion finds  its  test  in  its  power  satisfactorily  to  solve 
the  problems  of  life.  This  theory  of  the  criterion  har- 
monizes opposing  theories  as  to  the  ultimate  seat  of 
authority  m  thought  and  action. 

A  Study  of  Lapses.  8vo,  iv  -f  122.  Psycho- 
logical Review  Supplement,  No.  14, 1900. 


WiLLARD  Clark  Gore,  Ph.D.  1901 ;  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Psychology  in  the 
School  of  Education. 

The  Imagination  in  Spinoza  and  Hume:  A 
Comparative  Study  in  the  Light  of  Some 
Kecent  Contributions  to  Psychology.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  8vo,  77.  University  of  Chicago 
Contributions  to  Philosophy,  II,  No.  4. 

A  discussion  of  antagonistic  theories  regarding  the 
imagination  found  in  the  writings  of  Spinoza  and 
Hume  respectively,  which  aims  to  make  explicit  both 
the  philosophical  and  the  psychological  bearings  of  the 
points  at  issue,  and  to  develop  a  functional  interpreta- 
tion of  sense  experience. 

Simon  F.  MacLennan,  Ph.D.  1897.  (See 
above.) 


Daniel  Peter  MacMillan,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Psychologist    in    the    Department    of 

.  Child  Study  and  Pedagogic  Investiga- 
tion, Chicago  Public  Schools. 

The  Negative  Judgment.  Doctor's  thesis.  Un- 
published. 

An  extended  examination  of  the  principal  writers  upon 
logic  is  employed  to  show  that  in  logical  theory  the 
negative  judgment  has  undergone  development  from 
a  position  of  co-ordination  in  a  limited  and  false  sense 
to  co-ordination  in  a  fuller  and  more  adequate  import 
through  an  intermediary  stage  of  complete  subordina- 
tion. 

A  Study  in  Habit.  University  of  Chicago 
Contributions  to  Philosophy,  II,  No.  2 
(1899),  11-19. 

This  is  a  report  of  an  experimental  investigation  of  the 
building  up  and  the  breaking  down  of  a  typical  habit. 
An  eye-hand  co-ordination  in  attempting  to  attain  a 
prescribed  end  is  the  process  investigated.  The  growth 
and  decay  of  this  process  are  reduced  to  a  mathematical 
statement;  and  an  attempt  is  made  to  describe  and 
account  for  the  psychological  elements  involved,  e.  g., 
the  consciousness  of  the  end  in  view  and  the  means 
available  for  attaining  it,  the  play  of  emotion  in  the 
process,  etc. 

William  Franklin  Moncreiff,  Ph.D. 
1900;  Professor  of  Mathematics,  Win- 
throp  Normal  and  Industrial  College, 
Eock  Hill,  S.  C. 

An  Examination  of  Mill's  Inductive  Canons. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

An'  exposition  of  Mill's  philosophical  and  logical  doc- 
trines is  followed  by  an  attempt  to  show  how  the  logical 
canons  must  be  interpreted  and  amended  to  make  them 
applicable  to  the  scientific  methods  of  today.  A  con- 
structive theory  is  formulated  of  the  relation  of  mod- 
ern inductive  logic  to  present  scientific  procedure. 

Addison  W.  Moore,  Ph.D.  1898.  (See 
above.) 

Ernest  Caeboll  Moore,  Ph.D.  1898; 
Instructor  in  Education,  University  of 
California. 

A  New  Definition  of  Education.  Report  of 
San  Joaquin  Valley  Teachers'  Association 
(1898),  42-47. 

Different  definitions  of  education  are  due  to  conflicting 
theories  of  knowledge.  Education  is  defined  as  filling 
in  by  the  empiricists.  It  is  defined  as  drawing  out  by 
the  rationalists.  In  keeping  with  prevailing  philo- 
sophical criticism,  education  must  be  re-defined  as  the 
process  of  converting  a  given  human  energy  to  social 
uses. 


Department  of  Philosophy 


11 


The  Kelation  of  Philosophy  to  Education  in 
Greece.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  beginnings  of  higher  education  in  Greece  were 
synonymous  with  the  beginnings  of  philosophy.  The 
popularizing  of  philosophy  in  the  Sophist  movement 
and  its  effect  upon  education.  Socrates  and  how  he 
came  to  demand  a  more  thorough  education  for  men. 
Plato  and  Aristotle.  The  founding  of  the  philosophical 
schools  and  their  place  in  Greek  education.  The  uni- 
versity of  Alexandria  and  the  spread  of  Greek  philo- 
sophical education  to  the  cities  of  Asia. 


Abthub  Kenyon  Kogees,  Ph.D.  1898; 
Professor  of  Philosophy  and  Pedagogy, 
Butler  College,  Irvington,  Ind. 

The  Parallelism  of  Mind  and  Body  from  the 
Standpoint  of  Metaphysics.  Doctor's  thesis. 
8vo,  64.  The  University  of  Chicago  Con- 
tributions to  Philosophy,  II,  No.  1,  1899. 

A  historical  and  critical  account  of  the  more  impor- 
tant attempts  to  account  for  the  relation  of  mind  and 
body,  and  an  analysis  of  the  different  forms  which  a 
theory  of  parallelism  may  take.  This  is  followed  by  a 
constructive  theory,  based  on  a  critical  examination  of 
the  idea  of  causality. 

Henry  Waldgrave  Stuart,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Instructor  in  Philosophy,  University  of 
Iowa. 

The  Hedonistic  Interpretation  of  Subjective 

Value.    Journal  of  Political  Economy,  IV 

(1894),  64^84. 
Subjective  and  Exchange    Value,  I.     Ibid., 

(1895),  208-239.    II.    Ibid.,  352-385. 
Valuation  and  Standards  of  Value  in  Ethical 

and  Economic  Conduct.     Doctor's  thesis. 

Unpublished. 

Helen  Bradford  Thompson,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Instructor  in  Philosophy,  Mt.  Holyoke 
College. 

A  Study  of  the  Relations  between  Certain  Or- 
ganic Processes  and  Consciousness.  In  col- 
laboration with  J.  R.  Angell.    (See  above.) 

Psychological  Norms  in  Men  and  Women. 
Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  vii  + 188.  Pamphlet. 
Chicago,  1903.  Also  in  The  University  of 
Chicago  Contributions  to  Philosophy,  Vol. 
IV,  No.  1. 


Amy  Eliza  Tanner,  Ph.D.  1898.  (See 
above.) 

Kate  Anderson,  Graduate  student. 

Simultaneous  Sense  Stimulations.  In  collabo- 
ration with  Amy  Eliza  Tanner.    (See  above.) 

Kate  Gordon,  Graduate  student. 

McDougall's  Observations  on  Light  and  Color 
Vision.  Psychological  Review,  IX  (1902), 
483^89. 

Spencer's  Theory  of  Ethics  in  Its  Evolutionary 
Aspects.  Philosophical  Review,  XI  (1902), 
592-606. 

E.  W.  Mahood,  Graduate  student. 

An  Investigation  of  Certain  Factors  Affecting 
the  Relations  of  Dermal  and  Optical  Space. 
In  collaboration  with  J.  R.  Angell  and  J.  N. 
Spray.    (See  above.) 

Haywood  J.  Pearce,  Graduate  student. 

Normal  Motor  Suggestibility.  Psychological 
Review,  IX  (1902),  329-356. 

An  experimental  investigation  in  the  ranges  of  touch, 
sight,  and  hearing,  showing  the  intrinsic  motor  element 
in  every  stimulus. 

Jessie  N.  Spray,  Graduate  student. 

An  Investigation  of  Certain  Factors  Affecting 
the  Relations  of  Dermal  and  Optical  Space. 
In  collaboration  with  J.  R.  Angell  and  E.  W. 
Mahood.    (See  above.) 

Louis  Grant  Whitehead,  Graduate  stu- 
dent. 

A  Study  of  Visual  and  Aural  Memory  Pro- 
cesses. Psychological  Review,  III  (1896), 
258-269.  Reprinted  in  The  University  of 
Chicago  Contributions  to  Philosophy,  I, 
No.  1. 

An  experimental  investigation  showing  greater  rapidity 
in  memorizing  from  visual  stimuli  as  compared  witn 
auditory,  and  an  unquestioned  co-ordination  between 
the  visual  and  auditory  processes  of  retention.  This 
co-ordination  probably  comes  about  throa^rh  motor 
elements. 


12 


Publications 


IJ5.    EDUCATION. 


John  Dewey,  Professor  and  Head  of  the 
Department  of  Education;  Director  of 
the  School  of  Education. 
(For  publications  see  above,  p.  3.) 


Some  Types  of  Modern  Educational  Theory: 
An  Analysis  of  Five  Educational  Theories. 
12mo,  70.    Ibid.,  No.  6, 1902. 

The  aim  of  this  analysis  is  to  find  the  basic  elements 
common  in  these  theories,  to  note  the  variations  in  the 
different  constructs,  and  to  show  wherein  each  theory 
is  a  type  of  educational  philosophy. 


Nathaniel  Butler  [1893-95;  1901—], 
Professor  of  Education. 

On  the  Educational  Possibilities  of  University 
Extension  Work  and  Methods  in  Relation 
to  Regular  University  Studies  and  Univer- 
sity Degrees.  Report  of  Proceedings  of 
the  University  Extension  Congress,  Lon- 
don, June,  1894, 83-86.  The  same  reprinted 
in  the  University  Extension  World,  Janu- 
ary, 1895,  63-80. 

Inter-Collegiate  University  Extension.  Uni- 
versity Extension  World,  II  (1893),  211- 
215. 

University  Extension.  Johnson^s  Universal 
Cyclopedia. 

A  detailed  history  of  the  movement,  with  a  statement 
of  its  ideals  as  held  in  England  and  America. 

Aims  and  Methods  in  the  Study  of  Literature. 
Education,  XVI  (1896),  529-589. 

Ella  Flagg  Young  [1900 — ],  Professor 
of  Education. 

Isolation  in  the  School:  A  Discussion  of  School 
Organization.  Doctor's  thesis.  12mo,  111. 
University  of  Chicago  Contributions  to 
Education,  No.  1,  1901. 

A  critical  exposition  of  the  theory  that  the  school 
should  be  so  highly  organized  that  a  department,  or  a 
group,  would  necessarily  be  directly  concerned  in  the 
initiation  aad  the  perfection  of  all  lines  of  action  in 
which  it  would  be  operative.  A  practical  application 
of  this  doctrine  is  made  to  the  teaching  and  supervis- 
ing corps  in  schools  below  the  college. 


A  Study  of  Some  Every- 
Education.     12mo,  44. 


Ethics  in  the  School 
Day  Problems  ii 
Ibid.,  No.  4, 1902. 

Various  trying  situations  which  develop  in  the  school- 
room are  projected  and  analyzed.  Emulation,  punish- 
ments, training  of  the  will,  and  sympathy  are  chief 
among  the  topics  discussed  in  the  analyses. 


Chaeles  H.  Thurber  [1899-1900],  As- 
sociate Professor  of  Pedagogy. 
(Bibliography  not  furnished.) 

Julia  E.  Bulkley  [1892-1900],  Asso- 
ciate Professor  of  Pedagogy. 

Der  Einfluss  Pestalozzis  auf  Herbart. 
Zurich,  1896. 

Fred  Warren  Smedley  [1895-1900], 
Lecturer  in  Pedagogy. 

A  Report  on  the  Measurements  of  the  Sensory 
and  Motor  Abilities  of  the  Pupils  of  the 
Chicago  University  Primary  School  and  the 
Pedagogical  Value  of  Such  Measvirements. 
Transactions  of  the  Illinois  Society  for 
Child  Study,  II,  No.  2  (1896),  85-90. 

A  report  of  the  child-study  investigation  carried  on  at 
the  laboratory  for  experimental  psychology  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago. 

How  to  Test  the, Senses.  Annual  Report  of 
Charles  R.  Skinner,  State  Superintendent 
of  Public  Instruction,  New  York,  1897, 
83-88. 

A  statement  of  the  import  of  sensory  tests  and  the 
methods  of  making  them. 

Report  of  the  Department  of  Child-Study  and 
Pedagogic  Investigation.  Forty-sixth  An- 
nual Report  of  the  Board  of  Education  of 
the  City  of  Chicago  (1900),  35-116. 

A  study  of  the  growth  and  development  of  Chicago 
school  children. 

William  Arthur  Clark,  Ph.D.  1900; 
President  of  the  Nebraska  State  Normal 
School,  Peru,  Neb. 

Suggestion  in  Education,  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

The  fundamental  thesis  is  that  "  all  educative  guid- 
ance is  through  suggestion  and  reaction."  Education 
is  treated  as  aflSrmative  guidance  of  life  by  the  rational 


Department  of  Political  Economy 


13 


nse  of  present  life  materials.  Teaching  is  by  the  un- 
obtrusive suggestion  of  image  centers,  which  are  worked 
out  into  completed  experiences  through  normal  life- 
processes. 

Samuel  Bower  Sinclair,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Vice-Principal  of  Normal  School,  Ot- 
tawa, Canada. 

The  Possibility  of  a  Science  of  Education. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  argument  endeavors  to  establish  the  following 
theses:  There  is  a  science  of  education  as  there  is  a 


science  of  mathematics,  of  physics,  of  medicine,  or  of 
ethics;  there  are  educational  facts  or  principles,  ca- 
pable of  discovery  and  systemization,  which  are  so  fun- 
damental, universal,  and  important  as  to  differentiate 
educational  science  from  every  other ;  and,  further,  the 
study  of  educational  science  is  of  service  to  every 
teacher  by  furnishing  him  with  instruments  of  insight 
which  will  be  valuable  in  the  determination  of  the  true 
purpose  of  education  and  of  ways  and  means  to  its 
attainment. 


Ella  Flagg  Young,  Ph.D.  1900.     (See 
above.) 


II.    POLITICAL  ECONOMY 


James  Laurence  Laughlin  [1892 — ], 
Professor  and  Head  of  the  Department 
of  Political  Economy. 

Facts  about  Money,  Including  a  Debate  with 
W.  H.  Harvey.  8vo,  275.  Chicago,  E.  A. 
Weeks  &  Co.,  1895.    [Out  of  print.] 

a  refutation  of  "Coin's  Financial  School"  and  the 
doctrine  of  free  coinage  of  silver.  The  substance  of 
the  book  was  prepared  from  April  24  to  June  20  in  the 
form  of  signed  editorials  for  the  Chicago  Times-Herald. 

The  Indian  Silver  Currency.  Translated  from 
the  German  of  Karl  Ellstaetter.  8vo,  x  + 
117.  Economic  Studies  of  the  University 
of  Chicago,  No.  3,  1896. 

History  of  Bimetallism  in  the  United  States. 
Fourth  edition,  with  new  Appendices,  a 
Study  of  the  Fall  of  Silver  since  1885,  and 
the  Experience  of  the  United  States  with 
Silver  to  1893.  8vo,  xviii  +  353.  New  York, 
D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1897. 

A  continuation  of  the  work  issued  in  1885. 

Report  of  the  Monetary  Commission  of  the 
Indianapolis  Convention  of  Boards  of  Trade, 
Chambers  of  Commerce,  Commercial  Clubs, 
and  Other  Similar  Bodies  of  the  United 
States.  8vo,  xiii  +  608.  Indianapolis,  and 
The  University  of  Chicago  Press,  1898. 

A  proi)osed  reform  of  our  monetary  system,  with  an 
examination  of  the  principles  of  money  involved  in  our 
metallic  and  paper  money,  stated  historically  and 
theoretically;  and  a  study  of  our  banking  system,  its 
history,  its  present  defects,  and  the  advantages  of  note 
issues  based  upon  commercial  assets.  The  preparation 
of  the  extended  report  was  assigned  to  the  author  by 
the  commission  which  drew  up  the  scheme  of  reform. 
Parts  of  the  scheme  have  been  enacted  into  law  (March 
14, 1900). 


The  Elements  of  Political  Economy,  with  some 
Applications  to  Questions  of  the  Day.  12mo. 
xxiv  +  384.  New  York,  American  Book  Co. 
Revised  and  enlarged  edition,  1902. 

The  theory  of  final  utility  in  relation  to  cost  of  produc- 
tion, and  some  explanations  of  large  production,  trusts, 
consumption,  etc.,  have  been  added. 

Money:  I.  The  Principles  of  Money.    8vo,  xvii 

+  530.    New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons, 

1902. 

This  is  Volume  I  of  a  series  intended  to  cover  the  sub- 
ject of  money.  The  first  volume  treats  of  the  principles 
common  to  all  kinds  of  money.  It  emphasizes  the  dis- 
tinction between  the  standard  and  the  medium  of  ex- 
change; offers  a  new  constructive  study  on  credit; 
collects  all  price  tables ;  gives  the  history  of  price  the- 
ories; attacks  the  quantity-theory;  proposes  a  true 
theory  of  prices;  rewrites  the  economic  statement  as 
to  the  movement  of  specie  in  international  trade; 
discusses  contraction  and  the  amount  of  money  needed 
by  a  country ;  gives  the  history  and  economic  effects  of 
legal  tender ;  and  expounds  the  laws  of  token  money 
and  inconvertible  paper. 

Reciprocity.  Written  in  conjunction  with  Pro- 
fessor H.  Parker  Willis,  of  Washington  and 
Lee  University.  8vo,  v  +  350.  New  York, 
The  Baker  and  Taylor  Co.,  1902. 

An  examination  of  the  earlier  meaning  of  reciprocity; 
the  experience  under  the  Canadian  and  Hawaiian 
treaties ;  the  relation  of  reciprocity  to  the  tariff  policy 
of  the  United  States;  the  sugar  question  and  its  effects 
on  our  legislation ;  the  relation  of  the  sugar  trust  to 
the  abandonment  of  reciprocity;  reciprocity  under 
the  McKinley,  Wilson,  and  Dingley  acts;  reciprocity 
with  Cuba ;  the  Kasson  treaties ;  and  the  future  pros- 
pects of  reciprocity,  are  given.  An  extended  bibliog- 
raphy is  added. 

The  Study  of  Political  Economy  in  the  United 
States.  Journal  of  Political  Economy, 
Vol.  I  (1892),  1-19. 

Editorial  introduction  of  the  Journal  of  Political 
Economy  to  the  public,  with  a  survey  of  the  economic 
field. 


14 


Publications 


Indian  Monetary  History.  Ibid.,  Vol.  I  (1893), 
593-596. 

An  account  of  the  Indian  Currency  from  1835  to  1893. 

The  Abundance  of  Gold.  American  Banker, 
November  29, 1893,  19-30. 

A  statistical  study  of  the  production  of  gold,  the  de- 
mand for  it,  and  its  effect  on  the  value  of  silver. 

Gold  and  Silver  in  Santo  Domingo.  Journal 
of  Political  Economy,  II  (1894),  536-560, 
613-619. 

A  description  of  the  monetary  situation  in  the  repub- 
lic of  Santo  Domingo  and  a  statement  of  the  scheme 
drawn  up  by  the  author  for  that  country,  which  was 
enacted  into  law  in  1894,  with  an  exposition  of  the 
reasons  therefor  and  a  copy  of  the  law. 

The  Baltimore  Plan  of  Bank  Issues.  Ibid., 
Ill  (1894),  101-105. 

A  critical  study  of  this  proposal  of  an  elastic  bank 
currency. 

The  Currency  Problem.  American  Banker, 
October  31, 1894,  6-19. 

A  study  of  the  American  monetary  system,  prepared  for 
the  Commercial  Club  of  Chicago. 

«  Coin's  "  Food  for  the  Gullible.  F&rum,  XXI 
(1895),  573-585. 

A  study  of  the  psychological  and  economic  conditions 
in  which  the  silver  mania  flourished. 

Our  Monetary  Programme.  Ibid.,  XXII  (1896), 
652-656. 

Traces  the  monetary  disturbances  in  the  United  States 
to  operations  affecting  the  standard,  rather  than  the 
media  of  exchange. 

Causes  of  Agricultural  Unrest.  Atlantic 
Monthly,  LXXVIII  (1896),  577-585. 

A  political  and  economic  analysis  of  the  conditions  of 
the  agricultural  classes. 

Francis  Amasa  Walker,  with  Bibliography. 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  V  (1897), 
228-236. 

An  estimate  of  the  economic  career  of  General  Walker. 

The  Monetary  Commission.  Forum,  XXIV 
(1897),  303-312. 

The  justification  of  an  extra-Congressional  scheme  for 
reforming  the  currency. 

The  McKinley  Administration  and  Prosperity. 
Ibid.,  554-563. 

An  examination  of  the  relations  of  government  action 
to  industrial  and  monetary  disturbances,  as  illustrated 
by  recent  events. 

Some  Practical  Aspects  of  Socialism.  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  Fifth  Annual  Convention 
of  the  Wisconsin  Bankers'  Association, 
1897, 13-30. 

An  economic  study  of  the  labor  problem ;  the  appeal  to 
the  state  is  a  confession  of  individual  weakness. 


The  Gold  Standard  in  Japan.  Journal  of 
Political  Economy,  V  (1897),  378-383. 

Bank  Notes  Secured  by  Commercial  Assets. 
Address  delivered  before  the  Bankers'  Club 
of  Chicago.    8vo,  29.    Pamphlet,  1898. 

An  argument  in  favor  of  so-called  "  asset-currency." 

Socialism  in  the  Price  Question.  Self  Culture, 
VIII  (1898),  129-136. 

The  operation  of  socialistic  theories  in  the  tenets  of 
those  advocating  the  extended  use  of  silver. 

David  Ames  Wells.  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,  VII  (1899),  9a-95. 

Estimate  of  Mr.  Wells  as  an  economist. 

Commissions  on  Tariffs  and  Money.  Self  Cul- 
ture, IX  (1899),  661-667. 

The  proper  function  of  permanent  Commissions  on 
Tariffs  and  Money  is  to  secure  equality  of  treatment 
and  the  aid  of  experts. 

The  Gold  Standard  in  India.  Journal  of 
Political  Economy,  VII  (1899),  551-553. 

Explanation  of  the  quasi-redemption  of  the  Indian 
rupee  in  gold. 

Professor  Dunbar.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1900),  234-238. 

Characterization  as  a  teacher  and  economist. 

Recent  Monetary  Legislation.    Ibid.,  289-302. 

Intended  to  prove  that  the  act  of  March  14, 1900,  did 
not  establish  the  gold  standard  in  the  United  States. 

Criticism  of  Tolstoi's  Money.  Open  Court, 
XIV  (1900),  221-228. 

A  refutation  of  the  idea  that  the  existence  of  money 
provides  a  means  of  enslaving  men. 

Prices  and  the  International  Movement  of 
Specie.  Journal  of  Political  Economy,  X 
(1902),  514-536. 

Supposing  the  error  of  the  quantity  theory,  a  restate- 
ment is  made  of  the  principles  affecting  prices  in  inter- 
national trade. 

Credit.  The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial 
Publications,  First  Series,  Vol.  IV,  1-28. 

A  constructive  study  of  credit  which  tries  to  prove  that 
normal  credit  does  not.  while  abnormal  credit  does, 
change  the  general  level  of  prices. 

Some  Economic  Effects  of  Legal  Tender.  Yale 
Review,  X  (1902),  371-389. 

Intended  to  show  that  the  legal  tender  enactments 
have  little  or  no  influence  on  the  value  of  money.  They 
may,  however,  change  the  direction  of  demand. 


A.  C.  MiLLEE  [1892-1902],  Professor  of 
Finance;  Professor  of  Political  Econ- 
omy, University  of  California. 

The  Monetary  Problem  in  the  United  States. 
8vo,  20.    Chicago,  1895.    Pamphlet. 

The  Incidence  of  Taxation.  Journal  of  Po- 
litical Economy,  I  (1893),  450^68. 


Department  of  Political  Economy 


15 


National  Finance  and  the  Income  Tax.    Ibid., 

Ill  (1895),  255-289. 
Taxation  in  Massachusetts.    Ibid.,  VI  (1898), 

225-247. 

Reviews  of 

Bastable,  Public  Finance.  Ibid.,  I  (1892), 
133-142. 

Seligman,  Shifting  and  Incidence  of  Taxation. 
Ibid.,  (1893),  285-295. 

Howe,  Taxation  in  the  United  States  under 
the  Internal  Revenue  System.  American 
Historical  Review,  II  (1897),  743-746. 

Adams,  Science  of  Finance.  Journal  of  Po- 
litical Economy,  VII  (1899),  269-275. 

William  Hill  [1893 — ],  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor of  Political  Economy. 

First  Stages  of  the  TariflF  Policy.  American 
Economic  Association,  VIII  (1893),  452-614. 

State  Railways  in  Australia.  Journal  of  Po- 
litical Economy,  III  (1894),  1-23. 

Thorstein  B.  Veblen  [1893 — ],  Assist- 
ant Professor  of  Political  Economy. 

The  Science  of  Finance.  By  Gustav  Cohn. 
Translation  of  Cohn's  System  der  Fi- 
nanzwissenschaf t.  8vo,  xi  +  800.  Economic 
Studies  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  No.  1, 
1895. 

The  Theory  of  the  Leisure  Class:  An  Eco- 
nomic Study  of  Institutions.  8vo,  viii  +  400. 
New  York,  The  Macmillan  Ck).,  1899. 

The  Price  of  Wheat  since  1867.  Journal  of 
Political  Economy,  I  (1892),  68-103. 

The  Food  Supply  and  the  Price  of  Wheat. 
Ibid.  (1893),  365-379. 

The  Army  of  the  Commonweal.  Ibid.,  II 
(1894),  456-461. 

Why  is  Economics  Not  an  Evolutionary  Sci- 
ence? Quarterly  Journal  of  Economics, 
XII  (1898),  373-397. 


The  Instinct  of  Workmanship  and  the  Irk- 
someness  of  Labor.  American  Journal  of 
Sociology,  IV  (1898),  187-201. 

The  Beginnings  of  Ownership.    Ibid.,  352-365. 

The  Barbarian  Status  of  Women.  Ibid.  (1899), 
503-514. 

Mr.  Cummings's  Strictures  on  the  "  Theory  of 
the  Leisure  Class."  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,  VIII  (1899),  106-117. 

The  Preconceptions  of  Economic  Science. 
Three  papers.  Quarterly  Journal  of  Eco- 
nomics, XIII  (1899),  121-150,  396-426;  XIV 
(1900),  240-269. 

Industrial  and  Pecuniary  Employments.  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  American  Economic  Asso- 
ciation, Thirteenth  Annual  Meeting,  1900 
(1901),  190-235. 

Gustav  Schmoller's  Economics.  Quarterly 
Journal  of  Economics,  XVI  (1901),  69-93. 

The  Use  of  Loan  Credit  in  Modem  Business. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  Vol.  IV,  31-51. 

Henry  Rand  Hatfield  [1898 — ],  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Political  Economy, 

Municipal  Bonding:  A  Study  of  the  Western 
Bond  Market  for  the  Years  1886-1895. 
Doctor's  thesis.     Unpublished. 

a  consideration  of  the  elements  which  make  mnnicipal 
bonds  attractive  to  investors,  and  of  the  various  feat- 
ures of  bonding  as  they  affect  the  issuing  municipality. 
The  general  economic  principles  which  should  deter- 
mine the  purpose,  the  amount,  and  the  form  of  muni- 
cipal debt  are  considered,  as  well  as  the  effect  of  the 
various  statutory  restrictions.  A  sketch  is  given  of  the 
operation  of  an  early  syndicate  organized  to  control 
the  western  bond  market.  The  material  of  this  thesis 
is  derived  mainly  from  the  private  records  of  several 
bond  dealers  of  the  time. 

The  Chicago  Trust  Conference.  Journal  of 
Political  Economy,  VIII  (1899),  1-18. 

Reviews  of 

Wordsworth  Donisthorpe,  Law  in  a  Free  State. 

Ibid.,  Ill  (1895),  381-383. 
J.  N.  Norman,  Universal  Cambist,  and   The 

World's    Exchanges    in    1898.    Ibid.,  VII 

(1899),  280-284. 
E.  D.  Jones,  Economic  Crises.      Ibid.,  VIII 

(1900),  136-138. 
Baker,  Monopolies  and  the  People.  Ibid.,  271- 

274. 


16 


Publications 


Wesley  Clair  Mitchell  [1900-1902], 
Instructor  in  Political  Economy;  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Political  Economy, 
University  of  California. 

The  Quantity  Theory  of  the  Value  of  Money. 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  IV  (1896), 
139-165. 

A  discussion  of  the  vulgar  form  of  the  quantity  theory. 

"  Greenbacks "  and  the  Cost  of  the  Civil  War. 
Ihid,,  V  (1897),  117-156. 

An  attempt  to  estimate  the  financial  effects  of  the 
issues  of  the  United  States  notes  in  1862  and  1863. 

The  Value  of  the  "Greenbacks"  during  the 
Civil  War.    Ibid.,  VI  (1898),  139-167. 

A  study  of  the  factors  which  affected  the  gold  price  of 
the  United  States  notes,  1862-1865. 

The  Suspension  of  Specie  Payments,  Decem- 
ber, 1861.    Ibid.,  VII  (1899),  289-326. 

A  study  of  the  financial  policy  of  the  federal  govern- 
ment during  the  early  months  of  the  Civil  War. 

History  of  the  Legal  Tender  Acts  of  1862  and 
1863.    Doctor's  thesis.    Chicago,  1903. 

Being  chapters  from  the  following  volume : 

A  History  of  Greenbacks,  with  Special  Refer- 
ence to  the  Economic  Consequences  of  their 
Issue.  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  Second  Series,  Vol.  IX, 
1903. 

An  essay  in  financial  history,  showing  the  course  of 
events  that  led  to  the  adoption  of  the  paper-money 
policy  by  the  American  Congress. 

John  Cummings  [1902 — ],  Instructor  in 
Political  Economy;  Graduate  student, 
1893-1894. 

Monetary  Standards.  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,  II  (1894),  349-368. 

The  Poor  Laws  of  Massachusetts  and  New 
York.  Doctor's  thesis.  American  Eco- 
nomical Association,  X  (1894),  477-611. 

An  account  of  the  development  of  the  poor  laws  in  these 
two  commonwealths,  based  upon  an  extended  examina- 
tion of  the  statutes  and  early  records,  with  some  ac- 
count of  immigration  laws,  federal  and  state.  The  con- 
ditions of  settlement  are  taken  up  and  the  methods  of 
administering  relief  by  state,  county,  and  town,  indoor 
and  outdoor,  assessment  of  rates,  provision  for  defect- 
ives and  the  insane,  and  the  like. 

Herbert  Joseph  Davenport  [1897-98; 
1902 — ],  Instructor  in  Political  Econ- 
omy. 

Outlines  of  Elementary  Economics.  12mo, 
xiv+280.  New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co., 
1898. 


The  Cost  of  Tariff.  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,  V  (1897),  506-513. 

An  analysis  of  statistics  to_  show  that  the  purely  eco- 
nomic loss  through  protection  is  inconsiderable,  the 
serious  aspects  of  the  case  being  rather  political  and 
social. 

The  Franco-Prussian  War-Fine:  A  Study  in 
International  Exchanges.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

An  analysis  of  the  methods  by  which  France  paid  to 
Germany  several  fold  more  money  than  France  had,  this 
result  being  mostly  wrought  out  through  the  sale,  by 
French  holders,  of  international  securities  to  German 

gurchasers,  the  French  investors  replacing  their  old 
oldings    by  the  new  rentes;   hence  the  creation  of 
great  balances  in  favor  of  Paris  on  Berlin. 


E.  R.  L.  Gould  [1895-96],  Lecturer  on 
Statistics. 

The  Housing  of  the  Working  People.  8vo,  461. 
Issued  by  the  Department  of  Labor,  Wash- 
ington, 1895. 

Public  Control  of  the  Liquor  Traffic.  8vo,  viii 
+  100.  Baltimore,  The  Friedenwald  Co., 
1895. 

Isaac  Hourwich  [1893-94],  Docent  in 
Statistics;  United  States  Treasury  De- 
partment, Washington,  D.  C 

The  Rate  of  Profits  under  the  Law  of  Labor- 
Value.  Journal  of  Political  Economy,  II 
(1894),  235-250. 

A  mathematical  discussion  of  the  pretended  contradic- 
tion between  the  labor  theory  of  value  and  the  pre- 
sumed tendency  of  profits  toward  equalization.  The 
solution  is  found  in  the  proposition  that  the  value  of 
capital  is  equal  to  its  capitalized  earning  capacity. 

Russia  in  the  International  Market.  Ibid., 
284-290. 

An  analysis  of  Russian  statistics  of  imports  and  ex- 
ports. 

John  Cummings,  Ph.D.  1894.  (See  above.) 


Herbert    J.    Davenport,    Ph.D. 

(See  above.) 


1898. 


Katherine  Bement  Davis,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Head  of  Women's  Reformatory,  Bed- 
ford, N.  Y. 

The  Modern  Condition  of  Agricultural  Labor 
in  Bohemia.  Journal  of  Political  Econ- 
omy, VIII  (1900),  491-524. 


Depabtment  of  Political  Economy 


17 


The  Interrelation  of  Standards  of  Living  and 
Wages.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  comparative  study  of  the  standards  of  living  and 
wages  of  industrial  and  agricultural  laborers  in  Bohe- 
mia prior  to  the  revolution  of  1848  and  at  the  present 
time,  and  a  discussion  of  the  condition  of  Bohemian 
laborers  in  the  United  States. 


Henbt    Band    Hatfield, 
(See  above.) 


Ph.D.    1897. 


Simon  James  McLean,  Ph.D.  1897;  Pro- 
fessor of  Economics  and  Sociology, 
University  of  Arkansas. 

The  Railway  Policy  of  Canada.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  critical  descriptive  account  of  the  evolution  of  the 
railway  policy  of  Canada.  It  describes  the  early  move- 
ments leading  to  the  adoption  of  a  policy  of  govern- 
ment assistance;  the  relation  between  the  railway 
system  and  the  expansion  of  Canadian  territory;  the 
growing  feeling  in  regard  to  the  necessity  of  regulation 
of  rates;  experiments  in  government  ownership;  the 
later  subsidy  policy ;  the  relations  of  the  Canadian  rail- 
ways to  the  United  States  traffic,  and  the  efEect  of  this 
on  railway  policy ;  recent  movements  in  the  direction 
of  making  government  sui)ervision  in  regard  to  rates 
and  capitalization  more  effective. 


Harry  Alvin  Millis,  Ph.D.  1899;  Ref- 
erence Librarian,  John  Crerar  Library, 
Chicago. 

The  Law  Relating  to  Immigrants  and  Tramps. 
Proceedings  of  the  National  Conference  of 
Charities  and  Corrections,  1897,  356-361; 
also  Charities  Review,  September,  1897, 
587-594. 

A  study  of  the  settlement  and  vagrancy  laws  in  force  in 
the  several  American  commonwealths. 

The  Law  Relating  to  the  Relief  and  Care  of 
Dependents.  American  Journal  of  Soci- 
ology,  III  (1897),  378-391,  479-489,  631- 
648,  777-794;  IV  (1898),  51-68,  178-186. 

A  History  of  the  Finances  of  the  City  of  Chi- 
cago.   Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  history  of  the  finances  of  the  city  of  Chicago  from  its 
earliest  organization  to  the  present  time. 


Wesley  Clair  Mitchell,  Ph.D. 
(See  above.) 


1899. 


Robert  S.  Padan,  Ph.D.  1901. 

Prices  and  Index  Numbers.    Journal  of  Po- 
litical Economy,  VIII  (1900),  171-202. 

A  criticism  of  existing  systems  of  index  numbers,  with 
directions  for  curing  their  defects. 

J.  B.  Clark's  Formulae  of  Wages  and  Interest. 
Ibid.,  IX  (1901),  161-190. 

Attempts  by  mathematico-economical  tests  to  show  the 
fallacy  of  Professor  Clark's  theory. 

Studies  in  Interest.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpub- 
lished. 

1.  J.  B.  Clark  resolves  the  question  of  the  distribution 
of  the  product  of  industry  into  a  problem  of  produc- 
tion, maintaining  that  the  rates  of  interest  and  wages 
tend  toward  the  marginal  products  due  to  the  last  unit 
of  capital  and  to  the  last  unit  of  labor.  This  theory  is 
subjected  to  tests  in  a  mathematical  guise,  and  is  dis- 
credited. 

2.  The  versions  of  the  abstinence  theory  of  interest  rep- 
resented respectively  by  WUliam  Senior,  Eugen  Bohm- 
Bawerk,  and  T.  N.  Carver,  and  an  attempt  to  show  their 
weakness. 

3.  The  doctrine  that  value  is  the  fundamental  consid- 
eration in  the  interest  question  is  challenged.  On  the 
contrary,  the  increase  of  commodities  or  utUities  is  the 
foundation  of  interest. 


Worthy  Putnam  Sterns,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Government  Clerk,  Treasury  Bureau  of 

Statistics. 

The  International  Indebtedness  of  the  United 
States  in  1789.  Journal  of  Political  Econ- 
omy, VI  (1897),  27-53. 

Review  of  period  from  1700  to  1789.  Special  study  of 
expenditures  by  European  countries  in  America,  the 
development  of  the  colonial  marine,  and  the  attempts  to 
make  the  colonies  a  source  of  raw  materials,  esi)ecially 
of  iron  and  naval  stores. 

The  Beginnings  of  American  Financial  Inde- 
pendence.   Ibid.  (1898),  187-208. 

Important  effects  of  Napoleonic  wars  on  United  States 
commerce.  Development  of  domestic  manufactures 
through  foreign  repression  of  that  commerce  and  our 
own  tariff  legislation.  Excessive  imports  caused  by  ex- 
clusion of  English  manufactures  from  continental  ports. 
Foreign  investments  in  United  States  in  1820  probably 
little,  if  at  all,  in  excess  of  American  investment  abroad. 

A  New  Standard  and  a  New  Currency.  Ibid., 
523-535. 

All  banks  to  become  national  banks,  associated  in  a 
national  clearing-house  association  under  the  supervi- 
sion of  the  comptroller  of  the  currency,  the  association 
guaranteeing  all  deposit,  and  restricting  and  expand- 
ing circulation  by  deposits  with  comptroller  of  what- 
ever amount  is  necessary  to  prevent  undesirable  exports 
of  the  precious  metals.  All  currency  to  be  issued  by 
the  government  through  the  banks. 


18 


Publications 


The  Foreign  Trade  of  the  United  States,  1820 
to  1840.  Doctor's  thesis.  I.  J6id.,VIII  (1900), 
34-57;  II,  ibid.,  452^90;  III,  unpublished. 

Growth  of  national  spirit ;  improved  interior  transpor- 
tation ;  development  of  manufactures ;  the  tarifp  policy. 
Result  of  these  causes  —  stagnation  in  foreign  trade  in 
first  half  of  period.  Concessions  in  tariff  policy  and 
remarkable  growth  in  the  wealth  pi  the  country  lead  to 
a  wonderful  increase  in  imports  in  second  half,  result- 
ing in  a  considerable  foreign  debt.  Exports  increase 
rapidly  because  of  growing  demand  for  raw  cotton 
abroad. 


George  G.  Tunell,  Ph.D.  1897;  Secre- 
tary to  the  President  of  the  Chicago 
and  Northwestern  Railroad. 

Transportation  on  the  Great  Lakes.  Doctor's 
thesis.  Svo,  106.  House  Document  No.  277, 
Fifty-fifth  Congress,  Second  Session,  1898. 

A  historical  statement  of  the  growth  of  lake  commerce 
and  a  discussion  of  rail  and  water  competition. 

The  Legislative  History  of  the  Second  Income- 

Tax  Law.    Journal  of  Political  Economy, 

III  (1895),  311-337. 
The  Growth  and  Character  of  the  Commerce  of 

the  Great  Lakes.    Ibid.,  IV  (1896),  243-245. 
Transportation   on  the  Great    Lakes.    Ibid., 

332-351,  413-416. 
Professor  Hadley's  Chapter  on  Taxation.  Ibid., 

508-515. 
Lake  Transportation  and  the  Iron-Ore  Industry. 

Ibid.,  V  (1896),  23-39,  110-113. 

Hadley's  Chapter  on  Taxation:  A  Rejoinder. 
Ibid.,  88-91. 

The  Diversion  of  the  Flour  and  Grain  Traffic 
from  the  Great  Lakes  to  the  Railroads.  Ibid., 
340-375,  413-420. 

The  Taxation  of  Express,  Telegraph,  and  Tele- 
phone Companies  in  Ohio.  Ibid.  (1897), 
244^245. 

Henry  Parker  Willis,  Ph.D.  1897;  Pro- 
fessor of  Political  Economy,  Washing- 
ton and  Lee  University. 

A  History  of  the  Latin  Monetary  Union:  A 
Study  of  International  Monetary  Action. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Svo,  xii  +  332.  Economic 
Studies  of  the  University  of  Chicago,  No.  5, 
1901. 


Income  Taxation  in  France.    Journal  of  Po- 
litical Economy,  IV  (1894),  409-410. 

The  French  Income-Tax  Bill  of  1895.    Ibid., 
37-53. 

An  account  of  the  effort  to  introduce  systematic  income 
taxation  in  France. 

Belgian  Monetary  Legislation.  Ibid.,  Ill  (1895), 
222-232. 

Bimetallism  in  France.    Ibid.,  356-362. 

An  account  of  the  early  monetary  history  antecedent  to 
the  formation  of  the  Latin  monetary  union. 

The  History  and  Present  Application  of  the 
Quantity  Theory.    Ibid.,  IV  (1896),  417-448. 

Credit  Devices  and  the  Quantity  Theory.  Ibid., 
281-308. 

A  study  of  the  theory  of  prices  as  affected  by  the  mod- 
ern use  of  money-substitutes. 

The  Vienna  Monetary  Treaty  of  1857.    Ibid., 

187-207. 

A  historical  review  of  the  attempt  to  form  a  German 
monetary  union. 

Monetary  Reform  in  Russia.    Ibid.,  V  (1897), 
277-315. 

An  account  of  Russian  monetary  history  and  the  recent 
changes  in  the  monetary  system. 

The  Austrian  Postal  Savings  Bank.   Ibid.,  505- 
506. 

A  descriptive  account  of  the  Austrian  government  sav- 
ings bank. 

Foreign  Clearing-House  Bank  Returns.    Ibid., 
516-518. 

A  statistical  summary  and  comparison  with  American 
figures. 


W.  H.  Allen,  Graduate  student. 

The  Charter  Tax  of  the  Illinois  Central  Rail- 
way. Journal  of  Political  Economy,  VI 
(1898),  353-367. 

S.   P.   Breckinridge,    Graduate  student. 

Legal  Tender.  A  Study  in  English  and  Ameri- 
can Monetary  History. 

(See  under  Political  Science.) 

Ward  A.  Cutler,  Graduate  student. 

Insolvent  National  Banks  in  City  and  Countrj. 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  VIII  (1899), 
367-379. 


Depabtment  of  Political  Economy 


19 


Kathebine  Felton,  Graduate  student. 

Rousier's  Theory  of  the  Evolution  of  the  La- 
borer. Journal  of  Political  Economy,  VI 
(1898),  380-395. 

Alfbed  L.  Fish,  Graduate  student. 

Dr.  MacFarlane  on  "Complimentary  Gods." 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  IX  (1900), 
238-241. 

W.  F.  Habding,  Graduate  student. 

The  State  Bank  of  Indiana.  Journal  of  Po- 
litical Economy,  III  (1895),  1-36. 

Sabah  M.  Habdy,  Graduate  student. 

The  Quantity  of  Money  and  Prices.  Journal 
of  Political  Economy,  III  (1895),  145-168. 

Robebt  F.  Hoxie,  Graduate  student. 

The  Ck)mpensatory   Theory    of    Bimetallism. 

Journal  of  Political  Economy,  I  (1893), 

273-276. 
The  Silver  Debate  of  1890.    Ibid.,  535-587. 
The  Adequacy  of  the  Customs  Revenue.   Ibid., 

II  (1894),  39-72. 

W.  L.  McKenzie  King,  Graduate  student. 

The  International  Typographical  Union.  Jour- 
nal of  Political  Economy,  V  (1897),  458- 
484. 

Trade  Union  Organization  in  the  United  States. 
Ibid.,  201-215. 

S.  V.  LiNDHOLM,  Graduate  student. 

The   Building   Trades    Conflict  in  Chicago. 

Journal  of  Political  Economy,  VIII  (1900), 

327-346. 
Trusts  in  Europe.    Ibid.,  IX  (1901),  600-606. 

Edwabd  S.  Meade,  Graduate  student. 

The  Fall  in  the  Price  of  Silver  since  1873. 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  V  (1897), 
316-339. 


Gold  and  Silver  and  Terms  of  Commodities. 
Ibid.,  245-249. 

The  Production  of  Gold  since  1850.    Ibid.,  VI, 

1-26. 
The  Deposit  Reserve  System  of  the  National 

Banking  Law.    Ibid.  (1898),  209-224. 

John  W.  Million,  Graduate  student. 

The  Debate  on  the  National  Bank  Act  of  1863. 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  II  (1894), 
251-280. 

State  Aid  to  Railroads  in  Missouri.  Ibid., 
Ill,  73-97. 

State  Aid  to  Railroads  in  Missouri.  8vo,  xvi  + 
264.  Economic  Studies  of  the  University 
of  Chicago,  No.  4, 1896. 

Geobge  C.  Sikes,  Graduate  student. 

The  Apprentice  System  in  the  Building  Trades. 

Journal  of  Political  Economy,  II  (1894), 

397-423. 
Public  Policy  Concerning  Franchise  Values. 

Ibid.,  IX  (1901),  527-539. 

H.  W.  Stuabt,  Graduate  student. 

A  Scarcity  of  Gold.     Journal  of  Political 

Econony,  III  (1895),  362-365. 
Subjective  and  Exchange  Values,  I.  Ibid.,  IV, 

208-239. 
Subjective  and  Exchange  Values,  II.    Ibid., 

(1896),  352-385. 
The  Hedonistic  Interpretation  of  Subjective 

Value.    Ibid.  (1895),  6^^-86. 

Max  West,  Graduate  student. 

The  Teachings  of  Political  Economists  Defin- 
ing Direct  and  Indirect  Taxes.  8vo,  38. 
New  York,  1895. 

Henby  K.  White,  Graduate  student. 

Pacific  Railway  Debts.  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,  II  (1894),  424-452. 

The  History  of  the  Union  Pacific  Railway. 
8vo,  iv  +  129.  Economic  Studies  of  the 
University  of  Chicago,  No.  2,  1895. 


20 


Publications 


Robert  H.  Whitton,  Graduate  student. 

The  Assessment  of  Taxes  in  Chicago.  Jour- 
nal of  Political  Economy,  V  (1897),  175- 
200. 


A.  P.  Winston,  Graduate  student. 

The  Tariff  and  the  Constitution.     Journal  of 
Political  Economy,  V  (1896),  40-70. 


III.    POLITICAL  SCIENCE 


Harry  Pratt  Judson  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor of  Comparative  Politics  and  Di- 
plomacy and  Head  of  the  Department 
of  Political  Science. 

Europe  in  the  Nineteenth  Century.  Svo,  343. 
Meadville,  Pa.,  The  Chautauqua  Century 
Press,  1894.  Revised  edition:  New  York, 
Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1901. 

The  Mississippi  Valley.  Contributed  to  "  The 
United  States  of  America,"  edited  by  N.  S. 
Shaler.  I,  273-340.  New  York,  Appleton 
&  Co.,  1894. 

The  Growth  of  the  American  Nation.  8vo,  359. 
Meadville,  Pa.,  The  Chautauqua  Century 
Press,  1895.  Revised  edition:  New  York, 
The  Macmillan  Co.,  1901. 

What  Should  Congress  Do  About  Money? 
Opinions  of  Professors  of  Political  and  Eco- 
nomic Science.  Review  of  Reviews,  VIII 
(1893),  153. 

Advocates  the  frank  and  explicit  adoption  of  the  gold 
standard. 

Municipal  Government.  Year  Book  of  the 
Chicago  Sunset  Club,  1893, 143-148. 

Advocating  definite  responsibility,  fixity  of  tenure,  a 
non-administrative  council,  the  municipal  referendum. 

Is  Our  Republic  a  Failure?  American  Jour- 
nal of  Sociology,  I  (1895),  28-40. 

A  discussion  of  some  of  the  dangers  of  a  democratic 
republic :  the  distrust  of  legislative  bodies,  the  tyranny 
of  united  wealth,  the  tyranny  of  united  labor.  The  real 
question  is  not  political,  but  social  —  is  modern  society 
a  failure  ?  Political  democracy  is  not  an  end  in  itself, 
but  is  merely  a  means  to  the  end  of  social  betterment. 
It  cannot  as  yet  be  afiirmed  that  our  republic  has  failed 
to  meet  the  present  perils. 

The  Political  Effects  of  the  Teaching  of  Jesus. 
Biblical  World,  XII  (1898),  229-238. 

The  effect  of  the  Christian  church  on  the  political 
philosophy  of  the  Roman  Empire,  on  the  organization 
of  society  after  its  fall;  the  political  status  of  the 
church  in  the  Middle  Ages,  especially  the  effect  of  Chris- 
tian doctrine  in  disseminating  the  idea  of  democracy, 
which  is  the  essence  of  political  progress  for  the  past 
four  centuries. 


Om-  Federal  Constitution  and  the  Government 
of  Tropical  Territories.  American  Monthly 
Review  of  Reviews,  XIX  (1899),  67-75. 

The  power  to  acquire  territory  is  no  longer  seriously 
questioned.  The  purposes  of  annexation  are  not  limited 
by  the  constitution,  but  are  at  the  discretion  of  the 
political  branch  of  the  government.  It  is  not  necessary 
that  annexed  territory  should  be  destined  for  state- 
hood ;  it  may  be  held  permanently  as  a  colony,  for  pur- 
poses of  national  defense,  or  from  economic  considera- 
tions. It  may  be  held  in  trust  for  the  inhabitants. 
Meanwhile  such  territory  is  subject  to  the  control  of 
Congress.  It  is  pointed  out,  with  detailed  reasons,  that 
in  the  federal  constitution  the  term  "United  States" 
refers  solely  to  the  states  which  form  the  union ;  that 
federal  territory  is  no  part  of  the  United  States  in  any 
constitutional  sense,  but  is  wholly  subject  to  federal 
authority.  It  is  only  in  the  international  and  geo- 
graphical sense  that  the  "  United  States  "  may  be  said 
to  include  federal  territory.  The  inhabitants  of  an- 
nexed territory  do  not  by  virtue  of  annexation  neces- 
sarily all  become  citizens.  It  is  not  beyond  question 
that  any  of  them  do.  It  is  then  shown  that  there  are 
no  constitutional  limitations  imposed  upon  Congress 
in  the  matter  of  taxation  of  annexed  territories  or  as  to 
the  enactment  of  suitable  navigation  laws.  Such  per- 
sonal rights  as  the  constitution  guarantees  within  the 
whole  jurisdiction  of  the  nationalgovernment  are  such 
as  would  not  seriously  impede  adequate  control  of  fed- 
eral territory.  The  acquisition  of  tropical  territories 
may  or  may  not  be  in  accordance  with  sound  policy. 
The  control  of  such  territories  presents  few  serious 
constitutional  difficulties. 

The  Constitution  and  the  Territories.  Ibid., 
XXI  (1900),  451-456. 

Congress  may  not  by  statute  "  extend  "  the  constitution 
over  a  given  territory.  Such  terms  as  "cover,"  "ex- 
tend," are  metaphors  and  unsafe  in  legal  discussion. 
The  questions  to  be  discussed  are  rather  these:  1. 
What  power  over  the  territories  does  the  constitution 
vest  in  Congress?  2.  What  prohibitions  does  it  place 
on  Congress  with  respect  to  legislation  for  territories? 
In  discussing  the  second  point  a  distinction  is  made 
between  qualified  and  unqualified  prohibitions.  The 
prohibition  to  pass  a  bill  of  attainder  is  unqualified, 
but  that  forbidding  the  suspension  of  the  writ  of  habeas 
corpus  is  qualified.  So,  also,  is  the  prohibition  on  lay- 
ing export  duties.  The  requirement  that  customs  du- 
ties shall  be  uniform  throughout  the  union  is  a  quali- 
fied prohibition  —  it  applies  only  to  the  states. 

It  is  also  contended  that  the  so-called  definition  of 
citizenship  in  the  fourteenth  amendment  does  not 
necessitate  citizenship  for  those  born  in  territories. 
Such  persons  are  not  born  in  the  "United  States,"  in 
the  sense  of  the  constitution.  As  the  Supreme  Court 
has  already  held  that  there  are  two  kinds  of  citizen- 
ship, federal  and  state,  so  there  may  easily  be  implied 
a  third  kind  —  territorial.  Whether  the  personal  im- 
munities of  the  first  eight  amendments  are  unqualified 
prohibitions  or  not  is  an  open  question.  The  weight  of 
judicial  construction  thus  far  is  in  the  affirmative,  but 
of  doubtful  cogency  and  not  certain  to  be  sustained. 


Department  op  Political  Science 


21 


The  Essential  Elements  of  a  Written  Consti- 
tution. Article  in  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
Vol.  IV,  1902. 

A  study  of  the  nature  of  organic  law,  with  an  analysis 
of  a  constitution  of  government.  The  attempt  is  made 
to  develop  the  essentials  of  a  complete  constitution, 
showing  the  limits  of  variation  for  essentials  and  non- 
essentials. 

Reviews  of 

Bryce,  American  Commonwealth.  Current 
Topics,  I  (1893),  327-335. 

Pelham,  Outlines  of  Koman  History.  Clas- 
sical Review,  VIII  (1894),  104:-106. 

Borgeaud,  Adoption  and  Amendment  of  Con- 
stitutions. American  Historical  Review, 
I  (1895),  154-156. 

Foster,  Commentaries  on  the  Constitution  of 
the  United  States.    Ibid.,  II  (1896),  562-565. 

America  and  Europe:  A  Study  of  International 
Relations.  American  Journal  of  Sociol- 
ogy, II  (1896),  474-476. 

Moses,  Establishment  of  Spanish  Rule  in 
America.  Journal  of  Political  Economy, 
VII  (1898)  135-136. 

Edmund  Janes  James  [1895-1902],  Pro- 
fessor of  Public  Administration ;  Pres- 
ident of  Northwestern  University. 

Information  Relating  to  the  Territorial  Laws 
of  Illinois  passed  from  1809-1812.  8vo,  15. 
Publications  of  the  Illinois  State  Histor- 
ical Library,  No.  2.  Springfield,  111.,  Phil- 
lips Bros.,  State  Printers,  1899. 

An  account  of  the  early  laws  of  Illinois  territory  which 
were  never  printed,  and  most  of  which  were  lost,  based 
on  a  careful  examination  of  records  in  Springfield  and 
Washington. 

The  Territorial  Records  of  Illinois.  8vo,  50. 
Ibid.,  No.  3.  Springfield,  111.,  PhilUps 
Bros.,  State  Printers,  1901. 

First  part  of  the  territorial  records  of  the  state  hitherto 
unprinted,  with  introduction  and  notes. 

The  Charters  of  the  City  of  Chicago.  Part  I, 
The  Early  Charters,  183a-37.  8vo,  76.  1898. 
Part  II,  The  City  Charters,  1838-51.  8vo, 
111.    Chicago,  The  University  Press,  1899. 

The  first  two  parts  of  a  comprehensive  work  on  the 
charter  history  of  Chicago.  They  contain  (1)  introduc- 
tion dealing  with  historic  development,  (2)  texts  of  the 
charters,  (3)  analysis  and  systematic  presentation  of  the 
inain  features  of  each  charter,  (4)  comparative  discus- 
sion of  the  chief  peculiarities  of  each  charter. 


Municipal  Administration  in  Germany,  as  seen 
in  the  Typical  Prussian  City,  Halle  a.  S. 
8vo,  96.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1901. 

An  account  of  modern  municipal  government  in  Ger- 
many ;  contains  a  description  of  the  organization  and 
functions  of  a  typical  German  city,  with  continuous 
comparison  with  American  conditions. 

An  Early  Essay  on  Proportional  Representa- 
tion. Annals  of  the  American  Academy 
of  Political  and  Social  Science,  VII  (1896), 
233-252.  Published  separately  as  No.  168 
of  the  Publications  of  the  American  Acad- 
emy of  Political  and  Social  Science.  Phi- 
ladelphia, 1896. 

A  reprint  and  discussion  of  the  first  proposition  made 
in  this  country,  and  perhaps  in  the  world,  for  a  scheme 
of  proportional  representation  in  the  modern  sense  of 
the  term  —  the  plan  devised  by  Thomas  Gilpin,  Esq., 
of  Philadelphia. 

An  Examination  of  Bryce's  American  Com- 
monwealth. Ibid.,  VII  (1896),  377-^10. 
Published  separately  as  No.  172  of  the  Pub- 
lications (1896). 

A  critique  of  Brvce's  exposition  of  American  constitu- 
tional law  and  his  work  on  the  American  Common- 
wealth ;  showing  wherein  he  misunderstands  several 
important  principles,  and  therefore  gives  a  misleading 
exposition  of  the  same. 

The  First  Apportionment  of  Federal  Repre- 
sentatives in  the  United  States.  Ibid.,  IX 
(1897),  1-41.  Pubhshed  separately  as  No. 
189  of  the  Publications  (1897). 

A  study  of  the  first  great  constitutional  dispute  under 
the  present  federal  government,  a  dispute  leading  to 
the  first  presidential  veto  exercised  by  Washington  on 
the  basis  of  a  theory  of  constitutional  law  now  aban- 
doned by  all  parties. 

The  Place  of  the  PoUtical  and  Social  Sciences 
in  Modem  Education  and  their  Bearing  on 
Training  for  Citizenship.  Ibid.,  X  (1897), 
359-386.  Published  separately  as  No.  216 
of  the  Publications  (1897). 

An  investigation  into  the  scientific  and  pedagogic 
claims  of  the  so-called  political  and  social  sciences  to 
a  place  in  the  college  and  university  curriculum. 

The  Growth  of  Great  Cities  in  Area  and  Popu- 
lation. J6zd.,  XIII  (1899),  1-30.  Published 
separately  as  No.  243  of  the  Publications 
(1899).    Philadelphia. 

A  statistical  study  into  the  accuracy  and  adequateness 
of  existing  municipal  statistics  in  various  countries. 

The  Government  of  a  Typical  Prussian  City, 
Halle  a.  S.  Annals  of  the  American  Acad- 
emy of  Political  and  Social  Science,  XV 
(1900),  313-354.  Published  separately  as 
No.  274  of  the  Publications  (1900). 

A  description  of  the  organization  and  working  of  an 
average  Prussian  municipality.  Noted  on  personal 
examination  of  the  machinery  of  local  government. 


22 


Publications 


Street  Railway  Policy  in  Berlin.  Ibid.,  XV 
(1900),  437-440. 

A  history  of  the  most  recent  developments  in  the  field 
of  local  control  of  public  transportation. 

Notes  on  Municipal  Problems  in  Berlin.  Ibid., 
XV  (1900),  477-480.    Also  p.  483. 

An  account  of  the  immediate  and  pressing  problems  of 
local  administration  in  the  greatest  of  German  cities. 

Municipal  Lighting  in  a  Typical  German  City, 
Halle  a.  S.  Municipal  Affairs,  IV  (1900), 
574-594. 

A  historical  account  of  the  origin  and  development  of 
the  department  of  public  lighting  from  technical,  so- 
cial, economic,  and  administrative  view-points. 

The  City  Council  of  Berlin.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Sociology,  VI  (1900),  407-415. 

All  exposition  of  the  constitution  and  working  of  the 
city  council,  with  a  full  explanation  of  the  complicated 
three-class  system  of  voting. 

Constitutionality  of  a  National  University. 
Educational  Revieiv,  XVIII  (1900),  451^66. 

Examination  of  the  constitutionality  of  the  proposed 
national  university  at  Washington,  D.  C,  with  a  review 
of  the  history  of  the  constitutional  discussion. 

The  Metropolitan  Underground  Railway  in 
Paris.  Report  of  the  Street  Railway  Com- 
mission to  the  City  Council  of  the  City  of 
Chicago,  December,  1900,  124-136.  Chi- 
cago, 1901. 

An  account  of  the  origin  and  development  of  the  pres- 
ent scheme  for  a  great  system  of  underground  railways 
for  local  traffic  in  Paris. 

The  Street  Railway  Franchises  of  the  City  of 
Berlin.  Journal  of  Political  Economy, 
IX  (1901),  260-270. 

History  of  the  relation  of  the  city  to  the  street-car  com- 
panies, with  special  account  of  new  contracts  between 
the  city  and  the  companies. 

"  Protection  "  in  the  Encyclopedia  Britannica, 
Times  Edition,  1901;  12  pp. 

Systematic  article  on  the  doctrine  and  policy  of  pro- 
tection as  shown  in  the  history  of  modern  nations. 

Reviews  of 

Black,  Hand-Book  of  American  Constitutional 
Law.  Annals  of  the  American  Academy 
of  Political  and  Social  Science,  VII  (1896), 
475  ff. 

Examination  of  the  fundamental  positions  taken  by 
the  author,  with  some  comment  on  current  misconcep- 
tions of  the  constitution. 

Barrington,  Fallacies  of  Race  Theories  as  Ap- 
plied to  Race  Characteristics.  Ibid.,  VIII 
(1896),  167  S. 

Critique  of  the  fundamental  position  assumed  by  the 
author  that  there  are  no  such  things  as  "racial  peculi- 
arities." 


Ernst  Freund,  [1894 — ],  Professor  of 
Jurisprudence  and  Public  Law. 

The  Legal  Nature  of  Corporations.  8vo,  83. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1897. 

The  Law  of  the  Administration  in  America. 
Political  Science  Quarterly,  IX  (1894),  403- 
425. 

Malice  and  Unlawful  Interference.  Harvard 
Laiv  Review,  XI  (1898),  449^65. 

The  Control  of  Dependencies  Through  Protect- 
orates. Political  Science  Quarterly,  XIV 
(1899),  19-38. 

Amerikanisches  Rechtsleben.  Deutsche  Ju- 
Hstenieitung,  IV  (1899),  369-373.  Trans- 
lated under  the  title  "  Government  and  Law 
in  America  "  by  the  American  Law  Review, 
XXXIV  (1900),  16-27. 

The  New  German  Civil  Code.  Harvard  Law 
Review,  XIII  (1900),  627-637. 

Empire  and  Sovereignty.  Article  in  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  Vol.  IV,  1902. 

\.  study  of  the  constitution  of  t 

political  systems  which  are  not  perfectly  consolidated 


A  study  of  the  constitution  of  the  supreme  power  in 
political  systems  which  are  not  perfectly  consolidated. 
The  types  examined  are :  the  federal  state,  the  autono- 


mous colony  or  dependency,  and  the  protectorate,  three 
forms  of  political  connection  characteristic  of  empires. 

Private  Claims  against  the  State.    Political 
Science  Quarterly,  VIII  (1893),  625-652. 


Charles  Edward  Merriam  [1901 — ], 
Associate  in  Political  Science. 

The  Political  Theory  of  Calhoun.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  VII  (1902),  577-594. 

An  analysis  and  estimate  of  the  characteristic  political 
ideas  of  Calhoun. 

The  Political  Theory  of  Jefferson.  Political 
Science  Quarterly,  XVII  (1902),  24-45. 

An  analysis  of  the  political  theory  underlying  "  Jeffer- 
sonian  Democracy." 

State  Government.  New  York  State  Library 
Bulletins,  No.  72  (1902),  15-18. 

A  review  of  legislation  regarding   state  government 
during  the  year  1901. 

Reviews  of 

Adolph  Dock,  Revolution  imd  Restauration 
liber  die  Souveranitat.  Political  Science 
Quarterly,  XV  (1900),  713-714. 


Department  of  Political  Science 


23 


Herman  Kehm,  Allgemeine  Staatslehre.    Ibid., 

XVI  (1901),  341-345. 
W.  S.  Lilly,  First  Principles  in  Politics.    Ibid., 

174^175. 
J.  L.  Windenberger,  Essai  sur  le  syst&me  de 

politique    6trang6re    de    J.    J.    Rousseau. 

American  Historical  Review,    VI  (1901), 

385-386. 
William  A.  Dimning,  A  History  of  Political 

Theories,  Ancient  and  Mediaeval.  American 

Journal  of  Sociology,  VII  (1902),  851-853. 

SoPHONiSBA  P.  Beeckinbidge  [1901 — ], 
Docent  in  Political  Science;  Ph.D. 
1901. 

A  Study  of  Legal  Tender  in  England.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  Chicago,  University  Press, 
1903. 

Being  chapters  from  the  following  volume : 

Legal  Tender :  A  Study  in  English  and  Ameri- 
can Monetary  History.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  Second 
Series,  VII,  1903. 

The  history  of  the  exercise  of  the  legal-tender  power 
by  the  governments  of  England  and  of  the  United 
States. 

Carl  Evans  Boyd  [1897-8],  Docent  in 
Political  Science;  Ph.D.  1897. 

Constitutional  History  of  Illinois  to  1818.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpublished. 

Cases  in  Constitutional  Law,  edition  of.  8vo, 
678.    Chicago,  Callaghan  and  Co.,  1898. 

Ethel   Glover   Hatfied,    Ph.D.  1898. 

The  Department  of  the  Interior,  its  History, 
Functions,  and  Administration.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  history  of  the  development  of  the  Department  of  the 
Interior  and  of  its  many  bureaus  wiU  illustrate  the 
expansion  of  federal  activities.  The  public  lauds  of 
the  United  States  are  shown  to  be  the  connecting  link 
lietween  most  of  the  bureaus,  as  they  were  the  main 
reason  for  the  creation  of  the  department  in  1849. 
Some  of  the  defects  in  our  methods  of  legislation  are 
clearly  seen  in  laws  concerning  the  department.  The 
administration  of  the  department  is  fully  described, 
some  much  needed  reforms  are  indicated,  and  the  prob- 
able future  of  the  department  outlined. 


Annie  Lucy  Inskeep,  Ph.D.  1899. 
Local  Government  in  California  to  1879.    Doc- 
tor's thesis.     Unpublished. 

1.  Spanish  and  Mexican  rule,  the  missions.  2.  The  tran- 
sition period,  1846-49.  3.  Local  government  as  legally 
provided  for  in  1849-50,  constitutional  provisions  there- 
for, work  of  the  first  legislature  in  passing  a  county 
act  and  general  acts  to  incorporate  cities  and  towns 
and  in  granting  special  charters.  4.  The  new  govern- 
ment in  practical  operation ;  the  overlapping  of  judi- 
cial and_  executive  powers.  5.  Counties.  6.  Districts  — 
school^  irrigation,  reclamation ;  townships.  The  lim- 
ited significance  of  the  town  in  California.  7.  Town 
and  city  acts  passed  by  the  legislature  from  1851-79. 

Samuel  Chiles  Mitchell,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Professor  of  History,  Richmond  Col- 
lege. 

From  Colony  to  Commonwealth  in  Virginia. 

Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 
A  Stricture  on  Schaff's  Account  of  Servetus. 

American  Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897), 

450-459. 

Frederick  A.  Cleveland,  Graduate  stu- 
dent. 

Der  Zug  der  Gesetzgebung  in  den  Vereinigten 
Staaten  hinsichtlich  Kapital  und  Arbeit. 
Jahrbuch  der  internationalen  Vereini- 
gungfilr  vergleichende  Rechtswissenschaft 
und  Volkswirtschaftlehre  zu  Berlin,  1898. 

Growth  of  Democracy  in  the  United  States. 
8vo,  540.    Chicago,  1899. 

Final  Report  of  the  Monetary  Commission. 
Annals  of  the  American  Academy  of 
Political  and  Social  Science,  XIII  (1899), 
26  pp. 

Helen  Honor  Tunnicliff,  Graduate 
student. 

The  Municipal  Code  of  Macomb,  111.,  compris- 
ing the  Special  Acts  of  the  General  Assem- 
bly of  the  State  of  Illinois  relating  to  the 
City  of  Macomb,  and  the  Ordinances  of  the 
Council,  codified  and  revised.  Published 
by  Authority  of  the  City  Council.  8vo,  228. 
Macomb,  111.,  Journal  Printing  Co.,  1897. 

Elizabeth  Wallace,  Graduate  student. 
The  Constitution  of  the  Argentine   Republic 

and  the  Constitution  of  United  States  of 

Brazil.    8vo,  95.    Chicago,  University  Press, 

1894. 

(See  also  under  Romance.) 


24 


Publications 


IV.    HISTOKY. 


John  Feanklin  Jameson  [1901 — ),  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
History. 

Reviews  of 

Hunt,  Writings  of  James  Madison,  I,  II. 
American  Historical  Review,  VII  (1902), 
573-575. 

Hart,  American  History  Told  by  Contempo- 
raries, IV.    Ibid.,  609-610. 

Bomme,  Essays  in  Historical  Criticism.  Ibid., 
745-747. 

Hamilton,  Writings  of  James  Monroe,  V. 
Ibid.,  781-783. 

Hermann  Eduaed  von  Holst  [1892 — ], 
Professor  of  History  and  Head  of  the 
Department  from  1892  to  1900. 

Constitutional  and  Political  History  of  the 
United  States.  Vol.  VII,  1859-1861.  Har- 
per's Ferry  to  Lincoln's  Inaugmration.  8vo, 
xiv-f4:59.  Chicago,  Callaghan  and  Co., 
1892. 

Constitutional  and  Political  History  of  the 
United  States.  Vol.  VIII.  Index  and  List 
of  Authorities  by  Ira  Hutchinson  Brainerd. 
8vo,  xxiii  +  356.  Chicago,  Callaghan  and 
Co.,  1892. 

The  French  Revolution  Tested  by  Mirabeau's 
Career.  Twelve  Lectures  on  the  History  of 
the  French  Revolution  delivered  at  the 
Lowell  Institute,  Boston,  Mass.  2  vols.  8vo, 
vi  +  258,  264.  Chicago,  Callaghan  and  Co., 
1894. 

Reviews  of 

G.  E.  Howard,  Introduction  to  the  Local  Con- 
stitutional History  of  the  United  States. 
Historische  Zeitschrift,  N.  F.,  LXIX  (1892), 
366-369. 

E.  C.  Mason,  The  Veto  Power.  Ibid.,  370- 
372. 


Third  Annual  Report  of  the  Society  for  the 
History  of  the  Germans  in  Maryland.  Ibid., 
372-373. 

J.  G.  Bourinot,  Manual  of  the  Constitutional 
History  of  Canada.    Ibid.,  373-374. 

K.  von  Kalkstein,  Zur  Verfassungsgeschichte 
Nordamerikas.    Ibid.,  LXX  (1893),  175. 

J.  F.  Rhodes,  History  of  the  United  States 
from  the  Compromise  of  1850.  Vols.  I  and 
II.    Ibid.,  LXXVII  (1896),  337-342. 

Benjamin  Teeey  [1892 — ],  Professor  of 
Mediaeval  and  English  History. 

A  History  of  England  from  the  Earliest  Times 
to  the  Death  of  Queen  Victoria.  8vo,  xii  + 
1100.  35  maps,  35  tables.  Chicago,  Scott, 
Foresman  &  Co.,  1901. 

The  Place  of  the  Mimicipium  in  the  Roman 
Constitution.  Annual  Publication  of  the 
Oneida  Historical  Society,  Utica,  N.  Y. 
(1894),  68-94. 

An  attempt  to  show  the  importance  of  the  local  civitas 
in  the  Roman  imperial  system  and  to  emphasize  the 
federal  nature  of  the  Early  Empire. 

Die  Heimstatten-Gesetz-Bewegimg.  Deutsch- 
Amerikanische  Geschichtsbldtter,  six  num- 
bers, beginning  in  April,  1902:  II,  2.  5, 1-10; 
3.  5,  1-17;  4.  5, 1-11. 

Designed  to  show  the  political  influence  of  the  debates 
upon  the  homestead  law,  especially  of  the  opposition 
of  southern  leaders  from  1846  to  1861,  in  alienating  the 
Northwest,  more  particularly  the  German  settlers, 
from  the  Democratic  ijarty  and  thus  precipitating  the 
new  alignment  of  parties  of  1856  and  1860. 

Reviews  of 

Francis  C.  Lowell,  Joan  of  Arc.    American 

Historical  Review,  II  (1896),  131-134. 
Paul  Guiraud,  Fustel  de  Coulanges.  Ibid.,  IV 

(1899),  389-390. 
Seeley,  Growth  of  British  Policy.    American 

Journal  of  Sociology,  II  (1897),  118-125. 
Adams,  Law  of  Civilization  and  Decay.  Ibid., 

467-471. 
Goldwin  Smith,  The  United  Kingdom.    Ibid., 

VI  (1901),  419-422. 


Department  of  History 


25 


Leonard  Courtney,  The  Working  Constitution 
of  the  United  Kingdom.  American  Histo- 
rical Review,  VII  (1901),  587-588. 

George  Stephen  Goodspeed  [1892 — ], 
Professor  of  Ancient  History. 

Outlines  for  Lectures  on  the  History  of  the 

Hebrews.    Printed  for  use  in  classes  at  the 

University.    8vo,  90.    1897. 
Israel's  Messianic  Hope  to  the  Time  of  Jesus. 

12mo,  X  +  315.    New  York,   The  Macmillan 

Co.,  1900. 

A  study  of  Hebrew  messianic  prophecy,  in  the  large 
sense  of  the  ideals  of  Israel,  in  its  historical  develop- 
ment. 

An  Outline  of  Babylonian-Assyrian  History. 

In  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  Literature, 

edited   by   Robert  Francis  Harper,  1901, 

LXIII-LXXXIIL 
A  History  of  the  Babylonians  and  Assyrians. 

12mo,  xiii  +  422.    New  York,  Charles  Scrib- 

ner's  Sons,  1902. 

Follows  the  history  of  these  peoples  from  the  begin- 
nings of  our  knowledge  of  human  settlement  in  the 
Tigro-Euphrates  valley  to  the  capture  of  Babylon  by 
Cyrus  the  Persian. 

The  Book  of  Job  in  Other  Literatures.  Old 
and  New  Testament  Student,  XV  (1892), 
45-51, 105-114. 

A  comparison  of  the  solution  of  the  problem  of  life 
found  in  Job,  with  other  solutions  of  the  same  problem 
in  the  world's  thought. 

The  RetiuTi  of  the  Exiles.  Biblical  World, 
I  (1893),  40-48. 

A  study  of  the  first  fifteen  years  of  the  post-exilic  period 
of  Jewish  history. 

Haggai  and  Zechariah.    Ibid.,  124-133. 

The  prophets  and  their  messages  are  studied  in  the 
light  of  the  historical  situation  from  521  to  516  B.  C. 

Ezra  and  Nehemiah.    Ibid.,  208-219. 
The  Book  of  Job.    Ibid.,  288-293. 

The  book  is  interpreted  in  the  light  of  the  exile,  and  its 
essential  teaching  as  a  new  revelation  of  God. 

The  Book  of  Proverbs.    Ibid.,  365-370. 
The  Book  of  Ecclesiastes.    Ibid.,  453-460. 

An  attempt  is  made  to  discover  the  teachings  of  the 
book  which  are  of  permanent  value. 

The  Successors  of  Ezra  the  Scribe.  Ibid.,  II 
(1893),  97-105. 

The  inner  life  of  Judaism  in  the  fourth  century  B.  C. 

A  Sketch  of  Canaanitish  History  to  about  the 

Year  1000  B.  C.    Ibid.,  VII  (1896),  459-471. 


A  Sketch  of  Assyrian  History  with  Special 
Reference  to  Palestine  from  about  the  Year 
1000  B.  C.    Ibid.,  IX  (1897),  401^14. 

The  Foreshadowings  of  the  Christ.  Ibid., 
VIII,  IX  (1896-1897).  Seven  articles,  en- 
larged and  published  as  "  Israel's  Messianic 
Hope  to  the  Time  of  Jesus."    (See  above.) 

Israel's  Messianic  Hopes.  Ibid.,  XII  (1898), 
400436. 

The  Persian  Empire  from  Darius  to  Artaxerxes. 
Ibid.,  XIV  (1899),  251-257. 

The  main  facts  of  Persian  history  in  their  bearing  tiiKjn 
the  life  of  the  Jewish  people. 

Sennacherib's  Invasion  of  Judah.   Cumberland 

Presbyterian  Quarterly,  I  (1892),  93-108. 

A  critical  examination  of  the  Old  Testament  narratives 
and  a  comparison  of  the  Assyrian  account  with  an 
attempt  to  combine  the  two. 

Oliver  J.  Thatcher  [1894 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  History. 

A  Sketch  of  the  History  of  the  Apostolic 
Church.  12mo,  304.  Boston,  Houghton, 
Mifflin  &  Co.,  1894. 

Europe  in  the  Middle  Age.  In  collaboration 
with  Ferdinand  Schwill.  8vo,  681.  New 
York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1896. 

Critical  Work  on  the  Latin  Sources  for  the 
First  Crusade.  Annual  Report  of  the 
American  Historical  Association,  IV  (1900), 
396-412. 

An  account  of  the  Latin  sources  of  the  first  rank  and  of 
the  reconstruction  caused  by  the  modern  process  of 
shifting  the  emphasis  from  the  secondary  to  the  pri- 
mary sources. 

Kleine  Mittheilung  zu  Otto  von  Freising,  Gesta 
Friderici,  II,  56.  Mittheilungen  des  Insti- 
tuts  fur  dsterreichische  Geschichtsfor- 
schung,  XXII  (1901),  659-661. 

A  critical  inquiry  concerning  the  duration  of  the  Peace 
of  the  Land  proclaimed  by  Frederick  I.,  1156,  for  Ba- 
varia, with  proof  that  it  was  not  limited  to  a  year,  as 
has  always  been  believed. 

Studies  Concerning  Adrian  IV.  The  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
Vol.  IV,  1902. 

Ueber  die  Bedeutung  des  Wortes  Tomeamen- 
tum,  Otto  von  Freising,  Gesta  Friderici,  I, 
17.  Mittheilungen  des  Instituts  filr  dster- 
reichische Geschichtsfoi'schung,  XXIII 
(1902),  639-643. 


26 


Publications 


Francis  Wayland  Shepaedson  [1892 — ], 
Associate  Professor  of  American  His- 
tory. 

Is  the  Puritan  Element  Overestimated  ?  Den- 
ison  Quarterly,  I  (1893),  29-46.  Keprinted 
as  pamphlet. 

An  Unfamiliar  American  Society.  Ibid.,  Ill 
(1895),  80-100.    Reprinted  as  pamphlet. 

Irregularities  in  Presidential  CJounts.  Ibid,, 
215-231.    Reprinted  as  pamphlet. 

A  Historical  Sketch  of  the  University  of  Chi- 
cago. The  President's  Report,  1897-98, 
1-29.  Revised  and  expanded  as  a  Docu- 
mentary History  of  the  University  of  Chi- 
cago, 1890-1902,  and  pubUshed  in  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications^ 
First  Series,  Vol.  I. 

Suggestions  from  the  Life  of  Abraham  Lin- 
coln.   Self  Culture,  VIII  (1899),  648-653. 

The  Old  Granville  and  the  New.  New  Eng- 
land Magazine,  XX  (1899),  97-117. 

A  sociological  study  of  American  migration,  describing 
the  formation  in  Granville,  Mass.,  of  a  church  colony, 
which  made  an  overland  journey  to  Ohio  and  founded 
a  new  Granville.  The  special  object  was  to  show  New 
England  survivals  after  nearly  a  century  and  to  indi- 
cate the  nature  of  the  modifications  made  in  the  wes- 
tern environment. 

Reviews  of 

McMaster,  History  of  the  People  of  the  United 

States,  Vol.  IV.  Dial,  XVIII  (1892),  319-320. 

Lothrop,  Life  of  William  H.  Seward.    Ibid., 

XXI  (1896),  282-283. 

Eggleston,  The  Beginners  of  a  Nation.    Ibid., 

XXII  (1897),  83-81. 

Schofield,  Forty-six  Years  in  the  Army.  Ibid., 
XXIV  (1898),  352-353. 

Thorpe,  Constitutional  History  of  the  Ameri- 
can People.    Ibid.,  XXV  (1898),  220-222. 

Henderson,  Stonewall  Jackson;  and  Bache, 
George  Gordon  Meade.  Ibid.,  XXVI  (1899), 
302-305. 

Rhodes,  History  of  the  United  States  from  the 
Compromise  of  1850,  Vol  IV.  Jfttd.,  XXVII 
(1899),  312-314. 

Wise,  The  End  of  an  Era;  and  Wise,  Life  of 
Henry  A.  Wise.    Ibid.  (1899),  418-420. 


Hart,  Salmon  P.  Chase;  Adams,  Charles 
Francis  Adams;  and  Storey,  Charles  Sum- 
ner. (American  Statesmen  Series.)  Ibid., 
XXVIII  (1900),  395-396. 

Schouler,  History  of  the  United  States,  Vol.  VI. 
Ibid.  (1900),  461^63. 

McMaster,  History  of  the  People  of  the  United 
States,  Vol.  V.    Ibid.,  XXIX  (1900),  94-96. 

Cox,  Military  Reminiscences  of  the  Civil  War. 
Ibid.,  XXX  (1901),  369-370. 

Edwin  Eele  Spaeks  [1896 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  American  History. 

The  Expansion  of  the  American  People.  Svo, 
462.    Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  «&  Co.,  1899. 

An  attempt  to  describe  the  progress  of  the  people  from 
the  Atlantic  to  the  Pacific  oceans,  and  at  the  same  time 
to  find  the  elements  'in  their  social  development  which 
have  most  contributed  to  nationality. 

The  Men  Who  Made  the  Nation.  Svo,  410. 
New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1900. 

The  Diary  and  Letters  of  Henry  Ingersoll. 
American  Historical  Review,  III  (1898), 
674-702. 

The  Cumberland  National  Road  as  a  Union- 
making  Factor.  Doctor's  thesis.  Unpub- 
lished. 

Reinew  of 

McCrady,  South  Carolina  in  the  Revolution. 
Annals  of  the  American  Academy,  April, 
1901,  501-502. 

Ferdinand  Schwill  [1892 — ],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Modern  History. 

Europe  in  the  Middle  Age.  In  collaboration 
with  Oliver  J.  Thatcher.    (See  above.) 

History  of  Modern  Evurope.  8vo,  ix  -f  444. 
New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1899. 

Reviews  of 

Bigelow,  History  of  the  German  Struggle  for 

Liberty.    American  Historical  Review,  II 

(1897),  519-521. 
Lazzarini,     Marino    Faliero:     La    Congiura. 

American   Historical  Review,  III  (1898), 

208-209. 


Department  op  History 


27 


Robinson  and  Rolfe,  Petrarch.  Selected  Let- 
ters.   Ihid.,  IV  (1899),  514-516. 

Henderson,  A  Short  History  of  Germany.  Ibid., 
VIII  (1902),  110-112. 

George  Emory  Fellows  [1895-1902], 
Assistant  Professor  of  History;  Presi- 
dent of  the  University  of  Maine. 

Constitutionalism.  An  article  in  Fimk  and 
Wa^all's  Encyclopedia  of  Social  Re- 
forms, 1895,  334r-338. 

Ralph  C.  H.  Catterall  [1894-1902], 
Instructor  in  Modern  History;  Assist- 
ant Professor  of  History,  Cornell  Uni- 
versity. 

The  First  Six  Years  of  the  Second  Bank  of 
the  United  States.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo, 
104.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1902. 

Being  chapters  from  the  following  volume : 

The  Second  Bank  of  the  United  States.  8vo, 
538.  The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial 
Publications,  Second  Series,  Vol.  II,  1902. 

a  full  account  of  the  bank  in  its  relations  to  the  govern- 
ment, to  the  currency,  and  to  politics.  Among  other 
topics  the  following  are  fully  discussed:  the  bank's 
control  of  the  state  banks;  the  nature  of  its  circula- 
ting media ;  its  dealings  in  exchange ;  the  branch 
drafts ;  the  relations  between  the  Jackson  administra- 
tion and  the  bank ;  the  branch  bank  system  of  the 
bank,  and  the  bank's  work  as  a  governmental  agency. 

The  Issues  of  the  Second  Bank  of  the  United 
States.  Journal  of  Political  Economy,  V 
(1897),  421^57. 

Discusses  the  nature  and  amount  of  the  currency  issued 
by  the  Second  Bank  of  the  United  States. 

An  Alleged  Specie  Circular  of  1827.  Nation, 
December  30,  1897. 

A  critical  examination  of  the  question  whether  such  a 
circular  was  issued  under  Adams. 

Some  Recent  Literature  on  Oliver  Cromwell. 
Year-book  of  the  Bibliographical  Society 
of  Chicago  (1900-1901),  32-50. 

Brief  critical  notes  on  a  number  of  recent  books  on 
Cromwell. 

A  Suspicious  Document  in  Whitelock's  "  Me- 
morials." English  Historical  Review,  XVI 
(1901),  737-739. 

A  note  intended  to  point  out  the  invalidity  of  a  doca- 
ment  hitherto  accepted  as  authentic. 


Reviews  of 

Haynes,  Reciprocity  Treaty  with  Canada. 
Journal  of  Political  Economy,  I  (1893), 
478-479. 

Rose,  Revolutionary  and  Napoleonic  Era. 
Ibid.,  Ill  (1895),  384-386. 

Ingram,  Critical  Examination  of  Irish  His- 
tory. American  Historical  Review,  VI 
(1901),  779-781. 

James  Westfall  Thompson  [1895 — ], 
Instructor  in  European  History. 

The  Development  of  the  French  Monarchy 
under  Louis  VI  le  Gros  (1108-1137).  8vo, 
xii  +  114.  Doctor's  thesis.  Chicago,  Uni- 
versity Press,  1895. 

An  attempt  to  determine  the  nature,  extent,  and  value 
of  the  intensive  development  of  the  French  monarchy 
in  the  first  half  of  the  twelfth  century. 

Some  Suggestions  Concerning  the  Needs  and 
Methods  of  Historical  Bibliography.  Year- 
book of  the  Bibliographical  Society  of 
Chicago  (1899-1900),  26-37. 

The  Decline  of  the  Missi  Dominici  in  Pran- 
kish Gaul.  Article  in  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  Vol.  IV,  1902. 

Reviews  of 

Kiener,  Verfassimgsgeschichte  der  Provence. 
American  Historical  Review,  V  (1900), 
555-557. 

Perry,  St.  Louis  of  France.    Ibid.,  VII  (1901), 

12&-130. 
Brette,  La  France  au  milieu  du  XVIP  si^cle. 

Ibid.,  VII  (1902),  556-557. 
Coville,  Les  premiers  Valois  et  la  guerre  de 

cent  ans.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1902),  119-121. 

Agnes  M.  Wergeland  [1897-1902],  Do- 
cent  in  History;  Professor  of  History, 
University  of  Wyoming. 

Slavery  in  Germanic  Society  During  the  Mid- 
dle Ages.  Journal  of  Political  Economy, 
IX  (1900-01),  98-120,  398-422;  X  (1902), 
230-254. 

Referring  to  the  opinion  that  slavery  in  its  severest 
form  ceased  co  exist  with  the  beginning  of  the  Middle 


28 


Publications 


Ages  and  Germanic  rule,  the  article  attempts  to  show 
that  this  was  not  the  case.  The  subject  is  studied  in 
its  chief  phases:  (1)  the  reduction  of  the  free  man  to 
slave,  (2)  the  gradual  amelioration  of  the  state  of  the 
slave,  and  (3)  the  restitution  to  rights  and  liberty. 
The  economic  situation,  rather  than  the  social,  is  shown 
to  be  of  chief  importance. 

Reviews  of 

Page,  The  End  of  Villainage  in   England. 

Journal  of  Political  Economy^  IX  (1901), 

304^306. 

Cunningham,  Essay  on  Western  Civilization. 
Ibid.,  464-468. 


Ernest  Alanson  Balch,  Ph.D.  1898; 
Northwestern  Mutual  Life  Insurance 
Co.,  Detroit. 

Recent  Phases  of  Eeciprocity  in  the  United 
States.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

After  a  rapid  sketch  of  the  reciprocity  treaties  from 
the  revocation  of  that  with  Canada  in  1866,  the  book 
discusses  the  part  played  by  James  G.  Blaine  and 
others  in  reciprocity  measures,  the  events  that  led  to 
the  final  adoption  of  the  reciprocity  clause  of  the  tariff 
act  of  1890,  the  history  of  that  clause,  its  effects,  its  re- 
vocation by  the  tariff"  act  of  1894,  the  revival  of  reci- 
procity in  the  Dingley  act  of  1897,  and  the  commercial 
results  of  reciprocity. 

James  Fosdick  Baldwin,  Ph.D.  1897; 
Instructor  in  History,  Vassar  College. 

The  Scutage  and  Knight  Service  in  England. 
8vo,  XX +  119.  Doctor's  thesis.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1897. 

Discusses  the  subject  of  the  levy  of  scutage  in  the  light 
of  its  bearing  on  the  growth  of  the  monarchy. 

Kalph  C.  H.  Catteball,  Ph.D.  1902. 
(See  above.) 

James  Walter  Fertig,  Ph.D.  1898; 
Instructor  in  History,  Lewis  Institute, 
Chicago. 

The  Secession  and  Reconstruction  of  Tennes- 
see, Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  108.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1898. 

Discusses  the  political  history  of  Tennessee  during  the 
years  1860  to  1866  in  four  chapters,  as  follows :  I.  Seces- 
sion; II.  Military  Government;  III.  Reconstructed 
State  Government ;  IV.  Federal  Reconstraction. 


Frank  George  Franklin,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Professor  of  History,  Mount  Union 
College. 

Naturalization  in  the  United  States,  with 
Special  Reference  to  the  Legislative  His- 
tory from  the  Declaration  of  Independence 
to  the  Civil  War.  Doctor's  thesis.  Unpub- 
lished. 

George  Piebce  Gabrison,  Ph.D.  1896; 
Professor  of  History,  University  of 
Texas. 

Federal  Control  of  Congressional  Elections. 
Part  I:  The  Genesis  of  the  Constitutional 
Provision.    Doctor's  thesis.     Unpublished. 

The  argument  is  that  the  South  Carolina  delegates, 
whose  attitude  was  in  general  nationalistic,  fearing 
the  possibility  of  federal  interference  with  congres- 
sional elections  in  that  state  so  as  to  impair  the  domi- 
nance of  Charleston  in  South  Carolina  politics,  sought 
to  procure  through^  Rutledge,  chairman  of  the  commit- 
tee of  detail,  a  provision  in  the  report  of  that  committee 
which  would  leave  the  control  of  such  elections  to  the 
states,  and  that  the  result  was  the  first  clause  of  the 
first  paragraph  in  Art.  I,  Sec.  4.  Part  II  is  to  contain 
the  history  of  the  efforts  at  statutory  provision  for  fed- 
eral control  of  congressional  elections. 

Texas.  Article  in  Johnson's  Universal  En- 
cyclopedia, VIII  (1895),  84^88. 

N.  DwiGHT  Harris,  Ph.D.  1901;  Pro- 
fessor  of  History,  Lawrence  University. 

The  History  of  Negro  Servitude  and  the  Sla- 
very Agitation  in  Illinois.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

Walter  Flavius  MoCaleb,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Editor  of  the  Gazetteer  Department  of 
the  New  International  Encyclopedia. 

History  of  the  Aaron  Burr  Conspiracy.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.     Unpublished. 

Some  Obscure  Points  in  the  Mission  Period  of 
Texas  History.  Texas  Historical  Quar- 
terly, I  (1898),  216-225. 

The  First  Phase  of  the  Gutierrez-Magee  Expe- 
dition.   Ibid.,  II  (1901),  218-229. 

A  study  from  Spanish  sources  of  the  filibustering  ex- 
pedition led  into  Texas  in  1812-13. 


Depabtment  of  Aeoh^ologt 


29 


Paul  Fredebick  Peck,  Ph.D.  1901 ;  Pro- 
fessor of  History,  Bloomsburg,  Penn- 
sylvania, State  Normal  School. 

The  Development  of  the  Theory  of  Succession 
under  the  Early  Norman  Kings.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

An  attempt  to  ascertain  the  relative  influence  of  the 
principles  of  hereditary  right  and  of  election  in  the 
succession  of  the  several  kings  of  England  during  the 
Early  Norman  Period. 

John  W.  Perrin,  Ph.D.  1895;  Profes- 
sor of  History,  Western  Reserve  Uni- 
versity. 

History  of  Compulsory  Education  in  New 
England.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  71.  Mead- 
ville,  Penn.,  1896. 

William  Rullkoetter,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Professor  of  History  and  German, 
Drury  College. 

The  Legal  Protection  of  Woman  among  the 
Ancient  Germans.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  96. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1900. 

The  investigation  is  confined  to  the  facts  relative  to 
the  status  of  woman  in  the  early  historic  period,  when 
purely  Germanic  ideas  were  still  dominating  the  social 
life  and  determined  its  conditions. 

Henry  Lawrence  Schoolcraft,  Ph.D. 
1899 ;  Professor  of  History,  University 
of  Illinois. 

The  Genesis  of  the  Grand  Remonstrance  from 
Parliament  to  King  Charles  I.  Doctor's 
thesis.  8vo,  45.  University  of  Illinois 
Publications,  New  Series,  I,  No.  7. 


CoBA  L.  ScoFiELD,  Ph.D.  1898 ;  Instruc- 
tor in  History,  Wellesley  College. 

A  Study  of  the  Court  of  Star  Chamber  largely 
based  on  Manuscripts  in  the  British  Museum 
and  the  Pubhc  Record  Oflfice.  Doctor's 
thesis.  8vo,  xxx  +  82.  Chicago,  University 
Press,  1900. 

Geobge  C.  Selleby,  Ph.D.  1901;  In- 
structor in  History,  University  of  Wis- 
consin. 

The  Suspension  of  Habeas  Corpus  During  the 
Civil  War.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

John  Olaf  Sethbe,  Ph.D.  1901. 

The  Political  History  of  Minnesota  Prior  to 
Her  Admission  into  the  Union:  A  Study  in 
American  History.  Doctor's  thesis.  Un- 
published. 

A  discussion  of  the  political  phase  of  the  territorial 
history  of  Minnesota,  with  a  brief  preliminary  account 
of  the  early  explorers  and  the  first  settlements  of  the 
territory. 

Edwin  Eble  Sparks,  Ph.D.  1900.  (See 
above.) 

James  Westfall  Thompson,  Ph.D.  1895. 
(See  above.) 

Chables  Tbuman  Wyckoff,  Ph.D.  1897 ; 
Assistant  Professor  of  History,  Bradley 
Polytechnic  Institute,  Peoria,  111. 

The  Feudal  Relations  Between  the  Crowns  of 
England  and  Scotland  Under  the  Early 
Plantagenets.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  xv-f 
159.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1897. 

The  work  (1)  discusses  the  sources  bearing  on  the  sub- 
ject; C^)  applies  them  to  answer  the  question:  Was 
the  kingdom  of  Scotland  in  a  state  of  legal  and  perma- 
nent dependence  on  the  English  crown  from  9(24  to  1328T 


V.    ARCHEOLOGY 


Fbank  Bigelow  Tabbell  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor of  Classical  Archaeology. 

A  History  of  Greek  Art.  Svo,  xiii  +  29b.  Mead- 
ville,  Penn.,  Flood  &  Vincent,  1896.  Now 
published  by  The  Macmillan  Co.,  New 
York. 


The  Direction  of  Writing  in  Attic  Vase-Inscrip- 
tions. Studies  in  Classical  Philology  of 
the  University  of  Chicago,  I  (1895),  114r- 
123. 

The  practice  of  writing  from  right  to  left,  which  in 
GreeK  lapidary  inscriptions  became  nearly  extinct  be- 
fore the  end  of  the  sixth  century,  B.  C,  was  not  wholly 
abandoned  by  the  vase-painters  till  after  the  middle  of 
the  fifth  century,  B.  C. 


30 


Publications 


A  Signed  Cylix  by  Duris,  in  Boston.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  ArchoRology,  Second  Series, 
IV  (1900),  183-191. 

Heresy  at  Athens  in  the  Time  of  Plato.  The 
New  World,  II  (1893),  687-694. 

A  discussion  of  the  question,  how  far  conformity  to  a 
standard  of  religious  orthodoxy,  as  distinguished  from 
observance  of  religious  ritual,  was  insisted  upon  in 
ancient  Athens. 

A  Greek  Hand  Mirror  in  the  Art  Institute  of 
Chicago.     With   a   half-tone  plate.      The 


University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, First  Series,  VI,  1-4. 
A  Cantharus  from  the  Factory  of  Brygos  in 
the  Boston  Museum  of  Fine  Arts.    With 
two  heliotype  plates.    Ibid.,  5-9. 

James  Henry  Breasted,  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Egyptology  and  the  Semitic 
Languages. 

(See  under  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures.) 


VI.    SOCIOLOGY  AND  ANTHROPOLOGY 


Albion  W.  Small  [1892 — ],  Professor 
and  Head  of  the  Department  of  Soci- 
ology. 

An  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Society.  In 
collaboration  with  George  E.  Vincent.  8vo, 
384.   American  Book  Co.,  1894. 

The  Relation  of  Sociology  to  Economics.  Jour- 
nal of  Political  Economy,  III  (1895),  169- 
184. 

The  Organic  Concept  of  Society.  Annals  oj 
the  American  Academy,  V  (1895),  740-746. 

"  Social "  versus  "  Societary."  Ibid.,  V  (1895), 
948-953. 

The  Era  of  Sociology.  American  Journal  of 
Sociology,  I  (1895),  1-15. 

Superiority  and  Subordination  as  Subject  Mat- 
ter of  Sociology.  Translation  from  the 
German  of  Simmel.  Ibid.,  II  (1896),  167- 
189,  392-415. 

Some  Demands  of  Sociology  Upon  Pedagogy. 
Ibid.,  839-851. 

The  Sociologist's  Point  of  View.  Ibid.,  Ill 
(1897),  145-171. 

Present  Status  of  Sociology  in  Germany. 
Translation  from  the  German  of  Thon. 
Ibid.,  718-736,  792-800. 

The  Persistence  of  Social  Groups.  Transla- 
tion from  the  German  of  Simmel.  Ibid., 
Ill  (1898),  662-698, 825-836;  IV  (1898),  35-50. 

Methodology.  Ibid.,  IV  (1898),  113-144,  235- 
256,  380-394. 


A  Unit  in  Sociology.  Annals  of  the  American 
Academy,  IX  (1899),  81-85. 

The  Scope  of  Sociology.  Ibid.,  V  (1900),  506- 
526,  617-647,  778-873;  VI  (1900-01),  42-66, 
177-203,  487-531;  VIII  (1902),  197-250. 

The  Number  of  Members  as  Determining  the 
Sociological  Form  of  the  Group.  Transla- 
tion from  the  German  of  Simmel.  Ibid., 
VIII  (1902),  1-46,  158-196. 

The  Significance  of  Sociology  for  Ethics.  The 
University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, First  Series,  Vol.  IV,  111-149. 

Reviews  of 

Hobson,  Evolution  of  Modem  Capitalism ;  Von 

Halle,  Trusts;  Dyer,  Evolution  of  Industry. 

A  comparative  review.    American  Journal 

of  Sociology,  I  (1895),  219-228. 

Giddings,  Principles  of  Sociology.  Ibid.,  II 
(1896),  288-305. 

Fairbanks,  Introduction  to  Sociology.  Ibid., 
305-310. 

Schaflfle,  Bau  und  Leben  des  socialen  KOrpers. 
Ibid.,  310-315. 

Barth,  Die  Philosophic  der  Geschichte  als  So- 
ciologie.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1898),  700-702. 

Stuckenberg,  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  So- 
ciology.   Ibid.  (1898),  855-859. 

Crowell,  Logical  Process  of  Social  Develop- 
ment.   Ibid.,  IV  (1898),  257-266. 


Department  op  Sociology  and  Anthropology 


31 


Giddings,  Elements  of  Sociology.  Ibid.  (1899), 

543-554. 
Giddings,  Inductive  Sociology.     Science,  XV 

(1902),  700-706. 

Charles  Kiohmond  Henderson  [1892 — ], 
Professor  of  Sociology. 

An  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  the  Depend- 
ent, Defective,  and  Delinquent  Classes.  First 
edition,  12mo,  x+277, 1893;  second  edition, 
X  +  400,  1901.  D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  Boston 
and  New  York. 

a  descriptive,  critical  and  technical  discussion  of  the 
abnormal  classes  and  of  institutions  of  charity  and 
correction. 

The  Social  Spirit  in  America.  Svo,  vii  +  350. 
Flood  and  Vincent,  Meadville,  Penn.,  1897. 
Second  edition,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co., 
Chicago,  1902. 

Illustrations  of  the  functions  and  scope  of  voluntary 
associations  for  culture  and  philanthropy  in  the  United 
States. 

Social  Settlements.  16mo,  iv  + 196.  New 
York,  Lentilham  &  Co.,  1899.  Second  edi- 
tion, 1902. 

History,  purpose  and  methods  of  settlements. 

Social  Elements.  Svo,  ix-f- 405  4- maps.  New 
York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1898. 

Illustrations  of  the  contributions  of  sociology  to  edu- 
cational aims  and  methods. 

The  Christian  and  Civic  Economy  of  Large 
Towns,  by  Thomas  Chalmers.  Abridged. 
Svo,  xi  -f  350.  New  York,  Charles  Scrib- 
ner's Sons,  1900. 

The  introduction  gives  a  summary  and  criticism  of  Dr. 
Chalmer's  social  teachings. 

Die  ekonomische  Lage  der  Collegien  im  Staate 
Illinois,  Nord-Amerika.  Svo,  59.  Leipzig, 
1901. 

Early  Poor  Laws  in  the  West.  Charities 
Review,  III  (1893),  85-88. 

Public  Relief  and  Private  Charity.  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  International  Congress  of 
Charities,  Correction,  and  Philanthropy, 
1893,  8^-97.  The  Johns  Hopkins  Univer- 
sity Press. 

Outdoor  Relief  in  the  United  States.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  National  Conference  of  Char- 
itien  and  Correction,  1894,  106-118. 


The  Practical  Issue  of  Studies  of  the  Criminal. 
Proceedings  of  the  National  Prison  Asso- 
ciation, 1894, 119-134. 

The  Place  and  Function  of  Voluntary  Organi- 
zations. American  Journal  of  Sociology, 
I  (1895),  327-334. 

Sociology  and  Theology.  Ibid.,  I  (1895),  381- 
383. 

Business  Men  and  Social  Theorists.    Ibid.,  I 

(1896),  385-397. 
The  German  Inner  Mission.    Ibid.,  583-595. 
The  Merit  System  in  Public  Institutions  of 

Charity  and  Corrections.    Annual  Report 

of  the  Ohio  State  Conference  of  Charities 

and  Correction,  1896,  382-391. 

Preventive  Measures,  Social  and  Educational. 
Proceedings  of  the  National  Prison  Asso- 
ciation, 1896,  151-162. 

New  Phases  of  Charity  Organization.  16  pp. 
Published  by  Indianapolis  Charity  Organi- 
zation Society,  1897. 

The  Poor  Laws  of  the  United  States.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  National  Conference  of  Char- 
ities and  Correction,  1897,  256-271. 

Das  Armenwesen  in  den  Vereinigten  Staaten 
von  Nord-Amerika.  Jahrbucher  filr  Na- 
tionalCkonomie  und  Statistik,  dritte  Folge, 
LXX  (1898),  18-37. 

Economy  of  Trained  Service.  Annual  Report 
of  the  Ohio  State  Conference  of  Charities 
and  Correction,  1898,  9-14. 

Politics  in  Charitable  and  Penal  Institutions. 
Ibid.,  237-246. 

Politics  in  Public  Institutions  of  Charity  and 
Correction.  American  Journal  of  Soci- 
ology, IV  (1898),  202-234. 

The  Relation  of  Philanthropy  to  Social  Order 
and  Progress.  President's  address  before 
the  National  Conference  of  Charities  and 
Correction,  1899.    Proceedings,  1-15. 

Prison  Laboratories.  American  Journal  of 
Sociology  VI  (1900),  316-323.  Also  in  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  National  Prison  Associa- 
tion, 1900,  232-246. 


32 


Publications 


The  Manual  Training  School  as  a  Factor  in 
Social  Progress.  Proceedings  of  the  East- 
ern Manual  Training  Association,  1900, 
64-72.  Also  published  in  Manual  Training 
Magazine,  II  (1900),  1-9. 

Neglected  Children  in  Neglected  Communities. 
Proceedings  of  the  National  Conference  of 
Charities  and  Correction,  1901,  219-224. 

The  Scope  of  Social  Technology.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  VI  (1901),  465-486. 

The  Social  Position  of  the  Warden.  Presi- 
dent's address  before  the  National  Prison 
Association,  1902.    (In  press.) 

Practical  Sociology  in  the  Service  of  Social 
Ethics.  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  First  Series,  III,  25-49. 

Eeviews  of 

F.  H.  Wines,  Punishment  and  Reformation. 

American  Journal  of  Sociology,  I  (1896), 

501-503. 
Enrico  Ferri,  Criminal  Sociology.    Ibid.,  785- 

788. 
Amory  H.  Bradford,  Heredity  and  Christian 

Problems.    Ibid.,  II  (1896),  132-133. 
George  Harris,  Moral  Evolution.    Ibid.,  132- 

133. 
F.  J.  Stimson,  Labor  in  Its  Relations  to  Law. 

Ibid.,  135-136. 
R.  A.  Woods,  editor,  The  Poor  in  Great  Cities. 

Ibid.,  136-137. 
W.  H.  Mallock,  Classes  and  Masses.    Ibid., 

472^73. 
J.  Shield  Nicholson,  Strikes  and  Social  Prob- 
lems.     Ibid.,  4:18-4:14:. 

A.  Posada,  Theories  modernes  sur  les  origines 
de  la  f amille,  de  la  soci6t6,  et  de  l'6tat.  Ibid., 
(1897),  607-609. 

Lyman  Abbott,  Christianity  and  Social  Prob- 
lems.   J6td.,  609-610. 

W.  D.  Morrison,  Juvenile  Offenders.  Ibid., 
737-739. 

Mrs.  B.  Bosanquet,  Rich  and  Poor.  Ibid., 
874-875. 

S.  Nitti,  La  population  et  le  syst^me  social. 
Ibid.,  875-879. 


L.  M.  Salmon,  Domestic  Service.    Ibid.,  Ill 

(1897),  114-115. 
A.  Loria,    Probl§mes  sociaux  contemporains. 

Ibid.,  115-120. 

F.  H.  Wines  and  John  Koren,  The  Liquor 
Problem  in  Its  Legislative  Aspects.  Ibid., 
265-266. 

J.  S.  Dennis,  Christian  Missions  and  Social 
Progress.  Ibid.,  Ill  (1898),  545-546,  and  V 
(1899),  125. 

Antonio  Marro,  La  Puberty  studiata  nell' 
uomo  e  nella  donna,  etc.    Ibid.,  703-704. 

Sidney  and  Beatrice  Webb,  Industrial  Democ- 
racy.   Ibid.,  850-855. 

E.  Levasseur,  L'ouvrier  am6ricain.  Ibid.,  IV 
(1898),  94^98. 

W.  F.  Willoughby,  Workingmen's  Insurance. 
Ibid.,  IV  (1899),  695-696. 

S.  and  B.  Webb,  Problems  of  Modem  Industry. 
Ibid.,  843-844. 

G.  F.  Fairchild,  Rural  Wealth  and  Welfare. 
Ibid.,  VI  (1900),  126-127. 

A.  Drahms,  The  Criminal.    Ibid.,  274-275. 

Louis  Skarzynski,  Le  progr^s  social  h  la  fin  du 
XIX«  siecle.    Ibid.,  VII  (1901),  131-132. 

B.  S.  Rowntree,  Poverty:  A  Study  of  Town 
Life.    Ibid.  (1902),  848-849. 

Jane  Addams,  Democracy  and  Social  Ethics. 
Ibid.,  VIII  (1902),  136-138. 

A.  C.  Hall,  Crime  in  its  Relation  to  Social 
Progress.    Ibid.,  276-277. 

Chaeles  Zueblin  [1892 — ],  Professor  of 
Sociology. 

American  Municipal  Progress:  Chapters  in 
Mimicipal  Sociology.  12mo,  380.  New 
York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1902. 

Municipal  sociology,  transportation,  public  works,  sani- 
tation, public  schools,  public  libraries,  public  build- 
ings, parks,  and  boulevards,  public  recreation,  public 
control,  ownership,  and  operation. 

The  Ethics  of  the  Jewish  Question.  Interna- 
tional Journal  of  Ethics,  II  (1892),  462- 
475. 


Depabtment  of  Sociology  and  Anthbopology 


33 


The  Chicago  Ghetto.  Chapter  in  Hull  House 
Maps  and  Papers,  91-111.  T.  Y,  Crowell, 
1895. 

England's  Dominant  Industrial  Position.  Jour- 
nal of  Political  Economy,  V  (1897),  216-227. 

Social  Christianity  in  England.  Methodist 
Review,  LXXIX  (1897),  51-64. 

A  Sketch  of  Socialistic  Thought  in  England. 
Journal  of  Sociology,  III  (1897),  643-661. 

Municipal  Playgrounds  in  Chicago.  Ibid.,  IV 
(1898),  145-158. 

The  World's  First  Sociological  Laboratory. 
Ibid.,  IV  (1899),  557-592. 

Industrial  Democracy.  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,  VII  (1899),  182-203. 

Abolition  of  Grade  Crossings.  Municipal  Af- 
fairs, V  (1901),  817-828. 

Maeion  Talbot  [1892 — ],  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Sanitary  Science. 

Food  as  a  Factor  in  Student  Life.  A  Contri- 
bution to  the  Study  of  Student  Diet.  With 
the  collaboration  of  Ellen  H.  Richards.  8vo, 
26.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1894. 

Home  Sanitation:  A  Manual  for  Housekeepers. 
With  the  collaboration  of  Ellen  H.  Rich- 
ards. 12mo,  85.  Boston,  Home  Science 
Publishing  Co.,  1898. 

Sanitation  and  Sociology.  American  Journal 
of  Sociology,  II  (1896),  74-82. 

Review  of 

Salmon,  Domestic  Science.  Journal  of  Po- 
litical Economy,  IX  (1897),  639-641. 

Fredebick  Stabr  [1892 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Anthropology. 

Notes  on  Mexican  Archaeology.  8vo,  16;  4 
plates  and  12  illustrations.  Chicago,  Uni- 
versity Press,  1894. 

The  Little  Pottery  Objects  of  Lake  Chapala, 
Mexico.  8vo,  27;  43  illustrations.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1897. 


The  Mapa  de  Cuauhtlantzinco  or  Codice  Cam- 
pos. 8vo,  38,  veith  illustrations.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1898. 

Indians  of  Southern  Mexico:  An  Ethnographic 
Album.  4to,  32,  141  plates.  Chicago,  Uni- 
versity Press,  1899. 

Recent  Mexican  Study  of  the  Native  Lan- 
guages of  Mexico.  8vo,  19,  with  illustra- 
tions.   Chicago,  University  Press,  1900. 

The  Physical  Characters  of  the  Indians  of 
Southern  Mexico.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
IV,  51-109. 

(Other  items  not  furnished.) 


William  I.  Thomas  [1894 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Sociology. 

The  Scope  and  Method  of  Folk-psychology. 
American  Journal  of  Sociology,  I  (1896), 
434^45. 

The  relation  of  the  study  of  mental  development  in  the 
race  to  anthropology,  ethnology,  history,  and  sociology. 

On  a  Difference  in  the  Metabolism  of  the  Sexes. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1897),  31-63. 

The  differences  between  the  physical,  mental,  and 
emotional  characters  of  men  and  women,  the  relation 
of  these  to  the  characteristic  organic  processes  of  the 
two  sexes,  and  the  predisposition  of  men  and  women 
to  different  types  of  activity. 

The  Relation  of  Sex  to  Primitive  Social  Con- 
trol.   Ibid.,  754r-776. 

The  maternal  system  in  early  society  furnishes  the 
materials  out  of  which  a  political  organization  is  de- 
veloped, but  is  not  itself  political  in  nature. 

Sex  in  Primitive  Industry.    Ibid.,  IV  (1899), 

474-488. 

The  industrial  arts  are  begun  by  women,  but  are  organ- 
ized and  developed  by  men. 

Sex  in  Primitive  Morality.    Ibid.,  774-787. 

Moral  actions  are  of  a  nature  beneficial  to  the  group 
as  a  whole ;  the  morality  of  men  tends  to  be  an  activity 
morality,  and  that  of  women  a  morality  of  the  person. 

The  Psychology  of  Modesty  and  Clothing. 
Ibid.,  V  (1899),  246-262. 

Examination  of  the  disgust  theory  of  the  origin  of  mod- 
esty, and  a  statement  of  a  theory  that  modesty  origi- 
nates in  the  observation  of  the  effects  of  our  own 
activities  more  immediately  than  in  a  disapproval  of 
the  actions  of  others. 

The  Gaming  Instinct.  Ibid.,  VI  (1901),  750- 
763. 

The  gaming  instinct  is  an  expression  of  the  predacious 
instincts  developed  by  man  in  the  hunting  period. 


34 


Publications 


Der  Ursprung  der  Exogamie.     Zeitschrift  fiir 

Socialwissenschaft,  V  (1902),  1-18. 

The  exogamous  system  of  marriage  is  due  to  interest 
in  the  unfamiliar. 

The  Relation  of  the  Medicine  Man  to  the  Or- 
igin of  the  Professional  Occupations.  Ar- 
ticle in  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  First  Series,  IV. 

An  examination  of  Spencer's  theory  that  the  artistic 
and  learned  occupations  are  developed  by  the  medicine- 
man. The  statement  of  a  theory  that  an  economic  sur- 
plus, particularly  in  the  form  of  patronage,  is  the  most 
important  condition  to  the  development  of  the  profes- 
sional occupations,  and  that  this  condition  is  furnished 
originally  by  the  court  rather  than  by  the  church. 


George  Edgar  Vincent  [1894 — ],  As- 
sociate Professor  of  Sociology. 

Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Society.  In  col- 
laboration with  Albion  W.  Small.  8vo,  384. 
American  Book  Co.,  1894. 

The  Social  Mind  and  Education.  Doctor's 
thesis.  8vo,  ix  +  155.  New  York,  The  Mac- 
millan  Co.,  1897. 

An  attempt  to  interpret  certain  problems  of  education 
in  terms  of  social  or  group  psychology.  The  chief  topics 
discussed  are :  the  nature  of  the  social  mind ;  the  par- 
allelism between  mental  development  in  the  individual 
and  in  the  race ;  the  function  of  social  philosophy  in 
education;  certain  suggestions  as  to  the  college  cur- 
riculum. 

A  Scheme  of  Sociological  Study.  Educational 
Review,  VIII  (1894),  452-460. 

A  plea  for  co-operation  in  the  teaching  of  the  social 
sciences  in  colleges  and  universities ;  for  a  conscious 
efifort  to  shov?  the  unity  and  interrelations  of  econom- 
ics, history,  political  science,  anthropology,  ethnology, 
and  sociology.  It  is  further  urged  that  a  general  intro- 
ductory, descriptive  course  in  sociology  should  precede 
the  detailed  study  of  the  special  social  sciences,  which 
in  turn  should  be  followed  by  a  synthetic  course  in 
social  philosophy  and  social  ethics. 

The  Province  of  Sociology,  American  Jour- 
nal of  Sociology,  I  (1895-96),  473-491. 

An  outline  in  syllabus  form  of  the  history  of  social 
philosophy  from  Plato  and  Aristotle  to  Comte  and 
Spencer.  The  material  is  grouped  in  such  a  way  as  to 
display  the  development  of  ideas  as  to  the  origin  of 
society,  as  to  social  laws,  the  biological  concept,  the 
organic  and  psychological  theories,  etc. 

A  Retarded  Frontier.    Ibid.,  IV  (1898),  1-20. 

A  descriptive  article  based  upon  a  brief  trip  among  the 
mountaineers  of  eastern  Kentucky.  Concrete  illustra- 
tions of  certain  fundamental  social  laws,  e.  g.,  the 
influence  of  contour  on  social  grouping,  effects  of  iso- 
lation, methods  of  social  control,  survivals  of  tradi- 
tions, etc.,  are  pointed  out.  The  scientific  study  of  a 
most  interesting  but  rapidly  passing  type  of  frontier 
life  is  urged. 


Social   Science  and  the  Curriculum.    School 
Review,  X  (1902),  183-194. 

A  plea  for  the  enrichment  of  the  elementary  curriculum 
with  observation  of  industrial  and  social  facts  as  a 
concrete  basis  for  the  later  generalizations  of  history, 
economics,  political  science,  and  sociology.  Ethical 
education  as  to  the  development  of  social  instincts  and 
the  suggestion  of  social  ideals  is  urged  as  a  substitute 
for  premature  moral  teaching  by  precept. 


Jerome  H.  Raymond  [1901 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Sociology. 

American  Municipal  Government:  A  study  of 
the  civic  life  of  three  American  cities  —  New 
York,  Philadelphia,  and  Boston.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 


Ira  Woods  Howerth  [1895 — ],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Sociology. 

The  Present  Condition  of  Sociology  in  the 
United  States.  Annals  of  the  American 
Academy  of  Political  and  Social  Science, 
V  (1894),  112-121. 

A  presentation  of  American  opinion  concerning  the 
scope  and  aim  of  sociology,  and  its  use  as  a  college 
discipline. 

A  Programme  for  Social  Study.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  II  (1896-97),  852- 
872,  and  III  (1897-98),  100-109,  248-257. 

An  analysis  of  society  accompanied  by  an  outlined 
course  of  study  and  a  bibliography. 

The  Social  Aim  in  Education.  Fifth  Year 
Book  of  the  National  Herbart  Society, 
1899,  69-108.  Doctor's  thesis,  I. 

A  critical  analysis  of  the  social  and  the  individual 
aims  in  education  with  an  attempt  to  show  the  subor- 
dinate relation  of  the  individual  or  psychological  aim. 

The  Development  of  the  Social  Aim  in  Educa- 
tion. American  Journal  of  Pedagogy,  XII 
(1899),  230-242,  and  XIII  (1900),  102-109, 
173-184.  Doctor's  thesis,  II. 

An  historical  presentation  of  American  educational 
ideals. 

An  Ethnic  View  of  Higher  Education.  Educa- 
tional Review,  XX  (1900),  345-356. 

A  consideration  of  the  place  and  function  of  higher 
education  from  the  standpoint  of  the  race. 

Education  and  Evolution.  Ibid.,  XXIII  (1902), 
60-80. 

An  attempt  to  show  the  relation  between  the  biological 
evolution  of  the  individual  and  the  artificial  educa- 
tional process,  with  some  suggested  criticisms  of  mod- 
ern education. 


Department  of  Sociology  and  Antheopology 


35 


Education  and  Social  Progress.     Ibid.,  355- 
370. 

On  the  evolution  of  society  and  the  place  and  function 
of  education  as  a  factor  in  conscious  social  evolution. 

Education  and  the  Social  Ideal.    Ibid.,  XXIV 
(1902),  150-165. 

Some  of  the  essential  elements  of  a  rational  social 
ideal  are  pointed  out  and  education  is  considered  in  the 
light  of  these  elements. 

Education  and  the  Individual.     Journal  of 
Pedagogy,  XIV  (1902),  311-324. 

The  subordinate  relation  of  the  individual  to  the  edu- 
cational process  is  shown,  and  the  consequent  necessity 
of  considering  in  education  primarily  the  needs  of 
society. 

Basic  Ideas  of  a  Scientific  Pedagogy.    Edu- 
cation, XXIII  (1902),  129-141. 

The  ideas  of  social  solidarity  and  social  evolution  are 
considered  in  their  relation  to  modern  educational 
thought. 


Max  V^est  [1893-95],  Docent  in  Soci- 
ology  and  Municipal  Institutions. 

The  Theory  of  the  Inheritance  Tax.  Political 
Science  Quarterly,  VIII  (1893),  426-444. 

An  examination  of  the  various  arguments  by  which  the 
taxation  of  inheritances  has  been  supported  or  op- 
posed. 

The  Inheritance  Tax.  Columbia  University 
Studies  in  History,  Economics,  and  Public 
Law,  IV  (1893-94),  171-310. 

The  Teachings  of  Political  Economists  Defin- 
ing Direct  and  Indirect  Taxes.  Svo,  38. 
New  York,  1895. 

Submitted  to  the  Supreme  Court  in  the  income-tax 
cases.  The  summary  points  out  that  while  various 
criteria  have  been  used  to  distinguish  between  direct 
and  indirect  taxes,  an  income  tax  is  direct  according 
to  the  definitions  of  all  economists,  except  the  physio- 
crats. 

Reviews  of 

Clare,  A,  B,  C  of  Foreign  Exchanges.  Jour- 
nal of  Political  Economy,  II  (1893),  105- 
106. 

Ely,  Outlines  of  Economics.  Political  Sci- 
ence Quarterly,  IX  (1894),  311-313. 

The  division  of  the  science  into  social  economics  and 
public  economics  is  commended,  and  supported  by  ref- 
erences to  other  authorities. 

Addams  and  Others,  Philanthrophy  and  Social 
Progress;  Jones,  Bibliography  of  College, 
University,  and  Social  Settlements,  and 
Forward  Movements.    Ibid.,  566-567. 


Drummond,  Lowell  Lectures  on  the  Ascent  of 
Man.    Ibid.,  X  (1895),  343-344. 

The  evolutionary  explanation  of  the  origin  of  altruism 
is  accepted  as  a  successful  refutation  of  Kidd's  thesis 
that  altruism  is  of  ultra-rational  origin. 


Merton  L.  Miller  [1897-1901],  Associ- 
ate in  Anthropology. 

A  Preliminary  Study  of  the  Pueblo  of  Taos, 
New  Mexico.  Doctor's  thesis.  Svo,  48. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1898. 

David  Prescott  Barrows,  Ph.D.  1897; 
Chief  of  the  Bureau  of  Non-Christian 
Tribes  for  the  Philippine  Islands. 

The  Ethno-Botany  of  the  Coahuilla  Indians 
of  Southern  California.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Svo,  82.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1901. 

An  account  of  the  plants  used  for  food  and  medicine 
and  in  their  arts  by  the  Coahuilla  Indians,  together 
with  some  discussion  of  their  linguistic  and  tribal 
relationships. 

Charles  Joseph  Bushnell,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Professor  of  Social  Science,  Albany  Col- 
lege. 

Some  Social  Aspects  of  the  Chicago  Stock- 
yards. Doctor's  thesis.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Sociology,  VII  (1901),  145-170,  289- 
380,  433-474,  657-702. 

Hannah  Belle  Clark,  Ph.D.  1897;  Dean 
of  Women,  Knox  College,  Galesburg, 
111. 

Sanitary  Legislation  Affecting  Schools  in 
the  United  States.  Report  of  the  Commis- 
sioner of  Education  (1893-1894),  1301-1349. 

Recent  Investigations  upon  the  Poisonous 
Properties  of  Expired  Air.  Journal  of  the 
American  Medical  Association,  XXV(1895), 
17-20. 

The  Public  Schools  of  Chicago:  A  Sociolog- 
ical Study.  Doctor's  thesis.  Svo,  117. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1896. 


36 


Publications 


Charles  A.  Ell  wood,  Ph.D.  1899;  Pro- 
fessor of  Sociology,  University  of  Mis- 
souri. 

Some  Prolegomena  to  Social  Psychology.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  8vo,  47.  Chicago,  1901.  Pub- 
lished also  in  American  Journal  of  Soci- 
ology, IV  (1899),  656-665,  807-822;  V,  98- 
109,  220-227. 

A  philosophical  examination  of  the  necessary  presup- 
positions, categories,  and  principles  of  a  social  psy- 
chology, to  determine  the  nature,  task,  and  method  of 
the  science.  I.  The  need  of  the  study  of  social  psy- 
chology. II.  The  fundamental  fact  in  social  psychol- 
ogy. III.  The  nature  and  task  of  social  psychology. 
I V .  The  concept  of  the  social  mind.  V.  The  theory  of 
imitation  in  social  psychology. 


Jacob  Dorset  Forrest,  Ph.D.  1900;  Pro- 
fessor of  Sociology  and  Economics,  But- 
ler College,  Indianapolis. 

The  Development  of  Industrial  Organization. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  New  Plan  for  the  Control  of  Quasi -Public 
Works.  American  Journal  of  Sociology, 
III  (1899),  837-847. 

John    Morris    Gillette,   Ph.D.    1901; 
President    of    the    Jacksonville    Female 
Academy,  Jacksonville,  111. 

Culture  Agencies  of  a  Typical  Manufacturing 
Group:  South  Chicago.  Doctor's  thesis. 
8vo,  68.  Chicago,  University  Press,  1901. 
Reprinted  from  American  Journal  of 
Sociology,  VII  (1901),  91-121,  188-215. 

Multiple  After-images.  Psychological  Review, 
VIII  (1901),  279-280. 

The  Relation  of  Emotion  to  Mathematical 
Truths.    Ibid.,  602-606. 

Edward  C.  Hayes,  Ph.D.  1902;  Professor 
of  Economics  and  Sociology,  Miami 
University. 

The  Sociologists'  Object  of  Attention.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpublished. 


Ira  VToods  Howerth,  Ph.D.  1898.  (See 
above.) 

Anne  Marion  MacLean,  Ph.D.  1900. 

Factory  Legislation  for  Women  in  the  United 

States.    American  Journal  of  Sociology, 

III  (1897),  183-205. 
Two  Weeks  in  Department  Stores.    Ibid.,  IV 

(1898),  721-711. 
Homes  for  Working  Women  in  Large  Cities. 

Charities  Review,  IX  (1899),  215-228. 
Factory  Legislation   for  Women  in  Canada. 

American  Journal  of  Sociology,  V  (1899- 

1900),  172-181. 

The  Acadian  Element  in  the  Population  of 
Nova  Scotia.   Doctor's  thesis.   Unpublished. 

Merton  L.  Miller,  Ph.D.  1898.  (See 
above.) 

Paul  Monroe,  Ph.D.  1897;  Professor  in 
the  History  of  Education,  Teachers  Col- 
lege, Columbia  University. 

English  and  American  Christian  Socialism. 
American  Journal  of  Sociology,  I  (1895), 
50-68. 

Sociology  and  the  Common  Schools.    Inland 
■     Educator,  II  (1896),  195-199. 

Unconscious  Altruistic  Forces.  Altruistic 
Review,  II  (1895)  281-287. 

Profit  Sharing  in  the  United  States.  Doctor's 
thesis.  American  Journal  of  Sociology, 
I  (1896),  685-709. 

An  American  System  of  Labor  Pensions  and 
Insurance.    Ibid.,  II  (1897),  501-514. 

Insurance  Against  Non-Employment.    Ibid., 

771-785. 

Some  Possibilities  of  the  Present  Industrial 
System.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1898),  729-753. 

Profit  Sharing  and  Co-operation.  Ibid.,  IV 
(1898),  593-602, 788-806. 


Department  of  Sociology  and  Anthbopology 


37 


Reviews  of 

Spahr,  Present  Distribution  of  Wealth  in  the 
United  States.  American  Journal  of  Soci- 
ology, II  (1897),  746-750. 

Gilman,  A  Dividend  to  Labor.  Ibid.,  VI  (1901), 
416-419. 

Jebome  Hall  Raymond,  Ph.D.  1895. 
(See  above.) 

William  I.  Thomas,  Ph.D.  1896.  (See 
above.) 

Geobge  Edgab  Vincent,  Ph.D.  1896. 
(See  above.) 

Nellie  Mason  Auten,  Graduate  student. 

Some  Phases  of  the  Sweating  System  in  the 
Garment  Trades  of  Chicago.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  VI  (1901),  602-645. 

Abthub  William  Dunn,  Graduate  student. 

An  Analysis  of  the  Social  Structure  of  a 
Western  Town:  A  specimen  study  accord- 
ing to  the  method  outlined  in  Small  and 
Vincent's  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  So- 
ciety. Svo,  53.  Chicago,  University  Press, 
1896. 

a  brief,  preliminary  analysis  of  the  material  and 
psychical  elements  that  entered  into  the  composition 
and  development  of  Galesburg,  111.,  and  a  partial  classi- 
fication of  the  nature  and  functions  of  the  social  groups 
and  organs  of  the  community. 

Elma  Gbaves,  Graduate  student. 

Municipal  Art.  American  Journal  of  Soci- 
ology, VI  (1901),  673-681. 

C.  H.  Hastings,  Graduate  student. 

Bibliography  of  Sociology.  Ibid.,  Ill  (1898), 
129-137;  417-432;  7ia-728;  869-880.  Also 
in  separate  form,  75  pp.  Chicago,  Univer- 
sity Press. 

H.  F.  Hegneb, -Graduate  student. 

The  Scientific  Value  of  Social  Settlements. 
American  Journal  of  Sociology,  III  (1897), 
171-182. 


Amy  Hewes,  Graduate  student. 

Social  Institutions  and  the  Riemann  Surface. 
American  Journal  of  Sociology,  V  (189^ 
1900),  392-403. 

a  discussion  demonstrating  the  possible  use  of  the 
Biemann  surface  as  a  symbolic  interpretation  of  the 
nature  of  the  complex  variable  in  the  field  of  sociology 
and  suggestive  of  the  problems  of  sociological  method- 
ology. 

Fbances  a.  Kellob,  Graduate  student. 

Experimental  Sociology.  Svo,  316.  New  York, 
The  Macmillan  Co.,  1901. 

Besult  of  a  laboratory  study  of  criminals,  with  sugges- 
tions for  establishment  of  laboratories  and  other  ex- 
perimental social  work. 

The  Criminal  Negro.  Svo,  64.  Industrial 
School  Press,  Lancaster,  O.,  1901. 

Sex  in  Crime.  International  Journal  of 
Ethics,  IX  (1898),  74r-83. 

Relation  of  Criminal  Sociology  to  Criminal 
Jurisprudence.  Ibid.,  IV  (1899),  51&-527; 
630-648. 

Psychological  and  Environmental  Study  of 
Women  Criminals.  American  Journal  of 
Sociology,  V  (1900),  527-543;  671-682. 

Criminal  Sociology:  An  Historical  and  Com- 
parative Study.  Arena,  XXIII  (1900),  301, 
516. 

The  Criminal  Negro:  Comparative  Study  of 
White  and  Negro  Criminals.  Ibid.,  XXV 
(1901),  68-68;  190-197;  308-316;  417-428; 
510-520;  XXVI  (1901),  56-66;  304-310;  521- 
527. 

Association  of  Ideas.  Pedagogical  Seminary^ 
VIII  (1901),  341-351. 

Tests  for  Education.  Conservative  Review, 
V  (1901),  139-145. 

Value  and  Direction  of  Play  in  Children's  In- 
stitutions. Charities  Review,  VI  (1901), 
297-300. 

Ralph    G.    Kimble,    Graduate    student. 

Contributions  to  the  Comparative  Study  of 
Association.  American  Journal  of  Soci- 
ology, IV  (1899),  666-680. 

A  study  in  sociological  theory.  The  writer's  thesis  is 
that  the  comparative  method  must  be  applied  to  the 


38 


Publications 


study  of  the  associational  activities  just  as  it  has  been 
applied  to  the  study  of  bodily  and  of  psychical  activi- 
ties, and  that,  therefore,  the  sociologist  in  his  attempt 
to  understand  the  associational  activities  as  they  pre- 
sent themselves  at  the  level  of  the  human  animal  inevi- 
tably finds  himself  compelled  to  study  them  as  they 
present  themselves  at  the  level  of  the  non-human  ani- 
mal. The  body  of  knowledge  resulting  from  the  study 
of  associational  activities  after  this  method  and  from 
the  proper  standpoint  would  constitute  a  Comparative 
Sociology. 


Ernest  Carboll  Moore,  Graduate  stu- 
dent. 

Report  on  Social  Aspects  of  the  Saloon  in  the 
Nineteenth  Ward  of  Chicago.  KorerCs 
Economic  Aspects  of  the  Liquor  Problem, 
211-223. 

The  Social  Value  of  the  Saloon.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  III  (1897),  1-13. 

The  saloon  functions  as  a  social  center  in  the  life  of 
the  workingman.  It  is  his  club,  supplying  him  just  the 
things  which  better-organized  clubs  supply  their  more 
fortunate  members.  Any  attempt  to  combat  the  saloon 
must  seriously  consider  this  phase  of  its  activity. 

(See  also  under  Philosophy.) 

S.  S.  MacClintock,  Graduate  student. 

The  Kentucky  Mountains  and  their  Feuds. 
Ibid.,  VII  (1901),  1-28, 171-187. 


J.  Howard  Moore,  Graduate  student. 

Better- World  Philosophy:  A  Sociological  Syn- 
thesis. 8vo,  IX+276.  Chicago,  The  Ward 
Waugh  Company,  1899. 

H.  Francis  Perry,  Graduate  student. 

The  Workingman's  Alienation  from  the  Church. 
American  Journal  of  Sociology,  IV  (1899), 
621-629. 

A  research  giving  the  replies  of  laboring  men  to  the 
(juestion  why  they  do  not  attend  church,  and  suggest- 
ing the  remedies  for  non-attendance.  The  five  indict- 
ments against  the  church  are  briefly  answered. 

The  Mission  Sunday  School  as  an  Ethical  and 
Social  Lever.  Bibliotheca  Sacra,  LXIX 
(1899),  481-5(M. 

A  research  from  data  gathered  on  the  south  side  of  the 
city  of  Chicago  with  a  tentative  program  for  enlarged 
work  in  health,  wealth,  sociability,  knowledge,  beauty, 
and  righteousness. 

The  Motive  and  Method  of  Christian  Charity. 
Ibid.,  LXXI  (1901),  641-669. 

An  historical  study  of  the  charity  of  the  Christian 
church,  showing  the  changing  motives  and  methods 
from  the  first  to  the  twentieth  century. 

Nina  C.  Vandewalker,  Graduate  student. 

Some  Demands  of  Education  upon  Anthro- 
pology. American  Journal  of  Sociology, 
IV  (1899),  69-78. 


VII.    COMPARATIVE  RELIGION 


George  Stephen  Goodspeed  [1892 — ], 
Professor  of  Comparative  Religion  and 
Ancient  History. 

The  Dead  Religions — What  Have  they  Be- 
queathed to  the  Living?  The  World's  Par- 
liament of  Religions,  I  (1893),  454-464. 

Comparative  Religion  and  the  Missionary  Stu- 
dent.   Presbyterian  College  Review,  1896. 

The  Ideal  Childhood  in  Non-Christian  Reli- 
gions.   Biblical  World,  IX  (1897),  7-22. 

Semitic  Religion.  Progress,  III  (1898),  390- 
401. 

Atonement  in  Non-Christian  Religions.  Bibli- 
cal World,  XVII  (1901),  22-31, 96-106, 191- 
198,  297-306. 

(For  publications  in  History  see  above,  p.  2B.) 


John  Henry  Barrows  [1895-1900],  Has- 
kell Professorial  Lecturer  in  Compara- 
tive Religion ;  President  of  Oberlin  Col- 
lege, 1898-1902. 

Christianity  the  World  Religion.  8vo,  412. 
Chicago,  A.  C.  McClurg  &  Co.,  1897. 

Edmund  Buckley  [1895 — ],  Docent  in 
Comparative  Religion;  Ph.D.  1894. 

Universal  Religion,  edited  by  Edmund  Buck- 
ley. 8vo,  774.  Chicago,  University  Asso- 
ciation, Association  Building,  1899. 

University  Lessons  in  Fine  Art,  edited  by  Ed- 
mund Buckley.  8vo,  800.  Chicago,  Inter- 
national Art  Association,  1901. 

An  account  of  visual  art  comprehensive  of  its  theory  or 
science  and  of  its  history  equally  in  architecture,  sculp- 
ture, painting,  and  design,  prepared  by  a  staff  of  seven- 
teen specialists,  mostly  art  instructors  in  leading 
American  universities. 


Department  of  Semitic  Languages  and  Litebatuees 


39 


"Die  Chinesen,"  und  "Die  Japaner,"  two  articles 
in  Lehrbuch  der  Religionsgeschichte,  edited 
by  C.  de  la  Saussaye,  2d  ed.  8vo,  399  + 
512.    Leipzig,  J.  C.  B.  Mohr,  1897. 

Phallicism  in  Japan.  Doctor's  thesis.  Svo, 
34.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1895. 

Gives  an  account  of  the  extant  monuments  and  ancient 
texts  belonging:  to  phallicism  in  Japan. 

Shinto  Pantheon.  New  World,  V  (1896),  719- 
744. 

This  article  was  the  first  to  demonstrate  the  nature- 
types  of  the  gods  Susano  and  O  Kuni  Nushi,  as  respect- 
ively storm  and  moon. 

Mongolian  Keligions.  Progress,  III  (1897), 
108-168. 

a  sketch,  with  selections  from  their  scriptures,  compre- 
hensive of  the  Turko-Tartar,  Finnic,  Chinese,  and 
Japanese  religions.  It  corrects  the  prevailing  error 
that  the  Chinese  religion  is  exclusively  politico-ethical, 
by  exhibiting  the  mythical  and  magical  nature  or 
Taoism,  which  is  not  degenerated  but  a  survival. 

Brahmanism  and  Hinduism.    Ibid.,  175-229. 

a  sketch  with  selections  from  their  scriptures. 

Buddhism.    Ibid.  (1898),  247-272. 

A  sketch  with  selections  from  its  scriptures. 

Science  of  Religion.    Ibid.,  761-772. 

Shows  that  religion  is  one  of  the  five  culturals  — activi- 
ties proper  and  peculiar  to  man.  As  such  it  has  fol- 
lowed the  laws  of  human  development.  These  include, 
as  direct  causes,  heredity  with  variation,  and  environ- 


ment ;  and,  as  indirect  causes,  interaction  of  the  vari- 
ous culturals,  and  intercourse  of  the  various  peoples. 
The  traits  of  such  development  are  continuity,  synthe- 
sis, differentiation,  and  classification. 

Relations  Between  Early  Morality  and  Re- 
ligion, International  Monthly,  I  (1900), 
577-617. 

Shows  that  early  morality  and  religion  were  independ- 
ent, and  gods  were  of  good,  evil,  or  indifferent  charac- 
ter. Since  both  morality  and  religion  are  functions  of 
one  mind,  the  two  gradually  interacted,  with  mutual 
benefit  when  each  maintained  its  freedom,  but  with 
mutual  injury  when  either  lost  it. 


Laetitia  Moon  Conabd,  Ph.D.  1899. 

Ideas  of  the  Future  Life  Held  by  Algonkin 
Indian  Tribes,  Doctor's  thesis.  Translated 
by  L.  Marillier  and  published  under  the 
title:  "Les  Id6es  des  Indiens  Algonquins 
relatives  h  la  vie  d'outre-tombe."  Revue  de 
Vhistoire  des  religions,  XLII  (1900),  9-^9, 
220-274. 

Algonkin  rites  and  myths  throwing  light  on  the  ideas  of 
the  future  life  are  analyzed  and  interpreted  and  com- 
pared at  various  points  with  those  of  other  peoples. 
An  attempt  is  made  to  discover  the  origin  of  ideas  of 
the  future  life,  and  various  indications  of  the  method 
of  their  growth  are  noted.  A  conspicuous  likeness  is 
traced  between  the  present  life  of  tribes  and  their 
expected  future  existence;  but  the  thought  of  future 
life  is  found  to  have  little  or  no  moral  value. 


VIII.    SEMITIC  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES 


William  Rainey  Harper  [1902 — ],  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department 
of  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures. 

The  Utterances  of  Amos  Arranged  Strophically . 
8vo,  19.  Chicago,  University  Press,  1898. 
Reprinted  from  Biblical  World. 

A  reconstruction  of  the  text  of  the  book  of  Amos  show- 
ing the  poetical  form  of  the  prophet's  addresses. 

Constructive  Studies  in  the  Priestly  Element 
in  the  Old  Testament.  An  Aid  to  Histori- 
cal Study,  For  Use  in  Advanced  Bible 
Classes.  8vo,  151.  Chicago,  University 
Press.    1902. 

An  inductive  presentation  of  the  Old  Testament  mate- 
rials on  the  subject  of  worship,  with  copious  references 
to  literature  and  suggestions  as  to  order  and  method  of 
procedure  in  a  study  of  the  subject. 

A  Critical  and  Exegetical  Commentary  on  the 
Minor  Prophets.    Vol.  I:  Amos,  Hosea,  and 


Micah.  "The  International  Critical  Com- 
mentary." New  York,  Charles  Scribner's 
Sons.    In  press. 

Suggestions  Concerning  the  Original  Text  and 
Structure  of  Amos  1:3-2:5.  American 
Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897),  140-145. 

The  Structure  of  Hosea  1:2-3:5.  American 
Journal  of  Semitic  Languages  and  Litera- 
tures, XVII  (1900),  1-15. 

A  reconstruction  of  the  first  three  chapters  of  Hosea 
from  the  point  of  view  of  the  original  pKjetic  form. 

The  Structure  of  the  Text  of  the  Book  of  Micah. 
Article  in  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  Vol.  V. 

Reviews  of 

Cheyne-Black,  Encyclopaedia  Biblica,  Vol.  I, 
articles  on  "  Old  Testament  Introduction." 
American  Journal  of  Theology,  IV  (1900), 


40 


Publications 


372-376;  Vol.  II,  articles  on  "Hexateuch 
and  Historical  Literature."  Ihid.^  V  (1901), 
745-747. 

Carpenter  and  Harford-Battersby,  The  Hexa- 
teuch.   J6id.,  133-136. 

Hastings,  Dictionary  of  the  Bible,  Vol.  Ill, 
articles  on  "  Old  Testament  Introduction." 
J6td.,  298-300. 

Iba  Maubioe  Price  [1892 — ],  Professor 
of  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures. 

The  Great  Cylinder  Inscriptions  A  and  B  of 
Gudea,  copied  from  the  original  clay  cylin- 
ders of  the  Telloh  Collection  preserved  in 
the  Louvre,  autographed,  signs  listed,  ten- 
tatively transliterated  and  translated,  with 
Commentary  and  Notes.  Assyriologische 
Bibliothek,  Vol.  XV,  edited  by  Friedrich  De- 
litzsch  and  Paul  Haupt.  Part  I.  Text  and 
Sign  List.  8vo.  Leipzig,  J.  C.  Hinrichs'- 
sche  Buchhandlimg,  1899.  Ill  autograph 
plates  and  1  photographic  reproduction. 

The  Monuments  and  the  Old  Testament:  Ori- 
ental Light  on  Holy  Writ.  With  maps  and 
forty  illustrations.  12mo,  321.  Chicago, 
The  Christian  Culture  Press,  1899;  third 
edition,  1902. 

A  Syllabus  of  Old  Testament  History:  Out- 
Hnes  and  Literature  for  Private  Study  and 
the  Class  Room.  12mo,  202.  Fifth  edition, 
revised,  1900.  Chicago  and  New  York,  F. 
H.  Revell  &  Co. 

The  Drift  of  Biblical  Research,  Past  and  Pres- 
ent. 12mo,  32.  Philadelphia,  Griffith  & 
Rowland  Press,  1900. 

Sundry  articles  on  Semitic  History  and  Archae- 
ology. Hastings's  Dictionary  of  the  Bible, 
Edinburgh,  1898-1902. 

Recent  Thought  on  the  Origin  of  the  Cunei- 
form Writing.  American  Journal  of  Se- 
mitic Languages  and  Literatures,  XVI 
(1899),  145-156. 

Notes  on  the  Pantheon  of  the  Gudean  Cylin- 
ders.   Ibid.,  XVII  (1900),  47-53. 

Le  Pantheon  de  Goud6a.  Revue  de  Vhistoire 
des  Religions,  XLIII  (1901),  298-307. 


Translation  of  twenty-four  of  the  Tel-el-Amama 
Letters.  Contributed  to  Assyrian  and 
Babylonian  Literature,  edited  by  Robert 
Francis  Harper,  1901,  pp.  217-241.  (See 
below.) 

A  Cone  Inscription  of  Rim  Sim.  Article  in 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  Vol.  V. 

Reviews  of 

Thureau-Dangin,  Recherches  sur  I'origine  de 
r6critm:e  cun6iforme.  Supplement  h  la  I'* 
partie.  American  Journal  of  Semitic  Lan- 
guages and  Literatures,  XVI  (1900),  189  ff. 

Zimmem,  BeitrSge  zur  Kenntniss  der  babylo- 
nischen  Religion,  1.  Halfte,  2.  Lieferung. 
/6id.,  XVII  (1900),  60  ff. 

Radau,  Early  Babylonian  History.  Ibid., 
XVII  (1901),  180-185. 

Geobge  Stephen  Goodspeed  [1892 — ], 
Professor  of  Comparative  Religion  and 
Ancient  History. 

(See  under  History,  p.  25,  and  Comparative 
Rehgion,  p.  38.) 

RoBEBT  Fbancis  Habpeb  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor of  Semitic  Languages  and  Litera- 
tures. 

Assyrian  and  Babylonian  Letters  belonging  to 
the  Kouyunjik  Collections  of  the  British 
Museum : 

Part  I,  8vo,  xv-f  116  plates,  1892. 
Part  II,  8vo,  xv  + 112  plates,  1893. 
Part  III,  8vo,  xv  + 116  plates,  1896. 
Part  IV,  8vo,  xvi  + 116  plates,  1896. 
Part  V,  8vo,  xvi  + 120  plates,  1900. 
Part  VI,  8vo,  xv  + 120  plates,  1902. 
Part  VII,  8vo,  xix  + 120  plates,  1902. 
Part  VIII,  8vo,  xxx-f  120  plates,  1902. 

Chicago,  University  Press;  London,  Luzac 
&Co. 

Part  VIII  is  issued  as  Vol.  V,  Second 
Series,  of  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications. 

It  is  the  purpose  (1)  to  publish  all  the  letters  in  the 
Kouyunjik  Collections  of  the  British  Museum  on  which 
the  name  of  the  scribe  is  to  be  found  j  (2)  the  best  pre- 
served and  most  important  of  those  without  signatures ; 
and  (3)  a  transliteration  and  either  a  tentative  trans- 


Department  of  Semitic  Languages  and  Liteeatures 


41 


lation,  or  a  rSsumi  of  the  contents,  together  with  a 
glossary  and  introduction.  The  texts  will  occupy  six- 
teen volumes  and  the  critical  and  exegetical  apparatus 
as  many  more.  In  other  words,  the  purj>ose  is  to  give  a 
Corpus  Epistolarum  of  the  Kouyunjik  Collections. 

Assyrian  and  Babylonian  Literature.  Selected 
Translations  with  a  Critical  Introduction. 
Royal  8vo,  xc  +  462.  New  York,  D.  Apple- 
ton  &  Cb.,  1901. 

Translations  were  contributed  to  this  volume  by  mem  • 
bers  of  the  Faculty  and  by  Fellows  of  the  University  of 
Chicago  (see  under  their  names)  and  by  Messrs.  Barton 
of  Bryn  Mawr  College,  Johnston  of  the  Johns  Hopkins 
University,  and  Thompson  of  the  British  Museum. 

A-bi-e-su'=Ebisum.  Hebraica,  VIII  (1892), 
103-104. 

The  Letters  of  the  R"  2  Collection  of  the  Brit- 
ish Museum.  Zeitschrift  fur  Assyriologie, 
VIII  (1893),  341-359. 

Assyriological  Notes.  I,  Hebraica,  X  (1894), 
196-201.  II,  American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures,  XIII  (1897), 
209-212.  Ill,  ibid.,  XIV  (1897),  1-16.  IV, 
ibid.,  XIV  (1898),  171-182.  V,  ibid.,  XV 
(1899),  12^144. 

Chiefly  textual  and  lexicographical. 
The  Officials  Mentioned  in  the  Assyrian  and 
Babylonian  Letters  of  the  Kouyunjik  Col- 
lections of  the  British  Museum.  Article  in 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  Vol.  V. 

Reviews  of 

The  Cuneiform  Inscriptions  of  Western  Asia, 
Vol.  IV.    Hebraica,  VIII  (1892),  244-246. 

Winckler,  Sammlung  von  Keilschrifttexten. 
Zeitschrift  fur  Assyriologie,  VIII  (1893), 
395-399. 

Peters,  Nippur,  or  Explorations  and  Adventures 
on  the  Euphrates.  American  Journal  of 
Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures,  XIV 
(1897),  38-44. 

Delitzsch,  Assyrische  Lesestucke.  Fourth  edi- 
tion.   Ibid.,  XVII  (1901),  172-174. 

James  Henry  Breasted  [1892 — ],  Asso- 
ciate Professor  of  Egyptology  and  Se- 
mitic Languages. 

Egyptian  Grammar  with  Table  of  Signs,  Bib- 
liography, Exercises  for  Reading  and  Glos- 


sary. Translated  from  the  German  of 
Adolf  Erman.  viii  +  201  and  70*.  Lon- 
don, Williams  &  Norgate,  1894. 
De  Hymnis  in  Solem  sub  Rege  Amenophide 
IV  conceptis.  Dissertatio  inauguralis  quam 
ad  summos  in  philosophia  honores  in  uni- 
versitate  Berolinensi  capessendos  scripsit 
James  Henry  Breasted.  Folio,  62.  Bero- 
lini,  typis  expressit  B.  Paul,  1894. 

A  New  Chapter  in  the  Life  of  Thutmose  III. 
4to,  31.    Hinrichs,  Leipzig,  1900. 

a  long-known  inscription  on  the  walls  of  the  great 
Earnak  temple  is  shown  to  furnish  a  hitherto  unnoticed 
account  of  this  king's  remarkable  accession. 

Ramses  II.  and  the  Princes  in  the  Kamak- 
Reliefs  of  Seti  I.  Zeitschrift  fUr  Aegyp- 
tische  Sprache,  XXXVII  (1899),  130-139. 

Proves  that  the  figure  of  prince  Ramses  in  the  Cam- 
paign of  Seti  I.'s  first  year  is  not  original,  and  totally 
alters  the  chronology  of  the  period  immediately  con- 
cerned. 

The  Length  and  Season  of  Thutmose  III.'s 
First  Campaign.    Ibid.  (1899),  12a-129. 

Shows  from  hitherto  unused  data  that  an  invasion  of 
Syria-Palestine  from  Egypt,  involving  a  difficult  siege, 
several  battles,  a  march  as  far  north  as  the  Lebanon 
region,  and  the  return  up  the  Nile  to  Thebes  was  accom- 
plished in  a  maximum  of  175  days.  The  season  is  shown 
to  be  from  April  to  October,  viz.,  the  dry  season. 

The  Monuments  in  the  Inscriptions.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Society  of  Biblical  Archceology 
(London),  1900,  88-95. 

Proves  that  the  tomb  of  Thutmose  I.  was  a  cliff-tomb. 

The  Annals  of  Thutmose  III.  and  the  Location 
of  Megiddo.    Ibid.,  96-98. 

Proves  the  location  of  Megiddo  at  el-Lejjon  to  be  cor- 
rect. 

King  Harmhab  and  his  Sakkara  Tomb.  Zeit- 
schrift fur  Aegyptische  Sprache,  XXXVIII 
(1900),  47-50. 

Shows  that  a  fragment  of  this  tomb  at  Vienna  fits  one 
of  the  fragments  of  the  same  at  Leyden ;  the  combina- 
tion proves  for  the  first  time  the  identity  of  King  Harm- 
hab and  the  general,  Harmhab. 

Varia.  Proceedings  of  the  Society  of  Biblical 
Archaeology,  1901,  236-243. 

Proves,  among  other  things,  the  occurrence  of  two 
more  expeditions  to  Punt  in  the  sixth  dynasty. 

The  Wadi  Haifa  Stela  of  Senwosret  I.  (User- 
tesen  I).    3  plates.    Ibid.,  1901,  230-235. 

All  the  fragments  are  put  together  and  the  stela  is  re- 
stored. Senwosret  I.  is  shown  to  have  conquered  Nu- 
bia as  far  south  as  any  of  his  successors  in  his  dynasty, 
which  explains  the  rising  prestige  of  his  name,  as  cor- 
rupted to  Sesostris  by  the  Greeks. 


42 


Publications 


The  Philosophy  of  a  Memphite  Priest.  1  plate. 
Zeitschrift  fUr  Aegyptische  Sprache, 
XXXIX  (1901),  1-13. 

Reproduces  in  facsimile  an  Egyptian  stela  (No.  135*)  in 
the  British  Museum,  and  shows  that  it  bears  a  long  re- 
ligious text,  containing  a  philosophical  system  of  great 
value,  dating  at  least  from  the  sixteenth  century  B.  C. 
The  Greek  tradition  of  the  origin  of  their  philosophy 
in  Egypt  thus  receives  full  support. 

The  Obelisks  of  Thutmose  III.  and  his  Build- 
ing Season  in  Egypt.    1  plate.   76id.,  55-61. 

Identifies  the  Constantinople  Obelisk  of  Thutmose  Til. 
for  the  first  time  and  proves  that  he  spent  his  winters 
building  in  Egypt,  his  summers  being  occupied  in  cam- 
paigning in  Asia. 

Die  Eigennamen  auf  dem  VatikanskarabSus 
Amenhoteps  III.  With  facsimile.  Ibid., 
65-66. 

The  First  Philosopher.  Monist,  April,  1902, 
321-336. 

A  further  study  of  the  above  document  (British  Mu- 
seum 135*.  "  Philosophy  of  a  Memphite  Priest "),  show- 
ing more  fully  its  connection  with  early  Greek  ideas. 

The  Battle  of  Kadish.  Article  in  The  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  Vol.  V. 

Bevieies  of 

Davis,  The  Egyptian  Book  of  the  Dead.  Na- 
tion, July  18,  1895. 

Petrie,  A  History  of  Egypt.  Vol.  II,  The 
X Vllth  and  X Vlllth  Dynasties.  American 
Historical  Review,  II  (1897),  324-327. 

In  particular  the  author's  theory  of  the  Asiatic  origin 
of  the  reform  of  Ikhenaton  is  disproved. 

Kurt  Sethe,  Sesostris.  Ibid.,  VI  (1901),  53&- 
537. 

The  author's  identification  of  Senwosret  I.  with  the 
Sesostris  of  the  Greeks  is  supported  and  further  evi- 
dence adduced;  see  above:  Tne  Wadi  Haifa  Stela  of 
Senwosret  I. 


William  Muss-Arnolt  [1893 — ],  Assis- 
tant Professor  of  Biblical  Philology. 

On  Semitic  Words  in  Greek  and  Latin.  Trans- 
actions of  the  American  Philological  Asso- 
ciatio7i,  XXIII  (1892-93),  35-156. 

Survey  of  the  subject  from  an  historical  and  phonetic 
I)oint  of  view.  Semitic  loanwords  grouped  under 
twenty-five  chapters. 

A  Concise  Dictionary  of  the  Assyrian  Lan- 
guage (Assyrian-English-German).  8vo. 
Parts   i-xii    (1-768).     Berlin,    Keuther   & 


Keichard;  New  York,  Lemcke  &  Btichner, 
189^1901. 

To  be  completed  in  sixteen  parts.  The  dictionary  is 
primarily  historical ;  at  the  end  of  each  word  the  views 
and  translations  of  other  scholars  are  given  with  copi- 
ous references  to  their  works.  It  intends  not  only  to 
be  a  catalogue  of  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  words,  but 
also  to  record  the  progress  of  Assyriology,  thus  making 
a  historical  study  of  the  lexicon  a  comparatively  easy 
task. 

The  Cuneiform  Account  of  the  Creation  and 
the  Deluge.  8vo,  22.  Chicago,  University 
Press,  1894.  Reprinted  from  the  Biblical 
World,  III  (1894),  17-27, 109-118. 

On  the  Study  of  Patristic  Literature.  8vo,  37. 
Louisville,  Ky.,  1896.  Reprinted  from  Semi- 
nary Magazine,  February-May,  1896. 

The  Urim  and  Thummim:  A  suggestion  as 
to  their  original  nature  and  significance. 
8vo,  32.  Chicago,  University  Press,  1900. 
Reprinted  from  American  Journal  of 
Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures,  XVI 
(1900),  193-224. 

Theological  Bibliography.  American  Journal 
of  Theology,  I  (1897),  88  pp. 

Semitic  Bibliography.  American  Journal  of 
Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures,  XIII 
(1896-97),  2,  and  XIV  (1897-98),  1,  32  pp. 

Amos  V  (21)-26.    Expositor,  Dec.,  1900,  513- 

528. 

The  original  arrangement  of  the  passage  seems  to  have 
been :  verses  21,  22,  23,  25,  24,  27.  Written  by  Amos.  The 
event  which  he  had  foreseen  and  foretold  was  not  long 
in  coming.  Samaria  succumbed.  A  later  prophet,  well 
acquainted  with  the  utterances  of  Amos  and  the  fate  of 
the  Israelites,  described  the  religious  assimilation  of 
the  exiles  most  succinctly  in  the  words  of  vs.  26.  adding 
them  "on  the  margin,"  so  to  speak,  whence  tne  final 
redactor  incorporated  the  verso,  with  slight  changes, 
into  the  text  preceding  vs.  27,  at  the  same  time  trans- 
posing for  the  sake  of  clearness,  as  he  thought,  vss.  24 
and  25.  From  Assyrio-Babylonian  sources  it  is  shown 
why  the  writer  of  this  verse  mentions  SAG-KUD  (t.  e., 
Ninib),  and  his  star  kaimanu,  in  preference  to  others. 

Translation  of  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  In- 
scriptions, contributed  to  Assyrian  amd 
Babylonian  Literature,  edited  by  Robert 
Francis  Harper.    (See  above.) 

Theological  and  Semitic  Literature  for  1898. 
American  Journal  of  Theology  and  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Semitic  Languages  and 
Literatures  (1898-99),  132  pp.;  the  same  for 

1899,  ibid.,  1899-1900, 144  pp.;  the  same  for 

1900,  ibid.,  1901, 108  pp.;  the  same  for  1901, 
ibid.,  1902,  112  pp.  Also  published  sepa- 
rately as  a  pamphlet. 


Department  op  Semitic  Languages  and  Litebatures 


43 


Notes  on  Assyrian  Lexicography.  Article  in 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  Vol.  V. 

Revievst  of 

Rheinisches  Museum,  Vols.  XLVI,  XLVII. 
American  Journal  of  Philology,  XIV 
(1893),  392-395,  516-519;  XV  (1894),  382- 
388. 

Journal  Asiatique,  Vols.  XIX,  XX.  Ibid., 
XIV  (1893),  510-516. 

Zeitschrift  der  Deutschen  Morgenldndischen 
Gesellschaft,  Vols.  XLVII,  XL VIII.  Ibid., 
XVI  (1895),  384r-390,  521-524. 

Wendland,  Die  Therapeuten  und  die  Philo- 
nische  Sckrift  vom  beschaidichen  Leben. 
American  Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897), 
1105-1106. 

Nestle,  Philologica  Sacra.    Ibid.,  1107-1108. 

Hippolytus'  Werke,  herausgegeben  von  Bon- 
wetsch  und  Achelis.  Ibid.,  II  (1898),  901- 
904. 

Lietzmann,  Catenen,  Ibid.,  904-906. 

Achelis,  Hippolytstudien;  Dieterich,  DieGrab- 
schrift  des  Aberkios.    Ibid.,  948-950. 

Weidner,  Theological  Encyclopaedia  and 
Methodology.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1899),  762-764. 

Loofs,  Eustathius  von  Sebaste  und  die  Chrono- 
logie  der  Basiliusbriefe.  Ibid.,  IV  (1900), 
613-614. 

Origenes'  Werke,  1.  und  2.  Band.  Herausge- 
geben von  Paul  Koetschau.  Ibid.,  IV 
(1900),  839-844. 

Thompson,  Reports  of  the  Magicians  and  As- 
trologers of  Nineveh  and  Babylon.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Semitic  Languages  and 
Literatures,  XVII  (1900),  61-64. 

Jensen,  Assyrio-Babylonian  Myths  and  Epic 
Poems;  Rosenberg,  Assyrische  Sprachlehre 
imd  Keilschriftkunde.  Ibid.,  XVII  (1901), 
121-125. 


Herbert  L.  Willett  [1896 — ],  Assis- 
tant Professor  of  Semitic  Languages 
and  Literatures. 

The  Prophets  of  Israel.  16mo,  153.  Chicago, 
Fleming  H.  Revell  Co.,  1899, 1901, 1902. 

a  brief  outline  of  prophetic  history  and  literature,  as 
embodied  in  the  Old  Testament. 

Hebrew  Mourning  Customs.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

John  M.  P.  Smith  [1899 — ],  Associate  in 
Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures. 

The  Day  of  Yahweh.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  32. 
Divinity  Studies,  II.  Chicago,  University 
Press,  1901.  Reprinted  from  American 
Journal  of  Theology,  V  (1901),  505-533. 

A  study  of  the  origin  of  the  idea,  of  the  contributions 
made  to  it  by  successive  prophets,  of  the  relation  of 
the  idea  to  its  historical  environment,  and  of  its  in- 
fluence upon  other  Old  Testament  ideas. 

Translations  of  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  In- 
scriptions, contributed  to  Assyrian  and 
Babylonian  Literatures,  edited  by  Robert 
Francis  Harper.    (See  above.) 

The  Letters  of  Nabtl-b6l  SumSte,  belonging  to 
the  Kouyunjik  Collections  of  the  British 
Museum.  Article  in  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  V. 

George  Ricker  Berry  [1895-96],  Assis- 
tant in  Semitic  Languages  and  Litera- 
tures ;  Professor  of  Semitic  Languages, 
Colgate  University. 

The  Letters  of  the  R"  2  Collection  in  the  Brit- 
ish Museum,  with  transliteration,  notes,  and 
glossary.  Doctor's  thesis.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures, 
XI  (1895),  174-202. 

The  Introduction  gives  an  account  of  the  work  already 
done  by  various  authors  in  the  publication  and  trans- 
lation of  the  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  letters.  The 
body  of  the  article  considers  fourteen  letters,  of  ■which 
the  cuneiform  text  was  published  by  Robert  Francis 
Harper  in  1893  in  Zeitschrift  fUr  Aasyriologie.    A  trans- 


44 


Publications 


literation,  followed  by  notes,  chiefly  grammatical  and 
lexicographical,  and  a  glossary,  in  which  each  word 
found  in  these  letters  is  defined  and  a  list  of  its  occur- 
rences there  is  given. 


Joseph  K  Arnold,  Ph.D.  1899. 

The  Balaam  Oracles.     Doctor's  thesis, 
published. 


Un- 


A  study  of  these  oracles  from  the  point  of  view  of  (a) 
history,  (6)  literature,  (c)  poetry,  (d)  theology,  (c) 
language. 


EiJi  ASADA,  Ph.D.  1893;  Professor  of 
English  Language  and  Literature,  To- 
kyo School  of  Foreign  Languages,  To- 
kyo, Japan,  and  Professor  of  Old  Testa- 
ment Literature  and  Semitic  Languages, 
Aoyama  Theological  Seminary,  Tokyo, 
Japan. 

The  Hebrew  Text  of  Zechariah  1-8,  compared 
with  the  different  ancient  versions.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures,  XII  (1896), 
173-196. 

Philip  Castor  Baird,  Ph.D.  1897;  Cler- 
gyman, Fort  Dodge,  la. 

The  Methods  of  the  Prophets.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

This  thesis  discusses  the  prophet's  methods  of  teaching 
and  preaching.  It  investigates  his  use  of  signs,  sym- 
bols, figures  of  speech,  gestures,  events  of  history,  etc., 
as  a  means  of  enforcing  his  message. 

Alois  BArta,  Ph.D.  1900;  Clergyman, 
Saratoga,  la. 

Syntax  of  the  Sentences  in  Isaiah  40-66.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures,  XVII  (1900), 
22^6. 

The  dissertation  contains  an  analysis  of  the  various 
kinds  of  sentences  with  notes  on  doubtful  and  diflBcult 
passages,  tables  showing  the  results  of  the  study,  and 
some  general  observations  of  the  syntax,  style,  and 
unity  of  the  book.  It  confirms,  from  a  different  point 
of  view,  the  critical  conclusions  set  forth  by  recent  exe- 
getes,  esx>ecially  by  Duhm  in  his  commentary  on  Isaiah. 

George  Eicker  Berry,  Ph.D.  1895. 
(See  above.) 


Fulton  Johnson  Coffin,  Ph.D.  1898; 
Professor  of  Old  Testament  Literature 
and  Comparative  Keligion,  Bible  Nor- 
mal College,  Hartford,  Conn. 

The  Third  Commandment.     Doctor's  thesis. 
Journal  of  Biblical  Literature,  XIX  (1900), 
166-188. 

Includes  the  history  of  its  interpretation,  an  inductive 
study  of  the  word  SITDi  a  study  of  related  conceptions 

of  the  divine  name  among  primitive  peoples,  and  of  the 
use  of  the  name  Yahweh  in  the  Old  Testament,  and 
of  the  use  and  abuse  of  the  divine  name  among  the 
Hebrews,  together  with  an  investigation  of  the  relation 
of  the  oath  to  the  third  commandment. 


Clifton  Daggett  Gray,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Clergyman,  Port  Huron,  Mich. 

The  Samas  Keligious  Texts.  Classified  in  the 
British  Museum  Catalogue  as  Hymns, 
Prayers,  and  Incantations.  With  twenty 
plates  of  texts  hitherto  unpublished,  and 
a  Transliteration  and  Translation  of  K.  3182. 
Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  24  +  20  plates.  Chi- 
cago, University  Press,  1901. 

Being  a  reprint  of  the  two  following  articles : 

A  Hymn  to  Samas.  American  Journal  of 
Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures,  XVII 
(1901),  129-145. 

Some  Unpublished  Religious  Texts  of  Samas. 
Ibid.,  222-243. 

Translations  of  Assyrian  and  Babylonion  Lit- 
eratvire,  contributed  to  Assyrian  and  Baby- 
lonian Literature,  edited  by  Robert  Francis 
Harper.    (See  above.) 

Lincoln  Hulley,  Ph.D.  1895 ;  Professor 
of  History  and  Biblical  Literature, 
Bucknell  University. 

The  Decalogue  —  a  Growth  in  Form  and  Ideas. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

Haydn  E.  Jones,  Ph.D.  1898;  Assistant 
in  History,  Academy  of  the  University 
of  Chicago. 

Assyrian  and  Babylonian  Letters  selected  from 
the  texts  of  the  Kouyunjik  Collections  of  the 


Depabtment  of  Semitic  Languages  and  Liteeatubes 


45 


British  Museum.  Doctor's  thesis.  Un- 
published. 

A  transliteration  and  translation  of  several  letter-texts 
published  by  Robert  Francis  Harper,  with  lexicographi- 
cal and  historical  notes  and  a  complete  glossary. 


indicate  some  definite  results.  2.  Separate  discussions 
of  the  problems  arising  from  the  eccclesiastical  and  the 
civil  material,  with  an  attempt  to  distinguish  between 
them.  3.  A  discussion  of  the  questions  of  historicity. 
4.  A  constructive  essay  on  "The  Import  of  the  Chroni- 
cles as  a  Piece  of  Religio-Historical  Literature." 


Feed  T.  Kelly,  Ph.D.  1901;  Instructor 
in  Hebrew  and  Hellenistic  Greek,  Uni- 
versity of  Wisconsin, 

The  Strophic  Structure  of  Habakkuk.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures,  XVIII  (1902), 
94-119. 

After  discussing  the  various  views  as  to  the  integrity  of 
the  book,  the  question  of  its  poetic  form  is  treated  and 
a  system  of  strophes  is  presented  for  each  of  the  sec- 
tions of  the  book. 

William  Nelson  Mebane,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Professor  of  Latin,  Hanover  College, 
Hanover,  Ind. 

Selected  Assyrian  Letters.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

A  transliteration,  translation,  and  discussion  of  some 
Assyrian  letters  published  by  Robert  Francis  Harper, 

Emanuel  Schmidt,  Ph.D.  1902. 

The  Temple  of  Solomon  in  the  Light  of  Other 
Oriental  Temples.  Doctor's  thesis.  Small 
4to,  65  -f  4  plates.  Chicago,  University 
Press,  1902. 

A  comparison  between  the  architecture  and  furniture 
of  the  typical  Assyrio-Babylonian,  Egyptian,  and  Phoe- 
nican  temples  and  those  of  the  Temple  of  Solomon. 
The  first  chapter  deals  with  the  foreign  temples,  the 
second  with  the  preparations  for  Solomon's  temple,  the 
third  with  its  plan  and  architecture,  and  the  fourth 
with  its  furniture  and  decorations.  Each  topic  is 
studied  in  the  light  of  recent  discoveries  in  Bible  lands. 
The  last  chapter  sets  forth  the  chief  result,  that  Solo- 
mon erected  a  typical  Semitic  temple. 

John  M.  P,  Smith,  Ph,D,  1899,  (See 
above.) 

Theodoee  G.  Scares,  Ph.D,  1894;  Clergy- 
man, Oak  Park,  111. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Criticism  of  the  Books 
of  Chronicles.  Doctor's  thesis.  Unpub- 
lished. 

A  discussion  of  the  historical  problems  presented  by 
Chronicles.  1.  Areview  of  the  criticism  with  an  attempt  to 


J.  H.  Stevenson,  Ph.D.  1897;  Professor 
of  Hebrew,  Vanderbilt  University,  Nash- 
ville, Tenn. 

Assyrian  and  Babylonian  Contracts  with  Ara- 
maic Reference  Notes.  Doctor's  thesis. 
8vo,  206. .  Vanderbilt  Oriental  Series.  New 
York,  The  American  Book  Co.,  1902. 

The  cuneiform  text  of  forty-seven  tablets  copied  in  the 
British  Museum,  with  transliteration  and  translation, 
and  a  critical  study  of  the  Aramaic  inscriptions  found 
on  the  same. 

Dean  Augustus  Walker,  Ph.D.  1895; 
Clergyman,  South  West  Harbor,  Maine. 

The  Semitic  Negative  with  Special  Reference 
to  the  Negative  in  Hebrew.  Doctor's  thesis. 
American  Journal  of  Semitic  Languages 
and  Literatures,  XII  (1896),  230-267. 

a  comparative  table  of  all  the  forms  of  negative  par- 
ticles or  words  used  as  such  in  the  Semitic  langruages ;  a 
description  of  these  forms  according  to  origin  in  form, 
fundamental  idea,  and  syntactical  usage ;  the  relation 
of  different  particles  to  each  other  in  the  same  language 
and  in  different  languages ;  the  development  and  com- 
position of  certain  negatives  from  more  primitive  forms 
and  ideas ;  a  discussion  of  some  previous  views  as  to 
origin  and  composition ;  and  some  new  explanations  of 
forms. 


Hebbeet  L.  Willett,  Ph.D.  1896.  (See 
above.) 

Preston  Pishon  Bbuce,  Graduate  student. 

Three  Inscriptions  of  Nabopolassar,  King  of 
Babylonia,  American  Journal  of  Semitic 
Languages  and  Literatures,  XVI  (1900), 
178-186, 

Translations  of  Assyrian  and  Babylonian  In- 
scriptions contributed  to  Assyrian  and 
Babylonian  Literature,  edited  by  Robert 
Francis  Harper.    (See  above.) 


46 


Publications 


IX.    BIBLICAL  AND  PATRISTIC  GREEK 


Ernest  DeWitt  Bueton  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
New  Testament  Literature  and  Inter- 
pretation. 

Syntax  of  the  Moods  and  Tenses  in  New  Tes- 
tament Greek.  Second  edition,  revised  and 
enlarged.  12mo,  xxii  -f  215.  Chicago,  Uni- 
versity Press,  1893.    Fourth  edition,  1901. 

A  Harmony  of  the  Four  Gospels  for  Historical 
Study.  In  collaboration  with  Wm.  Arnold 
Stevens.  12mo,  xii-|-238.  Boston,  Silver, 
Burdett  &  Co.,  1894.    Revised  edition,  1902. 

An  arrangement  of  the  material  of  the  four  gospels, 
according  to  the  English  version  of  1881,  in  parallel 
columns  to  facilitate  their  use  as  sources  for  the  life  of 
Jesus ;  with  appendix  on  the  repeated  sayings  of  Jesus. 

Records  and  Letters  of  the  Apostolic  Age. 
12mo,  xix  -\-  238.  New  York,  Charles  Scrib- 
ner's  Sons,  1895. 

An  arrangement  of  the  Acts,  Epistles,  and  Apocalypse 
of  the  New  Testament,  according  to  the  English  ver- 
sion of  1881,  in  a  manner  to  facilitate  their  use  as 
sources  for  the  history  of  the  apostolic  age ;  with  notes 
justifying  the  order  of  documents  adopted. 

Handbook  of  the  Life  of  Paul.  12mo,  86. 
Chicago,  American  Institute  of  Sacred  Lit- 
erature, 1897.    Second  edition,  1900. 

Constructive  Studies  in  the  Life  of  Christ. 
In  collaboration  with  Shailer  Mathews.  8vo, 
302.  Chicago,  University  Press,  1900.  Re- 
vised edition,  1901. 

The  Purpose  and  Plan  of  the  Four  Gospels. 
8vo,  20  -M5  +  20  +  30.  Chicago,  University 
Press,  1900. 

Saul's  Experience  on  the  Way  to  Damascus. 
Biblical  JVorld,  I  (1893),  ^23. 

An  attempt  to  discover  and  state  what  was  involved, 
mentally  and  morally,  in  Saul's  change  from  Pharisee- 
ism  to  Christianity. 

Jewish  Home  Life.  Ibid.,  VIII  (1896),  445- 
447. 

Are  the  Teachings  of  the  Apostles  of  Equal 
Authority  with  those  of  Christ?  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Baptist  Congress,  1897,  8-17. 

Jesus  as  a  Thinker.  Biblical  World,  X  (1897), 
245-258. 


The  Function  of  Interpretation  in  Relation  to 
Theology.  American  Journal  of  Theology, 
II  (1898),  52-79. 

A  discussion  of  the  extent  to  which,  and  the  principles 
on  which,  the  results  of  biblical  interpretation  can  be 
scientifically  employed  by  constructive  dogmatic  the- 
ology. 

The  Politarchs.    Ibid.,  598-632. 

A  collection,  believed  to  be  complete,  of  extant  inscrip- 
tions containing  the  words  TroAirapxis  and  no\LTapxf<o, 
and  an  examination  of  their  evidence  as  to  the_  period 
and  region  in  which  the  office  of  politarch  was  in  exis- 
tence. 


The    Personal    Religion  of  Jesus. 
World,  XIV  (1899),  394-403. 


Biblical 


Reviews  of 

Badham,  Formation  of  the  Gospels.     Biblical 

World,  I  (1893),  315-319. 
Schwartzkopff,    Prophecies    of    Jesus   Christ. 

Ibid.,  XI  (1898),  280-282. 
Blass,  Grammar  of   New  Testament   Greek. 

American  Journal  of  Theology,  III  (1899), 

774-775. 
Hort,  First  Epistle  of  Peter,  1 : 1-2: 17.    Ibid., 

IV  (1900),  173-174. 
Hawkins,  Horae  Synopticae.    Ibid.,  426-427. 
Wright,  The  Gospel  According  to  St.  Luke  in 

Greek.    /6id.,  596-597. 
Ramsay,  Historical  Commentary  on  St.  Paul's 

Epistle  to  the  Galatians.    Ibid.,  V  (1901), 

150-153. 
Feine,    Das     gesetzesfreie    Evangelium    des 

Paulus.    Ibid.,  355-357. 

Shailer  Mathews  [1894 — ],  Professor 
of  New  Testament  History  and  Inter- 
pretation. 

The  Social  Teaching  of  Jesus.  12mo,  vi  -t-  234. 
New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1897. 

A  History  of  New  Testament  Times  in  Pales- 
tine. 12mo,  xi  +  218.  New  York,  The  Mac- 
millan Co.,  1899. 

Constructive  Studies  in  the  Life  of  Christ. 
In  collaboration  with  Ernest  DeWitt  Bur- 
ton.   (See  above.) 


Department  of  Biblical  and  Patristic  Greek 


47 


Select  Mediaeval  Documents  and  Other  Ma- 
terial Illustrating  the  History  of  Church 
and  Empire,  754-1254  A.  D.  Second  edition, 
revised  and  with  glossary.  12mo,  177.  Bos- 
ton, Silver,  Burdett  &  Co.,  1900. 

The  Place  of  Apocalyptic  Messianism  in  the 
New  Testament.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  Second  Series, 
Vol.  XVII. 

Introduction  to  the  Gospel  of  Luke.  Biblical 
World,  V  (1895),  336-342,  448-455. 

A  summary  of  the  characteristics  of  the  gosi>eI  deriv- 
able from  a  study  of  the  gospel  itself. 

The  Interpretation  of  Parables.  American 
Journal  of  Theology,  II  (1898),  293-311. 


An  attempt  to  formulate  a  method  of  interpreting  par- 
idy  of  the  method  in  wnii " 
they  were  used  and  interpreted  by  Jesus. 


ables  from  a  comparative  study  of  the  method  in  which 


The  Jewish  Messianic  Expectation  in  the  Time 
of  Jesus.  Biblical  World,  XII  (1898),  437- 
444. 

A  presentation  of  extracts  from  the  most  important 
material  in  the  literature  of  Pharisaism  illustrating 
the  messianic  hope  of  Judaism. 

The  Social  Teaching  of  Paul.  Ibid.,  XIX 
(1902),  34-46,  113-120,  178-189,  279-287, 
370-376,  433-442. 

The  teaching  of  Paul  on  various  matters  of  social  eth- 
ics (e.  g.,  the  Christian  fraternity ^he  family,  the  state, 
wealth)  discussed  in  the  light  of  Pharisaic  and  Chris- 
tian messianism. 

Review  of 

McGiflfert,  The  Apostolic  Age.  Ibid.,  X  (1897), 
350-365. 

An  examination  of  the  author's  rearrangement  of  the 
chronology  of  the  Apostolic  period. 


Clyde  Weber  Votaw  [1892 — ],  Assistant 

Professor  of  New  Testament  Literature. 

The  Use  of  the  Infinitive  in  Biblical  Greek. 
Doctor's  thesis.    8vo,  59.    Chicago,  1896. 

A  complete  tabulation  and  classification  of  all  infini- 
tive forms  in  the  Septuagint  and  the  Greek  New  Testa- 
ment, with  a  discussion  of  the  influence  of  the  Hebrew 
upon  the  use  of  the  infinitive  in  the  Greek  Bible. 

The  Transition  from  Judaism  to  Christianity. 
Biblical  Literature  Essays  of  the  American 
Institute  of  Sacred  Literature.  8vo,  20. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1896. 


The  Location  of  the  Galatian  Churches. 
lical  World,  III  (1894),  456-462. 


Bib- 


A  criticism  of  certain  arguments  advanced   for  the 
Soath-Oalatian  hypothesis. 


Recent  Discussions  of  the  Chronology  of  the 
Apostolic  Age.  Biblical  World,  XI  (1898), 
112-119,  177-187. 

The  Septuagint  Greek  Version  of  the  Old  Tes- 
tament.   Ibid.,  XVI  (1900),  186-198. 

The  Sermon  on  the  Mount.  Article  in  Has- 
tings, Dictionary  of  the  Bible,  Supple- 
mentary Volume.    44  pp. 

The  Autographic  Text  of  the  Synoptic  Gospels. 
Article  in  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  Vol.  V. 

Reviews  of 

Briggs,  Messiah    of   the    Gospels.     Biblical 

WorU,  VI  (1895),  72-76. 
Gould,  Commentary  on  the  Gospel  According 

to  St.  Mark.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1896),  66-70. 
Abbott,  Commentary  on  the  Epistles  to  the 

Ephesians  and  Colossians.    Ibid.,  XI  (1898), 

364^366. 
Somerville,  The  Pauline  Conception  of  Christ. 

Ibid.,  XII  (1898),  360-366. 
Swete,  The  Gospel  According  to  St.  Mark. 

Artierican  Journal  of  Theology,  III  (1899), 

779-781. 
Barde,  Commentaire  sur  las  Actes  des  Apotres. 

Ibid.,  783-785. 
Davis,    Dictionary   of    the    Bible.      Biblical 

W&rU,  XIV  (1899),  314-318. 

Edgar  Johnson  Goodspeed  [1898 — ], 
Instructor  in  Biblical  and  Patristic 
Greek. 

The  Ayer  Papyrus:  A  Mathematical  Fragment. 
American  Journal  of  Philology,  XIX 
(1898),  25-39.    Plate. 

The  Greek  text  with  introduction  and  notes. 

The  Washim  Papyrus  of  Iliad  0,  1-68.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Archaeology,  Second  Se- 
ries, II  (1898),  347-356.    Plate. 

Greek  text  and  discussion. 

Berlin  Papyri  Nos.  810,  811.  Aegyptische  Ur- 
kunden  aus  den  kOniglichen  Museen  zu 
Berlin :  Griechische  Urkunden,  III  (1899), 
125-126. 

Greek  texts. 


48 


Publications 


A  New  Fragment  of  Iliad  E.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Philology,  XXI  (1900),  310-314. 
Plate. 

Greek  text  and  discussion. 

Papyri  from  Karanis.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Studies  in  Classical  Philology,  III 
(1900),  1-66.    Plate. 

Greek  texts  of  91  Fayftm  grain-receipts,  mostly  of  158 
A.  D.,  with  discussion. 

Pappiscus  and  Philo.  American  Journal  of 
Theology,  IV  (1900),  796-802. 

Description  and  collation  of  a  new  Dresden  manuscript 
of  the  dialogue,  with  a  discussion  of  the  text. 

The  Book  of  Thekla.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Historical  and  Linguistic  Studies 
in  Literature  Related  to  the  New  Testa- 
ment, First  Series,  I,  Part  1,  1-36.  Plate. 
1901. 

The  Ethiopic  text,  from  manuscripts  in  the   British 
Museum,  with  introduction  and  translation. 

The  Haskell  Gospels.  Journal  of  Biblical 
Literature,  XXI  (1902),  100-107. 

Description  and  collation  of  the  Haskell  MS.-  of  the 
Greek  gospels,  with  discussion  of  its  textual  value. 

The  Newberry  Gospels.  Doctor's  thesis.  The 
University  of  Chicago  Historical  and  Lin- 
guistic Studies  in  Literature  Related  to 
the  New  Testament,  First  Series,  II,  Part  1, 
1-29,  with  plate.    1902. 

A  Martyrological  Fragment  from  Jerusalem. 
American  Journal  of  Philology,  XXIII 
(1902),  68-74. 

Introduction  and  Greek  text. 

Greek  Papyri  from  the  Cairo  Museum,  together 
with  Papyri  of  Roman  Egypt  from  Ameri- 
can Cbllections.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
V,  1-80. 

Beviews  of 

Lewis,  Select  Narratives  of  Holy  Women. 
American  Journal  of  Theology,  V  (1901), 
568-571. 

Flemming  and  Radermacher,  Das  Buch  Hen- 
och.   Ibid.,  VI  (1902),  147-149. 

William  Muss-Arnolt.  (See  under  Se- 
mitic Languages  and  Literatures,  p.  42.) 


Theophilus  Huntington  Root  [1892- 
93  j ,  Tutor  in  New  Testament  Literature ; 
Clergyman,  Alton,  R.  I. 

The  Self-Consciousness  of  Jesus.  Biblical 
World,  11(1893),  265-274,353-362,  412-420. 

Edgab  Johnson  Goodspeed,  Ph.D.  1898. 
■  (See  above.) 

Henry  Martyn  IIerrick,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Principal  Port  Byron  Academy,  Port 
Byron,  111. 

The  Kingdom  of  God  in  the  Writings  of  the 
Church  Fathers.  Doctor's  thesis.  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Historical  and  Lin- 
guistic Studies  in  Literature  Related  to  the 
New  Testament,  Second  Series,  I,  Part  1, 
1-115,  1903. 

The  starting  point  is  gained  by  an  examination  of  the 
teaching  of  Jesus  concerning  the  kingdom,  as  recorded 
in  the  canonical  gospels,  the  other  New  Testament 
writings  giving  data  as  to  the  views  of  the  apostles. 
Then  follow  in  order  the  views  of  the  patristic  age, 
from  Clement  of  Alexandria  to  John  of  Damascus. 
The  Fathers  are  treated  in  groups  of  Greek  and  Latin, 
from  the  apostolic  to  the  later  post-Nicene.  Tables 
show  the  number  of  references  to  the  kingdom  made 
by  the  several  writers,  together  with  the  proportion  of 
scriptural  references  and  their  distribution.  An  index 
to  these  references  is  added. 

Gerald  D.  Heuver,  Ph.D.  1900;  Clergy- 
man, Wenona,  111. 

The  Teaching  of  Jesus  Concerning  Wealth. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  critical  study  (1)  of  the  sources  of  the  economic 
teaching  of  Jesus  with  special  reference  to  the  variant 
logia  of  Matthew  and  Luke :  (2)  of  the  formative  influ- 
ences about  Jesus;  (3)  of  the  economic  condition  of 
Palestine  in  his  day ;  (4)  the  content  of  his  teaching 
concerning  economic  matters  with  a  comparison  of  the 
same  with  those  of  the  Old  Testament  and  the  rabbis : 
(5)  the  significance  of  his  method  and  teachings  for 
modern  economic  problems. 

Reviews  of 

Zitslaff,  Die  wahre  Bedeutung  der  Glaubens- 
rechtfertigung.  Studien  und  Kritiken 
(1897),  489-577;  American  Journal  of  The- 
ology, I  (1897),  1126-1129. 

Thomas    Allan    Hoben,    Ph.D.    1901; 

Clergyman,  Waupun,  Wis. 
Wall-Maps  of  Palestine.  Biblical  World,  XIII 

(1899),  412^22. 

A  critical  examination  of  thirty-seven  wall-maps  of 
Palestine,  giving  also  names  of  publishersi,  dimensions, 
and  prices. 


Sanskrit  and  Indo-Eubopean  Comparative  Philology 


49 


A  Study  of  the  Virgin  Birth  in  the  Ante-Nicene 
Christian  Literature.  Doctor's  thesis.  Amer- 
ican Journal  of  Theology,  VI  (1902),  4:13- 
506,  709-752. 

The  New  Testament  attestation  of  the  virgin  birth  and 
an  interpretation  of  the  stories  as  told  by  Matthew  and 
Luke.    The  main  body  of  the  article,  which  takes  upon 


chronological  order  the  teaching  of  twenty  of  the  ante- 
Nicene  Fathers,  beginning]  with  Ignatius  and  ending 
with  Alexander  of  Alexandria.  A  brief  conclusion  is 
drawn  from  the  study  of  the  Fathers,  and  the  general 
conclusion  is  stated  at  the  close  of  the  examination  of 
the  Fathers.  The  contribution  of  the  apocryphal  gos- 
pels to  the  study  is  briefly  stated  in  an  appendix. 

Clyde  W.  Votaw,  Ph.D.  1896.  (See  above.) 


X.    SANSKRIT  AND  INDO-EUROPEAN  COMPARATIVE  PHILOLOGY. 


Carl  Darling  Buck  [1892 — ],  Professor 
of  Sanskrit  and  Indo-European  Com- 
parative Philology. 

Der  Vokalismus  der  oskischen  Sprache.  Svo, 
xvi  +  219.  Leipzig,  K.  F.  Koehler's  Anti- 
quarium,  1892. 

A  Latin  Grammar,  for  Schools  and  Colleges. 

In  collaboration  with  Wm.  Gardner  Hale. 

12mo,  viii  -f  398.    Boston,  Ginn  &  Co.    In 

press. 
An  Oacan-Umbrian  Grammar,  with  Selected 

Inscriptions  and  a  Glossary.    12mo,  ca.  300. 

Boston,  Ginn  &  Co.    In  press. 
The  Indo-European  Root  std  (stand)  in  ItaHc. 

Proceedings  of  the  American  Philological 

Association,  XXIV  (1893),  xlix-1. 

Do  the  Non-Labialized  Velars  Suffer  Dentaliza- 
tion  in  Greek  ?  Indogermanische  Forschun- 
gen,  IV  (1894),  152-158. 

It  is  argued  that  in  the  development  of  the  labio-velars 
to  dentals  in  Greek  the  labial  element  of  the  former, 
that  is,  the  accompanying  rounding  of  the  lips,  must  be 
an  essential  condition  to  the  change,  since  even  the 
palatals,  when  followed  by  a  full  consonantal  m,  become 
dentals  under  the  same  conditions  as  the  labio-velars. 
The  view  held  by  some,  that  the  non-labialized  velars 

ior  simple  velars  in  the  terminology  now  used)  also  suf- 
er  dentaUzation,  is  regarded  as  without  foundation. 

Italic  Languages.  Article  in  Johnson's  Uni- 
versal Cyclopcedia,  VI,  369-372. 

Oscan-Umbrian  Verb  System.  The  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago  Studies  in  Classical  Phi- 
lology, I  (1895),  124-187. 

A  general  comparison  of  the  Oscan-Umbrian  verb-system 
with  that  of  the  Latin,  in  form  and  syntax,  followed  by 
a  detailed  discussion  of  the  various  formations. 

Some  General  Problems  of  Ablaut.  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XVII  (1896),  267- 
288. 

statement  of  the  author's  position  on  certain  contro- 
versial  questions,  in  part  introductory  to  the  following : 


Brugmann's  Law  and  the  Sanskrit  Vrddhi. 
Ibid.,  445^72. 

On  the  much-disputed  theory,  commonly  known  as 
Brugmann's  law,  according  to  which  an  Indo-European 
short  o  in  open  syllables  appears  in  Sanskrit  as  a.  It 
is  maintained  that  in  these  classes  of  forms,  which  furn- 
ish the  chief  support  for  the  theory,  the  a  can  represent, 
either  directly  or  by  extension,  an  original  long  vowel. 
To  show  that  the  strengthened  vowel-grades  were  not 
uncommon,  considerable  material  is  collected  from 
Greek,  Latin,  Germanic,  and  Balto-Slavic.  An  excur- 
sus deals  with  the  development  of  the  Sanskrit  vrddhi 
in  secondary  derivation. 

Note  on  the  Oscan  Word  prUffed.  Classical 
Review,  X  (1896),  194. 

Acceptance  of 'Professor  Allen's  explanation  of  prdffed, 
and  application  of  the  same  to  aamanaffed. 

Notes  on  the  Genetives  TXaauifo  and  Ilao-iaSa/ro 
Classical  Review,  XI  (1897),  190-191,  307. 

The  usual  explanation  of  the  Corcyrean  Tkairiafo  as  a 
false  archaism  is  made  improbable  by  the  discovery  of 
a  similar  form  in  an  inscription  of  Gela.  It  is  suggested 
that  the  f  is  a  glide-sound  developed  before  the  o. 

Notes  on  Latin  Orthography.  Ibid.,  XIII 
(1899),  116-119,  156-167. 

A  special  study  of  the  chronologry  of  certain  changes  in 
spelling  and  pronunciation.    For  example,  in  regard  to 

Erepositional  compounds,  it  is  shown,  mainly  on  the 
asis  of  a  new  collection  of  the  inscriptional  evidence, 
that  in  several  classes  of  compounds,  commonly  thought 
to  exhibit  both  assimilated  and  unassimilated  forms 
(as  '''■  adfero  or  affero,"  " inlii,8tris  or  illxutris"  etc.), 
the  assimilated  form  was  almost  or  wholly  unknown 
until  the  fourth  or  even  the  sixth  century  A.  D.  (e.  g.,  in 
all  the  examples  noted,  extending  into  the  sixth  cent- 
ury A.  D.,  always  inlustris,  never  illustris). 

The  Source  of  the  Achaean-Doric  /coin/.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Philology,  XXI  (1900), 
193-196. 

Seeks  to  establish  that  the  Achaean-Doric  icoii^,  though 
based  in  the  main  upon  the  dialects  of  the  northwest 
Greek  group,  is  yet  in  a  measure  an  artificial  product 
for  which  tne  Attic  koivij  has  furnished,  not  only  the 
suggestion,  but  also  certain  specific  elements. 

Indo- 
(1901), 


Critical  Notes  to  Oscan  Inscriptions. 
germanische    Forschungen,     XII 
13-22. 


Results  of  an  examination,  made  in  1899,  of  the  Oscao 
inscriptions  in  Naples,  Pompeii,  Capua,  Nola,  etc. 


50 


Publications 


Note  on  the  Form  'AycuriX-^fov  Revue  ArcMo- 
logique,  3  series,  XL  (1902),  47-48. 

A  Sketch  of  the  Linguistic  Conditions  of  Chi- 
cago. Article  in  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
VL 

Reviews  of 

Jackson,  Avesta  Grammar  and  Avesta  Reader. 
American  Journal  of  Philology,  XV  (1894), 
374-378. 

Lord,  Pronunciation  of  Latin.  Classical 
Review,  X  (1896),  60-61. 

Brugmann,  Griechische  Grammatik.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Philology,  XXI  (1900),  317- 
322. 

John  Jacob  Meyer,  [1900 — ],  Associate 
in  Sanskrit  and  Indo-European  Com- 
parative Philology. 

Das  Dagakumaracaritam,  die  Abenteuer  der 
zehn  Prinzen.  Ein  altindischer  Schelmen- 
roman,  zum  ersten  Mai  aus  dem  Sanskrit  ins 
Deutsche  libersetzt,  mit  einer  Einleitung 
und  Anmerkungen.  Doctor's  thesis.  Leip- 
zig, Lotos-Verlag,  1903. 

The  first  part  of  the  introduction  deals  chiefly  with 
robbers,  thieves,  rogues,  hetairai.  Some  salient  points 
in  the  character  and  life  of  the  ancient  Hindu  are 
brought  out.  The  second  part  treats_  of  the  Hindu 
parallels  to  the  stories  of  the  Dacakumaracaritam,  the 
third  of  the  author,  his  date,  etc.  The  notes  aim  to 
give  some  further  information  on  matters  coming  up 
m  the  narratives.  Many  of  them  are  meant  only  for 
the  general  public. 

Two  Twice -Told  Tales.  Article  in  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  VI. 

*Arthue  W.  Stratton  [1895-1900],  In- 
structor in  Sanskrit;  late  Professor  of 
Sanskrit, Oriental  College,  Lahore,  India. 

History  of  Greek  Noun  Formation.  I.  Suffixes 
with  m.  The  University  of  Chicago  Studies 
in  Classical  Philology,  II  (1892),  115-243. 

The  first  of  a  series  of  studies  in  course  of  preparation, 
the  aim  of  which  is  to  arrive  at  a  more  definite  under- 
standing of  the  types  of  nominal  formation  that  began 
to  be  employed  within  historical  times  and  thus  help 


in  determining  what  forms  were  inherited  from  earlier 
times. 

A  portion  of  the  preceding  paper  was  offered  as  the 
writer's  Johns  Hopkins  University  dissertation  under 
the  title,  "Chapters  in  the  History  of  Greek  Noun  For- 
mation." 


Frank  Hamilton  Fowler,  Ph.D.  1896; 
Professor  of  English,  Lombard  College, 
Galesburg,  111. 

The  Negatives  of  the  Indo-European  Lan- 
guages. Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  40.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1896. 

A  discussion  of  the  relations  existing  between  the  nega- 
tives of  the  Indo-European  lan^ages ;  an  attempt  to 
explain  the  origin  of  the  negative  meaning  of  several 
particles ;  a  brief  discussion  of  the  syntax  of  the  Indo- 
European  negatives. 

Two  Notes  on  Latin  Negatives.  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XVI  (1895),  493-495. 

Nunquam  and  mtsquam  have  lost  -c-  through  the  influ- 
ence of  nulliis. 


Mary  B.  Harris,  Ph.D.  1900;  Instructor 
in  Latin  and  Greek,  Dearborn  Semi- 
nary, Chicago. 

Kalidasa's  Treatment  of  Nature.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  inaccuracy  of  Hindu  chronology ,_  and  the  uncer- 
tainty regarding  the  sequence  of  Kalidasa's  works 
make  a  genetic  study  of  Kalidasa's  nature-feeling 
futile.  The  thesis,  therefore,  (1)  organizes  the  material, 
furnished  by  the  works  admittedly  Kalidasa's,  under 
three  heads:  (a)  plant-life,  (6)  animal-life,  and  (c)  in- 
animate nature :  and  (2)  interprets  the  material  from 
two  points  of  view:  (a)  the  influence  of  nature  upon 
man,  and  (6)  man's  sympathetic  view  of  nature.  Pre- 
ceding the  discussion  is  a  biographical  sketch.  An  ap- 
pendix gives  a  table  of  the  sounds,  colors,  and  odors 
mentioned  in  Kalidasa's  works. 


*Henry  F.  Linscott,  Ph.D.  1895;  late 
Professor  of  Latin,  University  of  North 
Carolina. 

The  Latin  Third  Declension:  A  Study  in  Meta- 
plasm  and  Syncretism.  Doctor's  thesis. 
8vo,  43.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1896. 

A  discussion  of  metaplasm  and  syncretism  as  forces  in 
the  development  of  language,  with  a  treatment  of  the 
case-endings  of  the  Latin  third  declension. 

John  Jacob  Meyer,  Ph.D.  1900.  (See 
above.) 


Department  of  Greek  Language  and  Literature 


51 


Helen  M.  Searles,  Ph.D.  1898;  In- 
structor in  Latin,  Mount  Holyoke  Col- 
lege. 

A  Lexicographical  Study  of  the  Greek  In- 
scriptions. Doctor's  thesis.  The  University 
of  Chicago  Studies  in  Classical  Philology, 
II  (1898),  1-114. 

a  discussion  of  the  new  and  rare  words  of  the  Greek 
dialect  inscriptions.  This  work  was  intended  as  a  pre- 
liminary study  for  a  lexicon  of  the  Greek  inscriptions. 
It  includes  only  material  published  before  January, 
1898.  It  is  based  on  the  CoUitz  Sammlung  der  grie- 
chischen  Dialekt-Inschriften,  but  includes  also  words 
from  other  published  inscriptions  with  the  addition  of 
some  from  the  Attic  dialect. 


Edgar  H.  Sturtevant,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Acting  Professor  of  Greek,  Maryville 
College,  Tenn. 

Contraction  in  the  Case  Forms  of  the  Latin  io- 
and  ja-stems,  and  of  deus,  is  and  idem. 
Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  36.  Dissertationes 
Americanae,  Classical  Philology,  I,  No.  2. 
Chicago,  Scott  Foresman  &  Co.,  1902. 

Chapter  I  places  the  contraction  of  the  genitive  singn- 
lar  of  the  jo-stems  in  the  prehistoric  period,  and  that 
of  the  nominative  and  dative-ablative  plural  of  the 
io-  and  ia-stems  at  about  600  a.  u.  c.  Chapter  II  dis- 
cusses the  varying  orthography  of  the  nominative  and 
dative-ablative  plural  of  deus,  is  and  ideni,  and  draws 
some  conclusions  as  to  pronunciation.  Chapter  III 
explains  the  short  forms  dx,  dis,  etc.,  as  due  to  prehis- 
toric contraction. 


XI.    GREEK  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE 


Paul  Shorey  [1892 — ],  Professor  and 
Head  of  the  Department  of  the  Greek 
Language  and  Literature. 

Horace,  Odes  and  Epodes,  edited  with  Intro- 
duction and  Notes.  12mo,  xxxvii  +  487. 
Boston,  Sanborn  &  Co.,  1898. 

The  Implicit  Ethics  and  Psychology  of  Thucy- 
dides.  Transactions  of  the  American  Phi- 
lological Association,  XXIV  (1893),  66-88. 

The  Idea  of  Good  in  Plato's  Republic.  The 
University  of  Chicago  Studies  in  Classical 
Philology,  I  (1895),  188-239. 

Articles  on  Aristophanes,  Lucretius,  and  Plato. 
Warner^s  Library  of  the  World^s  Best  Lit- 
erature, II,  759-768;  XXIII,  9304r-9312; 
XXIX,  11519-11530.    1896. 

Plato,  Lucretius,  and  Epicurus.  Harvard  Stud- 
ies in  Classical  Philology,  XII  (1901),  201  f . 

Mind  and  Body:  A  Discussion.  Psycholog- 
ical Review,  II  (1895),  43-53. 

Note  on  Themistius's  Paraphrase  of  Aristotle's 
Physics,  II,  9.  Classical  Review,  X  (1896), 
328. 

Greek  Life  and  Thought  at  the  Culmination  of 
the  Age  of  Pericles.  Lectiure  Syllabus. 
8vo,  10.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1897. 


Aristotle's  de  Anima.  American  Journal  of 
Philology,  XXII  (1901),  148-164. 

The  Unity  of  Plato's  Thought.  Article  in  The 
University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publi- 
cations, First  Series,  VI. 

Reviews  of 

Jowett,  The  Dialogues  of  Plato,  translated 
into  English.  American  Journal  of  Phi- 
lology, XIII  (1892),  349-372. 

Kalbfleisch,  Galen.  Classical  Review,  VII 
(1893),  267. 

Pater,  Plato  and  Platonism.  Dial,  XIV  (1893), 
211-214. 

Lang,  Homer  and  the  Epic.  Ibid.,  XV  (1893), 
15-17. 

Calderwood,  Evolution  and  Man's  Place  in  Na- 
ture.   Ibid.,  66-67. 

Jebb,  Greek  Poetry  and  Life.  Ibid.,  XVI 
(1894),  107-110. 

B6nard,  Platon:  Sa  philosophic.  Philoso- 
phical Review,  III  (1894),  73-77. 

Holm,  History  of  Greece,  Vol.  I.    Nation,  LIX 

(1894),  451. 
Jowett  and  Campbell,  The  Republic  of  Plato, 

Vol.  I,  Text;  Vol.  II,  Essays;  Vol.  Ill,  Notes. 

Ibid.,  LXI  (1895),  82-84. 


52 


Publications 


Jowett  and  Campbell,  Plato's  Republic.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Philology,  XVI  (1895),  223- 

239. 
Hal6vy,   Th6orie  platonicienne  des  sciences. 

Philosophical  Review,  V  (1896),  522-530. 
Bussell,  School  of  Plato.    Nation,  LXII  (1896), 

474. 
Whibley,  Greek  Oligarchies.      Ihid.,   LXIII 

(1896),  57. 
Zeller,  Aristotle.    Ihid.,  LXIV  (1897),  344-345. 
Greenidge,  Greek  Constitutional  History.  Ihid., 

269-270. 
Max  Miiller,  Contributions  to  the  Science  of 

Mythology.    Ihid.,  LXV  (1897),  265-266. 
Farnell,  Cults  of  the  Greek  States.    Ihid.,  189  f . 
Harper's  Classical  Dictionary,  edited  by  H.  T. 

Peck.    Dial,  XXII  (1897),  84-85. 
Frazer,  Pausanias.  Ihid.,  XXIV  (1898),  310-320. 
Holm,  History  of  Greece,  Vols.  II-IV.   Nation, 

LXVI  (1898),  447-448. 
Lutoslawski,  The  Origin   of   Plato's    Logic. 

Ihid.,  LXVII  (1898),  168-169.    Also  Monist, 

VIII  (1898),  621-622. 
Benn,  The  Philosophy  of  Greece.    Ihid.,  LXIX 

(1899),  56-57. 
Lawton,  The    Successors  of    Homer.     Dial, 

XXVI  (1899),  78-79. 

Campbell,  Religion  in  Greek  Literature.  Ihid., 

XXVII  (1899),  170-173. 

Hoffding,    History   of    Modern    Philosophy. 

Ihid.,  XXIX  (1900),  225-227. 
Patin,  Parmenides  im  Kampfe  gegen  Heraklit. 

Am.  Jour,  of  Phil,  XXI  (1900),  200-216. 
Br6al,  Semantic.    Dial,  XXX  (1901),  298-301. 
Stephen,  English  Utilitarianism.  Ihid.,  396-398. 
Gomperz,  Greek  Thinkers.  Ibid.,  XXXI  (1901), 

100-102. 
Jastrow,  Fact  and  Fable  in  Psychology.  Monist, 

XI  (1901),  290-293. 

Fbank   Bigelow   Tarbell,   Professor  of 
Classical  ArchsGology. 
(See  under  Archaeology,  p.  29.) 


Edward  Capps  [1892 — ],  Professor  of 
Greek. 

From  Homer  to  Theocritus :  A  Manual  of  Greek 
Literature.  12mo,  viii  +  329.  Cleveland, 
Chautauqua  Press,  1900.  Second  edition, 
revised,  x  +  476.  New  York,  Charles  Scrib- 
ner's  Sons,  1901. 

Vitruvius  and  the  Greek  Stage.  With  five 
sketch-plans.  The  University  of  Chicago 
Studies  in  Classical  Philology,  I  (1893), 
93-113;  preprint,  1892,  1-23. 

a  refutation  of  Dyer's  attempt  to  reconcile  the  DOrp- 
feld  theory  of  the  Greek  stage  with  Vitruvius  by  means 
of  an  interpretation  of  the  latter  derived  from  the  me- 
diaeval Italian  architect,  Giocondo.  Giocondo's  notes 
and  plans  do  not  support  Dyer's  interpretation,  and 
find  no  warrant  in  the  text  of  Vitruvius.  A  critical 
interpretation  of  the  text  of  Vitruvius  leads  to  results 
in  harmony  with  those  derived  from  the  extant  ruins. 

Excavations  in  the  Eretrian  Theater  in  1894. 
With  text  figures  and  plate.  American 
Journal  of  Archceology,  First  Series,  X 
(1895),  338-346;  Papers  of  the  American 
School  of  Classical  Studies  at  Athens,  VI, 
135-143. 

An  account  of  the  results  of  the  excavations  made  un- 
der the  writer's  direction  in  the  spring  of  1894  by  the 
American  School,  followed  by  a  consideration  of  some 
of  the  architectural  features  of  the  building  in  their 
bearing  upon  matters  of  controversy. 

The  Side-Entrances  to  the  Greek  Theatre. 
Classical  Review,  VIII  (1894),  318-320. 

A  defense  against  Haigh  of  some  of  the  conclusions 
reached  by  Bodensteiner  and  the  writer  in  their  exami- 
nation of  the  extant  dramas  for  information  regarding 
the  relative  positions  of  actors  and  chorus  and  the  use 
of  the  orchestra  by  the  latter. 

Professor  Christ  on  the  Greek  Stage.  Ihid., 
133-136. 

A  criticism  of  some  of  Christ's  views  on  the  theater  as 
presented  in  his  article  "  Das  Theater  des  Polyklit  in 
Epidauros  m  seiner  litterar-  und  kunst-historischen 
Bedeutung." 

The  Chorus  in  the  Later  Greek  Drama  with 
Reference  to  the  Stage  Question.  American 
Journal  of  Archceology,  First  Series,  X 
(1895),  287-325;  Papers  of  the  American 
School  of  Classical  Studies  at  Athens,  VI, 
392-430. 

An  examination  of  the  current  opinion  that  the  chorus 
in  tragedy  underwent  important  changes  during  the 
fourth  century  and  soon  after  disappeared,  and  that  in 
comedy  it  was  abandoned  early  in  the  fourth  century. 
Evidence  is  advanced  to  overthrow  this  opinion.  The 
sources  of  the  erroneous  tradition  are  disclosed.  The 
chorus  was  given  up  in  comedy  some  time  during  the 
New  Comedy;  in  tragedy  and  the  satyr-drama  it  was 


Department  of  Greek  Language  and  Literature 


53 


retained  throughout.  The  functions  which  survived  are 
those  which  are  all-important_  for  the  stage  question, 
and  make  against  the  assumption  of  any  revolutionary 
change  in  the  theater  between  the  fifth  and  fourth  cen- 
turies. 

The  Dramatic  Synchoregia  at  Athens.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Philology,  XVII  (1896), 
319-328. 

At  attempt  to  determine  with  greater  accuracy  the  his- 
tory of  this  modification  of  the  choregic  system.  Aris- 
tophanes Ran.  404  is  made  to  support  the  year  406  5  for 
the  change,  and  inscriptional  evidence  is  adduced  to 
show  that  in  394  the  synchoregia  was  discontinued  for 
tragedy  but  not  until  some  years  later  for  comedy. 
Only  the  City  Dionysia  were  affected  by  the  change,  not 
the  Lenaea. 

The  "Tragic  Poet"  Alcseus.  Classical  J?e- 
tjteic,  XIII  (1899),  384r-386. 

The  source  of  the  error  in  Suidas,  'AAKaio*  'A^volo*  rpa- 
ytKos,  is  a  misinterpretation  of  Aristophanes  Thestn. 
159-170,  where  the  name  is  not,  however,  to  be  emended 
away.  Remarks  on  Haigh's  liist  of  the  tragic  poets  are 
added. 

The  Catalogues  of  Victors  at  the  Dionysia  and 
Lenaea.  American  Journal  of  Philology, 
XX  (1899),  388-405. 

The  thirty-two  fragments  of  these  catalogues,  which 
originally  gave  all  the  poets  and  actors  victorious  at 
the  two  festivals  for  three  centuries,  are  re-examined 
and  reclassified,  new  readings  reix)rted  from  a  new  in- 
spection of  the  stones,  and  many  of  the  fragments  for 
the  first  time  identified.  The  most  important  result  is 
the  proof  that  the  lists  of  comic  poets  hitherto  assigned, 
after  Bergk,  to  the  Dionysia,  refer  to  the  Lenaea.  The 
literary  chronology  of  the  fifth,  fourth,  and  third  cen- 
turies must  in  consequence  be  revised. 

Chronological  Studies  in  the  Greek  Tragic  and 
Comic  Poets.    Ibid.,  XXI  (1900),  38-61. 

starting  with  the  results  reached  in  the  preceding 
article,  and  with  the  help  of  new  evidence  found  in 
literary  and  inscriptional  sources,  the  chronology  of  the 
literary  activity,  and  in  some  instances  of  the  life,  of 
the  following  poets  is  determined :  Theodectas,  Astyda- 
mas  the  elder,  Astydamas  the  younger,  ApoUodorus  of 
G«la,  ApoUodorus  of  Carystus,  Cephisodotus  (restored 
in  Ijysias21, 4),  Cephisodorus,  Aristomenes,  Antiphanes, 
Alexisj  Menander.  Incidentally  a  number  of  passages 
in  Suidas,  Anonymous  II.  (Kaib.)  v.  K<afi.,  Marmor 
Parium,  and  sundry  chronographers  are  either  emended 
or  the  corruption  explained. 

The  Dating  of  Some  Didascalic  Inscriptions. 
American  Journal  of  Archaeology,  Second 
Series,  IV  (1900),  74-91. 

The  inscription  C.  I.  A.  II,  972,  of  which  the  original  is 
lost,  is  restored  by  KOhler,  following  BOckh,  as  of  the 
year  354/3.  The  difficulties  involved  in  this  dating  are 
pointed  out,  evidence  collected  from  other  inscriptions 
and  from  literature,  and  a  group  of  names  mentioned 
shown  to  belong  to  the  early  third  century.  The  exact 
year  of  the  document  is  found  to  be  289/8.  The  poets 
Simylus,  Diodorus,  and  Phoenicides  are  accordingly  to 
be  transferred  from  the  Middle  to  the  New  Comedy. 
Four  fragments  of  C.  I.  A.  II,  977  are  next  identified 
and  classified,  and  the  dates  of  the  introduction  of  the 
tragic  and  comic  actors'  contests  at  the  City  Dionysia 
established.  Several  fragments  of  C.  I.  A.  II,  975  are 
dated  and  partially  restored. 

Studies  in  Greek  Agonistic  Inscriptions. 
Transactions  of  the  American  Philological 
Association,  XXXI  (1900),  112-137. 

The  series  of  choregic  inscriptions  of  Delos  are  exam- 
ined with  reference  to  the  personnel  employed  in  the 


local  festival,  restored  and  emended  in  many  places, 
and  the  fact  elicited  that  the  Athenian  guild  of  Tex>'iT<u 
provided  the  professional  p)erformers  at  Delos  as  at 
Delphi  (Sauppe).  In  like  manner  the  Soteric  inscrip- 
tions of  Delphi  are  studied,  several  passages  restored, 
and  some  considerations  regarding  the  chorus  in  tragic 
and  comic  performances  in  the  third  century  advanced. 
Restorations  in  several  inscriptions  from  Samos  and 
Athens. 

'Eir2  T^j  (TKijj^i  and  Similar  Expressions.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Archaeology,  Second  Series, 
V  (1901),  31. 

A  brief  r6sum6  of  the  results  of  an  examination  of  the 
usage  of  Aristotle  in  the  Poetics.  The  subject  is  further 
developed  and  published  in  full  by  Mr.  R.  C.  Flick- 
inger.    (See  below.) 

Note  on  t4  ipx^^^P"-  AwioArta.  Proceedings  of 
the  American  Philological  Association, 
XXXII  (1901),  xxix. 

A  r6sum6  of  a  study  of  the  Athenian  festivals  of  Diony- 
sus mentioned  by  Thucydides  II,  15.  It  is  shown  to  be 
essential  to  the  interpretation  to  observe  that  opxaiorepa 
and  not  TroAatdrepa  is  used.  BOckh's,  as  opposed  to  Gil- 
bert's (DOrpf eld's),  view  is  thus  sustained :  the  Lenaea 
and  Anthesteria  are  the  two  apxala.  ^lovvtria,  contrasted 
with  the  via  —  Ta  if  atrrei. 

The  Introduction  of  Comedy  into  the  City 
Dionysia:  A  Chronological  Study  in  Greek 
Literary  History.  Article  in  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  VI. 

Instead  of  ca.  465  as  the  epoch-date  of  comedy  ( Wila- 
mowitz-Mollendorff),  an  attempt  is  made  to  place  it 
some  twenty  years  earlier.  The  data  for  the  argument 
are  supplied  by  the  inscriptions  C.  I.  A.  II,  971  and  977, 
supplemented  by  the  remarks  of  Aristotle  on  comedy. 

Reviews  of 

Dahn,  Scenische  Untersuchungen.  Classical 
Review,  VII  (1893),  282-283. 

Weissmann,  Die  scenische  Auflfuhrung  der 
griechischen  Dramen  des  fiinften  Jahrhun- 
derts.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1894),  124^126. 

Jebb,  Sophocles,  the  Plays  and  Fragments, 
with  Critical  Notes,  Commentary,  and  Trans- 
lation in  English  Prose.  Part  V:  The  Tra- 
chiniae.    Ibid.,  404-^08. 

A  criticism  of  the  critical  method  of  Jebb ;  additions 
and  corrections  to  his  apparatus  criticus;  several  pro- 
posed emendations  of  the  text. 

Schneidewin  and  Nauck,  Sophokles'  Elektra, 
9te  Auflage.    Ibid.,  IX  (1895),  211-213. 

Mainly  a  defense  of  Nauck's  critical  method  against 
the  attacks  of  the  modern  English  school  of  criticism. 

Girard,  De  Texpression  des  masques  dans  les 
drames  d'Eschyle.  American  Journal  of 
Archaeology,  X  (1895),  496-500. 


54 


Publications 


William  Bishop  Owen,  [1894 — ],  Asso- 
ciate Professor  of  Grreek. 

The  Custom  and  Law  of  Naturalization  at 
Athens.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  collection  and  interpretation  of  the  literary  and  in- 
scriptional  evidence  for  the  laws  bearing  on  naturali- 
zation in  Athens  down  to  the  Alexandrian  period ;  a 
collection  of  the  names  of  individualswho  are  recorded 
as  naturalized  citizens,  with  deductions  as  to  the  offi- 
cial and  unofficial  methods  of  designating  them ;  a  dis- 
cussion of  the  distinction  made  between  actual  natural- 
ization and  honorary  citizenship ;  the  types  of  public 
service,  literary,  artistic,  military,  etc.,  recognized  by 
the  grant  of  citizenship. 

KoY  C.  Flickingeb  [1902 — ],  Assistant 
in  Greek. 

The  Meaning  of  M  rrjs  (tkiji^j  in  Writers  of  the 
Fourth  Century.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
VI,  11-26. 

This  phrase  in  Aristotle  and  Demosthenes  has  been 
held  to  give  conclusive  evidence  against  DOrpfeld's 
theory  of  the  stage,  and  no  attempt  has  been  made 
hitherto  to  subject  the  passages  in  these  authors  to  a 
careful  analysis.  The  purpose  of  this  paper  is  to  prove 
that  the  meaning  "stage  for  (r(c»)v^  is  excluded  wher- 
ever the  phrase  eiri  t^s  vKtivrji  occurs  in  writers  of  the 
fourth  century.  This  result  is  found  to  be  in  entire 
agreement  with  the  usage  of  post-classical  writers. 

George  B.  Hussey  [1894-99],  Decent  in 
Greek. 

The  More  Complicated  Figures  of  Comparison 
in  Plato.  American  Journal  of  Philology, 
XVII  (1896),  329-346.  In  abstract,  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  American  Philological  As- 
sociation, XXVI  (1895),  viii-xi. 

The  Incorporation  of  Several  Dialogues  in 
Plato's  Republic.  Classical  Review,  X 
(1896),  81-85.  In  abstract.  Proceedings  of 
the  American  Philological  Association, 
XXVI  (1895),  lix-lxi. 

Note  on  Plato,  Theaetetus  llld.  Classical 
Review,  X  (1896),  156. 

WiLMER  Cave  France  [1895-96],  Header 
in  Greek;  Associate  in  Greek,  Bryn 
Mawr  College. 

The  Emperor  Julian's  Relation  to  the  New 
Sophistic  and  Neo-Platonism.  Doctor's 
thesis.    16mo,  107.    London,  1896. 


Charles  William  Seidenadel  [1897- 
1900],  Docent  in  Ancient  Greek  Au- 
thors on  Music. 

Quid  de  musices  facultate  ^^os  aut  vMoi  et 
eflBciendi  et  exprimendi  musici  scriptores  et 
philosophi  Graeci  imprimis  Plato  nee  non 
Aristoteles  indicarint.  Accedit  index  litte- 
rarum  quibus  de  re  musica  Graecorum  et 
Romanorum  veterum  agitur.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

Greek  Music  from  the  Modem  Point  of  View. 
School  Review,  VI  (1898),  540-548. 

A  lecture  delivered  at  the  Classical  Conference  at  Ann 
Arbor,  April  15, 1898. 

Herbert  M.  Burchard,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Associate  Professor  of  Greek,  Syracuse 
University,  Syracuse,  N.  Y. 

The  Influence  of  Homer  on  the  Palatine  An- 
thology.   Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  influence  of  Homer  on  the  writers  of  the  Greek 
epigrams  traced  out  under  the  following  heads:  (1) 
Homer,  a  subject  of  study  or  thought  as  mentioned 
in  the  epigrams.  (2)  Direct  quotations  specifically 
assigned  to  Homer.  (3)  Quotations  not  assigned  to 
Homer  but  consciously  used  as  coming  from  him.  (4) 
Tags,  phrases,  and  parallels.  (5)  General  references 
to  subjects  treated  in  Homer.  (6)  Words  that  are 
wholly  Homeric  or  whose  principal  use  was  in  Homer. 
(7)  Homeric  forms. 

First  the  whole  Anthology  is  studied  with  reference 
to  these  points,  then  the  different  books  are  compared, 
and  lastly  some  of  the  principal  writers  of  the  epigrams. 

Theodore  C.  Burgess,  Ph.D.  1898;  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Greek,  Bradley 
Polytechnic  Institute,  Peoria,  HI. 

Epideictic  Literature.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Studies  in  Classical  Philology,  IV 
(1902),  87-263.  Reprint,  Chicago,  Univer- 
sity Press,  1902.  Doctor's  thesis. 

The  following  are  the  chief  topics :  the  meaning  of  the 
term  "  epideictic,"  especially  in  Isocrates  and  Plato ; 
Isocrates's  conception  of  oratory ;  the  scope  of  this 
branch  of  literature  and  a  brief  sketch  of  its  history ; 
its  rhetorical  treatment,  especially  in  Menander  and 
Dionysius  of  Halicarnassus,  with  the  main  character- 
istics of  each  of  the  separate  forms  of  epideictic  speech. 
There  is  a  separate  chapter  on  the  encomium  of  a  per- 
son, especially  as  illustrated  in  the  /ScuriAiKos  Aoyos; 
special  attention  is  also  given  to  the  yevteKiaiciK,  the 
cTTiTai^iot,  TTopaSofa  iyKiifiia.  The  relation  of  epideictic 
literature  to  poetry,  history,  and  philosophy  is  taken 
up  in  some  detail  in  separate  chapters. 


Department  op  Latin  Language  and  Litebatube 


55 


WiLMER  Cave  Fbanoe,  Ph.D.  1895.  (See 
above.) 

William  Aethub  Heidel,  Ph.D.  1895; 
Professor  of  Latin,  Iowa  College,  Grin- 
nell,  Iowa. 

Pseudo-Platonica.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  79. 
Baltimore,  The  Friedenwald  Co.,  1896. 

A  critical  examinatiou  of  certain  works  attributed  to 
Plato,  including  the  Letters,  Minos,  Hipparchus,  Cli- 
topho,  Anterastae,  Theages,  Alcibiades  I,  and  //.,  and 
Epinomis,  besides  those  acknowledged  to  be  spurious 
even  in  antiquity. 

(See  also  under  Philosophy,  p.  9.) 

Clara  E.  Millerd,  Ph.D.  1902;  Assis- 
tant Professor  of  Greek  Philosophy, 
Iowa  College,  Grinnell,  Iowa. 

Aristotle's  Treatment  of  Pre-Socratic  Philos- 
ophy.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpubhshed. 

A  critical  study  is  made  of  the  information  given  us  by 
Aristotle  concerning  the  early  philosophers  of  Greece, 
with  a  view  to  ascertaining  how  far  his  evidence  is 
trustworthy.  The  two  main  results  of  this  study  are : 
(1)  a  more  detailed  indication  than  has  heretofore  been 
made  of  the  points  wherein  Aristotle  has  perverted 
other  systems  by  attempting  to  co-ordinate  tnem  with 
his  own  philosophy;  and  (2)  a  statement  of  the  posi- 
tive light  which  is  thrown  upon  the  systems  of  the 
early  thinkers  by  the  examination  of  Aristotle's  evi- 
dence. 

George  Norlin,  Ph.D.  1900;  Professor 
of  Greek,  University  of  Colorado. 

Early  Greek  Cosmogonical  Notions.  Doctor's 
thesis.  Unpublished.  A  preliminary  state- 
ment, "  Notes  on  Early  Greek  Cosmogonical 
Speculations,"  University  of  Colorado  Stu- 
dies, I  (1901),  49-58. 

A  treatise  on  the  cosmogonical  notions  of  the  Greeks 
before  the  time  of  Plato.    The  main  part  is  devoted  to 


a  systematic  treatment  of  the  cosmogonical  theories  of 
the  pre-Socratic  philosophers,  preceded,  however,  by 
introductory  chapters  on  the  principal  cosmogonical 
notions  antedating  the  philosophers,  in  which  the 
attempt  is  made  to  establish  a  closer  relationship  than 
is  ordinarily  recognized  between  the  cruder  fancies  of 
the  earlier  cosmogonies  and  the  more  sober  specula- 
tions of  the  first  philosophers. 


William  Bishop  Owen,  Ph.D.  1901.  (See 
above.) 

George  Washington  Paschal,  Ph.D. 
1900 ;  Associate  Professor  of  Greek  and 
Latin,  Wake  Forest  College,  N.  C. 

Quintus  of  Smyrna:  A  Study.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

After  a  discussion  of  the  text  and  bibliography  several 
unsettled  questions  regarding  Quintus  are  treated. 
The  current  views  as  to  his  place  and  personality  ara 
accepted,  but  a  probably  earlier  date  than  usually 
assigned  him  is  claimed  from  considerations  of  cus- 
toms mentioned,  religious  and  moral  ideas,  vocabulary, 
dialect,  metre,  etc.  His  style  is  treated  with  refer- 
ence to  Homer  as  norm ;  vocabulary,  dialect,  syntax, 
phrases,  tags,  and  similes.  An  abstract  of  the  whole 
work  is  given  book  by  book  and  the  frequent  imitation 
of  Homer  pointed  out,  with  the  conclusion  that  Quin- 
tus had  the  Iliad  constantly  in  mind.  Sources  are 
next  treated.  It  is  maintained,  against  Kehmptzow, 
that  Quintus  did  not  rely  on  a  handbook,  but  drew 
directly  from  the  older  poets,  and  had  probably  seen 
the  Cyclic  poets,  whose  order  and  matter  he  usually 
follows.  He  was  an  eclectic  poet  and  drew  from  many 
sources,  even  from  Vergil. 

Carl  William  Seidenadel,  Ph.D.  1897. 
(See  above.) 

Tenny  Frank,  Assistant  in  Latin. 

A  Stichometric  Scholium  to  the  Mfedea  of 
Euripides,  with  Remarks  on  the  Text  of 
Didymus.  The  University  of  Chicago 
Decennial  Ptiblications,  First  Series,  VT, 
61-68. 


XII.    LATIN  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE 


William  Gardner  Hale  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
Latin. 

A  Latin  Grammar  for  Schools  and  Colleges. 
In  collaboration  with  Carl  Darling  Buck. 
12mo,  viii  +  398.  Boston,  Ginn  &  Co.  In 
Press. 


The  Origin  and  Later  History  of  the  Clause  of 
Piurpose  in  Latin,  Greek,  and  Sanskrit. 
Proceedings  of  the  American  Philological 
Association,  XXIII  (1892),  xxvi-xxviii. 

A  correction  of  Delbrttck's  explanation  of  the  presence 
of  iv  or  ice  in  many  clauses  of  purpose  in  Homer ;  fol- 
lowed by  a  discussion  of  the  various  types,  with  the 
conclusion  that  the  oldest  one  in  Latin,  Greek,  and 
Sanskrit  was  the  volitive  subjunctive,  to  which  in 
Greek,  in  relative  clauses  of  purpose,  the  anticipatory 
subjunctive  succeeded,  forming  a  transitional  step 
toward  the  construction  with  the  future  indicativei 
which  ultimately  triumphed. 


56 


Publications 


The  Extended  Deliberative  in  Greek.  Clas- 
sical Review,  VIII  (1894),  27-28. 

Deals  briefly  with  the  subject  elaborated  later  in  "  Ex- 
tended and  Bemote  Deliberatives  in  Greek." 

The  Prospective  Subjunctive  in  Greek  and 
Latin.    Ibid.,  160-169. 

Deals  briefly  with  the  subject  elaborated  later  in  "The 
Anticipatory  Subjunctive  in  Greek  and  Latin." 

"Extended"  and  "Kemote"  Deliberatives  in 
Greek.  Transactions  of  the  American 
Philological  Association,  XXIV  (1893), 
156-205. 

A  discussion  suggested  by  the  varying  treatments  by 
Goodwin,  Monro,  Sidgwick,  Jebb,  Earle,  and  Tarbell, 
of  the  types  illustrated  by  ex*'  o''''  •'"'B  s^^d  ovk  eo-tJ'  ottois 
Ae^ai/oii.  The  Latin  type  of  dependent  clause  illus- 
trated in  sentences  like  nihil  est  cur  gaudeas  and  nihil 
est  quod  gaudeas  is  also  incidentally  treated. 

The  Anticipatory  Subjunctive  in  Greek  and 
Latin:  A  Chapter  of  Comparative  Syntax. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Studies  in  Clas- 
sical Philology,  I  (1895),  1-92.  Issued  as 
preprint  in  1894. 

The  introduction  urges  the  necessity  of  comparative 
study  for  the  investigator  of  the  syntax  of  the  Latin 
verb,  and  points  out  that  Greek,  through  its  use,  or 
non-use,  of  av  or  <ce,  in  addition  to  its  clear  distinction 
of  moods,  affords  greater  help  than  any  other  language 
in  the  study  of  problems  of  the  uses  of  the  Indo-Euro- 
pean verb.  The  body  of  the  paper  then  presents  a  me- 
thodical discussion  or  the  constructions  which  are  to  be 
placed  under  the  head  of  the  anticipatory  subjunctive 
in  Greek,  and  of  the  probable  light  which  they  threw 
upon  Latin  constructions  hitherto  unexplained,  or  not 
explained  satisfactorily. 

Did  Verse-Ictus  Destroy  Word- Accent  in  Latin 
Poetry?  Proceedings  of  the  American 
Philological  Association,  XXVI  (1895), 
xxvi-xxx. 

Presents  the  evidence  for  the  negative  answer. 
Synopsis  of  the  Modal  Uses  ol  the  Finite  Verb 
in  Latin.    8vo,  8.    Chicago,  1895  and  1897. 
Privately  printed. 

The  synopsis  exhibits  the  author's  scheme  for  the 
classification  of  the  uses  of  the  imperative,  indicative, 
and  subjunctive. 

Syllabification  in  Roman  Speech.  Harvard 
Studies  in  Classical  Philology,  VII  (1896), 
249-271. 

An  argument  against  the  traditional  doctrine  of  sylla- 
bification, as  supposed  to  be  taught  by  the  Roman 
grammarians. 

Un  Nuovo  Manoscritto  di  Catullo:  Estratto  dai 
Rendiconti  della  Reale  Accademia  dei  Lin- 
ed, Seduta  del  21  giugnio,  1896. 

Announces  the  discovery  in  the  Vatican  of  a  manuscript 
of  Catullus  (to  be  named  Komanus,  or  R)  of  the  same 
general  age  and  value  as  G  and  O. 


A  New  Manuscript  of  Catullus.  Classical  Re- 
view, X  (1896),  314. 

An  announcement  corresponding  to  the  above,  with 
additional  details. 

A  New  Manuscript  of  Catullus.  Proceedings 
of  the  American  Philological  Association, 
XXVII  (1897),  liii-lv. 

A  fuller  account  of  the  discovery  of  R.  The  readings 
show  G  and  R  to  have  been  copied,  not  from  the  "  lost 
Verona  MS."  itself,  but  from  a  copy  of  it,  doubtless 
made  in  consequence  of  the  request  of  Coluccio  (the 
owner  of  R),  preserved  in  extant  letters.  The  general 
evidence  points  to  the  conclusion  that  the  seventy  or 
more  other  MSS.  now  existing  in  addition  to  O,  G,  and 
R  are  descended  from  R,  with  a  certain  amount  of 
crossing  from  G. 

Notes  on  the  Roman  Pronunciation  of  Latin. 
School  Review,  VI  (1898),  394-411. 

The  paper,  presented  at  the  meeting  of  the  Classical 
Conference  at  Ann  Arbor  in  1898,  discusses  the  quanta- 
tive  pronunciation  of  Latin  in  the  isolated  word,  m  com- 
binations of  words  in  prose,  and  in  verse,  showing  also 
that  slurring  ordinarily  took  place  in  prose  as  in  verse, 
and  that  a  really  correct  prose  pronunciation  will  en- 
able the  student  to  read  the  commoner  forms  of  Latin 
verse  correctly,  without  previous  knowledge  of  their 
metrical  structure. 

The  Codex  Romanus  of  Catullus.  Classical 
Review,  XII  (1898),  447-449. 

A  preliminary  answer  to  Schulze's  article  in  Hermes 
XXXIII,  3,  with  a  brief  criticism  of  his  method  of  deal- 
ing with  the  questions  which  his  examination  of  R 
should  have  raised. 

Der  Codex  Romanus  des  Catullus.  Hermes, 
XXXIV  (1899),  133-144. 

A  fuller  answer  to  Schulze's  article,  with  correction  of 
many  confusions  of  hands  and  errors  of  reading  in  his 
citations  from  R. 

Is  there  Still  a  Latin  Potential?  Transac- 
tions of  the  American  Philological  Asso- 
ciation, XXXI  (1900),  138-162. 

An  examination  of  the  question  raised  by  Elmer's 
hypothesis  that  the  supposed  instances  of  the  potential 
subjunctive  in  Latin  are  to  be  explained  differently. 

The  Genitive  and  Ablative  of  Description. 
Proceedings  of  the  American  Philological 
Association,  XXXI  (1900),  xxxi-xxxiii. 

A  discussion  of  the  current  doctrines,  with  a  sugges- 
tion of  new  explanations. 

Leading  Case-Forces  in  the  Indo-European 
Parent  Speech.  Ibid.,  XXXII  (1901), 
Ixxxviii. 

A  new  hypothesis  with  regard  to  the  original  force  of 
the  accusative,  the  derivation  of  the  remaining  forces 
from  this,  and  the  relations  of  the  dative,  accusative, 
ablative,  instrumental,  and  locative  to  one  another. 

Leading  Mood-Forces  in  the  Indo-European 
Parent  Speech.  Ibid.,  XXXII  (1901),  cxx- 
cxxii. 

The  paper  adds  evidence  for  Delbrflck's  derivation  of 
the  future  force  of  the  subjunctive  from  that  of  will, 
and  proposes  a  new  explanation  of  the  origin  of  the 
remaining  optative  forces  from  that  of  the  true  wish. 


Depabtment  of  Latin  Language  and  Litebatube 


57 


Controlling  Conceptions  in  Syntactical  Study. 
School  Review,  X  (1902),  41&-432. 

a  paper  presented  at  the  spring  meeting  of  the  Michi- 
gan Conference  of  Schoolmasters,  1902,  sketching  the 
way  in  which  certain  of  the  principal  problems  of  case- 
usage  and  mood-usage  should  be  approached,  with 
reference  especially  to  Latin. 

The  Origin  of  Subjunctive  and  Optative  Con- 
ditions in  Greek  and  Latin.  Harvard 
Studies  in  Classical  Philology,  XII  (1901), 
109-123. 

An  examination  of  existing  theories,  with  approval  of 
Brugmann's  theory  of  the  origin  of  the  optative  con- 
struction in  Greek,  and  a  treatment  of  the  behavior  of 
av  and  the  negative,  not  touched  by  him ;  followed  by 
an  explanation  of  the  origin  of  the  subjunctive  con- 
struction in  Greek,  and  of  the  Latin  subjunctive  con- 
struction. 

Comparative  Syntax  and  the  Syntax  of  Indi- 
vidual Languages.  Article  in  The  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  VI. 

The  paper,  which  includes  an  examination  of  Morris's 
attitude  toward  comparative  study  as  shown  in  his 
On  Principles  and  Methods  in  Latin  Syntax,  and  of  the 
schemes  of  Hermann  Lattmann,  Dittmar,  Botthek,  and 
Methner,  insists  upon  the  indispensable  importance  of 
this  study  for  the  student  of  the  syntax  of  any  language, 
and  gives  illustrations  from  the  field  of  Latin  syntax. 
The  writer's  general  scheme  of  classification  of  the 
uses  of  the  Latin  subjunctive,  as  published  in  1894  in  his 
Anticipatory  Subjunctive  in  Greek  and  Latin  (The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Press),  and  reproduced  in  the  Stolz- 
Schmalz  Lateinische  Grammatik  (1900),  is  more  fully 
stated  and  justified,  and  a  nearly  complete  synopsis  of 
the  constructions  of  the  Latin  finite  verb  is  given.  In 
connection  with  this,  the  origins  of  the  following  con- 
structions are  especially  discussed:  the  subjunctive 
clause  of  fear  or  anxiety ;  the  subjunctive  of  actuality 
(fact),  in  consecutive  clauses ;  the  subjunctive  of  obli- 
gation or  propriety;  the  subjunctive  with  dignus  qui, 
etc. ;  the  subjunctive  of  natural  likelihood ;  the  sub- 
junctive of  consent  or  acquiescence ;  the  subjunctive  of 
proviso ;  the  subjunctive  of  the  second  person  singular 
indefinite  in  dependent  clauses ;  the  occasional  use  of 
the  same  in  general  statements  of  fact. 


Fbank  Fbost  Abbott  [1891 — ],  Profes- 
sor of  Latin. 

Selected  Letters  of  Cicero.  12mo,  Ixxvi  +  315. 
Boston,  Ginn  &  Co.,  1897. 

The  book  contains  one  hundred  letters  arranged  in 
chronological  order,  an  introduction,  a  commentary, 
and  a  critical  appendix. 

A  History  and  Description  of  Roman  Political 
Institutions.  12mo,viii  +  4:37.  Boston,  Ginn 
&  Co.,  1901. 

In  the  first  part  of  the  book  the  development  of  the 
Roman  constitution  as  a  unit  is  traced ;  in  the  second 
part  the  several  institutions  are  treated  separately. 

Notes  upon  Latin  Hybrids.  Classical  Review, 
V  (1891),  18. 

A  brief  list  of  Latin  hybrids,  and  a  discussion  of  the 
part  wmch  such  formations  played  in  the  aermo  vulgaris. 


On  the  Etymology  of  Osteria.    Ibid.,  95-96. 

A  proof  of  the  fact  that  osteria  and  allied  words  are  de- 
rived from  hospes,  not  from  hostis. 

Notes  on  Cicero,  Epist.  ad  Fam.  xi,  13.    Ibid.j 

VIII  (1894),  201. 

This  letter  is  made  up  of  fragments  of  two  different 
epistles. 

Valde  in  den  Briefen  an  Cicero.  Archiv  fur 
lateinische  Lexicographie  und  Grammatik, 

IX  (1896),  462-463. 

Praeterpropter  in  Gell.  Noct.  Att.,  xix,  10.  Ibid., 
XII  (1898),  359-360. 

Praeterpropter,  a  vulgar  word  in  the  time  of  Gellius, 
but  used  in  formal  literary  Latin  in  the  early  period, 
illustrates  the  fallacy  of  the  principal  thesis  which 
Sittl  maintains  in  the  Jahresber.  Uber  Vulgar-  u.  Spdt- 
lutein,  1891,  pp.  226-286. 

Some  Notes  on  the  Peregrinatio  of  Sancta 
Silvia.     University  Record,  I  (1896),  135. 

Abstract  of  a  treatment  of  certain  phases  of  the  col- 
loquial element  in  the  Peregrinatio,  particularly  in  the 
use  of  the  verb,  the  pronoun,  and  the  adverb. 

The  Chronology  of  Cicero's  Correspondence 
during  the  Year  59  B.  C.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Philology,  XIX  (1898),  38^-405. 

An  attempt  to  fix  the  dates  of  the  letters  and  of  the 
principal  events  of  the  year  59  B.  C,  and  to  traca 
Cicero"'s  movements  during  the  same  period. 

Roman  Indifiference  to  Provincial  Affairs. 
Classical  Review,  XIV  (1900),  355-356. 

An  examination  of  the  references  to  Caesar's  Gallic 
campaigns  in  the  contemporary  correspondence  of 
Cicero. 

The  Use  of  Repetition  in  Latin  to  Secure  Em- 
phasis, Intensity  and  Distinctness  of  Im- 
pression. The  University  of  Chicago 
Studies  in  Classical  Philology,  III  (1900), 
67-87. 

The  various  forms  of  repetition  are  classified,  and  the 
fact  is  established  that  their  origin  is  to  be  sought  in 
the  speech  of  everyday  life. 

The  Toledo  Manuscript  of  the  Germania  of 
Tacitus.  Article  in  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
VI. 

Contains  a  collation  of  this  manuscript  made  by  the 
writer  in  the  spring  of  1902,  and  a  discussion  of  its  rela- 
tion to  the  other  manuscripts  of  the  Germania.  An 
attempt  is  also  made  to  trace  the  history  of  the  Toledo 
manuscript  of  the  Agricola,  which  is  contained  in  the 
same  codex, 

Revieivs  of 

Montague,  Selected  Letters  of  Cicero.  Clas- 
sical Review,  V  (1891),  266. 

Ashmore,  Adelphoe  of  Terence.  Ibid.,  VIII 
(1894),  61-62. 

Moore-Fiske,  Local  Cults  in  Britain  and  Spain. 
Ibid.,  XV  (1901),  92-93. 


58 


Publications 


Lindsay,  The  Saturnian  Metre.  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XVII  (1896),  94-97. 

Merrill,  Fragments  of  Koman  Satire.  Clas- 
sical Review,  XIII  (1899),  178-9. 

Bucheler,  Carmina  Epigraphica.  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XIX  (1898),  86-90. 

Wiinsch,  Sethianische  Verfluchungstafeln. 
American  Journal  of  Theology,  III  (1899), 
760. 

Thielmann,  Bericht  uber  das  gesammelte 
handschriftliche  Material  zu  einer  kritischen 
Ausgabe  der  lateinischen  Uebersetzungen 
Biblischer  Biicher  des  Alten  Testaments. 
Ibid.,  V  (1901),  132. 

Kennedy,  Old  Latin  Versions  of  the  Bible. 
Ibid.,  V  (1901),  296-297. 

George  Lincoln  Hendrickson  [1897 — ], 
Professor  of  Latin. 

Are  the  Letters  of  Horace  Satires?  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XVIII  (1897),  313- 
324. 

An  interpretation  of  the  ancient  evidence  concerning 
the  literary  genus  of  the  Letters  of  Horace,  with  the  addi- 
tion of  some  new  material.  The  conclusion  reached  is, 
that  the  letters  were  regarded  in  antiquity,  and  prob- 
ably by  Horace  himself,  as  representatives  of  the  liter- 
ary type  satura.  The  Satires  of  Horace,  therefore, 
consist  of  the  two  books  of  Sermones  and  the  two  books 
of  Epistolae. 

A  Pre-Varronian  Chapter  of  Koman  Literary 
History.    Ibid.,  XIX  (1898),  285-311. 

Evidence  is  adduced  to  show  that  the  account  of  a 
native  Roman  comedy,  which  is  given  by  Livy,  VII,  2, 
and  by  Horace,  Epp.,  II,  1, 145  ff.,  is  of  pre-Varronian 
origin,  and  is  probably  to  be  attributed  to  Accius.  The 
errors  of  Accius's  description  were  corrected  by  Varro, 
and  in  consequence  no  evidence  for  this  early  drama  is 
found  in  writers  subsequent  to  those  named. 

On  Khythmic  Accent  in  Ancient  Verse.  Ibid., 
XX  (1899),  198-210. 

A  criticism  of  an  article  by  Professor  C.  E.  Bennett 
entitled  "  What  was  Ictus  in  Latin  Prosody?  "  {A.  J. 
P.,  Vol.  XIX,  361  f .) 

Comment  on  Professor  Bennett's  Reply.  Ibid., 
(1899),  429-434. 

A  rejoinder  to  Professor  Bennett's  article,  "  Rhythmic 
Accent  in  Ancient  Verse :  A  Reply."  {Ibid.,  XX,  412 f.) 

Horace,  Sermones  I,  4:  A  Protest  and  a  Pro- 
gramme.   Ibid.,  XXI  (1900),  121-142. 

The  poem  is  shown  to  contain  a  criticism  of  the  literary 
theory  of  satire  current  in  Horace's  time ;  it  presents 
Horace's  protest  against  that  conception  and  suggests 
in  briefest  outline  his  own  ideals  and  aims  in  satirical 
composition. 


Horace  and  Lucilius:  An  Interpretation  of 
Horace,  Sermones  I,  10.  Studies  in  Honor 
of  B.  L.  Gildersleeve,  1901,  151-168. 

A  continuation  of  the  preceding  argument,  in  which 
the  effort  is  made  to  correct  the  prevailing  conception 
of  Horace's  attitude  toward  his  predecessor  in  satire. 

Cicero's  Judgment  of  Lucretius.  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XXII  (1901),  438  f . 

An  explanation  of  ad  Quint,  frat.,  II,  9,  3. 

The  Proconsulate  of  Julius  Agricola  in  Rela- 
tion to  History  and  to  Encomium.  The 
University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, VI,  27-59. 

The  purpose  of  the  paper  is  to  illustrate  in  detail  and 
to  characterize  the  difference  in  literary  treatment 
between  biography  and  history.  With  this  end  in  view 
the  Agricola  of  Tacitus  is  examined  and  compared 
with  portions  of  the  historical  writings  of  the  same 
author. 

The  Commentariolum  Petitionis  attributed  to 
Quintus  Cicero:  Authenticity,  Literary 
Form,  Style,  Text.    Ibid.,  69-93. 

The  writer  endeavors  to  show  that  the  Commentario- 
lum, attributed  to  Quintus  Cicero,  is  in  fact  a  suasoria 
of  some  rhetorical  student  of  uncertain  date.  The  in- 
vestigation falls  into  these  divsions:  (1)  authenticity; 
(2)  literary  form ;  (3)  style ;  (4)  text. 

The  Literary  Form  of  Horace,  Sermones  I,  6 
(Ad  Maecenatem  de  vita  sua).  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XXIII  (1902),  388-399. 

Attention  is  called  to  the  fact  that  this  autobiographi- 
cal composition  conforms  to  the  ancient  theory  and 
practice  of  encomiastic  writing  in  selection  of  matter, 
m  general  treatment,  and  in  stylistic  form. 

Reviews  of 

Heinze,    Lucretius.     American    Journal   of 

Philology,  XVIII  (1897),  481  f. 
Moore,  Firmicus  Maternus.    Ibid.,  XIX  (1898), 

97  f. 
Norden,  Antike  Kunstprosa.    Ibid.,  XX  (1899), 

78  f. 
John,  Dialogus  of  Tacitus.    Ibid.,  XX  (1900), 

439  f. 


Gordon  Jennings  Laing  [1899 — ],  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Latin. 

Notes  on  the  Latin  Verbs  of  Rating.  Studies 
in  Honor  of  Basil  L.  Gildersleeve,  1902, 
131-136. 

The  Worship  of  the  Lares.  Article  in  The 
University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, First  Series,  VI. 

A  brief  historical  treatment  of  the  development  of  the 
cult  of  the  Lares,  and  a  discussion  as  to  its  origin. 


Department  op  Latin  Language  and  Liteeatubb 


69 


Edwabd  a.  Bechtel  [1898 — ],  Instruc- 
tor in  Latin. 

Sanctae  Silviae  Peregrinatio:  The  Text  and  a 
Study  of  the  Latinity.  Doctor's  thesis.  The 
University  of  Chicago  Studies  in  Classical 
Philology,  IV  (1902),  1-160. 

The  text  is  based  upon  a  collation  of  the  manuscript  of 
the  Peregrinatio  by  Mr.  O.  F.  Washburn,  and  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  critical  apparatus,  containing  also  the 
variant  readings  of  previous  editions.  The  study  of 
the  Latinity  is  made  as  a  contribution  to  the  history  of 
the  development  of  colloquial  Latin,  and  gives  a  com- 
parison with  similar  usages  in  earlier  popular  Latin, 
and  also  with  the  Vulgate  and  patristic  writers. 

Tenny  Frank  [1901 — ],  Assistant  in 
Latin.      (See  under  Greek,  p.  55.) 


John  Dorset  Wolcott  [1900 — ],  Assist- 
ant in  the  Classical  Libraries. 

Early  Parallelisms  in  Koman  Historiography. 
American  Journal  of  Philology,  XXIII 
(1902),  3ia-316. 

Clifford  H.  Moore  [1894-98],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Latin ;  Assistant  Professor 
of  Latin,  Harvard  University. 

Julius  Firmiciis  Maternus,  der  Heide  und  der 
Christ.  Miinich  doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  54. 
Munich,  1897. 

The  identity  of  the  author  of  the  Maiheseos  libri  octo 
with  the  writer  of  the  Christian  tract  de  errore  profa- 
narum  religionum  is  established. 

Die  medizinischen  Rezepte  in  den  Miscellanea 
Tironiana.  Archiv  filr  lateinische  Lexiko- 
graphie  und  Grammatik,  X  (1898),  253- 
272. 

A  study  of  their  sources  and  latinity. 

Dediticius,  dediticiorum  numero,daticius.  Ibid., 
XI,  1  (1898),  81-85. 

A  lexicographical  study. 

Note  on  the  Canonicity  of  the  Apocalypse  of 
John.  American  Journal  of  Theology,  II 
(1898),  638-640. 

Calls  attention  to  a  passage  in  St.  Jerome's  homilies, 
Anecdota  Maredsolana,  Vol.  Ill,  Part  2,  p.  5. 


Arthur  Tappan  Walker  [1894-97],  As- 
sociate in  Latin;  Professor  of  Latin, 
University  of  Kansas. 

The  Sequence  of  Tenses  in  Latin:  A  Study 
based  on  Caesar's  Gallic  War.  Doctor's 
thesis.  8vo,  ix  +  52.  Lawrence,  Kansas, 
1899. 

An  attempt  to  test  Professor  Halo's  '•Sequence  of 
Tenses,"  American  Journal  of  Philology,  VII,  4;  VIII, 
1;  IX,  2.  An  examination  of  all  dependent  indicatives 
and  subjunctives  in  the  Gallic  War  proves  that  tense 
meaning  is  equally  definite  in  both  modes ;  that  a  large 
proxMjrtion  of  indicatives  follows  the  rule  of  sequence, 
and  that,  in  Csesar  at  least,  there  is  no  flattening  out 
by  sequence  of  the  distinctions  between  the  subjunc- 
tive tenses.  But  it  is  held  that  the  reasons  assigned 
by  Professor  Hale  for  the  numerical  preponderance  of 
indicative  exceptions  do  not  account  for  all  facts ;  that 
an  idiomatic  sequence  existed,  felt  only  for  the  sub- 
junctive; and  that,  in  consequence,  when  an  exception 
m  seouence  was  needed,  there  was  a  tendency  so  to 
cast  tne  sentence  that  an  indicative  clause  might  be 
used  instead  of  a  subjunctive. 


WiLLARD  KiMBALL  ClEMENT  [1899-1901  ] , 

Reader  in  Latin. 

Glossary  in  the  second  edition  of  Select  Medi- 
aeval Documents,  by  Shailer  Mathews. 
Silver,  Burdett  &  Co.,  1900. 

Prohibitives  in  Silver  Latin.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Philology,  XXI  (1900),  154-169. 

Elmer's  Treatment  of  the  Prohibitive:  A  Re- 
joinder.   Ibid.,  XXII  (1901),  87-96. 

Notes  on  the  Latin  Prohibitive.  Classical 
Review,  XIV  (1900),  55. 

Two  Notes  on  the  Latin  Subjunctive.  Ibid.^ 
XVI  (1900),  222. 

Prohibitives  in  Terence.  Ibid.,  XV  (1901),  157- 
159. 


Edward  A.  Bechtel,  Ph.D.  1900.     (See 
above.) 

T.  Louis  Comparette,  Ph.D.  1901. 

The  .Popular   Hexameter.      Doctor's    thesis. 
Unpublished. 

A  study  of  the  hexameters  found  in  the  inscriptions  and 
in  Commodian,  for  the  purpose  of  determining  the  char- 
acteristics of  popular  verse  as  distinguished  from  the 
finished  hexameters  of  professional  poets.  So  far  as 
possible,  the  study  is  historical,  both  of  the  poets  and 
of  the  less  formal  verses  of  the  inscriptions  and  of  Com- 
modian. The  caesura,  the  foot,  the  syllable,  synizesis, 
hiatus,  and  ornamentation,  including  alliteration  and 
homcBoteleuta,  are  the  headings  under  which  the  verso 
is  treated.  Special  attention  is  given  to  those  features 
in  which  the  popular  verse  shows  marked  tendencies, 
as  quantity  of  syllables,  hiatus,  and  ornamentation. 


60 


Publications 


Fred  B.  K.  Hellems,  Ph.D.  1898 ;  Pro- 
fessor of  Latin,  University  of  Colorado. 

The  Pupus  Torquatianus  Inscription.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Archaeology,  Second  Series, 
III  (1899),  202-211. 

Palseographical  notes  on  the  inscription.  The  epitaph 
is  the  work  of  an  untrained  hand,  and  offers  an  excel- 
lent example  of  scriptura  vulgaris.  The  inscription 
may  probably  be  dated  about  the  middle  of  the  second 
century  after  Christ. 

Lex  de  Imperio  Vespasiani:  A  Consideration 
of  Some  of  the  Constitutional  Aspects  of  the 
Principate  at  Rome.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo, 
25.  Dissertationes  Americanae,  Classical 
Philology,  I,  No.  1,  1902.  Chicago,  Scott, 
Foresman  &  Co.  A  preliminary  statement, 
under  the  title  Lex  de  Imperio  Vespasiani, 
Journal  of  Philology,  XXVIII  (1902),  122- 
130. 

A  discussion  of  the  various  prerogatives  conferred  by 
the  Lex.  The  conclusion  is  reached  that  the  whole  in- 
scription records  the  giving  to  the  emperor  of  a  general 
power,  which  by  the  time  of  Tacitus  might  be  loosely 
spoken  of  as  the  imperium,  and  that  the  framers  of  the 
Lex  conceived  of  it  as  first  conferring  the  imperium 
proconsulare  and  the  tribunicia  potestas,  then  generally 
defining  them,  and  finally  adding  special  provisions. 
The  Lex  was  officially  published  early  in  January  of 
the  year  70. 


John  Jacob  Sohlioher,  Ph.D.  1900;  Pro- 
fessor of  Latin,  State  Normal  School, 
Terra  Haute,  Ind. 

The  Origin  of  Rhythmical  Verse  in  Late  Latin. 
Doctor's  thesis.    8vo,  91.    Chicago,  1900. 

After  an  examination  of  existing  theories,  which  are 
found  to  be  based  on  incomplete  evidence,  a  somewhat 
extended  investigation  is  made  of  the  metrical  char- 
acteristics of  the  popular  songs,  inscriptions,  Commo- 
dian,  and  the  Christian  hymns,  it  is  found  that  certain 
syllables  of  the  word  were  less  stable  in  quantity  than 
others,  and  that,  in  the  effort  which  was  made  to  pre- 
serve the  quantitative  principle,  these  unstable  syl- 
lables came  to  stand  in  those  places  in  the  verse  where 
a  distinction  of  quantity  was  not  required.  This  trans- 
formation naturally  took  place  most  extensively  in 
iambic  and  trochaic  verse,  where  each  dipody  has  a 
place  of  the  kind  just  mentioned.  As  a  result,  iambic 
and  trochaic  verse  became  "accentual"  before  they 
had  ceased  to  be  quantitative.  The  peculiar  form  of 
verse  which  was  tnus  produced  remained,  however, 
after  the  distinctions  of  quantity  were  lost.  The  influ- 
ence of  the  word-accent  upon  the  change  is  found  to 
have  been  but  slight.  In  an  appendix  a  development 
from  quantitative  to  accentual  form,  parallel  to  that 
of  verse,  is  traced  in  the  rhetorical  ciattswto  of  prose. 


Frederick  William  Shipley,  Ph.D.  1901 ; 
Professor  of  Latin,  Washington  Uni- 
versity. 

A  Palseographical  Study  of  an  Unused  Manu- 
script of  Livy,  Codex  Reginensis  762.  Ameri- 


can Journal  of  Archaeology,  VII  (1903), 
Nos.  1  ff.  Doctor's  thesis. 

By  means  of  a  comparison  of  the  readings  of  the  Regi- 
nensis, a  copy  made  in  the  ninth  century,  with  those  of 
the  Puteanus,  a  manuscript  of  the  fifth  century,  the 
original  of  Reginensis,  it  is  the  author's  aim  to  illus- 
trate the  nature  of  the  corruptions  which  crept  into 
the  classical  texts  in  the  ninth  century  in  the  process  of 
making  minuscule  copies  of  uncial  manuscripts  of  the 
fourth  and  fifth  centuries.  In  the  past,  such  compari- 
sons have  been  mainly  between  what  we  find  in  actual 
manscripts  and  what  we  suppose  our  authors  to  have 
written,  and  they  have  accordingly  lacked  the  element 
of  certainty. 


Thomas  Kay  Sidey,  Ph.D.  1900;  Pro- 
fessor of  Latin,  Central  Normal  College, 
Danville,  Ind. 

Contributions  to  the  History  of  the  Latin  Par- 
ticiple, with  particular  reference  to  its  use 
in  Plautus,  Petronius,  and  Apuleius.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpublished. 

a  study  of  the  development  of  the  use  of  the  participle 
in  colloquial  Latin,  Plautus,  Petronius,  and  Apuleius 
being  chosen  as  affording  three  widely  removed  stages. 
Tammolin's  work  on  the  Participle  in  Plautus  and 
Terence  is  used  as  a  basis  for  classification  and  com- 
parison. Considerable  dififerences  in  many  uses  are 
found  in  the  three  authors,  the  most  marked  being  the 
much  freer  employment  of  the  participle  in  the  later 
authors  as  a  substitute  for  the  clauses  or  phrases  of  the 
earlier  periods.  The  general  conclusion  is  drawn  that 
the  participle  is  one  of  the  greatest  factors  in  the  de- 
velopment of  the  languge  into  a  highly  artificial  and 
rhetorical  speech. 


George  Crawford  Swearingen,  Ph.D. 
1902;  Professor  of  Latin  and  Greek, 
Millsaps  College,  Jackson,  Miss. 

A  Reclassification  of  the  Manuscripts  of 
Horace.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  threefold  classification  of  KeUer  and  Holder  is 
criticised  and  found  unscientific  in  method,  defective 
in  operation,  and  misleading  in  results.  A  reclassifica- 
tion is  then  proposed,  the  results  of  which  may  be 
briefly  stated  as  follows :  (1)  an  X-class,  made  up  mainly 
of  Keller's  class  II;  (2)  a  Y-class,  consisting  of  all  other 
manuscripts. 

William  Frank  Tibbetts,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Teacher  of  Latin,  Erasmus  Hall  High 
School,  Brooklyn,  N.  Y. 

The  Indicative  Indirect  Question  in  Latin. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

After  a  statement  of  Becker's  theory  and  of  the  views 
of  leading  grammarians,  writers  of  syntactical  pa- 
pers, and  editors  of  classical  authors,  the  various  ex- 
planations of  this  construction  are  considered.  The 
view  maintained  in  this  paper,  in  connection  with  Pro- 
fessor Hale's  (unnublished)  theory  of  the  origin  of  the 
subjunctive  or  indirect  discourse,  is  (1)  that  examples 
of  a  true  indicative  question  actually  are  found  in 
Latin,  in  various  periods,  and  that  Becker's  attempt  to 


Department  of  Romance  Languages  and  Litebatubes 


61 


account  for  them  on  other  grounds  is  unsuccessful ;  and 
(2)  that  such  survivals  of  what  must  have  been  the 
original  form  of  the  indirect  question  of  fact  are  in 
themselves  perfectly  natural  and  to  be  expected. 

Esther  Boise  Van  Deman,  Ph.D.  1898; 
Mount  Holyoke  College. 

Vesta  Populi  Romani  Quiritium  and  the  Vestal 
Virgins.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished, 

The  development  of  the  conception  of  Vesta  privata 
among  the  Hindus,  Greeks,  and  Romans;  the  rise  of  the 


cult  of  Vesta  publica  among  the  Latins ;  the  relation 
of  the  state  cmt  to  that  of  the  household,  its  early  cen- 
ters at  Lavinium,  Alba  Longa,  and  Tibur^  its  founda- 
tion at  Rome ;  the  order  of  the  Vestal  Virgins,  rise  and 
organization,  place  in  the  religious  system,  relation  to 
the  state,  the  honors  and  i>unishment  of  the  members 
of  the  priesthood,  and  its  history.  The  architecture  of 
the  Temple  and  of  the  Atrium  of  Vesta  is  discussed  in 
the  closing  chapters. 


Abthur  Tappan   Walker,  Ph.D.  1896. 
(See  above.) 


XIII.    ROMANCE  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES 


Karl  Pietsch  [1896 — ],  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Romance  Philology. 

Preliminary  Notes  on  Two  Old  Spanish  Ver- 
sions of  the  Disticha  Catonis.  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  VII,  1902. 

A  discussion  of  the  popularity  of  the  Disticha  in  Spain 
as  evidenced  by  the  number  of  Latin  manuscripts  and 
early  Latin  prints,  by  allusions  in  old  Spanish  litera- 
ture, and  by  early  translations  into  Spanish.  Two  of  the 
translations  are  studied  in  detail,  and  liberal  extracts 
are  presented. 

T.  Atkinson  Jenkins  [1901 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  French  Philology. 

Alphonse  Daudet:  Selected  Stories.  Edited, 
with  introduction,  notes,  and  vocabulary. 
16mo,  185.  New  York,  American  Book  Co., 
1901. 

The  Espurgatoire  Saint  Patriz  of  Marie  de 
France.  With  a  text  of  the  Latin  original. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  VII,  1902. 

The  Latin  text  of  the  Tractatus  de  Purgatorio  Sancti 
Patricii  contained  in  the  Harleian  manuscript  3846  is 
printed  for  the  first  time,  accompanied  in  parallel  col- 
umns by  the  old  French  metrical  translation  of  Marie 
de  France,  made  at  the  end  of  the  twelfth  century.  The 
precise  version  used  by  Marie  de  France  has  not  been 
found.  The  Harleian  manuscript  represents  this  ver- 
sion more  completely  and  accurately  than  any  manu- 
script yet  made  accessible.  The  French  text  has  been 
improved  materially  by  the  comparison  made  with  the 
Latin  original.  The  text  of  the  Tractatus  from  another 
British  Museum  manuscript  (Royal  13  B  viii)  is  printed 
in  full  as  an  appendix. 

Review  of 

E.  C.  Armstrong,  Le  chevalier  h  l'6p6e.  Mod- 
ern Language  Notes,  XVII  (1902),  52-53. 


George  C.  Howland  [1892 — ],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Italian  Philology. 

Zaragusta,  de  Miguel  Ramos  Carri6n  y  Vital 
Aza.  Edition,  with  notes  and  vocabulary. 
12mo,  118.  Boston,  Silver,  Burdett  &  Co., 
1901. 

Theodore  Lee  Neff  [1896 — ],  Instructor 
in  French.     Ph.D.  1896. 

La  Satire  des  femmes  dans  la  po6sie  lyrique 
frangaise  au  Moyen  Age.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Svo,  x  +  llS.    Paris,  1900. 

The  term  Po6sie  lyrique  is  used  as  including  all  short 
satirical  poems.  The  testimony  of  these  compositions 
must  be  taken  with  great  reserve.  They  attribute  to 
women  all  possible  crimes  and  weaknesses,  but  the 
satire  groups  itself  conveniently  under  four  heads: 
marital  disobedience,  covetousness,  deceit,  impurity. 
In  spirit  it  ranges  from  playful  to  vindictive.  The 
writers  are  mostly  prejudiced  against  women,  looking 
for  vices,  not  virtues.  Tabulated  statement  of  passages. 

Elizabeth  Wallace  [1897 — ], Instructor 
in  French  Literature. 

La  Perfecta  Casada,  por  el  Maestro  F.  Luys 
de  Leon.  Texto  del  Siglo  XVI.  Reimpre- 
8i6n  de  la  tercera  edici6n,  con  variantes  de 
la  primera,  y  un  pr6logo.  Svo,  xxvii  + 119. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications,  Second  Series,  VI. 


H.  Parker  Williamson  [1900 — ],  Asso- 
ciate in  French. 

Easy  French  Stories,  with  introduction  and 
notes.  WithB.  Papot.  16mo,  196.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1901. 


62 


Publications 


Colomba,  by  M6rim6e.  Edition,  with  intro- 
duction, notes,  and  vocabulary.  12mo,  199. 
New  York,  American  Book  Co.,  1902. 

Lisi  CiPEiANi  [1901 — ].  Associate  in 
French.     Ph.D.  1898. 

Studies  on  the  Chanson  de  Geste:  "Guy  de 
Bourgogne."  Doctor's  thesis.   Unpublished. 

Eugene  Bergeeon  [1892-96],  Assistant 
Professor  of  French. 

Balzac,  Eugenie  Grandet.  With  introduction 
and  notes.  IGmo,  xx  +  280.  Holt  &  Co.,  1896. 

*Ren]&  de  Poyen  Bellisle  [1894-1900], 
Instructor  in  Romance  Languages  and 
Literatures.     Ph.D.  1894. 

Les  sons  et  les  formes  du  Creole  dans  les  An- 
tilles. Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  63.  Baltimore, 
John  Murphy,  1894. 

The  Laws  of  Hiatus  i  in  Gallic  Popular  Latin. 
8vo,  12.    1896.    Printed  privately. 

Totus  in  Old  French  and  Provencal .  American 
Journal  of  Philology,  XVI  (1895),  66-70. 

Boue,  barboter,  barbouiller.  Ibid.,  XVII 
(1896),  88-89. 

Kreolische  Sprache.  Jahresbericht  ilber  die 
Fortschritte  der  romanischen  Philologie, 
II  (1896-97),  254-259. 

La  litt^rature  cr6ole.  Ibid.,  IV  (1898-1900), 
2,  376-381. 

Isabelle  Bronk  [1900-1901],  Assistant 
in  Romance  Languages  and  Literatures ; 


Professor  of  French,  Swarthmore  Col- 
lege.    Ph.D.  1900. 

Antoine  Fureti^re:  A  Study  of  his  Life  and 
Works.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

(1)  Furetifere  embodies  diverse  literary  tendencies  of 
his  time.  His  biography  is  instructive.  Studies  of  the 
minor  works,  viz.,  the  travesty  of  ^neid,  IV;  poems: 
Nouvelle  alligorique;  Voyage  de  Mercure:  metrical 
translation  of  gospel  parables.  Detailed  study  of  the 
Roman  bourgeois.  (2)  Furetifere's  Dictionnaire  univer- 
sel:  account  of  the  quarrel  with  the  Academy,  based 
upon  a  re-examination  of  the  Factums. 

Frederick  Ernest  Beckmann,  Ph.D. 
1900;  Instructor  in  Spanish  and  French, 
University  of  Minnesota. 

Spanish  Influences  in  Eichendorff.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

(1)  Influences  which  attracted  Eichendorff  toward  the 
Spaniards.  (2)  Criticism  of  Spanish  life  and  literature 
in  EichendorfiE's  writings.  (3)  Eichendorff  as  transla- 
tor of  (a)  Spanish  ballads,  (6)  El  Conde  Lucanor,  by 
Don  Juan  Manuel.  The  translations  are  compared 
with  the  originals  and  an  appreciation  is  afforded  of 
the  degree  of  success  attained  by  the  translator. 


A.  B^ziAT  DE  BoRDES,  Ph.D.  1899;  In- 
structor in  French,  University  of  Mich- 
igan. 

Le  dialecte  de  Balansun,  Basses  Pyr6n6es.  I, 
Phon^tique.   Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

Classification  of  the  66arnais  dialects,  with  compara- 
tive table  of  B6arnais  and  French  sounds ;  description 
of  historical  sources.  _  The  vowels  and  consonants  are 
•  then  treated  in  detail.  Appendices  present  (o)  texts 
in  phonetic  transcription,  which  have  been  gathered 
from  the  lips  of  the  older  inhabitants ;  (6)  parts  of  the 
Chanson  de  Roland  translated  into  the  Balansun  dia- 
lect by  Palay,  the  B6arnais  poet. 

Wilson  D.  Crabb,  Ph.D.  1897. 

Culture  History  in  the  Chanson  de  Geste: 
"Aymeri  de  Narbonne."  Doctor's  thesis. 
8vo,  122.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1898. 

On  the  basis  of  the  Demaison  edition,  the  poem  is 
studied  as  revealing  interesting  features  of  mediaeval 
French  society.  Analysis,  bibliography,  and  geography. 


XIV.    THE  GERMANIC  LANGUAGES  AND  LITERATURES 


Starr  Willard  Cutting  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor of  German  Literature. 

Lessing's  Minna  von  Barnhelm,  edited  with 
introduction  and  notes.  8vo,  liii  +  224:. 
New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1899. 

The  chief  feature  of  the  introduction  is  a  study  of  Les- 
sing's dramatic  theory  as  shown  in  his  critical  writings. 


Note  to  Goethe's  Faust,  11.  712-719.    Modern 
Language  Notes,  IX  (1894),  98-99. 

The  purpose  of  this  note  is  to  ur^ e  the  omission  of  the 
erroneous  comma  after  und  in  line  719  (lar^e  Weimar 
ed.  XIV,  p.  40) :  "  Und,  war'  es  mit  Gefahr,  ins  Nichts 
dahin  zu  fliessen,"  in  order  to  express  the  intention  of 
the  poet.  The  punctuation  objected  to  by  the  author 
leaves  the  infinitive  fliessen  co-ordinate  with  beweisen, 
beben,  hinstreben,  and  entschliessen,  and  dependent  upon 


Department  op  Germanic  Languages  and  Literatures 


63 


the  expression  Hier  ist  es  Zeit,  a  syntactical  construc- 
tion that  stultifies  the  pioet.  The  omission  of  the  com- 
ma restores  the  dependence  of  the  infinitive  fliessen 
upon  the  concessive  clause  Und  wCtr'  es  mit  Oefahr, 

Der  Konjunktiv  bei  Hartmann  von  Aue.  8vo, 
1-53  +  25  statistical  tables.  The  University 
of  Chicago  Germanic  Studies,  I,  1894. 

This  investigation  aims  to  give  a  complete  exhibit  of 
the  actual  subjunctive  usage  of  Hartmann  von  Aue,  as 
shown  in  all  the  works  now  ascribed  to  him.  A  greater 
refinement  in  the  use  of  this  mood  is  found  in  Hart- 
mann von  der  "Aue  than  in  Wolfram  von  Eschenbach. 
The  earlier  concessive  subjunctive  is  frequently  repre- 
sented in  Hartmann  by  the  indicative  with  particles, 
whose  long  association  with  the  concessive  subjunctive 
seems  to  have  lent  them  a  concessive  force,  which  they 
in  turn  had  imparted  to  the  indicative.  The  conces- 
sive conjunctions  dock  and  so  occur  in  Hartmann  so 
rarely  as  to  render  probable  the  view  that  they  were 
already  obsolescent. 

Faust's  First  Monologue  and  the  Earth  Spirit 
Scene  in  the  Light  of  Recent  Criticism. 
Modern  Language  Notes,  X  (1895),  464r475. 

a  re-examination  and  rejection  of  Scherer's  views 
(Ooethe-Jahrbuch,  VI,  2.31  sq.)  concerning  alleged  inter- 
ruptions, omissions,  and  ill-concealed  changes  of  plan 
on  the  part  of  the  poet.  The  author  presents  his  argu- 
ment in  connection  with  a  critical  estimate  of  J.  Col- 
lin's UntersuchuriQen  Uber  'Joethe's  Faust  in  seiner 
dltesten  Gestalt,  I,  Der  erste  Monolog  und  die  Erdgeist- 
szene.    Oiessen,  1892. 

Note  to  Schiller's  Wallenstein's  Lager,  1.  1096. 
Ibid.,  XII  (1897),  341-343. 

a  suggested  interpretation  of  the  line  in  qaestion  "Seine 
Ruhe  lasst  er  an  keinem  Ort,"  referring  seine,  not  to 
the  trooper,  but  to  Ort. 

Wallenstein's    Lager,    1.    1096.     Ibid.,    XIII 

(1898),  188-189. 

An  extension  of  the  argument  of  the  preceding  article. 

Concerning  the  Modem  German  Relatives, 
Das  and  Was,  in  Clauses  Dependent  upon 
Substantivized  Adjectives.  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  VII,  111-131. 

This  article  presents  an  examination  of  the  distribu- 
tion and  function  of  das  (loelches)  and  was  in  the  mod- 
ern German  relative  after  substantivized  adjective 
antecedents,  undertaken  in  the  light  of  numerous  ex- 
amples selected  from  the  writings  of  Hauptmann, 
Heyse,  Keller,  Meyer,  Nietzschoj  Raabe,  Schopenhauer, 
Spielhagen,  Sudermann,  and  Wildenbrach. 

Reviews  of 

Milchsack,  Historia  D.  Johannis  Fausti  des 
2^uberers  nach  der  Wolfenbiitteler  Hand- 
schrift.  Modern  Language  Notes,  XIII 
(1898),  109-128. 

The  review  aims  to  show  the  general  strength  and 
specific  weakness  of  the  author's  arguments  for  the 
scissors-and-paste-pot  origin  of  the  earliest  Faust-book 
and  for  the  dearth  of  genuine  Faustgeschichten  prior 
to  the  appearance  of  the  chap-book.  The  reviewer  also 
presents  arguments,  based  chiefly  upon  the  Vorrede, 
for  the  earlier  origin  of  the  Wolfenbttttel  MS.  as  com- 
pared with  that  of  the  Spiess  chap-book. 


Calvin  Thomas,  Goethe's  Faust,  Vol.  II.  Jour- 
nal of  Germanic  Philology,  II  (1898),  106- 
118. 

An  exposition  of  the  editor's  work  as  a  whole  with 
numerous  strictures  upon  his  interpretation  of  indi- 
vidual passages. 

Camillo  von  Klenze  [1893 — ],  Associ- 
ate Professor  of  German  Literature. 

Deutsche  Gedichte.  8vo,  xiii  +  331.  New 
York,  Holt  &  Co.,  1895. 

A  collection  of  German  lyrics,  giving  a  survey  of  the 
evolution  of  German  lyrical  poetry  from  Ganther  to 
Geibel. 

Emilia  Galotti,  II,  6.  Modem  Language 
Notes,  IX  (1894),  427^31. 

An  attempt  at  explaining  some  apparent  inconsisten- 
cies in  EmUia's  character  as  a  result  of  certain  dra- 
matic principles  taught  by  Lessing  in  the  Dramaturgie. 

Literature  on  the  Nature-Sense.  Journal  of 
Germanic  Philology,  II  (1898),  239-265. 

A  bibliography  of  articles  on  the  treatment  of  land- 
scape in  literature  and  art  not  mentioned  in  two  bibli- 
ographies published  by  Alfred  Biese. 

The  Treatment  of  Nature  in  the  Works  of 
Nikolaus  Lenau:  An  Essay  in  Interpreta- 
tion. The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  First  Series,  VII,  27-109. 

A  detailed  study  of  the  part  which  landscape  plays  in 
the  letters,  diaries,  and  the  poetical  works  of  the  Aus- 
trian poet,  Lenau.  Comparison  with  contemporary 
poets  like  Byron,  Shelley,  Lamartine,  Hugo,  Tieck, 
Novalis,  Heine,  and  others,  proves  him  on  the  whole 
the  most  significant  exponent  of  the  "  romantic  "  atti- 
tude toward  nature. 

Reviews  of 

Kelle,  Geschichte  der  deutschen  Litteratur. 
Modern  Language  Notes,  VIII  (1893),  406- 
408. 

Koch,  Geschichte  der  deutschen   Litteratur. 

Ibid.,  IX  (1894),  246-248. 
Bolte-Schmidt,  R.  Kohler,  AufsStze  uber  MSr- 

chen  und  Volkslieder.    Ibid.,  XI  (1896),  508- 

510. 

Weissenfels,  Goethe  im  Sturm    imd  Drang. 

Ibid.,  XII  (1897)  176-181. 
Blume,  Goethes  Gedichte.    Ibid.,  365-372. 
Francke,  Glimpses  of  German  Culture.    Ibid., 

XIV  (1899),  502-505. 
Biese,    Paedagogik   und   Poesie.     Ibid.,  XV 

(1900),  494-495. 
Rod,  Essai  sur  Goethe.    Journal  of  Germanic 

Philology,  III  (1900),  100-108. 

Rod  completely  misunderstands  Goethe.  The  book  is 
the  expression  of  dislike,  based  on  superficial  knowl- 
edge. 


64 


Publications 


Roustan,  Lenau  et  son  temps.    Ibid.,  248-262. 

The  author,  on  the  whole,  does  justice  to  Lenau.  He 
fails,  however,  adequately  to  treat  certain  works,  like 
the  Don  Juan,  and  he  neglects  Lenau's  treatment  of 
landscape. 

Woerner,  Henrik  Ibsen.     Modern   Language 
Notes,  XVI  (1901),  314-316. 


H.  Sohmidt-Wartenbeeg  [1893 — ],  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Germanic  Philology. 

Rousselot's  Phonetical  Apparatus.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  American  Philological  Associ- 
ation, XXVI  (1895),  Iv-lvi. 

A  discussion  of  the  apparatus  and  the  methods  used  by 
the  Abb6  Rousselot  in  his  phonetical  investigations. 
Abstract  of  a  paper  read  before  the  American  Philolo- 
gical Association  at  the  meeting  in  Cleveland,  1895. 

A  Physiological  Criticism  of  the  Liquid  and 
Nasal-sonant  Theory.  American  Journal 
of  Philology,  XVII  (1896),  217-223. 

An  experimental  investigation  of  the  much-mooted 
question  concerning  the  existence  of  liquid  and  nasal 
sonants.  An  examination  of  the  material  gathered  in 
difEerent  countries  leads  to  a  rejection  of  the  theory. 

Zur  Physiologie  des  litauischen  Akzents. 
Indogermanische  Forschungen,  VII  (1897), 
211-223. 

For  the  first  time  the  attempt  is  here  made  to  solve 
an  Indo-European  accent  controversy  experimentally. 
Beside  the  Lithuanian  broken  and  slurred  accent 
qualities  the  quantities  are  investigated ;  the  existence 
of  the  assumed  semi-long  quantity  must  be  denied  so 
far  as  the  southeastern  dialect  is  concerned. 

Phonetical  Notes.  I.  On  R- Vibrations.  II. 
The  Quantity  of  Labials  in  Finnic  Swedish. 
Journal  of  Germanic  Philology,  I  (1897), 
71-75. 

Article  I  contains  a  discussion  on  the  vibrations  of  the 
r  varieties,  supporting  the  theory  of  a  spontaneous  de- 
velopment of  the  later  guttural  r.  The  second  article 
proves  experimentally  the  reduction  of  geminated  con- 
sonants in  Swedish  as  spoken  in  Finland. 

Inedita  des  Heinrich  Kaufringer.  8vo,  xvi 
+  56.  The  University  of  Chicago  Ger- 
manic Studies,  III,  1899. 

An  edition  of  ten  unpublished  poems  of  Heinrich  Kau- 
fringer, contained  in  the  Berlin  Teichner  codex,  fol. 
564. 

The  Berlin  Fragment  of  the  Madelghijs.  Jour- 
nal of  Germanic  Philology,  I  (1897),  239- 
246. 

Publication  of  a  fragment  of  342  verses,  found  in  the 
Sammelmappe,  fol.  923,  in  the  Royal  Library  of  Berlin, 
and  identified  as  part  of  a  Low  Franconian  translation 
of  the  Maugis  d'Aigremont. 


Conrad  Vollstatter's  Gedicht  von  des  Teufels 
Tochtern.    Ibid.,  I  (1897),  249-251. 

Publication  of  a  poem  on  a  much  treated  theme,  found 
in  codex  MS.  germ.,  fol.  564,  in  the  Royal  Library  of 
Berlin. 

Zum  Speculum  Humanae  Salvationis.  Publi- 
cations of  the  Modern  Language  Associa- 
tion of  America,  XIV  (1899),  137-168. 

A  treatise  on  the  High  and  Low  German  versions  of 
the  mediaeval  Latin  poem. 

Phonetische  Untersuchungen  zum  lettischen 
Akzent.  Mit  34  Abbildungen.  Indoger- 
manische Forschungen,  X  (1899),  117-144. 

A  detailed  description  of  the  Lettic  accent,  containing 
an  account  of  a  new  accent  variety  —  the  falling  accent 
—  which  has  meanwhile  been  proven  by  J.  Endzelin 
(Ueber  den  lettischen  Silbenaccent,  Bezzenberger's  Bei- 
trdge,  XXV,  259),  as  original  in  the  older  type  of  the 
language. 

Das  Newberry  Manuskript  von  James  Thom- 
sons Jugendgedichten.  Anglia,  Neue  Folge, 
XI  (1900),  12^152. 

The  manuscripjt  preserved  in  the  museum  of  the  New- 
berry Library  in  Chicago  is  shown  to  be  the  original 
copy  of  the  poet  from  which  some  poems  were  pub- 
lished in  the  Aldine  edition  of  1830.  The  article  fur- 
nishes a  history  of  the  manuscript,  and  the  hitherto 
unpublished  portion  of  the  text,  together  with  a  colla- 
tion of  the  other  poems. 

Further  Contributions  to  the  Lithuanian  Ac- 
cent Question.  Proceedings  of  the  Ameri- 
can Philological  Association,  XXXII 
(1901),  xxiv-xxvi. 

An  experimental  investigation  based  on  Kurschat's 
Schriftsprache. 

Reviews  of 

Victor  Henry,  Precis  de  grammaire  compar6e 
de  I'Anglais  et  de  I'Allemand,  rapport6s  h 
leur  commune  origine  et  rapproch6s  des 
langues  classiques.  Modern  Language 
Notes,  IX  (1894),  361-364. 

Wilhelm  Braune,  Gothische  Grammatik.  Vierte 
Auflage.    Ibid.,  XI  (1896),  52-53. 

W.  Streitberg,  Urgermanische  Grammatik. 
Einftihrung  in  das  vergleichende  Studium 
der  altgermanischen  Dialekte.  Ibid.,  XII 
(1897),  229-232. 

W.  Streitberg,  Gothisches  Elementarbuch. 
Ibid.,  XII  (1897),  498^99. 

Gebhardt-Thoroddsen,  Geschichte  der  islSn- 
dischen  Geographie,  I,  II.  Ibid.,  XIV 
(1899),  62-63. 


Department  op  Gebmanio  Languages  and  Litebatubes 


65 


J.  E.  Wackemell,  Altdeutsche  Passionsspiele 
aus  Tirol,  mit  Abhandlungen  liber  ihre  Ent- 
wicklung,  Composition  und  litterarhisto- 
rische  Stellung.  Americana  Germanica, 
II  (1899),  96-98. 

One  of  the  manuscripts  of  the  Tyrolese  cycle  (the 
Amerikaner  Passion),  treated  in  extenso  by  Wacker- 
nell,  was  edited  by  the  reviewer  in  the  Publications  of 
the  Modern  Language  Association,  V  (1890),  I-XI,  1-127. 

Gustav-Roethe,  Die  Reimvorreden  des  Sachsen- 
spiegels.  Modern  Language  Notes,  XVI 
(1901),  47^9. 

Paul  Oskab  Kern  [1895 — ],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Germanic  Philology. 

Das  starke  Verb  bei  Grimmelshausen.  Ein 
Beitrag  zur  Grammatik  des  Fruhneuhoch- 
deutschen.  Doctor's  thesis.  Journal  of 
Germanic  Philology,  II  (1898),  33-99. 

All  of  Grimmelshausen's  works,  as  far  as  they  are  ac- 
cessible through  reprints,  are  examined.  The  first 
part  of  the  article  treats  of  the  endings,  especially  the 
disappearance  of  the  unaccented  e;  the  second  part 
treats  of  the  ablaut  as  compared  with  the  Middle  High 
German  forms. 


Philip  Schuyler  Allen  [1898 — ],  In- 
structor in  German  Literature. 

Wilhelm  Mtiller  and  the  German  Volkslied.  I, 
Introduction.  Journal  of  Germanic  Phi- 
lology, II  (1899),  283-322;  p,  Nature  Sense 
in  the  Volkslied  and  in  Miiller.  Remin- 
iscences of  the  Volkslied  in  Miiller,  ibid.,  Ill 
(1900),  35-91 ;  III,  Diction  of  the  Volkslied 
and  of  Muller,  ibid.,  431-491.  Reprinted  as 
doctor's  thesis. 

Diary  and  Letters  of  Wilhelm  Muller.  In  col- 
laboration with  J.  T.  Hatfield.  Chicago, 
University  Press.    In  Press. 

The  diary,  hitherto  unpublished,  is  an  intimate  and 
detailed  account  of  Mailer's  life  and  thoughts  from  his 
twenty-first  birthday,  August  7, 1815,  until  the  close  of 
the  following  year,  and  in  it  there  is  found  a  naive  dis- 
cussion of  his  idealistic  beliefs,  with  interesting  side- 
lights upon  the  talented  literary  and  musical  society  of 
Dresden  and  Berlin. 

Wilhelm  Muller  and  Italian  Popular  Poetry. 
Modern  Language  Notes,  XIV  (1899),  329- 
331. 

The  sources  of  nine  of  Mailer's  songs  are  discovered  to 
be  in  Italian  popular  lyric  verses. 

Martin  Opitz  and  Wilhelm  Muller.  Ibid.,  XIV 
(1899),  425-427. 

Opitz's  well-known  Lebenslust  the  source  of  Mailer's 
Geselligkeit. 


A  Volkslied  as  Source  of  Two  of  Wilh.  Miiller's 
Songs.    Ibid.,  XVI  (1901),  73-76. 

a  Moravian  popular  ballad  the  prototyi)e  of  Thrdnen 
und  Rosen  and  Abrede. 

Lewis  and  Zschokke.  Ibid.,  XVII  (1902), 
61-62. 

The  Bravo  of  Venice  a  paraphrase  of  Zschokke's  Abel- 
lino,  and  not  a  very  successful  one. 

Unpublished  Sonnets  of  Wilhelm  Muller. 
Journal  of  Germanic  Philology,  IV  (1902), 
1-9. 

Written  while  the  young  poet  was  in  Brussels  with  the 
Prussian  Army  of  Occupation  (1814).  Certain  of  them 
undoubtedly  memorials  of  his  attachment  to  Th6r6se. 

Studies  in  Popular  Poetry.  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  VII,  133-156. 

I.  Nature-Introductions  and  Vivification  in  the  Older 
German  Volkslied  develops  the  hypothesis  that  the 
beginning  with  the  description  of  a  bit  of  nature,  which 
is  so  common  to  early  popular  song,  is  not  unconscious 
and  instinctive,  but  the  last  survival  of  a  proethnic 
hymn  to  nature  in  one  of  its  chief  manifestations.  II. 
Old  Ballads  Newly  Expounded  is  a  discussion  of  two 
American  versions  of  Lord  Randal  and  Lord  Thomas 
and  Fair  Annet,  in  which  it  is  found  that  the  text  of 
the  former  is  a  corrui)ted  one,  but  that  that  of  the  lat- 
ter is  nearer  the  original  structure  of  the  ballad  than 
any  corresponding  variation  of  the  same  type  included 
in  Child's  English  and  Scottish  Popular  Ballads.  III. 
Heine  and  the  SchnaderhUpfel  is  the  presentation  of 
the  thesis  that  the  poet  found  the  prototype  of  his 
ironic  antithesis  in  the  epigrammatic  endings  of  the 
south-German  popular  dance-rimes. 

Reviews  of 

Marriage,  Poetische  Beziehungen  des  Men- 
schen  zur  Pflanzen-  und  Tierwelt  im  heu- 
tigen  Volkslied  auf  hochdeutschem  Boden. 
Modern  Language  Notes,  XIV  (1899),  311- 
313. 

Petsch,  Neue  BeitrSge  zur  Kenntnis  des  Volks- 
ratsels.    Ibid.,  XV  (1900),  1-27. 


Hermann  Benjamin  Almstedt  [1895- 
1901],  Instructor  in  German;  Assistant 
Professor  of  Germanic  Languages  and 
Literatures,  University  of  Missouri. 

Das  mittelniederdeutsche  Laiendoctrinal.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  critical  studv  of  this  manual  of  6,550  lines  as  a  con- 
tribution  to  the  cultural  and  lin^istic  side  of  the 
Middle  Low  German.  The  manual  is  continued  in  the 
Blankenburg  MS.  127a  in  the  ducal  library  at  Wolfen- 
battel,  and  is  a  translation  into  Middle  Low  German 
of  a  "  Brabant-dudisch  "  original,  made  by  an  unknown 
hand,  presumably  in  the  fifteenth  century. 


66 


Publications 


Bert  John  Vos  [1892-93],  Instructor  in 
German;  Associate  Professor  of  Ger- 
man, Johns  Hopkins  University. 

Review  of 

Learned,  The  Saga  of  Walther  of  Aquitaine. 

Modern  Language  Notes,  VIII  (1893),  377- 

380. 

Philip  Schuyler  Allen,  Ph.D.  1897. 
(See  above.) 

Hermann  Benjamin  Almstedt,  Ph.D. 
1900.     (See  above.) 

Max  Batt,  Ph.D.  1901;  Instructor  in 
German,  Parsons  College,  Iowa. 

Schiller's  Attitude  Towards  the  French  Revo- 
lution. Journal  of  Germanic  Philology,  I 
(1897),  482-493. 

From  an  examination  of  Schiller's  letters  and  works 
the  following  conclusions  are  derived:  (1)  That  Schil- 
ler took  a  lively  interest  in  the  Revolution,  but  from 
the  very  beginning  did  not  consider  it  as  the  realization 
of  his  ideal;  (2)  that  his  interest  reached  its  highest 
point  when  he  began  to  write  the  defence  of  Louis  XVI ; 
and  (3)  that  he  looked  upon  the  Revolution  as  a  failure. 

The  Treatment  of  Natvire  in  German  Literature 
from  Giinther  to  the  Appearance  of  Goethe's 
Werther.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  112.  Chi- 
cago, University  Press,  1902. 

German  literature,  letters,  and  travels  within  the  period 
mentioned  in  the  title  reveal  a  marked  change  of  atti- 
tude toward  nature.  Indications  of  this  are  traceable 
before  and  especially  about  the  middle  of  the  century. 
To  follow  this  change  in  detail  is  the  purpose  of  the 
investigation. 

Review  of 

Cooke,  The  Development  of  the  Nature  Sense 

in  the  German  Lyric.    Modern  Language 

Notes,  XVI  (1901),  487^90. 

Carl  Edgar  Eggert,  Ph.D.  1901;  In- 
structor in  German,  University  of 
Michigan. 

The  Middle  Low  German  Legend  of  Mary 
Magdalen.  Doctor's  thesis.  Journal  of 
Germanic  Philology,  IV  (1902),  132-21B. 

The  investigation  aims  to  establish  the  sources  as  well 
as  to  determine  the  dialect  of  the  Life  of  8.  Mary  Mag- 
dalen, contained  in  Folia  60t>  to  73^  of  Helmstedt  Codex 


894,  hitherto  unpublished.  The  growth  of  the  legend  is 
traced  to  its  final  form,  as  found  in  the  northern  tradi- 
tion of  the  Speculum  Historiale  of  Vincent  de  Beau- 
vais  and  in  the  southern  of  the  Legenda  Aurea  of 
Jacobus  a  Voragine.  The  weight  of  evidence  indicates 
the  French  poem,  written  between  1200  and  1220  by  Guil- 
laume  de  Clerc  de  Normandie.  as  the  direct  source  of 
the  German  version.  An  analysis  of  the  language  and 
meter  proves  the  great  debt  of  the  Low  German  author 
to  Hign  German  literary  models,  and  points  to  Bruns- 
wick as  his  probable  home.  The  text  of  the  poem, 
punctuated,  normalized,  and  corrected,  accompanies 
the  work. 


Otto  Heller,  Ph.D.  1900;  Professor 
of  German  Language  and  Literature, 
Washington  University. 

Goethe  and  the  Philosophy  of  Schopenhauer. 
Journal  of  Germanic  Philology,  I  (1897), 
348-360. 

An  argument  that  Goethe  was  one  of  the  determinative 
factors  in  the  construction  of  Neo-Pessimism,  based 
ui)on  the  high  regard  for  each  other's  personality  en- 
tertained by  Goethe  and  Schopenhauer,  upon  striking 
points  of  resemblance  in  their  world-views,  and  upon 
direct  evidence  derived  from  their  writings  and  their 
lives. 

Goethe's  Faust  II,  11.  106-108.    Ibid.,  XIII 

(1898),  283-284. 

A  new  interpretation  of  the  lines. 

Goethe  and  Wordsworth.  Ibid.,  XIV  (1899), 
262-265. 

Some  close  parallelisms  between  certain  pantheistic 
utterances  of  the  two  poets,  ascribed  by  the  author 
rather  to  the  prevailing  pantheistic  drift  of  the  Lake 
School  than  to  direct  influence  of  Goethe  upon  Words- 
worth. 

Die  Ahaswerussage  in  der  neueren  Litteratur. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  study  in  comparative  literary  history,  including  an 
attempt  to  trace  in  the  dififerent  modern  literatures 
certain  recurring  types  of  treatment  that_  have  been 
accorded  to  the  legend.  A  comprehensive  bibliography 
is  an  important  feature  of  the  work. 

Review  of 

Adams,  Keller's  Komeo  und  Julia  auf  dem 
Dorfe.    Ibid..  XVII  (1902),  27-33. 

Johannes  Benoni  Edward  Jonas,  Ph.D. 
1899;  Assistant  Professor  of  German 
Language  and  Literature,  Brown  Uni- 
versity. 

Hillern's  Hoher  als  die  Kirche.     Edition  with 

notes  and  vocabulary.     12mo,  VIII  +  124. 

Boston,  Allyn  &  Bacon,  1901. 
Unpubhshed  Poems  of  Heinrich  der  Teichner. 

Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  critical  edition,  with  studies  of  the  metre,  language, 

and  life  of  the  poet. 


Department  op  English  Language  and  Literatube 


67 


Review  of 

Adolf  Hausrath,  Alcander  und  Luther  auf  dem 
Reichstag  zu  Worms.  American  Journal 
of  Theology,  III,  187-189. 

Jessie  Louise  Jones,  Ph.D.  1897;  In- 
structor in  German,  Lewis  Institute, 
Chicago. 

The  Phonology  of  the  Elis  Saga.  Doctor's 
thesis.  8vo,  iv  +35.  Chicago,  1897.  Pri- 
vately printed. 

A  study  of  an  old  Norwegian  mannscript  of  the  second 
quarter  of  the  thirteenth  century.  The  dialect  is  found 
to  be  West  Norwegian. 


Paul  Oskar  Kern,  Ph.D.  1897.  (See 
above.) 

Frederick  Otto  Sohub,  Ph.D.  1901;  In- 
structor in  Latin  and  German,  High 
School,  Galveston,  Texas. 

Text  Criticism  of  Four  Middle  Low  German 
Poems,  and  Investigations  concerning  the 
Middle  Low  German  Literary  Language. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  critical  study  of  the  language  of  the  poems  (hitherto 
in  manuscript  form) ,  which  aims  to  establish  a  normal 
text  and  dialect  criteria  and  to  determine  the  causes 
of  the  mixed  dialect.  A  further  purpose  of  the  investi- 
gation is  to  determine  the  characteristics  and  the  ex- 
tent of  the  influence  of  the  Middle  Low  German  literary 
language,  and  also  to  discover  the  sources  of  the  poems. 


Ora  Philander  Seward,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Professor  of  Modem  Languages,  Uni- 
versity of  Utah. 

The  Middle  High  German  Negative  Strength- 
ened by  the  Specification  of  Something  of 
Small  Size  or  Value.  Doctor's  thesis.  Jour- 
nal of  Germanic  Philology,  III  (1901), 
277-334. 

a  systematic  study  of  the  comparative  frecjuency  of  the 
use  of  the  strengthened  negative  in  various  authors, 
periods,  and  localities  during  the  time  indicated  in  the 
title. 

Francis  Ashbury  Wood,  Ph.D.  1895; 
Professor  of  the  German  Language  and 
Literature,  Cornell  College,  Iowa. 

On  the  Origin  of  i  and  w  in  Aorist-Presents 
in  Germanic.  Modern  Language  Notes,  X 
(1895),  94^97. 

A  criticism  of  Hirt's  article  in  P.  B.  B.,  XVIII,  522  ff., 
showing  that  the  vowel-length  is  not  due  to  the  disap- 
pearance of  a  nasal. 

Apparent  Absence  of  Umlaut  in  Old  English. 
Ibid.,  347-350. 

Two  cases  are  considered :  (1)  The  absence  of  the  um- 
laut in  appearance  only,  and  (2)  the  real  absence  where 
it  would  be  expected. 

Gothic  haipi.    Ibid.,  444. 

Suggested  etymology  of  the  Gothic  word. 

I,  Vemer's  Law  in  Gothic.  II,  The  Redupli- 
cating Verbs  in  Germanic.  Doctor's  thesis. 
8vo,  43.  The  University  of  Chicago  Ger- 
manic Studies,  II,  1895. 

Part  I  gives  a,  practically  complete  list,  with  discus- 
sion, of  Gothic  forms  affected  by  the  Germanic  sound- 
shifting.  Part  II  discusses  the  so-called  reduplicating 
preterits  without  reduplication,  showing  that  they  rep- 
resent ablauting  forms  and  are  therefore  to  be  sepa- 
rated from  the  reduplicating  preterits  in  Gk>thic. 


XV.    ENGLISH  LANGUAGE  AND  LITERATURE 


John  Matthews  Manly  [1898 — ],  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
English. 

Omissions  and  Insertions  in  Shakespeare's 
Plays.  Article  in  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
VII. 

An  attempt  to  determine  from  metrical  peculiarities 
whether  the  differences  between  the  quarto  and  folio 
versions  of  Hamlet  are  due  to  insertions  or  omissions, 
and  to  make  some  inferences  in  regard  to  Shakespteare's 
attitude  toward  life  and  his  methods  of  composition. 


Review  of 

Brandl,  Quellen  des  Weltlichen  Dramas  in 
England  vor  Shakespeare.  Journal  of  Ger- 
manic Philology,  II  (1899),  389-428. 

William  DarnallMacClintock  [1892-], 
Professor  of  English. 

Some   Paradoxes    of    the  English  Romantic 
Movement  of  the  Eighteenth  Century.    The 


68 


Publications 


University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, First  Series,  VII,  329-351. 

An  attempt  to  re-enforce  the  doctrine  of  a  single  and 
continuous  movement  in  the  literature  of  the  later 
eighteenth  and  early  nineteenth  centuries  by  showing 
the  essential  harmony  in  a  group  of  apparently  contra- 
dictory features. 


Francis  Adelbeet  Blackburn  [1892 — ], 
Associate  Professor  of  English. 

The  Christian  Coloring  in  the  Beowulf.  Pub- 
lications of  the  Modern  Language  Associa- 
tion of  America,  XII  (1897),  205-225. 

Is  the  "Christ"  of  Cynewulf  a  Single  Poem? 
Anglia,  XIX  (1897),  89-98. 

An  argument  in  support  of  the  thesis  that  the  so-called 
"  Christ  "  is  really  three  different  poems  on  three  dif- 
ferent subjects. 

Teutonic  "  eleven  "  and  "  twelve."  Journal  of 
Germanic  Philology,  I  (1897),  72-76. 

The  Husband's  Message  and  the  Accompany- 
ing Riddles  of  the  Exeter  Book.  Ibid.,  Ill 
(1900),  1-13. 

Reviews  of 

Gurteen,  Epic  of  the  Fall  of  Man.  American 
Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897),  186-188. 

Wyatt,  Elementary   Old    English   Grammar. 

Journal  of  Germanic  Philology,  I  (1897), 

369-371. 
Trautmann,  Cynewulf,  Bischof  und  Dichter. 

American  Journal  of  Theology,  III  (1899), 

791-792. 


-] ,  Assistant  Pro- 


Myra  Keynolds  [1895- 
fessor  of  English. 

The  Treatment  of  Nature  in  EngUsh  Poetry 
between  Pope  and  Wordsworth.  Doctor's 
thesis.  8vo,  x  +  290,  Chicago,  University 
Press,  1896.    English  Studies,  No.  4. 

An  attempt  to  trace  in  the  eighteenth  century  the 
sources  of  the  nineteenth  century  attitude  towards 
Nature.  (1)  Chief  characteristics  marking  treatment 
of  Nature  in  the  English  classical  poets.  (2)  The  new 
conception  of  Nature  in  certain  eighteenth  century 
poets.  (3)  Brief  studies  in  the  treatment  of  Nature  in 
landscape  gardening,  fiction,  books  of  travel,  and  the 
painting  of  the  eighteenth  century. 

The  Poems  of  Anne,  Countess  of  Winchilsea. 
From  the  original  edition  of  1713  and  from 
unpublished  manuscripts,  edited,  with  an 
introduction  and  notes.     8vo,  cxxx  +  432. 


Chicago,  University  Press,  1902.  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
Second  Series,  IV. 

The  Countess  of  Winchilsea  wrote  during  the  years 
1680-1720.  A  portion  of  her  work  appeared  in  1713,  in  a 
volume  now  become  rare.  Her  unpublished  poems  are 
in  two  manuscripts,  one  in  the  possession  of  the  Earl 
of  Winchilsea  and  the  other  in  that  of  Mr.  Edmund 
Gosse.  This  volume  contains  all  the  available  extant 
work  of  Lady  Winchilsea.  A  biographical  sketch  com- 
piled from  original  sources  appears  in  the  introduc- 
tion, pointing  out  in  detail  the  characteristics  in  which 
her  poems  were  not  in  harmony  with  contemporary 
tendencies. 


Albert  Harris  Tolm an  [1893 — ],  Assist- 
ant Professor  of  English  Literature. 

Julius  Caesar,  by  William  Shakespeare. 
Edited  with  introduction  and  notes.  Eight 
illustrations.  12mo,  Ixvi  +  158.  New  York 
and  Chicago,  Globe  School  Book  Co.,  1901. 

An  introduction  to  the  study  of  Shakespeare  and  an  edi- 
tion of  this  play.  Among  the  subjects  receiving  especial 
treatment  are :  The  life  of  S. ;  the  periods  in  S.'s  career 
as  a  playwright ;  the  structure  of  a  Shakespearean  play ; 
the  stage  of  S.  s  day,  and  some  modern  adaptations; 
the  characters  and  the  action ;  S.  and  democracy ;  the 
verse ;  questions  for  study. 

Select  Bibliography  of  the  English  Drama 
before  Elizabeth,  with  a  Comparative  Table 
of  the  Four  English  Cycles  of  Religious 
Plays,  by  Ella  Adams  Moore.  8vo,  16.  Pri- 
vately printed.    Chicago,  1896. 

A  Brief  Bibliography  of  the  Theory  of  the 
Drama.  8vo,  11.  Privately  printed.  Chi- 
cago, 1897. 

A  Brief  Bibliography  of  the  Theory  of  Fiction. 
8vo,  10.    Privately  printed.    Chicago,  1898. 

A  Brief  Bibliography  of  Epic  Poetry.  8vo,  15. 
Privately  printed.    Chicago,  1899. 

Hamlet's  "  Woo't  Drinke  up  Esile?  "  Modem 
Language  Notes,  IX  (1894),  241-244. 

The  word  Esile  (vinegar)  is  shown  to  contain  an  allu- 
sion to  the  draught  of  vinegar  and  gall  offered  to 
Christ,  conceived  as  a  crowning  torture. 

English  at  the  University  of  Chicago.  Dial, 
XVI  (1894),  356-357.  Also  in  "  English  in 
American  Universities,"  86-91.  Boston, 
D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  1895. 

English  Surnames.  Transactions  of  the  Wis- 
consin Academy  of  Sciences,  Arts,  and 
Letters,  X  (1895),  1-14. 

Presents  the  general  facts  concerning  the  origin  of 
English  surnames,  and  points  out  that  the  sound- 
changes  have  often  been  re^lar  in  surnames  when  not 
so  in  the  same  word  in  ordinary  speech ;  e.  j;.,  Read  vs. 
red. 


Department  op  English  Language  and  Liteeature 


69 


The  Expressive  Power  of  English  Sounds. 
Atlantic  Monthly,  LXXV  (1895),  478-485. 

Discusses  how  far  the  sounds  of  th'6  English  lan^age 
have  each  peculiar  expressional  value,  natural  signifi- 
cance. Four  forms  of  sound  symbolism  are  distin- 
guished :  muscular  imitation,  muscular  analogy,  sound 
imitation,  and  sound  analogy.  The  accepted  meanings 
of  words  should  not  be  tampered  with  in  an  effort  to 
secure  expressive  sound-effects.  The  significant  use  of 
sounds  is  an  important  element  in  poetry.  A  delicate 
use  of  sound-symbolism  is  one  of  the  innermost  secrets 
of  style. 

Notes  on  Macbeth.  Publications  of  the  Mod- 
ern Language  Association  of  America,  XI 
(1896),  200-219. 

Points  out  that  the  "weird  sisters"  (=  the  sister 
Fates)  speak  to  Macbeth  and  Banquo  in  character  as 
the  Norns  of  the  Past,  Present,  and  Future.  Other 
topics  are:  Did  Shakespeare  represent  the  weird  sis- 
ters as  witches?  the  views  concerning  the  composition 
of  Macbeth ;  the  words  of  the  sleep-walking  scene. 

A  View  of  the  Views  about  Hamlet.  Ibid., 
XIII  (1898),  155-184. 

A  classification,  summary,  and  criticism  of  the  various 
views  concerning  the  character  of  Hamlet. 

Was  Poe  Mathematically  Accurate?  Dial, 
XXVI  (1899),  18^190. 

Points  out  mathematically  impossible  statements  in 
two  of  Poe's  stories. 

The  Endless  Epic  Question.  Ibid.,  XXVII 
(1899),  94-97. 

Discusses  the  English  translation  of  Comparetti's  work 
on  the  Kalevala  and  Lang's  introduction  to  the  same, 
and  points  out  the  significance  of  Radloff's  testimony 
concerning  the  "contemporaneous  epic"  of  the  Turkish 
tribe  known  as  the  Kara-Kirghis. 

The  Revival  of  English  Grammar.  School 
Review,  X  (1902),  157-165. 

Discusses  some  of  the  fundamental  problems  in  the 
teaching  of  English  grammar,  and  characterizes  fifteen 
recent  text-books  in  this  subject. 

What  Has  Become  of  Shakespeare's  Play 
"Love's  Labour's  Won"  ?  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  VII,  157-190. 

Lovers  Labour's  Won  is  the  only  play  of  Shakespeare  in 
the  list  of  Francis  Meres  (1598)  that  is  not  known  to  us. 
The  different  theories  concerning  this  drama  are  taken 
up  in  the  following  order :  (1)  That  Love's  Labour's  Won 
has  disappeared;  (2)  that  it  is  to  be  identified  with 
Love's  Labour's  Lost;  (3)  with  A  Midsummer-Night's 
Dream;  (4)  with  The  Tempest;  (5)  with  All's  Well  that 
Ends  Well;  (6)  with  Much  Ado  about  Nothing;  (7)  with 
The  Taming  of  the  Shrew.  A  neglected  piece  of  evi- 
dence favors  the  view  that  Love's  Labour's  Won  is  no 
longer  extant.  The  more  common  opinion  among 
Shakespearean  scholars  has  been  that  All's  Well  is  the 
comedy  concerned :  but  this  seems  improbable.  If  the 
play  has  come  down  to  us,  it  is  probably  either  Much 
Ado  or  The  Taming  of  the  Shrew.  The  strength  of  the 
argument  in  favor  of  The  Taming  of  the  Shrew  has  not 
been  appreciated. 

Reviews  of 

Parsons,  English  Versification.  Modern  Lan- 
guage Notes,  VIII  (1893),  21^222. 


Corson,  A  Primer  of  English  Verse.  Ibid., 
245-247. 

Woodbridge,  The  Drama,  Its  Law  and  Its 
Technique.  Jahrbuch  der  Deutschen  Shake- 
speare-Gesellschaft,  XXXV  (1899),  295-297. 

Inconsistencies  are  pointed  out  in  Miss  Woodbridge's 
use  of  the  terms  "rise"  and  "fall"  as  applied  to  a 
dramatic  action 

Manly,  Edition  of  Shakespeare's  "Macbeth." 
Ibid.,  328-329. 

Arber,  British  Anthologies  [of  Lyric  Poetry]: 
III,  The  Spenser  Anthology,  1548-1591;  IV, 
The  Shakespeare  Anthology,  1592-1616;  V, 
The  Jonson  Anthology,  1617-1637.  Ibid., 
XXXVII  (1901),  262-263. 


Frederic  Ives  Carpenter  [1895 — ],  As- 
sistant Professor  of  English. 

Metaphor  and  Simile  in  the  Minor  Elizabethan 
Drama.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  xvi  +  217. 
English  Studies,  No.  3.  Chicago,  Univer- 
sity Press,  1895. 

A  general  study,  with  special  analysis,  of  the  formal 
imagery  of  Gorbodu^,  Lyly,  Peele,  Marlowe,  Kyd, 
Greene,  Tourneur,  Webster,  Chapman,  and  Jonson. 

English  Lyric  Poetry,  1500-1700.  8vo,  Ixv  + 
276.  London,  Blackie  &  Son,  Ltd.,  1897. 
(The  Warwick  Library.) 

An  anthology,  with  a  critical  and  historical  introduc- 
tion. 

Leonard  Cox,  The  Arte  or  Craf  te  of  Khethoryke. 
8vo,  117.  English  Studies,  No.  5.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1899. 

A  reprint  of  the  first  English  Rhetoric  (c.  1530),  with 
an  Introduction  presenting  new  material  on  the  career 
of  Cox,  a  bibliography,  a  discussion  of  Cox's  Rhetoric 
and  of  the  history  of  early  English  rhetoric,  a  reprint 
of  Melanchthon's  "  Institutiones  Rhetoricae,"  1521 
(Part  I),  the  source  from  which  Cox  translates,  Notes 
and  Glossarial  Index. 

Selections  from  the  Poetry  of  Lord  Byron. 
8vo,  lviii  +  412.  New  York,  Henry  Holt 
&  Co.,  1900.    (English  Readings.) 

Selections,  with  critical  Introduction  discussing  in 
some  detail  Byron's  career,  mind,  and  art,  especially 
as  revealed  in  his  prose  letters  and  journals;  and 
Notes  presenting  brief  general  introductions  to  each 
poem  as  well  as  annotations  in  detail. 

Ben  Jonson's  The  Case  is  Altered.  Edited 
from  the  original  edition,  with  a  brief  intro- 
duction. 8vo,  viii  +  90.  Chicago,  Univer- 
sity Press,  1902. 


70 


Publications 


The  Life  and  Repentaunce  of  Marie  Magdalene, 
by  Lewis  Wager.  A  morality  play,  re- 
printed from  the  original  edition  of  1566- 
1567,  edited  with  an  Introduction,  Notes, 
and  Glossarial  Index.  8vo,  xxxvi  +  91.  The 
University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, Second  Series,  I. 

The  first  modern  reprint  of  a  sixteenth-century  drama 
of  considerable  historical  interest.  It  continues  in 
morality  form  the  long  line  of  literature  in  which  the 
Magdalen  legend  is  treated,  and  occupies  a  unique  po- 
sition in  the  nistory  of  the  drama  in  its  curious  mixture 
of  type  —  morality,  historical  play,  and  biblical  play  in 
one.  In  the  introduction  are  discussed  its  generart 
class  and  the  history  of  Magdalen  literature,  as  well  as 
questions  relating  to  its  date  and  analysis,  staging, 
diction  and  versification,  sources,  and  the  like. 

An  Outline  Guide  to  the  Study  of  Spenser. 
8vo,  24.    Chicago,  1894.    Privately  printed. 

Condensed  classifications,  with  references  to  aid  in  the 
study  of  Edmund  Spenser,  his  work,  and  his  position 
in  literary  history. 

The  Elizabethan  Attitude  toward  Insanity. 
Modern  Language  Notes,  XI  (1896),  186- 

188. 

A  slight  addition  to  the  discussion  of  the  subject  in 
Wendell's  William  .Shakspere  and  in  Corbin's  The 
Elizabethan  Hamlet".    In  corroboration. 

An  Outline  Guide  to  the  Study  of  English 
Lyric  Poetry.  8vo,54.  Chicago,  1897.  Pri- 
vately printed. 

Classifications,  notes,  and  references,  covering  the  defi- 
nition of  the  lyric,  the  sources  of  English  lyric  poetry, 
the  history  of  the  English  lyric,  leading  lyric  kinds  and 
types,  the  development  of  lyric  form,  miscellaneous 
studies,  etc. 

Spenser's  Cave  of  Despair.  An  Essay  in  Liter- 
ary Comparison.    Modern  Language  Notes, 

XII  (1897),  257-273. 

The  mediaeval  treatment  of  this  theme  in  theology,  lit- 
erature, and  art,  studied  as  a  source  for  a  famous  pas- 
sage in  the  Faerie  Queene  (Book  I,  Canto  IX).  Later 
treatments,  especially  Tennyson's  Two  Voices,  and  their 
dependence  upon  Spenser. 

Additions  to  the  Spanish    Tragedy.      Ibid., 

XIII  (1898),  60-62. 

A  precise  indication  of  the  additions  (ascribed  to  Ben 
Jonson)  made  in  later  editions  of  the  bpanish  Tragedy, 
to  the  original  edition  of  c.  1594. 

Leonard  Cox  and  the  First  English  Rhetoric. 
Ibid.,  XIII  (1898),  292-294. 

That  the  source  of  the  first  English  Rhetoric  was  in 
Melanchthon,  from  whom  Cox  translates  the  greater 
part  of  his  work. 

Thomas  Watson's  Italian  Madrigals  Englished, 
1590.  Journal  of  Germanic  Philology,  II 
(1899),  323-358. 

A  reprint,  with  critical  introduction,  of  the  only  Eng- 
lish production  of  Watson  heretofore  inaccessible  in 
modern  reprint ;  tracing  out  and  reproducing  in  every 
case  also  tue  Italian  originals. 


Notes  on  the  Anonymous  Richard  II.  Ibid., 
Ill  (1900),  138-142. 

Annotations,  mainly  textual  (drawn  from  the  writer's 
transcript  or  the  MS.),  on  this  play  as  printed  in  Vol. 
XXXV  of  the  Shakespeare-Jahrbuch. 

The  Elizabethan  Play  in  Chicago.  Dial, 
XXXII  (1902),  372-374. 

Apropos  of  the  performance  of  Ben  Jonson's  The  Case 
is  Altered,  May  17, 1902. 

Reviews  of 

Courthope,  History  of  English  Poetry,  Vol.  II. 

Journal  of  Germanic  Philology,  I  (1897), 

361-368. 

Bfandl,  Supplement  to  Dodsley.  Modern 
Language  Notes,  XIV  (1899),  268-280. 

General  criticism,  with  specific  annotations  (textual 
and  historical),  partly  based  on  the  writer's  collations 
of  the  original  texts. 

Schelling,  Ben  Jonson  and  the  Classical  School. 
Jahrbuch  der  deutschen  Shakespeare- 
Gesellschaft,  XXXV  (1899),  344. 

Churchill,  Richard  the  Third  up  to  Shake- 
speare. Modern  Language  Notes,  XV  (1900), 
501-509. 

Various  reviews  in  the  Nation  (unsigned)  in 
the  field  of  criticism  (theory  of)  and  literary 
history.    Sundry  reviews  in  the  Dial. 


William  Vaughn  Moody  [1895 — ],  As- 
sistant Professor  of  English  Literature. 

Milton,  Complete  Poetical  Works.  Edited, 
with  introduction  and  notes.  8vo,  xxxiv  + 
417.  Boston,  Houghton,  Mifflin  &  Co.,  1899. 
(The  Cambridge  edition.) 

A  History  of  English  Literature,  In  collabo- 
ration with  Robert  Morss  Lovett.  8vo,  x  -f 
433.  New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons, 
1902. 

KoBERT  Morss  Lovett  [1893 — ],  Assist- 
ant Professor  of  English. 

A  History  of  English  Literature.  In  collabo- 
ration with  William  Vaughn  Moody.  (See 
above.) 


Department  of  English  Language  and  Literatube 


71 


Oscar  Lovell  Tbiggs  [1892 — ],  Instruc- 
tor in  English. 

Old  and  Middle-English  Versification.  Chap- 
ter in  MacLean's  Old  and  Middle  English 
Keader.   12mo,292.    Macmillan  &  Co.,  1893. 

Assembly  of  Gods,  by  John  Lydgate.  An 
edition  from  the  original  MSS.,  with  intro- 
duction and  notes.  8vo,  192.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1895.    Doctor's  thesis. 

Selections  from  the  Prose  and  Poetry  of  Walt 
Whitman.  Edited  with  introduction  and 
bibliography.  8vo,258.  Boston,  Small,  May- 
nard  &  Co.,  1898. 

The  Complete  Writings  of  Walt  Whitman. 
Ten  volumes.  In  collaboration  with  the 
literary  executors.  8vo,  3022.  New  York, 
G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons,  1902. 

The  preparation  of  the  variorum  readings,  etc.,  in  Vol. 
Ill;  the  essay  on  "The  Growth  of  Leaves  of  Grass"  and 
the  Bibliograpy  in  Vol.  X. 

Eleanor  Prescott  Hammond  [1898 — ], 
Docent  in  English. 

Lydgate's  Dance  Macabre.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

A  study  of  the  two  recensions  existing  in  English,  with 
a  historical  introduction. 

London  Lickpenny.  AngUa,XX  (1898),  404r-20. 
Lydgate's  Mumming  at  Hertford.  Ibid.,  XXII 

(1899),  364-374. 
The  Artistic  Devices  of  Coleridge's  Ancient 

Mariner.    Poet-Lore,  X  (1898),  425-429. 

On  the  Text  of  Chaucer's  Parlement  of  Foules. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  VII,  1-26. 

In  the  course  of  a  careful  discussion  of  the  genealogical 
relations  and  intrinsic  worthof  the  existing  manuscripts 
of  this  poem,  it  is  shown  that  no  text  as  yet  printed  is 
strictly  critical  and  that  the  critical  text  will  be  found 
to  contain  metrical  features  which,  if  discovered  in 
other  reconstructions  of  Chaucerian  originals,  will 
compel  a  readjustment  of  current  theories  as  to  the 
poet  s  metre.  It  is  demonstrated  that  the  Cambridge 
manuscript  hitherto  so  admired  by  editors  is  an  un- 
trustworthy authority,  aud  that  the  archetype  is  more 
nearly  reflected  in  the  pair  of  manuscripts,  Fairfax  16 
and  Bodley  638  of  the  Bodleian  Library  in  Oxford. 

The  Use  of  Episode  in  the  Teaching  of  Fiction. 

Modem   Language   Notes,    XVII    (1902), 

65-71. 
The  Tent  Scene  in  Richard  III.    Ibid.,  257-262. 


Edwin  Herbert  Lewis  [1894-99],  Asso- 
ciate Professor  of  English ;  Professor  of 
English,  Lewis  Institute,  Chicago. 

The  History  of  the  English  Paragraph.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  8vo,  200.  Chicago,  Univer- 
sity Press,  1894. 

A  discussion  of  the  development  of  English  prose- 
structure,  with  particular  reference  to  the  evolution  of 
the  paragraph. 

Are  the  Hackman-Reay  Love  Letters  Genuine? 
Modern  Language  Notes,  X  (1895),  8. 

A  contention,  based  on  internal  evidence,  that  the 
Hackman-Reay  letters,  published  1779,  republished 
1895,  are  in  part  spurious,  especially  certain  letters 
and  paragraphs  attributed  to  James  Hackman. 

Metrical  Changes  in  A  Midsummer  Night's 
Dream.    Poet-Lore,  IX  (1897),  110-117. 

Mary  Bowen,  Ph.D.  1896;  Instructor  in 
English,  Wellesley  College. 

The  Influence  of  Petrarch  upon  the  Elizabethan 
Sonnet.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

a  preliminary  account  of  the  origin  of  the  sonnet  in 
Italy ;  a  study  of  the  form  and  material  of  Petrarch's 
sonnets:  an  account  of  Elizabethan  references  to 
Petrarch ;  a  study  of  the  Elizabethan  sonnet  from  Tot- 
tel's  Miscellany  to  Shakespeare's  Sonnets,  showing  the 
Petrarchan  influences  upon  form,  language,  and  mat- 
ter. With  an  appendix  of  rhyme-schemes  of  all  Eliza- 
bethan sonnets. 

Some  New  Notes  on  Sidney.  Modern  Lan- 
guage Notes,  X  (1895),  236-246. 

Some  new  readings  of  Sidney's  poems,  including  an 
unpublished.stanza,  from  MS.  Rawl.  Poet.  85,  Bodleian 
Library, 

Frederic  Ives  Carpenter,  Ph.D.  1895. 
(See  above.) 

Eleanor  Prescott  Hammond,  Ph.D. 
1898.      (See  above.) 

Edwin  Herbert  Lewis,  Ph.D.  1895,  (See 
above.) 

Alice  Edwards  Pratt,  Ph.D.  1897; 
Instructor  in  English,  State  Normal 
School,  San  Diego,  California. 

The  Use  of  Color  in  the  Verse  of  the  English 
Romantic  Poets.  8vo,  x-fll8.  Chicago, 
University  Press,  1898.    Doctor's  thesis. 

An  examination,  classification,  and  discussion  of  the 
color  vocabulary  and  of  color  usages  of  Chaucer,  Lang- 


72 


Publications 


land,  Gower,  Spenser,  Shakespeare,  Milton,  Pope, 
Thomson,  Gray,  Cowper,  Scott,  Coleridge,  Wordsworth, 
Byron,  Shelley,  and  Keats,  with  esjjecial  reference  to 
the  last  six  of  the  poets  named,  and  to  the  character- 
istics of  their  school,  in  contrast  with  earlier  poetic 
schools,  in  respect  to  the  observation  and  use  of  pure 
colors,  tints,  and  shades. 


Myra  Keynolds,  Ph.D.  1895.  (See above.) 


Martha  Edith  Kickert,  Ph.D.  1899. 

Emare:  A  Middle  English  Romance.  Doctor's 
thesis.  To  appear  in  the  Publications  of 
the  Early  English  Text  Society,  1903. 

An  edition  based  upon  the  manuscript,  with  introduc- 
tion, notes,  and  glossary.  The  introduction  includes, 
in  addition  to  a  brief  study  of  the  language,  metre,  and 
style  of  the  poem,  a  more  extended  investigation  into 
the  sources  of  the  story. 


Oscar  Lovell  Triggs,  Ph.D.  1895.    (See 
above.) 


Malcolm  William  Wallace,  Ph.D.  1899 ; 
Professor  of  English,  Beloit  College. 

The  Influence  of  Plautus  on  the  English  Dra- 
matic Literature  of  the  Sixteenth  Century. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Svo,  172.  Dissertationes 
Americanae,  English,  I,  No.  1.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1903. 

The  thesis  is  in  the  nature  of  an  introduction  to  an 
early  seventeenth-century  play— The  Birth  of  Hercules 
—  the  manuscript  of  which  is  in  the  British  Museum 
and  here  printed  for  the  first  time.  The  play  is  based 
on  the  Amphitruo  of  Plautus.  The  introduction  con- 
sists of  a  review  of  the  history  of  classical  study  in 
England,  followed  by  an  examination  into  the  sources 
and  extent  of  the  Plautine  influence  upon  the  English 
drama.  The  study  is  carried  down  to  the  end  of  the 
sixteenth  century. 

Vernon  P.  Squires.     Graduate  student. 

Milton's  Treatment  of  Nature.  Modern  Lan- 
guage Notes,  IX  (1894),  454^74. 

The  Influence  of  Milton  on  Wordsworth.  Poet- 
Lore,  IX  (1897),  B40-551. 


XVI.    LITERATURE  (IN  ENGLISH) 


Richard  Green  Moulton  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor of  Literature  (in  English) . 

Shakespeare  as  a  Dramatic  Artist:  An  Illus- 
tration of  the  Principles  of  Scientific  Criti- 
cism. Third  edition,  Svo,  x  +  443.  Oxford, 
Clarendon  Press,  1893. 

An  exposition  of  inductive  criticism,  and  its  applica- 
tion in  the  field  of  romantic  drama. 

The  Ancient  Classical  Drama:  A  Study  in 
Literary  Evolution.  Second  edition,  Svo, 
XX  +  480.    Oxford,  Clarendon  Press,  1S98. 

An   application   of   evolutionary  ideas  to   literature, 
illustrated  in  the  field  of  classical  drama. 

The  Literary  Study  of  the  Bible.  An  account 
of  the  leading  forms  of  literature  repre- 
sented in  the   Sacred   Writings.      Second 


edition,  12mo,  xvi-f  569.  Boston,  D.  C. 
Heath  &  Co.,  1899. 

A  discussion  of  first  principles  of  literary  morphology, 
and  illustration  of  them  in  the  field  of  sacred  litera- 
ture. 

The  Modern  Reader's  Bible.  A  series  of  works 
from  the  Sacred  Scriptures,  presented  in 
modern  literary  form.  With  introduction 
and  notes.  Twenty-one  small  ISmo  volimaes. 
New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1895-98. 

A  practical  application  of  the  preceding  work :  the 
whole  Bible  and  part  of  the  Old  Testament  Apocrypha 
exhibited  in  strict  morphological  structure. 

A  Short  Introduction  to  the  Literature  of  the 
Bible.  Svo,  vi-f374.  Boston,  D.  C.  Heath 
&  Co.,  1901. 

This  is  intended  for  the  general  reader.  It  includes 
an  apiwndix  on  Progressive  Study  in  Biblical  Litera- 
ture. 


Department  op  Mathematics 


73 


XVII.    MATHEMATICS 


Eliakim  Hastings  Mooee  [1892 — J,  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
Mathematics. 

Concerning  Triple  Systems.  Mathematische 
Annalen,  XLIII  (1893),  271-285. 

In  the  Galois  theory  of  equations  and  in  applications 
to  problems  of  geometry,  one  meets  arrangements  of 
things  or  letters  in  triples  such  that  every  pair  of  let- 
ters enters  precisely  one  triple.  The  number  t  of  let- 
ters involved  in  such  a  triple  system  is  of  the  form 
Gm  + 1  or  6»«  +  3.  The  question  arises  as  to  the  essen- 
tially distinct  triple  systems  in  a  given  number  t  of  let- 
ters. The  paper  proves  the  existence  for  every  number 
t  of  proper  form_  greater  than  13,  of  at  least  two  essen- 
tially distinct  triple  systems,  and  the  methods  of  con- 
struction are  of  such  flexibility  that  one  infers  that  the 
number  of  distinct  systems  increases  very  rapidly  with  t. 

A  Doubly-Infinite  System  of  Simple  Groups. 
Bulletin  of  the  New  York  Mathematical 
Society,  III  (1893),  73-78. 

Mathieu  exhibited  in  1860  by  use  of  the  Galois  imagi- 
nary numbers  substitution  groups  on  ^"  +  1  letters 
which  are  generalizations  of  (the  case  »  =  1)  the  groups 
arising  in  connection  with  the  equations  of  transforma- 
tion of  prime  order  p  of  the  theory  of  elliptic  functions. 
The  structure  of  the  latter  groups  was  recognized  by 
Galois.  The  paper  is  an  abstract  of  a  paper,  read  be- 
fore the  International  Mathematical  Congress  held  in 
Chicago  in  1893,  in  which  the  structure  of  the  general- 
ized groups  is  determined. 

The  Group  of  Holoedric  Transformation  into 
Itself  of  a  Given  Group.  Bulletin  of  the 
American  Mathematical  Society,  I  (1894), 
61-66. 

Definition,  with  application  to  the  abelian  group  of 
order  2'  of  type  (1,  1,1),  whose  group  of  transformation 
is  the  simple  group  of  order  168  on  seven  letters. 

Concerning  the  Definition  by  a  System  of 
Functional    Properties    of   the    Fimction : 

einirz 


.    Annals  of  Mathematics,  IX 


fiz) 

(1895),  43-49. 

The  function  /  (z)  is  fully  characterized  by  the  system 
of  properties ; 

(A)  f{z)  is  a  transcendental  integral  function  of  the 
complex  variable  z,  having  as  its  complete  system 
of  zeros^ « =  »i  =  0,  ±1,  ±2  .  .  .  .  each  zero  being  simple, 
and  unity  being  the  limit  as  z  approaches  0  of 
/(£)  . 

(5)/(2«)/(V4)  =  2/(2)/(z  +  H); 
(C)/(-z)  =  -/(2). 

The  proof  depends  upon  the  lemma :  The  most  general 
function  h  (z)  with  the  properties  {A),  (B)  is  ^"giz), 
where   g  (z)    is   any  particular   function   with  those 

Sroperties  and  where  a  is  an  arbitrary  constant. — 
■  tne  functions  g(z),  h{z)  satisfy  also  (C),  the  con- 
stant a  is  0.  Only  for  this  purpose  does  the  property 
(O  enter  the  system.    It  may  be  replaced  by  (C  ) 

l_dz     "    z   jz=o 


Application  of  the  theorem  is  made  to  the  determina- 
tion of  the  external  exponential  factor  in  the  expression 
of  the  function  /  (z)  as  a  Weierstrassian  infinite 
product. 

Concerning  Triple  Systems.  Rendiconti  del 
Circolo  Matematico  di  Palermo,  IX  (1895), 
86. 

On  a  Theorem  Concerning  p-rowed  Character- 
istics with  Denominator  2.  Bulletin  of  the 
American  Mathematical  Society,  (2),  I 
(1895),  252-255. 

Concerning  Jordan's  Linear  Groups.  Ibid.,  (2), 
II  (1895),  33-43. 

Determination  of  Jordan's  linear  homogeneous  substi- 
tution group  of  degree  p"  as  the  group  of  holoedric  trans- 
formation into  itself  of  the  abelian  group  of  order  p» 
and  of  type  (1, 1  .  .  .  .1).  Determination  of  this  group 
and  its  associated  linear  and  linear-fractional  groups 
as  the  groups  leaving  invariant  respectively  certain 
three  tactical  configurations. 

A  Doubly-Infinite  System  of  Simple  Groups. 
Mathematical  Papers  read  at  the  Interna- 
tional Mathematical  Congress  held  in 
connection  with  the  World^s  Columbian 
Exposition,  Chicago,  1893.  Papers  Pub- 
lished by  the  American  Mathematical  So- 
ciety, I  (1896),  208-242. 

The  latter  is  the  complete  paper  of  which  the  abstract 
was  published  in  1893. 

A  Twofold  Generalization  of  Fermat's  Theorem. 
Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathematical 
Society  (2),  III  (1896),  189-199. 

Fermat's  theorem  that  modulo  p  a  prime  bP  and  6  are 
congruent,  where  b  is  any  integer,  may  be  stated  thus : 
The  two  binary  forms,  the  determinant  XoX^  —  x^x^, 
and  the  product 

X,  (a:,  +Xo)  (X,  -f  2 Xo)  .  .  .  (X,  -f  (p  - 1)  Xo)  .  Xo  , 
are  in  the  letters  Xo  x,  formally  congruent  modulo  p. 
This  statement  (for  Xg  =  1)  and  its  generalization  from 
the  system  of  p  integers  modulo  p  to  the  system  of  p" 
marks  of  the  Galois  field  of  rank  n  are  well  known. 
An  additional  concurrent  generalization  is  effected  by 
the  use  of  suitable  determinant  and  product  forms  in 
any  number  I  of  letters  (i  >  1). 

Tactical  Memoranda,  I-III.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Mathematics,  XVII  (1896),  264- 
303. 

General  definitions  with  many  examples. 

Concerning  Transcendentally  Transcendental 
Functions.  Mathematische  Annalen, 
XLVIII  (1896),  49-74. 

Definitions  and  fundamental  properties  connected  with 
the  notion  of  a  function-theoretic  realm  of  rationality. 


74 


Publications 


Anew  proof  of  Holder's  theorem  that  every  analytic 
function  integral  <i>ix),  *l>  (x)  of  the  respective  func- 
tional equations 

<I>(X  +  1)=<I,(X)+K    ^^ix  +  l)  =  X^t>(x) 

satisfies  no  algebraic  differential  equation  whose  coef- 
ficients are  rational  functions  of  x,  that  is,  is  a  tran- 
scendentally  transcendental  function  with  respect  to 
the  realm  of  rationality  R  [x].  Exhibition  of  two  new 
transcendentally  transcendental  functions  with  respect 
to  the  respective  realms  B  [x,  log  x],  B  [x,  e"]. 

Concerning  the  Abstract  Groups  of  Order  k ! 
and  ^k!  Holohedrically  Isomorphic  with 
the  Symmetric  and  the  Alternating  Substi- 
tution-Groups on  k  Letters.  Proceedings 
of  the  London  Mathematical  Society, 
XXVIII  (1897),  357-366. 

Abstract  generational  determinations  of  the  symmetric 
and  alternating  substitution  groups. 

The  Decomposition  of  Modular  Systems  of 
Rank  n  in  n  Variables.  Bulletin  of  the 
American  Mathematical  Society,  (2)  III 
(1897),  372-380. 

Kronecker  in  1882  established  certain  theorems  con- 
cerning the  decomposition  of  modular  systems  of  rank 
n  in  n  variables  with  non-vanishing  discriminant,  this 
decomposition  depending  upon  the  equivalence  of  the 
modular  system  with  the  modular  system  whose  ele- 
ments are  the  coefficients  of  the  resolvant  form  of  the 
first  system.  The  paper  establishes  by  purely  arith- 
metic process,  and  whether  or  not  the  discriminant 
vanishes,  the  decomposition  of  the  two  modular  sys- 
tems_  in  question,  in  such  a  way  that  in  case  the  dis- 
criminant does  not  vanish,  the  two  systems  are  thereby 
recognized  as  equivalent. 

Concerning  Regular  Triple  Systems.  Ibid., 
(2),  IV  (1897),  11-16. 

Triple  systems  whose  substitution  groups  are  regular 
groups  with  specified  abstract  group>-theoretic  proper- 
ties. 

A  Universal  Invariant  for  Finite  Groups  of 
Linear  Substitutions:  With  Application  in 
the  Theory  of  the  Canonical  Form  of  the 
Linear  Substitution  of  Finite  Period.  Mathe- 
matische  Annalen,  L  (1896),  213-219. 

A  finite  group  of  n-arv  linear  homogeneous  substi- 
tutions leaves  absolutely  invariant  an  n-ary  positive 
Hermitian  form  which  by  proper  linear  transformation 
of  the  group  is  a;,  a;,  4-  .  .  .  .  -\-xnXn.  This  theorem 
(discovered  also  by  Loewy  and  Fuchs)  generalizes  one 
of  Klein's  for  the  case  n  =  2. 

Concerning  Abelian  Regular  Transitive  Triple 
Systems.    Ibid.,  L  (1898),  225-240. 

Triple  systems  whose  substitution  groups  are  regular 
groups  with  specified  abstract  group-theoretic  proper- 
ties. 

Concerning  the  General  Equations  of  the  Sev- 
enth and  Eighth  Degrees.  Ibid.,  LI  (1898), 
417-444. 

A  purely  tactical  group-theoretic  discussion  of  the  in- 
terrelations of  the  general  equation  of  the  eighth  degree 
after  the  adjunction  of  the  square  root  of  its  discrimi- 
nant and  its  total  resolvant  equation  of  the  fifteenth 


degree,  and  likewise  of  the  interrelations  of  the  gen- 
eral equation  of  the  seventh  degree  after  the  adjunc- 
tion of  the  square  root  of  its  discriminant  and  its  total 
resolvant  equation  of  the  fifteenth  degree.  The  holo- 
edric  isomorphism  of  the  alternating  group  on  eight 
letters  and  the  linear  homogeneous  quaternary  congru- 
ence group  modulo  2.  Theory  of  the  Kirkman  fifteen 
school-^irls  problem  connected  with  the  linear  triple 
system  in  fifteen  elements. 

On  Certain  Crinkly  Curves.  Transactions  of 
the  American  Mathematical  Society,  I 
(1900),  72-90. 

Investigation  by  interplaying  graphic  and  analytic 
methods  of  the  continuous  surface-filling  curves  of 
Peano  and  Hilbert  and  of  the  continuous  tangentless 
curves  connected  with  Peano's  curve.  Either  of  the 
latter  curves  meets  every  ordinate  in  one  point,  has  at  no 
point  a  progressive  or  a  regressive  non-vertical  tangent, 
and  has  at  no  point  both  a  progressive  and  a  regressive 
vertical  tangent.  The  points  at  which  it  has  either  a  pro- 
gressive or  a  regressive  vertical  tangent  are  definitely 
characterized  by  the  presence  in  the  base  3  development 
of  their  abscissae  of  definite  limit  properties.  Com- 
parison of  its  tangential  properties  with  those  of  the 
standard  Weierstrass  curve. 

A  Simple  Proof  of  the  Fundamental  Cauchy- 
Goursat  Theorem.    Ibid.,  499-506. 

Simplification  of  Goursat's  proof  of  the  Cauchy-Gour- 
sat  theorem  with  respect  to  boundary  curves  inclosing 
a  simply  connected  region,  the  curves  being  supposed 
to  satisfy  a  certain  general  condition  satisfied  in  par- 
ticular by  the  usual  curves  of  integration. 

The  Cross-Ratio  Group  of  n !  Cremona  Trans- 
formations of  Order  n-3  in  Flat  Space  of 
n-3  Dimensions.  American  Journal  of 
Mathematics,  XXIII  (1900),  279-291. 

The  binary  n-ic  form  has  as  an  absolute  irrational  invari- 
ant the  cross-ratio  of  any  four  of  its  roots.  These  cross- 
ratios  are  expressible  rationally  in  terms  of  any  n-3 
independent  ones.  If  any  particular  system  of  ii-3  inde- 
pendent ratios  be  associated  with  a  particular  order  of 
the  n  roots,  by  varying  the  order  of  the  n  roots,  we 
shall  have  in  all  n!  conjugate  systems:  these  systems 
are  expressible  rationally  in  terms  of  the  original  sys- 
tem, and  exactly  so  in  terms  of  any  system  of  the  set. 
Hence  arises,  to  speak  geometrically,  a  group  of  n! 
Cremona  transformations  in  flat  space  of  n-3  dimen- 
sions. The  various  Cremona  groups  so  obtained  from 
the  various  initial  systems  are  Cremona  transforma- 
tions of  one  another.  One  of  the  simplest  of  these  Cre- 
mona groups  is  studied  in  this  paper.  It  is  projectively 
determined  in  flat  space  of  n-3  dimensions  by  a  set  of 
n-1  independent  points.  The  fixed  points  of  the  trans- 
formations are  related  to  binary  n-ic  forms  with  trans- 
formations into  themselves. 

Concerning  Klein's  Group  of  (w-f-1)!  w-ary 
Collineations.    Ibid.,  336-342. 

Determination  for  six  well-known  geometric  forms  of 
the  abstract  symmetric  group  on  n  letters  of  the  corre- 
sponding partitions  of  the  respective  spaces  into  n! 
regions.  Application  to  the  generational  determina- 
tion of  the  abstract  symmetric  and  alternating  groups. 

A  Fundamental  Remark  Concerning  Deter- 
minantal  Notations  with  the  Evaluation  of 
an  Important  Determinant  of  Special  Form. 
Annals  of  Mathematics,  (2),  I  (1900),  177- 

188. 

A  determinant  of  order  t  is  uniquely  defined  by  the 
unique  definition  of  its  t'  elements  in  the  form  auv 
where  the  suffixes  «  v  run  independently  over  any  (the 
same)  set  of  t  distinct  marks  of  any  description  what- 
ever (and  not  necessarily  the  set  t  =  1,  2,  ....  ,  n). 


Depabtment  op  Mathematics 


75 


Concerning  du  Bois-Reymond's  Two  Relative 
Integrability  Theorems.  Ibid.,  II  (1901), 
153-158. 

"A  continuous  function  of  properly  integrable  functions 
is  integrable."  Extension  of  the  realm  of  values  of  the 
limit  and  sum.  "An  integrable  function  of  an  integ- 
rable function  is  integrable."  Proof  by  exhibition  of 
a  simple  example  that  this  statement  is  incorrect. 

Concerning  Hamack's  Theory  of  Improper 
Definite  Integrals.  Transactions  of  the 
American  Mathematical  Society,  II  (1901), 
296-330. 

Reconstruction  in  detail  of  the  elements  of  Hamack's 
theory  of  improper  definite  integrals. 

On  the  Theory  of  Improper  Definite  Integrals. 
Ibid.,  459-475. 

Critique  of  the  four  current  types  of  improper  definite 
integrals.  Exhibition  of  a  system  of  types  containing 
these  four  types.  The  elements  of  the  theory  of  the 
general  type. 

On  the  Projective  Axioms  of  Geometry.  Ibid., 
Ill  (1902),  142-158. 

Exhibition  of  a  new  system  of  projective  axioms  of 
geometry.  Development  of  the  theory,  especially  with 
respect  to  the  order-relations  of  four  collinear  points, 
to  fc-dimensional  flat  loci  or  fc-spaces  and  to  the  figure 
determined  by  fc  +  1  independent  points  in  a  fc-space. 
Proof  of  the  redundancy  in  Hilbert's  system  of  projec- 
tive axioms  I,  II  of  the  axiom  II  4.  Determination  of 
the  rOle  in  that  system  of  the  axioms  I  3, 1  4, 1  5. 

The  Subgroups  of  the  Generalized  Finite 
Modular  Group.  Article  in  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  IX. 


OsKAB  BoLZA  [1893 — ],  Professor  of 
Mathematics. 

Ueber  Kronecker's  Definition  der  Gruppe  einer 
Gleichung.  Mathematische  Annalen,  XLII 
(1893),  253-256. 

A  discussion  of  the  connection  between  Kronecker's 
definition  of  the  group  of  an  equation  as  given  in 
Crelle's  Journal,  XCII,  and  the  definitions  of  Galois 
and  Jordan, 

Ueber  die  linearen  Relationen  zwischen  den  zu 
verschiedenen  singularen  Puncten  gehO- 
rigen  Fundamentalsystemen  von  Integralen 
der  Riemann'schen  Differentialgleichung. 
Ibid.,  525-536. 

The  object  of  the  paper  is  to  obtain  the  relations  in 
question  in  a  symmetric  form  and  to  simplify  them  as 
much  as  possible  by  a  proper  normalization  of  the 
fundamental  integrals. 

On  the  Transformation  of  Linear  Differential 
Equations  of  the  Second  Order  with  Linear 


Coefficients.  American  Journal  of  Mathe- 
matics, XV  (1893),  26^273. 

Reduction  of  the  differential  equations  in  question  to 
canonical  forms  by  invariantive  methods. 

On  Weierstrass's  Systems  of  Hyperelliptic 
Integrals  of  the  First  and  Second  Kind. 
Chicago  Mathematical  Congress  Papers, 
1893,  1-12. 

An  exposition  of  the  theory  of  these  integrals  based  on 
Riemann's  methods. 

Ueber  das  Analogon  der  Function  p  u  im  all- 
gemeinen  hyperelliptischen  Fall.  Gottinger 
Nachrichten,  mathematisch-physicahsche 
Klasse,  1894,  268-271. 

On  the  First  and  Second  Logarithmic  Deriva- 
tives of  Hyperelliptic  o-Functions.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Mathematics,  XVII  (1895), 
11-36. 

In  these  two  papers  some  theorems  concerning  the 
functions  i  u  and  p  u  are  extended  to  hyperelliptic  func- 
tions. 

Die  cubische  Involution  und  die  Dreiteilung 
tmd  Transformation  dritter  Ordnimg  der 
elliptischen  Functionen.  Mathematische 
Annalen,  L  (1897),  68-102. 

An  investigation  of  the  connection  between  the  theory 
of  the  Cubic  Involution  and  the  theory  of  Elliptic  Func- 
tions based  upon  the  interpretation  of  the  cubic  involu- 
tion upon  a  conic. 

Zur  Reduction  hyperelhptischer  Integrale  auf 
elliptische  mittels  einer  Transformation 
dritten  Grades.    Ibid.,  314-324. 

Solution  of  the  reduction-problem  p  =  2,  fc  =  3  inde- 
pendently of  a  canonical  form  by  means  of  theorems  on 
cubic  involutions. 

The  Partial  differential  Equations  for  the 
Hyperelliptic  6-  and  o-Functions.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Mathematics,  XXI  (1899), 
107-125. 

The  object  of  the  paper  is  to  establish  Wiltheiss's  re- 
sults concerning  the  partial  differential  equations  of 
the  hyi)erelliptic  0.  and  <r-functions  by  simpler  and  more 
direct  methods. 

Proof  of  Brioschi's  Recursion  Formula  for  the 
Expansion  of  the  Even  o-Functions  of 
Two  Variables.    /Wd.,  175-190. 

Remarks  Concerning  the  Expansions  of  the 
Hyperelhptic  or-Functions.  Ibid.,  XXII 
(1900),  101-112. 

Supplement  to  the  two  preceding  articles. 


76 


Publications 


The  Elliptic  o-Functions  Considered  as  a 
Special  Case  of  the  Hyperelliptic  o-F  unc- 
tions. Transactions  of  the  American 
Mathematical  Society,  I  (1900),  53-65. 

A  sketch  of  the  theory  of  elliptic  o--fanctions  based  npon 
the  theory  of  associated  integrals  of  the  first,  second, 
and  third  kind ;  in  particular,  invariantive  treatment 
of  the  expansions  of  the  a-functions. 

New  Proof  of  a  Theorem  of  Osgood's  in  the 
Calculus  of  Variations.  Ibid.,  II  (1901), 
422-427. 

The  theorem  in  question  is  the  one  published  in  Trans- 
actions of  the  Avterican  Mathematical  Society,  II  (1901), 
273-295. 

Concerning  the  Geodesic  Curvature  and  the 
Isoperimetric  Problem  on  a  Given  Surface. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  IX,  11-18. 

Proof  of  the  SuflSciency  of  Jacobi's  Condition 
for  a  Permanent  Sign  of  the  Second  Varia- 
tion in  the  So-called  Isoperimetric  Prob- 
lems.   Ibid.,  19-25. 

Reviews  of 

Netto,  Theory  of  Substitution,  translated  by 
Dr.  Cole.  Bulletin  of  the  New  York  Mathe- 
matical Society,  II  (1893),  83-106. 

Harkness  and  Morley,  Introduction  to  the 
Theory  of  Analytic  Functions.  Bulletin  of 
the  American  Mathematical  Society,  VI 
(1900),  63-74. 


Heinrich  Maschke  [1892 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Mathematics. 

The  Invariants  of  a  Group  of  2.168  Linear 
Quaternary  Substitutions.  Chicago  Mathe- 
matical Congress  Papers,  (1893),  175-186. 

In  the  theory  of  Jacobian  modular  equations  of  the  8th 
degree  there  is  of  paramount  interest  a  group  O  of 
2.168  linear  quaternary  substitutions  which  is  isomor- 
phic with  the  Galois-group  of  the  modular  equation. 
This  group  occurs  again  as  a  subgroup  of  a  group  de- 
rived by  Klein  from  line-geometry,  consisting  of  7 1  lin- 
ear quaternary  substitutions.  The  paper  is  devoted  to 
the  investigation  of  the  invariants  of  this  quaternary 
group  Q. 

On  Ternary  Substitution-Groups  of  Finite 
Order  which  leave  a  Triangle  unchanged. 
American  Journal  of  Mathematics,  XVII 
(1894),  168-184. 

An  investigation  of  certain  ternary  monomial  groups, 
esi>ecially  the  determination  of  their  invariant  forms. 


On  Systems  of  Six  Points  lying  in  Three  Ways 
in  Involution.  Annals  of  Mathematics,  X 
(1895),  22-34. 

Septuples  of  points  of  the  above  kind  occur  in  the 
theory  of  the  dihedron  for  n  =  3,  in  multiple  per- 
spective triangles,  in  Clebsch's  hexagon  and  other  geo- 
metrical and  analytic  researches.  Of  special  interest 
is  the  metharmonic  case,  where  the  6  points  are  such 
that  (15)  (24),  (26)  (35),  (34)  (16)  form  harmonic  quad- 
ruples. 

The  Representation  of  Finite  Groups,  especi- 
ally of  the  Rotation  Groups  of  the  Regular 
Bodies  of  Three-  and  Four-dimensional 
Space,  by  Cay  ley's  Color  Diagrams.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Mathematics,  XVIll  (1895), 
156-188. 

By  a  general  deduction,  based  principally  on  Analysis- 
situs-methods,  all  those  two-colored  color  groups  of  a 
finite  number  of  fundamental  points  whose  diagrams 
constitute  a  convex  polyhedron  on  the  sphere  are  de- 
termined in  the  paper.  The  diagrams  so  obtained  are 
closely  connected  with  the  regular  three-dimensional 
bodies.  An  extension  of  the  method  leads  to  some 
other  three-dimensional  figures  and  to  the  four-dimen- 
sional regular  bodies. 

Ueber  die  Darstellimg  endlicher  Gruppen  durch 
Cayley'sche  Farbendiagramme.  Nachrich- 
ten  der  koniglichen  Gesellschaft  der  Wis- 
senschaften  zu  Gottingen,  mathematisch- 
physikalische  Klasse,  1896,  Heft  1, 1-5. 

Asymptotic  Lines  on  a  Circular  Ring.  Bulle- 
tin of  the  American  Mathematical  Society 
(2),  II  (1895),  19-21. 

The  equation  of  the  asymptotic  lines  of  a  tore  as  well 
as  the  expression  of  the  length  of  the  arc  of  these  curves 
leads  to  elliptic  functions.  The  formulas  appear  in  a 
remarkably  simple  form,  if  Weierstrass's  notation  is 
used. 

Die  Reduction  linearer  homogener  Substitu- 
tionen  von  endlicher  Periode  auf  ihre  kano- 
nische  Form.  Mathematische  Annalen,  L 
(1897),  220-224. 

Ueber  den  arithmetischen  Character  der  Co- 
efficienten  der  Substitutionen  endlicher 
linearer  Substitutionsgruppen.  Ibid.,  492- 
498. 

A  theorem  is  proved  in  the  paper  which  gives  some 
insight  into  the  nature  of  irrationalities  entering  into 
the  coefficients  of  the  groups  in  question. 

Bestimmung  aller  ternarer  und  quaternarer 
Collineationsgruppen,  welche  mit  symme- 
trischen  und  alternirenden  Buchstabenver- 
tauschungsgruppen  holoedrisch  isomorph 
sind.    Ibid.,  LI,  253-298. 

The  method  is  based  upon  the  generators  of  the  ab- 
stract letter-permutation-groups  and  upon  the  repre- 
sentation of  substitution-groups  in  the  Mormitian  nor- 


Department  op  Mathematics 


77 


mal  form.  All  known  groups  are  obtained  in  a  simple 
form,  and  the  imryossibility  of  existence  of  ternary  and 
quaternary  groups  of  higher  orders  is  proved. 

Beweis  des  Satzes,  dass  diejenigen  endlichen 
linearen  Substitutionsgruppen,  in  welchen 
einige  durchgehend  verschwindende  Coef- 
ficienten  auftreten,  intransitiv  sind.  Ibid., 
LII  (1898),  359-368. 

The  theorem  is  proved  in  the  paper  that  under  the  con- 
ditions mentioned  in  the  title  every  substitution  of 
the  groups  can  be  broken  up  into  at  least  two  sets  of 
substitutions,  each  set  containing  variables  which  are 
substituted  only  among  themselves. 

Note  on  the  Unilateral  Surface  of  Moebius. 
Transactions  of  the  American  Mathemat- 
ical Society,  I  (1900),  39. 

A  ruled  surface  of  the  third  order  is  constructed,  con- 
taining as  a  part  the  unilateral  paper-strip  of  Moebius. 

A  New  Method  of  Determining  the  Diflferen- 
tial  Parameters  and  Invariants  of  Quadratic 
Differential  Quantities.    Ibid.,  197-204. 

A  symbolic  method  is  given,  in  close  analogy  with  the 
symbolism  used  in  the  algebraic  theory  of  invariants. 

Invariants  and  Covariants  of  Quadratic  Diffe- 
rential Quantities  of  n  Variables.  Article 
in  The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial 
Publications,  First  Series,  IX. 

The  symbolic  method  given  in  the  previous  paper  is 
develo_ped  in  detail  for  the  case  of  n  variables.  The 
most  inaportant  result  is  the  symbolic  expression  of 
Christoffel's  quadrilinear  covariant. 

Review  of 

Harkness  and  Morley,  A  Treatise  on  the  The- 
ory of  Functions.  Bulletin  of  the  New 
York  Mathematical  Society,  III  (1894), 
155-167. 


Jacob  William  Albebt  Young  [1892 — ], 
Assistant  Professor  of  the  Pedagogy  of 
Mathematics. 

The  Elements  of  the  Differential  and  Integral 
Calculus.  In  collaboration  with  C.  E.  Line- 
barger.  8vo,  xvii  -\-  410.  New  York,  D.  Ap- 
pleton  &  Co.,  1900. 

Based  on  "  Kurzgefasstes  Lehrbuch  der_  Differential 
und  Int         '      ■ 
A.  SchO 


und  Integralrechnung,"  by  Professors  W.  Nemst  and 
"es,  of  the  University  of  GOttingen. 

The  Teaching  of  Mathematics  in  the  Higher 
Schools  of  Prussia.  8vo,  xiv  +  141.  New 
York,  Longmans,  Green  &  Co.,  1900. 

A  brief  sketch  of  the  general  organization  of  these 
schools,  their  curricula  and  the  training  of  their  teach- 
ers, together  with  a  more  detailed  consideration  of  the 
scope  and  methods  of  the  instruction  in  mathematics. 


On  the  Determination  of  Groups  whose  Order 
is  a  Power  of  a  Prime.  American  JouTmal 
of  Mathematics,  XV  (1893),  124r-178. 

A  general  method  applied  in  the  determination  of  all 
groups  of  orders  p'',  p',  &ndp*. 

Zur  mathematischen  Lehrbucherfrage.  Eine 
Schulstatistische  Untersuchung.  Zeitschrift 
fur  mathematischen  und  naturwissenchaft- 
lichen  Unterricht,  XXIX  (1898),  410-414. 

Concerning  the  text-books  in  mathematics  in  use  in 
the  Prussian  higher  schools. 

The  Undergraduate  Mathematical  Curriculum. 
Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathematical 
Society  (2),  VII  (1900),  22-24. 

Concerning  the  collegiate  preparation  of  prospective 
teachers  of  mathematics  in  secondary  schools. 

Reviews  of 

Bachmann,  Die  Elemente  der  Zahlentheorle, 
Bulletin  of  the  New  York  Mathematical 
Society,  III  (1894),  215-222. 

Borel  et  Drach,  Introduction  h  I'^tude  de  la 
th6orie  des  nombres  et  de  I'alg^bre  sup6ri- 
eure.  Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathe- 
matical Society  (2),  III  (1896),  97-105. 

Lagrange,  Lectures  on  Elementary  Mathe- 
matics, translated  by  Thomas  J.  McCormack. 
Ibid.,  VI  (1899),  262-264. 


Heebebt  Ellswobth  Slaught  [1894 — ], 
Assistant  Professor  of  Collegiate  Math- 
ematics. 

The  Cross-Ratio  Group  of  120  Quadratic  Cre- 
mona Transformations  of  the  Plane.  Part  I, 
Geometric  Representation.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Mathematics,  XXII  (1900),  343-388. 

A  study  in  detail  for  the  case  n  =  5  of  the  general  cross- 
ratio  group  Gn!,  in  particular  the  divison  of  the  plane 
into  fundamental  regions. 

The  Cross-Ratio  Group  of  120  Quadratic  Cre- 
mona Transformations  of  the  Plane.  Part  II, 
Complete  Form-System  of  Invariants. 
Ibid.,  XXIII  (1901),  99-138.  Parts  I  and  II 
together  reprinted  as  doctor's  thesis. 

*  The  definition  and  properties  of  invariants  under  quad- 
ratic transformation  and  a  complete  determination  of 
the  form-system  of  such  invariants  under  Gn!, 


78 


Publications 


Leonard  Eugene  Dickson  [1894-96; 
1900 — ] ,  Assistant  Professor  of  Mathe- 
matics. 

Linear  Groups  with  an  Exposition  of  the  Ga- 
lois Field  Theory.  8vo,  x  +  312.  Teub- 
ner's  Sammlung  von  Lehrbiichem  auf  dem 
Gebiete  der  mathematischen  Wissenschaf  ten 
mit  Einschluss  ihrer  Anwendungen,  Band 
VI.     Leipzig,  B.  G.  Teubner,  1901. 

Part  I  gives  an  exposition  of  the  chief  properties  of 
finite  fields  and  incorporates,  usually  in  generalized 
fotm,  the  work  of  Galois,  Dedekind,  Serret,  Jordan, 
Pellet,  Moore,  and  Dickson.  Part  II  presents  a  syste- 
matic treatment  of  the  theory  of  linear  groups  in  a 
Galois  field.  Aside  from  chapter  xii,  which  presents 
tho  investigations  of  Moore  and  Wiman  on  the  sub- 
groups of  the  linear  fractional  group,  the  subject-mat- 
ter is  drawn  from  the  writer's  published  articles,  among 
which  occur  generalizations  of  the  work  of  earlier 
writers  on  the  subject,  as  well  as  new  developments. 

College  Algebra.    A  text-book  for  colleges  and 

technical  schools.  Svo,  vii -f- 214.   New  York, 

John  Wiley  &  Sons,  1902. 
Lowest  Integers  Representing  Sides  of  a  Right 

Triangle.  Arnerican  Mathematical  Monthly, 

I  (1894),  6-11. 

On  the  Number  of  Inscriptible  Regular  Poly- 
gons. Bulletin  of  the  New  York  Mathe- 
matical Society,  III  (1894),  123-125. 

The  Inscription  of  Regular  Polygons.  Ameri- 
can Mathematical  Monthly,  I  (1894),  299- 
301,  342-345,  376-377,  423-425;  II  (1895), 
7-9,  38^0. 

An  elementary  treatment  of  the  subject  without  the  use 
of  the  customary  complex  numbers. 

On  the  Inscription  of  Regular  Polygons.  An- 
nals of  Mathematics,  IX  (1894-95),  73-84. 

This  treatment  avoids,  not  only  complex  numbers,  but 
also  trigonometry,  being  based  solely  upon  geometrical 
principles. 

Gergonne's  Pile  Problem.  Bulletin  of  the 
American  Mathematical  Society,  I  (1895), 
184^186. 

Some  Fallacies  of  an  Angle  Trisector.  Ameri- 
can Mathematical  Monthly,  11(1895),  71-72. 

Cyclic  Numbers.  Quarterly  Journal  of  Pure 
and  Applied  Mathematics,  XXVII  (1895), 
366-377. 

The  paper  determines  all  numbers  of  D  digits,  when 
written  to  any  given  base,  which  possess  D  distinct 
multiples  whose  digits  are  precisely  those  of  the  initial 
number  and  in  the  same  cyclic  order. 


A  Quadratic  Cremona  Transformation  Defined 
by  a  Conic.  American  Mathematical 
Monthly,  II  (1895),  218-221. 

A  Quadratic  Cremona  Transformation  Defined 
by  a  Conic.  Rendiconti  del  Circolo  Mate- 
matico  di  Palermo,  IX  (1895),  1-4. 

The  two  preceding  papers  give  respectively  an  analytic 
and  projective  treatment  of  a  birational  point-trans- 
formation of  the  plane  which  is  defined  by  means  of 
Pascal's  theorem  on  a  hexagon  inscribed  in  a  conic. 
The  corresponding  line-transformation  is  defined  by 
means  of  Brianchon's  theorem  on  a  hexagon  circum- 
scribed about  a  conic. 

Analytic  Functions  Suitable  to  Represent  Sub- 
stitutions. American  Journal  of  Mathe- 
matics, XVIII  (1896),  210-218. 

Previously  Betti  and  Hermite  had  obtained  analytic 
representations  of  all  substitutions  on  5  and  7  letters. 
Attacking  the  problem  from  a  different  point  of  view, 
the  writer  determined  all  functions  of  degree  less  than 
7  which  are  suitable  to  represent  substitutions  on  p 
letters,  p  being  a  prime  number. 

The  Analytic  Representation  of  Substitutions 
on  a  Power  of  a  Prime  Number  of  Letters, 
with  a  Discussion  of  the  Linear  Group. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Annals  of  Mathematics, 
XI  (1896-97),  65-120, 161-183. 

By  employing  the  general  Galois  Field,  a  generaliza- 
tion of  Hermite's  theorem  is  obtained.  By  its  aid  and 
certain  devices,  a  complete  determination  is  made  of 
all  quantics  of  degree  less  than  7  which  are  suitable  to 
represent  substitutions  on  pn  letters  (for  a  particular 
or  general  integer  »  and  prime  number  p),  with  the  ex- 
ception of  sextics  for  2"  letters.  As  many  as  24  such 
quantics  are  found,  of  which  the  majority  are  limited 
to  certain  values  of  p«,  while  others  possess  an  infinite 
range  of  suitability.  The  second  part  deals  with  the 
linear  homogeneous  group  in  a  Galois  field  and  ex- 
hibits a  triply-infinite  system  of  simple  groups  which 
includes  as  special  cases  the  two  doubly-infinite  sys- 
tems of  E.  H.  Moore  and  of  C.  Jordan,  respectively. 

Linear  Substitutions  Commutative  with  a  Given 
Substitution.  Proceedings  of  the  London 
Mathematical  Society,  XXXII  (1900),  165- 
170. 

Determination  of  an  Abstract  Simple  Group  of 
Order  2'. 3®. 5.7  Holoedrically  Isomorphic 
with  a  certain  Orthogonal  Group  and  with 
a  certain  Hyperabelian  Group.  Transac- 
tions of  the  American  Mathematical  So- 
ciety, I  (1900),  353-370. 

The  Alternating  Group  on  Eight  Letters  and 
the  Quaternary  Linear  Congruence  Group 
Modulo  Two.  Mathematische  Annalen, 
LIV  (1901),  564r-569. 


Department  op  Mathematics 


79 


Distribution  of  the  Ternary  Linear  Homogen- 
eous Substitutions  in  a  Galois  Field  into 
Complete  Sets  of  Conjugate  Substitutions. 
American  Journal  of  Mathematics^  XXIII 
(1901),  37-40. 

A  sequel  to  an  earlier  paper,  ibid.,  XXII  (1900),  121-137. 

Canonical  Forms  of  Quaternary  Abelian  Sub- 
stitutions in  an  Arbitrary  Galois  Field. 
Transactions  of  the  American  Mathemat- 
ical Society,  II  (1901),  lOa-138. 

Concerning  the  Abelian  and  Related  Linear 
Groups.  Proceedings  of  the  London  Mathe- 
matical Society,  XXXIII  (1901),  313-325. 

Concerning  Real  and  Complex  Continuous 
Groups.  Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathe- 
matical Society,  VII  (1901),  340-350. 

Th6orie  des  groupes  lin6aires  dans  im  domains 
arbitraire  de  rationaMt6.  Comptes  rendus 
des  stances  de  V Academic  des  Sciences, 
CXXXII  (1901),  1547-1548. 

A  r6sum6  of  two  memoirs  presented  to  the  American 
and  London  Mathematical  Societies,  in  which  is  de- 
veloped a  theory  of  linear  groups  in  an  arbitrary  field, 
finite  or  infinite,  and,  in  particular,  exhibiting  systems 
of  simple  groups  which  include  Lie's  systems  as  special 
cases. 

Representation  of  Linear  Groups  as  Transitive 
Substitution  Groups.  American  Journal 
of  Mathematics,  XXIII  (1901),  337-377. 

A  general  method  is  obtained  and  applied  to  the  gen- 
eral linear  group,  the  orthogonal  groups,  the  abelian 
linear  group,  and  the  two  hypoabslian  groups,  as  well 
as  to  their  simple  quotient-groups.  For  each  group  is 
determined  the  minimum  number  of  letters  for  the  vari- 
ous representations  obtained. 

Theory  of  Linear  Groups  in  an  Arbitrary  Field. 
Transactions  of  the  American  Mathemat- 
ical Society,  II  (1901),  363-394. 

The  paper  lays  the  foundation  of  a  general  theory 
which  correlates  various  branches  of  analytic  group 
theory.  It  exhibits  four  infinite  systems  of  groups 
which  give  simple  groups  in  every  field.  For  the  par- 
ticular case  of  the  field  of  all  complex  numbers,  they 
become  the  simple  continuous  groups  of  Sophus  Lie. 

Linear  Groups  in  an  Infinite  Field.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  London  Mathematical  Society, 
XXXIV  (1901),  185-205. 

The  paper  obtains  two  new  infinite  systems  of  simple 
groups  in  an  arbitrary  field,  related  to  the  hyperabe- 
lian  groups  and  a  system  of  groups  defined  by  a  certain 
invariant  quadratic  form. 

A  Class  of  Groups  in  an  Arbitrary  Realm  Con- 
nected with  the  Configuration   of  the  27 


Lines  on  a  Cubic  Surface.  Quarterly  Jour- 
nal of  Mathematics,  XXXIII  (1901),  145- 
173. 

For  the  case  of  continuous  field,  the  group  is  the  isola- 
ted, simple,  continuous  group  of  78  parameters  previ- 
ously studied  by  Killing,  Engel,  and  Cartan. 

The  Known  Systems  of  Simple  Groups  and 
their  Inter- Isomorphisms.  Comptes  rendus 
des  travaux  dii  Congrhs  international  des 
Mathimaticiens,  1901. 

The  Configurations  of  the  27  Lines  on  a  Cubic 
Surface  and  the  28  Bitangents  to  a  Quartic 
Curve.  Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathe- 
matical Society,  VIII  (1901),  63-70. 

On  Systems  of  Isothermal  Curves.  American 
Mathematical  Monthly,  VIII  (1901),  187- 
192. 

Factors  of  a  Certain  Determinant  of  Order  Six. 

Ibid.,  IX  (1902),  66-68. 
The  Order  of  a  Senary  Linear  Group.    Ihid., 

14&-152. 

The  Hyperorthogonal  Groups.  Mathematische 
AnnaUn,  LV  (1902),  521-572. 

Various  representations  are  obtained  for  this  group 
and  its  simple  quotient-group  as  a  transitive  substitu- 
tion-group. The  characteristic  equation  of  a  hyperor- 
thogonal substitution  is  investigated  at  length.  The 
results  are  applied  to  the  reduction  of  hyperorthogonal 
substitutions  to  canonical  forms  within  the  group. 

Canonical  Form  of  a  Linear  Homogeneous 
Transformation  in  an  Arbitrary  Realm  of 
Rationality.  American  Journal  of  Mathe- 
matics, XXIV  (1902),  101-108. 

The  Groups  of  Steiner  in  Problems  of  Contact. 
Transactions  of  the  American  Mathemati- 
cal Society,  III  (1902),  38-45. 

On  the  Group  Defined  for  any  Given  Field  by 
the  Multiplication  Table  of  any  Given 
Finite  Group.    Ibid.,  285-301. 

A  generalization  of  Burnside's  work  for  continuous 
frroups  leads  to  an  analogous  theory  of  groups  in  an 
arbitrary  field,  and  the  investigation  depends  only  upon 
rational  processes. 

Theorems  on  the  Residues  of  Multinomial 
Coeflficients  with  Respect  to  a  Prime  Mo- 
dulus. Quarterly  Journal  of  Mathematics, 
XXXIII  (1902),  378-384. 

A  Class  of  Simply  Transitive  Linear  Groups. 
Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathematical 
Society,  VIII  (1902),  394-401. 


80 


Publications 


Ternary  Orthogonal  Groups  in  a  General  Field. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications^ First  Series,  IX,  27-34. 

An  investigation  for  an  arbitrary  field  (realm  of  ration- 
ality) of  a  subject  previously  treated  for  a  continuous 
field  by  Weber,  and  for  a  Galois  field  by  the  writer. 

The  Groups  Defined  for  a  General  Field  by 
the  Rotation  Group.    Ibid.,  35-52. 

A  contribution  to  the  theory  of  group-determinants  and 
group-characters  due  to  Frobenius  and  Burnside  for 
continuous  fields,  and  to  the  writer  for  arbitrary  fields. 

Review  of 

Cahen,  Elements  de  la  th6orie  des  nombres. 

Bulletin  of  the  American  Mathematical 

Society,  VII  (1902),  257-260. 

James  Harrington  Boyd  [1893 — ],  In- 
structor in  Mathematics. 

Briot  and  Bouquet's  Elements  of  Analytical 
Geometry  of  Two  Dimensions.  Fourteenth 
edition,  translated  and  edited.  8vo,  581. 
New  York,  Werner  School  Book  Co.,  1896. 

A  College  Algebra.  8vo,  xxi  +  782.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1901. 

A  Study  of  Certain  Special  Cases  of  the  Hyper- 
geometric  Differential  Equation.  Annals 
of  Mathematics,  VII  (1893),  145-186. 

This  paper  presents  the  results  of  a  study  of  certain 
cases  of  the  hypergeometric  differential  equation  made 
at  GOttingen  under  the  direction  of  Professor  Klein. 
The  cases  are  those  in  which  the  hypergeometric  differ- 
ential equation  has  a  single  algebraic  solution.  The 
solutions  are  regarded  as  functions  defined  after  the 
manner  of  Riemann,  by  the  requirement  that  the  con- 
formal  representation  which  they  determine  be  certain 
generalized  triangles;  these  triangles  are  made  the 
starting  point  of  the  discussion  and  are  classified  geo- 
metrically, and  the  classification  of  the  equation  is 
determined  from  that  of  the  triangles. 

The  Determination  of  the  Apparent  Position 
of  the  Companion  of  a  Double  Star  from 
Certain  Observations.  Ibid.,  IX  (1895), 
85-87. 


Harris  Hancock  [1892-1900],  Instructor 
in  Mathematics;  Professor  of  Mathe- 
matics, University  of  Cincinnati. 

Eine  Form  des  Additionstheorems  fur  hyper- 
elliptische  Functionen  erster  Ordnung.  4to, 
43.    Berlin,  1894.    Berlin  doctor's  thesis. 


Reduction  of  Kronecker's  Modiilar  Systems. 
Quarterly  Journal  of  Mathematics,  XXVII 
(1895),  147-183. 

Introduction  and  General  Remarks  on  the  Cal- 
culus of  Variations.  Annals  of  Mathe- 
matics, IX  (1895),  179-190. 

Calculus  of  Variations,  II.  Ibid.,  X  (1896), 
81-88. 

On  the  Number  of  Catenaries  that  May  be 
Drawn  through  Two  Fixed  Points.  Ibid., 
159-174. 

On  Minimal  Surfaces.  Mathematical  Review, 
I  (1896),  81-87, 127-140. 

The  Historical  Development  of  the  Abelian 
Functions  up  to  the  Time  of  Rieman.  Or- 
dered by  the  General  Committee  of  the 
British  Association  for  the  Advancement  of 
Science.  Reports  of  the  British  Associa- 
tion for  the  Advancement  of  Science  (1897), 
246-286. 

Derivation  of  Some  of  the  Fundamental  Weier- 
strassian  Formulae  in  the  Calculus  of  Vari- 
ations. Annals  of  Mathematics,  XI  (1897), 
20-32. 

Further  Discussion  of  the  First  Variation  and 
the  Solution  of  the  Differential  Equation 
G—0  for  Several  Interesting  Examples. 
Ibid.,  XII  (1898),  33-44. 

Canonical  Forms  for  the  Unique  Represen- 
tation of  Kronecker's  Modular  Systems. 
Crelle's  Journal  fiir  reine  und  ange- 
wandte  Mathematik,  CXIX  (1898),  148- 
170. 

M6thode  de  decomposition  des  polynomea 
entiers  h  plusieurs  variables  en  facteurs 
irr^ductibles.  Annales  scientifiques  de 
VJ^cole  Normale  Supirieure  (3),  XVII 
(1900),  89-102. 

On  the  Reduction  of  Kronecker's  Modular  Sys- 
tems whose  Elements  are  Functions  of  Two 
or  Three  Variables.  Crelle's  Journal  fiir 
reine  und  angewandte  Mathematik,  CXXII 
(1900),  265-298. 

M6moire  sur  les  syst^mes  modulaires  de  Kron- 
ecker:  A  thesis  offered  for  the  Dr.  Sc.  degree 


Department  of  Mathematics 


81 


at  the  UniversiW  of  Paris.  Annates  scien- 
tifiques  de  VEcole  Normale  Supirieure, 
Supplement  1, 1-116. 

Remarks  on  Kronecker's  Modular  Systems. 
Comptes  rendus  des  travaux  du  Congr^s 
international  des  MatMmaticiens,  1900, 
161-193. 

Gilbert  Ames  Bliss,  Ph.D.  1900;  In- 
structor in  Mathematics,  University  of 
Minnesota. 

The  Motion  of  a  Heavenly  Body  in  a  Resisting 
Medium.  Popular  Astronomy,  VI  (1898), 
20-29. 

The  writer  assumed  a  law  of  resistance  and  showed 
that  for  that  law  the  position  of  the  orbit  plane  is  un- 
changed under  resistance ;  the  direction  of  the  major 
axis  and  the  mean  epoch  oscillate :  and  that  the  major 
axis  and  eccentricity  constantly  diminish. 

The  Geodesic  Lines  on  the  Anchor  Ring.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  form  of  the  geodesic  lines  on  the  anchor  ring  is 
discussed  and  its  points  classified  according  to  a  scheme 
devised  by  Mangold.  The  classification  depends  upon 
the  existence  of  conjugate  points  upon  the  geodesic 
lines. 

George  Lincoln  Brown,  Ph.D.  1902; 
Professor  of  Mathematics  and  Astrono- 
my, South  Dakota  Agricultural  College, 
Brookings,  S.  D. 

The  Ternary  Linear  Transformation  Group 
G3.360  and  its  Complete  Invariant  System. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  problem  of  verifying  the  existence  of  the  coUinea- 
tion  group  Gsco  and  of  finding  its  complete  invariant 
system  was  suggested  by  H.  Valentiner's  determination 
of  this  group.  The  Gs.seo  is  proved  isomorphic  with  the 
group  of  even  permutations  of  six  things,  its  operators 
being  those  of  the  collineation  group  with  the  three 
cube  roots  of  unity  as  multipliers.  By  a  simple  process 
the  invariants  of  Gs.seo  are  reduced  to  four  independent 
expressions,  of  the  sixth,  twelfth,  thirtieth,  and  forty- 
fifth  degrees  respectively.  In  conclusion,  the  preced- 
ing results  are  compared  with  those  given  by  A.  Wiman 
in  an  article  published  a  very  short  time  after  the 
work  of  which  this  is  an  outline  was  completed,  and 
the  two  invariant  systems  are  found  to  be  essentially 
identical. 

Leonard  Eugene  Dickson,  Ph.D.  1896. 
(See  above.) 


William  Findlay,  Ph.D.  1901 ;  Tutor  in 
Mathematics,  Barnard  College,  New 
York. 

The  Sylow  Subgroups  of  the  Symmetric  Group 
on  A;  Letters.  Doctor's  thesis.  Unpub- 
lished. 

The  discussion  is  reduced  to  the  case  where  fc  is  a  power 
(l)«)  of  a  prime  (p).  The  various  groups  of  substitutions 
upon  the  systems  of  jmprimitivity  induced  by  the  sub- 
stitutions of  the  main  group  are  seen  to  be  themselves 
Sylow  subgroups  of  the  corresponding  symmetric 
groups.  Enumerations  are  made  of  the  substitutions 
of  periods  p  and  ;?"  and  the  conjugacy  relations  of  the 
latter  set  or  substitutions  are  discussed.  The  group  is 
found  to  be  invariant. 

William  Gillespie,  Ph.D.  1899;  In- 
structor in  Mathematics,  Princeton 
University. 

On  the  Reduction  of  Hyperelliptic  Integrals 
(j3=3)  to  Elliptic  Integrals  by  Transforma- 
tions of  the  Second  and  Third  Degrees. 
Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  41.  GOttingen,  L. 
Hofer,  1900.  In  abstract,  under  the  same 
title,  American  Journal  of  Mathematics^ 
XXII  (1900),  259-278. 

Determination  of  all  hyperelliptic  integrals  of  the  first 
kind  of  genus  3,  which  are  reducible  to  elliptic  integrals 
by  a  transformation  of  the  second  or  third  degree. 

John  Irwin  Hutchinson,  Ph.D.  1895; 
Instructor  in  Mathematics,  Cornell  Uni- 
versity. 

On  the  Reduction  of  Hyperelliptic  Functions 
{p=2)  to  Elliptic  Functions  by  a  Transfor- 
mation of  the  Second  Degree.  Doctor's 
thesis.    8vo,  44.    Gottingen,  1897. 

a  determination  is  made  of  the  conditions  and  cases  in 
which  the  reduction  is  possible,  together  with  the  ex- 

E licit  formulae  for  the  reduction  of  the  integrals  of  the 
rstkind.  The  first,  and  most  general,  case  is  then 
studied  in  detail,  the  reduction  formulae  for  the  integ- 
rals of  the  second  and  third  kinds  and  for  the  sixteen 
hyperelliptic  sigma  functions  being  deduced.  The  sig- 
ma  equations  of  the  Kummer  surface  are  deduced,  and 
the  special  forms  of  the  surface  determined  in  the  first 
case  of  reduction. 

Derrick  Norman  Lehmer,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Instructor  in  Mathematics,  University 
of  California. 

Concerning  the  Tractrix  of  a  Ciurve  with  Plani- 
metric  Application.  Annals  of  Mathemat- 
ics (2),  I  (1899),  14-20. 


82 


Publications 


Rational  Triangles.    Ibid.  (1900),  97-102. 

Asymptotic  Evaluation  of  Certain  Potient 
Sums.  Doctor's  thesis.  American  Journal 
of  Mathematics,  XXII  (1900),  293-335 

John  Hector  McDonald,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Instructor  in  Mathematics,  University 
of  California. 

On  the  System  of  a  Binary  Cubic  and  Quadratic 
and  the  Reduction  of  Hyperelliptic  Inte- 
grals of  Genus  Two  to  Elliptic  Integrals  by 
a  Transformation  of  the  Fourth  Order. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Transactions  of  the  Amer- 
ican Mathematical  Society,  II  (1901),  437- 
459. 

A  solution  of  the  problem  independently  of  a  special 
system  of  variables,  by  using  theorems  on  biquadratic 
involutions  and  a  methodical  deduction  of  the  second 
integral  from  the  first.  Some  properties  of  the  form 
system  of  a  cubic  and  quadratic  are  studied  and  it 
is  found  to  contain  a  second  cubic  and  quadratic 
which  have  relations  with  the  ground  forms  which  are 
mutual. 

The  Number  of  Representations  of  a  Number 
as  the  Sum  of  Two  Squares,  Special  Biqua- 
dratic Involutions,  and  the  Transformation 
of  Elliptic  Integrals.  The  Twisted  Biqua- 
dratic Curve  of  the  first  Species.  Trans- 
actions of  the  Royal  Society  of  Canada 
(2),  VI  (1900),  76-84. 

Proof  of  Dirichlet's  result,  a  theorem  concerning  Her- 
mite's  biquadratic  transformation  of  elliptic  integrals, 
and  a  proof  of  the  cross  ratio  property  of  the  twisted 
biquadratic  curve. 

John  A.  Miller,  Ph.D.  1899;  Professor 
of  Mechanics  and  Astronomy,  Indiana 
University. 

Concerning  Certain  Elliptic  Modular  Functions 
of  Square  Rank.  Doctor's  thesis.  Unpub- 
lished. 

A  study  of  the  modular  functions  X^  {u/w-i ,  to,) ,  defined 
by  Professor  Klein,  when  n,  the  rank,  is  a  square  num- 
ber. Two  systems  consisting  of  an  infinite  number  of 
forms,  the  one  in  ta,  the  other  in  wa,  where  t  and  u  are 
functions  derived  from  X„  were  found,  which  were  in- 
variant under  the  substitutions  of  two  groups  respect- 
ively, viz.,  GfAS  and  (?192.  The  elements  of  these  groups 
and  their  operational  character  were  derived  from  a 
consideration  of  the  X-fuuctions  and  the  «r;^    „-func- 


tions.  The  bases  of  these  systems  of  forms  were  found 
and  expressed  as  rational  functions  of  the  invariants  of 
the  elliptic  functions.  The  case  n  =  4  was  similarly 
treated. 


Thomas  Milton  Putnam,  Ph.D.  1901 ;  In- 
structor in  Mathematics,  University  of 
California. 

Distribution  of  the  Quaternary  Linear  Homo- 
geneous Substitutions  in  a  Galois  Field  into 
Complete  Sets  of  Conjugate  Substitutions. 
American  Journal  of  Mathematics,  XXIII 
(1901),  41-48. 

A  complete  list  of  canonical  forms  is  set  up  and  the 
periods  of  substitutions  belonging  to  each  form  is  de- 
termined. The  number  of  sets  of  conjugate  substitu- 
tions is  found  for  each  canonical  form,  or  type,  and  the 
number  of  substitutions  in  each  of  these  sets  is  calcu- 
lated. 

On  the  Quaternary  Linear  Homogeneous  Group 
and  the  Ternary  Linear  Fractional  Group. 
Doctor's  thesis.  American  Journal  of 
Mathematics,  XXIV  (1902),  319-366. 

The  groups  here  considered  are  those  of  all  substitu- 
tions of  determinant  unity  taken  in  an  arbitrary  Galois 
Field.  The  fractional  group  is  a  simple  group  and  is 
further  important  in  that  it  is  simply  isomorphic  with 
certain  groups  defined  by  quadratic  invariants. 


Ernest  Brown  Skinner,  Ph.D.  1900 ;  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Mathematics,  Uni- 
versity of  Wisconsin. 

Ternary  Monomial  Substitution  Groups  of 
Finite  Order  with  Determinant  ±  1.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  American  Journal  of  Mathe- 
matics, XXV  (1903),  17-59. 

A  study  of  the  principal  ternary  monomial  groups  and 
some  of  their  more  important  subgroups.  Every  ter- 
nary monomial  group  not  involving  a  permutation  of  the 
variables  is  holoedricaUy  isomorphic  with  an  Abolian 
group  with  two  independent  elements  and  conversely. 
The  most  general  ternary  monomial  group  is  then 
found  by  combining  these  two  elements  with  the  two 
elements  of  the  symmetric  group  of  order  six.  The 
system  of  invariant  forms  is  given  for  each  group 
studied  and  for  most  of  the  groups  the  complete  form 
systems  together  with  the  relations  between  the  forms 
of  the  complete  system  are  worked  out. 

Herbert  Ellsworth  Slaught,  Ph.D. 
1898.     (See  above.) 


Depabtment  of  Astbonomy  and  Astbophysios 


83 


XVni.    ASTRONOMY  AND  ASTROPHYSICS 


Geobge  E.  Hale,  [1892 — ],  Professor  of 
Astrophysics  and  Director  of  the  Yer- 
kes  Observatory. 

The  Study  of  Stellar  Evolution.  A  popular 
account  of  modern  methods  of  astrophyslcal 
research.  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  Second  Series,  X. 

The  Ultra- Violet  Spectrum  of  the  Solar  Prom- 
inences, II.  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics, 
XI  (1892),  602. 

Second  list  of  lines  discovered  in  the  spectrum  of  the 
chromosphere. 

Photographs  of  Solar  Phenomena  Obtained 
with  the  Spectroheliograph  of  the  Kenwood 
Astrophyslcal  Observatory.  Ibid.,  XI  (1892), 
603-601. 

Eeproductions  of  photographs  of  the  chromosphere, 
prominences,  and  faculae,  with  descriptive  text. 

Photograph  of  the  Occultation  of  Mars  by  the 
Moon  (July  11, 1892),  made  at  the  Kenwood 
Astrophyslcal  Observatory.    Ibid.,  610-611. 

Beproduction  of  photograph,  with  description  of  new 
photographic  telescope. 

A  Remarkable  Solar  Disturbance.  Ibid.,  611- 
612. 

Account  of  a  new  type  of  solar  eruption,  photographed 
on  July  15, 1892,  with  the  spectroheliograph. 

The  Ultra- Violet  Spectrum  of  the  Solar  Promi- 
nences. Astronomy  and  Astrophysics,  XI 
(1892),  618.  Also  Memorie  delta  Societa 
degli  Spettroscopisti  Italiani,  XXI  (1892), 
160-161. 

Supplementary  list  of  lines  discovered  in  the  spectrum 
of  the  chromosphere. 

Photographic  de  la  chromosphere,  des  protube- 
rances, et  des  facules  solaires,  h,  I'Observa- 
toire  d'astronomie  physique  de  Kenwood, 
Chicago.  Comptes  rendus  de  VAcad4mie 
des  Sciences,  CXV  (1892),  106-109. 

Description  of  the  spectroheliograph  and  of  the  results 
obtained  with  its  aid. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics,  XI 
(1892),  790-793. 

Announcement  of  Mr.  Yerkes's  gift  and  general  plan  of 
work. 


Some  Results  and  Conclusions  Derived  from  a 
Photographic  Study  of  the  Sun.  Ibid.,  811- 
815. 

Besults  of  solar  research  with  the  spectroscope  and 
spectroheliograph. 

The  Ultra-Violet  Spectrum  of  the  Solar  Prom- 
inences, III.    Ibid.,  821-822. 

Third  list  of  lines  discovered  in  the  spectrum  of  the 
chromosphere. 

On  the  Condition  of  the  Sun's  Surface  in  June 
and  July,  1892,  as  compared  with  the  Rec- 
ord of  Terrestrial  Magnetism.  Ibid.,  917- 
925. 

A  discussion  of  photographs  taken  with  the  si>ectro- 
heliograph,  with  illustrations  of  the  remarkable  erup- 
tion of  July  15, 1892. 

La  probability  de  coincidence  entre  les  ph6no- 
m^nes  terrestres  et  solaires.  Comptes  ren- 
dus de  VAcadimie  des  Sciences,CXYl  (1893), 
210-243.  Also  Astronomy  and  Astrophys- 
ics, XII  (1893),  167-169. 

A  test  of  Marchand's  views  regarding  the  relationship 
between  terrestrial  and  solar  disturbances. 

Les  raies  H  et  K  dans  le  spectre  des  facules 
solaires.  Comptes  rendus  de  I'Acaddmie 
des  Sciences,  ibid.,  170-172. 

Discussion  of  a  method  proposed  by  M.  Deslandres  foe 
determining  the  rotation  period  of  a  star. 

The  Spectroheliograph.  Astronomy  and  As- 
trophysics, ibid.,  241-257. 

Critical  discussion  of  various  forms  of  spectrohelio- 
graphs. 

Photographic  de  la  couronne  solaire  sans 
6clipse  totale.  Comptes  rendus  de  V Aca- 
demic des  Sciences,  ibid.,  623-625.  Also 
Astronomy  and  Astrophysics,  ibid.,  260- 
263. 

Description  of  a  method  of  photographing  the  corona 
without  an  eclipse. 

Note  on  Photography  of  the  Corona  without  an 
Eclipse.    Ibid.,  364-365. 

Advantages  of  using  the  dark  K  line  for  this  purpose. 

Spectroscopic  Notes  from  the  Kenwood  Ob- 
servatory.   Ibid.,  XII  (1893),  450-455. 

Prominences  and  faculffi  of  April  16, 1893.  Size  and  dis- 
tribution of  faculae.  Calcium  spectrum  in  flames,  arc, 
spark,  sun-spots,  faculee,  chromosphere,  prominences, 
stars.    Applications  of  the  spectroheliograph. 


84 


Publications 


Some  Recent  Photographic  Investigations  of 
the  Sun.  Technology  Quarterly,  VI  (1893), 
262-272. 

Account  of  solar  researches  at  the  Kenwood  Observa- 
tory, read  before  the  Boston  Society  of  Arts,  October 
25,  1893. 

Astrophysical  Researches  at  the  Kenwood 
Observatory.  Observatory,  XVI  (1893),  395- 
396. 

Address  before  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society  of  Lon- 
don, November  10, 1893. 

Researches  in  Solar  Physics.  Verhandlungen 
der  physikalischen  Gesellschaft  zu  Berlin^ 
XIII  (1894),  1-2. 

Address  before  the  Physikalische  Gtesellschaft  zu  Ber- 
lin. 

The  Solar  Faculae.  Knowledge,  XVII  (1894), 
18-22. 

Discussion  of  the  H  and  K  reversals  and  the  nature  of 
faculee.    Best  dispersion  for  spectroheliographs. 

Sur  les  facules  solaires.  Comptes  rendus  de 
VAcaddmie  des  Sciences,  CXVIII  (1894), 
1175-1177. 

Reply  to  an  article  by  M.  Deslandres. 

On  the  Mounting  of  Large  Telescopes .  Knowl- 
edge, XVII  (1894),  145-146. 

Discussion  of  a  new  form  of  mounting  proposed  by  Sir 
Howard  Grubb. 

On  Some  Attempts  to  Photograph  the  Solar 
Corona  without  an  Eclipse.  Astronomy 
and  Astrophysics,  XIII  (1894),  662-687. 

Details  of  exp>eriments  made  at  Chicago,  Pike's  Peak, 
and  Mount  Etna,  with  description  of  instruments  and 
history  of  previous  attempts. 

On  a  New  Method  of  Mapping  the  Solar  C!o- 
rona  without  an  Eclipse.  Astrophysical 
Journal,  I  (1895),  318-334. 

Description  of  a  differential  method  involving  the  use 
of  a  bolometer  or  radiometer. 

A  Large  Eruptive  Prominence.   Ibid.,  433-434. 

Photographic  observations  of  the  eruptive  prominence 
of  March  25, 1895. 

On  a  Photographic  Method  of  Determining 
the  Visibility  of  Interference  Fringes  in 
Spectroscopic  Measurements.  Ibid.,  435- 
438. 

Experiments  in  photographing  interference  fringes. 
Astrophysical  applications  of  the  interferometer. 

Preliminary  Note  on  the  D3  Line  in  the  Spec- 
trum of  the  Chromosphere.  Astronomische 
Nachrichten,  CXXXVIII  (1895),  No.  3302, 
227-230. 

Physical  characteristics  and  wave-lengths  of  the  com- 
ponents. 


Note  on  Schmidt's  Theory  of  the  Sun.  Astro- 
physical  Journal,  II  (1895),  73-74. 

Spectroscopic  objections  to  the  theory. 

Note  on  the  D3  Line  in  the  Spectrum  of  the 
Chromosphere.    Ibid.,  165-166. 

Discovery  of  the  duplicity  of  the  D3  line  in  the  chromo- 
sphere and  prominences,  with  measures  of  the  compo- 
nents. 

On  the  Wave-Length  of  the  D3  Line  in  the 
Spectnun  of  the  Chromosphere.  Ibid., 
384-385. 

Discussion  of  the  results  obtained  by  different  observers. 
Note  on  the  Application  of  Messrs.  Jewell, 
Humphreys,  and  Mohler's  Results  to  Cer- 
tain Problems  of  Astrophysics.  Ibid.,  Ill 
(1896),  156-161. 

Discussion  of  Jewell's  observations  of  the  reversals  of 
solar  lines.  Bearing  of  wave-length  changes  due  to 
pressure  on  the  determination  of  stellar  velocities  in 
the  line  of  sight. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 

Chicago.    Bulletin  No.  1.    Ibid.,  215-219. 

Organization  and  work  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 

The  Effect  of  a  Total  Eclipse  of  the  Sun  on 
the  Visibility  of  the  Solar  Prominences. 
Ibid.,  374-387. 

Comparison  of  eclipse  (April  16, 1893)  photographs  with 
those  taken  with  a  spectroheliograph.  Discussion  of 
Tacchini's  observations  of  "  white  prominences." 

The  Modern  Spectroscope.  In  collaboration 
with  F.  L.  O.  Wadsworth.  The  Objective 
Spectroscope.    Ibid.,  IV  (1896),  55-78. 

Discussion  of  various  forms  of  objective  spectroscopes. 

On  the  Comparative  Value  of  Refracting  and 
Reflecting  Telescopes  for  Astrophysical  In- 
vestigations.   Ibid.,  V  (1897),  119-131. 

Advantages  of  reflecting  telescope  in  (1)  freedom  from 
chromatic  aberration ;  (2)  relatively  small  absorption ; 
(3)  possible  large  angular  aperture ;  (4)  small  cost ;  (5) 
possible  large  linear  aperture. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  I.  Selection  of  the  Site,  ibid., 
165-180.  II.  The  Building  and  Minor  In- 
struments, ibid.,  254-267.  III.  The  Instru- 
ment and  Optical  Shops,  and  the  Power 
House,  ibid.,  310-317.  IV.  The  Forty-inch 
Telescope,  Dome,  and  Rising  Floor,  ibid., 
VI  (1897),  37-47. 

Description  of  the  buildings  and  equipment  of  the  Yer- 
kes Observatory. 

Note  on  a  Form  of  Spectroheliograph  Sug- 
gested by  Mr.  H.  F.  Newall.   Ibid.,  V  (1897), 
211-213. 
Critical  discussion  of  the  proposed  instrument. 


Department  of  Astbonomy  and  Astbophysics 


85 


The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  2.  Ibid.,  \I  (1891\ 
147-153. 

First  observations  with  the  Yerkes  telescope.  Accident 
to  the  rising-floor.  Latitude  and  longitude  of  the  ob- 
servatory.   Programme  of  the  dedication. 

Note  on  the  Relative  Frequency  of  the  H  and 
K  Lines  in  the  Spectrum  of  the  Chromo- 
sphere.   Ibid.,  157-158. 

Constant  presence  of  the  H  and  K  lines  in  the  chromo- 
spheric  spectrum. 

The  Aim  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory.  Ibid., 
310-321. 

Address  delivered  at  the  astronomical  conference  held 
in  connection  with  the  dedication. 

Note  on  the  Level  of  Sun-Spots.  Ibid.,  366- 
369. 

Suggestion  that  sun-spots  may  be  depressions  in  ele- 
vated regions  of  the  photosphere. 

On  the  Presence  of  Carbon  in  the  Chromo- 
sphere.   Ibid.,  412-414. 

Discovery  of  the  bright  lines  of  the  green  carbon  fluting 
in  the  spectrum  of  the  chromosphere. 

On  the  Spectra  of  Stars  of  Secchi's  Fourth 
Type.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1898),  237-240. 

Preliminary  report  on  a  spectrographic  study  of  red 
stars. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  6.  Parallax  of  the 
Andromeda  Nebula.  Ibid.,  IX  (1899),  184- 
186. 

Parallax  of  the  Andromeda  nebula  found  by  Professor 
E.  E.  Barnard  to  be  inappreciable.  Spectrographic 
proof  of  the  presence  on  the  ball  of  Saturn  of  a  dense 
atmosphere  which  is  apparently  absent  from  the  rings. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  7.  Spectra  of  Stars 
of  Secchi's  Fourth  Type.    Ibid.,  271-272. 

Order  of  development  of  the  red  stars. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  9.  Comparison  of 
Stellar  Spectra  of  the  Third  and  Fourth 
Types.    Ibid.,  273-274. 

Discovery  of  a  relationship  between  the  two  great 
classes  of  red  stars. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  10.  Period  and 
Elongation  Distance  of  the  Fifth  Satellite 
of  Jupiter.    Ibid.,  358-360. 

Measures  of  the  satellite  by  Professor  Barnard. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.    Bidletin  No.  11.    Heat  Radiation 
of  the  Stars.    Ibid.,  360-362. 
Detection  of  stellar  heat  radiation  by  Professor  E.  F. 
Nichols. 


On  the  Spectra  of  Stars  of  Secchi's  Fom-th 
Type.  In  collaboration  with  Ferdinand 
Ellerman.    L    /ftid.,  X  (1899),  87-112. 

Results  obtained  by  previous  observers.  Description 
of  instruments  employed  in  present  research.  Methods 
of  measuring  and  reducing  the  photographs.  Bright 
lines  in  fourth  type  spectra. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  12.  Carbon  in  the 
Chromosphere.  Some  New  Forms  of  Spec- 
troheliographs.    Ibid.,  287-289. 

Discovery  of  the  yellow  fluting  of  carbon  in  the  spec-- 
trum  of  the  chromosphere.  Two  simple  forms  of  spec- 
troheliographs. 

Solar  Eclipse  Problems.  Ibid.,  XI  (1900),  47- 
66. 

Suggestions  for  eclipse  observers. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  13.  Variable  Star 
Observations  with  the  12-inch  and  40-inch 
Refractors.    Ibid.,  XII  (1900),  52-54. 

Observations  of  faint  variable  stars  by  Mr.  J.  A.  Park- 
hurst. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  14.  Observations  of 
the  Total  Solar  Eclipse  of  May  28,  1900,  at 
Wadesboro,  N.  C.    Ibid.,  80-89. 

Preliminary  report  of  the  results  obtained  by  the  Yer- 
kes Observatory  party. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  15.  Photographs  of 
Star  Clusters  Made  with  the  40-inch  Visual 
Telescope.    Ibid.,  161-164. 

Photograph  of  Messier  13  made  by  Mr.  G.  W.  Bitchey 
with  a  color  screen. 

On  Some  Attempts  to  Detect  the  Solar  Corona 
in  Full  Sunlight  with  a  Bolometer.  Ibid., 
372-375. 

Account  of  experiments  made  during  the  years  1895-1900. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  16.  The  New  Star 
in  Perseus.    Ibid.,  XIII  (1901),  173-176. 

Spectroscopic,  photometric,  and  photographic  observa- 
tions of  Nova  Persei. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.  Bulletin  No.  17.  Changes  in  the 
Spectrum  of  Nova  Persei.  Ibid.,  238- 
240. 

Further  spectroscopic  and  photometric  observations  of 
the  A  ova. 

The  Yerkes  Observatory  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.    Bulletin  No.  18.    Latitude  and 


86 


Publications 


Longitude  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory.  Ibid., 

XIV  (1901),  146-148. 

Determination  of  the  latitude  and  longitude  by  the 
United  States  Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey. 

Note  on  the  Spark  Spectrum  of  Iron  in  Li- 
quids and  in  Air  at  High  Pressures.    Ibid., 

XV  (1902),  132-135. 

Description  of  the  spectroscopic  phenomena  observed 
in  the  electric  discharge  between  iron  poles  in  liquids, 
in  which  it  is  shown  that  iron  lines  may  be  changed 
from  bright  to  dark  and  shifted  in  position  by  changing 
the  constants  of  the  electric  circuit  or  by  the  use  of 
salt  solutions. 

Selective  Absorption  as  a  Function  of  Wave- 
Length.    Ibid.,  221 -22S. 

Showing  that  the  law  of  selective  absorption,  as  illus- 
trated by  the  reversal  of  spark  lines  in  water,  resembles 
the  law  of  general  absorption  of  light.  The  presence 
of  both  bright  and  dark  hydrogen  lines  in  stellar  spec- 
tra may  be  explained  in  this  way. 

Article  "  Spectroscopy."  Encyclopaedia  Brit- 
tanica.  New  Volumes. 

The  Spectra  of  Stars  of  Secchi's  Fourth  Type. 
In  collaboration  with  Ferdinand  Ellerman 
and  John  Adelbert  Parkhurst.  Seven  plates. 
Article  in  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  VIII. 

A  three-prism  spectrograph  has  been  used  with  the 
40-inch  Yerkes  telescope  in  photographing  the  spectra  of 
a  number  of  these  stars.  The  paper  includes  tables  of 
the  wave-lengths  of  several  hundred  bright  and  dark 
lines  recorded  on  photographs,  conclusions  as  to  the 
chemical  origin  of  the  lines,  and  a  discussion  of  the 
evolution  of  these  stars,  their  distribution  in  the  heav- 
ens, and  their  relationship  to  stars  of  other  spectral 
types. 

Spark  Spectra  in  Liquids  and  Gases,  and  their 
Bearing  on  the  Spectra  of  Temporary  Stars. 
In  collaboration  with  Norton  Adams  Kent. 
Five  plates.    Ibid. 

The  spectroscopic  phenomena  of  the  electric  spark  in 
liquids  depend  upon  a  variety  of  conditions,  such  as 
the  length  of  the  spark,  the  diameter  of  the  poles,  the 
capacity  of  the  condenser,  the  nature  of  the  liquid,  and, 
in  particular,  upon  the  inductance  in  the  sparlc  circuit. 
By  varying  the  inductance  a  series  of  photographs  was 
obtained,  passing  by  slow  degrees  from  a  bright  line 
spectrum,  similar  to  that  given  by  a  spark  in  air,  to  a 
spectrum  in  which  most  of  the  more  refrangible  lines 
are  dark.  Similar  phenomena  were  obtained  in  air  at 
pressures  ranging  from  one  to  twenty  atmospheres. 
The  parser  contains  the  results  of  measurements  of  the 
photographs,  with  a  discussion  of  their  bearing  on  the 
theory  of  temporary   stars   and   other  celestial  phe- 


Reviews  of 

Publications  of  the  Lick  Observatory,  Vol  III. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  I  (1895),  180-188. 

Young,  The  Sun.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1896),  235-240. 

Deslandres,  Observations  de  I'^clipse  totale  du 
soleil  du  16  avril,  1893.  Ibid.,  IV  (1896), 
160-166. 


Lockyer,  Total  Eclipse  of  the  Sun,  April  16, 
1893.    Ibid.,  V  (1897),  220-226. 

Annales  de  I'observatoire  d'astronomie  phy- 
sique de  Paris.    Ibid.,  X  (1899),  369-374. 

Huggins,  An  Atlas  of  Representative  Stellar 
Spectra.    Ibid.,  XII  (1900),  291-297. 

Annals  of  the  Astrophysical  Observatory  of  the 
Smithsonian  Institution,  Vol.  I.  Ibid.,  XIII 
(1901),  280-288. 

Ambronn,  Handbuch  der  astronomischen  In- 
strumentenkunde.  Ibid.,  XV  (1902),  347- 
349. 

Sherburne  Wesley  Burnham,  [1892 — ], 
Professor  of  Astronomy  and  Astronomer 
in  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 

A  General  Catalogue  of  1290  Double  Stars 
Discovered  from  1871  to  1899,  arranged  in 
order  of  Right  Ascension,  with  all  the  Micro- 
metrical  Measures  of  each  Pair.  4to,  xxvii 
4-  296.  Publications  of  the  Yerkes  Ob- 
servatory, I,  1900. 

The  Motion  of  ^  Cancri.  Monthly  Notices  of 
the  Royal  Astronomical  Society,  LIII  (1892), 
40-44. 

The  New  Star  in  Auriga.    Ibid.,  58-60. 

The  Binary  Star  S  1785.    Ibid.,  60-64. 

The  Double  Star  02  224.  Astronomy  and  As- 
trophysics, XI  (1892),  661-662. 

The  Double  Star  %  1216.    Ibid.,  662-663. 

The  Proper  Motion  of  2 1604.    Ibid.,  870-872. 

The  Orbit  of  t  Cygni.  Monthly  Notices,  LIII 
(1893),  43^-443. 

The  Motion  of  21819.    J6id.,  474r478. 

The  Orbit  of  40  Eridani,  2518.  Ibid.,  478- 
482. 

The  Orbit  of  Sirius.    Ibid.,  482-483. 

The  Orbit  of  y  Andromedae.  Ibid.,  LI  V  (1893), 
119. 

The  Motion  of  6  Eridani.  Astronomy  and 
Astrophysics,  XII  (1893),  587-588. 

The  Orbit  of  70  Ophiuchi.    Ibid.,  585-586. 

The  Orbit  of  /3  416.    Ibid.,  792-793. 


Department  of  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics 


87 


The  Period  of  20  Persei  {fi  524).    Ihid.,  404- 

407. 
The  Period  of  %  1785.    Ibid.,  397^00. 
The  Orbit  of  9  Argus.    Ibid.,  494^499. 
The  Orbit  of  OS  285.    Ihid.,  586-587. 
Astronomy  in  Russia.    Ibid.,  595-596. 
The  Double  Star  95  Ceti.    Ibid.,  681-683. 
The  System  of  t,  Cancri.    Ibid.,  872-874. 
How  to  Find  the  Orbit  of  a  Double  Star  by  a 

Graphical  Method.    Popular  Astronomy,  I 

(1894),  243-248  and  348-358. 

The  Proper   Motions  of  Double   Stars.    As- 
tronomy and  Astrophysics,   XIII    (1894), 

14r-19. 

The  Orbit  of  9  Argus.    Ibid.,  290-291. 

The  Poulkowa  Double  Star  Measures.    Ibid., 
354-356. 

The  Proper  Motion  of  Procyon.  Ibid.,  434r-437. 

The  Orbit  of  9  Argus.    Ibid.,  14. 

The  Binary  Systems.      Popular  Astronomy, 

IV  (1896),  16^177. 

New  Elipsograph  and  Protractor.    Ibid.,  181- 

184. 
The  Orbit  of  Castor.    Ibid.,  286-289. 
The  Orbit  of  rOphiuchi.     Ibid.,  IV  (1897), 

347-351. 
The  Orbit  of  X  Cygni.    Ibid.,  397-400. 
The  Orbit  of  ^  Aquarii.    Ibid.,  474-475. 
The  Orbit  of  02215.    Ibid.,  543-544. 
The  Orbit  of  35  Comae  (2 1687)  and  OS  4.   Ibid., 

V  (1897),  125-126. 

The  Orbit  of  2  1216.  Ibid.,  450. 
The  Orbit  of  2  2107.  Ibid.,  449. 
The  Orbit  of  44  Bodtis.    Monthly  Notices  of 

the    Royal    Astronomical    Society,    LVII 

(1897),  393-398. 
The  Orbit  of  8  Cygni.    Ibid.,  449-452. 
The  Orbit  of  5:iVfMs.    /6fd.,  453-456. 
The  Orbit  of  /x  Draconis.    Ibid.,  547-550. 
The  Double  Star  t,  Bodtis.  Ibid.,  LVIII  (1898), 

83. 
The  Orbit  of  02  400.    Ibid.,  87. 


The  Relative  Motion  of  the  Components  of  y 
Leonis.    Ibid.,  387-391. 

The  Double  Star  fi  107.  Popular  Astronomy^ 
VII  (1899),  1-3. 

Note  on  the  Double  Star  )3107.  Ibid.,  YIU 
(1900),  528-530. 

The  Proper  Motion  of  /8182.    Ibid.,  530-531. 

Note  on  the  (Companion  to  /?  Cassiopeiae. 
Ibid.,  540. 

Measures  of  Double  Stars  Made  with  the  40-inch 
Refractor  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory  in  1900 
and  1901.  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  VIII, 
1-75. 

Reviews  of 

See,  Researches  on  the  Evolution  of  Stellar 
Systems.  Popular  Astronomy,  IV  (1897), 
471-474. 

Hussey,  Measures  of  the  02  Double  Stars. 
Ibid.,  IX  (1901),  55^-555. 

Doolittle,  Measiires  of  900  Double  and  Mul- 
tiple Stars  Made  with  the  18-inch  Refractor 
of  the  Flower  Astronomical  Observatory. 
Ibid.,  X  (1902),  129-130. 

Edward  Emerson  Barnard  [1895 — ], 
Professor  of  Practical  Astronomy  and 
Astronomer  in  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 

On  a  Photographic  Search  for  a  Satellite  to  the 
Moon.  Illustrated.  AstrophysicalJournal, 
II  (1895),  347-349. 

Photographs  made  during  a  total  Innar  eclipse  sho\red 
that  if  such  a  body  existed  it  must  be  below  the  10th 
or  11th  magnitude  or  very  close  to  the  moon  and  hence 
in  the  shadow  with  it  at  the  time. 

Photograph  of  the  Nebula  N.  G.  C.  1499  near 
the  star  $  Persei.    Illustrated.    Ibid.,  350. 

This  remarkable  nebula,  which  is  excessively  faint  with 
any  telescope,  was  shown  to  be  full  of  singular  details 
not  seen  with  the  telescope,  but  easily  photographed. 

Celestial  Photographs  with  a  "  Magic  Lantern 
Lens."    Illustrated.    Ibid.,  351-353. 

It  is  shown  that  valuable  discoveries  can  be  made  with 
the  most  inexpensive  lenses  in  photographing  the  sky, 
an  ordinary  child's  magic  lantern  lens  having  revealed 
the  existence  of  great  beds  of  gaseous  matter  in  the 
heavens  not  previously  known. 


88 


Publications 


On  the  Exterior  Nebulosities  of  the  Pleiades. 
Knoivledge,  XVIII  (1895),  282. 

An  account  of  the  discovery  by  photography  of  a  vast 
region  of  nebulous  matter  covering  one  hundred  square 
degrees  and  surrounding  the  Pleiades. 

Photographic  and  Visual  Observations  of 
Holmes'  Comet.  Illustrated.  Astrophys- 
ical  Journal,  III  (1896),  41-46. 

The  comet  underwent  most  extraordinary  changes  in 
form  and  brightness,  from  a  faint  diffused  mass  scarcely 
discernible  in  a  telescope  to  a  bright  star-like  body 
almost  visible  to  the  naked  eye  in  what  must  have  been 
a  few  hours'  time.  The  photograph  shows  an  append- 
age to  the  comet  not  visible  in  the  telescope. 

Filar  Micrometer  Measures  of  the  Fifth  Satel- 
lite of  Jupiter.  Astronomical  Journal, 
XVI  (1896),  49-50. 

Measures  are  given  of  this  difficult  object  and  correc- 
tions noted  to  the  ephemeris. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Four  Satellites 
of  the  Planet  Uranus,  and  Measures  of  the 
Diameters  of  Uranus.    Ibid.,  73-78. 

Positions  of  all  four  of  the  satellites  are  given.  In  the 
measures  it  was  found  that  the  apparent  disc  of  Uranus 
was  decidedly  elliptical.  The  position  angles  of  this 
ellipticily  measured.  The  diameter  measures  of  the 
planet  in  two  directions  also  clearly  showed  the  ellipti- 
city. 

Comparison  of  Three  Celestial  Photographs 
Made  with  a  6-inch  Portrait  Lens  with  Sim- 
ilar ones  Made  with  a  20-inch  Reflector. 
Monthly  Notices  of  the  Royal  Astronom- 
ical Society,  LVI  (1896),  377-381. 

This  paper  deals  with  the  relative  values  of  photo- 
graphs made  with  the  ordinary  portrait  lens  and  with 
a  large  reflector.  It  is  shown  that  the  two  instruments 
have  their  special  fields  of  work  that  are  mutually  sup- 
plementary. 

Note  on  the  Diameters  and  Ellipticity  of 
Uranus.  Astronomical  Journal,  XVI 
(1896),  109. 

It  is  shown  that  the  measured  diameters  previously 
printed  and  the  direction  of  ellipticity  were  in  accord 
with  measures  made  some  years  before  by  Professor  C. 
A.  Young. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Annular  Nebula 
of  Lyra  {Mhl).  Astronomische  Nachrich- 
ten,  CXL  (1896),  283-286. 

The  various  dimensions  of  the  nebula  were  measured 
on  a  number  of  nights. 

Note  on  Saturn.    Ibid.,  CXLI  (1896),  79-80. 

A  statement  as  to  the  non-visibility  of  various  markings 
reported  to  have  been  discovered  on  the  planet  Saturn, 

Extended  Nebulosity  in  the  Region  of  Antares. 
Illustrated.    Knowledge,  XIX  (1896),  205. 

A  description  of  a  great  region  of  nebulosity  in  the  neigh- 
borhood of  Antares,  Rho  Ophiuchi,  and  Nu  Scorpii,  dis- 
covered by  photography. 


On  the  Comparison  of  Reflector  and  Portrait 
Lens  Photographs.  Monthly  Notices  of  the 
Royal  Astronomical  Society,  LVII  (1896), 
10-16. 

Microscopical  Measures  of  the  Ball  and  Ring 
System  of  the  Planet  Saturn,  and  Diameters 
of  his  Satellite  Titan,  with  Some  Remarks 
on  Large  and  Small  Telescopes.  Ibid., 
LVI  (1896),  163-172. 

The  diameters  of  the  ball  and  the  various  rings  of  the 
planet  were  measured.  They  are  in  close  agreement 
with  previous  measures  of  Professor  A.  Hall  at  Wash- 
ington in  1884-87,  and  show  no  change  in  the  dimensions 
of  the  rings,  as  had  been  reported  from  previous  obser- 
vations. The  diameter  of  the  brightest  satellite,  Titan, 
was  also  measured  on  a  number  of  nights. 

The  November  Leonids  of  1896.  Astronomical 
Journal,  XVII  (1896),  40. 

A  few  observations  of  these  bodies  were  secured  through 
clouds. 

The  Milky  Way  near  the  Tail  of  the  Scorpion, 
and  the  Cluster  Messier  35.  Illustrated. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  V  (1897). 

These  two  photographs  show  remarkable  regions  of 
the  sky.  The  first  shows  the  bright  cloud  regions  near 
the  lower  part  of  Scorpio,  the  second  shows  the  beau- 
tiful cluster  M  35.  There  is  no  text  except  what  is  on 
the  photographs. 

Note  on  Professor  Campbell's  Observations  of 
Nova  Aurigae.    Ibid.,  277-278. 

It  is  shown  that  though  the  Nova  was  affected  by  a 
I)eculiarity  of  focus  due  to  its  light,  that  when  properly 
focused  it  still  appeared  nebulous. 

Physical  and  Micrometrical  Observations  of 
the  Planet  Venv^.  Illustrated.  Ibid.,  299- 
304. 

The  diameter  of  Venus  was  measured  on  a  large  num- 
ber of  nights  with  the  great  telescope  of  the  Lick 
Observatory.  The  physical  appearance  of  the  planet 
was  almost  always  unsatisfactory  and  nothing  definite 
was  obtained  in  reference  to  its  surface  features.  At 
one  observation  markings  were  seen,  but  they  were 
unlike  some  of  those  shown  by  other  observers  in  recent 
years. 

Measures  of  the  Diameters  of  Mars  and  the 
Positions  of  his  Satellites  in  1894.  Astro- 
nomical Journal,  XVII  (1897),  145-147. 

The  equatorial  and  polar  diameters  of  Mars  were 
measured  on  a  number  of  nights  and  gave  an  ellipticity 
of  about  iJh.  The  positions  of  the  satellites  were  meas- 
ured and  estimations  of  their  relative  brightness  made. 

The  Gegenschein  or  Zodiacal  Coimterglow. 
Ibid.,  151-152. 

New  observations  of  the  position  of  the  Gegenschein  are 
given.  It  is  shown  that  the  position  varies  slightly 
from  exact  opposition  to  the  sun,  but  this  is  accounted 
for  by  atmospheric  absorption. 


Department  of  Astbonomy  and  Astrophysics 


89 


Observations  of  the  Partial  Solar  Eclipse  of 
July  29, 1897.    Ibid.,  XVIII  (1897),  23. 

This  eclipse  was  observed  with  the  12-inch  refractor  and 
the  times  of  contacts  recorded,  as  also  the  times  of  con- 
tacts of  the  moon  with  the  sun-spots. 

The  Great  Nebula  of  p  Ophiuchi  and  the  Small- 
ness  of  the  Stars  Forming  the  Groundwork 
of  the  Milky  Way.  Illustrated.  Popular 
Astronomy,  V  (1897),  227-232. 

This  nebula  was  discovered  by  photography.  It  seems 
to  associate  itself  with  the  bright  and  faint  stars  in  its 
region,  implying  that  they  are  at  the  same  distance 
from  us,  and  that  the  apparent  smallnessof  the  majority 
of  the  stars  of  the  Milky  Way  is  due  to  their  being 
really  relatively  small  bodies. 

Photograph  of  an  August  Meteor.  Astronom- 
ical Journal,  XVIII  (1897),  128. 

This  meteor  was  photographed  with  two  cameras.  Its 
entire  path  is  shown  on  the  two  plates. 

On  the  Photography  of  Meteors.  Illustrated. 
Popular  Astronomy,  V  (1897),  281-284. 

Meteors  are  frequently  photographed  with  portrait 
lenses  while  engaged  in  photographing  the  sky.  The 
use  of  such  lenses  shown  to  be  adapted  for  the  photog- 
raphy of  the  November  meteor  shower. 

A  Micrometrical  Determination  of  the  Dimen- 
sions of  the  Planets  of  the  Solar  System. 
Ibid.,  285-302. 

The  diameters  of  all  the  planets  and  satellites  that 
were  measurable  in  the  great  telescope  of  the  Lick  Ob- 
servatory were  measured  and  their  dimensions  given  in 
angular  and  linear  value. 

On  the  Companions  of  Vega.  Astronomical 
Journal,  XVIII  (1897),  46. 

Positions  of  these  small  stars  are  given,  and  attention 
is  called  to  the  fact  that  they  are  not  physically  con- 
nected with  Vega. 

On  the  Third  and  Fourth  Satellites  of  Jupiter. 
Astronomische  Nachrichten,  CXLIV  (1897), 
321-330.    Illustrated. 

Observations  of  the  surface  features  of  these  two  moons, 
and  measures  of  white  polar  caps  similar  to  those  on 
Mara.  The  paper  also  refutes  the  statements  made  as 
to  rapid  changes  in  the  forms  of  these  bodies  and  of 
the  existence  of  a  network  of  thin  lines  on  their  sur- 
faces. 

An  Astronomical  Coincidence.    Ibid.,  331. 

Showing 
cal  yroT 


Showing  how  the  improbable  may  happen  in  astronomi- 
rk. 


On  an  Instrument  for  accurately  Photograph- 
ing an  Unseen,  Moving,  but  Known  Celes- 
tial Body.    Ibid.,  332. 

An  instrument  is  here  suggested  whereby,  with  a  me- 
chanical motion  of  the  eye  piece,  the  telescope  can  be 
made  to  move  with  the  unseen  body  by  guiding  with  a 
fixed  star,  the  unseen  and  moving  body  thus  being  kept 
stationary  on  the  plate. 


Small  Stars  near  Sirius.  Astronomical  Jour- 
nal, XVIII  (1897),  93. 

Some  small  stars  are  measured  to  show  the  proper  mo- 
tion of  Siritis. 

The  Leonids  of  1897.    Ibid.,  107. 
Nebulae  near  Castor.    Ibid.,  112. 

Some  small  nebulae  were  found  within  a  degree  of  the 
star  Castor. 

On  Another  Astronomical  Coincidence.  Astro- 
nomische Nachrichten,  CXLV  (1898),  237. 

Showing  that  the  improbable  happens  more  frequently 
than  would  be  supposed. 

Observations  of  the  Companions  of  Procyon 
and  of  y8883.  Astronomical  Journal,  XIX 
(1898),  23-24. 

Measures  of  the  Satellite  of  Neptune  with  the 
40-inch  Refractor  of  the  Yerkes  Observa- 
tory, with  some  Remarks  on  the  Great  Tele- 
scope.   Ibid.,  25-29. 

These  are  the  first  measures  of  the  satellite  made  with 
the  great  telescope.  A  description  of  the  telescojje  and 
micrometer,  of  the  dome  and  elevating  floor  are  given, 
with  remarks  on  the  performance  of  the  object  glass. 

Filar  Micrometer  Observations  of  Comet  C 
1898  (Coddington).    Ibid.,  XIX  (1898),  55. 

The  Development  of  Photography  in  Astron- 
omy. Proceedings  of  the  American  As- 
sociation for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 
XLVII  (1898),  33  pp.  Reprinted  in  Popu- 
lar Astronomy,  VI  (1898),  425-455. 

An  address,  as  vice-president  and  chairman  of  section 
A,  before  the  section  of  mathematics  and  astronomy, 
American  Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 
Boston  meeting,  fiftieth  anniversary,  August,  1898. 

Note  on  Some  Variable  Stars  of  the  Cluster 
Mb.  Astronomische  Nachrichten,  CXLVII 
(1898),  243-246. 

These  observations  verify  the  discovery  of  a  great  num- 
ber of  variable  stars  in  this  cluster  by  Professor  Bailey 
at  Arequipa,  Peru.  The  periods  of  several  are  de- 
termined with  the  40-inch  refractor. 

The  Great  Nebula  of  Andro7neda.  Astro- 
physical  Journal,  VIII  (1898),  226-228. 

A  reported  change  in  the  nucleus  of  the  nebula  having 
been  telegraphed  to  this  country,  is  disproved  by  fre- 
quent observations  with  the  great  telescope  about  that 
time.  Measures  are  given  of  the  position  of  the  nucleus 
with  reference  to  several  stars. 

Portrait-Lens  Photography.    Ibid.,  240. 

Details  the  advantages  of  the  ordinary  portrait  lens 
for  making  celestial  photographs. 

Observations  of  the  Leonids  of  November  14, 
1898.  Monthly  Notices  of  the  Royal  As- 
tronomical Society,  LIX  (1898),  107-108. 

Being  a  letter  to  Dr.  G.  Johnstone  Stoney  on  the  subject. 


90 


Publications 


Note  on  the  Exterior  NebuJosities  of  the  Plei- 
ades.   Ibid.  (1899),  155. 

Attention  is  called  to  the  fact  that  the  discovery  of  a 
vast  region  of  nebulosity  about  the  Pleiades  is  verified 
by  photographs  made  at  Arequipa,  Peru,  by  the  Har- 
vard Colleere  Observatory  Station  and  by  photographs 
made  by  Dr.  Wilson  at  Northfield,  Minn. 

New  Variable  Star  {S.  X>.  — 45381).  Astro- 
nomical  Journal,  XIX  (1899),  193. 

This  star  was  found  to  be  variable  while  observing 
the  planet  Eros.  The  variability  is  verified  by  photo- 
graphs taken  at  Harvard  College  Observatory  and  the 
period  found  from  them  to  be  about  150  days. 

Photographs  of  Comets  and  of  the  Milky  Way, 
March,  1899.  Illustrated.  Monthly  Notices 
of  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society,  LIX 
(1900),  354-370. 

An  historical  account  of  the  work  done  with  the  6-inch 
Willard  lens  of  the  Lick  Observatory  in  photographing 
the  Milky  Way  and  the  various  comets. 

Observations  of  the  Leonid  Meteors  of  1898. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  IX  (1899),  151-156. 

A  considerable  display  of  these  meteors  was  seen.  Pho- 
tographic ijlates  were  exposed  in  several  cameras  to 
the  sky  during  the  display  but  no  meteors  secured. 

Photograph  of  the  Milky  Way  near  the  Star 
Theta  Ophiuchi.  Illustrated.  Ibid.,  157- 
158. 

This  region  of  the  sky  was  shown  to  be  very  remark- 
able, the  Milky  Way  breaking  up  into  great  black  rifts 
or  vacant  chasms,  as  if  a  segregation  were  taking  place. 
Attention  was  called  to  the  singular  feature  of  spaces 
free  of  stars  that  yet  had  darker  holes  in  them,  suggest- 
ing che  presence  here  of  a  nebulous  substratum  to  the 
Milky  Way. 

Observations  of  Hind's  Variable  Nebula  in 
Taurus  (N.  G.  C.  1555)  Made  with  the 
40-inch  Kefractor  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 
Illustrated.  Monthly  Notices  of  the  Royal 
Astronomical  Society,  LIX  (1899),  372-376. 

A  further  account  of  observations  of  this  remarkable 
nebula  in  which  it  is  shown  to  have  again  become 
faintly  visible.  The  observations  show  that  T  Tauri, 
the  variable  star  close  to  the  nebula,  was  a  nebula  itself 
about  1890,  and  that  it  subsequently  lost  the  apparent 
nebulosity,  though  the  great  telescope  still  shows  slight 
traces  of  it. 

The  Variable  Star  S.  Lyncis.  Two  New  Double 
Stars.  Anderson's  Variable  near  B.  D.  + 
55?3011.  Astronomische  Nachrichten, 
CXLIX  (1899),  167-170. 

Contains  measures  of  the  positions  of  the  two  variable 
stars.  Two  new  double  stars  were  found  during  the 
work. 

The  Gegenschein  or  Zodiacal  Counterglow. 
Illustrated.  Popular  Astronomy,  VII 
(1899),  169-179. 

This  phenomenon  had  been  observed  through  sixteen 
years  and  the  many  positions  obtained  of  it  showed 
that  it  kept  on  the  ecliptic  exactly  opposite  the  sun. 
Its  changes  of  shape  described,  and  the  theories  to 


account  for  it  shown  to  be  unsatisfactory.  The  paper 
contains  a  complete  collection  of  all  the  writer  s  ob- 
servations of  its  position  in  the  sky. 

Note  on  Mr.  Evershed's  Paper  on  the  Gegen- 
schein.   Ibid.,  290. 

Objections  are  brought  forward  to  Mr.  Evershed's  ex- 
planation of  the  Gegenschein. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Satellite  of 
Neptune  During  the  Oppositions  1898-99 
with  the  40-inch  Kefractor  of  the  Yerkes 
Observatory,  with  some  Remarks  on  the 
Temperature  Changes  of  the  Object-Glass. 
Astronomical  Journal,  XX  (1899),  41^4:. 

More  measures  of  the  satellite  are  given,  extending 
from  August  29, 1898,  to  April  19, 1899.  It  is  also  shown 
that  the  focus  of  the  great  glass  varies  greatly  with  the 
changes  of  temperature.  Measures  had  been  made 
through  a  range  of  102°  (F.).  Through  this  great  range 
the  focus  changed  about  ^  of  an  inch,  shortening  up  as 
the  temperature  lowered. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Companion  of 
of  Procyon.    Ibid.,  44. 
Measures  of  this  difficult  object  made  with  the  40-inch. 

The  Double  Head  of  Comet  a  1899  (Swift). 
Ibid.,  60. 

The  head  of  this  comet  was  distinctly  double  on  a  num- 
ber of  dates.  Position  angles  and  distances  were  meas- 
ured. One  of  the  components  was  smaller  than  the  other. 

Position  Angles  of  the  North  Polar  Cap  of 
Mars  1898-99.    Ibid.,  124. 

The  position  of  the  Polar  Cap  was  determined  on 
twenty-seven  nights. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Fifth  Satellite 
of  Jupiter,  and  on  the  Motion  of  the  Line 
of  Apsides  of  the  Orbit  of  the  Satellite. 
Ibid.,  125-130. 

A  long  series  of  measures  were  obtained  of  the  satellite 
at  the  oppositions  of  1898  and  1899  with  the  40-inch. 
From  these  measures  and  the  ones  obtained  in  1892. 
1893,  and  1894,  it  was  shown  that  Tisserand's  value  or 
the  motion  of  the  line  of  apsides  of  the  orbit  (+  882' 
annually)  is  erroneous.  A  new  determination  makes 
this  value  closely  -t-  900°  per  year,  or  +  2?465  daily. 

Periodical  Changes  in  the  Form  of  the  Gegen- 
schein.   Ibid.,  131-132. 

These  observations  verify  the  changes  that  take  place 
in  the  form  of  the  Gegenschein  in  October  of  each  year. 

Small  Stars  near  Sirius.   Ibid.,  XX  (1900),  166, 

188. 
Note  on  the  Companion  of  Sirius.    Ibid.,  167. 

Measures  of  the  companion  are  given,  with  a  compari- 
son with  the  ephemeris. 

The  Double  Star  ^8883.    Ibid.,  170. 

On  the  Probable  Motion  of  the  Annular  Nebula 
of  Lyra  (if  57)  and  the  Peculiarities  in  the 
Focus  for  the  Planetary  Nebulae  and  their 


Depabtment  of  Astbonomt  and  Astbophysics 


91 


Nuclei.  Illustrated.  Monthly  Notices  of 
the  Royal  Astronomical  Society  LX  (1900), 
245-257. 

A  series  of  measures  was  made  of  the  surrounding  stars 
and  the  nucleus  and  discrepancies  from  previous  meas- 
ures made  by  Professor  Burnham  suggests  that  possi- 
bly the  nebula  has  moved  perceptibly  in  the  past  eight 
or  ten  years. 

The  Exterior  Nebulosities  of  the  Pleiades,  with 
a  Drawing  from  the  different  Photographs, 
and  on  the  Appearance  of  the  Involved  Neb- 
ulosities of  the  Cluster  with  the  40-inch 
Kefractor.    Ibid.,  258-261.    Illustrated. 

A  further  proof  of  the  existence  of  a  region  of  at  least 
one  hundred  square  degrees  of  nebulosity  surrounding 
the  cluster  of  the  Fleiades. 

On  the  Diameters  of  Ceres  and  Vesta.  Ibid., 
261-262. 

Additional  measures  of  these  planets  made  with  the 
40-inch,  in  close  accord  with  those  previously  made  at 
the  Lick  Observatory  by  the  writer. 

A  Small  Planetary  Nebula  near  the  Star  B.  D.  -f 
34°  732.  Astronomische  Nachrichten,  CLI 
(1900),  355-356. 

Measures  of  a  planetary  nebula  discovered  in  1890  at 
the  Lick  Observatory. 

Filar  Micrometer  Measures  of  the  Position  of 
the  Star  B.  I>.+37?4131  for  Parallax.  Ibid., 
XXI  (1900),  12-14. 

Professor  Schur  having  announced  a  parallax  to  this 
star  greater  than  that  of  61  Cygni,  measures  were  made 
to  determine  accurately  this  parallax.  The  result 
showed  the  star  has  no  parallax. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Companions  of 
Procyon.    Ibid.,  16. 

The  measures  show  that  the  small  star  has  a  direct 
motion  of  about  5°  annually,  while  the  distance  in- 
creases about  0  ri4  a  year.   • 

Observation  of  Eros.    Ibid.,  XXI  (1900),  21. 

Observations  of  the  Stars  Krueger  60  and  /3 
1291.    Ibid.,  64:. 

The  star  p  1291^  though  a  small  star,  has  a  large  proper 
motion.  A  series  of  measures  was  made  of  it  and  sur- 
rounding stars  to  determine  this  motion. 

Some  Abnormal  Stars  in  the  Cluster  M 13  Her- 
culis.  Astrophysical  Journal,  XII  (1900), 
176-181. 

A  few  stars  are  found  in  the  cluster  which  shine  with  a 
bluer  light  than  the  others,  and  which  make  a  stronger 
impression  on  the  photographic  plate  than  ujKm  the 
eve.  Some  of  these,  though  relatively  bright  on  the 
photographs,  are  extremely  faint  in  the  telescope.  It  is 
suggested  that  these  are  of  the  nature  of  planetary 
nebulae. 

Discovery  and  Period  of  a  Small  Variable  Star 
in  the  Cluster  M13  Herculis.    Ibid.,  182- 


184.    Also  Popular  Astronomy,  VIII  (1900), 

486-488. 

While  measuring  the  stars  in  this  cluster  with  the  40- 
inch,  this  star  was  found  to  be  variable  with  a  period 
of  5<12h24ni,  varying  from  the  14th  to  the  13th  magnitude. 
Observations  or  its  light  are  given  on  a  number  of  dates. 

The  Diameter  of  the  Asteroid  Juno  Determined 
with  the  Micrometer  of  the  40-inch  Re- 
fractor of  the  Yerkes  Observatory,  with  Re- 
marks on  Some  of  the  Other  Asteroids. 
Monthly  Notices  of  the  Royal  Astronomi- 
cal Sosiety,  LXI  (1900),  68^9. 

Additional  measures  of  the  diameter  of  Juno  made  at 
the  close  opposition  of  1900,  which  verify  the  measures 
made  previously  at  the  Lick  Observatory  in  1894  by  the 
writer. 

Micrometrical  Observations  of  the  Satellite  of 
Neptune  and  of  Stars  near  the  Planet. 
Astronomical  Journal,  XXII  (1901),  27-31. 

A  series  of  two  years'  measures  of  the  satellite,  with 
some  measures  of  the  diameter  of  Neptune.  The  planet 
was  also  measured  on  a  number  of  dates  with  respect 
to  surrounding  stars. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  Moesting  A,  Ptole- 
maeus  A,  and  Triesnecker  B.    Ibid.,  33. 

Measures  of  the  positions  of  three  lunar  craters  to  be 
used  as  a  standard  of  comparison  in  lunar  investiga- 
tions by  Professor  Saunder,  of  England. 

Pecularities  of  Focal  Observations  of  the  Plan- 
etary Nebulae,  and  Visual  Observations  of 
Nova  Persei  with  the  40-inch  Telescope. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  XIV  (1901),  151- 
157. 

It  is  shown  that  on  account  of  the  difference  in  the 
nature  of  the  light  of  a  nebula  and  a  star  the  focus  for 
the  nebulae,  when  viewed  with  a  refracting  telescope,  is 
about  a  quarter  of  an  inch  farther  away  from  the  object 
glass  than  for  a  star.  A  table  for  such  difference  is 
given.  Attention  is  called  to  peculiarities  in  the  ap 
pearance  of  Nora  Persei,  marking  it  as  very  distinctly 
different  in  appearance  from  the  ordinary  star.  Meas- 
ures of  surrounding  stars  are  given. 

Recent  Observations  of  Nova  Aurigae. 
Monthly  Notices  of  the  Royal  Astronom- 
ical Society,  LXII  (1901),  61-65. 

Presents  new  measures  of  the  position  of  this  star  and 
shows  that  it  has  not  changed  its  position  sensibly 
since  its  appearance  in  1892,  but  that  it  has  faded 
greatly  in  recent  years. 

Further  Observations  of  Nova  Aurigae. 
Ibid.,  65. 

Observations  are  here  given  of  the  magnitudes  of  the 
Nova  and  surrounding  stars  which  have  been  micro- 
metrically  measured. 

On  a  Method  of  Handling  Large  Photographic 
Plates  to  be  Used  at  the  Total  Eclipse  of  the 
Sim  in  Sumatra,  May  18,  1901.    Popular 


92 


Publications 


Astronomy,  IX  (1901),  269-271.  Reprinted 
from  Camera  Craft,  San  Francisco. 

It  is  proposed  to  support  the  largest  plate,  forty  inches 
square,  in  a  vertical  sliding  frame  suitably  counter- 
poised so  that  it  can  be  raised  or  lowered  into  position 
like  a  window  sash. 

Total  Eclipse  of  the  Sun  in  Sumatra.  With 
15  half-tone  engravings.    Ibid.,  527-544. 

Lunar  Phenomenon,  January  19,  1902.  Na- 
ture, LXVI  (1902),  5-6. 

This  remarkable  phenomenon  consisted  of  two  great 
haloes,  one  symmetrical  with  respect  to  the  moon,  the 
other  cutting  through  the  moon  with  its  center  near 
the  zenith.  No  satisfactory  explanation  of  the  phe- 
nomenon has  been  offered. 

On  the  Dimensions  of  the  Planets  and  Satel- 
lites, and  on  the  Surface  Features  of  Some 
of  These  Bodies.  Astronomische  Nach- 
richten,  CLVII  (1902),  261-268. 

A  collection  of  all  the  writer's  determinations  of  the 
diameters  of  the  planets,  satellites,  and  asteroids  of 
the  solar  system,  made  with  the  36-inch  refractor  of  the 
Lick  Observatory  and  with  the  40-inch  refractor  of  the 
Yerkes  Observatory.  Brief  accounts  are  given  of  the 
surface  appearance  of  the  planets  Mercury  and  Venus. 
An  attempt  was  made  to  determine  the  amount  of  the 
effect  of  irradiation  on  the  diameter  measures  of  the 
planet  Venus  by  a  series  of  observations  made  in  the 
day  time  and  a  similar  series  made  at  night.  The  dif- 
ferences between  the  night  and  day  measures  show  that 
the  former  are  larger  than  the  latter  by  about  J4-second 
of  arc.  It  is  suggested  that  if  with  such  a  brilliant 
object  as  Vemts  this  value  is  so  small,  it  can  have  no 
sensible  effect  on  the  apparent  sizes  of  the  images  of 
the  satellites  and  asteroids. 

Micrometrical  and  Visual  Observations  of  Nova 
Cygni  (1876)  Made  with  the  40-inch  Re- 
fractor of  the  Yerkes  Observatory.  Monthly 
Notices  of  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society, 
LXII  (1902),  405^19. 

A  series  of  micrometer  measures  was  made  of  the  posi- 
tion of  the  star  with  reference  to  nine  stars  near  it. 
These  showed  considerable  discordances  when  com- 
pared with  measures  of  the  same  stars  made  twenty- 
five  years  before  by  Copeland  and  Lohse,  which  might 
imply  motion  in  the  Nova.  Comparisons  were  then 
made  with  certain  known  stars  and  the  position  of  the 
Nova  accurately  determined ;  this  position,  compared 
with  meridian  observations  made  when  the  Nova  was 
bright  in  1876,  showed  a  discordance  of  only  0.06  in  R. 
A  and  0  f  36  in  S,  thus  proving  that  no  measurable  motion 
had  occurred  in  the  position  of  Nova  in  a  quarter  of  a 
century.  The  present  brightness  of  the  Nova  from  these 
observations  is  below  15th  magnitude. 

On  the  Probable  Motion  of  Some  of  the  Small 
Stars  of  the  "Dumb  Bell"  Nebula  {M  27, 
N.  G.  C.  6853).    Ibid.,  466-468. 

The  present  paper  gives  micrometer  measures  of  these 
stars  made  with  the  36-inch  telescope  of  the  Lick  Ob- 
servatory and  the  40-inch  of  the  Yerkes,  which  verify 
the  photographic  measures.  It  is  suggested  that  in  all 
probability  there  has  been  no  actual  displacement  of 
the  stars  since  the  time  of  Struve,  but  from  the  method 
of  measurement  used  by  Struve  in  this  case,  large  errors 
had  occurred  which  would  account  for  the  differences. 


Observations  of  Nova  Persei,  1901.  Illustrated. 
Astronomische  Nachrichten,  CLIX  (1902), 
49-58. 

A  series  of  eighty  micrometer  determinations  of  the 
position  of  the  Nova  with  reference  to  fourteen  small 
stars  near  it,  made  with  the  large  telescope.  These 
measures,  extending  from  July  30, 1901,  to  March  25, 1902, 
show  no  certain  motion  of  the  Nova  nor  any  parallactic 
displacement.  The  paper  also  contains  a  long  list  of 
determinations  of  the  brightness  of  the  Nova,  which 
show  that  in  the  first  part  of  August,  1901,  it  was  of  the 
66  magnitude,  and  that  it  had  faded  to  the  9.0  magni- 
tude by  April  15, 1902. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Position  of  the 
Minor  Planet  Eros  for  the  Determination  of 
the  Solar  Parallax.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
VIII,  77-116. 

One  thousand,  five  hundred  and  six  measures  in  right 
ascension  and  declination  were  made  on  seventy-three 
nights  with  the  40-inch.  These  are  to  be  used  in  com- 
bination with  measures  made  in  Europe  and  elsewhere 
at  the  same  time  for  a  new  determination  of  the  dis- 
tance of  the  sun. 

Review  of 

Burnham,  General  Catalogue  of  1290  Double 
Stars  Discovered  from  1871  to  1899  by  S. 
W.  Burnham.  Astrophysical  Journal,  XII 
(1900),  228-236. 

Edwin  Brant  Frost  [1898 — ],  Professor 
of  Astrophysics  and  Astrophysicist  at 
the  Yerkes  Observatory. 

Note  on  New  Gases  in  the  Earth's  Atmosphere. 

Astrophysical  Journal,  VIII  (1898),  121- 

122. 
Variable  Velocity  of  Polaris.    Ibid.,  X  (1899), 

184-185. 
On  Titanium   for    a    Comparison    Spectrum. 

Ibid.,  207-208. 
Corrections    to    Determinations    of    Absolute 

Wave-Length.    Ibid.,  283-285. 
Notes  on  the  Reduction  of  Stellar  Spectra. 

Science,  New  Series,  X  (1899),  845. 
The  Astronomical  and  Astrophysical  Society  of 

America.    Ibid.,  785-795;  841-849. 

The  report  by  the  acting  secretary  of  the  first  meeting 
of  the  society. 

Spectroscopic  Results  Obtained  at  the  Total 
Eclipse  of  May  28,  1900.  Astrophysical 
Journal,  XII  (1900),  307-351. 

A  description  is  given  of  the  apparatus  employed  and 
of  the  methods  used  for  the  redaction  of  (he  measure 


Department  of  Asteonomy  and  Astrophysics 


93 


ments  of  the  plates  obtained.  Measures  of  the  wave- 
lengths of  3S2  bright  lines  in  the  "flash-spectrum  "  are 
detailed  in  tables,  and  it  is  shown  that  these  correspond 
to  the  stronger  dark  lines  of  the  ordinary  solar  spec- 
trum, with  certain  exceptions.  The  existence  of  a  thin 
"reversing  layer"  at  the  base  of  the  solar  chromo- 
sphere is  thus  confirmed. 

Nova  Persei.  Astronomical  Journal,  XXII 
(1901),  104. 

Notes  on  the  Visual  Spectrum  of  Nova  Persei. 
Ibid.,  114-115. 

The  Bruce  Spectrograph  of  the  Yerkes  Ob- 
servatory. Astrophysical  Journal,  XV 
(1902),  1-27. 

A  description  of  this  new  accessory  of  the  40-inch  tele- 
scope, which  is  designed  for  the  determination  of  the 
velocities  of  the  stars  in  the  line  of  sight  from  the  dis- 
placements of  the  lines  in  stellar  spectra.  The  guiding 
principles  in  the  design  and  construction  of  the  instru- 
ment (chiefly  accomplished  in  the  observatory  shops) 
are  detailed,  together  with  an  account  of  the  mode  of 
measurement  and  reduction,  with  an  example. 

The  Spectroscopic  Binary  yS  Cephei.  Ibid.,  S40- 
341. 

A  statement  of  the  observations  leading  to  the  discov- 
ery of  the  binary  character  of  this  stellar  system,  with 
the  Bruce  si)ectrograph. 

Radial  Velocities  of  Twenty  Stars  Having 
Spectra  of  the  Orion  Type.  In  collabora- 
tion with  Walter  Sidney  Adams.  3  plates. 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  VIII,  143-253. 

Revietcs  of 

Vogel  and  Wilsing,  Spectra  von  528  Stemen. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  X  (1899),  362-367. 

McClean,  Comparative  Photographic  Spectra 
of  Stars.    Ibid.,  367-368. 

McClean,  Spectra  of  Southern  Stars.  Ibid., 
368-369. 

Scheiner,  Photographische  Himmelskarte,  I. 
Ibid.,  XII  (1900),  297-303. 

Scheiner,  Strahlung  und  Temperatur  der  Sonne. 
Ibid.,  303-305. 

Huggins,  Representative  Stellar  Spectra.  /Sci- 
ence, N.  S.,  XIII  (1901),  222-224. 

Andr6,  Astronomie  Stellaire.    Ibid. ,618-619. 

Lockyer,  Inorganic  Evolution  as  Studied  by 
Spectnmii  Analysis.  Ibid.,  XV  (1902),  584- 
586. 


Kurt  Laves  [1893 — ],  Assistant  Profes- 
sor of  Astronomy. 

Der  Coeflficient  der  sogenannten  lunaren  Gleich- 
ung  der  Erdbewegung  und  die  Verwerth- 
barkeit  derselben  fiir  die  Kenntniss  des 
Hauptglieder  der  Nutation.  Astronomische 
Nachrichten,  CXXXII  (1893),  177-188. 

The  conclusion  is  reached  that  through  the  lunar  equa- 
tion the  mass  of  the  moon  may  be  advantageously 
determined.  This  finally  leads  to  a  determiaation  of 
the  constant  of  nutation. 

On  the  Determination  of  the  Principal  Term  of 
the  Nutation.  Astronomical  Journal,  XIV 
(1894),  33-36. 

In  reply  to  a  criticism  of  Professor  Simon  Newcomb  it 
is  shown  by  an  inspection  of  the  original  manuscripts 
of  Le  Verrier  that  the  contention  of  the  author  with 
regard  to  the  definition  of  the  constant  of  the  lunar 
equation  is  proved  to  be  correct.  The  probable  error 
or  the  constant  of  nutation  is  shown  to  be  =  0  f012. 

On  the  Formulas  of  Precession  for  the  Equa- 
torial and  Ecliptical  Co-ordinates.  Ibid., 
XV  (1895),  57-60. 

W.  Foerster's  derivation  of  the  formulas  of  precession 
for  equatorial  co-ordinates  are  transformed  so  as  to  be 
applicable  to  the  case  of  ecliptical  co-ordinates. 

Definitive  Determination  of  the  Orbit  of  Comet 
1879,  V.    Ibid.,  XVI  (1896),  9-16. 

A  set  of  123  complete  observations  of  the  comet  were 
available,  from  which,  by  a  method  of  least-squares 
reduction,  the  most  probable  elements  were  derived. 

On  the  Integration  of  the  Differential  Equa- 
tions of  Motion  in  the  Problem  of  Two 
Bodies.    Ibid.,  XVII  (1897),  73-76. 

Jacobi's  principle  of  the  last  multiplier  is  studied  for 
the  case  of  elliptic  motion  when  rectangular  co-ordi- 
nates are  employed  and  its  meaning  shown  for  polar 
co-ordinates. 

The  Ten  Integrals  of  the  Problem  of  n  Bodies 
for  Forces  Involving  the  Co-ordinates  and 
their  First  and  Second  Differentials.  Ibid., 
XIX  (1898),  97-104. 

When  "effective  potential  forces"  are  considered  in 
the  problem  of  n-bodies  it  is  shown  that  the  ten  inte- 
grals of  motion  will  be  admissible  only  if  certain  condi- 
tions are  placed  on  the  nature  of  these  forces.  The 
electrodynamical  laws  of  Weber,  Riemann,  and  Clau- 
sius  are  studied  in  particular;  it  is  shown  that  the 
former  two  will  fulfil  the  required  conditions,  whereas 
Clausius's  law  admits  but  seven  integrals  of  absolute 
motion. 

On  Some  Modern  Attempts  to  Replace  New- 
ton's Law  of  Attraction  by  Other  Laws. 
Popular  Astronomy,  V  (1898),  513. 

3p; 

and  the  actual  observations  of  some  of  the  planets  are 


Certain  discrepancies  between  the  tabulated  positions 

plai 
pointed  out.    It  is  shown  that  they  cannot  be  made  to 


disappear  by  the  assumption  of  any  known  law  of  uni- 
versal gravitation. 


94 


Publications 


On  the  Adjustment  of  the  Equatorial  Tele- 
scope.   Ibid.,  VIII  (1900),  424-437;  535-540. 

The  object  of  the  paper  is  to  furnish  the  mathematical 
theory  of  the  errors  of  the  equatorial  to  one  familiar 
with  plane  trigonometry.  An  introduction  to  spherical 
trigon  >metry  is  given  and  therefrom  the  principal  ques- 
tions are  derived.  The  errors  of  the  instrument  are  set 
forth  and  methods  are  explained  to  correct  the  obser- 
vations for  their  influence. 

An  Ancient  Astronomical  Instnunent.  Ibid., 
492-493. 

Calls  attention  to  a  primitive  ancient  instrument  by 
means  of  which  differences  of  latitude  were  measured. 

Maupertius'  Princip  der  kleinsten  Wirkung  ftir 
Krafte,  die  ein  effectives  Potential  zulassen. 
Astronoynische  Nachrichten,  CLII  (1900), 
861-366. 

A  continuation  of  the  study  of  effective  potential  forces, 
for  which  the  principle  of  least  action  is  proved  to  hold. 

On  the  Rotary  Motion  of  a  Body  of  Variable 
Form.  Astronomical  Journal,  XXII  (1901), 
61-72. 

Note  on  my  Article  in  No.  445  of  the  Astro- 
nomical Journal.    Ibid.,  62-63. 

A  Kinematic  Study  of  Hansen's  Ideal  Co-ordi- 
nates.   Science,  XV  (1901),  296-297. 

On  the  Computation  of  Laplace's  CoeflScients 
by  means  of  Gyld6n's  Tables.    Ibid.,  297. 

The  Orbit  of  the  Planet  334  Chicago.  Article 
in  The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial 
Publications,  First  Series,  VIII. 

The  expressions  for  the  perturbative  function,  and  its 
derivative  with  respect  to  the  major  axis,  are  given, 
up  to  and  including  the  fourth  degree  of  small  quanti- 
ties in  the  periodic  terms,  and  up  to  and  including  the 
sixth  degree  in  the  secular  terms.  It  is  hoped  that  the 
paper  will  be  useful  in  a  twofold  way :  that  it  will  con- 
tribute a  check  for  future  theories  of  orbits  of  this  type 
of  small  planets  that  will  not  start  from  the  Keplerian 
ellipse  as  a  first  approximation,  and  that  it  will  lead 
toward  a  redetermination  of  the  mass  of  Jupiter. 


FoEEST  Eay  Moulton  [1896 — ],  In- 
structor in  Astronomy. 

Introduction  to  Celestial  Mechanics.  Royal 
8vo,  XV +384.  New  York,  The  Macmillan 
Co.,  1902. 

On  the  Best  Method  of  Solving  the  Markings 
of  Judges  of  Contests.  American  Mathe- 
matical Monthly,  V  (1898),  67-73. 

The  law  of  individual  error  is  investigated,  and  then 
the  best  means  of  combining  the  results.  The  conclu- 
sion is  that  the  arithmetical  mean  of  the  markings  of 
all  the  judges  is  the  best  result  in  the  case  of  each  con- 
testant. 


Theory  of  the  Influence  of  a  Resisting  Medium 
upon  Bodies  Moving  in  Parabolic  Orbits. 
Astronomical  Journal,  XIX  (1898),  32-38. 

After  developing  the  theory  of  the  effect  of  a  resisting 
medium,  an  application  is  made  in  determining  an 
upper  limit  to  the  density  of  the  solar  corona  from  the 
resistance  to  the  motion  of  the  great  comet  of  1882.  The 
conclusion  is  reached  that,  at  a  distance  of  300,000  miles 
from  the  sun's  surface,  the  density  of  the  corona  must 
be  less  than  one  4,750,000th  of  that  of  the  nucleus  of  the 
comet. 

Theory  of  the  Determination  of  the  Elements 
of  a  Parabolic  Orbit  from  two  Observations 
of  Apparent  Position  and  one  of  Motion  in 
the  Line  of  Sight.  Astrophysical  Journal, 
X  (1899),  13-21. 

The  Limits  of  Temporary  Stability  of  Satellite 
Motion,  with  an  Application  to  the  Question 
of  the  Existence  of  an  Unseen  Body  in  the 
Binary  System  F.  70  Ophiuchi.  Astro- 
nomical Journal,  XX  (1899),  32-37. 

A  criterion  of  temporary  stability  is  developed  and  an 
application  is  made  to  the  supposed  dark  body  in  the 
binary  system  F.  70  Ophiuchi.  It  is  found  that  a  dark 
star  covud  not  have  existed  in  the  system  as  lias  been 
supposed. 

A  Graphical  Method  of  Finding  the  Elements 
of  a  Parabolic  Orbit.  Popular  Astronomy, 
VII  (1899),  192-201. 

The  Spheres  of  Activity  of  the  Planets.  Ibid., 
280-285. 

A  planet's  sphere  of  activity  is  defined  as  that  sphere 
within  which  it  can  i)ermanently  retain  a  satellite.  A 
mathematical  expression  is  developed  for  the  radius  of 
this  sphere,  and  it  is  computed  for  each  of  the  planets 
and  the  moon.  Next  the  greatest  angular  distance,  as 
seen  from  the  earth,  which  a  permanent  satellite  can 
have  is  computed  for  each  of  the  planets  and  the  moon. 

On  a  Class  of  Particular  Solutions  of  the  Prob- 
lem of  Four  Bodies.  Transactions  of  the 
American  Mathematical  Society,  I  (1900), 
16-29. 

The  case  is  considered  in  which  there  are  three  finite 
bodies  and  one  infinitesimal  body,  the  finite  bodies  mov- 
ing according  to  one  of  the  Lagrangian  solutions  of  the 
Problem  of  Three  Bodies.  It  is  then  proved  that  there 
are  twenty-eight,  and  no  more,  solutions  such  that  the 
position  of  the  infinitesimal  body  is  always  the  same 
with  respect  to  the  finite  bodies. 

An  Attempt  to  Test  the  Nebular  Hypothesis 
by  an  Appeal  to  the  Laws  of  Dynamics. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  XI  (1900),  102-130. 

The  methods  of  testing  the  theory  are  divided  into  three 
categories :  (1)  comparison  of  observed  phenomena  with 
those  which  result  from  the  expressed  or  implied  con- 
ditions maintained  by  the  hypothesis;  (2)  answers  to 
the  question  whether  the  supposed  initial  conditions 
could  have  developed  into  the  existing  system ;  (3)  com- 
parison of  those  properties  of  the  supposed  initial  sys- 
tem with  the  one  now  existing,  which  are  invariant  un- 
der all  changes  resulting  from  the  action  of  internal 


Department  of  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics 


95 


forces.  Every  test  points  to  a  condition  of  much  greater 
original  heterogeneity  than  has  heretofore  been  sup- 
posed, and  that  the  nebular  hypothesis  can  be  accepted 
only  with  radical  modifications. 

A  Meteoric  Theory  of  the  Gegenschein.    As- 
tronomical Journal,  XXI  (1900),  17-22. 

It  is  shown  that,  under  proper  initial  conditions,  a  par- 
ticle will  describe  a  closed  curve  around  a  point  op- 
posite to  the  sun  at  a  distance  of  920,000  miles  from  the 
earth.  If  the  necessary  initial  conditions  are  approxi- 
mately fulfilled  the  particle  will  revolve  around  the 
point  for  a  considerable  time.  It  is  suggested  that  the 
Gegenschein  is  due  to  a  multitude  of  meteors  which  are 
circulating  around  this  point. 

A  General  Method  of  Determining  the  Ele- 
ments of  Orbits  of  all  Eccentricities  from 


Ibid.,  XXII  (1901), 


Three  Observations. 
43  52. 

The  features  of  this  investigation  are :  (1)  its  complete 

generality;  (2)  its  mathematical  rigor;  and  (3)  its 
revity.  The  conditions  (1)  and  (2)  have  not  been  pre- 
viously fulfilled.  This  method  is  only  about  one-fifth 
as  long  as  those  in  ordinary  use  by  computers. 

A  Simple  Non-Desarguesian  Plane  Geometry. 
Transactions  of  the  American  Mathemat- 
ical Society,  III  (1902),  192-195. 

This  investigation  proves  some  important  theorems  an- 
nounced by  Hilbert  in  his  Grundlagen  der  Geometrie  in 
a  very  simple  manner  and  avoids  an  error  which  ap- 
peared in  Hubert's  method. 

On  Certain  Rigorous  Methods  of  Treating 
Problems  in  Celestial  Mechanics.  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  VIII,  117-142. 

The  object  of  this  paper  is  to  show  how  some  of  the 
most  impKjrtant  problems  in  celestial  mechanics  may 
be  treated  by  methods  which  are  rigorous,  at  least  un- 
der specified  conditions.  These  problems  depend  upon 
the  solution  of  differential  equations;  consequently 
the  principal  methods  of  integration  are  treated,  and 
the  manner  of  applying  them  to  astronomical  problems 
is  shown. 


George  Willis  Ritchey  [1897 — ],  In- 
structor in  Practical  Astronomy  and 
Superintendent  of  Instrument  Construc- 
tion, Yerkes  Observatory. 

A  Support  System  for  Large  Specula.  Astro- 
physical  Journal,  V  (1897),  143-147. 

A  description  of  a  new  form  of  support  system  for  the 
mirrors  or  si)ecula  of  large  reflecting  telescopes,  by 
which  "flotation"  or  uniform  support,  to  prevent  flex- 
ure of  the  mirror,  and  at  the  same  time  a  high  degree 
of  stability  of  iwsition  of  the  mirror  in  its  cell,  is 
secured. 

Celestial  Photography  with  the  40-inch  Visual 

Telescope  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory.   Ibid., 

XII  (1900),  352-360. 

An  account  of  the  method  of  photographingstar-clusters 
and  the  moon  with  the  40-inch  •  isual  telescope,  by  the 
aid  of  yellow  color  screens  and   photographic  plates 


sensitized  for  yellow  light.  A  description  of  the  pho- 
tographic attachment,  and  an  account  of  some  of  the 
results  secured,  are  included.  It  is  shown  that  the 
astronomical  photographs  obtained  by  this  method  are 
equal,  if  not  superior,  in  sharpness,  to  the  best  results 
which  are  obtained  with  the  great  photographic  refrac- 
tors. 

Nebulosity  about  Nova  Persei.  Ibid.,  XIV 
(1901),  167-168. 

An  account,  with  illustrations,  of  the  first  photograph 
obtained  with  the  2-foot  reflector  of  the  nebula  about 
the  new  star. 

The  Two-foot  Reflecting  Telescope  of  the 
Yerkes  Observatory.      J6id.,  217-233. 

An  illustrated  description  of  the  new  reflector ;  its  con- 
struction, and  its  use  in  the  photography  of  nebulae.  A 
brief  account  of  the  methods  of  testing  the  optical 
parts  of  this  telescope.  Mention  is  made,  and  an  illus- 
tration given,  of  the  5-foot  reflecting  telescope,  the 
optical  parts  of  which  are  nearly  finished. 

Changes  in  the  Nebulosity  about  Nova  Persei. 
Ibid.,  293-294. 

An  account,  with  illustrations,  of  the  discovery  of  rapid 
change  of  form  of  this  remarkable  nebula,  as  shown  in 
the  photographs  obtained  with  the  2-foot  reflector. 
The  nebula  is  shown  to  be  expanding  rapidly  in  all 
directions. 

Later  Photographs  of  the  Nebula  about  Nova 
Persei.    Ibid.,  XV  (1902),  129-131. 

A  preliminary  discussion  of  the  thirteen  negatives  of 
the  nebula  about  Nova  Persei  obtained  with  the  2-foot 
reflector  between  September  20, 1901,  and  March  5, 1902. 
Illustrated  with  five  plates. 

Astronomical  Photography  with  the  40-inch 
Refractor  and  the  Two-foot  Reflector  of  the 
Yerkes  Observatory.  With  16  plates.  Ar- 
ticle in  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  First  Series,  VIII. 


Ferdinand  Ellerman  [1892 — ],  Instruc- 
tor in  Astrophysics  at  the  Yerkes  Ob- 
servatory. 

On  the  Spectra  of  Stars  of  Secchi's  Fourth 
Type.  In  collaboration  with  George  EUery 
Hale.    (See  above.) 

The  Spectra  of  Stars  of  Secchi's  Foiuih  Type. 
In  collaboration  with  George  Ellery  Hale 
and  John  Adelbert  Parkhurst.    (See  above.) 

Walter  S.  Adams  [1898-1900;  1901—], 
Assistant  at  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 

The  Polar  Compression  of  Jupiter.  Astro- 
nomical Journal,  XX  (1899)  133. 

A  theoretical  determination  of  the  compression  pf  the 
planet  from  observations  of  the  motion  of  the  line  of 
aijsides  of  the  fifth  satellite  made  by  Professor  Barnard 
with  the  Yerkes  telescope. 


96 


Publications 


The  Variable  Velocity  of  c  Leonis  in  the  Line 
of  Sight.  Astrophysical  Journal,  XI  (1900), 
307-308. 

Announcement  of  the  variation  of  velocity  of  this  star 
from  photographs  of  its  spectrum. 

The  Curvature  of  the  Spectral  Lines  in  the 
Spectroheliograph.    Ibid.,  309-311. 

Derivation  of  the  equations  of  the  curves  assumed  by 
the  spectral  lines  on  emergence  from  prisms  of  consid- 
erable height,  and  comparison  of  the  computed  results 
with  those  observed  in  the  case  of  the  prisms  of  the 
Yerkes  spectroheliograph. 

Observations  of  the  Earlier  Spectrum  of  Nova 
Persei.    Ibid.,  XIV  (1901),  158-166. 

Discussion  of  the  results  obtained  from  the  measure- 
ment and  reduction  of  the  Yerkes  Observatory  photo- 
graphs of  the  spectrum  of  this  star. 

Some  Results  with  the  Bruce  Spectrograph. 
Ibid.,  XV  (1902),  214-217. 

Announcement  of  the  variable  radial  velocities  of  o 
Persei  and  S  Librae.  Also  measures  of  the  radial  ve- 
locity of  Sirius  and  determination  of  the  parallax  of 
the  star  from  a  comparison  of  these  results  with  those 
obtained  at  Potsdam  in  1890.  Finally,  a  derivation  of 
the  wave-length  of  the  Mg  line  at  A  4481  from  fifteen 
photographs  of  the  spectra  of  stars  in  which  the  line 
occurs. 

Radial  Velocities  of  Twenty  Stars  Having 
Spectra  of  the  Orion  Type.  In  collabora- 
tion with  Edwin  Brant  Frost.    (See  above.) 


John  A.  Parkhurst  [1901 — ],  Assistant 
at  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 

Determination  of  the  Wedge  Constant  of  a 
Stellar  Photometer.  Astrophysical  Jour- 
nal, XIII  (1901),  249-259. 

In  preparing  for  co-operation  with  other  American 
observatories  in  the  work  of  determining  "Standards  for 
Faint  Stellar  Magnitude,"  the  wedge  constant  of  the 
photometer  to  be  used  was  determined  by  the  methods 
of  (1)  wheel  photometer,  and  (2)  standard  stars. 

Maximum  of  the  Variable  Star  2815  U  Gemi- 
norum.  Astronomical  Journal,  XXII 
(1902),  155. 

Contains  photometric  magnitudes  of  this  variable  star 
at  normal  light,  also  through  the  maximum  of  April, 
1902 ;  with  photometric  magnitudes  of  the  comparison 
stars,  and  micrometer  measures  of  the  three  nearest 
faint  comparison  stars. 

The  Spectra  of  Stars  of  Secchi's  Fourth  Type. 
In  collaboration  with  George  Ellery  Hale 
and  Ferdinand  Ellerman.  (See  above.) 


Norton  Adams  Kent  [1901 — ],  Assistant 
at  the  Yerkes  Observatory. 

Spark  Spectra  in  Liquids  and  Gases,  and  their 
Bearing  on  the  Spectra  of  Temporary  Stars. 
In  collaboration  with  George  Ellery  Hale. 
(See  above.) 

Frank  L.  O.  Wadsworth  [1896-98], 
Associate  Professor  of  Astrophysics; 
Director  of  the  Allegheny  Observatory. 

On  a  New  Form  of  Mounting  for  Reflecting 
Telescopes,  Devised  by  the  Late  Arthur 
Cowper  Ranyard.  Astrophysical  Journal 
V  (1897),  132-142. 

A  Note  on  a  New  Form  of  Fluid  Prism.  Ibid., 
149. 

Thermal  Measurements  with  the  Bolometer  by 
the  Zero  Method.    Ibid.,  268-276. 

Tables  of  the  Practical  Resolving  Power  of 
Spectroscopes.    Ibid.,  VI  (1897),  27-36. 

On  the  Resolving  Power  of  Telescopes  and 
Spectroscopes  for  Lines  of  Finite  Width. 
Memorie  della  Societd,  degli  Spettroscopisti 
Italiani,  XXVI  (1897),  2-22.  Also  Philo- 
sophical Magazine,  XLIII  (1897),  317-343. 

The  Application  of  the  Interferometer  to  the 
Measurement  of  Small  Angular  Deflections 
of  a  Suspended  System.  Physical  Review, 
IV  (1897),  480-497. 

Ueber  das  AuflOsungsvermOgen  von  Femrohren 
und  Spectroskopen  f tir  Linien  von  endlicher 
Breite.  Annalen  der  Physik  und  Chemie, 
LXI  (1897),  604-630. 

On  the  Conditions  which  determine  the  Lim- 
iting Time  of  Exposure  of  Photographic 
Plates  in  Astronomical  Photography.  As- 
tronomische  Nachrichten,  CXLIV  (1897) 
97-110. 

The  Effect  of  the  General  Illumination  of  the 
Sky  on  the  Brightness  of  the  Field  at  the 
Focus  of  a  Telescope.  Monthly  Notices  of 
the  Royal  Astronomical  Society,  LVII 
(1897),  586-589. 


Department  of  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics 


97 


A  Note  on  Spider  Lines.    Ibid.,  589-591. 

On  the  Conditions  which  Determine  the  Ulti- 
mate Optical  EflSciency  of  Methods  for  Ob- 
serving Small  Rotations,  and  on  a  Simple 
Method  of  Doubling  the  Accuracy  of  the 
Mirror  and  Scale  Method.  Philosophical 
Magazine,  XLIV  (1897),  83-97. 

On  the  Conditions  of  Maximum  Eflficiency  in 
Astrophotographic  Work.  Part  I:  General 
Theory  of  Telescopic  Images  of  Different 
Forms  of  Radiating  Sources.  Astrophys- 
ical  Journal,  VI  (1897),  119-135. 

A  Note  on  the  Effect  of  Heat  on  Phosphor- 
escence.   Ibid.,  153-155. 

Note  on  the  General  Theory  of  Telescopic 
Images.    Ibid.,  463. 

A  Comparison  of  the  Photographic  and  of  the 
Hand  and  Eye  Methods  of  Delineating  the 
Surface  Markings  of  Celestial  Objects. 
Popular  Astronomy,  V  (1897),  200-206. 

Astronomical  Photography.  Knowledge,  XX 
(1897),  193-195;  218-221. 

Sur  le  pouvoir  s6parateur  des  lunettes  et  de 
spectroscopes  pour  les  raies  de  largeurfinie. 
Journal  de  physique,  VI  (1897),  409. 

A  Determination  of  the  Specific  Resistance  and 
Temperature  Coefficient  of  Oil  in  Thin  Films 
and  the  Application  of  these  Results  to  the 
Measurement  of  the  Thickness  of  Oil  Films 
in  Journal  Bearings.  Physical  Review, 
V  (1897),  75-97. 

On  the  Photography  of  Planetary  Surfaces. 
Observatory,  XX  (1897),  333-341;  365-370; 
404-410. 

On  the  Conditions  Required  for  Attaining  Max- 
imum Accuracy  in  the  Determination  of 
Specific  Heat  by  the  Method  of  Mixtures. 
American  Journal  of  Science,  IV  (1897), 
265-282. 

On  the  Effect  of  the  Size  of  an  Objective  on  the 
Visibility  of  Linear  Markings  on  the  Plan- 
ets. Astronomical  Journal,  XVIII  (1897), 
41^5. 

On  the  Reduction  of  Observations.  Observa- 
tory, XX  (1897),  390-392. 


On  the  Theory  of  Lubrication  and  the  De- 
termination of  the  Thickness  of  the  Film  of 
Oil  in  Journal  Bearings.  Journal  of  the 
Franklin  Institute,  CXLIY  (1897),  442-462; 
CXLV  (1898),  61-71. 

On  the  Conditions  of  Maximum  Efficiency  in 
Astrophotographic  Work.  Part  II:  Effect 
of  Atmospheric  Aberration  on  the  Intensity 
of  Telescopic  Images.  Astrophysical  Jour- 
nal, VII  (1898),  70-76. 

A  Note  on  the  Discovery  of  an  Error  in  the 
Papers  of  Struve  and  Lord  Rayleigh  Deal- 
ing with  the  AppUcation  of  the  Principles 
of  the  Wave  Theory  to  the  Determination  of 
the  Intensity  of  the  Images  of  Fine  Lines 
and  Extended  Areas  at  the  Focus  of  a  Tele- 
scope.   Ibid.,  77-85. 

A  Note  on  the  Figuring  and  Use  of  Eccentric 
and  Unsymmetrical  Forms  of  Parabolic  Mir- 
rors.   Ibid.,U6-U9. 

Notes  on  the  Use  of  the  Grating  in  Stellar 
Spectroscopic  Work.    Ibid.,  198-208. 

A  Note  on  an  Error  in  the  Expression  for  the 
Intensity  of  Illumination  at  the  Focal  Plane 
of  a  Telescope  due  to  an  Infinitely  Ex- 
tended Luminous  Area.  Astronomical 
Journal,  XVIII  (1898),  124-126. 

A  Note  on  a  New  Form  of  Mirror  for  Reflecting 
Telescopes.  Popular  Astronomy,  V  (1898), 
518-524. 

On  the  *'  Worthlessness "  of  Methods  of  Geo- 
metrical Optics  in  Dealing  with  the  Prob- 
lems Relating  to  the  Definitive  and  the 
Delineating  and  Resolving  Power  of  Tele- 
scopes.   Ibid.,  528-536. 

A  Note  on  the  Result  Concerning  Diffraction 
Phenomena  Recently  Criticised  by  Mr.  New- 
all.  Monthly  Notices  of  the  Royal  Astro- 
nomical Society,  LVIII,  286-291. 

Review  of 

Braun,  Die  Gravitations  Constante,  die  Masse 
imd  mittlere  Dichte  der  Erde.  Astrophys- 
ical Journal,  VI  (1897),  157-163. 

(See  also  under  Physics,  p.  103.) 


98 


Publications 


Thomas  Jefferson  Jackson  See  [1892- 
98  ] ,  Instructor  in  Astronomy ;  Professor 
of  Mathematics,  United  States  Naval 
Observatory,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Researches  on  the  Evolution  of  the  Stellar 
Systems.  Vol.  I:  On  the  Universality  of 
the  Law  of  Gravitation,  and  on  the  Orbits 
and  General  Characteristics  of  Binary  Stars. 
4to,  258,  with  50  full  page  plates.  Lynn, 
Mass.,  Nichols  Press,  1896. 

Explanation  of  the  Mystery  of  the  Egyptian 
Phoenix.  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics, 
XI  (1892),  457-461. 

Concluding  Note  on  the  Color  of  Sirius.  Ibid., 
550-552. 

Eight  Hundred  Measures  of  Double  Stars 
Made  with  the  Double-Image  Micrometer  of 
the  9-inch  Refractor  of  the  Royal  Observa- 
tory, Berlin.  Beobachtungsergebnisse  der 
koniglichen  Sternwarte  zu  Berlin,  VI  (1892), 
25-33. 

Die  Entwickelxmg  der  Doppelstem-Systeme. 
4to,  60,  with  8  lithographic  plates.  Berlin, 
R.  Friedlander  &  Sohn,  1892. 

Evolution  of  the  Double-Star  Systems.  As- 
tronomy and  Astrophysics,  XII  (1898),  289- 
302. 

On  the  Orbit  of  ^  Sagittarii.  Ibid.,  XII  (1893), 
510-511. 

On  a  Graphical  Method  of  Deriving  the  Ap- 
parent Orbit  of  a  Double  Star  from  the  Ele- 
ments.   Ibid.,  581-585. 

On  the  Spectroscopic  Application  of  Doppler's 
Principle  to  the  Motion  of  Binary  Stars  as 
a  Means  of  Improving  Stellar  Parallaxes 
and  Orbits,  and  as  an  Ultimate  Means  of 
Testing  the  Universality  of  the  Law  of  Gravi- 
tation.   Ibid.,  812-815. 

On  a  Practical  Method  of  Determining  Double 
Star  Orbits  by  a  Graphical  Process,  and  on 
the  Elements  fi  and  X.    Ibid.,  865-871. 

On  the  Orbits  of  Double  Stars.  Astronomische 
Nachrichten,  CXXXIII  (1893),  67-68. 


On  the  Orbit  of  a  Centauri.  Monthly  Notices 
of  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society,  LIV 
(1893),  102-117. 

The  Secular  Perturbations  of  Uranus  Arising 
from  the  Action  of  Neptune,  Determined  by 
the  Method  of  Gauss.  Astronomical  Jour- 
nal, XIV  (1894),  25-28. 

The  Locus  of  the  Center  of  Gravity  for  a  Ho- 
mogeneous Ellipsoid  of  Revolution  Differ- 
ing but  Little  from  a  Sphere.  Astronomy 
and  Astrophysics,  XIII  (1894),  627-632. 

A  General  Method  for  Facilitating  the  Solu- 
tion of  Kepler's  Equation  by  Mechanical 
Means.  Monthly  Notices,  LV  (1895),  425- 
429. 

Observations  of  Sirius  in  Ancient  Times.  Pop- 
ular Astronomy,  II  (1895),  193-198. 

On  the  Stability  of  the  Equilibrium  of  the 
Oceans.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1895),  178-182. 

The  Study  of  Physical  Astronomy.  Ibid., 
249-255;  289-295;  337-343. 

Provisional  Elements  of  the  Orbit  of  F.  4 
Aquarii='^2129.  Astronomical  Journal, 
XV  (1895),  33-35. 

Peculiar  Illumination  of  the  Moon  during  the 
Total  Eclipse  of  March  10.    Ibid.,  38. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  02285.  Ibid., 
161-162. 

Elements  of  the  Orbit  of  S  3121.  Ibid.,  101- 
102. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  y  Virginis.    Ibid., 

129-132. 
Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  ^  Herculis.    Ibid., 

169-171. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  /8  Delphini.  Ibid., 
171-173. 

Elements  of  the  Orbit  of   k  Pegasi=ft  989. 

Astronomische    Nachrichten,     CX  XXVII 

(1895),  360-361. 
New  Elements  of  the  Orbit  of  9  Argrws =/8 101. 

Ibid.,  CXXXVIII  (1895),  149-152. 
Researches    on    the    Orbit  fj,^  Bo6tis='S,  1938. 

Ibid.,  345-350. 


Department  of  Astronomy  and  Astrophysics 


99 


Kesearches  on  the  Orbit  of  2  2173.  Ibid.,  369- 
372. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  y  Coronae  Austra- 
lis.    Ibid.,  CXXXIX  (1895),  169-172. 

Theory  of  the  Determination,  by  Means  of  a 
Single  Spectroscopic  Observation,  of  the 
Absolute  Dimensions,  Masses  and  Paral- 
laxes of  Stellar  Systems  whose  Orbits  are 
Known  from  Micrometrical  Measurements; 
with  a  Rigorous  Method  for  Testing  the 
Universality  of  the  Law  of  Gravitation. 
Astronomische  Nachrichten,  CXXXIX 
(1895),  17-26. 

On  the  Theoretical  Possibility  of  Determining 
the  Distances  of  Star  Clusters  and  of  the 
Milky  Way,  and  of  Investigating  the  Struc- 
ture of  the  Heavens  by  Actual  Measure- 
ment.   Ibid.,  161-164. 

Elements  of  the  Orbit  of  S  Equulei  -  02  553. 
Astronomische  Nachrichten,  CXXXVIII 
(1895),  25-28. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  ^  Bodtis='S,  1888. 
Ibid.,  CXXXIX  (1895),  341-344. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  rj  CassiopeicB='S,&). 
Astronomical  Journal,  XV  (1895),  54-56. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  Double  Stars  Made 
with  the  26-inch  Refractor  of  the  Leander 
McCormick  Observatory  of  the  University 
of  Virginia  from  April  11  to  May  5.  Ibid., 
97-98. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  ^  Sagittarii.  Ibid., 
156-157. 

Perturbations  in  the  Motion  of  F  70  Ophiuchi. 
Ibid.,  180. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  Double  Stars  Made 
with  the  40-cm.  Refractor  of  the  Washburn 
Observatory  of  the  University  of  Wisconsin. 
Ibid.,  188-191. 

Rediscovery  and  Measurement  of  the  Com- 
panion to  Sirius  at  the  Lowell  Observatory. 
Ibid.,  XVII  (1896),  1-2. 

Orbit  of  42  Comae  Berenicis.  Monthly  Notices 
of  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society,  LVI 
(1896),  511-515. 


A  Sketch  of  the  New  24-inch  Refractor  of  the 
Lowell  Observatory.  Popular  Astronomy, 
IV  (1896),  297-300. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  70  Ophiuchi  and  on 
a  Periodic  Perturbation  of  the  System  aris- 
ing from  the  Action  of  an  Unseen  Body. 
AstronomicalJournal,  XVI  (1896),  17-23. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  99  Herculis.   Ibid., 

XVI  (1896),  41^2. 

New  Elements  of  the  Orbit  of  pi\Q=Lac.  7215. 

Ibid.,  92-93. 
Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  y  Coronae  Borealis. 

Ibid.,  125-127. 

Results  of  the  Researches  on  the  Orbits  of  40 
Binary  Stars.  (Read  before  the  National 
Academy  of  Sciences  at  the  Washington 
Meeting,  April  22,  1896.)  Ibid.,  137-140. 

Discovery  of  Three  Brilliant  Stellar  Systems 
in  the  Southern  Hemisphere.  Ibid.,  XVII 
(1896),  93-94. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  toLeonis.  Astro- 
nomische Nachrichten,  CXXXVIII  (1896), 
373-378. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  ^  Ursae  Majoris. 
Ibid.,  CXXXIX  (1896),  163-170. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  85  Pegasi= fi  133. 

Ibid.,  CXL  (1896),  33-35. 
Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  cr  Coronae  Borealis. 

Ibid.,  35-40. 
Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  y  Centauri.    Ibid., 

40-44. 
Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  rj  Coronae  Borealis 

2 1937.    Ibid.,  CXLI  (1896),  7-12. 

Discovery  of  a  Companion  to  0  Scorpii.  Ibid., 
CXLII  (1897),  43-44. 

On  the  Magnitude  of  the  Variable  Star  ri  Ca- 
rinae    in    1897.      Astronomical   Journal, 

XVII  (1897),  119. 

Note  on  the  Double  Star  /t  Velorum  (Russell 
155.)    J6id.,  119. 

On  a  new  Binary  of  Short  Period  in  the  Con- 
stellation Dorado =/i  3683.  Monthly  No- 
tices of  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society, 
LVII  (1897),  398-401. 


100 


Publications 


Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Double  Stars 
in  the  Great  Nebulae  and  Cluster  Surround- 
ing -q  Carinae,  made  with  the  24-inch  Re- 
fractor of  the  Lowell  Observatory.  Ibid., 
541-547. 

On  a  New  Binary  Star  with  a  Period  of  5^  Years. 
Ibid.,  577-583. 

Discovery  of  Three  Close  Southern  Binaries, 
^Velorum,  Welorum  and  \Lupi,  Made 
with  the  24-inch  Refractor  of  the  Lowell 
Observatory.  Astronomische  Nachrichten, 
CXLIII  (1897),  59-60. 

New  Double  Stars  in  the  Southern  Hemisphere 
Discovered  at  the  Lowell  Observatory. 
Ibid.,  413-416. 

Atmospheric  Conditions  Essential  to  the  Best 
Telescopic  Definition.  Ibid.,  CXLIV  (1897), 
81-86. 

On  the  Cause  of  Certain  Rays  and  Fringes 
Noticed  about  Images  of  the  Fixed  Stars. 
Ibid.,  85-88. 

On  the  Cause  of  the  Failure  of  Photography 
to  Depict  Delicate  Phenomena  which  are 
Projected  into  a  Luminous  Field.  Ibid., 
267-270. 

The  Physical  Significance  of  the  Rotation  Pe- 
riods of  Mercury  and  Venus,  established 
by  Mr.  Lowell's  Recent  Observations.  Pop- 
ular Astronomy,  IV  (1897),  533-535. 

The  Study  of  Planetary  Detail.  Ibid.,  550- 
555. 

The  Aims  of  Stellar  Astronomy.  Ibid.,  V 
(1897),  194-200. 

On  the  Study  of  Astronomy  and  on  Educa- 
tional Ideals.    Ibid.,  429-434. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  70  Ophiuchi,  with 
Remarks  on  the  Perturbations  of  the  Sys- 
tem. Astronomical  Journal,  XVII  (1897), 
180-181. 

Remarks  on  the  Rediscovery  of  the  Companion 
of  Sirius,  and  on  the  Elements  of  the  Orbit. 
Ibid.,  XVIII  (1897),  75-77. 

Measures  of  the  Fifth   Satellite  of  Jupiter. 

Ibid.,  XIX  (1898),  52. 
Researches  on  the  System  of  Procyon.    Ibid., 

57-61. 


Discoveries  and  Measures  of  500  Double  and 
Multiple  Stars  in  the  Southern  Hemisphere, 
made  with  the  61 -cm.  Refractor  of  the 
Lowell  Observatory.  Astronomical  Jour- 
nal, XVIII  (1898),  181-218. 

On  the  Nature  of  the  Small  Air  Waves  Visible 
in  Currents  Observed  through  Telescopes. 
Ibid.,  353-356. 

On  the  Cause  of  the  Scintillation  of  the  Fixed 
Stars.    Ibid.,  355-360. 

Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  the  New  Binary 
yS  395 = 82  Ceti.    Ibid.,  359-362. 

On  the  Nature  of  the  Orbit  of  y  Lupi.  Monthly 
Notices  of  the  Royal  Astronomical  Society, 
LVIII  (1898),  15-18. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  the  Double  Stars 
P  883,  Sirius,  and  Procyon.   Ibid.,  385-387. 

Further  Researches  on  the  Orbit  of  y  Lupi. 
Ibid.,  450-453. 

Comparison  of  the  Atmospheric  Conditions  in 
the  Central  and  Eastern  Portions  of  the 
United  States  with  those  in  the  High  Pla- 
teaus of  the  South  West.  Popular  As- 
tronomy, VI  (1898),  65-70. 

Jupiter's  Satellites  Visible  to  the  Naked  Eye. 
Ibid.,  257-261. 

Micrometrical  Measures  of  Double  and  Mul- 
tiple Stars  in  the  Southern  Hemisphere, 
Made  with  the  61-cm.  Refractor  of  the 
Lowell  Observatory.  Astronomische  Nach- 
richten, CXLVI  (1898),  225-294. 

FoBEST  Ray  Moulton,  Ph.D.  1899.  (See 
above.) 

S.  A.  Mitchell,  Graduate  student. 

The  Direct  Concave  Grating  Spectroscope. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  X  (1899),  29-39. 

A  continuation  of  work  begun  in  the  Johns  Hopkins 
University,  in  applying  Rowland's  concave  grating  to 
photographing  stellar  spectra.  Measures  made  on  the 
ultra-violet  hydrogen  series,  and  on  the  spectrum  of 
the  nebula  of  Orion. 


Department  op  Physics 


101 


Stanley  C.  Reese,  Graduate  student. 

The  Field  of  the  Reflecting  Telescope.  As- 
trophysical  Journal,  XII  (1900),  219- 
227. 

A  purely  theoretical  study  of  the  curvature  of  field  and 
the  shape  of  star-images  in  a  reflecting  telescope. 
The  analytical  methods  suggested  by  Kirchhoff  are 
adapted  to  the  case  of  the  paraboloid  of  revolution,  and 
general  formulae  are  derived  for  the  location  of  the  foci 
of  a  pencil  of  light  incident  on  any  portion  of  the 
reflecting  surface.  Deductions  are  made  against  the 
proposed  use  of  curved  photographic  plates. 


William  H.  Wright,  Graduate  student. 

A  Method  of  Correcting  the  Ciurvature  of  Lines 
in  the  Spectroheliograph.  /6.,V  (1897),  325-7. 

It  is  suggested  that  the  monochromatic  light  used  be 
returned  through  the  prism  train,  or  sent  through  an- 
other one  suitably  arranpred,  the  unused  parts  of  the 
spectrum  having  been  diaphragm<!d  out  in  the  focal 
plane.  The  method  has  in  addition  the  advantage  of 
correcting  imperfect  monochromatism,  and  distortions 
due  to  motion  in  the  line  of  sight. 

Review  of 

Travels,  Experiments  on  Helium.  Proceedings 
of  the  Royal  Society,  LX  (1897),  449-453. 


XIX.    PHYSICS 


A.  A.  Miohelson  [1892 — ],  Professor  and 
Head  of  the  Department  of  Physics. 

Valeur  du  m^tre.  4to,  237.  Paris,  Gauthier- 
Villars,  1894. 

A  description  of  the  author's  experimental  determina- 
tion of  the  length  of  the  standard  meter  in  terms  of  the 
wave-length  of  cadmium  light,  and  a  theoretical  dis- 
cussion of  the  instrument  (the  Michelson  interfero- 
meter) used  for  this  determination. 

Les  m6thodes  interf^rentielles  en  m6trologie  et 
I'^tablissement  d'une  longueur  d'onde  comme 
unit6  absolue  de  longueur.  Revue  g4n4rale 
des  sciences,  IV  (1893),  369-377.  Also  a 
translation  in  Nature,  XLIX  (1893),  56-61. 

A  brief  discussion  of  the  interferometer  and  its  appli- 
cation to  accurate  measurements. 

On  the  Conditions  which  Affect  the  Spectrum 
Photography  of  the  Sun.  Astrophysical 
Journal,  I  (1895),  1-10. 

A  theoretical  discussion  of  the  relative  merits  of  prisms 
and  gratings  in  the  spectro-photometry  of  the  sun  and 
a  determination  of  the  most  favorable  relation  between 
the  width  of  the  slit  and  the  dispersion  used. 

On  the  Broadening  of  the  Spectral  Lines  by 
Temperature  and  Pressure.  Ibid.,  II  (1895), 
251-264. 

A  theoretical  discussion  of  the  effects  of  temperature 
and  pressure  upon  the  width  of  the  spectral  lines. 

On  the  Limit  of  Visibility  of  Fine  Lines  in  a 
Telescope.    Ibid.,  60-68. 

A  theoretical  discussion  of  the  relation  between  the 
limit  of  resolution  of  a  telescope  and  the  limit  of  visi- 
bility of  fine  lines  in  the  telescope.  The  theoretical  con- 
clusions were  experimentally  confirmed. 

A  Theory  of  the  X-Rays.  American  Journal 
of  Science,  Fourth  Series,  I  (1896),  312-315. 
A  brief  presentation  of  the  ether- vortex  theory  of  x-rays. 


The  Som-ce  of  X-Rays.  In  collaboration  with 
S.  W.  Stratton.    Science,  III  (1896),  694-697. 

An  investigation  in  which  it  was  shown  that  the  x-rays 
originate  in  the  action  of  cathode  rays  upon  matter. 

The  Relative  Motion  of  the  Earth  and  Ether. 
American  Journal  of  Science,  Fourth  Se- 
ries, III  (1897),  475-479. 

The  description  of  an  experiment  which  shows  that  if 
the  ether  is  dragged  along  by  the  motion  of  the  earth  in 
its  orbit,  the  effect  must  extend  many  thousand  kilo- 
meters above  the  earth's  surface. 

Radiation  in  a  Magnetic  Field.  Philosophical 
Magazine,  Fifth  Series,  XLIV  (1897),  109- 
116. 

An  application  of  the  interferometer  to  the  study  of 
the  Zeeman  effect. 

A  Spectroscope  without  Prisms  or  Gratings. 
American  Journal  of  Science,  Fomth  Se- 
ries, V  (1898),  215-218. 

The  description  of  a  new  form  of  spectroscope  of  extra- 
ordinary resolving  power. 

Radiation  in  the  Magnetic  Field.  Astrophys- 
ical Journal,  VII  (1898),  130-139.  Also 
Philosophical  Magazine,  Fifth  Series,  XLV 
(1898),  348-356. 

A  study  of  the  Zeeman  effect  in  which  it  is  shown  to  bo 
much  more  complex  than  was  at  first  supposed. 

The  Echelon  Spectroscope.  Astrophysical 
Journal,  VIII  (1898),  37-49. 

A  description  of  the  new  form  of  spectroscope  and  a 
study  of  the  Zeeman  effect  by  means  of  it.  The  results 
obtained  with  the  interferometer  as  to  the  nature  of 
this  effect  were  confirmed. 

A  New  Harmonic  Analyzer.  In  collaboration 
with  S.  W.  Stratton.  American  Journal 
of  Science,  Fourth  Series,  V  (1898),  1-7. 


102 


Publications 


Also  Philosophical  Magazine,  Fifth  Series, 
XLV  (1898),  85-91. 

The  description  of  a  new  instrument  which  may  be 
nsed  (1)  for  finding  the  form  of  curve  resulting  from 
the  superposition  of  any  number  of  simple  harmonic 
curves,  and  (2)  for  resolving  any  complex  periodic  curve 
into  the  corresponding  series  of  simple  harmonic  curves. 

The  Echelon  Spectroscope.  Cambridge  Phi- 
losophical Transactions,  XVIII  (1899),  316- 
323. 

A  discussion  of  the  new  form  of  spectroscope,  with 
suggestions  as  to  its  further  perfection. 

Nouvelle  m^thode  de  tracer  et  d'observer  des 
divisions  de  precision  fornixes  par  des  traits 
lumineux  sur  fond  noir.  Proems  verhaux 
des  stances  du  ComiU  International  des 
Poids  et  Mesures,  XXV  (1899),  1-4. 

The  Velocity  of  Light.  The  University  of  Chi- 
cago Decennial  Publications,  First  Series, 
IX,  1-10. 

Light  Waves  and  Their  Uses.  8vo,  164.  With 
108  drawings  and  three  colored  plates. 
Ibid.,  Second  Series,  III. 

S.  W.  Steatton  [1892 — ],  Professor  of 
Physics ;  Director  of  the  United  States 
Bureau  of  Standards. 

A  College  Ck)urse  of  Laboratory  Experiments 
in  General  Physics.  In  collaboration  with 
R.  A.  Millikan.  8vo,  100.  Chicago,  Uni- 
versity Press,  1898. 

A  New  Apparatus  for  the  Production  of  High 
Pressure.  Philosophical  Magazine,  Fifth 
Series,  XXXVIII  (1894),  160. 

The  Source  of  X-Rays.  In  collaboration  with 
A.  A.  Mishelson.    (See  above.) 

A  New  Harmonic  Analyzer.  In  collaboration 
with  A.  A.  Michelson.    (See  above.) 


Manual  of  Advanced  Optics.  8vo,  193.  Chi- 
cago, Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1902. 

a  twelve  weeks'  course  in  advanced  optics  containing 
both  theoretical  discussions  and  laboratory  instruc- 
tions. 

The  Demagnetization  Factors  for  Cylindrical 
Rods.  Physical  Review,  III  (1896),  359- 
369. 

An  experimental  determination  of  the  factors  necessary 
to  reduce  the  magnetization  of  an  ellipsoid  to  that  of  a 
cylinder  which  has  the  same  ratio  of  its  axes  as  the 
ellipsoid. 

The  Echelon  Spectroscope.  Science,  Second 
Series,  VIII  (1898),  208-210. 

A  non-technical  description  of  the  new  spectroscope 
invented  by  Professor  Michelson. 

R.  A.  Millikan  [1896 — ],  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor of  Physics. 

A  College  Course  of  Laboratory  Experiments 
in  General  Physics.  In  collaboration  with 
S.  W.  Stratton.    (See  above.) 

The  Theory  of  Optics,  by  Paul  Drude.  In  col- 
laboration with  C.  R.  Mann.    (See  above.) 

Mechanics,  Molecular  Physics,  and  Heat.  8vo, 
242.    Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1902. 

A  twelve  weeks'  course  in  physics,  containing  both 
theoretical  discussion  and  laboratory  experiments. 

Eine  experimentelle  Prtifung  der  Clausius- 
Mossotischen  Formel.  Wiedemann's  An- 
nalen,  LX  (1897),  376-380. 

A  study  of  the  dependence  of  the  dielectric  constant  of 
a  medium  upon  the  period  of  the  vibration  used  for  its 
determination,  and  a  suggestion  as  to  the  cause  of  the 
anomalous  dispersion  of  electric  waves. 

New  Instruments  of  Precision  from  the  Ryer- 
son  Physical  Laboratory.  With  six  text 
figures.  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  IX, 
65-72. 

A  description  of  some  new  measuring  instruments,  de- 
vised in  part  by  the  author  and  in  part  by  S.  W.  Strat- 
ton: (1)  a  substitute  for  the  Atwood's  machine;  (2) 
a  "  moment  of  inertia  "  machine ;  (3)  a  Young's  modu- 
lus apparatus ;  (4)  a  vapor-tension  device. 


C.  R.  Mann  [1896 — ],  Assistant  Professor 
of  Physics. 

The  Theory  of  Optics,  by  Paul  Drude.  In  col- 
laboration with  R.  A.  Millikan  8vo,  542. 
New  York,  Longmans,  Green  &  Co.,  1902. 

A  comprehensive  and  advanced  text  on  optical  theory 
translated  from  the  Qerman. 


H.  G.  Gale  [1899—],  Instructor  in 
Physics. 

On  the  Relation  between  the  Index  of  Refrac- 
tion and  the  Density  of  Air.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Physical  Review,  XIV  (1902),  1-16. 

The  law  of  Gladstone  and  Dale  is  shown  to  be  correct 
within  one-tenth  of  one  per  cent,  up  to  a  pressure  of 
twenty  atmospheres. 


Depabtment  op  Physios 


103 


The  Interferometer.  American  Machinist, 
XXIV  (1901),  772-775;  799-802. 

A  discussion  of  the  applications  of  that  instrument  to 
the  accurate  testing  of  straight  edges  and  screws. 

F.  B.  Jewett  [1901 — |,  Research  Assis- 
tant. 

The  Vapor  Density  of  Sodium  at  Temperatures 
below  the  Boiling  Point.  Doctor's  thesis. 
London  Philosophical  Magazine,  Fifth  Se- 
ries, IV  (1892),  546-555. 

A  research  on  the  densities  of  sodium  vapor  at  tempera- 
tures between  the  melting  and  boiling  points  of  sodium. 
The  paper  contains  also  a  determination  of  the  vapor 
densities  of  mercury. 

Cabl  Kinsley  [1902 — ],  Instructor  in 
Physics. 

A  Systematic  Method  of  Calculating  the  Di- 
mensions of  Direct-Current  Dynamo-Electric 
Machines.  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  IX,  89- 
103. 

Frank  L.  O.  Wadswoeth  [1894—96], 
Assistant  Professor  of  Physics;  Direc- 
tor of  the  Allegheny  Observatory. 

Fixed  Arm  Spectroscopes.  Philosophical 
Magazine,  Fifth  Series,  XXXVIII  (1894), 
337-351.  Also  as  No.  9  of  the  series,  "The 
Modern  Spectroscope."  Astronomy  and 
Astrophysics  XIII  (1894),  835-849. 

Ein  neuer  Spektroskopspalt  mit  Doppelbewe- 
gung.  Zeitschrift  fiir  Instrumentenkunde, 
XIV  (1894),  364-366. 

A  Simple  Method  of  Mounting  an  Equatorial 
Axis  on  Ball  Bearings.  Astronomy  and 
Astrophysics,  XIII  (1894),  723-728. 

A  New  Method  of  Magnetizing  and  Astatizing 
Galvanometer  Needles.  Philosophical  Mag- 
azine, Fifth  Series,  XXXVIII  (1894),  482- 
488. 

An  Improved  Form  of  Interrupter  for  Large 
Induction  Coils.  American  Journal  of 
Science,  Third  Series,  XLVIII  (1894),  496- 
501. 


Description  of  a  Very  Sensitive  Form  of  Thom- 
son Galvanometer  and  Some  Methods  of 
Galvanometer  Construction.  Philosophical 
Magazine,  Fifth  Series,  XXXVIII  (1894), 
553-558. 

General  Considerations  Respecting  the  Design 
of  Astronomical  Spectroscopes.  No.  10  of 
the  series,  "The  Modem  Spectroscope." 
Astrophysical  Journal,  I  (1895),  52-79. 

Bemerkungen  tiber  Versilberringsfliissigkeiten 
und  Versilberung.  Zeitschrift  fiir  Instru- 
mentenkunde, XV  (1895),  22-27.  Also  As- 
trophysical Journal,  I  (1895),  252-260. 

The  Design  of  Electric  Motors  for  Constant 
Speed.    Ibid.,  169-177. 

Some  New  Designs  of  Combined  Grating  and 
Prismatic  Spectroscopes  of  the  Fixed  Arm 
Type  and  a  New  Form  of  Objective  Prism. 
No.  11  of  the  Series,  "The  Modem  Spectro- 
scope."   J6td.,  232-247. 

Einfacher  Unterbrecher  fur  grosse  Induktions- 
apparate.  Zeitschrift  fiir  Instrumenten- 
kunde, XV  (1895),  248-250. 

A  New  Multiple  Transmission  Prism  of  Great 
Resolving  Power.  No.  13  of  the  series, 
"  The  Modem  Spectroscope."  Astrophysical 
Journal,  II  (1895),  264-282. 

Fixed  Arm  Concave  Grating  Spectroscopes. 
No.  14  of  the  series,  "  The  Modem  Spectro- 
scope."   Ibid.,  310-382. 

A  Very  Simple  and  Accurate  Cathetometer. 
American  Journal  of  Science,  Fourth  Se- 
ries, I  (1896),  41^9.  Also  Philosophical 
Magazine,  Fifth  Series,  XLI  (1896),  123-133. 

The  Use  and  Moimting  of  the  Concave  Grating 
as  an  Analyzing  or  Direct  Comparison  Spec- 
troscope. No.  15  of  the  series,  "  The  Mod- 
ern Spectroscope."  Astrophysical  Journal, 
III  (1896),  47-62. 

A  Simple  Optical  Device  for  completely  Isolat- 
ing or  Cutting  Out  any  Desired  Portion  of 
the  Diffraction  Spectrum  and  Some  Further 
Notes  on  Astronomical  Spectroscope.  No.  16 
of  the  series,  "  The  Modern  Spectroscope." 
Ibid.,  149-192. 


104 


Publications 


A  Note  on  Mr.  Burch's  Method  of  Drawing 
Hyperbolas  and  on  a  New  Hyperbolagraph. 
Philosophical  Magazine,  Fifth  Series,  XLI 
(1896),  372-378. 

The  Conditions  of  Maximum  Eflficiency  in  the 
Use  of  the  Spectrograph.  No.  18  of  the 
series,  "  The  Modern  Spectroscope."  Astro- 
physical  Journal,  III  (1896),  321-347. 

The  Objective  Spectroscope.  No.  19  of  the 
series,  "  The  Modern  Spectroscope."  Ibid., 
IV  (1896),  54-78. 

A  Note  on  the  Preparation  of  Phosphorescent 
Barium  Sulphide.    Ibid,,  308-309. 

A  Note  on  a  Combined  Equatorial  Telescope 
and  Polar  Heliostat.    Ibid.,  310. 

Reviews  of 

Boy,  The  Newtonian  Constant  of  Gravitation. 
Astrophysical  Journal,  III  (1896),  303-311. 

Langley,  Report  on  the  Smithsonian  Astro- 
physical  Observatory  for  1895.  Ibid.,  398- 
401. 

Stoney,  Equipment  of  the  Astrophysical  Ob- 
servatory of  the  Future.  Ibid.,  IV  (1896), 
238-243. 

(See  also  under  Astronomy,  p.  96.) 

R.  F.  Eabhabt,  Ph.D.  1900;  Instructor 
in  Physics,  Rose  Polytechnic  Institute. 

The  Sparking  Potentials  between  Plates  for 
Small  Distances.  Doctor's  thesis.  Philo- 
sophical Magazine,  Sixth  Series,  I  (1901), 
147-159. 

An  investigation  which  showed  that  a  discontinuity 
occurs  in  the  curve  which  expresses  the  relation  be- 
tween spark  potential  and  distance  between  the  elec- 
trodes when  that  distance  is  about  three  wave-lengths 
of  sodium  light. 

Henry  Gordon  Gale,  Ph.D.  1899.  (See 
above.) 


G.  F.  Hull,  Ph.D.  1897 ;  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor of  Physics,  Dartmouth  College. 

The  Use  of  the  Interferometer  in  the  Study  of 
Electric  Waves.  Doctor's  thesis.  Physical 
Review,  V  (1897),  231-246. 

The  form  of  interference  curves  determined  by  th© 
interferometer  is  shown,  in  the  case  of  electric  waves, 
to  depend  upon  both  the  vibrator  and  the  receiver.  A 
method  of  determining  the  index  of  refraction  of  a  sub- 
stance for  electric  waves  is  discussed. 

The  Action  of  Coherers.  Astrophysical  Jour- 
nal, VI  (1897),  141-144. 

Frank  Baldwin  Jewett,  Ph.D.  1902. 
(See  above.) 

E.  S.  Johonnott,  Ph.D.  1879;  Associate 
Professor  of  Physics,  Rose  Polytechnic 
Institute. 

The  Thickness  of  the  Black  Spot  in  Liquid 
Films.  Doctor's  thesis.  Philosophical 
Magazine,  Fifth  Series,  XLVII  (1899), 
501-522. 

The  thickness  of  the  thinnest  possible  liquid  film  was 
experimentally  shown  to  be  6  m^,  i.  e.,  one  one-hun- 
dredth of  the  wave-length  of  sodium  light. 

F.  Reichmann,  Ph.D.  1901;  Instructor  in 
Physics,  Western  Reserve  University. 

The  Capacity  of  a  Condenser  when  the  Dis- 
tance between  the  Plates  is  Small.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

IsABELLE  Stone,  Ph.D.  1897;  Instructor 
in  Physics,  Vassar  College. 

The  Electric  Resistance  of  Thin  Silver  Films. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Physical  Review,  VI  (1898), 
1-17. 

In  this  investigation  it  was  found  that  the  electric 
resistance  of  thin  silver  films  is  not  constant  but  de- 
creases with  the  age  of  the  film. 

E.  R.  Drew,  Graduate  student. 

A  Determination  of  the  Viscosity  of  Water. 
Physical  Review,  XII  (1901),  114-121. 

An  accurate  determination  of  the  viscosity  of  water  by 
an  improved  method. 


Department  op  Chemistry 


105 


XX.    CHEMISTRY 


John  Ulrio  Nep  [1892 — ],  Professor  and 
Head  of  the  Department  of  Chemistry. 

Zur  Kenntniss  des  Acetessigathers,  II.  Liebigs 
Annalen  der  Chemie,  CCLXXVI  (1893), 
200-245. 

This  paper  establishes  the  fact  that  the  salts  of  aceto- 
acetic  and  of  oxalacetic  ethers  give,  on  treatment  with 
acylchlorides,  derivatives  of  oxyisocrotonic  ether  and 
of  oxyfumaric  ether, 

CH,  -  COA  and  COOR  -  COA. 
II  II 

EC  -  COOR  HC  -  COOR 

Silver  oxalacetic  ether  gives  with  ethyliodide  ethoxy- 
fumaric  ether, 

COOR  CO  C,  Hg  exclusively. 
II 
HC  -  COOR 
These  results  prove  that  the  metal  in  the  salts  named 
must  be  bound,  not  to  carbon,  as  has  hitherto  been 
assumed,  but  to  oxygen.     Experiments  are  also  de- 
scribed which  tend  to  show  that  free  acetoacetic  and 
oxalacetic  ether  are  phenole-like  compounds. 

Ueber  die  1:3  Diketone.  Ibid.,  CCLXXVII 
(1893),  79-104. 

Experiments  on  behavior  of  salts  of  acetylacetone  and 
benzoylacetone  toward  acylchlorides,  confirming  in 
every  way  the  previous  results  with  acetoacetic  ether. 
Discovery  that  many  oleflne  derivatives  give  addition 
products  which  dissociate  spontaneously. 

Ueber  die  Constitution  der  Salze  der  Nitro- 
pai-affine.  Ibid.,  CCLXXX  (1894),  263-291. 
Also  Proceedings  of  the  American  Academy 
of  Arts  and  Sciences,  XXX  (1894),  124-150. 

Establishes  the  fact  that  salts  of  nitroparaffines  possess 
a  constitution  represented  by  the  formula, 
RCH  =  N  -  OM. 
II 

O 
A  series  of  remarkable  intramolecular  oxidations  are 
discovered,  and  also  a  synthesis  of  fulminate  of  mer- 
cury from  nitromethane. 

Ueber  das  zweiwerthige  Kohlenstoffatom,  II. 
Liebigs  Annalen  der  Chemie,  CCLXXX 
(1894),  291-342.  Also  Proceedings  of  the 
American  Academy  of  Arts  and  Sciences, 
XXX  (1894),  151-193. 

Contains  experiments  with  the  fatty  isonitriles,  show- 
ing that  they  are  more  reactive  than,  but  entirely  anal- 
ogous to,  the  aromatic  isocyanides  in  the  first  paper  on 
bivalent  carbon.  Most  important,  however,  are  the 
experiments  which  prove  that  fulminic  acid  contains 
bivalent  carbon  and  is  to  be  represented  by  the  formula, 
C :  NOH.  The  analogy  of  this  compound  to  prussic 
acid  and  its  salts  is  established ;  the  puzzling  reactions 
of  fulminate  of  mercury  are  explained  on  a  very  simple 
basis  —  they  are  due  to  the  presence  of  a  very  reactive 
unsaturated  or  bivalent  carbon  atom.  Fulminic  acid, 
C :  NOH,  possesses  an  odor  not  to  be  distinguished  from 
that  of  prussic  acid,  C :  NH.  Its  soluble  salts  are  like- 
wise exceedingly  poisonous.  A  sodium  ferrofulminate 
(NaON:C)4,  Fe(ONC),,  analo^rous  to  yellow  prussiate 
of  soda.  4NaNC,  Fe  (NC)  „  is  discovered.  The  constitu- 
tion of  folniinuric  acid  is  established  as 
CN-CHNO, 
I 
CONH, 


Ueber  das  zweiwerthige  Kohlenstoffatom,  III. 
Die  Chemie  des  Cyans  und  des  Isocyans. 
Ibid.,  CCLXXXVII  (1895),  265-359. 

An  exhaustive  study  of  prussic  acid  and  the  cyanides, 
establishing  that  these  compounds  contain  bivalent 
carbon,  C :  NH  and  C :  N  M. 

Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Acylchloriden  auf 
die  Salze  der  NitroparaflSne.  Berichte  der 
deutschen  chemischen  Gesellschaft,  XXIX 
(1896),  1218-1224. 

Gives  a  brief  account  of  L.  W.  Jones's  work  (see  below, 
p.  109)  and  comments  on  the  papers  of  Hantzsch  and  V. 
Meyer. 

Ueber  das  zweiwerthige  Kohlenstoffatom,  IV. 
Die  Chemie  des  Methylens.  Liebigs  An- 
nalen der  Chemie,  CCXCVIII  (1897),  202- 
374. 

This  last  paper  on  bivalent  carbon  presents  an  entirely 
new  conception  of  chemical  action,  on  the  basis  of  dis- 
sociation and  addition.  _  A  new  series  of  nitrogen-free 
carbon  compounds,  which  contain  bivalent  carbon, 
are  described ;  namely,  brom-  and  chloracetylidene  and 
dijodoacetylidene,  CHBr:C,  CHC1:C,  and  I,C:C.  It 
has  been  made  probable  that  acetylene-salts  ijossess  a 
constitution,  MjC :  C,  analogous  to  that  of  the  cyanides. 
Perhaps  the  most  far-reaching  result,  however,  is  the 
demonstration  that  carbon  compounds  dissociate  very 
generally  into  methylene  and  its  derivatives,  and  that 
many  of  these  compounds  are  too  reactive  to  admit  of 
a  possibility  of  their  isolation  as  such  with  our  present 
means  of  work.  In  this  connection  it  was  proved  that 
bivalent  carbon  compounds  possess  the^ower  of  de- 
composing water,  uniting  with  the  oxygen  and  setting 
free  nascent  hydrogen.  This  discovery  has  an  impor- 
tant bearing  on  all  so-called  physiological  processes, 
such  as  fermentation,  putrefaction,  and  decay,  and 
enables  us  to  present  a  remarkably  simple  explanation 
of  them  from  a  purely  chemical  and  mechanical  stand- 
point. It  is  the  purpose  of  the  author  to  test  this 
hypothesis  experimentally  to  the  fullest  extent. 

Notiz  liber  die  Formhydroxamsaure.  Berichte 
der  deutschen  chemischen  Gesellschaft, 
XXXI  (1898),  2720-2721. 

Gives  a  preliminary  account  of  the  work  of  H.  C.  Bid- 
die  (see  below,  p.  Ill)  on  the  alkylesters  of  isuretin 
and  of  formhydroxamic  acid  and  discusses  their  rela- 
tion to  fulminic  acid  and  its  ethers  (see  p.  111). 

Ueber  das  Phenylacetylen,  seine  Salze  und 
seine  Halogen-Substitionsprodukte.  Lie- 
bigs Annalen  der  Chemie,  CCCVIII  (1899), 
264r-328. 

Ueber  das  Verhalten  der  tri-  und  tetrahalogen 
substituirten  Methane.    Ibid.,  329-333. 

Dissociations  VorgSnge  bei  den  Alkylathem 
der  Salpetersaure,  der  SchwefelsSure  und 
der  HalogenwasserstoffsSuren,  I.  Ibid., 
CCCIX  (1899),  126-189;  II,  ibid.,  CCCXVIII 
(1901),  1-57. 


106 


Publications 


Ueber  die  Alkylierung  der  Ketone.  Ibid., 
CCCX  (1900),  316-335. 

The  last  five  papers  involve  work  on  the  basis  of  the 
ideas  developed  in  the  above-mentioned  paper,  "Ueber 
das  zweiwerthige  Kohlenstoffatom,"  IV. 

Dissociations  Vorgange  bei  den  einatomigen 
Alkoholen,  Athern  und  Salzen.  Ibid., 
CCCXVIII  (1901),  137-230. 

An  application  of  the  ideas  of  dissociation  described 
above  to  the  alcohols,  ethers,  and  salts.  In  the  work 
of  the  last  three  papers  Mr.  Nef  was  assisted  by  Mr. 
John  C.  Hessler,  in  his  previous  work  (1891-99)  by  Mr. 
Massuo  Ikuta. 


Alexander  Smith  [1894 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Chemistry. 

A  Laboratory  Manual  of  Organic  Chemistry, 
Dr.  Lassar-Cohn.  Authorized  Translation. 
12mo,  XX  -(-  403.  London,  Macmillan  &  Co., 
1895. 

a  compendium  of  laboratory  methods  for  the  use  of 
chemists,  physicians,  and  pharmacists. 

Researches  on  the  Molecular  Asymmetry  of 
Natural  Organic  Products,  Louis  Pasteur 
(1860).  Alembic  Club  Reprints  No.  14.  8vo, 
46.    Edinburgh,  W.  F.  Clay,  1897. 

Two  lectures  by  Pasteur  summarizing  his  investiga- 
tions on  optically  active  substances. 

A  Laboratory  Outline  of  General  Chemistry. 
12mo,  xii-f-90.  Chicago,  University  Press, 
1900. 

Directions  for  a  laboratory  course  in  general  chemistry 
for  college  and  university  students. 

On  Two  Stereoisomeric  Hydrazones  of  Benzoin. 
American  Chemical  Journal,  XVI  (1894), 
108-115. 

A  new  phenylhydrazone  of  benzoin  is  described. 
Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Hydrazin  und  von 
Phenylhydrazin  auf  1 : 4  Diketone.    Liebigs 
Annalen  der  Chemie,  CCLXXXIX  (1896), 
810-337. 

Pyridazines  formed  by  the  action.  The  properties  of 
the  derivatives  from  desylacetophenone  are  discussed. 

On  the  Phenylhydrazones  of  Benzoin.  Amer- 
ican Chemical  Journal,  XXII  (1899),  198- 
207. 

A  further  study  of  the  new  phenylhydrazone  of  benzoin 
showing,  in  reply  to  criticism,  that  its  constitution  is 
correctly  indicated  by  this  name. 

On  Potassium  Cyanide  as  a  Condensing  Agent. 
Ibid.,  XXII  (1899),  247-256. 

New  application  of  this  reagent  in  condensing  benzoin 
with  ketones  and  employment  of  potassium  hydroxide 
in  similar  condensations. 


Notiz  fiber  die  Einwirkung  von  Phenylhydra- 
zine  auf  einige  1 : 4  Diketone.  In  collabora- 
tion with  Dr.  McCoy.  Berichte  der  deut- 
schen  chemischen  Gesellschaft,  XXXV 
(1902),  2169-2171. 

The  preparation,  properties,  and  interrelation  of  two 
isomeric  dimolecular  monophenylhydrazones  of  aceto- 
nylacetone  are  described.  The  activity  of  phenylhydra- 
zine  toward  0-acetonaphthone  and  its  inactivity  toward 
a-acetonaphtone  are  noted  and  discussed. 

Amorphous  Sulphur  and  its  Relation  to  the 
Freezing  Point  of  Liquid  Sulphur.  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh, 
XXIV  (1901-2),  299-301. 

The  freezing  point  of  sulphur  is  shown  to  be  depressed 
below  a  certain  temperature  (119.25°)  by  amounts  pro- 
portional to  the  quantities  of  amorphous  sulphur  pres- 
ent. The  mean  depression  produced  by  32  grams  in  100 
grams  of  soluble  sulphur  is  42.6°.  The  molecular  de- 
pression calculated  from  the  heat  of  fusion  being  325, 
the  molecular  weight  of  amorphous  sulphur  appears  to 
correspond  to  the  formula  Sg. 

On  Amorphous  Sulphur.  In  collaboration 
with  Willis  B.  Holmes.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First  Se- 
ries, IX,  53-64. 

(1)  A  fairly  accurate  method  of  analyzing  mixtures  of 
amorphous  and  soluble  sulphur  has  been  worked  out. 

(2)  The  freezingpoint  of  pure  liquid  sulphur  is  found  to 
be  119.25°.  (3)  The  freezing  point  of  pure  melted  sul- 
phur is  shown  to  depend  solely  upon  the  quantity  of 
amorphous  sulphur  which  it  contains,  and  to  be  de- 
pressed below  119.25°  proportionately  to  the  amount  of 
the  latter.  (4)  The  molecular  weight  of  amorphous 
sulphur  in  solution  is  found  to  be  Sg.  (5)  Amorphous 
sulphur  is  thus  an  isomer  of  soluble  sulphur  and  exists 
in  chemical  equilibrium  with  liquid  soluble  sulphur 
whose  molecular  weight  is  unknown. 


Julius  Stieglitz  [1892 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Chemistry. 

Derivatives  of  Nitrogen  Halogen  Compounds, 
I.  In  collaboration  with  Felix  Lengfeld. 
American  Chemical  Journal,  XV  (1893), 
215-222;  II,  ibid.,  504-518. 

The  determination  of  the  constitution  of  the  products 
formed  by  the  action  of  sodium  methylate  on  succini- 
mide-bromide  showed  that  bromine  had  been  replaced 
by  the  methoxy-group,  but  only  after  a  "Beckmann 
rearrangement "  of  the  molecule,  urethanes  and  ureas 
resulting. 

On  Nitrogen  Halogen  Compounds.  In  col- 
laboration with  Felix  Lengfeld.  Ibid.,  XVI 
(1894),  370-372. 

A  continuation  of  the  above. 

The  Action  of  Phosphorus  Pentachloride  on 
Urethanes.  In  collaboration  with  Felix 
Lengfeld.    Ibid.,  70-78. 

This  gave  a  convenient  method  for  converting  ure- 
thanes ioto  ureas  and  the  easiest  known  method  for 


Department  of  Chemistry 


107 


T 


reparing  aromatic  ureachlorides  and  isocyanates. 
_'he  action  of  hydrogen  chloride  on  chloroform  phe- 
nylimidoethers  was  studied  with  results  which  prom- 
ised to  be  of  importance  relative  to  the  constitution  of 
carbimido-salts  and  in  connection  with  the  general 
theory  of  saponification  and  esterification. 

UeberAlkylisoharnstoffe(Imidocarbaininsaiire- 
flther).  In  collaboration  with  Felix  Leng- 
feld.  Berichte  der  deutschen  chemischen 
Gesellschaft,  XXVII  (1894),  926-927. 

Describes  the  preparation  of  a  new.class  of  interesting 
bases. 

Ueber  Thiamine.    In  collaboration  with  Felix 

Lengfeld.    Ibid.,  XXVIII  (1895),  575-576; 

2742-2744. 

Tetraethyl  thiodiamine  and  a  polymerized  thioethyla- 
mine  were  obtained  and  described.  They  contain  sul- 
phur bound  to  nitrogen  in  a  very  simple  form. 

On  Imidoethers  of  Carbonic  Acid.  In  collab- 
oration with  Felix  Lengfeld.  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XVII  (1895),  98-113. 

More  evidence  of  the  constitution  of  the  salts  of  imido- 
ethers was  obtained  in  spite  of  the_  fact  that  the  salts 
studied  proved  too  unstable  to  be  isolated  in  all  cases. 

Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  Natriumathylat  auf 
Carbodiphenylimid.  Berichte  der  deutschen 
chemischen  Gesellschaft,  XXVIII  (1895), 
573-574. 

The  most  convenient  method  for  preparing  aromatic 
area  ethers  is  described,  of  theoretic  interest  as  show- 
ing the  analogy  between  the  carbimide  and  carbonyl 
groups  toward  alcoholates. 

Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  unterbromiger  und 
imterchloriger  SSnre  auf  Saureanilide. 
Ibid.,  3269-3270. 

Opens  up  an  investigation  of  the  actual  nature  of  the 
"Beckmann  rearrangement"  by  comparing  the  be- 
havior of  acylhalogen  alphylamides  with  that  of  acylha- 
logenamides. 

On  the  "Beckmann  Rearrangement."  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XVIII  (1896),  751-761. 

Proposes  the  theory  that  compounds  with  univalent 
nitrogen,  RCO.N=,  are  intermediate  products  in  the 
"Beckmann  rearrangement,"  which  is  effected  by  the 
power  of  the  free  nitrogen  valencies.  Gives  the  experi- 
mental evidence  in  favor  of  this  view.  A  new  class 
of  bodies,  the  chlorimidoesters,  RC( :  NC1)0R,  is  de- 
scribed. They  are  found  to  be  unusually  stable  nitro- 
genhalide  derivatives. 

On  the  Constitution  of  the  Salts  of  Imidoethers 
and  other  Carbimide  Derivatives.  Ibid., 
XXI  (1899),  101-111. 

The  constitution  of  the  salts  of  carbimide  bases  has 
generally  been  assumed  to  be  analogous  to  that  of  am- 
monium salts.  As  a  result  of  the  investigations  of  1894 
(see  above),  the  alternative  constitution,  which  pre- 
sents them  as  salts  of  carbon  bases,  formed  by  an  addi- 
tion of  the  acid  to  the  double  bond  of  the  carbimide 
group,  was  considered  as  more  probably  correct.  The 
question  is  shown  to  assume  particular  interest,  as  it 
involves  the  broader  question  of  the  existence  of  carbon 
bases,  t.  e.,  of  positive  carbon  ions. 

The  present  paper  deals  with  the  work  carried, out 
thus  far  under  the  direction  of  the  author,  especially 
by  McCoy  and  Dains  (see  below).  The  results  obtained 
are  uniformly  in  favor  of  the  latter  interpretation. 


Ueber  die  Darstellimg  von  Alkylisohamstoffen 
aus  Cyanamiden.  In  collaboration  with  R. 
H.  McKee.  Berichte  der  deutschen  che- 
mischen Gesellschaft,  XXXII  (1899),  1494- 
1496. 

The  peculiar  contrast  found  in  the  behavior  of  isourea 
ethers  and  imidoethers  was  supposed  to  be  due  to  dif- 
ferences in  the  strength  of  the  two  classes  of  compounds 
as  bases;  but  it  may  also  be  due  to  stereochemical 
interferences.  In  order  to  exclude  the  latter  possi- 
bility, methods  were  developed  for  preparing  and  study- 
ing simpler  isourea  ethers  than  those  known  heretofore. 
In  the  present  paper  the  preparation  and  behavior  of 
isoureaethers,  RNH  .C(NH)  OR,  are  described.  They 
show  the  same  peculiarities  mentioned  above. 

Ueber  die  SauerstoflFather  der  Hamstoffe;  Me- 
thylisohamstoff.  In  collaboration  with  R. 
H.  McKee.    Ibid.,  XXXIII  (1900),  807-812. 

From  cyanamide  methylisourea,  NH,  C(:NH)  O  CH,, 
the  mother  substance  of  all  the  isoureas,  was  prepared 
and  isolated  in  the  form  of  its  salts.  This,  the  simplest 
representative  of  the  iso  form  of  urea,  NH,C(:NH)OH, 
shows  the  same  peculiarities  as  the  isoureas  studied 
heretofore.  These  peculiarities  can  therefore  not  be 
due  to  any  stereochemical  interferences  (see  above.) 
The  authors  also  showed  that  cyanamides,  K,  N.  CEN, 
behave  toward  sodium  alcoholate  in  the  same  way  as 
carbodiphenylimides,  RN  =  C  =NR,  while  cyanamides, 
R  NH.  CEN,  or  RN  =  C  =  NH,  behave  quite  differ- 
ently :  the  addition  of  alcohol  by  means  of  the  alcoho- 
lates is  dependent  less  on  the  constitution  of  the  amides 
than  on  the  electrical  condition  of  the  molecules. 

Ueber  Methylisohamstoff.  In  collaboration 
with  R.  H.  McKee.  Ibid.,  XXXIII  (1900), 
1517-1519. 

Continues  the  work  of  the  previous  paper  and  describes 
the  isolation  and  the  properties  of  the  free  base,  methyli- 
sourea. 

Notes  on  Lecture  Experiments  to  Illustrate 
Equihbrium  and  Dissociation.  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XXIII  (1900),  404-408. 

Experiments  illustrating  the  application  of  the  laws  of 
chemical  and  physical  equilibrium  to  the  dissociation 
phenomena  of  phosphorus  [>entahalides  are  devised 
and  described,  as  well  as  very  simple  experiments 
which  show  the  influence  of  an  excessof  one  ion  in  a 
case  of  electrolytic  dissociation  on  the  ion  of  opposite 
charge.  Ammonium  hydroxide  is  shown  to  be  a  weaker 
base  in  the  presence  of  an  ammonium  salt,  e.  g.,  the 
chloride,  than  it  is  in  its  absence. 

Notes  on  Nitrogen  Halogen  Derivatives.  In 
collaboration  with  E.  E.  Slosson.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Chemical  Society  (London), 
XVI  (1900),  1-2. 

Progress  is  reported  on  the  work  of  nitrogen  halogen 
derivatives  and  attention  is  called  to  the  striking  sta- 
bility of  some  of  the  chlorimidoesters  as  compared  with 
other  nitrogen  halides. 

Die  Constitution  der  Acylhalogenalkylamide. 
In  collaboration  with  E.  E.  Slosson.  Be- 
richte der  deutschen  chemischen  Gesell- 
schaft, XXXIV  (1901),  1613-1616. 

Chemists  have  assumed  that  the  above  compounds  con- 
tain the  halogen  atom  attached  to  the  nitrogen  atom, 
without  having  any  direct  experimental  proof  of  the 


108 


Publications 


correctness  of  the  assumption.  Positive  evidence  is 
brought,  proving  the  question, by  preparing  acetylchlor- 
amylamin,  CHaCOCNClC.H,,),  both  from  acetylamyl- 
amid  and  hypochlorous  acid  and  from  amylchloramin, 
CbH,,NHC1,  and  acetic  anhydride. 

On  Positive  and  Negative  Halogen  Ions.  Jour- 
nal of  the  American  Chemical  Society, 
XXIII  (1901),  797-799. 

The  view,  presented  for  some  years  at  the  University, 
is  now  published,  that  the  three  halogens,  chlorine, 
bromine,  and  iodine,  form  positive  as  well  as  negative 
halogen  ions,  and  notably  hypochlorous,  hypobromous, 
and  nypoiodous  acid  give  positive  chlorine,  bromine, 
and  iodine  ions.  The  action  of  hydrochloric  acid  on 
hypochlorous  acid  is  considered  an  ionic  one : 

HO  +  CI  +  HOCl  +  H  +  CI  ±5  CI,  +  H,0,  etc., 
hypochlorous  acid,  like  aluminium  hydroxide,  ionizing 
both  as  a  base  and  as  an  acid.  Attention  is  called,  for 
the  first  time,  to  the  important  fact  that  Jakowkin's 
experiments,  proving  that  the  hydrolysis  of  chlorine 
takes  place  according  to 

HOCl  +  H  +  CI  ±^  H,0  +  Cl„  etc., 
also  may  be  said  to  actually  prove  the  existence  of  posi- 
tive chlorine  ions. 

On  the  "  Beckmann  Rearrangement."  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  IX,  73-88, 

The  various  interpretations  of  this  characteristic  mo- 
lecular rearrangement,  including  the  one  advanced  by 
the  author,  are  discussed  critically  in  the  light  of  ex- 
perimental facts,  especially  of  new  ones  established  by 
the  author's  work  with  a  number  of  collaborating  stu- 
dents. The  actual  facts  are  found  to  agree  best  with 
the  author's  theory  of  the  reaction. 

Studies  on  Chemical  Equilibrium  and  Reaction 
Velocities  by  Conductivity  Methods.  In 
collaboration  with  Ira  H.  Derby  and  H,  T. 
Upson,  Fellow  in  Chemistry.  The  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  IX. 

The  determination,  by  conductivity  methods,  of  the 
conditions  of  equilibrium  in  the  hydrolytis  of  salts  of 
weak  bases  (anilines)  and  strong  acids  in  the  presence 
of  an  excess  of  the  acid  was  studied  experimentally 
and  theoretically.  The  results  were  applied  to  a  de- 
termination of  the  reaction  velocities  of  the  rearrange- 
ment of  o-aminophenylcarbonates  into  oxyphenylure- 
thanes. 

Review  of 

H.  C.  Jones,  The  Elements  of  Physical  Chem- 
istry. Journal  of  the  American  Chemical 
Society,  XXIV  (1902),  588-591. 

Objection  is  raised  in  the  review  to  the  persistency  of 
the  writers  of  our  best  modern  books  on  physical  chem- 
istry (Ostwald,  Nernst,  Walker,  Jones,  etc.)  in  accept- 
ing Ostwald's  theory  of  the  cause  of  the  change  of 
color  of  the  indicators  for  acids  and  alkalies,  and  in 
paying  no  heed  to  developments  in  organic  chemical 
research,  which  make  Ostwald's  theory  untenable. 
Whereas  Ostwald  seeks  to  explain  the  change  of  color 
on  the  basis  of  a  change  simply  from  the  non-ionized  to 
the  ionized  condition  and  vice  versa,  the  real  cause  of 
the  change  of  color,  as  must  follow  from  Bernthsen 
and  others'  work  on  phenolphtalein,  etc.,  must  lie  in  a 
change  of  constitution  of  the  molecule,  affecting  a 
chromophoric  group.  This  view  is  in  far  better  accord 
with  our  whole  knowledge  of  the  cause  of  color  in 
organic  compounds  than  Ostwald's  is. 


John  Charles  Hessleb  [1899 — ],  In- 
structor in  Chemistry. 

Alkyl  Malonic  Nitriles  and  their  Derivatives. 
Doctor's  thesis.  American  Chemical  Jour- 
nal, XXII  (1899),  169-198. 

A  study  of  ethyl  and  benzyl  malonic  nitriles  and 
allied  substances.  The  sodium  and  silver  salts  of  these 
nitriles  give,  when  decomposed,  sodium  cyanide  and 
silver  cyanide,  respectively.  This  fact  shows  that  tho 
metal  is  probably  bound  to  nitrogen. 


Herbeet  Newby  McCoy  [1901 — ],  In- 
structor in  Chemistry. 

Die  Einwirkung  von  Aluminiumchlorid  auf  die 
Chloride  von  Carbodiphenylimide,  I  and  II. 
Berichte  der  deutschen  chemischen  Gesell- 
schaft,  XXX  (1897),  1090-1094  and  1682- 
1693. 

In  these  two  papers  the  constitution  of  a  condensation 
product  of  carbodiphenylimide  is  completely  deter- 
mined. The  condensation  throws  light  on  the  nature 
of  salts  of  carbimide  bases. 

On  the  Hydrochlorides  of  Carbophenylimide 
Derivatives.  Doctor's  thesis.  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XXI  (1899),  111-167. 

The  question  as  to  the  constitution  of  salts  of  imido 
bases  was  investigated  experimentally  as  follows :  (1) 
The  hydrochloride  of  brommethenyl  o-aminophenol, 
BrC  (  =  NCsHtO  —  ) ,  was  found  to  be  identical  with 
the  hydrobromide  of  chlormethenyl  o-aminophenol, 
C1C(=  NCgH^O  —  ).  Excluding  molecular  rearrange- 
ment, which  IS  very  unlikely  under  the  conditions  of 
the  experiment,  the  constitution  of  the  salt  must  be 
represented  by  ClBrC  (  NHCeHiO- ),  both  halogen 
atoms  being  attached  to  carbon.  (2)  The  salts  of  the 
bases  iust  mentioned  were  proved  to  be  true  salts,  i.  e., 
capable  of  ionization,  by  converting  them  into  other 
salts  —  nitrates,  chlorplatinates.  etc.  (3)  The  behavior 
of  the  hydrochlorides  of  carbodiphenylimide,  C.HgNs 
C  =  NCaHj,  toward  aluminium  chloride  is  very  simply 
explained  if  these  salts  are  considered  as  salts  of 
carbon  bases.     The  constitution  of  the  condensation 

f products  resulting  from  the  action  was  definitely  estab- 
ished,  and  these  products,  anilido  quinazoline  bases, 
were  exhaustively  studied. 

An  Apparatus  for  Determining  Molecular 
Weights  by  the  Boiling-Point  Method. 
Ibid.,  XXIII  (1900),  353-360. 

Landsberger's  method  was  modified  by  combining  the 
functions  of  the  boiling  vessel  and  the  jacket.  The 
new  apparatus  has  all  the  advantages  of  that  of  Lands- 
berger's. In  addition,  it  is  more  compact  and  to  a 
great  extent  prevents  the  excessive  condensation  of  the 
solvent  in  the  solution.  This  allows  many  determina- 
tions to  be  made  with  the  same  portion  of  the  dissolved 
substance.  Determinations  were  made  of  the  molecu- 
lar weights  of  various  substances  in  a  number  of  sol- 
vents.   The  results  were  very  satisfactory. 

Notiz  liber  die  Einwirkung  von  Phenylhydra- 
zine  auf  einige  1 : 4  Diketone.  In  collabora- 
tion with  Alexander  Smith.    (See  above.) 


Depabtment  op  Chemistbt 


109 


Equilibrium  in  the  System  Composed  of 
Sodium  Carbonate,  Sodium  Bicarbonate, 
Carbon  Dioxide,  and  Water.  The  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
First  Series,  IX,  lOa-122. 

The  equilibrim  between  sodium  carbonate  and  sodium 
bicarbonate  in  water  solution  in  contact  with  a  vapor 
phase  of  variable  carbon  dioxide  content  was  studied 
theoretically  and  experimentally.  From  the  results  so 
obtained  the  degree  of  hydrolytic  dissociation  in  a 
solution  of  sodium  carbonate  was  calculated,  and  the 
ionization  constant  of  sodium  bicarbonate,  as  an  acid, 
determined. 

Lauder  W.  Jones  [1897 — J,   Instructor 

in  Chemistry. 

On  Salts  of  Nitroparaffins  and  Acylated  De- 
rivatives of  Hydroxylamine.  Doctor's  thesis. 
American  Chemical  Journal,  XX  (1898), 
1-51. 

Confirms  the  work  of  Nef  on  nitroparaffins.  The 
action  of  benzoylchloride  on  sodium  isonitroethane 
leads  to  the  formation  of  benzoylacethydroxamic  acid, 
CeHjCOjNH.  CO.  CH3,  arising  probably  from  the  pri- 
mary reaction  product,  CH3CH  =  NO.  OCOCeHj,  by  in- 
tramolecular oxidation.  The  above  acid  is  in  part  con- 
verted by  further  action  of  the  acylchloride  into  the  two 
isomeric  dibenzoylacethydroxamic  acids,  CsHbCOjN. 
(CeH.CO)  (CH3CO)  and  C.H„CO,N  =  C  (CH,) 
(OCOC^Hj).  Formhydroxamic  acid  and  some  of  its 
derivatives  were  also  studied.  Nitromethane  was  con- 
verted quantitatively  through  a  _  basic  mercury  salt 
into  fulminate  of  mercury  and  a  simple  explanation  of 
the  reaction  was  presented.  The  behavior  of  oxyme- 
thane  toward  alkyliodides  and  benzoylchloride  is 
described. 


Willis  B.  Holmes  [1900 — ],  Research 
and  Laboratory  Assistant  in  Chemistry. 

On  Amorphous  Sulphur.  In  collaboration 
with  Alexander  Smith.    (See  above.) 

Iba  H.  Debby  [1901 — ],  Research  and 
Laboratory  Assistant. 

Studies  on  Chemical  Equilibrium  and  Reaction 
Velocities  by  Conductivity  Methods.  In 
collaboration  with  Julius  Stieglitz.  (See 
above.) 

Henby  N.  Stokes  [1892-93],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Chemistry ;  United  States 
Geological  Survey,  Washington,  D.  C 

On  Diamido-Orthophosphoric  and  Diamido- 
Trihydroxylphosphoric  Acids.  Am^erican 
Chemical  Journal,  XVI  (1894),  123-154. 

Two  amido-phosphoric  acids  are  described,  one  dia- 
mido  orthophosphoric  acid,  PO(OH)  (NH,),,  derived 


from  common  orthophosphoric  acid,  the  other,  diamido- 
trihydroxylphosphoric  acid,  P(OH)3  (NH,),,  derivable 
from  the  hypothetical  pentabasic  acid,  P{0H)5.  Well 
characterized  salts  of  the  second  acid  were  prepared ; 
the  free  acid,  however,  was  found  to  be  unstable,  pass- 
ing at  once  on  liberation  into  the  ortho  compouna. 

Note  on   Monamido-phosphoric  Acid.    Ibid., 
154^156. 

By  the  action  of  dry  ammonia  at  0*  on  ethyl  monochlor- 
phosphate  and  saponification  of  the  ether  formed,  pri- 
mary sodium  amido-phosphate  was  obtained. 


Edwabd  a.  Schneideb  [1892-94],  Assist- 
ant Professor  of  Inorganic  Chemistry. 

Einwirkung  von  Phosphortrichlorid  auf  Mag- 
nesium Nitrid.  Zeitschrift  fur  anorgani- 
sche  Chemie,  VII  (1894),  358. 

The  attempt  is  described  to  prepare  a  phosphorus 
nitride  by  the  action  of  phosphorus  trichloride  on 
magnesium  nitride  at  red  heat.  The  attempt  was  un- 
successful. 

Zur  Kenntniss  des  colloidalen  Silbers.  Ibid., 
339-340. 

The  action  of  a  series  of  organic  solvents  on  the  alcohol 
solution  of  colloidal  silver  was  studied.  No  general 
rules  were  discernible  for  the  formation  or  non-forma- 
tion of  a  precipitate  of  coagulated  silver. 

Ueber  einige  Methoden  zur  Abscheidung  dei 
Phosphorsaure  als  phosphorsaures  Alkali 
aus  den  Phosphaten  des  Kalkes  und  Eisen- 
oxydes.    Ibid.,  386-391. 

A  method  for  the  technical  separation  of  phosphoric 
acid  from  natural  phosphates,  etc.,  is  developed  from  a 
study  of  the  properties  of  solutions  of  ferric  phosphates 
in  ferric  chloride  and  sulphate  solutions. 

Kritische  Studien  auf  dem  Gebiete  der  Chemie 
des  Titans.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1895),  85-97. 

The  product  prepared  from  xx>tassium  titanium  fluoride 
by  reduction  with  sodium  in  a  stream  of  hydrogen  con- 
tains oxygen,  and,  besides  other  impurities,  hydrogen. 
It  could  not  be  determined  whether  the  product  is  a 
hydride  or  a  hydroxide  or  whether  it  contains  the 
hydrogen  simply  in  solution.  The  facts  are  against  the 
supposition  that  the  reduction  product  consists  exclu- 
sively of  a  suboxide  of  titanium.  Two  nitrides  of  tita- 
nium probably  exist.  The  higher,  indigo-blue  nitride, 
goes  at  a  white  heat  into  a  lower  yellow  and  stable 
nitride.  A  crystallized  sulphide  of  titanium  was  ob- 
tained, but  no  titanium  chloroform. 


Felix  Lengfeld  [1892-1901],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Inorganic  Chemistry. 

Inorganic  Chemical  Preparations.    8vo,  xviii 
+  55.    New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1899. 

A  laboratory  manual  for  advanced  students  of  inorganic 

chemistry. 

Derivatives  of  Nitrogen  Halogen  Compounds. 
In    collaboration    with     Julius    Stieglitz. 


110 


Publications 


American  Chemical  Journal^  XV  (1893), 
215-222;  504-518. 

The  determination  of  the  constitution  of  the  products 
formed  by  the  action  of  sodium  methylate  on  succini- 
mide  bromide,  showed  that  bromine  had  been  replaced 
by  the  methoxy  group,  but  only  after  a  "  Beckmann 
rearrangement  of  the  molecule,  urethanes,  etc.,  re- 
sulted. 

On  Nitrogen  Halogen  Compounds.  Ihid.,  XVI 
(1894),  370-372. 

A  continuation  of  the  above. 

The  Action  of  Phosphorus  Pentachloride  on 
Urethanes.  In  collaboration  with  Julius 
Stieglitz.    Ihid.,  70-78. 

This  gave  a  convenient  niethod  for  converting  urethanes 
into  ureas,  and  the  easiest  known  method  for  prepar- 
ing aromatic  ureachlorides.  The  action  of  hydrogen 
chloride  on  chloro-formjihenylimidoethers  was  studied 
with  results  which  promise  to  be  of  importance  relative 
to  the  constitution  of  carbimido  salts  and  in  connec- 
tion with  the  general  theory  of  saponification  and 
esterification. 

Ueber  Alkylisoharnstoff  e  (Imidocarbaminsaure- 
ather).  In  collaboration  with  Julius  Stieg- 
litz. Berichte  der  deutschen  chemischen 
GeselUchaft,  XXVII  (1894),  926-927. 

Describes  the  preparation  of  a  new  class  of  interesting 
bases. 

Ueber  die  Ester  der  SSure  H2S2O2  (Thioschwe- 
fligesaure).    Ibid.,  XXVIII  (1895),  449-451. 

Esters  of  thiosulphurous  acid  were  made  and  studied. 

Ueber  Thiamine.  In  collaboration  with  Julius 
Stieglitz.    Ibid.,  575-576;  2742-2744. 

Tetraethyl  thiodiamine  and  a  polymerized  thiethyla- 
mine  were  obtained  and  described.  They  contain  sul- 
phur bound  to  nitrogen  in  a  very  simple  form. 

On  Imidoethers  of  Carbonic  Acid.  In  collab- 
oration with  Julius  Stieglitz.  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XVII  (1895),  93-113. 

More  evidence  of  the  constitution  of  the  salts  of  imido- 
ethers was  obtained  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  the  salts 
themselves  proved  too  unstable  to  be  isolated  in  all 
cases. 

Sur  un  nouveau  carbure  de  zirconium.  In  col- 
laboration with  H.  Moissan.  Comptes 
rendus,  CXXII  (1896),  651-656. 

Work  begun  in  Paris  in  Professor  Moissan's  laboratory 
and  finished  here.  Zirconic  oxide  was  obtained  by  a 
new  method  and  a  new  carbide  of  zirconium  prepared 
in  the  electric  furnace  and  studied.  ' 

The  Action  of  Ammonia  and  Amines  on  Chlo- 
ride of  Silicon.  American  Chemical  Jour- 
nal, XXI  (1897),  531-537. 

A  systematic  study  of  the  reactions  of  silicon  chlorides 
and  nitrogen  compounds,  in  which  it  is  shown  that 
ammonia  reacts  with  silicon  chloride  to  form  ammo- 
nium chloride  and  silicon  tetramide ;  the  latter  loses 
ammonia  and  gives  silicon  diimide.  Ethylamine  and 
silicon  tetrachloride  give  silicon  tetretbylamiue. 


On  Gold  Halides.    Ibid.,  324-332. 

Some  new  observations  on  aurous  chloride  and  bromide 
and  on  aurous  bromaurate  and  bromauric  acid  are 
given. 

The  Influence  of  Electrical  Waves  on  Chemical 
Action.  In  collaboration  with  J.  H.  Ran- 
som. Journal  of  Physical  Chemistry,  V 
(1901),  502. 

It  was  shown  that  long  electric  waves  (300m)  do  not 
perceptibly  affect  the  action  of  hydrogen  and  chlorine 
or  of  hydrogen  and  oxygen. 

A  New  Proof  of  the  Formula  ^  ±^^?^=.  ibid., 
499-501. 

A  simpler  proof  of  the  above  formula  than  that  given 
by  van't  Hoff  is  developed.  It  is  shown  that  the  spe- 
cific heat  of  a  liquid  must  be  greater  than  that  of  its 
solid  or  vai>or,  within  the  same  range  of  temperature. 

Some  Applications  to  Chemistry  of  J.  J.  Thom- 
son's Work  on  the  Structure  of  the  Atom. 
Ibid.,  639-642. 

The  work  of  Thomson  on  the  structure  of  the  atom  is 
used  to  elucidate  some  generally  accepted  theories, 
more  particularly  the  ionic  theory,  the  solution  tension 
theory^  and  the  periodic  law. 

Applied  to  the  ionic  theory,  the  dissociation  products 
of  sodium  chloride  in  aqueous  solutions  consist  of 
chlorine  atoms  plus  a  corpuscle  and  sodium  atoms 
minus  a  corpuscle.  The  chlorine  ion  has  therefore  a 
greater  mass,  the  sodium  ion  a  smaller  mass,  than  the 
corresponding  atom.  It  is  thought  that  tnis  theory 
explains  the  heavy  charges  of  the  ions,  whose  origin 
has  seemed  the  weak  spot  of  the  ionic  theory. 

Applied  to  the  periodic  system,  Thomson's  theory  sug- 
gests to  the  author  that  the  arrangement  of  the  cor- 
guscles  in  an  atom  is  that  of  Mayer's  group  of  magnets 
oating  in  a  magnetic  field.  Of  the  thousands  of  pos- 
sible atoms,  comparatively  few  were  stable  under  the 
conditions  of  formation.  They  were  formed  and  are 
our  elements.  Some  readily  lose  or  take  up  one,  two, 
or  more  corpuscles  and  form  the  univalent,  bivalent, 
etc.,  elements.  Others  neither  take  nor  give  up  cor- 
puscles and  may  form  the  helium-argon  group.  Accept- 
ing the  Mayer  arrangement,  each  atom  is  made  up  of 
a  nucleus  and  a  periphery.  The  group  properties  might 
depend  on  the  nucleus,  e.  g.,  chlorine,  bromine,  and 
iodine  might  have  the  same  nucleus. 


Richard  S.  Curtiss  [1894-97],  Decent 
in  Chemistry;  Professor  of  Chemistry, 
Union  College,  Schenectady. 

On  Some  Experiments  with  Acetylacetone  and 
Acetoacetic  Ether.  American  Chemical 
Journal,  XVII  (1895),  435-443. 

Silver  acetylacetone  gives  with  ethyl  iodide  equal 
amounts  of  ethylacetvlacetone  ether,  CH3COCH  = 
C(OCoHb)CH3.  and  of  the  isomeric  acetyl  ethylacetone, 
CH3CO  .C(C2H5)=C(0H)CH3.  Acetoacetic  ether  gives, 
with  alcohol  alone  or  in  the  presence  of  hydrogen  chlo- 
ride, as  primary  product  ethoxyisocrotonic  ether, 
CH3C(OC,H„)  =  CH.C02C3H5.  An  experimental  dis- 
cussion of  the  action  of  bromine  on  acetoacetic  ether 
is  included  in  the  paper. 

On  Some  Malonic  Acid  Derivatives.  Ibid., 
XIX  (1899),  691-701. 

By  the  action  of  aniline  on  ethyl  brommalonate,  the  ha- 
logen is  replaced  by  the  anilido-group  without  affecting 


Department  op  Chemistby 


111 


the  carbethoxyl  ^oups,  ethyl  anilido  malonate  result- 
ing. The  oxidation  of  this  body  by  mercuric  oxide  led 
to  the  unexpected  formation  of  ethyl  dianilido  malon- 
ate, (C.H  NH).,  C(COOC,Hb),.  These  bodies,  as  well 
as  ethyl  diethoxy malonate,  are  described  and  discussed. 

Adolph  Bebnhard  [1894-98, 1899-1900], 
Assistant  in  Chemistry. 

Ueber  die  Einfuhrung  von  Acylen  in  den  Ben- 
zoylessigather.  Doctor's  thesis.  Liebigs 
Annalen  der  Chemie,  CCLXXXII  (1894), 
15a-191. 

A  study  of  the  action  of  acyl-chlorides  on  salts  9f 
benzoylacetic  ether.  The  action  of  acetic  and  benzoic 
anhydrides  on  benzoylacetoacetic  ether,  benzoylacetic 
ether,  and  oxalacetic  ether  is  investigated  and  found  to 
give  evidence  in  favor  of  the  phenole-like  character  of 
the  compounds.  Proof  is  brought  forward  that  the 
diacylated  substitution  products  of  the  compounds, 
E-COH  [R=CH3  or  C.Hs;  R  =CH3,  C.H,  or  OC,Hg], 

II 
H-C-COR 

contain  one  acyl  bound  to  oxygen,  and  the  other  bound 
to  the  carbon  atom. 

Henry  Chalmers  Biddle  [1900-01], 
Assistant  in  Chemistry;  Instructor  in 
Chemistry,  University  of  California. 

Ueber  Derivate  des  Isuretins  der  Formhydrox- 
amsSure  und  ihre  Beziehungen  zur  Knall- 
sfiure.  Doctor's  thesis.  Liebigs  Annalen 
der  Chemie,  CCX  (1900),  1-29. 

Addition  products  of  the  as  yet  unknown  fulminic 
ethers,  RON  =  C,  were  obtained  and  studied,  for  in- 
instance,  the  isuretinethers,  RON :  CH  .NH,,  and  the 
formhydroximic  ethers.  C6H5CH,ON  =  CH(OC.H,) 
and  CaH.CHjON  =  CHfO  .COCH,).  Each  of  the  last 
two  bodies  was  obtained  in  two  stereoisomeric  modifi- 
cations. The  study  of  the  alkyl  and  acyl  derivatives 
of  formylchloroxime,  R0N=CHC1,  proved  particularly 
interesting.  In  contrast  to  formylchloroxime  it?elf, 
which  breaks  down  with  great  reacliness  into  hydrogen 
chloride  and  fulminic  acid,  its  alkylated  and  acylated 
derivatives  are  exceedingly  stable:  they  boil  without 
decomposition  and  no  reagent  was  fi  und  which  would 
cause  the  loss  of  hydrogen  chloride  and  the  formation  of 
the  unknown  fulminic  ethers.  The  acetate,  CH3COiN= 
CHCl,  gives,  however,  with  silver  nitrate  silver  fulmi- 
nate, AgON— C.  Thus  the  relations  of  formhydroxamic 
acid  to  fulminic  acid  was  established  experimentally. 

The  Reduction  of  Copper  by  Solutions  of  Fer- 
rous Sulphate.  American  Chemical  Jour- 
nal, XXVI  (1901),  377-382, 

A  study  of  the  chemical  conditions  for  the  genesis  of 
the  native  copper  deposits.  The  conclusion  was  reached 
that  the  precipitation  of  metallic  copper  by  ferrous 
salts  is  a  reversible  reaction,  whose  course  is  conse- 
quently dependent  in  every  case  on  the  relative  concen- 
trations of  ferrous,  ferric,  and  copper  ions. 

Massuo  Ikuta  [1892-99],  Instructor  in 
Chemistry. 

Metamidophenol  and  its  Derivatives.  Ameri- 
can Chemical  Journal,  XV  (1893),  39-44. 

Adolph  Bebnhard,  Ph.D.  1894.  (See 
above.) 


Henry  Chalmers  Biddle,  Ph.D.  1900, 
(See  above.) 

Frank  Burnett  Dains,  Ph.D.  1898;  Pro- 
fessor of  Chemistry,  Washburne  Col- 
lege, Topeka,  Kas. 

On  the  Isoureaethers  and  other  Derivatives  of 
Ureas.  Doctor's  thesis.  Journal  of  the 
American  Chemical  Society,  XX  (1899), 
136-192. 

The  methods  of  preparing  aromatic  isoureaethers  and 
the  properties  of  these  compounds  were  investigated. 


it  was  found  that  by  replacing  the  alkyl  (E)  of  the 
imidoethers,  RC(:N  Alph)0R,  by  a  basic  anilido 
group  to  form  the  isonrea,  (Alph  NH)  C( :  N  Alph)OR  , 


the  character  of  the  molecule  is  profoundly  modified, 
these  isoureas  having  lost  the  marked  reactivity  of 
the  imidoethers  toward  water  and  toward  amines.  If, 
however,  the  alphyl  groups  are  replaced  by  the  more 
negative  carbethoxy  groups,  most  of  tha  reactivity  of 
the  imido-ethers  is  regained. 


Otto  Knute  Folin,  Ph.D.  1898;  Chemist 
and  Physiologist,  McLean  Hospital, 
Waverly,  Mass. 

On  Urethanes.  Doctor's  thesis.  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XIX  (1897),  323-352. 

The  negative  or  positive  character  of  the  alkyl  group 
(R)  in  acid  broraamides,  RCONHBr,  was  shown  not  to 
affect  the  "Beckmann  rearrangement."  which  takes 
place  equally  well  with  either  kind  of  alkyl.  This  is 
evidence  against  Hoogewerff  and  Van  Dorp's  interpreta- 
tion of  this  interesting  rearrangement.  The  action  of 
acid  chlorides,  especially  phosgene,  on  urethanes  is 
investigated.  _  The  silver  salt  of  carbonyl-diurethane  is 
described,  which  is  important  for  the  theory  of  the  salts 
of  acid  amides  and  especially  of  the  salts  of  uric  acid. 

James  H.  Garner,  Ph.D.  1897 ;  Professor 
of  Chemistry,  V7abash  College,  Ind. 

Condensations  with  Benzoin  by  Means  of  So- 
dium Ethylate.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  28. 
Chicago,  1897. 

An  experimental  investigation  was  made  of  the  action 
of  sodium  ethylate  on  benzoin  in  the  presence  of  ethyl 
alcohol.  Ketoles  were  condensed  with  benzalacetone, 
cinnamic  aldehyde,  and  benzalacetophenone. 


Berhard  C.  Hesse,  Ph.D.  1896;  Chem- 
ist, Badische  Anilin-  und  Soda-Fabrik, 
New  York, 

On  Malonic  Nitrile  and  Some  of  its  Derivatives. 
Doctor's  thesis.  American  Chemical  Jour- 
nal, XVIII  (1896),  72a-751. 

The  object  of  the  investigation  was  to  study  some  of 
the  derivatives  of  malonic  nitrile  and  to  ascertain,  if 


112 


Publications 


possible,  whether  in  its  salts  the  metal  is  bound  to 
nitrogen  or  to  carbon.  To  this  purpose  the  action  of 
alkylhalides  on  the  silver  and  sodium  salts  was  studied. 
The  results  were  in  favor  of  the  assumption  that  the 
metal  is  bound  to  nitrogen  in  the  salts,  a  conclusion 
which  was  in  accord  with  Nef's  work  on  the  salts  of 
prussic  acid,  of  the  nitro-paraffins  and  of  acetoacetic 
ether  and  its  congeners. 


John  C.  Hessler,  Ph.D.  1899.  (See 
above.) 

Elizabeth  Jeffreys,  Ph.D.  1898;  High 
School,  Clyde,  111. 

Ueber  die  Darstellung  der  hOheren  Amine  der 
aliphatischen  Reihe:  Pentadecylamin.  Be- 
richte  der  deutschen  chemischen  Gesell- 
schaft,  XXX  (1897),  898-901. 

The  work  improves  very  materially  the  preparation  of 
such  amines  from  acid  amides  according  to  Hofmann's 
method.  Pentadecylamine  and  some  of  its  derivatives 
are  described. 

On  the  Preparation  of  the  Higher  Aliphatic 
Amines:  Undecyl-  and  Pentadecyl-Amine. 
Doctor's  thesis.  American  Chemical  Jour- 
nal, XXH  (1899),  14rA6. 

The  paper  describes  in  detail  (see  previous  paper)  a 
new  method  for  preparing  primary  amines  by  the  action 
of  bromine  and  sodium  methylate  on  acidamides  in 
methyl  alcohol  solution  and  subsequent  decomposition 
of  the  urethanes  thus  formed  by  distillation  with  lime. 
The_  resulting  amines  were  proved  to  be  primary  by 
their  conversion  into  the  corresponding  isocyanates, 
mustard  oils,  and  alcohols.  Two  new  amines  of  the 
normal  aliphatic  series  were  especially  studied,  namely, 
undecyl-  and  pentadecyl-amine.  From  the  former  a 
new  normal  alcohol,  n-undecylalcohol,  was  prepared. 
Incidentally  it  was  shown  that  the  formation  of  acyl- 
ureas,  when  bromine  and  sodium  methylate  act  on 
acidamides,  under  certain  conditions,  is  not,  without 
closer  investigation,  in  accord  with  the  theory  that 
isocyanates  are  intermediate  products  of  the  "Beck- 
mann  rearrangement "  (see  p.  107). 

Lauder  W.  Jones,  Ph.D.  1897.  (See 
above.) 

Herbert  N.  McCoy,  Ph.D.  1898.  (See 
above.) 


Ralph  Harper  McKee,  Ph.D.  1901 ;  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Chemistry,  Lake 
Forest  University. 

Ueber  die  Darstellung  von  Alkylisoharnstoffen 
aus  Cyanamiden.  In  collaboration  with 
Julius  Stieglitz.    (See  above.) 


Ueber  die  Sauerstoffather  der  Harnstoffe: 
Methylisoharnstoff.  In  collaboration  with 
Julius  Stieglitz.    (See  above.) 

Ueber  Methylisoharnstoff.  In  collaboration 
with  Julius  Stieglitz.    (See  above.) 

On  the  Oxygen  Ethers  of  the  Ureas:  Methyl- 
and  Ethylisourea.  Doctor's  thesis.  Ameri- 
can Chemical  Journal,  XXVI  (1901),  209- 
264. 

This  article  gives  the  results  of  a  systematic  investiga- 
tion of  the  simple  and  asymmetrically  substituted 
isourea  ethers,  and  it  includes  a  study  of  the  methods 
of  preparation  (see  the  three  previous  papers),  the 
action  of  water  on  the  isoureas,  of  hydrochloric  acid, 
amines,  acylchlorides,  and  phenylisocyanate.  A  proxi- 
mate quantitative  determination  of  the  amount  of 
hydrolysis  of  the  hydrochlorides  was  carried  out. 


William  McPherson,  Ph.D.  1899;  Pro- 
fessor of  Chemistry,  University  of  Ohio. 

Ueber  die  Natur  der  Oxyazo-KOrper.  Berichte 
der  deutschen  chemischen  Gesellschaft, 
XXVIII  (1895),  2414-2418. 

The  study  of  the  action  of  monoacylated  phenylhydra- 
zines  on  benzoquinone  has  led  to  results  which  prove 
that  the  free  oxyazo-compounds,  their  salts  and  esters 
possess  the  constitution : 

HO  .CeH*  N,CeH.,  MO  .CgH^N,  C,  H,  and 
AO  .CeH*  N,  CeH.. 

On  the  Nature  of  the  Oxyazo  Compounds. 
Doctor's  thesis.  American  Chemical  Jour- 
nal, XXII  (1899),  364-383. 

The  experiments  leading  to  the  conclusion  mentioned 
in  the  abstract  of  the  previous  paper  are  more  fully 
described.  The  action  of  a-acylated  and  a-alkylated 
phenylhydrazines  on  paraquinonea  and  on  /3-naphto- 
quinone-hydrazone  is  studied.  The  preparation  and 
reactions  of  quinonebenzoylphenylhydrazone  and  de- 
rivatives of  P-naphtoquinonebenzoylphenylhydrazone 
are  described. 


James  H.  Ransom,  Ph.D.  1899 ;  Instructor 
in  Chemistry,  Purdue  University,  La- 
fayette, Ind. 

Ueber  die  Reduktion  von  Athyl-o-Nitrophenyl- 
carbonat  und  iiber  o-Oxyphenylurethan.  Be- 
richte der  deutschen  chemischen  Gesell- 
schaft,  XXXI  (1898),  1055-1066. 

The  substance  obtained  by  Bender  in  the  reduction  of 
theabovenitro  body  is  proved  to  possess  the  constitution 
HO  .CsH*  .NHC0,C,H.,  or  O  .C,H«NHC(OH)OCaH.. 

A  preliminary  study  of  its  aoyl  derivatives  favors  the 
latter  constitution. 

On  the  Molecular  Rearrangement  of  o-Amino- 
phenylethylcarbonate    to    o-Oxyphenylur- 


Department  op  Chemistby 


113 


ethane.  Doctor's  thesis.  American  Chem- 
ical Journal,  XXIII  (1900),  1-50. 

On  reducing  ethyl  o-nitrophenylcarbonate  in  acid  solu- 
tion a  molecular  rearrangement  leads  to  the  formation 
of  o-oxyphenylurethane.  The  constitution  of  the  latter 
was  found  to  be  that  of  a  true  phenol,  HO  .CsH* 
NHCOOCjHb,  by  the  action  of  diazomethane.  The 
first  product  of  the  reduction,  aminophenylcarbonate, 
was  successfully  isolated  and  it  was  found  to  rearrange 
spontaneously  and  completely  in  a  few  hours  into  the 
above  urethane.  The  bearing  of  the  work  on  the  con- 
stitution of  salts  of  carbimide  bases  is  discussed. 

Ueber  o-Oxyphenylurethane  und  o-Aminophe- 
nylathylcarbonate.  In  collaboration  with 
Julius  Stieglitz.  Berichte  der  deutschen 
chemischen  Gesellschaft,  XXIII  (1900),  199- 
205.    (See  the  previous  paper.) 

The  Influence  of  Electrical  Waves  on  Chem- 
ical Action.  In  collaboration  with  Felix 
Lengfeld.    (See  above.) 

Waeben  Kufus  Smith,  Ph.D.  1894;  Pro- 
fessor of  Chemistry,  Lewis  Institute, 
Chicago,  111. 

On  the  Addition  Products  of  Aromatic  Isocy- 
anides.  Doctor's  thesis.  American  Chem- 
ical Journal,  XVI  (1894),  372-393. 

A  study  was  made  of  paratolylisocyanide  and  its  addi- 
tion products  on  the  basis  of  Nef's  work  on  phenyliso- 
cyanide.  Addition  products  were  obtained  with  chlo- 
rine, sulphur,  hydrogen  sulphide,  mercaptans,  alcohols, 
hydrogen,  amines,  and  acylchlorides. 

Samuel  Ellis  Swaetz,  Ph.D.  1896; 
Broadus  Classical  and  Scientific  Insti- 
tute, Clarksburg,  W.  Va. 

The  Action  of  Sodium  Ethylate  on  Broma- 
mides.  Doctor's  thesis.  American  Chem- 
ical Journal,  XIX  (1897),  295-321. 

The  action  of  dry  sodium  methylate  and  of  sodium 
ethylate  in  ethyl  alcohol  solution  on  a  number  of  brom- 
amides  was  studied.  In  every  case  a  "Beckmann 
rearrangement"  took  place.  A  number  of  new  ure- 
thanes,  isocyanates  and  ureas  were  studied. 

John  L.  Bbidge,  Graduate  student. 

Ueber  die  Ather  des  Chinonoxims  (p.  Nitroso- 
phenols).     Liebigs  Annalen,  CCLXXVII 

(1893),  59-78. 

Nitrosophenole-salts  give  with  alkyliodides  and  acyl 
chlorides  derivatives  of  quinone  oxime,  O :  C.H* :  NOR. 
These  compounds  behave  like  quinone  and  form  dibro- 
mides  and  dichlorides  O :  GeH^X, :  NOR,  which  dissoci- 
ate with  remarkable  ease. 


F.  W.  Bushong,  Graduate  student. 

On  Benzimidomethyl-  and  Benzimidoethyl- 
ethers.  American  Chemical  Journal, 
XVIII  (1896),  490-491. 

The  paper  describes  the  properties  of  the  free  imido- 
ethers  mentioned  in  the  title ;  they  were  obtained  pure, 
distilled  and  analyzed  for  the  first  time. 

Walteb  Dilthey,  Ph.D.  Kesearch  stu- 
dent. 

Trockene  Destination  fettsaurer  Salze.  Be- 
richte der  deutschen  chemischen  Gksell- 
schaft,  XXXIV  (1901),  2115-2125. 

The  products  of  the  dry  distillation  of  calcium  isova- 
lerianate  were  determined  as  consisting  of  the  gases 
isobutylene,  in  quantity,  small  quantities  of  propjrlene, 
ethylene,  carbon  dioxide,  carbon  monoxide,  nydrogen, 
methane  and  ethane,  and  of  the  liquids  valeral,  metnyl- 
isobutylketone,  a  ketone,  CtHhO,  valerone  and  an  iso- 
mer and  large  quantities  of  higher  ketones.  These  are 
formed,  most  liiely,  by  the  action  of  the  olefines  on  the 
lower  ketones. 

William  E.  Henderson,  Ph.D.  Research 

student. 

Reaction  of  Orthodiazobenzoic  Acid  with  Sul- 
phurous Acid  and  Copper  Powder.  Ameri- 
can Chemical  Journal,  XXI  (1899),  206- 
210. 

The  investigation  had  as  its  object  the  purjxjse  of  test- 
ing the  truth  of  the  statement  frequently  found  that 
sulphonic  acids  result  from  the  decomposition  of  diazo 
compounds  in  the  presence  of  sulphurous  acid  and  cop- 
per powder.  The  experiments  showed  that  such  sul- 
phonic acids  do  not  result  from  this  reaction ;  in  one 
case  dithiosalicylic  acid  was  isolated  as  the  chief 
product  of  the  action. 


Edwin  E.  Slosson,  Graduate  student. 

Ueber  die  Einwirkung  von  unterbromiger  und 
imterchloriger  Saure  auf  Sam-eanilide.  Be- 
richte der  deutschen  chemischen  Gesell- 
schaft,  XXVIII  (1895),  3265-3270. 

The  paper  describes  the  preparation  of  acid  bromani- 
lides  and  reserves  the  study  of  these  compounds  in  con- 
nection with  the  study  of  the  "  Beckmann  rearrange- 
ment." 

Notes  on  Nitrogen  Halogen  Derivatives.  In 
collaboration  with  JuHus  Stieglitz.  (See 
above.) 

Die  Constitution  der  Acylhalogenalkylamide. 
In  collaboration  with  Julius  Stieglitz.  (See 
above.) 


114 


Publications 


Henry    L, 
student. 


Wheeleb,    Ph.D.    Kesearch 


On  the  Action  of  Benzimidomethylether  on 
Aromatic  Ortho-Compounds.  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XVII  (1895),  397-403. 

Benzimidomethylether  is  described  and  its  action  on 
orthoumidophenol,  orthoamidothiophenol,  orthophe- 
nylenediamine  and  orthotoluylenediamine.  These  reac- 
tions resulted  in  the  formation  of  anhydro  bases. 

On  Halogen  Addition  Products  of  the  Anilides. 
Ibid.,  612-617. 

The  paper  contains  a  description  of  the  bromination 
of  m-nitroacetanilide.  A  comparatively  stable  bromine 
addition  compound  was  isolated  as  the  first  product  of 
the  action  of  bromine  on  the  anilide.  By  loss  of  hydro- 
bromic  acid  the  so-called  substitution  product  is  ob- 
tained. This  is  the  first  halogen  addition  product  that 
has  been  obtained  in  the  case  of  anilides. 


On  the  Action  of  Bromine  on  Metanitraniline. 
Ibid.,  697-704. 

The  paper  contains  a  study  of  the  action  of  bromine  on 
m-nitraniline  under  various  conditions. 

K.  W.  Wood,  Graduate  student. 

The  Action  of  Salts  on  Acids.  American 
Chemical  Journal,  XV  (1893),  663-670. 

Diastase  is  an  excellent  indicator  for  weak  acids  and 
bases,  and  it  was  used  to  show  the  extent  of  hydrolysis 
of  salts  and  the  weakening  of  weak  acids  by  their  salts. 

The  Affinity  Constants  of  Weak  Acids  and  the 
Hydrolysis  of  Salts.  Ibid.,  XVI  (1894),  315- 
335. 

The  hydrolysis  of  salts  as  described  in  the  previous 
paper  was  more  fully  determined,  as  well  as  the  affinity 
constants  of  some  weak  acids. 


XXI.    GEOLOGY 


Thomas  Chrowder  Chamberlin  [1892-], 
Professor  and  Head  of  the  Department 
of  Geology. 

Glacial  Studies  in  Greenland.  The  Univer- 
sity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications, 
Second  Series,  Vol.  XIII. 

A  detailed  description  of  about  fifteen  Greenland  ice 
tongues,  and  of  a  portion  of  the  main  ice  cap.  dwelling 
especially  upon  the  significant  features,  followed  by  a 
chapter  on  generalizations,  a  chapter  on  experiments, 
a  chapter  on  theoretical  deductions,  and  a  chapter  on 
the  applicability  of  the  generalizations  and  deductions 
to  the  great  ice  invasions  of  the  past. 

Some  Additional  Evidences  Bearing  on  the  In- 
terval between  the  Glacial  Epochs.  Bulle- 
tin of  the  Geological  Society  of  America, 
X,  I  (1892),  469-480.  Also  Transactions  of 
the  Wisconsin  Academy  of  Science,  Arts, 
and  Letters,  VIII,  1892. 

Cites  evidences  that  the  altitude  of  the  continent  was 
low  at  the  close  of  the  earlier  glacial  epoch,  as  then 
recognized;  that  in  the  interglacial  epoch  it  became 
higher,  and  that  during  the  later  epoch  the  glacial 
drainage  was  carried  down  ample  trenches  cut  during 
the  interval. 

On  the  Kelationship  of  the  Pleistocene  to  the 
Pre-Pleistocene  Formations  of  the  Missis- 
sippi Basin  South  of  the  Limit  of  Glacia- 
tion.  In  collaboration  with  RoUin  D.  Salis- 
bury. Abstract.  American  Naturalist, 
XXVI  (1892),  48-49. 


Glacial  Succession  in  the  United  States.  Ab- 
stract. American  Geologist,  XII  (1892), 
227-228. 

Paper  read  before  the  World's  Congress  of  Geology. 
The  Horizon  of  Drumlin,  Osar,  and  Kame  For- 
mation.   Journal  of  Geology,  I  (1893),  255- 
268. 

Defines  the  term  "englacial,"  and  describes  the  move- 
ments of  englacial  material  rrom  the  bottom  of  the  ice 
sheet  to  limited  heights  and  the  agents  of  its  transpor- 
tation. Describes  the  drumlin  area  of  Wisconsin,  and 
the  bowlder  trains  and  bowlder  belts  of  Ohio,  Indiana, 
and  Illinois.  Concludes  that  the  osars  and  kames  or 
the  latter  region  are  formed  of  basal  material. 

The  Nature  of  the  Englacial  Drift  of  the  Mis- 
sissippi Basin.    Ibid.,  47-61. 

Discusses  the  cause  of  the  movement  of  basal  material 
upward  into  the  body  of  a  glacier.  Describes  the  course 
of  several  bowlder  belts  through  Indiana,  their  rela- 
tions to  terminal  moraines,  and  the  characters  that 
distinguished  them  from  the  average  bowlders  of  the 
till,  and  concludes  that  they  represent  englacial  and 
superglacial  transportation. 

The  Diversity  of  the  Glacial  Period.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Science,  Third  Series,  XLV 
(1893),  171-200. 

A  rejoinder  to  a  paper  on  "The  Unity  of  the  Glacial 
Period,"  by  G.  F.  Wright,  in  the  same  journal. 

Classification  of  Pleistocene  Deposits.  Con- 
gr^s  giologique  international,  compte 
rendu,  fifth  session,  1893,  176-192,  207. 

Discusses  the  classification  of  Pleistocene  glacial  de- 
posits, based  upon  the  origin  of  the  formations. 

Further  Studies  of  the  Drainage  Features  of 
the  Upper  Ohio  Basin.     In  collaboration 


Department  of  Geology 


115 


with  Frank  Leverett.  American  Journal 
of  Science,  Third  Series,  XL VII  (1894), 247- 
283;  483. 

Describes  the  drainage  features  and  erosion  of  the 
Upper  Ohio  tributaries,  the  old  fluvial  floors,  drift,  and 
terraces.  Gives  a  summary  statement  of  four  hypothe- 
ses and  describes  and  illustrates  by  diagrams  the 
ratios  of  work  done. 

Pseudo-Cols.  Journal  of  Geology,  II  (1894), 
205-206. 

Presented  in  substance  before  the  Geological  Society 
of  America  at  Boston,  December  31, 1893. 

Explains  how  a  false  divide  in  preglacial  topography 
may  be  developed,  and  its  liability  to  misinterpretation. 

Proposed  Genetic  Classification  of  Pleistocene 
Glacial  Formations.  Ibid.,  II  (1894),  517- 
539. 

Describes  the  author's  method  of  classifying  the  Pleis- 
tocene glacial  formations,  based  on  the  origin  of  the 
formations. 

Glacial  Studies  in  Greenland.  Ibid.,  649- 
667, 768-789;  III  (1895),  61-70, 198-219, 469- 
481,  565-583,  668-682,  833-844;  IV  (1896), 
582-593;  V  (1897),  229-241. 

A  series  of  papers  giving  detailed  descriptions  of  gla- 
ciers in  northern  Greenland. 

Relation  of  Deformation  to  Ore  Deposition. 
Bulletin  of  the  Geological  Society  of 
America,  V  (1894),  32. 

Formation  of  Karnes,  Eskers,  and  Moraines. 
Ibid.,  85. 

Recent  Glacial  Studies  in  Greenland.  Ibid., 
VI  (1895),  199-220. 

Presidential  address  before  the  Geological  Society  of 
America  reviewing  salient  phenomena  of  glaciers  of 
northern  Greenland,  and  the  theoretical  inferences  to 
be  drawn  from  them. 

The  Classification  of  American  Glacial  De- 
posits. Journal  of  Geology,  III  (1895), 
270-278. 

Describes  the  Kansan,  Aftonian,  Iowa,  Toronto,  and 
Wisconsin  formations  and  the  later  deposits,  and  the 
basis  for  their  discrimination  and  classification. 

Notes  on  the  Glaciation  of  Newfoundland. 
Abstract.  Bulletin  of  the  Geological  Soci- 
ety of  America,  VI  (1895),  467. 

Brief  description  of  some  of  the  glacial  phenomena  of 
the  eastern  and  northern  part  of  the  island. 

Alternative  Interpretations.  (Discussion  of 
History  of  Lake  Agassiz.)  Monograph 
XXV,  United  States  Geological  Survey. 
1896,  244-251. 

A  statement  of  certain  interpretations  of  phenomena 
discussed  in  the  monograph  which  were  not  entertained 
by  the  author,  Mr.  Warren  Upham,  but  which  were 
thought  worthy  of  recognitio 
charge  of  the  Pleistocene  work 


thought  ^worthy  of   recognition   by   the   geologist   in 


Nomenclature  of  Glacial  Deposits  in  the  Mis- 
sissippi Valley.  Editorial.  Journal  of 
Geology,  IV  (1896),  872-876. 

Discusses  the  use  of  the  terms  Kansan,  low  an,  Wiscon- 
sin, Aftonian,  and  Albertan,  with  remarks  on  their 
correlation. 

Note  on  the  Former  Extension  of  the  Inland 
Ice  Sheet  of  Greenland.     Ibid.,  V  (1897), 

81-85. 

Reviews  certain  interpretations  of  the  author's  views 
on  this  subject. 

A  Group  of  Hypotheses  Bearing  on  Climatic 
Changes.    Ibid.,  653-684. 

Discusses  the  grounds  for  questioning  current  views  of 
the  early  gaseous  and  molten  states  of  the  earth  based 
on  the  kinetic  theory  of  gases  and  other  considerations, 
and  offers  hypotheses  of  the  origin  and  early  states  of 
the  earth,  and  of  the  enrichment  and  depletion  of  the 
atmosphere,  and  discusses  the  relations  of  these  to 
climatic  states. 

Former  Extension  of  Greenland  Glaciers. 
Science,  New  Series,  V  (1897),  400-401;  748- 
753. 

Discusses  Professor  Tarr's  statements  on  this  subject. 

The  Former  Extension  of  Ice  in  Greenland. 

Ibid.,  516. 

Discusses  briefly  the  indications  of  glaciation  by  topog- 
raphy. 

Method  of  Multiple  Working  Hypotheses. 
Journal  of  Geology,  V  (1897),  837-849. 

A  study  in  scientific  methodology. 

Supplementary  Hypotheses  Respecting  the 
Origin  of  Loess  of  the  Mississippi  Valley. 
Ibid.,  795-803. 

Summarizes  the  essential  facts  to  be  explained  and  the 
difliculties  that  attend  both  the  eolian  and  aqueous 
hypotheses  taken  alone,  and  proposes  a  composite 
hypothesis  assigning  a  part  of  the  loess  to  aqueous, 
and  a  part  to  eolian  action. 

The  Ulterior  Basis  of  Time  Divisions  and  the 
Classification  of  Geologic  History.  Ibid., 
VI  (1898),  449^63. 

Cites  the  grounds  for  believing  that  the  history  of  the 
earth  proceeds  by  rhythmical  rather  than  uniform 
progress,  and  urges  that  in  these  the  true  basis  for 
time  divisions  must  be  found.  The  nature  of  the  sup- 
posed cycles  is  indicated. 

A  Systematic  Source  of  Evolution  of  Provin- 
cial Faimas.    Ibid.,  597-609. 

Discusses  the  relations  of  earth  movements,  especially 
such  as  modify  the  relations  of  sea  to  land,  to  the 
evolution  of  marine  and  land  faunas.  The  conditions 
favorable  to  general  expansyinal  evolution  and  to 
restrictional  evolution,  involving  the  evolution  of  cos- 
mopolital  faunas  and  provincial  faunas  respectively, 
are  indicated. 

The  Influence  of  Great  Epochs  of  Limestone 
Formation  upon  the  Constitution  of  the 
Atmosphere.    Ibid.,  609-622. 

Discusses  the  efiFect  of  the  formation  of  limestone  on 
the  amount  of  carbon  dioxide  in  the  atmosphere. 


116 


Publications 


An  Attempt  to  Frame  a  Working  Hypothesis 
of  the  Cause  of  Glacial  Periods  on  an  At- 
mospheric Basis.  Ibid.,  VII  (1899),  545- 
585;  667-686;  751-788. 

An  elaborate  development  of  a  working  hypothesis  of 
the  cause  of  changes  of  climate,  with  especial  reference 
to  the  periods  of  glaciation  and  aridity,  on  the  basis  of 
changes  in  the  constitution  of  the  atmosphere  arising 
mainly  from  its  contact  with  the  rock  surface  corre- 
lated with  internal  and  external  sources  of  supply. 

On  Lord  Kelvin's  Address  on  the  Age  of  the 
Earth  as  an  Abode  Fitted  for  Life.  Science, 
New  Series,  IX  (1899),  889-901;  X,  11-18. 
Also  Smithsonian  Report  for  1899, 223-216. 

A  criticism  of  the  grounds  of  Lord  Kelvin's  contention 
relative  to  the  limited  age  of  the  earth,  consisting 
essentially  of  pointing  out  the  insecurity  of  his  funda- 
mental assumptions,  and  proposing  alternative  assump- 
tions, perhaps  equally  well  grounded,  to  which  his 
arguments  are  inapplicable. 

An  Attempt  to  Test  the  Nebular  Hypothesis 
by  the  Kelations  of  Masses  and  Momenta. 
Journal  of  Geology,  VIII  (1900),  58-74. 

An  application  of  certain  criteria  drawn  chiefly  from 
the  relations  of  masses  and  momenta  as  tests  of  the 
Laplacian  hypothesis  of  the  origin  of  the  solar  system, 
with  adverse  results. 

On  the  Habitat  of  the  Early  Vertebrates. 
Ibid.,  400-413. 

Cites  the  suddenness  of  the  early  api)earance  of  the 
fishes  and  the  remarkable  diversity  of  their  deploy- 
ment, the  sporadic  character  of  the  previous  hints  of 
their  earlier  existence,  and  the  parallel  facts  relative 
to  certain  great  crustaceans,  and  gives  reasons  for 
assigning  a  freshwater  origin  to  both  classes. 

Certain  Kecent  Attempts  to  Test  the  Nebular 
Hypothesis.  In  collaboration  with  F.  R. 
Moulton.    Science,  XII  (1900),  201-208. 

A  synopsis  of  the  results  (more  fully  set  forth  in  previ- 
ous papers)  of  applying  the  molecular  velocities  of 
gases  and  certain  criteria  drawn  from  the  relations  of 
masses  and  momenta  to  the  Laplacian  form  of  the 
Nebular  Hypothesis. 

De  la  determination  des  faits  fondamentaux 
et  des  principes  qui  doivent  servir  de  bases 
h  la  classification  g6ologique.  Compte 
rendu  du  VHP  congrhs  g6ologique  inter- 
national, 1900, 12  pp. 

Offers  reasons  why  a  permanently  endowed  interna- 
tional organization  is  needed  to  correlate  existing  and 
forthcoming  geologic  knowledge,  and  to  develop  the 
fundamental  doctrines  of  geology  on  a  broad  basis  as  a 
preliminary  step  to  final  classification  and  nomencla- 
ture. 

Proposed  International  Geologic  Institute. 
Journal  of  Geology,  VIII  (1900),  596-610. 

Essentially  the  same  as  the  above. 

On  a  Possible  Function  of  Disruptive  Ap- 
proach in  the  Formation  of  Meteorites, 
Comets,  and  Nebulae.    Astrophysical  Jour- 


nal, XIV  (1901).  Also  Journal  of  Geology, 
IX  (1901),  369-393. 

Cites  Roche  and  Maxwell  relative  to  the  fragmentation 
of  small  bodies  within  certain  distances  of  large  dense 
bodies,  and  applies  this  to  the  hypothetical  disruption 
of  asteroid-like  bodies  into  meteorites;  considers  the 
fitness  of  such  disruption  to  explain  the  peculiar  fea- 
tures of  observed  meteorites;  discusses  the  conditions 
that  might  lead  to  the  necessary  close  approach,  and 
extends  the  doctrine  to  large,  hot,  solid  bodies  and  to 
gaseous  bodies,  leading  to  an  hypothesis  of  a  possible 
origin  of  certain  spiral  and  other  nebulae  by  the  dis- 
ruptive approach  of  suns, 

A  Contribution  to  the  Theory  of  Glacier  Mo- 
tion. Article  in  The  University  of  Chicago 
Decennial  Publications,  First  Series,  IX. 

A  theory  of  glacier  motion  based  primarily  on  (1)  the 
growth  of  the  glacier  granules,  or  ice  crystals,  as  a 
result  of  the  melting  and  refreezing  of  the  water  de- 
veloped either  at  the  surface  or  by  internal  stresses ; 
and  (2)  the  rotation  and  sliding  of  the  granules  on  one 
another.  The  theory  is  opposed  to  the  current  theory 
of  viscosity. 

While  the  fundamental  elements  on  which  this  theory 
is  based  have  been  suggested  before  as  elements  in 
glacier  motion,  the  attempt  is  made  to  bring  out  their 
relations  to  one  another,  to  glacier  movement,  and  to 
the  various  phases  of  glacier  activity,  in  some  detail. 

Reviews  of 

G.  F.  Wright  and  W.  Upham,  Greenland  Ice- 
fields and  Life  in  the  North  Atlantic,  with 
a  New  Discussion  of  the  Causes  of  the  Ice 
Age.  Journal  of  Geology,  IV  (1896),  632- 
638. 

G.  F.  Wright,  The  Age  of  the  Second  Terrace 
on  the  Ohio  at  Brilliant,  Ohio.  Ibid.,  219- 
221. 

T.  G.  Bonney,  Ice  Work,  Present  and  Past. 
Ibid.,  636-638.  Also  Science,  New  Series, 
IV  (1896),  406-408. 

I.  C.  Russell,  Glaciers  of  North  America:  a 
Reading  Lesson  for  Students  in  Geography 
and  Geology.  Journal  of  Geology,  V  (1897), 
302-303. 

R.  S.  Tarr,  Former  Extension  of  Cornell  Gla- 
cier near  the  Southern  End  of  Melville  Bay. 
Ibid.,  303-307. 

Geological  Survey  of  Canada,  Annual  Report, 
Vol.  VIII,  1895.    Ibid.,  642-644. 

Iowa  Geological  Survey,  Vol.  VI,  Report  on 
Lead,  Zinc,  Artesian  Wells,  etc.  Ibid.,  642- 
644. 

Geology  and  Natural  Resources  of  Indiana, 
Twenty-first  Annual  Report.  Ibid.,  644- 
646. 


Depabtment  of  Geology 


117 


H.  McCalley,  Report  on  the  Valley  Regions. 

Fart  II,  On  the  Coosa  Valley.    Ibid.,  646- 

647. 
G.  H.  Barton,   Glacial  Observations    in   the 

Umanak  District,  Greenland.    Ibid.,  650- 

651. 
W.  Upham,  The  Glacial  Lake  Agassiz.    Ibid., 

851-853. 
J.   D.  Dana,  Revised  Textbook  of  Geology. 

Edited  by  WilHam  North  Rice.    Ibid.,  VI 

(1898),  435^36. 

R.  E.  Peary,  Northward  over  the  Great  Ice. 
A  Narrative  of  Life  and  Work  along  the 
Shores  and  upon  the  Interior  Ice-cap  of 
Northern  Greenland  in  the  Years  1886  and 
1891-1897.    Ibid.,  ^38-441. 

S.  W.  McCallie,  A  Preliminary  Report  on  the 
Artesian  Well  System  of  Georgia.     Ibid., 

VII  (1899),  722. 

W.  Andrews,  The  Diutumal  Theory  of  the 
Earth;  or  Nature's  System  of  Ck)nstructing 
a  Stratified  Physical  World;  and  J.  H. 
Hobart  Bennett,  Genesis  of  Worlds.    Ibid., 

VIII  (1900),  79-81. 

F.  H.  King,  Principles  and  Conditions  of  the 
Movement  of  Ground  Waters;  and  Chas.  S. 
Slichter,  A  Theoretical  Investigation  of  the 
Motion  of  Ground  Waters.    Ibid.,  89-91. 

F.  H.  King,  Irrigation  and  Drainage  Principles 
and  Practice  of  their  Cultural  Phases.  Ibid., 
100. 

H.  Pjetursson,  The  Glacial  Palagonite-forma- 
tion  of  Iceland.    Ibid.,  280-283. 

F.  Leverett,  The  Illinois  Glacial  Lobe.  Ibid., 
362-369. 

G.  H.  Stone,  The  Glacial  Gravels  of  Maine  and 
their  Associated  Deposits.    Ibid.,  373-375. 

W.  M.  Davis,  The  Freshwater  Tertiary  Forma- 
tions of  the  Rocky  Mountain  Region.  Ibid., 
379-382. 

W.  M.  Davis,  Glacial  Erosion  in  France,  Swit- 
zerland, and  Norway.    Ibid.,  568-573. 

E.  Haworth,  Mineral  Resources  of  Kansas, 
1899.    Ibid.,  577-678. 


J.  C.  Branner,  Results  of  the  Branner-Agassiz 
Expedition  to  Brazil.    Ibid.,  578-579. 

H.  M.  Ami,  On  the  Subdivisions  of  the  Car- 
boniferous System  in  Eastern  Canada,  with 
Special  Reference  to  the  Union  and  Rivers- 
dale  Formations  of  Nova  Scotia,  Referred  to 
the  Devonian  System  by  some  Canadian 
Geologists.    Ibid.,  667-668. 

RoLLiN  D.  Salisbury  [1892 — ],  Professor 
of  Geographic  Geology. 

Certain  Extra-morainic  Drift  Phenomena  of 
New  Jersey.  Bulletin  of  the  Geological 
Society  of  America,  III  (1892),  173-182. 

Describes  the  deposits  found  in  different  localities 
which  indicate  that  glaciation  extended  beyond  the 
limit  heretofore  assigned  to  it.  It  is  suggested  that 
the  ice  period  may  have  been  divided  into  three  epochs. 
The  oldest  sheet  of  drift  has  no  frontal  moraine,  the 
second  is  limited  by  morainal  ridges,  and  the  third  by 
terminal  moraines  of  more  pronounced  character. 

On  the  Northward  and  Eastward  Extension  of 
the  pre-Pleistocene  Gravels  of  the  Missis- 
sippi Basin.    Abstract.    Ibid.,  183-186. 

Refers  to  previous  publications  by  the  author  on  the  re- 
lationships of  the  Mississippi  valley  non-glacial  gravels 
to  the  glacial  drift,  and  gives  the  results  of  recent  ob- 
servations. It  is  thought  that  the  gravels  are  pre- 
Pleistocene  and  that  the  gravels  of  the  driftless  area 
in  Wisconsin  and  south-eastern  Minnesota  are  to  be 
correlated  with  those  of  the  Ohio  and  lower  Missis- 
sippi basins. 

The  Drift  of  the  North  German  Lowland. 
American  Geologist,  IX  (1892),  294-319. 

Describes  the  differences  of  glacial  phenomena  of  Ger- 
many and  America  and  reviews  the  paper  by  Dr.  F. 
Wahnschaffe  on  "  Die  Ursachen  der  Oberfl&chenge- 
staltung  des  norddeutschen  Flachlandes." 

Surface  Geology,  Report  of  Progress,  1892 
(New  Jersey).  Report  of  the  State  Geo- 
logist of  New  Jersey  (1892-93),  37-166. 
Abstract,  Am,erican  Geologist,  XII  (1893), 
336-337. 

Gives  a  general  description  of  glacial  deposits.  De- 
scribes the  till,  extra-morainic  till  deposits,  the  termi- 
nal moraine,  eskers,  kames,  overwash  plains  and  valley 
trains,  Trenton  gravels  outside  of  the  Delaware  val- 
lej[,  glacial  phenomena  of  glacial  Lake  Passaic,  wind 
drift  and  residuary  products,  and  the  Yellow  Gravel  in 
New  Jersey. 

Distinct  Glacial  Epochs  and  the  Criteria  for 
their  Recognition.  Journal  of  Geology,  I 
(1893),  61-84.  Abstract,  American  Geol- 
ogist, XI  (1893),  171-172. 

Defines  the  term  "glacial  epoch"  and  describes  the 
phenomena  which  would  indicate  the  existence  of  dis- 
tinct glacial  epochs. 


118 


Publications 


The    Older    Drift    in    the    Delaware   Valley. 
American   Geologist,   XI    (1893),  360-362 
(Correspondence). 
Refers  to  an  article  by  A.  A.  Wright  on  the  same  subject. 

On  the  Relationship  of  the  Pleistocene  to  the 
Pre-Pleistocene  Formations  of  the  Missis- 
sippi Basin  South  of  the  Limit  of  Glacia- 
tion.  In  collaboration  with  Thomas  Chrow- 
der  Chamberlin.    (See  above.) 

Super-glacial  Drift.  Journal  of  Geology,  II 
(1894),  613-632. 

Describes  the  character  of  superficial  drift  of  alpine 
glaciers,  piedmont  glaciers,  and  of  a  continental  ice 

sheet. 

The  Drift:  Its  Characteristics  and  Relation- 
ships.   Ibid.,  708-724;  837-851. 

Defines  drift  and  describes  the  thickness,  lithologic 
composition,  and  structure  of  the  drift,  the  topography 
of  the  drift  and  drift-covered  areas,  the  relation  of  the 
drift  to  the  underlying  rock,  and  the  characteristics  of 
the  rock  underlying  the  drift. 

Surface  Geology:  The  Yellow  Gravel.  Report 
of  the  State  Geologist  of  New  Jersey,  1893 
(1894),  39-72. 

Describes  the  deposition  and  distribution  of  the  Yel- 
low Gravel.    Discusses  the  evidences  as  to  the  age  of 

these  beds. 

Surface  Geology:  Extra-morainic  Drift.  Ibid., 
73-123. 

Describes  the  character  and  distribution  of  the  extra- 
morainic  drift  on  the  Triassic  formation  and  on  the 
area  to  the  north  of  it. 

Surface  Geology:  The  Terminal  Moraine. 
Ibid.,  124-151. 

Describes  the  course  of  the  terminal  moraine  in  New 
Jersey  as  shown  on  the  map  which  accompanies  the 
report. 

Siirface  Geology:  Drift  Deposits  Made  under 
the  Influence  of  Stagnant  Ice.  Ibid.,  152- 
156. 

Describes  a  peculiar  type  of  terraces  formed  between  a 
valley  ice  lobe  and  the  bounding  rock  slope  of  the 
valley. 

On  the  Twofold  Division  of  the  Columbia  For- 
mation. Bulletin  of  the  Geological  Society 
of  America,  V  (1894),  24. 

A  discussion  of  a  paper  by  N.  H.  Darton  on  "  Cenozoic 
History  of  Eastern  Maryland  and  Virginia." 

Time  Break  between  the  Lafayette  and  Colum- 
bia Formations.    Ibid.,  100. 

A  discussion  of  a  paper  on  the  "  Succession  of  Pleis- 
tocene formations  in  the  Mississippi  and  Nelson  River 
Basins,"  by  Warren  Upham, 


A  Phase  of  Superficial  Drift.  Abstract.  Pro- 
ceedings of  the  American  Association  for 
the  Advancement  of  Science,  XLII  (1894), 
180. 

Raises  the  question  whether  certain  stoneless  loams, 
overlying  the  glacial  drift,  may  not  represent  dust 
blown  up  on  the  ice. 

An  Illustration  of  the  Effect  of  Stagnant  Ice 
in  Sussex  County,  New  Jersey.  Abstract. 
Ibid.,  180. 

Surface  Geology:  Lake  Passaic,  an  Extinct 
Glacial  Lake.  In  collaboration  with  Henry 
B.  Ktimmel.  Report  of  the  State  Geolo- 
gist of  New  Jersey,  1893  (1894),  225-328. 

Discusses  the  classification  of  shore  features  and  lacus- 
trine deposits  and  describes  the  shores  of  Lake  Pas- 
saic, its  lacustrine  deposits,  the  history  of  the  lake,  and 
the  deformation  of  its  basin. 

Surface  Geology:  Drift  Phenomena  of  the  Pal- 
isade Ridge.  In  collaboration  with  Charles 
E.  Peet.    Ibid.,  157-224. 

Describes  the  topographic  relations  of  the  ridge,  the 
glacial  striee  and  erosion,  the  perched  blocks,  and  other 
glacial  phenomena. 

Surface  Geology:  Report  of  Progress  (New 
Jersey).    Ibid.,  1894  (1895),  1-150. 

Describes  the  distribution  and  character  of  the  drift 
deposits  of  the  northern  portion  of  New  Jersey,  the  dis- 
tribution and  direction  of  the  glacial  striee,  the  changes 
of  drainage,  and  the  lithologic  character  and  succes- 
sion of  certain  deposits  of  non-glacial  origin.  Includes 
geologic  sections  and  map  showing  the  course  of  ice 
movement  in  the  last  glacial  epoch. 

Surface  Formations  of  Southern  New  Jersey. 
Bulletin  of  the  Geological  Society  of 
America,  VI  (1895),  483-488. 

Describes  the  distribution,  composition,  thickness,  and 
age  of  the  Beacon  Hill.  Pensauken,  and  Jamesburg  for- 
mations, which  constitute  "the  post-Cretaceous  surface 
materials  south  of  the  Triassic  belt  of  New  Jersey." 

Agencies  which  transport  Materials  on  the 
Earth's  Surface.  Journal  of  Geology,  III 
(1895),  70-97. 

Discusses  the  evidences  of  the  action  of  the  wind,  water, 
water  and  ice  co-operating,  and  ice,  in  transporting 
materials  on  the  earth's  surface. 

Pre-glacial  Gravels  on  the  Quartzite  Range 
near  Baraboo,  Wisconsin.      /6id.,  655-667. 

Describes  the  charactorof  these  gravel  deposits  and 
names  the  fossils  found  in  the  pebbles.  Discusses  the 
evidence  as  to  the  age  of  the  gravels  and  their  relation 
to  the  high-level  gravels  of  adjacent  states. 

The  Greenland  Expedition  of  1895.  Ibid., 
875-902. 

Describes  the  coastal  topography  of  Greenland  in  lati- 
tude 64°  30',  and  to  the  north,  and  the  general  features 
of  the  glacial  phenomena.  Discusses  the  evidences  of 
past  glaciations  drawn  from  the  nature  of  the  rock 
surfaces,  and  the  evidence  of  recent  changes  of  leveL 


Dbpabtment  op  Geology 


119 


Lake  Passaic:  An  Extinct  Glacial  Lake  (New 
Jersey).  In  collaboration  with  H.  B.  Ktim- 
mel.  Report  of  the  State  Geologist  of  New 
Jersey,  1894  (1895),  225-328. 

Describes  the  iwsition  and  character  of  the  lake  basin, 
the  existing  shore  features,  its  lacustrine  deposits,  and 
the  different  outlets.  Discusses  the  evidences  of  the 
various  stages  of  its  history. 

Surface  Geology:  Keport  of  Progress,  1895 
(New  Jersey).  Ibid.  (1896),  3-16,  Plates  I- 
III. 

Describes  the  occurrence  and  character  of  the  Miocene, 
Pensauken,  and  Jamesburg  formations  in  certain  por- 
tions of  the  state.  Presents  a  map  showing  the  distri- 
bution of  the  Pensauken  formation  in  New  Jersey. 

The  Philadelphia  Brick  Clays  et  al.  Science, 
New  Series,  III  (1896),  480-481. 

Discusses  briefly  the  evidence  as  to  the  age  of  these 
clays,  forming  a  part  of  the  Columbia  formation. 

Loess  in  Wisconsin  Drift  Formation.  Journal 
of  Geology,  IV  (1896),  929-937. 

Describes  the  characters  and  relation  of  the  loess  in 
central  Wisconsin. 

Salient  Points  Concerning  the  Glacial  Geology 
of  North  Greenland.  Ibid.,  769-810,  33 
figures. 

An  account  of  many  of  the  more  striking  characteris- 
tics of  the  glaciers  of  North  Greenland,  visited  by  the 
writer  in  1895. 

Stratified  Drift.    /6id.,  948-970. 

Describes  the  origin  and  formation  of  stratified  drift 
deposits  and  discusses  their  relations  to  unstratified 
drift  beds. 

Volcanic  Ash  in  Southwestern  Nebraska.  Sci- 
ence, New  Series,  IV  (1896),  816-817. 

Describes  volcanic  ash  beds  near  Ingham  and  Orleans, 
Nebraska. 

On  the  Origin  and  Age  of  the  Relic-bearing 
Sand  at  Trenton,  New  Jersey.  Ibid.,  VI 
(1897),  977-981. 

Discusses  the  evidence  as  to  the  age  of  these  beds. 

Drift  Phenomena  in  the  Vicinity  of  Devil's 
Lake  and  Baraboo,  Wisconsin.  In  collab- 
oration with  Wallace  W.  Atwood.  Journal 
of  Geology,  V  (1897),  131-147,  Figures  1-7. 

Surface  Geology:  Report  of  Progress  (New 
Jersey).  In  collaboration  with  George  N. 
Knapp.  Report  of  the  State  Geologist  of 
New  Jersey,  1896(1897),  1-23,  Plates  I-VII. 

Describes  the  character,  distribution,  and  correlation 
of  the  Pensauken  formation,  and  the  character  and 
distribution  of  the  Beacon  Hill  formation,  and  of  the 
road  materials  in  certain  i)ortions  of  the  state.  In- 
cludes a  geologic  map. 


The  Physical  Geography  of  New  Jersey.  Ibid., 
Final  Report  (1898).  8vo,  170  pp.,  16  plates, 
37  figures. 

Describes  the  topographic  features  of  the  state  and  the 
process  of  their  development. 

Surface  Geology:  Report  of  Progress  (New 
Jersey).    Ibid.,  1897  (1898),  1-22,  Plate  I. 

Includes  notes  on  the  Paleozoic,  Juratrias,  Cretaceous, 
Tertiary,  and  Pleistocene  formations,  and  a  geologic 
map  of  the  state. 

Report  on  Surface  Geology  (New  Jersey).  Ibid., 
1898  (1899),  1-41,  Plate  I,  Figures  1-8. 

Describes  the  origin  of  some  of  the  soils  of  the  state. 

The  Geography  of  Chicago  and  its  Environs. 
In  collaboration  with  W.  C.  Alden.  Bul- 
letin I  of  the  Geographic  Society  of  Chi- 
cago (1899),  1-64,  Plates  I-II,  30  figures. 

A  history  of  the  development  of  the  topography  and 
surface  formations  about  Chicago. 

The  Local  Origin  of  Glacial  Drift.  Journal 
of  Geology,  VIII  (1900),  426-432,  Figures 
1-3. 

Discusses  the  several  conditions  upon  which  the  local 
origin  of  glacial  drift  is  dependent. 

Certain  Late  Pleistocene  Loams  in  New  Jersey 
and  Adjacent  States.  Abstract.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  American  Association  for  the 
Advancement  of  Science,  XLIX  (1900),  192- 
193.  Also  Science,  New  Series,  XII  (1900), 
995. 

The  Geography  of  the  Region  about  Devil's 
Lake  and  the  Dalles  of  the  Wisconsin,  with 
some  Notes  on  its  Surface  Geology.  In 
collaboration  with  Wallace  W.  Atwood. 
Bulletin  of  the  Wisconsin  Geological  and 
Natural  History  Survey,  Bulletin  V  (1900), 
X  -f- 151,  Plates  I-XXXVIII,  Figures  1-47. 

Describes  the  physiography,  the  general  character  and 
distribution  of  tho  Paleozoic  formations,  the  develop- 
ment of  erosion  features,  and  the  glacial  history  and 
deposits  of  the  region. 

Glacial  Work  in  the  Western  Moimtains  in 
1901.  Journal  of  Geology,  IX  (1901),  718- 
732. 

A  summary  of  the  work  done  by  the  writer  and  several 
small  parties  under  his  direction.  The  work  of  these 
parties  was  at  the  east  base  of  the  Rockies  in  north- 
western Montana,  in  northeastern  Washington,  in  the 
Wasatch  mountains  of  Utah,  and  in  the  mountains 
near  Santa  r6,  New  Mexico. 

The  Glacial  Geology  of  New  Jersey:  Final 
Report  of  the  State  Geologist  (1902).  8vo, 
XXV +  802,  Plates  I-LXVT,  102  figures. 

A  full  description  of  the  glacial  formations  of  New 
Jersey,  and  an  account  of  the  glacial  period,  so  far  as 
it  concerned  this  state. 


120 


Publications 


The  Principal  Elements  in  the  Pleistocene  Ge- 
ology of  the  Northern  Part  of  the  Atlantic 
Coastal  Plain.  Article  in  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  IX. 

The  Pleistocene  geology  of  this  region  includes  a  com- 
plex combination  of  stream,  estuary,  ocean,  and  wind 
activities,  under  the  varying  conditions  occasioned  by 
repeated  secular  changes  of  level. 

Reviews  of 

E.  A.  Smith,  Report  on  the  Geology  of  the 
Coastal  Plain  of  Alabama.  Journal  of 
Geology,  III  (1895),  101-108. 

C.  F.  Marbut,  Physical  Features  of  Missouri. 
Ibid.,  IV  (1896),  887-888. 

W.  B.  Scott,  An  Introduction  to  Geology. 
Journal  of  Geology,  V  (1897),  398-399. 

W.  B.  Clark,  Maryland  Geological  Survey,  I. 
Ibid.,  760-761. 

H.  B.  Kummel,  The  Newark  System  or  RedT 
Sandstone  Belt.    Ibid.,  VI  (1898),  659-661. 

R.  T.  Hill,  The  Geological  History  of  the  Isth- 
mus of  Panama  and  Portions  of  Costa  Rica. 
Ibid.,  661-668. 

I.  C.  Russell,  Rivers  of  North  America:  A  read- 
ing lesson  for  students  of  Geography  and 
Geology;  J.  Geikie,  Earth  Sculpture  or  the 
Origin  of  Land  Forms;  W.  M.  Davis,  Phys- 
ical Geography.    Ibid.,  VII  (1899),  511-516. 

R.  T.  Hill,  The  Geology  and  Physical  Geog- 
raphy of  Jamaica:  Study  of  a  Type  of  An- 
tillean  Development.    Ibid.,  815-821. 

F.  P.  Gulliver,  Shoreline  Topography.  Ibid., 
827-829. 

A.  Delebecque,  Les  lacs  frangais.  Ibid.,  VIII 
(1900),  91-97. 

G.  E.  Ladd,  A  Preliminary  Report  on  the 
Clays  of  Georgia;  H.  Ries,  Preliminary  Re- 
port on  the  Clays  of  Alabama.  Ibid.,  479- 
480. 

W.  S.  Tangier  Smith,  A  Topographic  Study  of 
the  Islands  of  Southern  California.    Ibid., 

780-782. 

F.  Nansen,  Norwegian  Polar  Expedition,  1893 
to  1896:  Scientific  Results,  Vol.  I.  Ibid., 
IX  (1901),  87-90. 


H.  W.  Turner,  The  Pleistocene  Geology  of  the 
South  Central  Sierra  Nevada,  with  especial 
Reference  to  the  Origin  of  the  Yosemite 
Valley.    Ibid.,  90-91. 

F.  A.  Forel,  Handbuch  der  Seenkunde:  All- 
gemeine  Limnologie.    Ibid.,  199-200. 

W.  C.  Knight,  Report  of  the  Artesian  Basins 
of  Wyoming:  A  Preliminary.  Ibid.,  200- 
202. 

A.  Penck,  Die  vierte  Eiszeit  im  Berichte  der 
Alpen.    Ibid.,  202. 

F.  C.  Matthes,  Glacial  Sculpture  of  the  Big 
Horn  Mountains,  Wyoming.  Ibid.,  465- 
466. 

W.  C.  Bregger,  Om  de  senglaciale  og  post- 
glaciale  NivSforandringer  i  Kristianiafeltet 
(Moluskfaunan).    Ibid.,  X  (1902),  323-324. 

Joseph  Paxson  Iddings  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor of  Petrology. 

The  Quantitative  Classification  of  Igneous 
Rocks,  Based  on  Chemical  and  Mineral  Char- 
acters, with  Systematic  Nomenclature.  By 
Whitman  Cross,  Joseph  P.  Iddings,  Louis 
V.  Pirsson,  and  Henry  S.  Washington.  8vo, 
286.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1903. 

The  Volcanic  Rocks  of  the  Andes.  Journal 
of  Geology,  I  (1893),  164-175. 

A  review  of  the  report  of  Richard  Kllch  on  the  volcanic 
rocks  of  Colombia,  with  a  discussion  of  the  chemical 
data  furnished,  a  comparison  of  the  rocks  with  those 
of  North  America  and  a  statement  of  the  inference  that 
may  be  drawn  from  the  report,  namely ^  that  the  general 
differentiation  of  the  magma  supplying  the  lavas  of 
the  Andes  has  not  reached  its  final  stage,  and  that  it 
appears  to  be  in  a  much  less  advanced  condition  than 
that  of  the  magmas  supplying  the  lavas  of  Central 
America  and  Mexico,  or  than  those  of  the  United  States. 

The  Dissected  Volcano  of  Crandall  Basin,  Wy- 
oming.   Ibid.,  606-611. 

Brief  description  of  the  geology  and  petrography  of 
the  region. 

Genetic  Relationships  among  Igneous  Rocks. 
Ibid.,  833-844. 

A  statement  of  the  grounds  upon  which  the  theory  of 
consanguinity,  or  the  genetic  connection,  of  igneous 
rocks  in  one  locality  has  been  based, 

Livingston  Folio,  Montana.  In  collaboration 
with  W.  H.  Weed.    Folio  I,  Geologic  Atlas 


Dbpabtment  op  Geology 


121 


of  the  United  States,  United  States  Geo- 
logical Survey,  Washington,  D.  C,  1894. 

The  geology  of  the  quadrangle  is  represented  on  the 
map  and  described  briefly  in  the  text,  which  includes 
geography  and  topography  of  region,  general  geology, 
descriptions  of  the  sedimentary  rocks,  and  of  the  igne- 
ous rocks,  the  crystalline  schists,  and  economic  geology. 

George  Huntington  Williams.  Journal  of 
Geology,  II  (1894),  759-767. 

A  biographical  sketch. 

Absarokite-Shoshonite-Banakite  Series.  Ibid., 
Ill  (1895),  935-959. 

Petrographical  description  of  certain  igneous  rocks  in 
the  region  of  the  Yellowstone  National  Park,  and  their 
comparison  with  similar  rocks  from  neighboring  re- 
gions. Their  contrast  with  a  frenetic  series  of  igneous 
rocks  in  Norway  and  its  bearing  on  the  classification 
of  igneous  rocks. 

George  Huntington  Williams.  Privately 
printed,  1896.  A  Memorial  by  Friends  for 
Friends.  Chapter,  "  His  Publications,"  87- 
116. 

A  summary  of  the  scientific  writings  of  Professor  Wil- 
liams, with  comments. 

Extrusive  and  Intrusive  Kocks  as  Products  of 
Magmatic  Differentiation.  Quarterly  Jour- 
nal of  the  Geological  Society  of  London, 
LII  (1896),  606-617. 

A  sketch  of  the  geology  of  the  igneous  rocks  in  the 
region  of  the  Yellowstone  National  Park  with  a  discus- 
sion of  their  contribution  to  the  theory  of  magmatic 
differentiation. 

Yellowstone  National  Park  Folio.  In  collabo- 
ration with  Arnold  Hague  and  W.  H.  Weed. 
Geologic  Atlas  of  the  United  States,  United 
States  Geological  Survey.    Folio  30, 1896. 

Geological  map  and  descriptive  text,  particularly  the 
igneous  rocks. 

On  Rock  Classification.  Journal  of  Geology, 
VI  (1898),  92-111. 

A  discussion  of  the  essential  characteristics  of  igneous 
rocks  with  reference  to  their  classification. 

Chemical  and  Mineral  Relationships  in  Igneous 
Rocks.    Ibid.,  219-237. 

A  statement  of  the  interdependence  of  the  minerals  on 
one  another  and  on  the  chemical  composition  of  the 
magma. 

Bysmahths.    Ipid.,  704-710. 

A  modification  of  laccoliths. 

Geology  of  the  Yellowstone  National  Park. 
Part  II,  Descriptive  Geology,  Petrography, 
and  Paleontology.  In  collaboration  with 
Arnold  Hague,  W.  H.  Weed,  C.  D.  Walcott, 
G.  H.  Girty,  T.  W.  Stanton,  and  F.  H. 


Knowlton.  Monograph  XXXII,  United 
States  Geological  Survey,  1899,  1-164;  21&- 
439. 

Embracing  the  following: 

Chap.  I. — Descriptive  Geology  of  the  Gal- 
latin Mountains  (with  W.H.  W^eed),  1-59; 

Chap.  II. — The  Intrusive  Rocks  of  the  Gal- 
latin Moim tains,  Bunsen  Peak,  and  Mount 
Everts,  60-88; 

Chap.  III. — The  Igneous  Rocks  of  Electric 
Peak  and  Sepulchre  Mountain,  89-148; 

Chap.  IV. — Descriptive  Geology  of  the  Nor- 
thern End  of  the  Teton  Range  (with  W. 
H.  Weed),  149-164; 

Chap.  VII. — The  Dissected  Volcano  of  Cran- 
dall  Basin,  Wyoming,  215-268; 

Chap.  VIII. — The  Igneoiis  Rocks  of  the 
Absaroka  Range  and  two  Ocean  Plateaus 
and  of  outlying  poi-tions  of  the  Yellow- 
stone National  Park,  269-325; 

Chap .  I X . — Absarokite-Shoshonite-Banakite 
Series,  326-355; 

Chap.  X.— The  Rhyolites,  356-432; 

Chap.  XI.— Recent  Basalts,  433-439. 

Chemical  Composition  of  Igneous  Rocks,  ex- 
pressed by  Means  of  Diagrams  with  Refer- 
ences to  Rock  Classification  on  a  Quantitative 
Chemico-mineralogical  Basis.  Article  in 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  IX. 

Includes  a  notice  of  various  diagrammatic  methods 
eilready  employed  for  expressing  the  chemical  compo- 
sition of  groups  or  series  of  igneous  rocks.  The  method 
proposed  is  shown  to  accord  with  certain  chemico- 
mineralogical  relationships  prominent  in  igneous  rocks 
which  have  been  made  the  basis  of  their  quantitative 
classification  in  the  system  recently  proposed  by  Cross, 
IddingSj  Pirsson,  and  Washington.  These  relationships 
are  exhibited  by  means  of  diagrams  which  at  the  same 
time  present  graphically  the  great  variability  in  the 
chemical  composition  of  igneous  rocks.  The  relative 
proportions  of  seven  or  eight  variable  chemical  com- 
ponents in  each  rock  considered  are  expressed.  The 
diagrams  also  exhibit  the  chemical  character  of  the 
magmatic  divisions  established  by  the  quantitative 
system  of  classification  just  mentioned. 


Stuaet  Welleb  [1895 — ],  Assistant  Pro- 
fessor of  Palseontologic  Geology. 

A  Circum-Insular  Palaeozoic  Faima.  Journal 
of  Geology,  III  (1895),  903-917. 

Discusses  the  composition  and  origin  of  the  kinderhook 
fauna  in  the  Mississippi  valley. 

Petalocrinus  mirabilis  (n.  sp.)  and  a  new  Ameri- 
can Fauna.  In  collaboration  with  A.  D, 
Davidson.    Ibid.,  IV  (1896),  166-173. 

Describes  a  new  genus  and  species  of  crinoid,  and  dis- 
cusses the  correlation  of  the  Niagaran  faunas  of  the 
interior  of  the  North  American  continent  with  those  of 
Europe. 


122 


Publications 


The  Bates ville  Sandstone  of  Arkansas.  Trans- 
actions of  the  New  York  Academy  of  Sci- 
ence, XVI  (1897),  251-282,  Plates  19-21. 

Describes  the  fauna  of  the  Batesville  sandstone,  near 
Batesville,  Arkansas,  and  discusses  the  correlation  of 
the  Mississippian  section  of  northern  Arkansas  with 
the  typical  section  along  the  Mississippi  river. 

Correlation  of  the  Devonian  Faunas  in  South- 
ern Illinois.  Journal  of  Geology,  V  (1897), 
625-635. 

Discusses  the  correlation  of  the  Devonian  fannas  at 
the  "Devil's  Bake  Oven"  in  Jackson  county,  Illinois, 
with  the  Devonian  faunas  of  the  typical  New  York 
section. 

On  the  Presence  of  Problematic  Fossil  Me- 
dusae in  the  Niagara  Limestone  of  Northern 
Illinois.    JfeM.,  744-751. 

Cryptodiscus,  Hall.    Ibid.,  803-808. 

These  two  papers  discuss  the  nature  of  the  peculiar 
fossils  described  by  Hall  as  Cryptodiscus,  and  show 
them  to  be  the  terminal  plates  of  the  anal  tube  of  the 
crinoid  Callicrinus. 

Description  of  a  New  Species  of  Hydreionocri- 
nus  from  the  Coal  Measures  of  Kansas. 
Transactions  of  the  New  York  Academy 
of  Science,  XVI  (1898),  372-374,  Plate  36. 

Classification  of  the  Mississippian  Series.  Jour- 
nal of  Geology,  VI  (1898),  303-314. 

Discusses  the  basis  of  a  natural  classification^ of  geo- 
logic formations,  with  an  application  of  the  principles 
to  the  formations  of  the  Mississippian.series. 

The  Silurian  Fauna  Interpreted  on  the  Epi- 
continental Basis.    Ibid.,  692-702. 

Discusses  the  relationship  of  the  Niagaran  faunas  of 
the  interior  of  North  America  with  the  Silurian  faunas 
of  northern  Europe,  and  the  probable  pathway  of  com- 
munication between  the  two  provinces. 

Descriptions  of  Devonian  Crinoids  and  Blas- 
toids  from  Milwaukee,  Wisconsin.  Annals 
of  the  New  York  Academy  of  Science,  XI 
(1898),  117-126,  Plate  14. 

Describes  two  new  and  one  old  species  of  Melocrinus, 
also  two  new  varieties,  and  one  new  and  one  old  species 
of  Pentremitidea. 

Osage  vs.  Augusta.  American  Geologist, 
XXII  (1898),  12-16. 

A  plea  for  the  retention  of  the  name  "Osage"  for  one 
of  the  Mississippian  time  divisions,  rather  than  the 
substitution  of  "Augusta." 

A  Bibliographic  Index  of  North  American 
Carboniferous  Invertebrates.  Bulletin  of 
the  United  States  Geological  Survey,  No. 
153  (1898),  1-653. 

Kinderhook  Faunal  Studies:  I,  The  Fauna  of 
the  Vermicular  Sandstone  at  Northview, 
Webster  County,  Missouri.     Transactions 


of  the  St.  Louis  Academy  of  Science,  IX 
(1899),  9-51,  Plates  2-6. 

Describes  the  fauna  of  the  Vermicular  sandstone  at 
Northview,  Mo.,  and  discusses  its  correlation. 

A  Peculiar  Devonian  Deposit  in  Northeastern 
Illinois.  Journal  of  Geology,  VII  (1899), 
483-488. 

Describes  a  deposit  of  Devonian  sediments,  character- 
ized by  numerous  fish  teeth  and  other  fossils,  filling 
crevices  in  the  Niagaran  limestone,  eighteen  feet  below 
its  upper  surface. 

Studies  for  Students:  A  Centxiry  of  Progress 
in  Palaeontology.    Ibid.,  496-508. 

Discusses  the  development  and  differentiation  of  the 
science  of  palaeontology  during  the  nineteenth  century. 

Kinderhook  Faimal  Studies:  II,  The  Fauna  of 
the  Chonopectus  Sandstone  at  Burlington, 
Iowa.  Transactions  of  the  St.  Louis  Acad- 
emy of  Science,  X  (1900),  57-129,  Plates  1-9. 

Describes  the  fauna  of  the  second  member  of  the  Kin- 
derhook series  at  Burlington,  Iowa,  and  discusses  the 
correlation  of  the  Kinderhook  formations  at  Burling- 
ton. 

Report  on  the  Fossils  from  the  Wichita  Moun- 
tains. Bulletin  of  the  Geological  Society 
of  America,  XI  (1900),  142-144. 

The  fossil  faunas  recognized  are  referable  to  three 
horizons,  the  lowest  is  Cambrian,  the  two  higher  are 
lower  and  middle  Ordovician. 

A  Preliminary  Report  on  the  Stratigraphic 
Palaeontology  of  Walpack  Ridge,  in  Sussex 
County,  New  Jersey.  Annual  Report  of 
the  Geological  Survey  of  New  Jersey,  1899 
(1900),  1-46. 

The  geologic  formations  of  the  area  with  their  con- 
tained fossils  are  discussed.  The  formations  recog- 
nized are  of  Silurian  and  Devonian  age,  and  they  are 
correlated  with  the  formations  of  similar  age  in  New 
York  and  Pennsylvania. 

Description  of  Cambrian  Trilobites  from  New 
Jersey,  with  Notes  on  the  Age  of  the  Mag- 
nesian  Limestone  Series.  Ibid.,  47-53, 
Plate  1. 

One  new  species,  Liostracus?  jerseyensis,  is  described 
and  the  Cambrian  age  of  the  whole  Magnesian  lime- 
stone series  is  suggested. 

The  Palaeontology  of  the  Niagaran  Limestone 
in  the  Chicago  Area:  The  Crinoidea.  Bul- 
letin of  the  Natural  History  Survey  of  the 
Chicago  Academy  of  Science,  No.  IV  (1900), 
1-153,  Plates  1-15. 

The  relationship  between  the  Niagaran  faunas  of  the 
interior  of  North  America  and  the  Silurian  faunas  of 
northern  Europe  is  discussed,  then,  after  chapters  on 
the  morphology  and  classification  of  the  crinoids,  the 
crinoids  of  the  Chicago  fauna  are  described.  Sixty- 
eight  species  are  recognized  altogether,  twenty-seven 
of  which  are  described  as  new.  One  new  genus  is  also 
recognized  and  described  as  Chicagocrinus. 


Department  of  Geology 


123 


The  Succession  of  Fossil  Faunas  in  the  Kin- 
derhook  Beds  at  Burlington,  Iowa.  Iowa 
Geological  Survey,  X  (1900),  6a-79. 

The  succession  of  faunas  in  the  Kinderhook  formations 
at  Burlington  is  described,  and  their  correlation  with 
other  Kinderhook  faunas  is  discussed. 

Correlation  of  the  Kinderhook  Formations  of 
Southwestern  Missouri.  Journal  of  Geol- 
ogy, IX  (1901),  130-148. 

The  Kinderhook  formations  of  southwestern  Missouri 
are  described,  with  lists  of  the  species  of  fossils  con- 
tained in  them.  These  faunas  are  compared  with  the 
Kinderhook  faunas  elsewhere  and  a  correlation  of  the 
formations  is  attempted. 

The  Palaeozoic  Limestones  of  Kittatinny  Valley, 
New  Jersey.  In  collaboration  with  H.  B. 
Ktimmel.  Bulletin  of  the  Geological  So- 
ciety of  America,  XII  (1901),  147-164. 

The  limestone  formations  of  the  Kittatinny  valley  are 
described  and  lists  of  their  contained  fossils  are  given. 
The  great  mass  of  the  Magnesian  or  Kittatinny  lime- 
stone is  shown  to  be  Cambrian  in  age,  at  one  locality 
only  have  fossils  of  lower  Ordovician  age  been  detected 
in  the  higher  beds  of  the  formation.  Lying  abqvethe 
Kittatinny  limestone  and  unconformable  with  it,  is  a 
non-magnesian  limestone  formation  with  a  basal  lime- 
stone conglomerate  in  its  lower  beds.  This  formation 
is  abundantly  fossiliferous  and  is  shown  to  be  of  Black 
river  and  Trenton  age. 

Prodromites,  a  New  Ammonite  Genus  from  the 
Lower  Carboniferous.  In  collaboration  with 
J.  P.  Smith.  Journal  of  Geology,  IX 
(1901),  255-266.  Also  Contributions  from 
the  Walker  Museum,  I,  31-41,  Plates  6-8. 


Cephalopods  with  the  ammonitic  type  of  suture  have 
previously  been  recognized  in  no  strata  older  than  the 
tipper  Carboniferous.     The    genus  Prodromites  with 


two  species  is  described  from  beds  of  Kinderhook  age, 
and  is  recorded  from  Missouri,  Iowa,  and  Indiana. 

A  Preliminary  Report  on  the  Palaeozoic  For- 
mations of  the  Kittatinny  Valley  in  New 
Jersey.  Annual  Report  of  the  Geological 
Survey  of  New  Jersey  for  1900  (1901),  1-8. 

The  Palaeozoic  formations  in  the  Kittatinny  valley  are 
described.  They  are  the  Hardiston  quartzite  of  Cam- 
brian age,  the  Kittatinny  limestone  of  Cambrian  and 
Lower  Ordovician  age,  the  Trenton  limestone  of  Black 
river-Trenton  age,  and  the  Hudson  river  slate  of  Tren- 
ton-Lorraine age. 

Kinderhook  Faunal  Studies:  III,  The  Faunas 
of  Beds  No.  3  to  No.  7  at  Burlington,  Iowa. 
Transactions  of  the  St.  Louis  Academy  of 
Science,  XI  (1901),  147-214,  Plates  12-20. 

The  five  faunas  Nos.  3  to  7  in  the  Kinderhook  series  at 
Burlington  are  described  and  the  correlation  of  the 
Kinderhook  formations  at  that  locality  is  discussed. 

The  Composition,  Origin,  and  Relationships  of 
the  Corniferous  Fauna  in  the  Appalachian 


Province  of  North  America.  Journal  of 
Geology,  X  (1902),  423-432. 

The  northern  origin  of  the  Corniferous  fauna  is  dis- 
cussed and  the  explanation  of  various  facts  in  the  geo- 
fraphic  distribution  of  Devonian  faunas  in  North 
merica  is  suggested. 

The  Rocks  of  the  Green  Pond  Mountain  Re- 
gion. In  collaboration  with  H.  B.  Kummel. 
Annual  Report  of  the  Geological  Survey 
of  New  Jersey  for  1901  (1902),  1-51. 

Discusses  the  stratigraphy  and  geologic  structure  in 
the  Green  Pond  Mountain  region  of  New  Jersey,  and 
correlates  the  formations  by  means  of  the  fossils. 


H.  Foster  Bain,  Ph.D.  1897 ;  Consulting 
Geologist,  Des  Moines,  Iowa. 

The    Geology  of  Washington  County,  Iowa. 

Iowa  Geological  Survey,  Y  (1896),  lia-174. 
The  Geology  of  Woodbury  County,  Iowa.  Ibid., 

241-300. 

The  Geology  of  Appanoose  County,  Iowa. 
Ibid.,  361-438. 

The  Geology  of  Polk  County,  Iowa.  Ibid.^ 
263^13. 

Relations  of  the  Wisconsin  and  Kansan  Drift 
Sheets  in  Central  Iowa  and  Related  Phen- 
omena. Doctor's  thesis.  Ibid.,  VI  (1897), 
429-476.  Also  pamphlet,  8vo,  52,  Chicago, 
1897. 

The  Geology  of  Guthrie  County,  Iowa.  Ibid., 
VII  (1897),  413-487. 

The  Geology  of  Madison  County,  Iowa.  In 
collaboration  with  J.  L.  Tilton.  Ibid.,  489- 
542. 

Machine  Coal  Mining  in  Iowa,  U.  S.  A.  Pam- 
phlet.   Newcastle-upon-Tyne,  1897. 

Read  before  the  Federated  Institute  of  Mining  Engi- 
neers, London,  June  3, 1897. 

Sketch  of  the  Geology  of  Mexico.  Journal  of 
Geology,  V  (1897),  384-465. 

Nevin  Melancthon  Fenneman,  Ph.D. 
1901 ;  Professor  of  Geology,  University 
of  Colorado. 

Development  of  the  Profile  of  Equilibriiun  of 
the  Subaqueous  Shore  Terrace.  Doctor's 
thesis.  Pamphlet,  8vo,  32,  Chicago,  1902. 
Also  Journal  of  Geology  X  (1902),  1--31. 


124 


Publications 


Charles  Henry  Gordon,  Ph.D.  1895; 
Superintendent  of  Schools,  Lincoln, 
Neb. 

Buried  River  Channels  in  Southeastern  Iowa. 
Annual  Report  of  the  Geological  Survey 
of  Iowa,  III  (1893),  237-256. 

Describes  the  occurrence,  in  Lee  county,  Iowa,  of  an 
extensive  channel  in  the  rock  underlying  the  glacial 
drift  representing  a  former  course  of  the  Mississippi 
river. 

Geology  of  Van  Buren  County,  Iowa.  Ibid., 
IV  (1894),  197-254. 

Gives  a  description  of  the  geological  features  of  the 
region.  Errors  of  previous  writers  corrected.  Some 
of  the  important  features  brought  out  are :  A  revision 
of  the  classification  of  the  Keokuk  and  St.  Louis  for- 
mations and  the  plane  of  separation  between  these 
more  satisfactorily  defined;  the  origin  of  the  ox-bow 
bend  of  the  Des  Moines ;  the  erosion  unconformity  be- 
tween the  Lower  Carboniferous  and  the  Coal  Measures. 

Stratigraphy  of  the  St.  Louis  and  Warsaw 
Formations  in  Southeastern  Iowa.  Journal 
of  Geology,  III  (1895),  289-311. 

A  detailed  study  is  made  of  the  stratigraphical  rela- 
tions of  the  different  beds  and  previous  erroneous  con- 
clusions noted  and  corrected.  The  Warsaw  shown  to 
constitute  the  basal  member  of  the  St.  Louis  formation. 
The  processes  of  brecciation  and  dolomitization  dis- 
cussed. 

Syenite-Gneiss  (Leopard  Rock)  from  the  Apa- 
tite Region  of  Ottawa  County,  Canada. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Bulletin  of  the  Geological 
Society  of  America,  VII  (1895),  95-134. 

A  systematic  petrographical  study  of  a  vein  of  rock 
occurring  in  connection  with  the  spatite  deposits  at 
High  Rock  mine  which  on  cross  fracture  shows  a  net- 
work of  green  agite  inclosing  lumps  of  coarse-grained 
feldspar.  The  rock  is  shown  to  vary  from  a  coarse- 
grained syenite  without  the  anastoneosing  angite  seams 
to  a  well-marked  gneiss.  A  study  of  thin  sections  shows 
the  constituents  of  the  green  bands  or  seams  to  be  in 
a  granular  condition  while  the  intervening  feldspar 
areas  show  no  indications  of  crushing.  _  Various  views 
are  suggested  to  account  for  the  peculiar  structure  of 
this  rock  and  the  conclusion  drawn  that  it  is  an  inter- 
mediate stage  in  the  development  of  a  streaked  angite- 
syenite  gneiss  through  orographic  agencies.  _  The  no- 
menclature of  gneisses  is  discussed  and  an  improved 
method  of  naming  gneisses  suggested. 

Reviews  of 

S.  Calvin  (State  geologist),  Iowa  Geological 
Survey,  Vol.  I.  First  Annual  Report  for 
1892.  840,  472  pp.,  10  plates,  26  figrures. 
American  Journal  of  Science,  XL VI  (1893), 
397-398. 

Summary  of  the  papers  included  in  the  volume.  Com- 
mendable features  and  important  conclusions  noted 
and  certain  errors  pointed  out. 

Post  Glacial  Submergence  in  the  Region  of 
the  Great  Lakes.  Journal  of  Geology,  III 
(1895),  349-352. 

A  summary  review  of  papers  bv  Leverett,  Taylor,  and 
Spencer,  giving  the  results  or  observations  on  the 
changes  that  have  taken  place  in  post-glacial  times  in 
the  great  lake  region. 


Thomas  Cramer  Hopkins,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Professor  of  Geology,  Syracuse  Uni- 
versity. 

Springs:  The  Influence  of  Stratigraphy  on 
their  Emergency  as  Illustrated  in  the  Ozark 
Uplift.  American  Geologist,  XIV  (1894), 
365-368. 

Bedford  Oolite  and  Chicago  Dolomite.  Min- 
eral Industry,  III  (1894),  505-509. 

The  Carboniferous  Sandstones  of  Western  In- 
diana. 140  pp.,  3  maps,  9  plates.  Twen- 
tieth Annual  Report  of  the  Department  of 
Geology  and  Natural  Resources  of  Indi- 
ana, 1895.  Abstract  in  the  Seventeenth  An- 
nual Report  of  the  United  States  Geological 
Survey.    Also  in  part  in  Stone,  1896. 

The  Building  Materials  of  Pennsylvania:  I, 
Brownstones.  122  pp.,  26  full  page  plates, 
2  maps.  Appendix  to  the  Annual  Report 
of  the  Pennsylvania  State  College,  Harris- 
burg,  1897.  Also  in  Stone  and  Stone  Trade 
News,  1897. 

Kaolin:  Its  Occurrence,  Technology,  and 
Trade.    Ibid.,  VII  (1899),  148-160. 

Cambro-Silmian  Limonite  Ores  of  Pennsyl- 
vania. Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  128,  1900. 
Also  in  Bulletin  of  the  Geological  Society 
of  America,  XI  (1900),  475-502. 

A  discussion  of  the  distribution,  mode  of  occurrence, 
and  origin  of  limestone  ores  of  the  limestone  areas  in 
central  and  eastern  Pennsylvania. 

Henry  Barnard  KiJMMEL,  Ph.D.  1895; 
State  Geologist  of  New  Jersey. 

Some  Rivers  of  Connecticut.  Journal  of  Ge- 
ology, I  (1893),  371-393. 

The  broader  features  of  the  topography  are  briefly  de- 
scribed, and  the  attempt  is  made  to  trace  the  develop- 
ment of  the  chief  rivers  in  relation  to  the  past  and 
present  topography. 

Lake  Passaic:  An  Extinct  Glacial  Lake.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  8vo,  88,  map.  Trenton,  New 
Jersey,  1895. 

The  various  lines  of  evidence  by  which  the  existence  of 
Lake  Passaic,  an  extinct  glacial  lake  of  northern  New 
Jersey,  is  demonstrated,  are  given  in  detail,  its  history 
is  traced  and  the  subsequent  deformation  of  its  shore 
line  is  discussed. 


Depaetment  of  Zoology 


125 


Lake  Passaic:  An  Extinct  Glacial  Lake.  In 
collaboration  with  Rollin  D.  Salisbury. 
(See  above.)  Abstract  of  same,  Journal  of 
Geology,  III  (1895),  533-560. 

Review  of 

J.  W.  Spencer,  Reconstruction  of  the  Antillean 

Continent.    Journal  of  Geology,  III  (1895), 

364^368. 

The  reviewer  qnestions  the  correctness  of  the  author's 
conclusions. 


John  Paul  Goode,  Graduate  student. 

An  Inherited  Blunder.     Science,  IV  (1896), 
115-116. 

The  article  calls  attention  to  the  conventional  error  in 
the  representation  in  pictures  and  diagrams  of  ice- 
bergs in  a  position  of  great  instability. 

An  Explanation  of  the  So-called  Pseudo  Au- 
rora.   Ibid.,  V  (1897),  186. 

An  interpretation  of  a  phenomenon  sometimes  observed 
in  the  sub-arid  Northwest  in  winter,  in  which  tall  shafts 
of  white  light  are  seen  at  night  over  the  street  lamps, 
or  other  source  of  illumination. 


XXII.    ZOOLOGY 


Chables  Otis  Whitman  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
Zoology. 

The  Inadequacy  of  the  Cell-Theory  of  Devel- 
opment. Journal  of  Morphology,  VIII 
(1893),  639-658.  Also  Wood's  Holl  Bio- 
logical Lectures,  II  (1893),  105-124. 

An  attempt  to  show  that  the  whole  theory  of  develop- 
ment as  a  process  of  cell-formation  is  incorrect,  the 
essential  thing  being,  not  the  multiplication  of  cells, 
but  the  primordial  organization  of  the  egg.  The  bound- 
aries of  homologous  parts  do  not  always  coincide  with 
definite  cell-boundaries;  homology  must  therefore  be 
defined  from  the  organization  standpoint  rather  than 
the  cell  standpoint.  Specific  forms  have  their  deter- 
minations in  the  organization  of  the  egg,  the  egg  being 
a  young  organism  to  start  with,  and  preserving  its 
individuality  from  first  to  last,  although  it  is  gradually 
divided  up  into  many  thousands  of  cells. 

The  Metamerism  of  Clepsine.  Festschrift 
zum  siebenzigsten  Geburtstage  Rudolf 
Leuckarts,  Leipzig,  1892. 

An  analysis  of  the  whole  metameric  structure,  showing 
that  the  segments  are  equivalent  morphological  units 
from  end  to  end,  each  having  its  own  brain,  sense 
organs,  nerves,  muscles,  etc.  This  view  supposed  to 
hold  for  all  segmented  animals. 

A  Sketch  of  the  Structure  and  Development  of 
the  Eye  of  Clepsine.  SpengeVs  ZoOlogisches 
Jahrbuch,  VI  (1893),  616-625. 

The  eyes  are  shown  to  have  same  development  as  the 
sense-organs  distributed  over  the  whole  surface;  in 
other  words,  each  segment  is  provided  with  eyes,  optic 
nerves,  and  brain,  and  hence  may  be  considered  as  one 
of  a  tfhain  of  animals.  The  "eyes"  are  double  sense- 
organs,  i.  e..  they  are  composed  of  two  distinct  groups 
of  cells  — a  group  of  visual  cells  (eye  projper)  and  a 
group  of  hair-cells  (tactual) . 


A  Marine  Observatory.  Popular  Science 
Monthly,  XLII  (1893),  459-472. 

A  plea  for  the  establishment  of  a  permanent  sea-side 
station  for  the  study  of  plants  and  animals.  Dohrn, 
Carl  Vogt,  Huxley,  Weismann,  Leuckart,  Gegenbaur, 
and  many  other  naturalists  testify  to  the  importance 
of  such  a  station. 

The  Work  and  Aims  of  the  Marine  Biological 
Laboratory.  Wood's  Holl  Biological  Lec- 
tures, II  (1894),  235-242. 

Gives  an  account  of  the  organization  at  Wood's  Holl, 
and  a  list  of  papers  published  by  members  in  1893. 

Keport  on  the  Marine  Biological  Laboratory 
for  1894-95,  104  pp.    Boston,  1896. 

A  history  of  the  work  and  development  of  the  labora- 
tory. 

Evolution  and  Epigenesis.    Ibid.,  205-224. 

The  chief  purpose  of  this  and  the  two  following  essays 
is  to  define  standpoints  and  theories  of  development, 
and  thus  to  correct  some  current  misconceptions. 

Bonnet's  Theory  of  Evolution.  Ibid.,  225-240. 
Also  in  Monist,  V  (1895),  412-426. 

The  Egg  of  Amia  and  its  Cleavage.  In  col- 
laboration with  A.  C.  Eycleshymer.  Jour- 
nal of  Morphology,  XII  (1896),  309-354. 

Contains  observations  on  the  breeding  habits,  nest, 
eggs,  care  of  nest  by  the  male  parent,  and  care  of  the 
young.  The  egg  and  its  early  stages  of  development 
are  described  in  detail,  and  the  type  of  cleavage  is  com- 
pared with  that  of  Lepidosteus,  the  higher  fishes,  and 
amphibia.  The  orientation  of  the  embryo  in  relation 
to  the  first  cleavage-planes  and  the  general  significance 
of  the  type  of  cleavage  are  discussed. 

The  Palingenesia  and  Germ  Doctrine  of  Bonnet. 
Ibid.,  241-272. 

The  Centrosome  Problem  and  an  Experimental 
Test.  Science,  New  Series,  V  (1897),  235- 
236. 


126 


Publications 


Some  of  the  Functions  and  Features  of  a  Bio- 
logical Station.    Ibid.,  VII  (1898),  37-44. 

The  question  whether  the  ideal  station  should  exclude 
instruction  and  limit  itself  to  pure  research  is  dis- 
cussed at  length. 

Lamarck  and  "A  Perfecting  Tendency."  Jfetd., 
99. 

Chables  Benedict  Davenport  [1899-], 
Associate  Professor  of  Zoology  and  Em- 
bryology. 

On  the  Variation  of  the  Statoblasts  of  Pectina- 
tella  Magnifica  from  Lake  Michigan  at  Chi- 
cago, American  Naturalist,  XXXIV  (1900), 
959-968.    Nine  figures. 

a  quantitative  study  of  variation  with  special  reference 
to  skew  variation  and  non-sexual  inheritance.  Abnor- 
mal forms  of  hooks  are  also  described. 

The  Advance  of  Biology  in  1897.  American 
Naturalist,  XXXIV  (1900),  489-493. 

Third  annual  review  of  progress  based  on  reviews  in 
UAnn^e  biologique. 

On  the  Variation  of  the  Shell  of  Pecten  Irradi- 
ans  Lamarck  from  Long  Island.  Ibid., 
863-877.    Two  figures. 

A  comparison  of  scallop  shells  from  three  localities  of 
Long  Island.  The  relative  variability  of  the  two  valves. 
Skew  variation.    Monstrosities. 

The  Aims  of  the  Quantitative  Study  of  Varia- 
tion. Wood's  Holl  Biological  Lectures, 
1899  (1900),  267-272. 

Programme  of  investigations  into  variation. 

The  Meeting  of  Naturalists  at  Chicago.  Sci- 
ence, New  Series,  XI  (1900),  246-253. 

Secretary's  report,  with  abstracts  of  papers  presented. 

Investigations  at  Cold  Spring  Harbor.  Ibid., 
XII,  371-373. 

Report  on  eight  researches  in  progress. 

A  History  of  the  Development  of  the  Quanti- 
tative Study  of  Variation.    Ibid.,  864-870. 

Traced  from  its  origin  in  Quetelet's  and  Qalton's  appli- 
cation to  biology  of  Gauss's  Law  of  Error  to  modern 
activity  in  England,  Germany,  Holland,  and  America. 

The  Second  Meeting  of  Naturalists  at  Chicago. 
Ibid.,  XIII  (1901),  370-379. 

Secretary's  report,  with  abstracts  of  papers  presented. 
Mendel's  Law  of  Dichotomy  in  Hybrids.    Bio- 
logical Bulletin,  II  (1901),  307-310. 

Presentation  of  the  newer  quantitative  laws  of  inheri- 
tance in  hybridization. 

Zoology  of  the  Twentieth  Century.  Science, 
New  Series,  XIV  (1901),  315-324. 

Vice-presidential  address  before  Section  F  of  the  Ameri- 
can Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Science,  pre- 
dicting the  greater  application  of  the  experimental  and 


quantitative  methods  in  zoology.  The  application  of 
statistics  to  evolution  studies  illustrated  by  the  au- 
thor's investigations  on  recent  and  fossil  scallop-shelli. 
The  significance  of  skew  variation. 

The  Statistical  Study  of  Evolution.  Popular 
Science  Monthly,  LIX  (1901),  447-460. 
With  13  figures. 

A  discussion  of  frequency-of-distribution  polygons  with 
an  attempt  at  their  interpretation. 

Variability,  Symmetry,  and  Fertility  in  an  Ab- 
normal Species.  Biometrika,  I,  Part  2, 
(1902)  255-256. 

A  critical  review  of  a  paper  by  A.  G.  Mayer  entitled : 
The  Variations  of  a  Newly  Arisen  Species  of  Medusa. 

The  Animal  Ecology  of  the  Cold  Spring  Har- 
bor Sand  Spit,  with  Remarks  on  the  Theory 
of  Adaptation.  With  a  map  and  six  half- 
tone cuts.  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  X,  155- 
176. 

The  sand  spit  at  Cold  Spring  Harbor  is  microcosm  where 
marine  and  terrestrial  species  come  together.  The 
marine  organisms  contribute  flotsam  and  jetsam  to  the 
upper  beach,  so  that  the  line  of  d6bris  just  above  the 
hi^h-tide  line  is  rich  in  organic  matter,  both  plant  and 
animal.  This  line  of  d6bris,  renewed  twice  each  day, 
is  the  feeding-ground  of  a  remarkable  fauna.  Here 
lives,  in  a  terrestrial  habitat,  a  marine  species  of  am- 
phipod,  and  in  the  same  situation  are  found  numerous 
terrestrial  species,  such  as  ants,  flies,  and  beetles. 
These  scavengers,  in  turn,  invite  a  number  of  predace- 
ous  creatures  — spiders,  robber  flies,  and  tiger  beetles. 
Finally  these  are  preyed  upon  by  the  swallows.  At  the 
tip  of  the  sand  spit  live  certain  species  that  depend  upon 
the  currents  to  bring  them  their  food.  These,  like  the 
other  creatures,  are  adapted  to  their  environment.  The 
adaptation  has  been  in  part  brought  about  by  a  segre- 
gation of  individuals  into  the  environment  to  which 
their  structure  fits  them. 

Reviews  of 

von  Guita,  Experiments  in  Breeding  Mice. 
Biological  Bulletin,  II  (1900),  121-128. 

von  Guita 's  results  used  for  a  quantitative  investiga- 
tion into  laws  of  inheritance.    Propotency  of  sports. 

Gardiner,  The  Fauna  and  Geography  of  the 
Maldive  and  Laccadive  Archipelagoes. 
American  Naturalist,  XXXVI,  61-69;  819- 
821. 

Alfred  Earl,  The  Living  Organism.    Science, 

XI  (1900)  949. 

Biological  Lectures  from  the  Marine  Biologi- 
cal Laboratory  at  Wood's  Holl,  1899.    Ibid., 

XII  (1900),  563-564. 


Frank  Kattray  Lillie  [1892-94, 1900-], 
Associate  Professor  of  Embryology. 

A  Preliminary  Account  of  the  Embryology  of 
Unio  Complanata.  Journal  of  Morphology, 
VIII  (1893),  569-578,  Plate  XXVIII. 

a  preliminary  abstract  of  part  of  the  following  paper- 


Department  of  ZoOlogy 


127 


The  Embryology  of  the  Unionidae:  A  Study 
in  Cell-Lineage.  Doctor's  thesis.  Ibid., 
X  (1895),  1-94,  Plates  I-VI. 

The  cleavage  of  the  ovum  of  Lamellibranohs  is  shown 
to  agree  with  that  of  Gasteropods  and  Annelids.  The 
cell-origin  of  the  various  organs  of  the  larva  is  exactly 
traced,  and  it  is  shown  that  in  rate,  direction,  and  place 
of  division  the  future  needs  of  the  larva  are  antici- 

Eated.  The  mesoblast  is  shown  for  the  first  time  to 
ave  a  double  origin.  In  the  second  part  of  the  paper 
the  history  of  the  organs  is  traced  up  to  the  complete 
formation  of  the  Glochidium. 

Some  Notes  on  Regeneration  and  Regulation 
of  Planarians.  I,  The  Source  of  Material 
of  New  Parts  and  Limits  of  Size.  American 
Naturalist,  XXXIV  (1900),  173-177. 

The  regeneration  of  Planaria  takes  place  without  refer- 
ence to  growth  and  proceeds  as  rapidly  in  individuals 
that  are  dail^  decreasing  in  size  from  starvation  as  in 
well-fed  specimens.  Starvation  by  retaining  the  Pla- 
naria in  distilled  water  causes  constant  reduction  in 
size.  A  single  individual  may  be  starved  to  1-100  of  the 
original  bulk.  In  this  process  of  reduction  the  normal 
development  is  reversed  and  the  animal  seems  to  pro- 
ceed back  toward  the  embryonic  state.  The  most 
reduced  individuals  resemble  in  all  essentials  just 
hatched  embryos. 

Organization  of  the  Egg  of  Unio.  Journal  of 
Morphology,  XVII  (1901),  227-292,  Plates 
XXIV-XXVII. 

A  study  of  the  maturation,  fertilization,  and  early 
cleavage  of  the  egg  of  Unio.  The  thesis  is  upheld  that 
the  cytoplasm  of  the  egg  of  Unio  possesses  a  definite 
organization  involving  bilateral  symmetry  and  certain 
antero-posterior  proportions. 

Notes  on  Regeneration  and  Regulation  of  Pla- 
narians. II,  Regeneration  of  the  Head  of 
Dendrocoelum  Lacteum;  III,  Regeneration 
of  the  Pharynges  of  Phagocata;  IV,  Theo- 
retical and  Critical.  American  Journal  of 
Physiology,  VI  (1901),  129-141. 

The  diflferentiation  of  exposed  embryonic  tissue  may  be 
dependent  on  the  external  stimuli  to  which  such  tissue 
is  exposed.  The  functional  correlations  of  all  the  parts 
of  a  piece  capable  of  regeneration  are  the  internal  fac- 
tors, and  the  various  stimuli  from  without  thus  induced 
in  normal  sequence  are  the  external  factors  which  de- 
termine the  location  of  organs.  The  case  of  Dendro- 
coelum appears  to  indicate  that  functional  correlation 
is  dependent  on  the  nervous  system.  The  regeneration 
of  a  head  lateral  to  the  axis  of  the  parent  worm  in  the 
case  of  i)arts  cut  off  obliquely  is  thus  explained,  be- 
cause stimuli  which  normally  would  fall  upon  the 
head  are  received  by  the  most  advanced  part,  which  is 
lateral  to  the  original  axis  in  the  case  of  such  an  ante- 
rior cut  surface.  The  regeneration  of  a  tail  is  similarly 
explained.  The  intestinal  system  regenerates  in  rela- 
tion to  the  new  external  parts. 

Differentiation  without  Cleavage  in  the  Egg 
of  the  Annelid  Chaetopterus  Pergamenta- 
ceus.  Archiv  fur  Enturicklungsmechanik 
der  Organismen,  XIV  (1902),  477-497, 
Plates  XXVII,  XXVIII. 

After  being  submitted  for  about  one  hour  to  sea  water 
containing  certain  amounts  of  KCl,  unfertilized  or  fer- 
tilized eggs  of  Chaetopterus  may  develop  certain  of 


the  organs  of  the  trochophore  without  cell-division. 
The  ectoplasm  becomes  vacuolated  like  the  ectoderm  of 
the  trochophore,  cUia  are  formed,  and  the  yolk  aggre- 
gates in  a  dense  mass.  In  some  cases  it  is  even  pos- 
sible to  holologize  the  regions  of  these  unsegmented 
ciliated  e^gs  with  the  regions  of  the  trochophore. 

The  period  preceding  these  differentiations  is  espe- 
cially characterized  by  active  amoeboid  movements  of 
the  protoplasm  that  partially  or  wholly  replace  cleav- 
age. Fusion  of  from  two  to  five  ejjgs  is  very  common  in 
the  KCl  cultures ;  usually  the  fusion  is  incomplete,  the 
constituent  ova  being  separated  by  cell  walls ;  but  in 
some  cases  it  is  complete.  After  being  in  a  solution 
containing  also  CaCU  as  many  as  100  eg^  may  unite  in 
a  common  mass.  During  the  maturation  period  the 
I)ower  of  resistance  of  the  fertilized  egg  to  solutions 
continueilly  increases. 


Charles  Manning  Child  [1895 — ],  In- 
structor in  Zoology. 

Preliminary  Account  of  the  Cleavage  of  Areni- 
cola  Cristata,  with  Remarks  on  the  Mosaic 
Theory.  Zoological  Bulletin,  I  (1897),  71- 
85,  Figures  1-12.  Abstract  in  Science,  New 
Series,  V  (1897),  629-631. 

A  r6sum4  of  the  important  features  in  the  cell-lineage 
of  Arenicola  cristata,  giving  in  detail  the  origin  of 
ectoderm,  mesoderm,  and  entoderm,  the  cell-lineage  of 
the  prototroch  and  paratroch,  and  the  history  of  the 
somatic  plate.  Following  the  account  of  the  cleavage 
is  a  brief  discussion  of  the  mosaic  theory. 

Centrosome  and  Sphere  in  Cells  of  the  Ovarian 
Stroma  of  Mammals:  A  Preliminary  Com- 
munication. Zoological  Bulletin,  I  (1897), 
87-93,  Figures  1-5.  Abstract  in  Science, 
New  Series,  V  (1897),  231-232. 

An  account  of  peculiar  groups  of  cells  in  the  stroma 
which  show  a  centrosome  and  sphere  in  the  cytoplasm 
although  not  undergoing  mitosis. 

Some  Features  of  the  Oogenesis  of  Stemaspis. 
Ibid.,  VII  (1898),  104-105. 

An  account  of  the  peculiar  relation  of  the  ovarian  egg 
to  the  circulatory  system  and  the  cytoplasmic  struc- 
ture of  the  &gg  during  growth  and  yolk  formation. 

The  Maturation  and  Fertilization  of  the  Egg 
of  Arenicola  Marina.  Transactions  of  the 
New  York  Academy  of  Science,  XVI  (1898), 
387-394,  Figures  1-12.  Abstract  in  Science, 
New  Series,  VII  (1898),  321-322. 

The  paper  deals  chiefly  with  the  achromatic  structures. 
The  cleavage  centrosomes  are  shown  to  arise  de  novo. 

The  Significance  of  the  Spiral  Type  of  Cleav- 
age and  its  Relation  to  the  Process  of  Dif- 
ferentiation. Wood^s  Holl  Biological  Lec- 
tures for  1899  (1900),  231-266,  Figures  1-27. 
Abstract  in  Science,  New  Series,  XI  (1900), 
189-190. 

A  critical  discussion  of  the  relations  between  the  spiral 
type  of  cleavage  and  differentiation.  The  two  pro- 
cesses are  regarded  as  independent  though  in  some 
cases  coincident  in  time. 


128 


Publications 


The  Egg  of  Stichostemma.    Ihid.,  249-250. 

An  account  of  observations  on  the  living  egg  of  Sticho- 
stemma  during  its  maturation,  fertilization,  and  early 
cleavage. 

The  Early  Development  of  Arenicola  and 
Sternaspis.     Archiv  filr    Entwickelungs- 

,  mechanik,  IX  (1900),  587-723,  Plates  XXI- 
XXV. 

A  detailed  account  of  the  cell-lineage  of  Arenicola  cri- 
stata  up  to  the  trochopore  stage,  and  a  description  of 
the  earlier  cleavage  of  Sternaspis.  The  significance  of 
the  spiral  type  of  cleavage  and  its  relation  to  differen- 
tiation are  discussed.  In  a  review  of  the  subject  of  cell 
homology  the  position  is  held  that  cell  homology  sensu 
stricto  does  not  exist. 

A  Specimen  of  Nais  with  Bifurcated  Prosto- 
mium.  Anatomische  Anzeiger,  XVII  (1900), 
311-312,  Figure  1. 

Description  of  a  peculiar  abnormality  of  the  prosto- 
mium  in  Nais  lacustris,  resulting  from  injury. 

Abnormalities  in  the  Cestode  Moniezia  Ex- 
pansa.  I,  Biological  Bulletin^  I  (1900), 
215-250,  Figures  1-23;  II,  ibid.,  261-290, 
Figures  24rAl,  Abstract  in  Science,  New 
Series,  XII  (1900),  228. 

Description  of  a  large  number  of  abnormal  proglottids 
found  in  specimens  of  Moniezia  expansa.  The  arrange- 
ment of  the  internal  organs  is  shown  to  be  closely  cor- 
related with  the  form  of  the  proglottid.  Part  I  is 
devoted  to  partial  and  incompletely  separated  proglot- 
tids ;  Part  II  to  spiral  abnormalities.  Part  III,  nowin 
press,  deals  with  the  significance  of  the  abnormalities 
and  their  relation  to  the  ^lormal  process  of  proglottid- 
development. 

Regulation  in  Stenostomum.  Ibid.,  XIV  (1901), 

28. 

An  experimental  study  of  a  peculiar  form  of  regulation 
following  section  in  asexual  chains  of  Stenostomum, 
consisting  of  the  absorption  of  whole  zoOids  or  parts 
by  older  zoOids  posterior  to  them. 

Fission  and  Regulation  in  Stenostomum  Leu- 
cops.  Biological  Bulletin,  II  (1901),  329- 
831. 

An  account,  based  on  experimental  study,  of  the  nor- 
mal process  of  fission  and  the  factors  which  determine 
the  position  of  the  zones  of  fission. 

Review  of 

Oppel,  Lehrbuch  der  vergleichenden  mikrosko- 
pischen  Anatomie  der  Wirbelthiere.  Sci- 
ence, New  Series,  IV  (1896),  729-731. 


William  Laweence  Toweb  [1901 — ], 
Assistant  in  Embryology. 

Variation  in  the  Ray-flowers  of  the  Chrysan- 
themum Leucanthemum  L.  at  Yellow 
Springs,  Greene  Co.,  Ohio,  with  Remarks 


upon  the  Determination  of  Modes.  Bio- 
metrika,  I  (1902),  309-315. 

The  number  of  ray-flowers  in  the  heads  of  this  species 
were  found  to  decrease  from  a  high  number  at  the 
opening  of  the  season  to  a  low  number  at  the  end.  This 
fact  is  used  to  show  the  danger  of  mode  determination 
from  a  single  set  of  variates.  The  meaning  and  defini- 
tion of  modes  is  also  discussed. 

Observations  on  the  Structiire  of  the  Exuvial 

Glands  and  the  Formation  of  the  Exuvial 

Fluid  in  Insects.    With  eight  figures.    Zoo- 

logischer  Anzeiger,  XXV  (1902),  466-472. 

A  description  of  the  structure  of  the  exuvial  glands  in 
Leptinotarsa  decemlineata  and  the  formation  of  the 
exuvial  fluid.    A  preliminary  paper. 

On  the  Origin  and  Development  of  the  Wings 
in  Coleoptera.  Zoologisches  Jahrbuch, 
Abtheilung  fur  Anatomie  und  Ontogonie, 
XVII  (1902),  517-572,  Plates  14-20. 

An  attempt  to  settle  the  homology  of  the  elytra  of 
beetles,  in  which  it  was  found  that  the  wings  of  beetles 
arise  from  the  atrophied  spiracles  of  the  last  two 
thoracic  segments  and  in  the  development  are  exactly 
like  the  wings  of  other  insects  and  therefore  homolo- 
gous to  them. 

The  Development  of  the  Colors  and  Color  Pat- 
terns in  Coleoptera,  with  Observations  upon 
the  Development  of  the  Pigmental  Colors 
in  other  Orders  of  Insects.  With  three  litho- 
graphic plates  in  color.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First  Se- 
ries, X,  31-70. 

Ontogenetically,  color  was  found  to  arise  in  connection 
with  the  sclerites  and  closely  associated  with  muscle 
attachment.  The  pigmental  colors  lie  in  the  outer 
layer  of  cuticula.  The  euticula  is  in  two  layers,  an 
outer  one  related  to  the  chondrins  and  an  inner  one  a 
glucoside.  The  pigmental  colors  arise  in  the  outer 
layer  as  the  result  of  action  of  enzymes  which  were  iso- 
lated and  named  chitases,  the  pigment  seems  tobe  an 
oxyazo,  diazo,  or  amido-azo  compound  according  to 
color  and  species. 

Franklin  P.  Mall  [1892-93],  Professor 
of  Anatomy;  Professor  of  Anatomy, 
Johns  Hopkins  University.  (See  un- 
der Anatomy,  p.  137.) 

Henry  H.Donaldson  [1892 — J,  Professor 
and  Head  of  the  Department  of  Neurol- 
ogy.     (See  under  Neurology,  p.  143.) 

Jacques  Loeb  [1892-1902],  Professor  and 
Head  of  the  Department  of  Physiology ; 
Professor  of  Physiology,  University  of 
California.  (See  under  Physiology,  p. 
188.) 


Depabtment  of  Zoology 


129 


*George  Baur  [1892-95],  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Comparative  Osteology  and 
Palaeontology.  (See  under  Palaeontol- 
ogy. P-  14:6.) 

William  Morton  Wheeler  [1892-99], 
Assistant  Professor  of  Embryology; 
Professor  of  Zoology,  University  of 
Texas. 

The  Primitive  Number  of  Malpighian  Vessels 
in  Insects.  A  series  of  seven  articles. 
Psyche,  VI  (1893),  457^60;  485-486;  497- 
498;  509-510;  539-541;  545-547;  561-564. 
Figures. 

Syncoelidium  pellucidum,  a  New  Marine  Tri- 
clad.  Journal  of  Morphology,  IX  (1894), 
167-192,  Plate  VIII. 

Planocera  Inquilina,  a  Polyclad  Inhabiting  the 
Gill  Chamber  of  Sycotypus  canaliculatus. 
Journal  of  Morphology,  195-201,  Figures 
1  and  2. 

The  Behavior  of  the  Centrosome  in  the  Ferti- 
lized Egg  of  Myzostoma  glabrum  Leuckart. 
Journal  of  Morphology,  X  (1895),  305- 
311. 

The  Sexual  Phases  of  Myzostoma.  Mitthei- 
lungen  aus  der  zoologischen  Station  zu 
Neapel,  XII  (1896),  227-302,  Plates  X- 
XII. 

The  Genus  Ochthera.  Entomological  News, 
VII  (1896),  121-123. 

Two  Dohchopodid  Genera  New  to  America. 
Ibid.,  152-156. 

A  New  Genus  and  Species  of  Dolichopodidae. 
Ibid.,  185-189. 

A  New  Empid  with  Remarkable  Middle  Tarsi. 
Ibid.,  189-192. 

An  Antenniform  Extra  Appendage  in  Dilophus 
TibiaUs  Loew.  Archiv  fur  Entwicklungs- 
mechanik  der  Oi-ganismen,  III  (1896),  261- 
268,  Plate  XVI. 


A  Genus  of  Maritime  Dolichopodidae  New  to 
America.  Proceedings  of  the  California 
Academy  of  Science,  Third  Series,  Zoology, 

I  (1898),  145-152,  Plate  IV. 

The  Maturation,  Fecundation,  and  Early  cleav- 
age of  Myzostoma  Glabrum,  Leuckart. 
Archiv  de  biologic,  XV  (1897),  1-77,  Plates 
I-III. 

A  New  Genus  of  Dolichopodidae  from  Florida. 
Zoological  Bulletin,  I  (1898),  217-220,  1 
figure. 

A  New  Peripatus  from  Mexico.  Journal  of 
Morphology,  XV  (1898),  1-8,  Plate  1, 1  figure 
in  text. 

George  Baur's  Life  and  Writings.  American 
Naturalist,  XXXIII  (1899),  15-30. 

The  Life  History  of  Dicyema.  Zoologischer 
Anzeiger,  XXII  (1899),  169-176. 

Anemotropism  and  other  Tropisms  in  Insects. 
Archiv  fiir  Entwicklungsmechanik,  VIII 
(1899),  373-381. 

New  Species  of  Dolichopodidae  from  the  United 
States.  Proceedings  of  the  California 
Academy  of  Science,  Third  Series,  ZoOlogy, 

II  (1899),  1-77,  Plates  I-IV. 

The  Development  of  the  Urinogenital  Organs 
of  the  Lamprey.  Zoologische  Jahrbilcher, 
Abtheilung  fiir  Anatomie  und  Ontogenie 
der  Thiere,  XIII  (1899),  1-88,  Plates  I- 
VII. 

J.  Beard  on  the  Sexual  Phases  of  Myzostoma. 
Zoologische  Anzeiger,  XXII  (1899),  281- 
288. 

Caspar  Friedrich  Wolff  and  the  Theoria  Gene- 
rationis.  Wood's  Holl  Biological  Lectures, 
1898  (1899),  265-284. 

The  Free-swimming  Copepods  of  the  Wood's 
Holl  Region.  Bulletin  of  the  United  States 
Fish  Commission  for  1899  (1900),  157-192, 
30  Figures. 

Reviews  of 

Carri^re  and  Burger,  On  the  Embryonic  De- 
velopment of  the  Wall  Bee  (Chalicodoma 


130 


Publications 


muraria).     American  Naturalist,   XXXII 
(1898),  794-798. 
Packard,  Text  Book  of  Entomology.    Science, 
New  Series,  VII  (1898),  834^836. 


phology,  XIV  (1898),  141-180,  Plates  XIII- 
XV. 

A  study  in  Annelid  morphology,  with  special  reference 
to  the  nervous  system  and  sense  organs.  The  article 
also  includes  a  discussion  of  the  so-called  "lateral 
line  "  in  Annelids. 


Sho  Watas6  [1892-99],  Assistant  Pro- 
f essor  of  Cellular  Biology ;  Professor  of 
Zoology,  Imperial  University  of  Tokyo. 

Homology  of  the  Centrosome.  Journal  of 
Morphologij,  VIII  (1893),  433^144. 

Microsomes  and  their  Kelation  to  the  Centro- 
some. Science,  New  Series,  V  (1897),  230- 
231. 

On  the  Nature  of  Cell-Organization.  Wood^a 
Holl  Biological  Lectures,  1893  (1894),  83- 
104. 

Origin  of  the  Centrosome.  Ibid.,  1894  (1896), 
273-287. 

On  the  Physical  Basis  of  Animal  Phosphor- 
escence.   Ibid.,  1895  (1896),  101-118. 

Protoplasmic  Contractility  and  Phosphores- 
cence.   Ibid.,  1898  (1899),  177-192. 

Edwin  Oakes  Jordan  [1892 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Bacteriology.  (See  under 
Pathology  and  Bacteriology,  p.  154.) 

Charles  Lawrence  Bristol,  Ph.D.  1896; 
Professor  of  Biology,  New  York  Uni- 
versity. 

The  Metamerism  of  Nephelis  Lateralis.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  Journal  of  Morphology,  XV 
(1890),  17-72 

After  a  description  of  Nephelis  follows  an  extended 
description  of  the  central  nervous  system,  and  f  rom_  that 
proceeds  a  definition  of  the  metameres  in  the  animal, 
corroborating  Whitman's  work  on  Clepsine.  A  system 
of  peripheral  nerves,  containing  large  bipolar  cells,  is 
described,  which  is  in  intimate  relations  with  the  cen- 
tral nervous  system.  The  sympathetic  nerve  system  in 
the  leech  is  fully  described  for  the  first  time. 

Howard  Stidham  Brode,  Ph.D.  1896; 
Professor  of  Biology  and  Geology, 
V^hitman  College,  Walla  Walla,  Wash- 
ington. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Morphology  of  Dero 
Vaga.    Doctor's  thesis.     Journal  of  Mor- 


CoRNELiA  Maria  Clapp,  Ph.D.  1896; 
Professor  of  Zoology,  Mount  Holyoke 
College. 

The  Lateral  Line  System  of  Batrachus  tau. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Journal  of  Morphology, 
XV  (1899),  223-258,  Plates  XVII-XX. 

The  points  of  especial  interest  in  this  paper  are  those 
connected  with  the  origin  of  the  lateral  line  system 
and  the  innervation  of  the  organs. 

Relation  of  the  Axis  of  the  Embryo  to  the  first 
Cleavage  Plane.  Wood's  Holl  Biological 
Lectures,  1898  (1899),  139-152. 


Agnes  M.  Claypole,  Ph.D.  1896;  Throop 
Polytechnic  Institute,  Pasadena,  Calif. 

The  Enteron  of  the  Cayuga  Lake  Lamprey. 
Proceedings  of  the  American  Microscopical 
Society,  XVI  (1894),  125-160. 

The  enteron  is  studied  in  the  larva,  the  transforming 
animal,  and  the  adult  stage.  Some  of  the  profound 
changes  experienced  during  these  transitions  are  fol- 
lowed in  detail.  _  The  conversion  of  a  free  living  inde- 
pendent animal  into  an  external  parasite  brings  with 
it  considerations  of  deep  and  far-reaching  interest. 

Some  Points  on  Cleavage  among  Arthropods. 
Transactions  of  the  American  Microscop- 
ical Society,  XIX  (1897),  1-8. 

A  short  consideration  is  made  of  the  early  stages  of  egg 
development  among  the  Arthropoda  and  some  transi- 
tion forms  noted. 

The  Embryology  of  the  Apterygota.  Zoolog- 
ical Bulletin,  II  (1898),  60-76. 

A  summary  of  existing  knowledge  in  this  field. 

The  Embryology  and  Oogenesis  of  Aniuida 
Maratima  Gu6r.  Doctor's  thesis.  Journal 
of  Morphology,  XIV  (1898),  219-300. 

The  adult  ovary  was  studied  to  determine  the  steps  of 
development  of  the  egg,  the  presence  of  accessory  cells, 
and  the  manner  of  yolk  formation  and  the  appearance 
of  the  shell.  Comparisons  were  made  with  the  Insecta 
and  Myriapoda.  The  egg  was  then  followed  through 
its  cleavage  stages,  which  were  found  to  be  transition- 
ary  in  character  between  holoblastic  and  superficial. 
The  origin  of  the  germ  layers  and  formation  of  the 
organs  and  final  hatching  were  considered.  It  was 
found  that  this  lowly  insect  form  had  its  alliances  more 
with  myriapods  and  Crustacea  than  with  the  higher 
insects. 


Department  op  ZoOlogy 


131 


Elliot  Rowiand  Downing,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Instructor  in  Biology,  Marquette  (Michi- 
gan) High  School. 

The  Spermatogenesis  in  Hydra.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  Variation  in  the  Position  of  the  Adductor 
Muscles  of  Anodonta  Grandis  Say.  Ameri- 
can Naturalist,  XXXVI  (1902),  395-400. 

Minnie  Mabie  Enteman,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Assistant  in  Biology,  University  Sec- 
ondary School,  Chicago. 

The  Unpaired  Ectodermal  Structures  of  the 
Antennata.  Zoological  Bulletin,  II  (1900), 
275-282. 

An  attempt  to  homologize  certain  of  the  median  ven- 
tral structures,  such  as  the  aiKxiemes  of  many  insects, 
the  brood  funnels  of  the  Strepsiptera,  and  the  ectoder- 
mal portion  of  the  reproductive  system  of  some  of  the 
more  primitive  insects. 

Variations  in  the  Cephalic  Crest  of  Daphnia 
Hyalina.  American  Naturalist,  XXXIV 
(1900),  879-890. 

A  description  of  new  varieties  of  D.  hyalina  with  a  con- 
sideration of  the  range  of  variation  for  a  number  of 
lakes  in  Michigan  and  Wisconsin. 

The  Behavior  of  the  Social  Wasps.  Popular 
Science  Monthly,  LXI  (1902),  339-351. 

A  study  of  the  activities  characteristic  of  the  larval, 

§upal,  and  imaginal  life  of  the  common  paper  wasp, 
pecial  attention  is  paid  to  the  instincts  of  the  nowly 
excluded  workers  ana  experiments  are  described  which 
determine  the  nature  of  its  meatal  activities.  The 
young  worker  is  shown  to  possess  the  instinct  of  fear, 
memory,  but  not  the  faculty  of  imitation.  The  social 
wasps  appear  to  learn  nothing  from  one  another.  In- 
stinct and  individual  experience  account  entirely  for 
their  complex  activities  and  their  apparent  co-opera- 
tion is  due  merely  to  the  accident  of  their  being  born 
in  the  same  nest. 

Coloration  in  Polistes.  Doctor's  thesis.  Un- 
published. 

A  study  of  individual  variation  in  several  species  of 
Polistes,  and  these  variations  related  to  specific  dis- 
tinctions in  order  to  determine  in  what  sense  the  color 
pattern  is  adaptive.  To  test  the  validity  of  other  im- 
portant theories  concerning  the  origin  of  species,  the 
ontogenesis  of  the  color-pattern  is  determined,  and  the 
physical  and  chemical  nature  of  the  pigment  considered 
in  connection  with  individual  variation  and  geographi- 
cal distribution  of  Polistes  and  allied  genera.  Vary- 
ing climatic  influences  determine  the  coloration  of  the 
wasp.  In  any  given  locality,  the  race  diflFerentiation 
may  be  accounted  for  on  the  principles  of  segregation 
and  slight  differences  in  external  conditions  during  the 
metamorphosis  of  the  wasp,  and  for  the  larger  geo- 
graphical areas,  the  type  of  coloring  is,  in  the  main, 
due  to  climatic  conditions  in  conjunction  with  cumula- 
tive segregation. 


Albeet  Chauncey  Etcleshymeb,  Ph.D. 
1894.      (See  under  Anatomy,  p.  136.) 

Emily  Ray  Geegoby,  Ph.D.  1899;  In- 
structor in  Zoology,  V^ells  College  for 
Women,  Aurora,  N.  Y. 

Origin  of  the  Pronephric  Duct  in  Selachians. 
Zoological  Bulletin,  I  (1897),  123-129. 

A  brief  account  of  the  results  of  a  research  on  young 
Acanthias  embryos,  indicating  that  the  pronephros 
fuses  temporarily  with  the  ectoderm,  and  that  the 
pronephric  duct  is  partly  of  mesodermal  and  partly  of 
ectodermal  origin,  its  tip  maintaining  connection  with 
ectoderm  throughout  its  growth  distally. 

Observations  on  the  Development  of  the  Ex- 
cretory System  in  Turtles.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Zoologische  Jahrbiicher,  XIII  (1900),  683- 
714,  Plates  45-50. 

Besearches  made  chiefly  on  embryos  of  Platypeltis 
spinifer.  The  results  were  as  follows :  The  pronephros 
of  the  turtle  arises  as  outgrowths  from  the  posterior 
somatic  region  of  the  somites.  The  mesonephros  of  the 
turtle  may  extend  anteriorly  over  much  of  the  prone- 
phric region  and  fuses  with  it  so  that  the  parts  can 
only  be  distinguished  in  the  earliest  stages.  The 
metanephros  has  its  origin  where  the  ureter  branches 
from  the  upper  side  of  the  Wolffian  duct  and  in  the 
blastema  surrounding  it.  The  metanephros  arises  in 
essential  independence  of  the  mesonephros.  Prone- 
phros, mesonephros,  and  metanephros  are  heterodyna- 
mous,  not  homodynamous  organs,  connected  alone  by 
their  relations  to  the  Wolffian  duct. 

Michael  F.  Guyeb,  Ph.D.  1900;  Assis- 
tant Professor  of  Biology,  University  of 
Cincinnati. 

Ovarian  Structm-e  in  an    Abnormal  Pigeon. 

Zoological  Bulletin,  II  (1899),  211-224. 
Spermatogenesis  in  Hybrid  Pigeons.    Science, 

XI  (1900),  312. 
Spermatogenesis  of  Normal  and  of   Hybrid 

Pigeons.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  usual  four  types  of  cells  exist  in  the  genesis  of  the 
pigeon  spermatozoon.  Sixteen  chromosomes  appear 
in  the  spermatogonia,  eight  in  the  primary  spermato- 
cytes, but  the  latter  are  of  the  bivalent  type.  Only 
four  chromosomes  appear  in  the  division  of  the  second- 
ary spermatocyte,  but  they  are  stiU  of  the  bivalent 
type.  In  hybrid  pigeons  the  general  plan  of  spermato- 
genesis is  not  essentially  different  from  that  of  normal 
pigeons.  All  hybrids  exhibit  multipolar  spindles  and 
asymmetrical  divisions  of  the  chromatin  of  the  germ 
cells.  Infertile  hybrids  show,  in  addition,  a  deformed 
spermatozoon  and  often  a  marked  degeneration  of  the 
germinal  cells.  Irregularities  in  the  distribution  of 
the  chromatin  may  be  the  basis  for  the  variations  which 
occur  in  the  offsprin^r  of  fertile  hybrids. 


132 


Publications 


E.  H.  Haepee,  Ph.D.  1902;  Professor  of 
Biology,  Albion  College,  Michigan. 

Regeneration  in  Nais  Lacustris,  Science,  New 
Series,  XIV  (1901),  28-29. 

Experiments  on  the  regenerative  po'wer  of  sexual  and 
asexual  individuals.  The  disappearance  of  a  zone  of 
fission  under  the  influence  of  the  formation  of  a  regen- 
erating region.  A  comparison  of  regenerative  power  at 
different  levels  in  the  asexual  and  sexual  forms  show- 
ing the  loss  or  diminution  in  the  capacity  to  regener- 
ate in  the  latter. 

Fertilization  in  the  Pigeon's  Egg.  Abstract. 
Ibid.,  XV  (1902),  526-527. 

The  maturation  and  fertilization  of  the  egg;  poly- 
spermy; origin  of  the  yolk-nuclei  from  spermatozoa: 
mitosis  and  amitosis  in  the  yolk  nuclei;  amoeboid 
movements  of  the  protoplasm  in  cell  division;  differ- 
entiation and  orientation  of  the  active  protoplasm 
within  the  germinal  disc  during  the  periods  of  matu- 
ration and  cleavage. 

History  of  the  Fertilization  and  Early  Develop- 
ment of  the  Pigeon's  Egg.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 


Samuel  Jackson  Holmes,  Ph.D.  1897; 
Instructor  in  Zoology,  University  of 
Michigan. 

Notes  on  West  American  Crustacea.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  California  Academy  of  Science, 
Second  Series,  IV  (1894),  563-588,  Plates 
XX  and  XXI. 

Contains  descriptions  of  new  and  little-known  species 
of  Crustacea. 

Description  of  a  New  Schizopod  from  Lake 

Merced.    Ibid.,  VI  (1896),  199-200,  Plate 

XIX. 
Preliminary  Account  of  the  Cell-Lineage  of 

Planorbis.     Zoological  Bulletin,  I  (1897), 

95-101. 
Reversal  of  Cleavage  in  Ancylus.    American 

Naturalist,  XXXIII  (1899),  871-876. 

Describes  the  early  cleavage  which  is  of  the  reversed 
type  and  discusses  the  relation  of  reversed  cleavage  to 
the  reversed  asymmetry  of  the  adult. 

The  Early  Cleavage  and  Formation  of  the 
Mesoderm  of  Serpulorbis  Squamigerus  Car- 
penter. Biological  Bulletin,  I  (1900),  115- 
121. 

The  Early  Development  of  Planorbis.  Doctor's 
thesis.  Journal  of  Morphology,  XVI 
(1900),  369-458,  Plates  XVII-XXI. 

Describes  in  detail  the  early  cleavage  of  the  egg.  The 
origin  of  the  three  germ  layers,  the  formation  of  sec- 


ondary mesoblast,  the  cell-lineage  of  the  prototroch, 
head-vesicle,  foot,  brain,  apical  plate,  shell  gland,  the 
origin  of  the  larval  kidney,  and  the  process  of  gastrula- 
tion.  In  the  general  part  is  a  discussion  of  the  rela- 
tion of  reversed  cleavage  and  reversed  asymmetry,  the 
subject  of  cell  homologies  and  the  general  subject  of 
spiral  cleavage. 


Heebebt  Paelin  Johnson,  Ph.D.  1893; 
Austin  Teaching  Fellow,  Bussey  Insti- 
tution, Harvard  University. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Morphology  and  Biol- 
ogy of  the  Stentors.  Doctor's  thesis.  Jour- 
nal of  Morphology,  VIII  (1893),  467-562; 
4  plates,  3  figures. 

The  subject  is  presented  under  the  following  heads :  (1) 
Systematic  and  Faunistic.  One  new  species  (Stentor 
pyriformis)  and  one  new  variety  (S.  ianeua  var.  nigri- 
cans).   (2)  Morphology,  with  five  sub-heads:  Anatomy, 


Fission,  Regeneration,  Conjugation,  and  Teratology. 
The  results  under  this  head  are  based  upon  the  study 
of  Stentor  Coeruleus  and  S.  rceselii.    (3)  Biology  and 


Physiology,  including  studies  of  rate  of  multiplication, 
nutrition,  rate  of  pulsation  of  contractile  vacuole, 
merotomy,  etc. 

The  Plastogamy  of  Actinosphserium.     Ibid., 
IX,  2  (1894),  269-276, 1  figure. 

The  coalescence  of  two  or  more  individuals  is  not  ac- 
companied by  fusion  of  the  nuclei,  or  by  nuclear  changes 
of  any  sort.  The  phenomenon,  therefore,  is  purely  the 
union,  either  permanent  or  temporary,  of  two  distinct 
masses  of  protoplasm  (plastogamy).  It  is  not  followed 
by  any  special  reproductive  activity,  and  is  very  differ- 
ent from  the  karyogamic  conjugation  of  Protozoa  and 
Protophyta  generally. 


Fbank  Rattbay  Lillie,  Ph.D.  1894.  (See 
above. ) 

Ralph  Stayneb  Lillie,  Ph.D.  1901 ;  In- 
structor in  Physiology,  University  of 
Nebraska. 

The  Structiu-e  and  Development  of  the  Ne- 
phridia  of  Arenicola  Cristata  Stimpson. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

The  anatomical  part  of  the  paper  comprises  a  descrip- 
tion of  the  anatomy,  histology,  and  relations  of  the 
adult  nephridia.  The  embryological  section  describes 
the  developmental  history  of  the  nephridia  from  the 
time  of  their  first  appearance  in  the  mes9derm  of  the 
posterior  growing  region  to  a  period  at  which  the  adult 
characteristics  are  essentially  complete. 

On  Differences  in  the  Effects  of  Various  Salt- 
Solutions  on  Ciliary  and  on  Muscular  Move- 
ments in  Arenicola  Larvae.  American 
Journal  of  Physiology,  V  (1901),  56-85. 

Larvae  of  Arenicola  cristata  were  subjected  to  the  ac- 
tion of  various  salt-solutions  (sodium,  potassium,  cali 


Department  of  ZoOlogy 


133 


cium,  and  magnesium  chlorides  and  mixtures  of  these) 
of  a  concentration  approximately  isotonic  with  sea- 
water. 

Identical  solutions  have  different  effects  on  ciliary 
and  on  muscular  activities.  Ciliary  movement  con- 
tinues for  considerable  periods  in  solutions  that  quickly 
arrest  all  muscular  activity  {.e.g.,  of  CaClj,  MgClj:  and 
mixtures  of  these  salts).  In  the  case  of  pure  5/8n  NaCl 
solutions  the  reverse  is  true.  Larvee  that  have  lost  all 
power  of  muscular  movement,  but  still  retain  posses- 
sion of  their  ciliary  activity,  no  longer  show  heliotropic 
orientation.  > 


William  Albebt  Locy,  Ph.D.  1895;  Pro- 
fessor of  Zoology,  Northwestern  Uni- 
versity. 

The  Formation  of  the  Medullary  Groove  in 
Elasmobranchs.  Journal  of  Morphology, 
VIII  (1893),  367-378, 1  plate. 

The  Derivation  of  the  Pineal  Eye.  Anato- 
mischer  Anzeiger,  IX  (1893),  169-180,  5 
figures. 

Nachtrag  zu  diesem  Aufsatze.  Ibid.j  (1894), 
231-232. 

Metameric  Segmentation  in  the  Medullary 
Folds  and  Embryonic  Rim.  Ibid.,  393-415, 
11  figures. 

The  Mid-Brain  and  the  Accessory  Optic  Ves- 
icles.    Ibid.,  486-488. 

The  Optic  Vesicles  of  Elasmobranchs  and 
their  Serial  Relation  to  other  Structures  on 
the  Cephalic  Plate.  Journal  of  Morphol- 
ogy, IX  (1894),  115-122. 

Contribution  to  the  Structure  and  Develop- 
ment of  the  Vertebrate  Head.  Doctor's 
thesis.  Ibid.y  XI  (1895),  497-594;  5  double 
plates,  11  text-figures. 

Deals  largely  with  the  question  of  metamerism  of  the 
head  and  early  stages  in  the  development  of  sense- 
organs. 

ViBGiL  EvEBETT  McCaskill,  Ph.D.  1902 ; 
Professor  of  Biology,  Normal  School, 
Stevens  Point,  Wis. 

The  Metamerism  of  Hirudo  Medicinalis.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpublished. 

By  a  comparison  of  the  head  region  with  the  body,  it  is 
concluded  that  the  brain  is  composed  of  six  neuromeres. 
The  sympathetic  nervous  system,  the  peripheral  sys- 
tem of  nerves  in  the  neuromere,  the  arrangement  of 
rings  and  sense-organs  in  the  posterior  region  of  the 
leech,  the  position  of  the  nephridia  and  the  sacs  of  the 
intestine  are  described,  the  theory  that  the  sense-bear- 


ing ring  is  the  middle  ring  of  the  somite,  rather  than 
the  first  ring,  as  has  usually  been  held,  is  supiwrted. 
The  nerves  form  a  continuous  plexus  running  in  the 
body  muscles  from  one  end  of  the  body  to  the  other ; 
and  there  is  a  remarkable  similarity  between  the  earth- 
worm and  the  leech  in  regard  to  the  general  feature  of 
the  nervous  system. 


Albebt  Davis  Mead,  Ph.D.  1895;  Pro- 
fessor of  Comparative  Anatomy,  Brown 
University. 

Preliminary  Account  of  the  Cell-Lineage  of 
Amphitrite  and  Other  Annelids.  Journal 
of  Morphology,  IX  (1894),  465-473. 

Some  Observations  on  the  Maturation  and 
Fecundation  of  Chaetopterus  Pergamen- 
taceus.    Ibid.,  X  (1895),  313-317. 

The  Early  Development  of  Marine  Annelids. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Ibid.,  XIII  (1897),  227- 
326,  23  figures. 

This  thesis  consisted  of  observations  upon  the  cell- 
lineage  of  several  marine  annelid  worms,  mainly  of 
Amphitrite  ornata.  The  original  observation  compared 
with  similar  researches  of  others  led  to  the  general 
conclusion  that  the  similarity  between  the  cleavage 
phemonena  in  the  eggs  of  worms  and  molluscs  could  be 
interpreted  as  of  morphological  significance. 

John  P.  Munson,  Ph.D.  1897;  Professor 
of  Natural  Science,  State  Normal  School, 
EUensburg,  Washington. 

The  Ovarian  Egg  of  Limulus.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Journal  of  Morphology,  XV  (1898),  111-220. 

A  contribution  to  the  problem  of  the  centrosome  and 
yolk-nucleus,  including  an  account  of  the  anatomy  and 
development  of  the  ovary,  and  a  history  of  the  egg. 
Following  an  account  of  ecological  observations  on 
Limulus,  the  origin  and  growth  of  the  egg  is  described. 

John  McClellan  Pbatheb,  Ph.D.  1901 ; 
Teacher,  High  School,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

The  Skeleton  of  Salanx  Microdon.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

A  complete  description  of  the  Japanese  whitefish,  with 
remarks  on  its  life  history,  external  characters,  taxon- 
omy, etc.  The  skeleton  is  arrested  in  its  development 
at  that  critical  stage  where  ossification  of  cartilage  has 
just  begun,  so  that  the  skeleton  of  the  adult  is  almost 
wholly  cartilage  with  vestiges  of  the  membrane  bones 
common  to  Teleosts.  A  description  of  the  hypochorda 
follows  with  a  complete  r6sum6  of  the  literature,  and  a 
discussion  in  which  it  is  shown  that  the  conditions  in 
Salanx  favor  the  view  that  the  hypochorda  is  trans- 
formed into  the  ventral  longitudinal  ligament  of  the 
spine,  as  held  by  Klaatsch.  A  brief  account  of  the  sen- 
sory canal  system  is  also  included. 


134 


Publications 


Aabon  Louis  Tbeadwell,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Professor  of  Biology,  Vassar  College. 

The  Cell-Lineage  of  Podarke  Obscura.  Zoo- 
logical Bulletin,  I  (1897),  195-203. 

A  preliminary  description  of  the  cytogeny  of  Podarke 
(a  marine  annelid)  with  a  short  discussion  of  the  mean- 
ing of  equal  cleavage. 

Equal  and  Unequal  Cleavage  in  Annelids. 
Wood's  Holl  Biological  Lectures,  1898 
(1899),  93-111. 

A  comparison  of  the  cleavage  of  Podarke  and  that  of 
other  annelids,  and  an  attempt  to  show  that  the  form 
of  the  cleavage  is  not  necessarily  determined  by  yolk, 
but  has  a  direct  relation  to  the  proportionate  size  or 
the  parts  of  the  embryo. 

Tlie  Cytogeny  of  Podarke  Obscura  Verrill. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Journal  of  Morphology, 
XVII  (1901),  399-478,  5  plates. 

A  detailed  description  of  the  cell-lineage  of  this  anne- 
lid. In  this,  the  most  important  new  observatira  is 
the  discovery  of  a  larval  mesoblast  which  has  a  differ- 
ent cell  origin  from  that  of  the  permanent  mesoblast, 
and  functions  as  the  mesoblast  of  the  larva.  From 
comparisons  of  this  with  other  annelids  the  following 
conclusions  are  reached:  No  "law  "of  cleavage  yet 
formulated  is  of  universal  application  in  dividing  eggs. 
All  mesoblast  is  morphologically  a  single  structure. 
The  form  of  the  cleavage  is  directly  dependent  on  the 
relative  size  of  portions  of  the  larva,  or  the  early  or 
late  appearance  of  these  in  the  ontogeny.  The  number 
and  importance  of  cell  homologies  have  been  over-esti- 
mated by  previous  writers,  and  it  seems  much  more 
correct  to  say  that  we  have  regional  rather  than  cell 
homology.  In  the  larval  stages  of  annelids,  platodes, 
and  molluscs,  we  have  parts  which  are  truly  homolo- 
gous, but  these  are  homologous  areas,  and  are  not  con- 
fined within  the  limits  of  single  cells. 


Southeastern  United  States  as  a  Center  of  Geo- 
graphical Distribution  of  Flora  and  Fauna. 
Biological  Bulletin,  III  (1902),  115-131. 

Southeastern  United  States  has  been  an  area  of  preser- 
vation of  ancient  types  and  a  post-glacial  center  of 
dispersal  of  types.  Criteria  are  formulated  for  the 
determination  of  centers  of  dispersal.  Life  areas  are 
considered  as  centers  of  dispersal-and  origin,  and  hence 
dynamically  and  genetically. 

The  Post-glacial  Origin  and  Migrations  of  the 
Life  of  Northeastern  United  States.  Jour- 
nal of  Geography,  I  (1902),  303-309. 

There  was  a  definite  "succession  of  types  along  definite 
highways  in  the  post-glacial  return  of  life  to  north- 
eastern United  States.  Most  of  the  southern  types 
came  from  the  southeast. 

Bennet  Mills  Allen,  Graduate  student. 

The  Topography  of  Organs  in  Typical  Seg- 
ments of  Hirudo.  Biological  Bulletin,  III 
(1902),  161-164. 

Wallace  Craig,  Graduate  student. 

Song  in  Birds.  Science,  N.  S.,  XV  (1902),  590- 
592. 

Edith  M.  Brace,  Graduate  student. 

Notes  on  Aeolosoma  Tenebrarum.  Journal  of 
Morphology,  XVII  (1901),  177-184. 


C.  C.  Adams,  Graduate  student. 

Variation  in  lo.  Proceedings  of  the  American 
Association  for  the  Advancement  of  Sci- 
ence, XLIX  (1900),  208-225,  Plates  I-XXVII. 

A  smooth  and  relatively  globular  gasteropod  shell  {lo 
fiuvialis  Say)  occurring  in  the  Powell  and  Clinch  rivers 
of  southwest  Virginia  and  east  Tennessee  was  found 
to  intergrade  with  a  very  spinose  and  relatively  elonga- 
ted shell  {lo  spinosa  Lea)  found  further  down  stream 
in  the  same  rivers. 

Odonata  from  Arkansas .  Entomological  News, 
XI  (1900),  621-622. 

An  annotated  list  of  seventeen  species  of  dragonflies 
collected  by  McElfresh  in  Arkansas. 

Baseleveling  and  its  Faunal  Significance,  with 
Illustrations  from  Southeastern  United 
States.  American  Naturalist,  XXXV 
(1901),  839-852. 

Attention  was  called  to  the  fundamental  nature  of  the 
law  of  baseleveling  and  its  influence  upon  animal  habi- 
tats. The  migration  of  divides,  and  other  expressions 
of  this  law  were  shown  to  explain  some  of  the  faunal 
peculiarities  of  southeastern  United  States,  especially 
the  river  faunas. 


W.  J.  Baumgartner,  Graduate  student. 

Spermatid  Transformations  in  Gryllus  Assi- 
milis,  with  Special  Reference  to  the  Neben- 
kern.  Kansas  University  Quarterly,  XI 
(1902),  47-63,  Plates  II-III. 

The  chromartin  forms  a  tube-like  spermatozoon  head, 
and  the  remaining  spindle  and  connecting  fibres  change 
into  a  peculiarly  "striated"  nebenkern.  The  striae 
break  <fown  and  form  a  "  ball-and-ring "  nebenkern, 
which  later  passes  out  along  the  axial  filament,  mak- 
ing a  covering  for  it. 

Mary  Hefferan,  Graduate  student ;  Cura- 
tor of  Bacteriological  Museum. 

Experiments  in  Grafting  Hydra.  Archiv  fUr 
Entwickelungsmechanik  der  Organismen, 
XIII  (1902),  565-587,  3  plates,  2  figures. 

A  comparison  of  the  behavior  of  lateral  grafts  in  the 
two  species  Hydra  fusca  and  Hydra  viridis  showed  a 
marked  difference  in  the  process  of  regulation.  The  dif- 
ference in  size  of  the  two  species  and  the  action  of  cap- 
illarity is  suggested  as  an  explanation  of  these  differ- 
ent processes.  Grafts  were  made  in  tangent  and  with 
reversed  poles.    It  was  impossible  to  build  up  Hydra 


Department  of  ZoOlogy 


135 


of  abnormal  length  by  grafting  several  polyps  together 
end  to  end.  The  general  results  may  be  summed  up  in 
the  words  of  Wetzel,  '95:  "Ueberall  zei^  sich  ein  deut- 
liches  Streben,  die  normale  Gestalt  wieder  herzustel- 
len." 

Variation  in  the  Teeth  of  Nereis.    Biological 
Bulletin,  II  (1900),  129-143. 

A  statistical  study  of  the  variation  of  four  hundred 
individuals  from  Cold  Spring  Harbor,  L.  I.  The  results 
led  tb  a  criticism  of  the  biological  significance  of  Pear- 
son's "  types"  of  distribution  curves  and  to  an  analysis 
of  the  relations  (correlations)  existing  between  parts 
of  the  jaws  and  the  members  of  pairs  of  jaws. 


G.  W.  Hunter,  Jr.,  Graduate  student. 

Notes  on  the  Peripheral  Nervous  System  of 
Molgula  Manhattensis.  Science,  New  Se- 
ries, VII  (1898),  322. 

Notes  on  the  Finer  Structure  of  the  Nervous 
System  of  Cynthia  Partita  Verrill.  Zoo- 
logical Bulletin,  II  (1898),  99-115. 

Discovery  of  the  existence  of  the  centrosome  and  sphere 
in  the  ganglion  cell  of  adults  as  well  as  young.  Other 
ganglion  bodies  are  described. 

K.  H.  Johnson,  Graduate  student. 

Three  Polymelous  Frogs.  American  Natur- 
alist, XXXV  (1901),  25-31. 

Description  of  frogs  with  extra  appendages,  based  on 
skiagraphs. 

F.  E.  Lutz,  Graduate  student. 

A  Study  in  the  Number  of  Grooves  upon  the 
Shells  of  Pecten  Irradians  Lam.  Investi- 
gations at  Cold  Spring  Harbor.  Science, 
New  Series,  XII  (1900),  373. 

Inheritance  of  Color  among  Pointers.  In  col- 
laboration with  Elizabeth  B.  Meek.  Ibid., 
XV  (1902),  371-372. 

A  statistical  confirmation  of  Galton's  Law  of  Inheri- 
tance. 

C.  E.  MoClung,  Graduate  student. 

A  Peculiar  Nuclear  Element  in  the  Male  Re- 
productive Cells  of  Insects.  Zoological 
Bulletin,  II  (1899),  187-197. 

Description  of  the  "accessory  chromosome"  in  the 
spermatozoon. 

William  J.  Moenkhaus,  Graduate  student. 

Early  Development  in  Certain  Hybrid  Fishes. 
Science,  XIII  (1901),  374. 


Elizabeth  B.  Meek,  Graduate  student. 

Some  Variations  in  Lucanus  Placidus,  Statis- 
tically Examined.  Science,  New  Series, 
XIII  (1901),  375. 

Inheritance  of  Color  among  Pointers.  In  col- 
laboration with  F.  E.  Lutz.  Ibid.,  XV 
(1902),  371-372. 

Julia  B.  Platt,  Graduate  student. 

Ectodermic  Origin  of  the  Cartilages  of  the 
Head.  Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  VIII  (1893), 
506-509.  Abstract  in  Journal  of  the  Royal 
Microscopical  Society,  London  (1893),  722. 

Evidence  is  presented  that  the  skeleton  is  derived,  in 
part  at  least,  from  cells  given  off  from  the  ectoderm, 
and  doubt  is  thrown  on  the  usual  co-ordination  of  the 
mesoderm  (which  name  has  been  applied  to  the  skele- 
ton-forming tissue)  with  the  ectoderm  and  entoderm. 

F.  W.  PiCKEL,  Graduate  student. 

The  Accessory  Bladders  of  the  Testudinata. 
Zoological  Bulletin,  II  (1899),  291-302. 

The  conclusion  is  reached  that  the  accessory  bladders 
of  turtles  function  as  reservoirs  for  liquid  stored  up 
for  the  use  of  the  animal. 

Mary  M.  Sturges,  Graduate  student. 

Preliminary  Notes  on  Distomum  Patellare,  n. 

sp.    Zoological  Bulletin,  I  (1897),  57-69. 
Polymorphic  Nuclei  in  Embryonic  Germ-Cells. 

Science,  New  Series,  IX  (1899),  183. 

G.  W.  Tannreuther,  Graduate  student. 

Supernumerary  Wings  in  Pieris  Rapae  L.  (Le- 
pidoptera).  Zoologischer  Anzeiger,  XXIV 
(1901),  620-622. 

Laetitia  M.  Snow,  Graduate  student. 

The  Microcosm  of  the  Drift  Line.  American 
Naturalist,  XXXVI  (1902),  855-864. 

On  the  beach  of  Lake  Michigan  at  Chicago  are  thrown, 
during  April  and  May,  vast  numbers  of  insects.  Species 
succeed  each  other  in  orderly  succession  and  individu- 
als were  most  abundant  when  an  off-shore  wind  was 
followed  by  a  lake  breeze.  The  dead  insects  and  other 
refuse  determined  an  abundance  of  scavenger  insects, 
and  these,  in  turn,  attracted  many  predaceons  animals. 


136 


Publications 


XXIII.    ANATOMY 


Lewellys  Feanklin  Barkee  [1900 — ], 
Professor  and  Head  of  the  Department 
of  Anatomy. 

The  Nervous  System  and  its  Constituent  Neu- 
rones, xxxii  +  1122,  8vo.  New  York,  D. 
Appleton  &  Co.    Reprinted  1901. 

Hand  Atlas  of  Human  Anatomy,  By  Werner 
Spalteholz.  Translated  from  the  third 
German  edition.  Vol.  I,  Bones,  Joints,  Liga- 
ments. 8vo,  vi  -f  236.  Leipzig,  S.  Hirzel, 
1900. 

Histology  of  the  Brain.  Reference  Handbook 
of  Medical  Sciences,  II  (1901),  322-365. 

Report  of  the  Commission  Appointed  by  the 
Secretary  of  the  Treasury  for  the  Investiga- 
tion of  Plague  in  San  Francisco,  under 
Instructions  from  the  Surgeon-General, 
Marine  Hospital  Service.  8vo,  23.  Wash- 
ington, Government  Printing  OjQfice,  1901. 

On  the  Study  of  Anatomy.  Johns  Hopkins 
Hospital  Bulletin,  XII  (1901),  87-95. 

On  the  Importance  of  Pathological  and  Bac- 
teriological Laboratories  in  Connection  with 
Hospitals  for  the  Insane.  Avuerican  Jour- 
nal of  Insanity,  LVII  (1901),  501-517. 

On  the  Morbid  Anatomy  of  the  Central  Nervous 
System  of  Two  of  Dr.  Sanger  Brown's  Cases 
of  Hereditary  Ataxia.  With  3  colored 
plates  and  40  half-tone  plates.  Article  in 
The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  X. 

The  article  includes  a  detailed  description  of  the  gross 
and  microscopic  findings  in  the  brains  and  spinal  cords 
of  two  brothers,  dead  of  hereditary  ataxia.  Colored 
plates  illustrate  the  lesions  in  the  spinal  cord.  Numer- 
ous process-method  illustrations  accompany  the  de- 
scription of  the  cerebrum  and  cerebeilum. 

Albeet  C.  Eyoleshymee  [1892-1894; 
1895 — ],  Assistant  Professor  of  An- 
atomy. 

Notes  on  Celloidin  Technique.  American  Na- 
turalist, XXVI  (1892),  354-358,  3  figures. 

a  description  of  a  new  method  of  handling  serial  sec- 
tions in  celloidin.  Also  a  new  method  of  obtaining 
orientation  points  for  reconstructions. 


Club-root  (Plasmodiopthora  brassicae,  Wor.) 
in  the  United  States.  Journal  of  Mycology, 
VII  (1892),  79-90,  Plates  XV-XVI. 

A  study  of  the  distribution  of  the  disease,  its  cause  and 
treatment. 

Paraphysis  and  Epiphysis  in  Amblystoma. 
Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  VII  (1892),  215- 
217. 

Eecording  the  discovery  of  the  paraphysis  in  the  Am- 
phibian embryo,  and  pointing  out  its  relation  to  the 
epiphysis  during  the  embryonic  and  larval  stages. 

The  Cleavage  of  the  Amphibian  Ovum.  In 
collaboration  with  E.  O.  Jordan.  Ibid., 
622-624. 

The  Development  of  the  Optic  Vesicles  in  Am- 
phibia. Journal  of  Morphology,  VIII 
(1893),  189-194,  5  figures. 

Showing  for  the  first  time  that  the  eyes  are  well  marked 
in  the  unclosed  neural  plate  of  certain  Amphibia. 

The  Cleavage  of  the  Amphibian  Ovum.  In 
collaboration  with  E.  O.  Jordan.  Ibid.,  IX 
(1894),  407-415,  Plate  XXVI. 

The  Egg  of  Amia  and  its  Cleavage.  In  col- 
laboration with  C.  O.  Whitman.  Ibid., 
(1895),  309-355,  38  figures.  Plates  XVIII- 
XIX. 

The  Early  Development  of  Amblystoma  with 
Observations  on  Some  Other  Vertebrates. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Ibid.,  346-419,  Plates 
XVIII-XXIII. 

A  comparative  study  of  the  early  phases  of  develop- 
ment in  a  number  of  vertebrates,  emphasizing  the  sig- 
nificance of  variations  in  cleavage  patterns  and  the 
bearing  of  the  facts  upon  the  mosaic  theory  of  develop- 
ment. Embodying  new  observations  on  the  formation 
of  the  basis  of  the  embryo,  the  origin  of  the  mesoblast, 
and  the  beginnings  of  the  eye  and  nose. 

The  Early  Development  of  the  Epiphysis  and 
Paraphysis  in  Amia.  In  collaboration  with 
Benjamin  Marshall  Davis.  Journal  of 
Comparative  Neurology,  VII  (1897),  45-71, 
Plate  VII. 

An  attempt  to  show  that  these  structures  are  not  sen- 
sory, but  secretory. 

The  Location  of  the  Basis  of  the  Amphibian 
Embryo.  Journal  of  Morphology,  XIV 
(1898),  466-480,  100  figures. 

An  experimental  determination  of  the  position  of  the 
early  embryonic  areas. 

The  Cleavage  of  the  Egg  of  Lepidosteus.  Ana- 
tomischer Anzeiger,  XVI  (1899),  529-537, 
5  figures. 

First  description  of  the  cleavage  of  the  living  egg. 


Depabtment  of  Anatomy 


137 


Observations  on  the  Breeding  Habits  of  Amei- 
urus  nebulosus.  American  Naturalist, 
XXXV  (1900),  910-919. 

The  changes  in  nesting  habits  induced  throngh  arti- 
ficial environment. 

The  Formation  of  the  Embryo  of  Nectnrus, 
with  Kemarks  on  the  Theory  of  Concres- 
cence. Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  XIX  (1902), 
340-355. 

Recording  a  series  of  experiments  made  with  a  view  of 
finding  out  how  the  embryo  is  formed.  These  and  pre- 
ceding experiments  show  that  the  primitive  method  in 
vertebrates  is  through  differentiation  in  situ  and  not 
through  concrescence. 

Nuclear  Changes  in  the  Muscle  Cell  of  Nec- 
turus.  Proceedings  of  the  Association  of 
American  Anatomists,  1902.  American 
Journal  of  Anatomy,  I  (1902),  512-513. 
Also  Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  XIX  (1902), 
379-386. 

Showing  the  changes  in  position,  volume  and  structure 
of  the  nuclei  of  the  muscle  cell  during  its  growth. 

The  Early  Development  of  Lepidosteus  osseus. 
With  one  lithographic  plate  and  43  figures. 
Article  in  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  X. 

An  account  of  the  early  phases  of  development  as  ob- 
served in  living  and  in  preserved  material,  followed  by 
a  comparison  of  these  phases  with  those  of  other  ganoid 
fishes ;  concluding  with  general  remarks  on  the  char- 
acter and  significance  of  cleavage. 


KoBEET  Russell  Bensley  [1901 — ],  As- 
sistant Professor  of  Anatomy. 

The  Structure  of  the  Glands  of  Brunner.  Ar- 
ticle in  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  First  Series,  X,  with  5 
half-tone  plates. 

A  study  of  the  cytological  characters,  staining  reac- 
tions, and  microscopic  anatomy,  of  the  glands  of  Brun- 
ner of  a  number  of  representative  mammals. 

The  Cardiac  Glands  of  Mammals.  American 
Journal  of  Anatomy,  II  (1902),  105-156. 

A  study  of  the  structure,  function,  and  phylogeny  of 
the  cardiac  glands. 

George  E.  Shambaugh  [1892 — ],  In- 
structor in  Anatomy  of  the  Ear,  Nose, 
and  Throat. 

The  Diagnosis  of  Latent  Frontal  Sinuitis. 
American  Journal  of  the  Medical  Sciences, 
CXXIII  (1902),  416-426. 

The  relative  importance  of  various  subjective  and  ob- 
jective symptoms  were  discussed.    The  importance  of 


demonstrating  the  presence  of  pus  in  the  frontal  sinus 
before  a  positive  diagnosis  could  be  made  was  empha- 
sized, and  the  methods  by  which  this  could  be  done 
were  described.  The  article  is  illustrated  by  four  draw- 
ings showing  the  relations  of  the  passage  from  the 
nose  to  the  frontal  sinus  and  one  skiagraph  showing 
the  position  of  a  catheter  in  the  frontal  sinus. 

The  Bony  Cysts  of  the  Middle  Tm-binated 
Body.  AnnaU  of  Surgery,  XXXVI  (1902), 
109-117. 

Three  cases  of  this  condition  were  reported  and  the 
various  theories  regarding  the  origin  of  these  cysts 
were  discussed.  The  view  was  held  that  these  cysts 
represent  greatly  enlarged  ethmoid  cells  that  have 
developed  in  the  concha  media  as  the  result  of  a  de- 
velopmental anomaly.  There  are  two  illustrations 
taken  from  life  showing  their  condition. 

The  Distribution  of  Blood- Vessels  in  the  Laby- 
rinth of  the  Ear  of  Sus  Scrofa  Domesticus. 
With  8  colored  plates.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First  Se- 
ries, X,  135-154. 

The  circulation  in  the  labyrinth  is  worked  out  for  the 
ear  of  the  pig  by  using  Eichler's  method  of  making 
celloidin  casts  of  the  labyrinth.  A  large  series  of  em- 
bryos was  injected,  of  sizes  measuring  from  2V4cm.  iu 
length  to  the  embryo  at  full  term,  measuring  about  30 
cm.  The  simpler  scheme  for  the  distribution  of  vessels 
found  in  the  younger  embryos  was  utilized  in  interpret- 
ing the  complicated  system  of  vessels  found  in  the  laby- 
rinth at  full  term. 


Preston  Kyes  [1900 — ],  Instructor  in 
Anatomy. 

The  Interlobular  Framework  of  the  Human 
Spleen.  American  Journal  of  Anatomy, 
I  (1900),  37^3. 

Daniel  Graisberey  Revell  [1900 — ], 
Associate  in  Anatomy. 

The  Pancreatic  Ducts  in  the  Dog.  American 
Journal  of  Anatomy,  I  (1902),  443-457. 

Franklin  P.  Mall  [1892-93],  Professor 
of  Anatomy;  Professor  of  Anatomy, 
Johns  Hopkins  University. 

Der  Einfluss  des  Systems  der  Vena  Portae  auf 
die  Vertheilung  des  Blutes.  Archiv  fUr 
Anatomic  und  Physiologic,  Physiologische 
Abtheilung,  1892, 409^33. 


138 


Publications 


Histogenesis  of  the  Retina  in  Amblystoma  and 
Necturus.  Journal  of  Morphology^  VIII 
(1893),  415-432. 

A  Human  Embryo  of  the  Second  Week.  Ana- 
tomischer  Anzeiger,  VIII  (1893),  630- 
633. 

Irving  Hardesty  [1900-1901],  Associate 
in  Anatomy;  Associate  in  Anatomy, 
University  of  California.  (See  under 
Neurology,  p.  145.) 


John  McClellan  Prather,  Graduate 
student. 

The  Early  Stages  in  the  Development  of  the 
Hypophysis  in  Amia  calva.  Biological 
Bulletin,  I  (1900),  57-80,  Plates  I-III. 

Benjamin  Marshall  Davis,  Graduate 
student. 

The  Early  Development  of  the  Paraphysis  and 
Epiphysis  in  Amia  calva.  In  collabora- 
tion with  A.  C.  Eycleshymer.  Journal  of 
Comparative  Neurology,  VII  (1897),  45-71, 
Plate  VII. 


XXIV.    PHYSIOLOGY 


Jacques  Loeb  [1892-1902],  Professor 
and  Head  of  the  Department  of  Physi- 
ology ;  Professor  and  Head  of  the  De- 
partment of  Physiology,  University  of 
California. 

Einleitung  in  die  vergleichende  Gehirnphysio- 
logie  und  vergleichende  Psychologie  mit 
besonderer  Berlicksichtigung  der  wirbel- 
losen  Thiere.  8vo,  207.  Leipzig,  Johann 
Ambrosius  Barth,  1899. 

Comparative  Physiology  of  the  Brain  and  Com- 
parative Psychology.  8vo,  x  +  309.  New 
York,  G.  Putnam's  Sons,  1900. 

Experiments  on  Cleavage.  Journal  of  Mor- 
phology, VII  (1892),  253-262. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Physiology  of  Colora- 
tion in  Animals.  Ibid.,  VIII  (1893),  161- 
164. 

Ueber  ktinstliche  Umwandlung  positiv  helio- 
tropischer  Thiere  in  negativ  heliotropische 
und  umgekehrt.  Archiv  fur  die  gesammte 
Physiologie,  LIV  (1893),  81-107. 

Ueber  die  Entwicklung  von  Fischembryonen 
ohne  Kreislauf.    Ibid.,  525-531. 

Ueber  eine  einf  ache  Methode,  zwei  oder  mehr  zu- 
sammengewachsene  Embryonen  aus  einem 
Ei  hervorzubringen.  Ibid.,  LV  (1894),  525- 
530. 


Ueber  die  relative  Empfindlichkeit  von  Fish- 
embryonen  gegen  Sauerstoffmangel  und 
Wasserentziehung.    Ibid.,  530-541. 

Beitrage  zin-  Gehirnphysiologie  der  Wiirmer. 
Ibid.,  LVI  (1894),  247-269. 

Ueber  die  Entstehung  der  Activitats-Hyper- 
trophie  der  Muskeln.    Ibid.,  270-272. 

On  Some  Facts  and  Principles  of  Physiological 
Morphology.  Wood's  Holl  Biological  Lec- 
tures (1894),  37-61. 

On  the  Influence  of  Light  on  the  Periodic 
Depth  Migrations  of  Pelagic  Animals.  Re- 
port of  the  United  States  Fish  Commission, 
1894. 

Ueber  die  Grenzen  der  Theilbarkeit  der  Eisub- 
stanz.  Archiv  filr  die  gesammte  Physio- 
logie, LIX  (1.894),  379-394. 

Zur  Physiologie  und  Psychologie  der  Actinien. 
Ibid.,  LIX  (1895),  415-420. 

Ueber  den  Nachweis  von  Contrasterscheinun- 
gen  im  Gebiete  der  Raumempfindungen 
des  Auges.    Ibid.,  LX  (1895),  509-518. 

Ueber  die  Localisation  der  Athmtmg  in  der 
Zelle._  In  collaboration  with  Irving  Har- 
desty.'   Ibid.,  LXI  (1895),  583-594. 

Untersuchungen  liber  die  physiologischen 
Wirkungen  des  SauerstoflFmangels.  Ibid., 
LXII  (1895),  249-294. 


Depabtment  of  Physiology 


139 


Ueber  den  Einfluss  des  Lichtes  auf  die  Organ- 
bildung  bei  Thieren.  Ibid.,  LXIII  (1896), 
273-292. 

Bemerkungen  uber  Regeneration.  Archiv  filr 
Entwickelungsmechanik,  II  (1896),  250-256. 

Ueber  Kerntheilung  ohne  Zelltheilung.  Ibid., 
293-300. 

Beitrage  zur  Entwicklungsmechanik  der  aus 
einem  Ei  hervorgehenden  Doppeltbildun- 
gen.    Ibid.,  453-472. 

Zur  Theorie  des  Galvanotropismus.  I.  Mit- 
theilung.  In  collaboration  with  S.  S.  Max- 
well. Archiv  filr  die  gesammte  Physiolo- 
gie,  LXIII  (1896),  121-144. 

Zur  Theorie  Galvanotropismus.  II.  Mitthei- 
lung.  In  collaboration  with  W.  E.  Garsey. 
Ibid.,  LXV  (1896),  41-47, 121-144. 

Zur  Theorie  des  Galvanotropismus.  III.  Mit- 
theilung.  Ueber  die  polare  Erregung  der 
Hautdrusen  von  Amblystoma  durch  den 
Konstanten  Strom.    Ibid.,  308-316. 

Zur  Theorie  des  Galvanotropismus.  IV.  Mit- 
theilung.  Ueber  die  Ausscheidung  elec- 
tropositiver  lonen  an  der  fiusseren  Ano- 
denflache  protoplasmatischer  Gebilde  als 
Ursache  der  Abweichungen  vom  Pfluger- 
schen  Erregimgsgesetz.  In  collaboration 
with  Sidney  P.  Budgett.  Ibid.  (1897),  518- 
534. 

Ueber  die  physiologische  Wirkung  elektrischer 
Wellen.    Ibid.,  LXIX  (1897),  99-114. 

Einige  Bemerkungen  tiber  den  Begriflf,  die 
Geschichte  und  Literatur  der  Allgemeinen 
Physiologic.    Ibid.,  249-267. 

Ueber  die  angebliche  erregende  Wirkung  elec- 
trischer  Strahlen  auf  die  Nerven.  Central- 
blattfur  Physiologic,  XI  (1897),  401-403. 

Hat  das  Centralnervensystem  einen  Einfluss 
auf  die  Vorgange  der  Larvenmetamorphose? 
Archiv  filr  Entwickelungsmechanik,  IV 
(1897),  502-505. 

Zur  Theorie  des  physiologischen  Licht-  und 
Schwerkraftwirkungen.  Archiv  fiir  die  ge- 
sammte Physiologic,  LXVI  (1897),  439-466. 


Zur  Theorie  des  Galvanotropismus.  V.  Mit- 
theilimg.  Influenzversuche.  Ibid.,  LXVII 
(1897),  483-491. 

Physiologische  Untersuchungen  fiber  lonen- 
wirkungen.  I,  Versuche  am  Muskel.  Ibid., 
LXIX  (1897),  1-27;  II,  ibid.,  LXXI  (1898), 
457^76. 

The  Heredity  of  the  Marking  in  Fish  Embryos. 
Wood's  Holl  Biological  Lectures,  1898, 
227-234. 

Biological  Problems  of  Today:  Physiology. 
Science,  New  Series,  VII  (1898),  154-156. 

Ueber  den  Einfluss  von  Alkalien  und  SSuren 
auf  die  embryonale  Entwickelung  und  das 
Wachsthum.  Archiv  fur  Entwickelungs- 
mechanik, VII  (1898),  631-641. 

Ueber  die  physiologische  Wirkung  von  Alka- 
lien und  Sauren  in  starker  Verdiinnung. 
Archiv  fur  die  gesammte  Physiologic, 
LXXIII  (1898),  422-426. 

Ueber  die  angebliche  gegenseitige  Beeinflus- 
sung  der  Furchungszellen  und  die  Ent- 
stehung  der  Blastula.  Archiv  fiir  Ent- 
wickelungsmechanik, VIII  (1899),  363-372. 

On  the  Nature  of  the  Process  of  Fertilization 
and  the  Artificial  Production  of  Normal 
Larvae  (Plutei)  from  the  Unfertilized  Eggs 
of  the  Sea  Urchin.  American  Journal  of 
Physiology,  III  (1899),  135-138. 

Ueber  die  Aehnlichkeit  der  Fltissigkeitsresorp- 
tion  in  Muskeln  und  Seifen.  Archiv  fiir 
die  gesammte  Physiologic,  LXXV  (1899), 
303-309. 

Ueber  lonen  welche  rythmische  Zuckungen  der 
Skelettmuskeln  hervorrufen.  Festschrift 
fiir  Professor  Pick,  Braunschweig,  1899, 
101-119. 

Warum  ist  die  Regeneration  kemloser  Proto- 
plasmastticke  unmOglich  oder  erschwert? 
Archiv  filr  Entwickelungsmechanik,  VIII 
(1899),  689-693. 

On  lon-Proteid  Compounds  and  their  R6le  in 
the  Mechanics  of  Life  Phenomena.  I,  The 
PoisonousCharacter  of  a  Pxure  NaCl-Solution. 


140 


Publications 


American  Journal  of  Physiology,  III 
(1900),  327-338. 

On  the  Different  Effects  of  Ions  upon  Myo- 
genic and  Neurogenic  Rhythmical  Contrac- 
tions and  upon  Embryonic  and  Muscular 
Tissue.    Ihid.,  383-396. 

The  Artificial  Production  of  Normal  Larvae 
from  the  Unfertilized  Eggs  of  the  Sea  Ur- 
chin (Arbacia).    Ihid.,  434-171. 

On  Artificial  Parthenogenesis  in  Sea  Urchins. 
Science,  New  Series,  XI  (1900),  612-614. 

On  the  Transformation  and  Regeneration  of 
Organs.  American  Journal  of  Physiol- 
ogy, IV  (1900),  60-68. 

Further  Experiments  on  Artificial  Partheno- 
genesis, and  the  Nature  of  the  Process  of 
Fertilization.    Ibid.,  178-184. 

Artificial  Parthenogenesis  in  Annelids.  Science, 
New  Series,  XII  (1900),  1-2. 

Ueber  die  Bedeutung  der  Ca  und  K-Ionen 
ftir  die  HerzthStigkeit.  Archiv  fiir  die  ge- 
sammte  Physiologic,  LXXX  (1900),  229- 
232. 

Experiments  on  Artificial  Parthenogenesis  in 
Annelids  (Chaetopterus)  and  the  Nature 
of  the  Process  of  Fertilization.  American 
Journal  of  Physiology,  IV  (1901),  423-459. 

On  an  Apparently  New  Form  of  Muscular 
Irritabihty  (Contact  Irritability?)  Produced 
by  Solution  of  Salts  (preferably  sodium 
salts)  whose  Anions  are  Liable  to  form 
Insoluble  Calcium  Compounds.  Ibid.,  V 
(1901),  361-373. 

Ueber  den  Einfluss  der  Werthigkeit  tmd 
mOglicher  Weise  der  elektrischen  Ladung 
von  lonen  auf  ihre  antitoxische  Wirkung. 
Archiv  fiir  die  gesammte  Physiologic, 
LXXXVIII  (1901),  68-78. 

Weitere  Versuche  tiber  kiinstliche  Parthenoge- 
nese.  In  collaboration  with  Martin  Fischer 
and  Hugh  Neilson.  Ibid.,  LXXXVII  (1901), 
1-3. 

On  the  Prolongation  of  the  Life  of  the  Unfer- 
tilized Eggs  of  Sea  Urchins  by  Potassium 


Cyanide.  In  collaboration  with  Warren  H. 
Lewis.  American  Journal  of  Physiology, 
VI  (1902),  305-317. 

Studies  on  the  Physiological  Effects  of  the 
Valency  and  Possibly  of  the  Electrical 
Charges  of  Ions.  I,  The  Toxic  and  Antitoxic 
Effects  of  Ions  as  a  Function  of  their  Valency 
and  Possibly  of  their  Electrical  Charge, 
Ibid.,  411-433. 

Ueber  Methoden  und  Fehlerquellen  der  Ver- 
suche iiber  kiinstliche  Parthenogenese. 
Archiv  fur  Entwickelungsmechanik  der 
Organismen,  XIII  (1902),  481-486. 

On  the  Production  and  Suppression  of  Mus- 
cular Twitchings  and  Hypersensitiveness  of 
the  Skin  by  Electrolytes.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First  Se- 
ries, X  1-13. 

A  continuation  of  the  author's  investigations  dealing 
■with  the  determination  of  electrolytes  which  are  liable 
to  produce  and  inhibit  hyperactivity  of  muscles  and 
hypersensitiveness  of  the  nerves  of  the  skin,  the  en- 
deavor being  to  answer  the  question  whether  or  not  the 
stimulating  and  inhibiting  effects  of  ions  are  a  function 
of  their  valency  and  electrical  charge.  The  experi- 
ments herein  described  have  a  practical  bearing  on  the 
treatment  of  certain  diseases. 

Elias  Potter  Lyon  [1901 — ],  Assistant 
Professor  of  Physiology. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Comparative  Physiology 
of  Compensatory  Motions.  Doctor's  thesis. 
American  Journal  of  Physiology,  III 
(1899),  86-114. 

All  forms  of  compensatory  motions  hitherto  known  in 
vertebrates  are  shown  to  exist  also  in  invertebrates, 
and  not  only  in  those  having  otocysts,  but  also  in  those 
without  such  organs.  In  the  flounder  and  dog-fish 
stimulation  of  the  morphologically  horizontal  semi- 
circular canals  gives  eye  motions  in  the  plane  of  the 
canals,  as  has  been  claimed  for  all  the  canals.  But  the 
other  canals,  in  these  animals  at  least,  give  contradic- 
tory and  varied  results ;  often  none  at  all.  Compensa- 
tory motions  are  a  poor  guide  in  studying  the  supposed 
equilibrium  functions  of  the  ear. 

Compensatory  Motions  in  Fishes.  Ibid.,  IV 
(1900),  77-82. 

Passive  bending  of  the  tail  of  sharks  and  other  fishes, 
the  head  being  held  at  rest,  causes  compensatory  mo- 
tions of  the  eyes.  The  compensatory  positions  are 
retained  as  long  as  the  body  is  kept  bent.  Dogfish 
whose  eighth  and  second  cranial  nerves  have  been  cut 
show,  independently  of  the  reaction  on  bending  the 
body,  traces  of  compensatory  motions.  Compensatory 
motions  are,  therefore,  unsafe  guides  in  studying  the 
equilibrium  functions  of  the  ear. 


Depabtment  of   Physiology 


141 


Effects  of  KNC  and  of  Lack  of  Oxygen  on  the 
fertilized  Eggs  and  the  Embryos  of  the  Sea 
Urchin  (Arbacia).     Ibid.,  VII  (1902),  56-75. 

There  is  a  progressive  loss  of  resistance  to  the  poise 
from  the  time  of  fertilization  to  advanced  larval  stage. 
During  each  cleavage  there  are  great  variations  in  the 
power  of  resistance  to  both  KNC  and  lack  of  oxygen. 
Some  degree  of  immunity  to  KNC  can  be  induced. 

Reviercs  of 

Edinger,  Die  Entwickelung  der  Gehirnbahnen 
in  der  Tierreihe.  Monist,  VII  (1896-97), 
476-479;  and 

Functions  of  the  Otocyst.  Journal  of  Com- 
parative Neurology,  VIII  (1898),  238-247. 

Albebt  Pbescott  Mathews  [1901 — ], 
Assistant  Professor  of  Physiological 
Chemistry. 

Artificial  Parthenogenesis  Produced  by  Me- 
chanical Agitation.  American  Journal  of 
Physiology,  VI  (1901),  142-154. 

The  Action  of  Pilocarpine  and  Atropine  on 
the  Embryos  of  the  Starfish  and  Sea  Urchin. 
Ibid.,  207-214. 

The  so-called  Cross  Fertilization  of  Asterias  by 
Arbacia.    Ibid.,  216-218. 

The  Nature  of  Nerve  Stimulation  and  of 
Changes  in  Irritability.  Science,  New  Se- 
ries, XV  (1902),  492^98. 

David  J.  Lingle  [1892 — ],  Instructor  in 
Physiology. 

The  Action  of  Certain  Ions  on  Ventricular 
Muscle.  American  Journal  of  Physiology, 
IV  (1900),  265-283. 

The  Importance  of  Sodium  Chloride  in  Heart 
Action.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1902),  75-98. 

Mabtin  Henby  Fischeb  [1901-02],  As- 
sociate in  Physiology;  Instructor  in 
Physiology,  University  of  California. 

The  Relation  of  Physical  Chemistry  to  Phar- 
macology. A  chapter  in  George  Frank 
Butler's    Materia   Medica,     Therapeutics, 


and  Pharmacology,  foiurth  revised  edition, 
9  +  896.    Philadelphia,  Saunders,  1902. 

Weitere  Versuche  uber  kunstliche  Partheno- 
genese.  In  collaboration  with  Jacques  Loeb 
and  Charles  Hugh  Neilson.    (See  above.) 

Further  Experiments  on  A«rtificial  Partheno- 
genesis in  Annelids.  American  Journal  of 
Physiology,  VII  (1902),  301-314. 

The  unfertilized  eggs  of  Amphitrite,  which,  when  left 
undisturbed  in  sea  water,  do  not  develop  beyond  the 
two  or  four  cell  stage,  can  be  caused  to  develop  into 
swimming  hochophous  through  the  addition  of  a  small 
but  definite  amount  of  calcium  to  the  sea  water.  K, 
Mg,  Se,  Si,  and  Na-ions  are  unable  to  bring  about  this 
effect,  and  temporary  residence  in  sea  water,  the  con- 
centration of  which  has  been  increased,  is  also  ineffec- 
tive. It  seems  that  in  Nereis  artificial  parthenogenesis 
can  be  brought  about  by  abstracting  water  from  the 
egg,  and  then  retoming  it  to  sea  water. 

Ralph  Waldo  Websteb  [1901 — ],  As- 
sistant in  Physiological  Chemistry. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Physical  Analysis  of  the 
Phenomena  of  Absorption  of  Liquids  by 
Animal  Tissues.  Doctor's  thesis.  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications* 
First  Series,  X,  103-134. 

a  detailed  study  of  the  effects  of  solutions  of  various 
electrolytes  and  non-electrolytes  upon  phenomena  of 
absorption.  An  attempt  is  made  to  explain,  by  the 
laws  of  physical  chemistry,  the  various  phenomena 
noted.  A  practically  complete  bibliography  of  the 
work  along  this  line  accompanies  this  article. 

Waldemab  Koch  [1901 — ],  Assistant  in 
Pharmacology. 

The  Physiological  Action  of  Formaldehyde. 

American    Journal    of    Physiology,    VI 

(1902),  325-329. 
The  Lecithans:  Their  Function  in  the  Life  of 

the  Cell.     The  University  of  Chicago  De 

cennial  Publications,  First  Series,  X,  91- 

102. 

In  every  living  cell  there  are  found  a  number  of  closely 
related  phosphorized  fats  containing  nitrogen,  for 
which  the  group  name  Lecithan  is  proposed.  These 
substances  have  not  been  very  generally  studied  since 
Hoppehyler's  investigations,  more  attention  having 
been  given  to  the  proteids.  The  Lecithans  are  found 
to  be  of  value  to  the  cell  in  their  relation  to  the  inor. 
ganic  constituents  and  also  by  entering  into  the  metab- 
olism of  the  cell.  A  method  for  the  quantitative  esti- 
mation of  these  substances  is  described. 


Abthub  White  Gbeeley  [1901-02],  As- 
sistant   in    Physiology;    Professor   of 


142 


Publications 


Physiology, 
St,  Louis. 


Washington     University, 


On  the  Analogy  Between  the  Effects  of  Loss 
of  Water  and  Lowering  of  Temperature. 
American  Journal  of  Physiology,  VI  (1901), 
122-129. 

Artificial  Parthenogenesis  in  Star  Fish  Pro- 
duced by  Lowering  of  Temperature.  Ihid., 
VI  (1902),  296-304. 

The  Artificial  Reproduction  of  Spores  by  a 
Reduction  of  Temperature.  With  five  text 
figures.  Doctor's  thesis.  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  X,  71-77. 

It  is  possible,  by  means  of  variation  in  temperature, 
to  control  the  reproduction  of  Monas.  At  20°  C.  it  mul- 
tiplies sexually,  and  by  simple  fission;  at  1°  to  i°  C. 
reproduction  by  asexual  spores  takes  place. 


Charles  Hugh  Neilson  [1901 — ],  Re- 
search Assistant  in  Physiology. 

The  Hydrolysis  and  Synthesis  of  Ethyl  Buty- 
rate  by  Platinum  Black.  Science,  New 
Series,  XV  (1902),  715-716. 

Weitere  Versuche  iiber  kiinstliche  Partheno- 
genese.  In  collaboration  with  Jacques  Loeb 
and  Martin  Fischer.    (See  above.) 

Elizabeth  Cooke,  Ph.D.  1896;  Instruc- 
tor in  Physiology,  Lewis  Institute, 
Chicago. 

Experiments  upon  the  Osmotic  Properties  of 
the  Living  Frog's  Muscle.  Journal  of 
Physiology,  XXIII  (1898),  137-150. 

Walter  E.  Garret,  Ph.D.  1900;  Pro- 
fessor of  Physiology,  Cooper  Medical 
College,  San  Francisco. 

The  Effect  of  Ions  upon  the  Aggregation  of 
Flagellate  Infusoria.  American  Journal 
of  Physiology,  III  (1900),  291-315. 

Zur  Theorie  des  Galvanotropismus.  II,  Mit- 
theilung,  Versuche  an  Wirbelthiere.  In  col- 
laboration with  Jacques  Loeb.    (See  above.) 


Arthur  White  Greeley,  Ph.D.  1902. 
(See  above.) 

Elias  Potter  Lyon,  Ph.D.  1897.  (See 
above.) 

Samuel  S.  Maxwell,  Ph.D.  1896;  Pro- 
fessor of  Biology,  Monmouth  College, 
Monmouth,  111. 

Beitrage  zm:  Gehimphysiologie  der  Anneliden. 
Archiv  fur  die  gesammte  Physiologic, 
LXVII  (1897),  263-297. 

The  marine  worm  Nereis  after  loss  of  the  supraoeso- 
phageal  ganglion  shows  marked  disturbance  of  the 
brain  function.  It  does  not  recognize  food  material, 
does  not  burrow  normally,  although  it  can  do  so,  is 
exceedingly  restless  and  shows  a  tendency  to  react  to 
all  kinds  of  stimuli  by  a  forward  movement.  Nereis 
without  suboesophageal  ganglion  makes  few  spontane- 
ous movements,  and  is  unable  to  burrow  or  take  food 
on  account  of  paralysis  of  oesophageal  muscles.  In 
the  earthworm  loss  of  the  supracesophageal  ganglion 
produces  much  less  disturbance  than  in  Nereis.  In 
Nereis,  earthworms,  and  leeches,  each  ganglion  of  the 
nerve-chain  functions  as  a  local  center  for  its  corre- 
sponding segment. 

Case  of  Voluntary  Erection  of  the  Human  Hair 
and  Production  of  Cutis  Anserina.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Physiology,  VII  (1902), 
369-379. 

Zur  Theorie  des  Galvanotropismus.  I.  Mit- 
theilung.  In  collaboration  with  Jacques 
Loeb.    (See  above.) 

Anne  Moore,  Ph.D.  1901;  Instructor  in 
Science,  State  Normal  School,  San 
Diego,  Cal. 

Further  Evidence  of  the  Poisonous  Effects  of  a 
Pure  Na  CI  Solution.  American  Journal 
of  Physiology,  IV  (1900),  386-397. 

The  Effects  of  Ions  on  the  Contractions  of  the 
Lymph  Hearts  of  the  Frog.  Ibid.,  V  (1901), 
87-95. 

Are  the  Contractions  of  the  Lymph  Hearts  of 
the  Frog  Dependent  upon  Centers  Situated 
in  the  Spinal  Cord?  Ibid.,  V  (1901),  196- 
199. 

On  the  Effects  of  Solutions  of  Various  Electro- 
lytes and  Non-Conductors  upon  Rigor  Mor- 
tis and  Heat  Rigor.    Ibid.,  VII  (1902),  1-24. 


Department  of  Neurology 


143 


*  Wesley  Walker  Nokman,  Ph.D.  1899; 
formerly  Professor  of  Biology,  Univer- 
sity of  Texas. 

Do  the  Keactions  of  the  Lower  Animals  Against 
Injury  Indicate  Pain  Sensations?  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Physiology.  Ill  (1900),  271- 
284. 


William  D.  Zoethout,  Ph.D.  1898 ;  Pro- 
fessor of  Physiology,  Harvey  Medical 
College,  Chicago. 

On  Some  Analogies  Between  the  Physiologi- 
cal EflFects  of  High  Temperature,  Lack  of 
Oxygen,  and  Certain  Poisons.  American 
Journal  of  Physiology,  II  (1899),  220-242. 


Jeannette  Cora  Welch,  Ph.D.  1897.  Sidney  P.  Budgett,  Graduate  student. 


On  the  Measurement  of  Mental  Activity 
Through  Muscular  Activity  and  the  Deter- 
mination of  a  Constant  of  Attention.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  American  Journal  of  Physi- 
ology, I  (1898),  283-306. 

The  results  of  the  experiments  made  show  that  the  con- 
stant of  attention  for  any  activity  increases  with :  (1) 
the  effort  of  accommodation  of  the  spinal  sense  organs ; 
(2)  the  effort  in  co-ordination  of  the  muscles;  (3)  the 
effort  of  the  memory ;  (4)  the  number  of  simultaneous 
actiTities. 

Ralph  Waldo  Webster,  Ph.D.  1902. 
(See  above.) 


On  the  Similarity  of  Structural  Changes  Pro- 
duced by  Lack  of  Oxygen  and  Certain  Poi- 
sons. American  Journal  of  Physiology,  I 
(1898),  210-214. 

Zur  Theorie  des  Galvanotropismus.  IV.  Mit- 
theilung.  Ueber  die  Ausscheidung  electro- 
positiver  lonen  an  der  Susseren  Ano- 
denflache  protoplasmatischer  Gebilde  als 
Ursache  der  Abweichungen  vom  Pfltiger- 
schen  Erregungsgesetz.  In  collaboration 
with  Jacques  Loeb.    (See  above.) 


XXV.  NEUROLOGY 


Henry  H.  Donaldson  [1892 — ],  Pro- 
fessor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
Neurology. 

The  Growth  of  the  Brain:  A  Study  of  the  Nerv- 
ous System  in  Relation  to  Education.  8vo, 
374.  London,  Walter  Scott,  Ltd.  Contem- 
porary Science  Series.  New  York,  Charles 
Scribner's  Sons,  1895. 

A  discussion  of  the  changes  in  the  form  and  structure 
of  the  human  nervous  system  between  birth  and  matu- 
rity, together  with  the  relations  of  these  changes  to 
growth  in  mental  ability. 

The  Physiology  of  the  Central  Nervous  System: 
Being  a  Chapter  in  an  American  Text-Book 
of  Physiology  Edited  by  William  H.  Howell, 
607-743.  Philadelphia,  W.  B.  Saunders, 
1896.  Second  edition,  revised,  Vol.  II,  171- 
297,  1901. 

The  Extent  of  the  Visual  Cortex  in  Man  as 
Deduced  from  the  Study  of  Laura  Bridg- 


man's  Brain.  Plate.  American  Journal  of 
Psychology,  IV  (1892),  503-513. 

The  differences  in  the  thickness  of  the  cortex  in  the 
occipital  lobes  of  the  two  hemispheres  was  made  the 
basis  for  the  determination  of  the  cortical  visual  area. 

Preliminary  Observations  on  Some  Changes 
Caused  in  the  Nervous  Tissues  by  Reagents 
Commonly  Employed  to  Harden  Them. 
Journal  of  Morphology,  IX  (1894),  123-166. 

It  was  shown  that  solutions  of  bichromate  of  potash 
caused  an  increase  in  the  volume  of  the  brain ;  alcohol 
a  decrease.  The  influence  of  time  of  immersion  and 
strength  of  the  solutions  was  investigated. 

The  Education  of  the  Nervous  System.  Edu- 
cational Review,  IX  (1895),  105-121. 

Observations  on  the  Weight  and  Length  of  the 
Central  Nervous  System  and  of  the  Legs, 
in  Bullfrogs  of  Different  Sizes.  Journal  of 
Comparative  Neurology,  VIII  (1898),  314- 
335. 

Showing  that  the  brain  increases  in  weight  less  rapidly 
than  the  spinal  cord,  and  that  the  relative  develop- 
ment of  the  entire  leg  and  its  divisions  in  both  lengtn 
and  weight  is  nearly  constant. 


144 


Publications 


A  Note  on  the  Significance  of  the  Small  Volume 
of  the  Cell  Bodies  in  the  Cerpbral  (Dortex 
of  Man.    Ibid.,  IX  (1899),  141-149. 

The  gross  weight  of  the  human  brain  does  not  clearly 
increase  between  the  seventh  and  twenty-first  years, 
while  during  this  period  the  mental  power  is  being 
rapidly  developed.  This  discrepancy  is  explained  as 
due  to  the  fact  that  the  weight  of  substance  required 
to  increase  the  complexity  of  brain  organization  at 
this  stage  is  within  the  limits  of  error  in  the  ordinary 
determinations  of  the  brain-weight. 

Observations  on  the  Weight  and  Length  of 
the  Central  Nervous  System  and  of  the 
Legs,  in  Frogs  of  Different  Sizes  (Rana  vires- 
cens  brachycephala — Cope).  In  collabo- 
ration with  Daniel  M.  Schoemaker.  Ibid., 
X  (1900),  109-132. 

Showing  that  the  relations  found  in  the  bullfrog  (c/. 
above  article,  "Observations,"  etc.),  hold  in  the  case 
of  the  leopard  frogs. 

The  Functional  Significance  of  the  Size  and 
Shape  of  the  Neurone.  Journal  of  Nerv- 
ous and  Mental  Disease,  XXVII  (1900), 
526-527. 

Showing  first  that  in  the  growing  white  rat  the  medul- 
lary sheath  of  meduUated  fibers  exhibited  in  cross  sec- 
tion an  area  always  equal  to  half  the  area  of  the  entire 
fiber.  That  the  cross  section  of  the  entire  fiber  is  in- 
creased proportionately  to  the  volume  of  cell  body  of 
which  it  was  an  outgrowth. 

Growth  of  the  Brain.  Article  in  Reference 
Handbook  of  the  Medical  Sciences,  Vol. 
II,  314-322.  New  York,  William  Wood  & 
Co.,  1901. 

Observations  on  the  Post-mortem  Absorption 
of  Water  by  the  Spinal  Cord  of  the  Frog 
(Rana  virescens).  In  collaboration  with  Dan- 
iel M.  Schoemaker.  Journal  of  Compara- 
tive Neurology,  XII  (1902),  183-198. 

It  was  shown  that  this  absorption  of  water  by  the  frog's 
cord  led  to  a  very  considerable  increase  in  its  weight, 
and  some  of  the  conditions  determining  the  increase 
were  studied  in  detail. 

On  a  Formula  for  Determining  the  Weight  of 
the  Central  Nervous  System  of  a  Frog  from 
the  Length  and  Weight  of  Its  Entire  Body. 
Plate.  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  First  Series,  X,  15-29. 

This  investigation  shows  that  in  the  frog  the  weight  of 
the  brain  and  spinal  cord  combined  can  be  expressed 
by  a  simple  formula  which  is  based  on  the  weight  of  the 
entire  body  and  its  length.  It  thus  appears  that  the 
weight  of  the  entire  central  nervous  system  in  the  fro? 
always  bears  a  definite  relation  to  the  weight  of  the 
entire  animal,  and  therefore,  when  the  length  of  the 
frog  and  its  body-weight  are  known,  it  is  possible  to 
calculate  the  weight  of  the  central  nervous  system  by 
the  use  of  the  formula  which  is  given. 


Shinkishi  Hatai,  [1902 — ],  Research 
Assistant  in  Neurology ;  Ph.D.  1902. 

On  the  Origin  of  the  Sperm-blastophore  of 
some  Aquatic  Oligochaeta.  Biological  Bul- 
letin, I  (1901),  149-154. 

The  Finer  Structure  of  the  Spinal  Ganglion 
Cells  in  the  White  Rat.  Plate.  Journal  of 
Comparative  Neurology,  XI  (1901),  1-24. 

Presenting  evidence  for  the  view  that  the  small  nerve 
cells  in  the  spinal  ganglia  are  immature. 

On  the  Presence  of  the  Centrosome  in  Certain 
Nerve  Cells  of  the  White  Rat.  Plate.  Ibid., 
25-39. 

Demonstrating  the  centrosome  in  the  neurones  of  both 
the  brain  and  spinal  cord  of  the  white  rat  at  birth  and 
at  maturity. 

On  the  Mitosis  in  Nerve  Cells  of  the  Cerebellar 
Cortex  of  Foetal  Cats.  Plate.  Ibid.,  277- 
296. 

In  these  cells  the  author  was  able  to  show  that  the 
method  of  division  corresponds  with  the  heterotypical 
mitosis  of  Flemming,  and  that  the  number  of  chromo- 
somes is  sixteen. 

Observations  on  the  Efferent  Neurones  in  the 
Electric  Lobes  of  Torpedo  Occidentalis. 
Plate.  Journal  of  the  Cincinnati  Society 
of  Natural  History,  XX  (1901),  1-12. 

The  cells  composing  the  electric  lobes  in  the  Torpedo 
are  here  used  to  show  that  the  reticulum  of  the  cell 
body  may  be  so  altered  as  to  give  an  appearance  of 
fibrils  as  described  by  various  authors ;  the  fibrils  of 
every  dendrite  being  represented  in  the  axone. 

Number  and  Size  of  the  Ganglion  Cells  and 
Dorsal  Root  Fibers  in  the  White  Rat  at 
Different  Ages.  Journal  of  Comparative 
Neurology,  XII  (1902),  107-123. 

By  this  investigation  it  has  been  shown  for  the  first 
time  that  there  is  always  an  excess  of  spinal  ganglion 
cells  in  the  ganglia  of  the  dorsal  nerve  roots  when  com- 
pared with  the  number  of  medullated  fibers  in  the 
dorsal  nerve  root.  During  the  growth  period,  how- 
ever, small  ganglion  cells  become  large,  and  the  num- 
ber of  medullated  fibers  in  the  dorsal  nerve  root  is  con- 
tinually increased. 

Observations  on  Developing  Neurones  of  the 
Cerebral  Cortex  of  Foetal  Cats.  Ibid.,  199- 
204. 

Evidence  is  hero  presented  for  the  view  that  the  first 
outgrowth  from  the  cell  bodies  in  the  cerebral  cortex 
is  dendritic  in  nature  and  not  an  axone,  as  is  usually 
stated. 

Studies  on  the  Finer  Structures  of  Neurones 
in  the  White  Rat.    ^ith  2  colored  plates. 


Department  op  Neubology 


145 


The  University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Pub- 
lications, First  Series,  X,  177-190. 

This  article  describes  mainly  the  finer  structure  of  the 
azones  and  dendrites  of  various  forms  of  neurones  as 
well  as  the  intimate  anatomical  relations  existing  be- 
tween the  two  processes  just  nientioned.  In  addition, 
the  finer  structure  of  the  ground  substance  in  the  nerve- 
cell  bodies  is  discussed.  The  observations  were  made 
on  material  which  was  fixed  and  stained  with  reagents 
devised  by  the  author. 

Elizabeth    Hopkins    Dunn    [1901 — ], 

Technical  Assistant  in  Neurology. 

The  Number  and  Size  of  the  Nerve  Fibers 
Innervating  the  Skin  and  Muscles  of  the 
Thigh  in  the  Frog  (Rana  virescens  brachy- 
cephala  —  Cope).  Journal  of  Compara- 
tive Neurology,  X  (1900),  218-242. 

A  determination  of  the  number  and  size  of  the  nerve 
fibers  distributed  to  the  thigh  as  compared  with  those 
going  to  the  rest  of  the  leg. 

Irving  Haedesty  [1900-01],  Assistant 
in  Neurology ;  Instructor  in  Anatomy, 
University  of  California.     Ph.D.  1900. 

Ueber  die  Localisation  der  Athmuug  in  der 

Zelle.    In  collaboration  with  Jacques  Loeb. 

Archiv  filr  die  gesammte  Physiologic,  LXI 

(1895),  583-594. 
The  Number  and  Arrangement  of  the  Fibers 

Forming  the  Spinal  Nerves  of  the  Frog 

(Rana  virescens).    8  plates.    Doctor's  thesis. 

Journal   of   Comparative  Neurology,  IX 

(1899),  64-112. 

Showing  the  manner  in  which  the  nerve  fibers  forming 
the  spinal  nerves  grow  out  from  their  cells  of  origin. 

Further  Observations  on  the  Conditions  De- 
termining the  Number  and  Arrangement  of 
the  Fibers  Forming  the  Spinal  Nerves  of 
the  Frog  (Rana  virescens).  Ibid.,  X  (1900), 
323-354. 

Showing  the  influence  of  body-weight  and  season  of  the 
year  upon  the  rate  at  which  the  fibers  forming  the 
spinal  nerves  grow  out  from  their  cells  of  origin,  to- 
gether with  some  conclusions  as  to  the  probable  archi- 
tecture of  the  spinal  ganglion. 


Alice  Hamilton,  Graduate  student. 

The  Division  of  Differentiated  Cells  in  the 
Central  Nervous  System  of  the  White  Rat. 
2  plates.  Journal  of  Comparative  Neu- 
rology, XI  (1901),  297-320. 

In  the  white  rat,  division  of  the  cells  in  the  nervous 
system  was  found  during  at  least  four  days  after  birth. 
The  dividing  cells  giving  rise  to  neuroglia  could  be  dis- 
tinguished from  those  giving  rise  to  nerve  cells  by  their 
small  size  and,  occasionally,  mitotic  figures  were  found 
in  moltipolar  nerve  cells. 

Daniel  Mabtin  Schoemakeb,  Graduate 
student. 

Observations  on  the  Weight  and  Length  of  the 
Central  Nervous  System  and  of  the  Legs, 
in  Frogs  of  Different  Sizes  (Rana  virescens 
brachycephala  —  Cope).  In  collaboration 
with  Henry  H.  Donaldson.    (See  above.) 

Observations  on  the  Post-mortem  Absorption 
of  Water  by  the  Spinal  Cord  of  the  Frog 
(Rana  virescens).  In  collaboration  with 
Henry  H.  Donaldson.    (See  above.) 

Helen  B.  Thompson,  Graduate  student. 

The  Total  Number  of  Functional  Cells  in  the 
Cerebral  Cortex  of  Man,  and  the  Percentage 
of  the  Total  Volume  of  the  Cortex  Com- 
posed of  Nerve  Cell  Bodies,  Calculated  from 
Karl  Hammarberg's  Data;  together  with  a 
Comparison  of  the  Number  of  Giant  Cells 
with  the  Number  of  Pyramidal  Fibers. 
Journal  of  Comparative  Neurology,  IX 
(1899),  113-140. 

A  Brief  Summary  of  the  Researches  of  Theo- 
dor  Kaes  on  the  Medullation  of  the  Intra- 
Cortical  Fibers  of  Man  at  Different  Ages. 
Ibid.,  X  (1900),  358-374. 

(See  also  under  Philosophy,  p.  11.) 


146 


Publications 


XXVI.    PALAEONTOLOGY 


♦George  Baue  [1892-98],  Associate  Pro- 
fessor of  Osteology  and  Palaeontology. 

Das  Variieren  der  Eidechsen-Gattung  Tropi- 
diirus  aus  den  Galapagos-Inseln.  Festschrift 
zu  dem  70.  Geburtstage  R.  Leuckarts,  259- 
277.    Leipzig,  1892,  Wilhelm  Engelmann. 

Professor  Alexander  Agassiz  on  the  Origin  of 
the  Fauna  and  Flora  of  the  Galapagos 
Islands.    Science,  XIX  (1892),  176. 

Der  Carpus  der  Schildkroten.  Anatomischer 
Anzeiger,  VII  (1892),  206-211,  4  figures. 

On  the  Taxonomy  of  the  Genus  Emys  C. 
Dum^ril.  Proceedings  of  the  American 
Philosophical  Society,  XXX  (1892),  40-44. 

Addition  to  the  Note  on  the  Taxonomy  of  the 
Genus  Emys  C.  Dum6ril.    Ibid.,  245. 

On  Some  Peculiarities  in  the  Structure  of  the 
Cervical  Vertebrae  in  the  Existing  Monotre- 
mata.  American  Naturalist,  XXVI  (1892), 
72. 

Visit  to  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Proceedings 
of  the  Boston  Society  of  Natural  History, 
XXV  (1892),  317. 

The  Cervical  Vertebrae  of  the  Monotremata. 
Ibid.,  XXVI  (1892),  435. 

Bemerkungen  liber  verschiedene  Arten  von 
Schildkroten.  Zoologischer  Anzeiger,  XV 
(1892),  155-159. 

Ein  Besuch  der  Galapagos-Inseln.  Biolo- 
gischer  Centralblatt,  XII  (1892),  221-250. 

On  the  Morphology  of  the  Skull  in  the  Mosa- 
sauridse.  Journal  of  Morphology,  VII 
(1892),  1-22,  Plates  I  and  II. 

Notes  on  the  Classification  and  Taxonomy  of 
the  Testudinata.  Proceedings  of  the  Ameri- 
can Philosophical  Society,  XXXI  (1893), 
210-225. 

Notes  on  the  Classification  of  the  Cryptodira. 
American  Naturalist,  XXVII  (1893),  672- 
675. 

Two  New  Species  of  North  American  Testudi- 
nata.   Ibid.,  675-677. 


Further   Notes  on    American   Box-Tortoises. 

Ibid.,  677-678. 
G.  Jager  und  die  Theorie  von  der  Continuitat 

des  Keimprotoplasmas.    Zoologischer  An- 
zeiger, XVI  (1893),  300. 
Ueber  Rippen  und  ahnliche  Gebilde  und  deren 

Nomenclatur.    Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  IX 

(1893),  116-120. 
The   Discovery  of    Miocene  Amphisbsenians. 

American  Naturalist,  XXVII  (1893),  998- 

999. 

The  Relationship  of  the  Lacertilian  Genus  An- 
niella  Gray.  Proceedings  of  the  United 
States  Natural  Museum,  XVII  (1893),  345- 
351. 

Bemerkungen  uber  die  Osteologie  der  Schlfif- 
engegend  der  hoheren  Wirbelthiere.  Ana- 
tomischer Anzeiger,  X  (1894),  315-330. 

Ueber  den  Proatlas  einer  SchildkrOte  (Pla- 
typeltis  spinifer  Les.).  Ibid.,  X  (1895),  349- 
354,  6  figiu*es. 

Die  Palatingegend  der  Ichthyosauria.  Ibid., 
456^59, 1  figure. 

The  Differentiation  of  Species  on  the  Galapa- 
gos Islands  and  the  Origin  of  the  Group. 
Wood's  Holl  Biological  Lectures,  1895,  67- 
78. 

Pithecanthropus  erectus.  Journal  of  Geology, 
III  (1895),  237-238. 

The  Fins  of  Ichthyosaurus.    Ibid.,  238-240. 

Cope  on  the  Temporal  Part  of  the  Skull,  and 
on  the  Systematic  Position  of  the  Mosasau- 
ridae.  A  Reply.  American  Naturalist, 
XXIX  (1895),  998-1002. 

Ueber  die  Morphologie  des  Unterkiefers  der 
Reptilien.  Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  XI 
(1895),  410-415,  4  figures. 

Das  Gebiss  von  Sphenodon  (Hatteria)  imd 
einige  Bemerkungen  liber  Professor  Rud. 
Burckhardt's  Arbeit  liber  das  Gebiss  der 
Saiu-opsiden.     Ibid.,  436-439. 


Depabtment  op  Paleontology 


147 


The  Paxoccipital  of  the  Squamata  and  the 
AflBnities  of  the  Mosasauridse  Once  More. 
A  Rejoinder  to  Professor  Cope.  American 
Naturalist,  XXX  (1896),  143-147,  Plate  IV. 

Nachtrag  zu  meiner  Mittheilung  iiber  die  Mor- 
phologie  des  Unterkiefers  der  Reptilien. 
Anatomischer  Anzeiger,  XI  (1896),  569. 

The  Stegocephali:  A  Phylogenetic  Study. 
Ibid.,  657-673,  8  figures. 

Walter  E.  Collinge's  "Remarks  on  the  Pre- 
opercular  Zone  and  Sensory  Canal  of  Polyp- 
terus."    Ibid.,  XII  (1896),  247-248. 

Professor  Cope's  Criticisms  of  my  Drawings  of 
the  Squamosal  Region  of  Conolophus  Sub- 
cristatus  Gray  (American  Naturalist,  Feb- 
ruary, 1896,  148-149),  and  a  Few  Remarks 
about  his  Drawings  of  the  Same  Object 
from  Steindachner.  American  Naturalist, 
XXX  (1896),  327-329. 

Bemerkungen  zu  Professor  Dr.  O.  BOttger's 
Referat  liber:  Seeley,  H.  G.,  on  Thecodon- 
tosaurus  and  Palaeosaurus.  Zoologisches 
Centralblatt,  III  (1896),  896. 

Der  Sch&del  einer  neuen  grossen  SchildkrOte 
(Adelochelys)  aus  dem  zoologischen  Mu- 
seum in  Miinchen.  Anatomischer  Anzei- 
ger, XII  (1896),  314-319,  4  figures. 

Bemerkungen  uber  die  Phylogenie  der  Schild- 
kroten.    Ibid.,  561-570. 

On  the  Morphology  of  the  Skull  of  the  Pely- 
cosauria  and  the  Origin  of  Mammals.  In 
collaboration  with  E.  C.  Case.  Ibid.,  XIII 
(1897),  109-120,  3  figures. 

Remarks  on  the  Question  of  Intercalation  of 
Vertebrae.  Zoological  Bulletin,  I  (1897), 
41-55. 

Birds  of  the  Galapagos  Archipelago:  A 
Criticism  of  Mr.  Robert  Ridgway's  Paper. 
American  Naturalist,  XXXI  (1897),  777- 
784. 

New  Observations  on  the  Origin  of  the  Galapa- 
gos Islands,  with  Remarks  on  the  Geologi- 
cal Age  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.  Ibid.,  661- 
680;  864-896  (incomplete). 

Reviews  of 

A.  E.  Ortmann,  Grundzuge  der  marinen  Thier 
geographic.    Science,  III  (1896),  359-367. 


O.  JSckels,  Die  Organisation  von  Archego- 
saurus.  American  Naturalist,  XXXI  (1897), 
975-980. 

Ebmine  Cowles  Case  [1896-97],  Assis- 
tant in  PalsBontology.  Ph.D.  1896; 
Professor  of  Physics,  Chemistry,  and 
Physiography,  State  Normal  School, 
Milwaukee,  Wis. 

Abnormal  Sacrum  in  an  Alligator.  2  plates. 
American  Naturalist,  XXX  (1896),  232-234. 

On  the  Morphology  of  the  Skull  of  the  Pelyco- 
sauria  and  the  Origin  of  Mammals.  With 
George  Baur.  Anatomischer  Anzeiger, 
XIII  (1897),  109-120,  3  figures. 

On  the  Osteology  and  Relationships  of  Proto- 
stega.  Doctor's  thesis.  Journal  of  Mor- 
phology, XIV  (1897),  22-60,  3  plates. 

William  Newton  Logan,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Professor  of  Geology  and  Mineralogy, 
St.  Lawrence  University,  Canton,  N.  Y. 

A  Discussion  and  Correlation  of  Certain  Sub- 
divisions of  the  Colorado  Formation.  Jour- 
nal of  Geology,  VII  (1899),  83-91. 

Contributions  to  the  Palaeontology  of  the  Up- 
per Cretaceous  Series.  Field  Colimibian 
Museum,  Publication  36,  Geological  Series,  I 
(1899),  201-216. 

The  Stratigraphy  and  Invertebrate  Faimas  of 
the  Jurassic  Formation  in  the  Freeze-Out 
Hills  of  Wyoming.  Kansas  University 
Quarterly,  IX,  A,  1900,  109-134,  PI.  25-31. 

A  North  American  Epicontinental  Sea  of  Ju- 
rassic Age.  Doctor's  thesis.  Journal  of 
Geology,  VIII  (1900),  241-273. 

(1)  The  Jurassic  formaton  of  the  interior  province  of 
North  America  was  not  deposited  in  a  body  of  water  of 
even  moderate  oceanic  depth,  but  in  a  shallow  epicon- 
tinental sea.  (2)  This  sea  haa  but  one  connection  with 
the  ocean  — with  the  North  Pacific  in  the  Queen  Char- 
lotte Island  region.  (3)  There  was  a  connection  between 
the  Arctic  and  Pacific  by  way  of  the  Bering  waters,  and 
by  this  means  circumpolar  and  Pacific  faunal  communi- 
cation was  established.  (4)  The  Jurassic  deposits  of  the 
interior  contain  but  one  fauna.  (5)  This  fauna  is 
closely  allied  to  the  Cardioceras  fauna  of  northern 
Eurasia.  (6)  Physiographic  rather  than  climatic  con- 
ditions restricted  communication  between  the  Califor- 
nian  and  interior  provinces.  (7)  Nothing  connected 
with  the  history  of  this  Jurassic  sea  or  its  faunal  re- 
lations is  inimical  to  the  view  that  the  North  American 
continent  then  had,  in  general,  its  present  outline.  (8) 
The  geographic  distribution  of  land  and  water,  as 
imstulated  by  Neumayr,  is  not  supported  by  the  facts, 
so  far  as  the  North  American  Jura  is  concerned. 


148 


Publications 


XXVII.    BOTANY 


John  Merle  Coulter  [1896 — ],  Profes- 
sor and  Head  of  the  Department  of 
Botany. 

The  Morphology  of  Spermatophytes.  Part 
I,  Gymnosperms.  In  collaboration  with 
Charles  Joseph  Chamberlain.  Svo,  x  +  188, 
106  illustrations.  New  York,  D.  Appleton  & 
Co.,  1901. 

An  advanced  university  text-book,  which  treats  of  the 
Special  Morphologjr  of  the  Gymnosperms.  It  brings 
together  and  organizes  the  vast  and  scattered  litera- 
ture of  the  subject,  points  out  and  discusses  the  prob- 
lems, unifies  the  confusing  terminology,  and  contributes 
a  groat  deal  of  original  investigation  and  observation. 

The  Morphology  of  Spermatophytes.  Part  II, 
Angiosperms.  8vo,  x  +326,  113  illustra- 
tions.   New  York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1902. 

An  advanced  university  text-book,  which  treats  of  the 
Special  Morphology  of  the  Angiosperms,  and  of  the 
same  general  character  as  the  preceding  volume. 

Notes  on  the  Fertilization  and  Embryogeny  of 
Conifers.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXIII  (1897)^ 
40-43,  1  plate. 

A  brief  account  of  some  new  facts  discovered  in  connec- 
tion with  the  work  of  a  group  of  research  students. 

Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  Lilium 
philadelphiacum ;  The  Embryo  Sac  and 
Associated  Structures.  Ibid.,  412-421,  3 
plates. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  the  embryo  sac,  the 
embryo,  the  endosperm,  and  the  phenomena  connected 
with  fertilization. 

Revision  of  Lilaeopsis.  In  collaboration  with 
Joseph  Nelson  Rose.  Ibid.,  XXIV  (1897), 
47-49,  4  illustrations. 

The  separation  of  three  new  species  from  an  old  sjiecies 
complex. 

Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  Ranuncu- 
lus.   J&id.,  XXV  (1898),  73-88,  4  plates. 

A  study  of  microsporangium,  microspores,  mega- 
sporangium,  megaspores,  fertilization,  endosperm,  and 
embryo. 

The  Origin  of  Gymnosperms  and  the  Seed 
Habit.  Ibid.,  XXVI  (1898),  153-168;  also 
Science,  VIII  (1898),  377-385. 

Address  as  retiring  president  of  the  Botanical  Society 
of  America.  The  general  conclusion  is  reached  that 
the  Gymnosperms  have  been  derived  from  the  Marattia- 
like  ferns,  and  that  the  retained  megaspore,  and  hence 
the  seed,  represents  the  last  stage  in  the  progressive 
sterilization  of  the  megasporangium. 


The  Origin  of  the  Leafy  Sporophyte.  Ibid., 
XXVIII  (1899),  46-59. 

A  discussion  of  the  recently  published  views  of  Bower, 
Klebs,  and  Lang,  and  a  suggestion  of  the  way  in  which 
the  leafy  sporophyte  of  the  Pteridophytes  may  have 
been  derived  directly  from  the  Algae,  rather  than  by 
way  of  the  leafless  sporophyte  of  the  Bryophytes. 

Hesperogenia,  a  New  Genus  of  Umbelliferae 
from  Mount  Rainier.  In  collaboration  with 
Joseph  Nelson  Rose.  Contributions  from 
the  United  States  National  Herbarium,  V 
(1899),  203,  1  plate. 

A  Synopsis  of  Mexican  and  Central  American 
Umbelliferae.  In  collaboration  with  Joseph 
Nelson  Rose.  Proceedings  of  the  Wash- 
ington Academy  of  Sciences,  I  (1900),  111- 
159,  11  plates,  8  text  figures. 

The  first  bringing  together  of  the  very  much  scattered 
Mexican  material,  together  with  descriptions  of  forty- 
one  new  sp>ecies,  and  revisions  of  certain  genera. 

Monograph  of  North  American  Umbelliferae. 
In  collaboration  with  Joseph  Nelson  Rose. 
Contributions  from  the  United  States  Na- 
tional Herbarium,  VII  (1900),  vii  +  256,  9 
plates,  65  text  figures. 

In  1888  the  same  authors  published  their  Revision  of  the 
North  American  Umbelliferae.  Since  that  time  the 
work  of  botanical  exploration  has  proceeded  with  such 
remarkable  activity  that  the  new  revision,  presented  in 
the  Monograph,  was  needed.  It  contains  the  presenta- 
tion of  78  genera  and  371  species,  and  the  descriptions 
of  S  new  genera  and  49  new  species. 

Articles  " Anhalonium,"  "Cactus,"  "Cereus," 
"  Echinocactus."  Cyclopedia  of  American 
Horticulture,  1, 67;  203-204,  6  figures;  279- 
284,  2  figures;  II,  512-516,  3  figures,    1900. 

The  Origin  of  Angiosperms.  The  University 
of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  X,  191-198. 

The  statement  of  a  theory  based  ui)on  investigations 
during  several  years  by  various  members  of  the  depart- 
ment. The  common  or  independent  origin  of  Mono- 
cotyledons and  Dicotyledons  is  discussed,  the  conclu- 
sion being  reached  that  they  are  independent  lines.  In 
case  the  Angiosperms  prove  to  have  a  common  origin, 
evidence  is  advanced  to  show  that  the  Monocotyledons 
represent  a  specialized  offshoot  from  the  Dicotyledons, 
contrary  to  the  recent  general_  impression  that_  the 
Monocotyledons  are  the  more  primitive.  The  origin  of 
Angiosperms  from  Gymnosperms  is  shown  to  be  unten- 
able; and  even  such  heterosporous  Pteridophytes  as 
Isoetes  and  Selaginella  are  very  improbable  ancestral 
forms.  The  general  conclusion  is  reached  that  the 
Angiosperms  have  been  directly  derived  from  the 
eusporangiate  ferns,  the  transition  forms  to  the  Mono- 
cotyledons being  unknown  ;  but  the  transition  forms  to 
Dicotyledons  being  represented  by  the  abundant  and 
problematical  "  Froangiosperms "  of  the  early  Greta- 


Department  of  Botany 


149 


Charles  Keid  Barnes  [1898 — ],  Profes- 
sor of  Plant  Physiology. 

The  Progress  and  Problems  of  Plant  Physi- 
ology. Proceedings  of  the  American  Asso- 
ciation for  the  Advancement  of  Science, 
XLVIII  (1899),  263-288. 

Address  as  vice-president  (presiding  oflScer)  of  the  Sec- 
tion of  Botany. 

Articles  "Fertilization,"  "Flower,"  "Teratol- 
ogy." Cyclopedia  of  American  Horticul- 
ture, II,  579-580,  3  figures;  592-594,  14  fig- 
ures; IV,  1782-1785,  figures.    1900-1902. 

A  Simple  Dynamometer.  Torreya,  I  (1901), 
47,  70-71. 

Bradley  Moore  Davis  [1895 — ],  Assis- 
tant Professor  in  Botany. 

Fertilization  of  Batrachospermum.  Annals  of 
Botany,  X  (1896),  49-76,  2  double  plates. 

A  description  of  the  cytological  features  connected 
with  the  act  of  fertilization  in  this  alga. 

The  Development  of  the  Cystocarp  of  Champia 
parvula  Harv.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXI 
(1896),  109-118,  2  plates. 

A  study  of  the  fruit  development  of  a  certain  seaweed. 
Development  of  the  Procarp  and  Cystocarp  in 
the    Genus    Ptilota.     Ibid.,  XXII  (1896), 
353-378,  2  double  plates. 

A  study  of  the  structure  and  mode  of  growth  of  the 
frond,  the  morphology  and  development  of  the  procar- 
pic  branches,  the  development  of  the  group  of  procarps, 
the  minute  structure  of  the  procarps,  and  the  develoiv 
ment  of  the  cystocarp ;  followed  by  a  general  discussion 
of  the  character  of  this  type  of  carposporic  reproduc- 
tion. 

The  Vegetation  of  the  Hot  Springs  of  Yellow- 
stone Park.    Science,  VI  (1897),   145-157. 

A  description  of  the  bacteria  and  algae  which  occur  in 
the  hot  springs  and  of  the  part  they  play  in  the  forma- 
tion of  lime  and  silicions  deposits. 

Kerntheilung  in  der  Tetrasporemutterzelle  bei 
Corallina  officinalis  L.  var.  mediterranea 
Berichte  der  deutschen  botanischen  Gesell- 
schaft,  XVI  (1898),  266-272,  2  plates. 

A  cytological  study  dealing  with  the  details  of  nuclear 
division  in  the  tetra-spore-mother  cell. 

The  Spore-mother-cell  of  Anthoceros.  Bo- 
tanical Gazette,  XXVII  (1899),  89-109,  2 
plates. 

A  study  of  the  cytological  events  of  the  division  of  the 
mother  cell  in  this  liverwort. 


The  Fertilization  of  Albugo  Candida.  Ibid., 
XXIX  (1900),  297-311,  1  plate. 

A  cytological  study  of  oogenesis  and  fertilization  in 
this  fungus,  suggested  by  the  recent  discovery  of  multi- 
nucleate gametes  in  Albugo  Bliti, 

Nuclear  Studies  in  Pellia.  Annals  of  Botany ^ 
XV  (1901),  147-180,  2  double  plates. 

A  cytological  study  of  the  development  and  germina- 
tion of  the  spores  in  this  liverwort. 

The  Origin  of  Sex  in  Plants.  Popular  Science 
Monthly,  LX  (1901),  66-75,  3  figures. 

An  account  of  the  conditions  that  gave  rise  to  sexual 
cells  of  plants. 

Oogenesis  in  Saprolegnia.  "With  2  lithographic 
plates.  The  University  of  Chicago  Decen- 
nial Publications,  First  Series,  X,  225-257. 

Describes  the  process  of  egg  formation  in  one  of  the 
fish  moulds.  The  investigation  bears  especially  on  that 
type  of  sexual  organ  termed  the  coenogamete,  which  is 
a  multinucleate  structure.  The  physiological  condi- 
tions that  lead  to  extensive  degeneration  of  the  nuclei 
in  the  oogonia  are  discussed  together  with  the  cytologi- 
cal events  that  determine  the  selection  of  the  nuclei 
destined  to  preside  over  the  eggs.  These  developments 
are  related  to  the  activities  of  certain  cytoplasmic  cen- 
ters termed  coenocentra.  The  events  of  oogenesis  have 
important  bearings  on  the  views  of  Trow  respecting  the 
sexuality  of  the  Saprolegniales  and  also  on  the  condi- 
tions in  other  groups  of  the  Phycomycetes,  the  Perono- 
sporales  and  Mucorales.  Recent  investigations  upon 
coenogametes  in  the  Ascomycetes  are  discussed  and 
theories  are  advanced  as  to  the  evolutionary  principles 
that  control  the  origin  and  evolution  of  these  struc- 
tures. _  Coenogametes  are  believed  by  the  author  to  be 
the  primitive  form  of  sexual  organs  in  the  Mucorales, 
Peronosporales,  and  Ascomycetes. 


Charles  Joseph  Chamberlain  [1896 — ], 
Instructor  in  Botany. 

Morphology  of  Spermatophytes.   Part  I,  Gym- 

nosperms.      In    collaboration    with    John 

Merle  Coulter.    (See  above.) 
Methods  in  Plant  Histology.    8vo,  viii  +  160, 

with  74  illustrations.    Chicago,  University 

Press,  1901. 

A  manual  containing  directions  for  collecting  and  pre- 
paring plant  material  for  microscopic  study.  It  meets 
the  requirements,  not  only  of  the  student  who  has  the 
assistance  of  an  instructor,  but  also  of  the  student  who 
must  work  by  himself. 

The  Embryo-Sac  of  Aster-novae-angliae.  Bo- 
tanical Gazette,  XX  (1895),  205-212, 2  plates. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  the  megaspore,  the 
structure  of  the  mature  embryo  sac,  and  the  develop- 
ment of  a  remarkable  antipodal  region. 

Contribution  to  the  Life-History  of  Salix.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  Ibid.,  XXII  (1897),  147-179,  7 
plates. 

A  study  of  the  organogeny  of  the  flower,  the  develop- 
ment of  microspores,  the  origin  of  the  megaspore,  the 
germination  of  the  megaspore,  the  pollen  tubes  and 
fertilization,  the  development  of  the  embryo,  and  ab- 
normal structures. 


150 


Publications 


Contribution  to  the  Life-History  of  Lilium 
philadelphiacum ;  The  Pollen  Grain.  Ibid., 
XXIII  (1897),  423-430,  2  plates. 


A  r6sum6  of  the  history  of  the  subject,  followed  by  a 

ills,  the  tetrads,  i     '    ' 
spores. 


study  of  the  mother  cells,  the  tetrads,  and  the  mature 


Winter  Characters  of  Certain  Sporangia.  Ibid., 

XXV  (1898),  124-128,  1  plate. 

A  study  of  various  sporangia  in  the  autumn,  winter, 
and  spring  conditions,  showing  that  very  many  pass 
the  winter  in  the  spore-mother  cell  stage. 

The  Homology  of  the  Blepharoplast.    Ibid., 

XXVI  (1898),  431-435. 

After  a  discussion  of  the  literature  of  a  number  of 
organs  bearing  a  number  of  names,  the  conclusion  is 
reached  that  under  all  of  these  names  the  same  mor- 
phological body  Is  described. 

Oogenesis   in  Pinus  laricio.     Ibid.,  XXVII 

(1899),  268-280,  3  plates. 

A  cytological  study  dealing  with  the  ventral  canal  cell, 
development  of  the  egg  nucleus,  and  the  act  of  fertiliza- 
tion. 

The  Origin  of  the  Achromatic  Figure  in  Pellia. 

With  3  lithographic  plates.    The  University 

of  Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 

Series,  X. 

Deals  with  the  first  two  nuclear  divisions  in  the  germi- 
nating spore.  For  comparison,  however,  mitosis  was 
studied  in  other  phases  of  the  life  history.  The  prin- 
cipal conclusions  are  as  follows:  The  stimulus  to  nu- 
clear division  comes  from  within  the  nucleus.  The 
asters  are  of  cytoplasmic  origin.  The  caps  come  from 
the  outer  portion  of  the  nuclear  membrane  or  from  a 
Hautschicht  surrounding  the  nucleus.  The  appearance 
and  disappearance  of  the  astral  rays  suggest  that  they 
are  concerned  in  the  movement  of  nuclear  matter.  The 
centrosphere  is  formed  by  the  astral  rays,  not  the  rays 
by  the  centrosphere. 

The  centrosphere  or  Pellia  represents  a  condition 
intermediate  between  the  well-defined  centrosphere  of 
some  of  the  thallophytes  and  the  centrosomeless  con- 
dition of  the  higher  plants.  The  spindle  fibers,  except 
the  mantle  fibers,  grow  from  one  i)ole  to  the  other.  In 
early  stages  two  half -spindles  are  often  distinguishable. 


The  Physiographic  Ecology  of  Chicago  and 
Vicinity:  A  Study  of  the  Origin,  Develop- 
ment, and  Classification  of  Plant  Societies. 
Ibid.,  XXXI  (1901),  73-108, 145-182, 35  half- 
tone illustrations. 

Plant  societies  are  governed  in  their  development  by 
physiographic  changes,  hence  they  should  be  classified 
as  are  the  topographic  forms  upon  which  they  are 
located.  There  is  a  progressive  tendency  toward  a 
mesophytic  level  on  the  part  of  xerophytic  uplands  and 
hydrophytic  lowlands.  The  Chicago  region  is  treated 
from  this  standpoint  to  illustrate  the  physiographic 
theory,  and  the  life  history  of  various  topographic 
series  is  briefly  recounted ;  the  river  series  with  ravine, 
bluff,  and  flood  plain;  the  swamp-prairie  series;  the 
upland  series;  the  lake  bluff  series;  and  the  beach- 
dune  sandhill  series. 

The  Plant  Societies  of  Chicago  and  Vicinity. 
Bulletin  of  the  Geographic  Society  of  Chi- 
cago, II  (1901),  1-76,  38  half-tone  illustra- 
tions, 2  maps. 

The  body  of  the  text  is  the  same  as  in  the  preceding 
article.  The  introduction  treats  of  recent  progress  in 
physiographic  ecology,  and  at  the  close  there  is  a  list 
of  representative  localities. 

The  Influence  of  Underlying  Kocks  on  the 
Character  of  the  Vegetation.  Bulletin  of 
the  American  Bureau  of  Geography,  II 
(1901),  163-176,  etc.,  15  half-tone  illustra- 
tions. 

After  a  historical  summary  in  which  the  chemical  and 
physical  theories  are  set  forth  and  other  theories  ad- 
vanced, the  various  rock  types  are  reviewed  as  to  the 
character  of  their  vegetation.  There  is  a  striking  simi- 
larity in  all  rock  vegetation,  and  differences  arise 
mainly  from  differences  in  the  physiographic  phase  of 
the  rock  exposures.  Rocks  which  erode  with  difficulty 
long  maintain  xerophytic  floras;  rocks  which  erode 
readily  are  soon  clothed  with  mesophytic  floras. 


Henry  Chandler  Cowles  [1897 — ],  In- 
structor in  Botany. 

The  Ecological  Relations  of  the  Vegetation  on 
the  Sand  Dunes  of  Lake  Michigan.  Doctor's 
thesis.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXVII  (1899), 
95-117, 167-202,  281-308, 361-391,  with  map 
and  25  half-tone  illustrations. 

After  a  treatment  of  the  physiographic  features  of  the 
shore  of  Lake  Michigan  and  of  the  various  ecologfical 
factors,  the  plant  societies  of  the  dunes  are  described. 
The  beach  is  subdivided  ecologically  into  three  zones. 
Dunes  are  formed  on  the  beach  through  the  agency  of 
various  perennial  plants.  The  active  dune  complex 
has  phases  in  which  plant  life  encroaches  on  the  dune, 
others  in  which  the  dune  encroaches  on  the  vegetation; 
some  swamp  plants  survive  a  partial  burial  by  sand, 
but  most  plants  are  soon  destroyed.  Ultimately  the 
dunes  become  established  and  are  tenanted  at  first 
largely  by  Populus  and  Tilia,  later  by  Pirnis,  later  still 
by  Querctia, 


Florence  May  Lyon  [1901 — ],  Associate 
in  Botany. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  Euphor- 
bia Corollata.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXV 
(1898),  418^26,  3  plates. 

A  study  of  the  inflorescence,  cyathinm,  organogeny  of 
the  flower,  development  of  the  megasporangium,  mega- 
spore,  microsporangium,  and  microspore. 

A  Study  of  the  Sporangia  and  Gametophytes 
of  Selaginelia  Apus  and  Selaginella  Rupes- 
tris.  Doctor's  thesis.  Ibid.,  XXXII  (1901), 
124-141, 170-194,  5  double  plates. 

A  study  of  the  sporangia,  megaspores,  female  gameto- 
phyte,  archegonia,  microspores,  and  the  phenomena  of 
fertilization;  followed  by  a  general  discussion  of  the 
relation  of  the  results  to  previous  knowledge. 


Depabtment  op  Botany 


151 


Habry  Nichols  Whitfobd  [1899 — ], 
Assistant  in  Botany. 

The  Genetic  Development  of  the  Forests  of 
Northern  Michigan:  A  Study  in  Physio- 
graphic Ecology.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXXI 
(1901),  289-325, 18  illustrations. 

After  a  discussion  of  the  factors  that  influence  the  de- 
velopment of  trees,  there  is  a  description  of  the  suc- 
cession of  plant  societies  in  five  situations,  sand,  clay, 
rock,  swamp,  and  clearing.  In  each  case  it  is  shown 
that  there  is  a  steady  growth  toward  a  climax  society 
which  is  the  maple-beech-hemlock  forest. 

BuETON  Edwabd  Livingston  [1899 — ], 
Assistant  in  Botany. 

The  Effect  of  the  Osmotic  Pressure  of  the 
Medium  upon  the  Growth  and  Reproduc- 
tion of  Organisms.  Doctor's  thesis.  8vo, 
20.    Chicago,  1903. 

Being  a  chapter  from  the  following  Tolome : 

The  Role  of  Diffusion  and  Osmotic  Pressure 
in  Plants.  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  Second  Series,  Vol. 
VIII.    8vo,  x  +  144. 

Part  I  deals  with  the  purely  physical  aspects  of  diffu- 
sion and  osmotic  pressure.  Herein  is  made  an  attempt 
to  bring  together  all  the  knowledge  of  fact  and  theory 
in  this  field  which  is  essential  to  the  practical  use  of 
physical  chemistry  in  physiological  work. 
Part  II  presents  the  subject  in  its  physiological  aspects. 
The  literature  is  reviewed  and  digested  up  to  date. 

On  the  Natm«  of  the  Stimulus  which  Causes 
the  Change  of  Form  in  Polymorphic  Green 
Algae.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXX  (1900),  289- 
317,  Plates  XVII,  XVIII. 

A  study  of  the  behavior  of  a  polymorphic  Stigeoclonium 
when  grown  in  nutrient  media  of  differing  osmotic 
pressures.  It  is  shown  that  varying  the  proportions  of 
constituent  salts  does  not  cause  a  change  in  form,  but 
variations  in  the  osmotic  pressure  of  the  medium 
(whether  accompanied  or  not  by  change  in  proportion 
of  salts)  does  bring  about  a  prompt  response  in  the 
organism.  The  form  of  the  plant  seems  to  be  controlled 
entirely  by  osmotic  pressure. 

Further  Notes  on  the  Physiology  of  Polymor- 
phism in  Green  Algae.  Ibid.,  XXXII  (1901), 
292-302. 

The  results  of  experiments  upon  Stigeoclonium  in 
solutions  of  non-electrolytes  and  upon  a  merely  moist 
substratum.  The  results  of  the  previous  paper  are  cor- 
roborated. In  solutions  of  non-electrolytes,  as  in  those 
of  electrolytes,  it  is  a  question  of  the  chemical  nature 
of  the  solutes.  On  moist  clay  and  gelatin  plates  the 
form  of  the  alga  is  determined  by  the  concentration  of 
the  solution  with  which  the  plate  is  moistened.  To 
these  experiments  are  added  the  results  of  determina- 
tions of  the  actual  osmotic  pressure  of  the  mineral 
solutions  previously  used.    These  were  accomplished 


by  the  methods  of  freezing  and  boiling  points.  While 
the  actual  pressure  is  often  different  from  the  calcu- 
lated pressure,  the  discrepancy  lies  always  within  the 
limits  of  the  range  of  sensibility  of  the  organism.  Thus 
the  errors  of  calculation  are  too  small  to  affect  the 
results  of  the  experiments. 

The  Distribution  of  the  Plant  Societies  of  Kent 
County,  Michigan.  Annual  Report  of  the 
State  Geologist  of  Michigan,  1902,  pp.  81- 
103,  Plate  III. 

This  includes  a  topographical  and  glaciological  study 
of  the  county,  together  with  a  description  of  the  several 
plant  societies,  and  a  map  showing  graphically  the  dis- 
tribution of  the  upland  societies.  In  general,  the  work 
seems  to  produce  evidence  in  favor  of  the  idea  that  the 
distribution  of  the  different  societies  is  largely  depend- 
ent ui)on  the  amount  of  water  in  the  soil,  and  dependent 
to  a  very  slight  degree  upon  the  chemical  nature  of  the 
soil  particles. 

The  Distribution  of  the  Upland  Plant  Societies 
of  Kent  County,  Michigan.  Botanical  Ga- 
zette, XXXV  (1903),  36-55,  with  map. 

A  somewhat  more  technical  report  of  a  portion  of  the 
survey  presented  in  the  above  paper. 


Otis  William  Caldwell  [1897-99],  As- 
sistant in  Botany ;  Professor  of  Botany, 
State  Normal  School,  Charleston,  111. 

On  the  Life  History  of  Lemna  minor.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXVII 
(1899),  37-66,  59  text-figures. 

A  study  of  the  sporophyte  and  its  vegetative  multipli- 
cation, the  organogeny  of  the  much  reduced  flower,  the 
development  of  the  microspores  and  their  germina- 
tion, the  development  of  carpel,  ovule,  megaspore,  and 
female  gametophyte,  fertilization,  and  formation  of 
the  embryo ;  together  with  ecological  notes. 


William  Dayton  Mebbell  [1897-99], 
Assistant  in  Botany;  Instructor  in 
Botany,  University  of  Rochester. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  Silphium. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXIX 
(1900),  99-133,  7  plates. 

A  study  of  the  organogeny  of  the  flower,  the  develop- 
ment of  the  megaspore  and  embryo  sac,  the  develop- 
ment of  microspores,  the  male  gametophyte,  the  act  of 
fertilization,  and  the  development  of  the  embryo. 

William  L.  Bbay,  Ph.D.  1898;  Profes- 
sor of  Botany,  University  of  Texas. 

The  Ecological  Relations  of  the  Vegetation  of 
Western  Texas.   Doctor's  thesis.   Botanical 


152 


Publications 


Gazette,  XXXII  (1901),  99-123,  195-217, 
262-291,  24  half-tone  illustrations. 

A  discussion  of  floral  elements,  climatic  relations, 
physiographic  and  geologic  provinces,  and  the  ecologic 
characters  of  the  flora ;  together  with  a  statement  of 
the  profound  changes  that  are  being  brought  about  by 


Otis  William  Caldwell,  Ph.D.  1898. 
(See  above.) 

John  Gaylord  Coulter,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Instructor  in  Botany,  Government 
Normal  School,  Manila,  P.  I. 

A  Morphological  Study  of  Slum.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

Deals  with  spermatogenesis,  oogenesis,  and  the  devel- 
opment of  the  embryo. 

Henry  Chandler  Cowles,  Ph.D.  1898. 
(See  above.) 

Theodore  Christian  Frye,  Ph.D.  1902; 
Acting  Professor  of  Biology,  Morning- 
side  College,  Sioux  City,  Iowa. 

Development  of  the  Pollen  in  Some  Asclepia- 
daceae.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXXII  (1901), 
325-331, 1  plate. 

A  study  of  various  species  of  Asclepias  and  Acerates 
to  discover  the  development  of  pollen  grains  in  rela- 
tion to  the  pollinium, 

A  Morphological  Study  of  Certain  Asclepiada- 
ceae.  Doctor's  thesis,  ibid.,  XXXIV  (1902), 
389-413,  3  plates. 

The  result  of  the  investigation  of  Asclepiai  Cornuti, 
and  the  extension  of  the  observations  to  nine  other 
closely  related  species.  It  includes  chiefly  (1)  the 
development  of  the  floral  organs  in  general  with 
special  attention  to  the  formation  of  the  horn  and 
hood ;  (2)  the  development  of  the  ovules  and  egg,  with 
reference  to  the  reported  absence  of  nucellus  and 
potential  megaspores  in  Cynanchum ;  (3)  fertilization, 
with  reference  to  the  fate  of  the  male  nuclei ;  (4)  the 
formation  of  endosperm  as  contrasted  with  that  of 
Casuarina  and  the  formation  of  flat  seed  with  its  ane- 
mophilous  adaptations;  (5)  the  development  of  the 
double- walled  pod. 

Anstruther  Abercrombie  Lawson,  Ph.D. 
1901;  Assistant  in  Botany,  Leland 
Stanford  Junior  University. 

Studies  in  the  Morphology  of  the  Nucleus. 
Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

An  attempt  to  demonstrate  that  the  so-called  nuclear 
membrane  may  or  may  not  be  present,  and  that  it  is 
not  to  be  regarded  as  an  essential  feature  of  the 
nucleus. 


Origin  of  the  Cones  of  the  Multipolar  Spindle 
in  Gladiolus.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXX 
(1900),  145-153, 1  double  plate. 

Burton  Edward  Livingston,  Ph.D. 
1901.      (See  above.) 

Florence  May  Lyon,  Ph.D.  1901. 
(See  above.) 

William  Dayton  Merrell,  Ph.D. 
1898.     (See  above.) 

N.  L.  T.  Nelson,  Ph.D.  1899 ;  Instructor  in 
Botany,  Normal  and  High  School,  St. 
Louis,  Mo. 

A  Kevision  of  the  Genus  Solanum.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished. 

James  Bertram  Overton,  Ph.D.  1901; 
Professor  of  Botany,  Illinois  College, 
Jacksonville,  Illinois. 

Parthenogenesis  in  Thalictrum  purpurascens. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXXIII 
(1902),  36a-375,  2  plates. 

Treats  of  the  development  of  the  megaspore  and  its 
germination,  and  the  partheno^enetic  occurrence  of 
embrjros ;  followed  by  a  general  discussion  of  partheno- 
genesis in  Angiosperms. 

R.  Wilson  Smith,  Ph.D.  1899;  Pro- 
f essor  of  Biology,  McMaster  University, 
Toronto. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  the  Pon- 
tederiaceae.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXV 
(1898),  324-337,  2  plates. 

Chiefly  a  study  of  Eichhornia  crassipes  as  to  the  devel- 
opment of  its  microspores  and  megaspores ;  followed 
by  a  briefer  statement  of  results  in  connection  with 
Pontederia  cordata  and  Heteranthera  graminis. 

Structure  and  Development  of  the  Sporophylls 
and  Sporangia  of  Isoetes.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Ibid.,  XXIX  (1900),  225-258,  323-346,  7 
plates. 

The  study  of  a  problematical  group,  to  clear  up  its 
homologies,  and  especially  to  examine  the  foundation 
of  a  claim  made  in  recent  years  that  it  may  have  given 


Department  of  Botany 


153 


rise  to  the  Monocotyledons.  The  topics  considered 
are  as  follows :  The  stem,  the  leaf,  and  ligule,  the  spo- 
rangium, later  development  of  microsporangia  and 
megasporangia,  the  succession  of  sporophylls,  hom- 
ology of  the  archesporium,  relations  of  the  velum,  and 
affinities  of  Isoetes. 

The  Achromatic  Spindle  in  the  Spore-Mother 
Cells  of  Osmunda  regalis.  Ibid.,  XXX 
(1900),  361-377, 1  plate. 

A  cytological  study  dealing  with  the  origin,  structure, 
and  behavior  of  the  achromatic  spindle. 


Frank  Lincoln  Stevens,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Professor  of  Biology,  College  of  Agri- 
culture and  Mechanic  Arts,  Raleigh, 
North  Carolina. 

The  Effect  of  Aqueous  Solutions  upon  the 
Germination  of  Fungus  Spores.  Botanical 
Gazette,  XXVI  (1898),  377^06. 

The  results  of  numerous  culture  experiments  are  pre- 
sented in  a  series  of  tables,  and  in  a  brief  summary  the 
relative  toxic  effects  of  different  chemical  substances 
upon  various  fungi  are  cited. 

The  Compound  Oosphere  of  Albugo  Bliti. 
Doctor's  thesis.  Ibid.,  XXVIII  (1899),  149- 
176,  225-245,  5  plates. 

The  original  demonstration  of  multinucleate  fusion  in 
connection  with  fertilization,  the  multinucleate  egg 
being  given  the  name  "compound  oosphere."  The 
sub-titles  are  as  follows:  development  of  oogonium 
and  antheridium,  differentiation  of  compound  oos- 
phere, simultaneous  mitosis  in  oogonium,  maturation 
of  compound  oosphere  and  antheridium,  fertilization, 
and  maturation  of  oospore. 

Abram  H.  Conrad,  Graduate  student. 

A  Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  Quercus. 
Botanical  Gazette,  XXIX  (1900),  408-418, 
2  plates. 

A  study  of  the  stamens  and  pollen,  the  ovule,  the  arch- 
esporium, the  embryo  sac,  the  endosperm,  and  the 
embryo. 

George  M.  Holferty,  Graduate  student. 

Ovule  and  Embryo  of  Potamogeton  natans. 
Botanical  Gazette,  XXXI  (1901),  339-346, 
2  plates,  1  text  figure. 

A  study  of  the  spikes,  flowers,  ovule,  archesporium, 
megaspore,  female  gametophyte,  and  embryo. 

William  Jesse  Good  Land,  Graduate 
student. 

Double  Fertilization  in  Compositse.  Botani- 
cal Gazette,  XXX  (1900),  252-260,  2  plates. 

A  description  of  the  discovery  of  doable  fertilization  in 
ErigBron  and  Silphium. 


A.  C.  Life,  Graduate  student. 

The  Tuber-like  Rootlets  of  Cycas  revoluta. 

Botanical  Gazette,  XXXI  (1901),  265-271, 

10  text  figures. 

A  study  of  the  structural  relations  between  the  rootlets 
of  Cycas  and  the  algce  and  fungi  which  are  associated 
with  the  development  of  the  so-called  tuberous  growths. 


W.  B.  McCallum,  Graduate  student. 

On  the  Nature  of  the  Stimulus  Causing  the 
Change  of  Form  and  Structure  in  Proser- 
pinaca  palustris.  Botanical  Gazette, 
XXXIV  (1902),  93-108. 

The  plant  is  characterized  by  developing  submerged  and 
aerial  leaves  differing  extremely  in  form  and  anatomi- 
cal structure.  The  shoot  may  be  made  to  develop 
either  type  at  will  by  allowing  the  leaf  primordia  to 
develop  in  water  or  in  air.  A  long  series  of  experi- 
ments was  undertaken  to  analyze  the  physiological 
conditions  presented  by  the  water  medium  to  the  plant, 
and  the  effect  of  each  of  these  on  the  behavior  of  the 
primordia. 


John  H.  Sohaffner,  Graduate  student. 

Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  Sagittaria 
variabilis.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXIII 
(1897),  252-273,  7  plates. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  the  male  cell,  egg,  and 
embryo,  and  the  phenomena  connected  with  fertiliza- 
tion. 

Contribution  to  the  Life  History  of  Lilium 
philadelphiacum :  the  Division  of  the  Ma- 
crospore  Nucleus.    Ibid.,  430-452,  3  plates. 

Based  upon  an  account  of  the  results  of  the  author's 
investigation  there  is  a  general  discussion  of  chromo- 
somes, nucleoli,  and  cytoplasmic  radiation,  and 
spindle  threads. 

The  Development  of  the  Stamens  and  Carpels 
of  Typha  latifolia.  Ibid.,  XXIV  (1897), 
93-102,  3  plates. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  stamens,  microspores, 
male  gametophyte,  carpel,  megaspore,  and  female 
gametophyte. 


George  Harrison  Shull,  Graduate  stu- 
dent. 

Some   Plant  Abnormalities.    Botanical    Ga- 
zette, XXXII  (1901),  343-355,  36  figures. 

An  account  of  abnormal  development  in  the  leaves  of 
Pelargonium  and  Hicoria;  and  in  the  flowers  otLathy- 
ru8  odoratus  and  two  species  of  Clematis. 


154 


Publications 


Laetitia  Morris  Snow,  Graduate  student. 

Some  Notes  on  the  Ecology  of  the  Delaware 
Coast.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXXII  (1901), 
384-406. 

A  study  of  the  nnnsual  ecological  conditions  obtaining 
along  the  Atlantic  coast  from  Cape  Henlopen  to  Reho- 
both  bay,  a  region  with  no  outlying  chain  of  islands. 
The  plant  formations  are  considered  under  the  follow- 
ing heads:  Beach,  Dune,  Swamp  and  Meadow,  Heath, 
Thicket,  and  Forest. 

Jonathan  Edward  Webb,  Graduate  stu- 
dent. 

A  Morphological  Study  of  the  Flower  and 
Embryo  of  Spiraea.  Botanical  Gazette, 
XXXIII  (1902),  451-460,  28  figures. 

Treats  of  the  organogeny  of  the  flower,  the  microspo- 
rangium,  the  megasporangium,  and  the  embryo. 


A    Morphological    Study   of   Thuya.     Ibid., 
XXXIV  (1902),  249-259,  2  plates. 

A  study  of  the  development  of  the  pollen  tube  and  of 
the  archegonium,  and  the  processes  connected  with 
fertilization. 


E.  B.  CoPELAND,  Ph.D. 
dent. 


Research   stu- 


The  Rise  of  the  Transpiration  Stream:  An 
Historical  and  Critical  Discussion.  Botani- 
cal Gazette,  XXXIV  (1902),  161-193,  260- 
283. 

A  general  discussion  of  the  cause  of  the  so-called 
"  ascent  of  sap,"  based  upon  a  large  number  of  origi- 
nal experiments. 


XXVIII.    PATHOLOGY  AND  BACTERIOLOGY 


LUDVIG  Hektoen  [1901],  Professor  and 
Head  of  the  Department  of  Pathology 
and  Bacteriology. 

Experimental  Bacillary  Cirrhosis  of  the  Liver. 
Journal  of  Pathology  and  Bacteriology, 
VII  (1901),  214-220. 

Production  of  cirrhosis  of  the  liver  by  a  bacillus  of 
pseudo-diphtheria  group. 

The  Extension  of  Aortic  Aneurysms  Into  and 
Between  the  Walls  of  the  Heart  and  Dis- 
secting Aneurysm  of  the  Heart.  Trans- 
actions of  the  Association  of  American 
Physicians,  XVI  (1901),  127-139. 

Description  of  several  illustrative  cases. 

Actinomycosis  of  the  Respiratory  Tract.  In- 
ternational Clinics,  II  (1901),  94-104. 

A  general  summary  of  this  localization  of  actinomy- 
cosis. 

The  American  Text-Book  of  Pathology.  Svo, 
1245.  Philadelphia,  W.  B.  Saunders  &  Co., 
1901.  Co-editor,  and  contributor  of  the 
sections  on  "General  Pathological  Pro- 
cesses," 37-160;  "  Diseases  of  the  Ductless 
Glands,"  890-924;  "Diseases  of  the  Bones 
and  Joints,"  662-723. 

Pathology.  Progressive  Medicine,  1902,  277- 
362. 

A  yearly  review  of  progress. 


Linnaeus  as  a  Physician.  Journal  of  the 
American  Medical  Association,  XXXIX 
(1902),  593-598. 

Sketch  of  some  of  the  phases  of  the  medical  work  and 
writings  of  Linneeus. 

Absorption  and  Incrustation  of  Elastic  Fibers. 
Journal  of  Medical  Research,  VII  (1902), 
159-165. 

A  study  of  changes  in  elastic  fibers  within  giant  cells 
in  inflammatory  foci. 


Edwin  Oakes  Jordan  [1892 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Bacteriology. 

The  Principles  of  Bacteriology.  Translation 
from  the  German  of  Dr.  Ferdinand  Hueppe. 
Svo,  x-l-467.  Chicago,  Open  Court  Pub- 
lishing Co.,  1899. 

The  Habits  and  Development  of  the  Newt. 
With  plates.  Journal  of  Morphology,  VIII 
(1893),  269-366. 

Particular  attention  is  paid  to  the  earlier  stages  of 
development,  and  especially  to  the  nuclear  phenomena 
accompanying  maturation  and  fertilization. 

On  the  Cleavage  of  the  Amphibian  Ova.  In 
collaboration  with  A.  C.  Eycleshymer.  Ibid., 
IX  (1894),  407-416. 

A  study  of  the  various  cleavage  forms  found  in  the  eggs 
of  Amblystoma,  Diemyctylus  and  other  amphibia. 


Department  of  Pathology  and  Bacteriology 


155 


The  Identification  of  the  Typhoid  Fever  Bacil- 
lus. Journal  of  the  American  Medical  As- 
sociation,  XXIII  (1894),  931-935. 

On  Some  Conditions  Affecting  the  Behavior  of 
the  Typhoid  Bacillus  in  Water.  Medical 
News,  LXVII  (1895),  337. 

A  study  of  the  vitality  of  different  races  of  the  typhoid 
bacillus  in  distilled  water  and  in  water  from  Lake 
Michigan. 

The  "Inheritance"  of  Certain  Bacterial  Dis- 
eases. Chicago  Medical  Recorder,  XV 
(1898),  82-86. 

The  Production  of  Fluorescent  Pigment  by 
Bacteria.  Botanical  Gazette,  XXVII  (1899), 
19-36. 

Precise  description  of  six  cultures  of  fluorescent  bacte- 
ria used  in  the  experiments.  Exi)eriments  deal  with : 
the  influence  of  the  chemical  composition  of  the 
medium;  influence  of  concentration  of  the  medium; 
influence  of  light  upon  pigment  production ;  influence 
of  reaction  of  the  medium ;  etc.  A  list  of  fluorescent 
bacteria  is  appended. 

The  Death  Rate  from  Diphtheria  in  the  Large 
Cities  of  the  United  States.  Philadelphia 
Medical  Journal,  February  18, 1899, 11. 

A  comparison  of  conditions  existing  in  some  of  the 
cities  of  the  United  States  and  in  London,  Paris,  and 
some  German  towns  before  and  since  the  introduction 
of  antitoxin  treatment.  Illustrated  by  table  showing 
the  improvement  since  its  introduction. 

Bacillus  Pyocyaneus  and  Its  Pigments.  Jour- 
nal of  Experimental  Medicine,  IV  (1899), 
627-647. 

A  comparative  examination  of  a  number  of  cultures  of 
Bacillus  pyocyaneus  with  special  reference  to  the 
existence  of  different  races. 

Some  Observations  Upon  the  Bacterial  Self- 
Purification  of  Streams.  Ibid.,  V  (1900), 
271-315. 

The  methods  employed  and  results  obtained  during  an 
investigation  of  the  waters  of  the  Illinois  river  and  its 
tributaries,  made  for  the  Sanitary  District  of  Chicago. 
The  results  are  presented  in  tabular  form  and  some 
general  considerations  drawn  from  them. 

On  the  Detection  of  Bacillus  Coli  Communis 
in  Water.  Journal  of  the  Boston  Society 
of  Medical  Sciences,  IV  (1900),  153-182. 

A  comparison  of  the  fermentation  tube  method  of 
detection  with  that  of  acid  carbol-broth,  to  the  advan- 
tage of  the  latter. 

Notes  on  Bacterial  Water  Analysis.  In  col- 
laboration with  E.  E  Irons.  Reports  and 
Paper  of  the  American  Public  Health 
Association,  XXV  (1900),  564-570. 

Some  of  the  practical  questions  connected  with  water 
analysis,  i.  e..  Methods  of  Transpiortation,  especial 
reference  being  had  to  ice-packing;  Dilution,  intro- 
ducing a  plea  for  more  uniform  methods;  and  Nutri- 
ent media,  including  tables  in  which  various  standard 
media  are  compared. 


The  Relative  Abundance  of  Bacillus  Coli  Com- 
munis in  River  Water  as  an  Indication  of 
the  Self-Purification  of  Streams.  Journal 
of  Hygiene,  I,  No.  3  (1901),  293-320. 

An  examination  of  the  evidence  afforded  as  to  the 
so-called  self-puriflcation  of  streams  by  the  relative 
abundance  of  one  of  the  most  characteristic  of  the 
known  sewage  bacteria. 

Notes  on  the  Occurrence  and  Habitat  of  Ano- 
pheles Punctipennis  and  Anopheles  Maculi- 
pennis  in  the  Valley  of  the  Androscoggin. 
Plate.  Journal  of  Medical  Research,  VII 
(1902),  1-24. 

The  Self-Purification  of  Rivers.  2  maps.  The 
University  of  Chicago  Decennial  Publica- 
tions, First  Series,  Vol.  X,  79-89. 

A  statement  concerning  the  methods  employed  and 
the  results  obtained  in  a  study  of  the  Illinois  river  and 
its  tributaries,  together  with  some  conclusions  as  to 
the  kind  of  evidence  best  adapted  to  show  the  existence 
of  a  purifying  process. 

On  the  Nature  of  Pyocyanolysin.  Transac- 
tions of  the  Chicago  Pathological  Society, 
V  (1902),  175-178. 

Typhoid  Fever,  and  Water  Supply  in  Chicago. 
Journal  of  the  American  Medical  Associa- 
tion, XXXIX  (1902),  1661-1566. 

Reviews  of 

Frankland,  Percy  and  Frankland,  Grace,  Pas- 
teur.   Science,  New  Series,  VII  (1898),  836. 

Migula,  System  der  Bakterien,  II.  Botanical 
Gazette,  XXIX  (1900),  146-148. 

Newman,  Bacteria.    Ibid.,  XI  (1900),  70. 

H.  Gideon  Wells  [1901 — ],  Instructor 
in  Pathology. 

Reversibility  of  Enzymes  and  Its  Application 
in  Physiologic  and  Pathologic  Processes. 
Journal  of  the  American  Medical  Associa- 
tion, XXXVIII  (1902),  220-223. 

The  Pathology  of  the  Healed  Fibrous  Adhe- 
sions of  the  Pericardium.  American  Jour- 
nal of  the  Medical  Sciences,  CXXIII  (1902), 
241-261. 

Studies  in  Fat  Necrosis.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  Vol.  X, 
197-223. 

A  series  of  exiierimental  studies  on  the  pathogenesis 
of  intra-abdominal  fat  necrosis,  of  the  type  foflowing 
pancreatic  lesions,  based  upon  the  observation  that 


156 


Publications 


the  typical  process  can  be  produced  experimentally 
with  dried  extracts  of  the  pancreas.  This  has  given 
opportunity  for  control  of  conditions  which  cannot 
be  attained  by  the  methods  previously  used,  making  it 
possible  to  approach  the  question  of  the  causative  fac- 
tor in  an  exact  manner.  The  study  of  the  thermal  death- 
point  of  the  necrosis-producing  element  of  the  pancre- 
atic extract  shows  it  to  be  in  all  probability  a  ferment. 
The  order  of  development  of  the  changes  in  the 
lesions  indicates  that  the  necrosis  is  primary  and  the 
fat-splitting  secondary. 

Lymphoma.   Reference  Handbook  of  Medical 
Science,  V  (1902),  663-664. 


William  Buchanan  Wherey  [1901 — ], 
Associate  in  Bacteriology. 

The  Distribution  of  Segmentation  and  Frag- 
mentation in  the  Myocardium.  Transac- 
tions of  the  Chicago  Pathological  Society, 
IV  (1901),  133-137. 

A  Case  of  So-called  Malignant  Carbuncle 
(Staphylococcus)  of  the  Upper  Lip,  Fol- 
lowed by  Pyaemia.  American  Medicine, 
III  (1902),  28-30. 

Experiments  on  the  Permeability  of  the 
Pasteur  -  Chambelard  Bougie  to  Bacteria  of 
Small  Size.  Journal  of  Medical  Research, 
VIII  (1902),  322-328. 

Ernest  Edward  Irons  [1901 — ],  Assist- 
ant in  Bacteriology. 

Some  Observations  on  Methods  for  the  Detec- 
tion of  B  coli  communis  in  Water.  Reports 
and  Papers  of  the  American  Public  Health 
Association,  XXVI  (1900),  310-314. 


Notes  on  Bacterial  Water  Analysis.  In  col- 
laboration with  E.  O.  Jordan.    (See  above.) 

Neutral-Red  in  the  Routine  Examination  of 
Water.  Journal  of  Hygiene,  II  (1902),  314- 
319. 

Mary  Hefferan  [1902 — ],  Curator  of 
the  Bacteriological  Museum. 

A  New  Chromogenic  Micrococcus.    Botanical 

Gazette,  XXX  (1900),  261-272. 
Variation  in  the  Teeth  of  Nereis.    Biological 

Bulletin,  II  (1900),  129-143. 
Experiments  in  Grafting  Hydra.    Archiv  filr 

Entwickelungsmechanik,  XIII  (1902),  565- 

587. 
An  Unusual  Bacterial  Grouping.    Centralblatt 

filr  Bakteriologie,  VIII  (1902).    Abstract. 

Transactions  of  the  Chicago  Pathological 

Society,  V  (1902),  63-67. 

Howell  Emlyn  Da  vies  [1900-1901],  As- 
sistant in  Bacteriology. 

The  Occurrence  of  the  Typhoid  Bacillus  in  the 
Urine  of  Typhoid  Fever  Patients.  Doctor's 
thesis.    Unpublished.  • 

Review  of 

Beijerinck.  Ueber  Regeneration  der  Sporenbil- 
dung  bei  Alkoholhefen,  wo  diese  Funktion 
im  Verschwinden  begriffen  ist.  Botanical 
Gazette,  XXVII  (1899),  488-489. 


XLI.    OLD  TESTAMENT  LITERATURE  AND  INTERPRETATION 

(See  above,  page  39,  under  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatm-es) 


XLII.    NEW  TESTAMENT  LITERATURE  AND  INTERPRETATION 
(See  above,  page  46,  under  Biblical  and  Patristic  Greek) 


XLIII.    BIBLICAL  THEOLOGY 

(See  under  Semitic  Languages  and  Literatures,  and  Biblical  and  Patristic  Greek) 


Depabtment  of  Systematic  Theology 


157 


XLIV.    SYSTEMATIC  THEOLOGY 


Geoege  Bubman  Fosteb  [1895 — ],  Pro- 
fessor of  Systematic  Theology. 

The  Theological  Training  of  the  Times.  Bib- 
lical World,  IX  (1896),  23-25. 

The  Influence  of  Jesus  on  the  Doctrine  of  God. 
Ibid.,  XI  (1898),  306-318. 

Kaftan's  Dogmatik.  American  Journal  of 
Theology,  II  (1898),  802-827. 

Reviews  of 

Kahler,  Der  sogenannte  historische  Jesus  und 

der  geschichtliche  biblische  Christus.  Ibid., 

I  (1897),  1079-1082. 

Strong,  Christian  Ethics.    Ibid.,  1089-1093. 

Kaftan,  Das  Christentum  und  Nietzsches  Her- 
renmoral.    Ibid.,  II  (1898),  725-726. 

Domer,  Grundriss  der  Dogmengeschichte. 
Ibid.,  IV  (1900),  864. 

Frank,  Geschichte  und  Kritik  der  neueren 
Theologie.    Ibid.,  62^-630. 

Garvie,  Kitschelian  Theology.    Ibid.,  630-632. 

Liihr,  1st  eine  religionlose  Moral  moglich? 
Ibid.,  462^63. 

Schmidt,  Christliche  Dogmatik.    Ibid.,  443-4. 

Vischer,  Ritschl's  Anschauung  vom  evangeli- 
schen  Glauben  und  Leben.    Ibid.,  807-808. 

Gebald  Bibney  Smith  [1900 — ],  In- 
structor in  Systematic  Theology. 

Practical  Theology:  A  Neglected  Field  in 
Theological  Education.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First 
Series,  III,  Part  I. 

Reviews  of 

Aall,  Geschichte  der  Logosidee  in  der  christ- 

lichen  Litteratur.    American  Journal  of 

Theology,  V  (1901),  175-178. 

Brewster,  Aspects  of  Revelation.    Ibid.,  826-7. 
Denio,  The  Supreme  Leader.    Ibid.,  188-189. 
Herrmann,  Ethik.    Ibid.,  VI  (1902),  173-175. 
Domer,  Grundriss  der  Encyclopadie  der  Theo- 
logie.   Ibid.,  401-402. 


*Geobge  Washington  NoBTHBUP  [1892 — 
1900],  Professor  and  head  of  the 
Department  of  Systematic  Theology. 

The  Fatherhood  of  God.  American  Journal 
of  Theology,  V  (1901),  473-495. 

The  Sovereignty  of  God.  12mo.  Part  I,  144 
pp.;  Part  II,  pp.  65-97;  Part  III,  61  pp. 
A  Discussion  with  Professor  Robert  Watts. 
Louisville,  Baptist  Book  Concern,  1894. 

*Ezekiel  Gilman  Robinson  [1892-4], 
Professor  of  Ethics  and  Apologetics. 

Training  Men  to  Preach.  Homiletic  Review, 
XXV  (1893),  104-108. 

Christian  Evidences.  8vo,  159.  Boston,  Silver, 
Burdett,  &  Co.    1895, 

Cabl  Delos  Case,  Ph.D.  1899;  Clergy- 
man.  First  Baptist  Church,  Terre  Haute, 
Indiana. 

The  Incarnation  and  Modem  Thought.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpubhshed. 

The  Introduction  deals  with  the  modern  tendency  to 
minimize  the  philosopical  elements  in  Christology, 
and  the  manifest  need  of  a  fresh  formulation  of  Chris- 
tian teaching  in  regard  to  the  person  of  Christ.  Part  I 
deals  with  the  New  Testament  criteria  for  a  Christology 
as  derived  from  the  Christology  of  Christ,  of  Paul,  of 
the  author  of  the  epistle  to  the  Hebrews,  and  of  the 
Evangelists.  Part  II  deals  with  the  constructive  out- 
lines of  a  possible  Christology  as  related  to  the  ideas 
of  divine  immanence,  divine  and  human  kinship,  race 
solidarity,  the  evolutionary  process,  psychological 
principles,  the  fatherhood  of  God,  and  the  life  of  the 
Spirit. 

Geoege  Cboss,  Ph.D.  1900;  Professor 
of  History,  McMaster  University,  To- 
ronto. 

The  Theology  of  Schleiermacher.  An  Inter- 
pretation and  an  Estimate.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpubhshed. 

Jesus'  Thought  of  Himself.  Homiletical  Re- 
view, XXIX  (1895),  387-392. 

An  attempt  to  restate  the  doctrine  of  the  person  of 
Christ  by  an  examination  of  his  self-consciousness 
according  to  the  expressions  of  it  ascribed  to  himself. 


158 


Publications 


JuLLiEN  AvEEY  Herriok,  Ph.D.  1900; 
Clergyman,  Bay  City,  Mich. 

The  Development  and  Significance  of  the 
Leben  Jesu  Literature.  Doctor's  thesis. 
Unpublished. 

A  historical  study  of  Biblical  criticism  culminating  in 
the  modern  Life  of  Christ  with  an  estimate  of  its  sig- 
nificance for  apologetics  and  dogmatics. 

LORAN  D.  OsBOEN,  Ph.D.  1900;  Clergy- 
man, First  Baptist  Church,  Blooming- 
ton,   111. 

The  Recovery  and  Restatement  of  the  Gospel. 
Doctor's  thesis.    In  press. 

Part  I.  The  modern  spirit  and  its  search  for  reality ; 
the  historical  obscuration  and  recovery  of  the  Gospel ; 
the  recovered  gospel  of  the  New  Testament.  Part  II. 
The  Gospel  and  Theology :  the  Gospel  restated. 

Arthur  Maxson  Smith,  Ph.D.  1901; 
President  Oahu  College,  Honolulu, 
H.  I. 


The  Contribution  of  Thomas  Aquinas  to  Mod- 
ern Individualism.  Doctor's  thesis.  Un- 
published. 

The  germ  of  the  Kantian  and  post  Kantian  philosoph- 
ical and  religious  point  of  view  and  method  is  shown  to 
have  existed  in  Thomas  Aquinas's  fundamental  distinc- 
tions between  faith  and  reason.  The  Lutheran  Refor- 
mation, Protestant  dogma,  and  the  development  of 
modern  inductive  science,  are  shown  to  be  the  necessary 
and  logical  sequence  of  Thomas's  fundamental  proposi- 
tions as  to  Faith,  Reason,  and  the  Church.  The  con- 
clusion is  that  at  the  moment  of  complete  systemiza- 
tion  of  the  Catholic  dogma,  it  contained  in  the  germ 
the  elements  of  its  own  destruction  and  of  a  new 
growth,  namely,  the  Protestantism,  the  philosophical 
and  scientific  procedure  of  modern  times. 


Hiram  VanKirk,  Ph.D.  1900;  Dean  of 
the  Berkeley  Bible  Seminary,  Berkeley, 
Calif. 

The  Historical  Theology  of  the  Disciples  of 
Christ.    Doctor's  thesis.    Unpublished. 

An  attempt  to  trace  the  sources  of  the  factors  making 
up  the  doctrinal  tenets  of  that  denomination  which 
arose  in  America  in  the  first  quarter  of  the  nineteenth 
century  under  the  leadership  of  Alexander  Campbell : 
also  the  working  out  of  these  factors  under  the  avowed 
principles  of  Christian  union  and  the  restoration  of 
primitive  Christianity  in  the  history  of  the  denomina- 
tion. 


XLV.    CHURCH  HISTORY 


Eri  Baker  Hulbert  [1892 — ],  Professor 
and  Head  of  the  Department  of  Church 
History. 

Revieios  of 

Liebermann,  Ueber  die  Leges  Edwardi  Con- 
fessoris.  American  Journal  of  Theology, 
I  (1897),  828-829. 

Wakeman,  Introduction  to  the  History  of  the 
Church  of  England.    Ibid.,  1051-1059. 

Mason,  The  Mission  of  St.  Augustine  to  Eng- 
land.   Ibid.,  II  (1898),  426-427. 

Clark,  The  Anglican  Reformation.  Ibid.,  430- 
432. 

Church,  Occasional  Papers.    Ibid.,  734-735. 

Biittgenbach,  Geschichte  des  Kreuzes  vor  und 
nach  Golgatha;  and  Seymoiu:,  The  Cross  in 
Tradition,  History,  and  Art.  Ibid.,  Ill 
(1899),  171-172. 


Kinloch,  Studies  in  the  Scottish  Ecclesiastical 
History  in  the  Seventeenth  and  Eighteenth 
Centmies.    Ibid.,  389-390. 

Gee,  The  Elizabethan  Clergy  and  their  Settle- 
ment of  ReUgion.    Ibid.,  808-809. 

Fairbairn,  Catholicism,  Roman,  and  Anglican; 
Sanday,  The  Conception  of  the  Priesthood 
in  the  Early  Church  and  in  the  Church  of 
England.    Ibid.,  837-841. 

Boissier,  La  fin  du  paganisme.    Ibid.,  854-855. 

Griffes,  The  Pilgrims  in  their  Three  Homes. 
Ibid.,  855-856. 

Gasquet,  The  Eve  of  the  Reformation.  Ibid. 
V  (1901),  586-588. 

Hunt,  The  English  Church  from  its  Foimda- 
tion  to  the  Norman  Conquest.  Ibid.,  170- 
171. 

Thirreau-Dangin,  La  renaissance  catholique  en 
Angleterre.    Ibid.,  810-811. 


Department  of  Church  History 


159 


Franklin  Johnson  [1892 — ],  Professor  of 
Church  History  and  Homiletics. 

Quotations  of  the  New  Testament  from  the 
Old,  Considered  in  the  Light  of  General 
Literature.  8vo,  xix  +  409.  Philadelphia, 
American  Baptist  Publication  Society,  1896. 

Articles  on  " Apocatastesis,"  "Apostolic  Suc- 
cession," "Atonement,"  "  Consubstantia- 
tion,"  "Christology,"  "  Evidences  of  Chris- 
tianity," "  Holy  Ghost,"  "  Higher  Criticism," 
"  Synergism."  New  American  Supplement 
to  the  Encyclopedia  Britannica,  I,  204:- 
205,  28^283;  II,  799-800,  904-905,  1224- 
1226;  III,  944^945,  1600;  IV,  2842-2843. 
1897. 

Introduction  (xi-xiv)  to  Marsh,  The  New  Tes- 
tament Church.  Philadelphia,  Baptist  Pub- 
lication Society,  1898. 

The  Precursors  of  Christian  Science,  pp.  75-84 
in  a  Symposium :  Searchlights  on  Christian 
Science.    Chicago,  Fleming  H.  Revell,  1899. 

The  Atonement:  A  chapter  in  Theology  at 
the  Dawn  of  the  Twentieth  Century,  pp. 
261-273.  Boston,  Small,  Maynard  &  Co., 
1901. 

Have  We  the  Likeness  of  Christ?  With  16 
half-tone  illustrations.  The  University  of 
Chicago  Decennial  Publications,  First  Se- 
ries, III,  Part  1, 1-23. 

A  detailed  refutation  of  the  view  that  is  widely  held 
that  the  representations  of  Christ  in  early  Christian 
art  go  back  to  a  painter  contemporary  with  Christ. 

Reviews  of 

Fisher,  History  of  Christian  Doctrine.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897),  240-243. 

Gothein,  Ignatius  von  Loyola  und  die  Gegen- 

reformation.    Ibid.,  500-502. 
Benson,  Cyprian,  his  Life,  his  Times,  his  Work. 

Ibid.,  II  (1898),  422^26. 
Wilkinson,  Epic  of  Paul.    Ibid.,  715-717. 
Pariset,  L'6tat  et  les  6glises  en  Prusse  sous 

Fred6ric-Guillaume  P'.    Ibid.,  916-917. 
Clos,  Kreuz  und  Grab  Jesu.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1899), 

172-173. 
Stahelin,  Huldreich  Zwingli.    Ibid.,  189-190. 


Brandenburg,  Moritz  von  Sachsen.   Ibid.,  385- 

387. 
Richard,  Philip  Melanchton.    Ibid.,  853-854. 
Wolf,  Deutsche  Geschichte  im  Zeitalter  der 

Gegenreformation.    813-815. 
Haupt,  BeitrSge  zur  Reformationsgeschichte 

der  Reichsstadt  Worms.    Ibid.,  IV  (1900), 

252-253. 
Elze,  Luthers  Reise  nach  Rom.    Ibid.,  669. 
MacCoU,  The  Reformation  Settlement.    Ibid., 

650. 

Mayer,  Anerben  und  Theilungssystem.  907- 
908. 

Kannengieser,  Les  missions  catholiques,  en 
France  et  Allemagne.  Ibid.,  V  (1901),  416- 
417. 

Schmidt,  Zinzendorfs  soziale  Stellung.  Ibid., 
427. 

The  Autobiography  of  Charles  H.  Spurgeon, 
Compiled  by  His  Wife  and  Private  Secre- 
tary.   J6td.,  394r-395. 

Walker,  The  Reformation.    Ibid.,  589-592. 

Sabatier,  Collection  de  documents  pour  I'his- 
toire  religieuse  et  litt6raire  du  moyen  ftge. 
Ibid.,  572-576. 

Nippold,  The  Papacy  in  the  Nineteenth  Cen- 
tury.   Ibid.,  796-798. 

John  W.  Monoriep  [1894 — ],  Associate 
Professor  of  Church  History. 

A  Short  History  of  the  Christian  Chiuch. 
12mo,  456.  Fleming  H.  Revell,  New  York, 
1902. 

Reviews  of 

Vincent,  The  Age  of  Hildebrand.    American 

Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897),  218-219. 
Lea,  A  History  of  Auricular  Confession  and 

Indulgences  in  the  Latin  Church.    Ibid., 

829-832. 
Hauck,  Kirchengeschichte  Deutschlands.  Ibid., 

1065-1066. 
Wells,  The  Age  of  Charlemagne.     Ibid.,  II 

(1898),  912. 


160 


Publications 


Waterman,  The  Post-Apostolic  Age.  Ibid., 
Ill  (1899),  795-796. 

Workman,  The  Church  of  the  West  in  the  Mid- 
dle Ages.    Ibid.,  800-801. 

Lloyd,  The  Philosophy  of  History.  Ibid.y  IV 
(1900),  562-564. 

Newman,  A  Manual  of  Chiurch  History.    Ibid., 

851-852. 
Brandl,  Die  Renaissance  in  Florenz  und  Rom. 

Ibid.,  906. 

Doumergue,  Jean  Calvin.  Ibid.,  V  (1901),  164- 
166. 

Hurst,  A  History  of  the  Christian  Church. 
Ibid.,  576-578. 

Warren  Palmer  Behan,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Clergyman,  Wealthy  Avenue  Baptist 
Church,  Grand  Rapids,  Mich. 

The  Social  Work  of  the  Church  in  Plymouth 
Colony,  Massachusetts,  1620-1691.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.     Unpublished. 

A  combined  analytical  and  constructive  study  from 
original  manuscripts  where  accessible,  of  the  influence 
of  the  Plymouth  Colony  Church  upon  contemporary 
social  life.  Part  I,  the  theories  of  the  religious  leaders 
of  the  Colony  concerning  the  elements  of  social  welfare, 
the  forces  to  be  depended  upon  in  the  realization  of 
this  welfare,  and  the  institutions  through  which  these 
forces  are  to  operate.  Part  II,  the  practice  of  this 
church  in  its  effect  upon  the  social  life  of  the  church 
membership,  upon  the  state,  the  family,  education, 
economics,  the  poor  and  suffering,  and  upon  the  crimi- 
nal. 


Winfred  Ernest  Garrison,  Ph.D.  1898; 
Clergyman,  St.  Louis,  Mo. 

Alexander  Campbell's  Theology:  Its  Sources 
and  Historical  Setting.  Doctor's  thesis. 
8vo,  302.  St.  Louis,  Christian  Publishing 
Co.,  1900. 

Development  of  the  problem  of  unity;  philosophical 
basis;  theological  heritage;  the  kingdom  of  God; 
authority  and  inspiration ;  faith  and  repentance ;  bap- 
tism ;  the  Holy  Spirit  in  conversion  ancf  regeneration ; 
the  idea  of  God. 

Errett  Gates,  Ph.D.  1902;  Disciples' 
Divinity  House,  Chicago. 

The  Early  Relations  and  Separations  of  Bap- 
tists and  Disciples.  Doctor's  thesis.  Un- 
published. 

The  origin  of  the  Disciples ;  Union  with  the  Baptists ; 
The  sermon  on  the  Law:  The  Debates  with  John 
Walker  and  W,  L.  MacCalla ;  The  Christian  Baptist ; 
The  status  of  Campbell's  fellowship  with  the  Baptists; 
The  spread  of  "  the  ancient  order  of  things"  among  the 
Baptists ;  The  spread  of  "  the  ancient  order  of  things  " 
among  the  Baptists :  causes  and  conditions ;  The  Sepa- 
ration: causes. 

Wallace  StJohn,  Ph.D.  1900;  Clergy- 
man, Franklin,  Ind. 

The  Contest  for  Liberty  of  Conscience  in  Eng- 
land. Doctor's  thesis.  8vo,  155.  The  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Divinity  Studies,  I. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1900. 

The  contest  previous  to  the  Stuarts ;  the  early  Stuart 
period ;  period  of  the  commonwealth;  the  later  Stuart 
period ;  the  period  of  political  agitation. 


XLVI.    HOMILETICS,  CHURCH  POLITY,  AND  PASTORAL  DUTIES 


Galusha  Anderson  [1892 — ],  Professor 
and  Head  of  the  Department  of  Homi- 
letics,  Church  Polity,  and  Pastoral 
Duties. 

The  Supreme  End  of  Theological  Schools.  An 
Address  Delivered  Before  the  Robinson 
Rhetorical  Society  at  the  Semi-Centennial 
of  the  Rochester  Theological  Seminary. 
8vo,  16.    Pamphlet.    1900. 

A  contention  that  the  ultimate  aim  in  theological  teach- 
ing should  not  be  to  make  scholars  but  preachers. 


The  Kingdom  that  Changed  Rulers.  Annual 
Sermon,  Preached  at  the  Twelfth  Annual 
Convention  of  the  Baptist  Yoimg  People's 
Union  of  America,  in  Providence,  R.  I.  8vo, 
15.    Pamphlet.    1902. 

The  Elements  of  Chrysostom's  Power  as  a 
Preacher.  The  University  of  Chicago  De- 
cennial Publications,  First  Series,  Vol.  Ill, 
Part  2,  51-66. 

Beviews  of 

Briggs,  The  One  Flock  of  Christ.  American 
Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897),  267-270. 


Depabtment  op  Sociology 


161 


Sawin,  The  Transfiguring  of  the  Cross:  Or  the 
Trial  and  Triumph  of  the  Son  of  Man. 
Ibid.,  1099-1102. 

A  suggestion  as  to  the  reason  of  Christ's  agony  in 
Gethsemane. 

Newman,  A  History  of  Anti-Pedobaptism  from 
the  Rise  of  Pedobaptism  to  A.  D.  1609. 
Ibid.,  II  (1898),  184-186. 

The  history  is  an  accurate  setting  forth  of  facts  but 
lacks  perspective  and  philosophy. 

Hort,  Christian  Ecclesia.    Ibid.,  198-201. 

A  historical  study  of  the  word  eKK\ri<ria  as  it  is  used  in 
the  New  Testament.  The  book  is  a  distinct  addition 
to  the  science  of  church  polity. 


Ibid.,  V  (1901),  412- 


Jalaguier,  De  T^glise. 
416. 

The  book  is  a  brilliant,  elaborate, but  unsuccessful  effort 
to  mediate  between  the  extreme  views  of  Protestants 
and  Roman  Catholics  in  reference  to  church  govern- 
ment. 

Bradford,  The  Age  of  Faith.    Ibid.,  617-619. 

The  author's  treatise  is  a  suggestive  attempt  to  ex- 
plain the  deepest  mysteries  pertaining  to  God's  deal- 
ings with  men  by  the  one  postulate  of  the  fatherhood 
of  God. 


Franklin  Johnson  [1892 — ] ,  Prof essor  of 
Church  History  and  Homiletics.  (See 
above,  p.  159.) 


XLVII.    SOCIOLOGY 


Charles  Richmond  Henderson  [1892-], 
Professor  of  Sociology. 

(See  above,  under  the  Department  of  Soci- 
ology, p.  31.) 


William  Clark  Gordon,  Ph.D.  1899; 
Clergyman,  Second  Congregational 
Church,  Westfield,  Mass. 

The  Social  Ideals  of  Alfred  Tennyson.  Doc- 
tor's thesis.    Unpublished. 


PART  II 
LITERARY,  EDUCATIONAL,  MISCELLANEOUS 


LITERARY,  EDUCATIONAL,  MISCELLANEOUS 


Abbott,  Frank  Fkost 

Petrarch's  Letters  to  Cicero.  Sewanee  Re- 
view, V  (1897),  319-327. 

A  Roman  Puritan.  New  England  Magazine, 
New  Series,  XVIII  (1898),  577-581. 

Petronius:  A  Study  in  Ancient  Realism.  Se- 
wanee Revieiv,  VII  (1899),  435^43. 

Angell,  James  Rowland 

Some  Reflections  upon  the  Reaction  from  Co- 
education. Popular  Science  Monthly,  LXII 
(1902),  5-26. 

Arnolt,  William  Muss 

A    Caricature    of    the    Crucifixion.     Biblical 

World,  VII  (1896),  63-64. 
A  Tablet  of  Warning  from  the  Temple  of 

Herod.    J&td.,  140-141. 

Abercius  (Avircius),  Pagan  or  Christian?  Ibid., 
373-375. 

Helps  to  the  Study  of  the  Earlier  Prophets. 
Ibid.,  IX  (1897),  443^56. 

An  Incident  in  the  Early  Jewish  History.  Re- 
form Advocate,  XXI  (1901),  201-202. 

Ancient  Hebrew  Oracles.  Ibid.,  658-659;  680- 
682;  708. 

Barker,  Lewellys  F. 

On  the  Teaching  of  the  Normal  Anatomy  of 
the  Central  Nervous  System  of  Human  Be- 
ings to  Large  Classes  of  Medical  Students. 
In  collaboration  with  Dr.  Preston  Kyes. 
Proceedings  of  the  Association  of  Ameri- 
can Anatomists,  1900, 125-138. 

On  the  Profession  of  Nursing  and  its  Future. 
Lakeside  Hospital  Reports,  Cleveland,  1901, 
10-26. 

Barnard,  Edward  Emerson 

Photographing  a  Remarkable  Comet.  Photo- 
graphic Times,  XXVIII  (1896),  1-3. 


Solar  and  Lxmar  Eclipses  and  the  Phases  of 
the  Moon.     Illustrated.    Ibid.,  209-213. 

The  Milky  Way  and  the  Great  Nebula  of  An- 
dromeda. Illustrated.  American  Annual 
of  Photography  and  Photographic  Times 
Almanac  for  1898,  225-229. 

Barnes,  Charles  Reid 

Plant  Life,  Considered  with  Special  Reference 
to  Form  and  Function.  12mo,  x+428,  415 
figures.    New  York,  Henry  Holt  &  Co.,  1898. 

Science  in  the  High  School.  School  Review, 
VI  (1898),  64a-658. 

Outlines  of  Plant  Life.  12mo,  vi+308,  250 
figures.    New  York,  Henry  Holt  &  Co.,  1899. 

Barrows,  John  Henry 

A  World  Pilgrimage.  8vo,  ix  +  479.  Chicago, 
A.  C.  McClurg  &  Co.,  1897. 

Beeson,  Charles  H. 

A  Second  Year  Latin  Book.  In  collaboration 
with  Frank  J.  Miller.  8vo,  500.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1902. 

Blackburn,  Francis  Adelbert 

Note  on  the  Phoenix  Vene  151.  Modern  Lan- 
guage Notes,  X  (1895),  259. 

Note  on  Alfred's  Cura  Pastoralis.  Ibid.,  IX 
(1896),  115. 

Blanchard,  Frederick  Mason 

Practical  Public  Speaking.  In  collaboration 
with  Solomon  Henry  Clark.  8vo,  xvi  +  301. 
New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1901. 

Bordes,  a.  B^ziat  de 

The  Elements  of  French:  A  Practical  Course 
for  High  Schools  and  Colleges.  8vo,  223. 
Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1899. 


165 


166 


Publications 


Breasted,  James  Henby 

The  Development  of  the  Priesthood  in  Israel 
and  Egypt :  A  Comparison.  Biblical  World, 
II  (1893),  19-28. 

The  Latest  from  Egypt.    Ibid.,  53-56. 

The  Latest  Discovery  from  the  Egyptian 
Fayum.  Biblical  World,  III  (1894),  295- 
299. 

A  New-Found  Treasure  of  the  Twelfth  Dy- 
nasty.   Ibid.,  362-364. 

The  Newly  Discovered  Latin  Translation  of 
the  Epistle  of  Clement.    Ibid.,  452-453. 

A  Sketch  of  Egyptian  History  with  Special 
Reference  to  Palestine  Down  to  About  950 
B.C.     Biblical   World,  VII  (1896),  439- 

458. 

The  Israel  Tablet.  Biblical  World,  IX  (1897), 
62-68. 

Professor  Petrie's  Egyptian  Research  Account. 
Ibid.,  139-142. 

Excavations  of  the  Egyptian  Research  Account 
atElKab.    J&«d.,  219-220. 

A  Sketch  of  Egyptian  History  from  the  Fall  of 
the  Native  Kings  to  the  Persian  Conquest. 
Ibid.,  415^128. 

The  Latest  Accessions  to  the  Haskell  Oriental 
Museimi.  Biblical  World,  X  (1897)  483- 
491. 

Recent  Accessions  to  Haskell  Museum.  Biblia, 
X  (1898),  281-285. 

Israel  and  the  Monuments  of  the  Nile.  Self- 
Culture,  VIII  (1898),  27-36. 

Buckley,  Edmund 

Mongolian  Literature.  Progress,  II  (1896), 
71-92. 

The  Conflict  in  China.  International  Monthly, 
II  (1900),  323-340. 

Articles:  "Hawaii,"  "Japan,"  "The Philippine 
Islands,"  "  Russia,"  contributed  to  Current 
Cyclopedia  (1901),  78-83;  99-105;  124r-135; 
258-297. 


BuRNHAM,  Sherburne  Wesley 

Professor  Edward  Emerson  Barnard,  the  As- 
tronomer. Harpers'  Monthly  Magazine, 
LXXXVII  (1893),  530-536. 

Butler,  Nathaniel 

Inter-Collegiate  University  Extension.  Univer- 
sity Extension   World,  II  (1893),  211-215. 

University  Extension  and  the  University  of 
Chicago.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1894),  245-251. 

The  College  in  Relation  to  the  University. 
Citizen,  II  (1896),  294-297;  328-332. 

The  Psychology  of  Conversion.  Proceedings 
of  the  Fifteenth  Annual  Meeting  of  the 
Baptist  Congress,  1897,  164-175. 

Higher  Culture  and  the  National  Life.  >SeZ/- 
Culture  Magazine,  IX  (1899),  270-276. 

Former  and  Present  Conditions  in  Education. 
Thirteenth  Annual  Meeting  of  the  Ameri- 
can Baptist  Education  Society  at  Spring- 
field, Mass.,  1901,  XIII  (1901),  16-21. 

Butterworth,  Horace 

Horizontal  Bar.  12mo,  192.  Privately  printed. 
Chicago,  1902. 

How  To:  A  Book  of  Tumbling,  Tricks,  Pyra- 
mids, and  Games.  12mo,  155.  Privately 
printed.    Chicago,  1902. 

Caldwell,  William 

The  Epistemology  of  E.  von  Hartmann.  Mind, 
New  Series,  II  (1893),  188-207. 

Capps,  Edward 

Social  Life  in  Ancient  Greece.  Chautauquan, 
XXIV  (1896),  290-295 

Social  Life  in  Modern  Greece.  Ibid.,  XXIV 
(1897),  545-549. 

Excavations  of  the  American  School  at  Eretria. 
Nation,  LIX  (1894),  80-81. 

A  New  Archaeological  Law  for  Greece.  Ibid., 
LXIX  (1899),  88-90. 

Report  of  the  Dean  of  the  Junior  Colleges  for 
the  years  1894-1897.  The  President's  Re- 
port, July,  1897-July,  1898  (1899),  77-98. 


LiTEEABY,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


167 


Caepenter,  Feedeeio  Ives 

Taine  as  a  Critic  of  Literature.  Current  Top- 
ics, I  (1893),  263-269, 

The  History  of  English  Literature.  Dial,  XVII 
(1894),  285. 

The  Study  of  Literature.    Poet  Lore,  VI  (1894), 

378-381. 
English  Literature  in  Germany.    Dial,  XXI 

(1896),  275-276. 
English  Literature  in  the  English  Universities. 

Nation,  LXVI  (1898),  164-166. 

Castle,  Claeence  Fassett 

An  Inductive  Greek  Primer.  In  collaboration 
with  W.  R.  Harper.  12mo,  420.  New  York, 
American  Book  Co.,  1893. 

Exercises  in  Greek  Prose  Composition,  based 
on  Books  I-IV  of  Xenophon's  Anabasis, 
together  with  Inductive  Studies  in  the  Uses 
of  the  Greek  Modes.  In  collaboration  with 
W.  R.  Harper.  12mo,  128.  New  York,  Amer- 
ican Book  Co.,  1893. 

Chambeelin,  Thomas  Chbowdee 

The  Problem  of  Suffering.     Biblical  World, 

VIII  (1896),  182-197. 
The  Fimction  of  Scientific  Study  in  a  True 

Education.      Elementary  School  Teacher, 

III  (1903),  337-346. 

Claek,  Solomon  Heney 

Principles  of  Vocal  Expression.  In  collabora- 
tion with  William  B.  Chamberlain.  12mo, 
XX +479.  Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co., 
1897. 

How  to  Teach  Reading  in  the  Public  Schools. 
8vo,  295.    Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co., 

1898. 

Practical  Public  Speaking.  In  collaboration 
with  Frederick  Mason  Blanchard.  8vo,  xvi 
+  301.  New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons, 
190L 


Claeke,  Heney  Love 

Studies  in  Plant  Development.  Pamphlet. 
Chicago,  1895. 

The  Meaning  of  Tree  Life.  American  Nat- 
uralist, XXVIII  (1894),  465^72;  572-580. 

Coultee,  John  Meele 

The  Proper  Use  of  Science  by  the   Pulpit. 

Journal  of  Theology,  III  (1899),  641-653. 
Botany  in  Secondary  Schools.     Journal  of 

Applied  Microscopy,  II  (1899),  489-490. 
Plant    Societies.     Pratt   Institute   Monthly, 

1899, 172-173. 
Plant  Relations.    Small  8vo,  vii  +  264,  with  206 

illustrations.    New  York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co., 

1899.      Second    edition    revised,    vii +266, 

wth  214  illustrations,  1901. 

Plant  Structures.  Small  8vo,  vii  +  384,  with 
289  illustrations.  New  York,  D.  Appleton 
&  Co.,  1900. 

Plants.  Small  8vo,  xxiv  +  612,  with  495  illus- 
trations. New  York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co., 
1900. 

Plant  Studies.     12mo,  ix  +  392,  336  figures. 

New  York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1900. 
Analytical  Key  of  Flowering  Plants.     12mo, 

v+93.    New  York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1900. 

The  Mission  of  Science  in  Education.  Science, 
XII  (1900),  281-293. 

Some  Problems  in  Education.  Educational 
Journal,  I  (1901),  405-407;  459-460. 

The  Policy  of  the  Young  Men's  Christian  As- 
sociation: A  Historical  Study  of  Association 
Relationships.  Published  by  the  Secretarial 
Institute  and  Training  School  of  the  Yoimg 
Men's  Christian  Association,  1901. 

The  Student  Young  Men's  Christian  Associa- 
tion as  it  Relates  to  the  Entire  Association 
Movement.    Ibid.,  1901. 

Cowles,  Heney  C. 

A.  F.  W.  Schimper.  Botanical  Gazette, 
XXXIII  (1902),  160-161. 


168 


Publications 


Crow,  Maetha  Foote 

Will  the  Co-educated  Co-educate  their  Chil- 
dren?   Fwum,  XVII  (1894),  582-594. 

Elizabethan  Sonnet  Cycles.  Edited  by:  I, 
Phillis,  by  Thomas  Lodge  ;  Licia,  by  Giles 
Fletcher.  II,  Delia,  by  Daniel  Darcy ;  Di- 
ana, by  Henry  Constable.  Ill,  Idea,  by 
Michael  Drayton ;  Fidessa,  by  Bartholo- 
mew Griffin ;  Chloris,  by  William  Smith. 
London,  Kegan  Paul,  Trench,  Trubner  & 
Co.,  1896-7. 

Cutting,  Starr  W. 

Should  the  Elementary  Study  of  German  be 
Chiefly  Inductive?  Publications  of  the 
Modern  Language  Association,  IX  (1894), 
Appendix,  XIV-XXIV. 

Should  German  be  Taught  as  a  Living  Lan- 
guage in  our  Schools  and  Colleges?  Jour- 
nal of  Pedagogy,  XI  (1898),  2a-39. 

Einige  Prinzipien  des  Sprachunterrichts.  Ped- 
agogische  Monatshefte,  I  (1900),  14-22. 

Damon,  Lindsay  Todd 

Composition  and  Rhetoric  for  Schools.  In  col- 
laboration with  Robert  Herrick.  12mo,  461. 
Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1898.  Re- 
vised edition,  12mo,  436, 1902. 

Davenport,  Charles  B. 

Introduction  to  Zoology:  A  Guide  to  the  Study 
of  Animals  for  Use  in  Secondary  Schools. 
In  collaboration  with  Gertrude  Crotty  Dav- 
enport. 12mo,  xii-|-412.  New  York,  The 
Macmillan  Co.,  1900. 

The  Animal  Ecology  of  Cold  Spring  Beach. 
School  Review,  X  (1902),  46^7. 

The  Relation  of  the  American  Society  of  Nat- 
uralists to  Other  American  Scientific  Soci- 
eties. Science,  New  Series,  XV  (1902),  241- 
255;  299-300. 

Davenport,  Herbert  Joseph 

The  Principles  of  Grammar.  In  collaboration 
with  Anna  Emerson.  8vo,  xiv  +  263.  New 
York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1898. 


Dewey,  John 

The  Chaos  in  Moral  Training.  Popular  Science 

Monthly,  XLV  (1894),  433-442. 
Influence  of  the  High  School  on  Educational 

Methods.    School  Review,  IV  (1894),  1-12. 
The  Primary  Education  Fetish.    Forum,  XXV 

(1898),  315-328. 
Are  the  Schools  Doing  what  the  People  Want 

them  to  Do?    Educational  Review,  XXI 

(1901),  459-474. 
Academic  Freedom.    Ibid.,  XXIII  (1902),  1-14. 
Current  Problems   in    Secondary  Education. 

School  Review,  IX  (1902),  13-28. 

DixsoN,  Zella  Allen 

The  Library  of  the  University  of  Chicago. 
Library  Journal,  XVII  (1892),  50-51. 

Departmental  Libraries  of  the  University  of 
Chicago.    Ibid.,  XX  (1895),  375-377. 

Comprehensive  Subject  Index  to  Universal 
Prose  Fiction.  12mo,  421.  New  York,  Dodd, 
Mead  &  Co.,  1897. 

Traveling  Libraries  of  the  University  of  Chi- 
cago.   Public  Libraries,  II  (1897),  50. 

Teaching  Library  Science  by  University  Ex- 
tension Methods.    Ibid.,  285-289. 

Cataloguer's  Leaflet,  No.  1.  24mo,  8.  Pam- 
phlet.   Chicago,  1899. 

Fellows,  George  E. 

An  Outline  Study  of  the  Sixteenth  Century. 

Chicago,  Werner  School  Book  Co.,  1895. 
The  Relation  of  Anthropology  to  the  Study  of 

History.    American  Journal  of  Sociology, 

I  (1895),  41-49. 
The  Spirit  of  Tuskegee.    Ibid.,  VI  (1900),  281- 

284. 

Goodspeed,  Edgar  Johnson 

A  Twelfth  Century  Manuscript  of  the  Gospels. 

Biblical  World,  X  (1897),  277-280. 
From  Haifa  to  Nazareth.     Ibid.,  XVI  (1900), 

407-413. 


Literary,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


169 


The  Acts  of  Paul   and  Thecla.    Ibid.,  XVII 

(1901),  185-190. 
The  City  of  Herod.    Ibid.,  XVIII  (1901),  88- 

95 


Gray,  Clifton  Daggett 

The  Historical  Background  of  Malachi. 
lical  World,  XVI  (1899),  404-411. 


Bib- 


Hale,  George  Ellery 

Astronomy  and  Astrophysics.    Astrophysical 

Journal,  XIII  (1894),  831-835. 
Spectro  -  Bolographic    Investigations    at    the 

Smithsonian     Astrophysical     Observatory. 

Ibid  ,  I  (1895),  162-166. 
The  Function  of  Large  Telescopes.    Annual 

Address  Before  the  New  York  Academy  of 

Sciences.    Science,  New  Series,  VII  (1898), 

650-662. 
James  Edward  Keeler.    Ibid.,  XII  (1900),  353- 

356. 
Stellar  Evolution  in    the  Light   of   Recent 

Research.    Popular  Science  Monthly,  LX 

(1902),  291-313. 

Hale,  William  Gardner 

The  Place  of  the  University  in  American  Life. 
First  Convocation  Address  of  the  University 
of  Chicago.  Current  Topics,  II  (1893),  477- 
490. 

Should  Greek  be  Required  for  the  Degree  of 
Bachelor  of  Arts?  Report  of  the  National 
Congress  of  Education,  1893, 118-142.  Re- 
print, Ginn  &  Co.,  1893. 

Democracy  and  Education.  Address  of  the 
President  of  the  American  Philological  As- 
sociation. Proceedings,  XXIV  (1893),  xx- 
xxii. 

The  Graduate  School:  An  Address  given  at  the 
Celebration  of  the  One  Hundredth  Anniver- 
sary of  the  Founding  of  Union  University, 
1895.      Official  Report  of  the  Celebration. 

The  American  School  of  Classical  Studies  in 
Rome.  Harvard  Graduates^  Magazine,  IV 
(1896),  569-577. 


First  Anaual  Report  of  the  Chairman  of  the 
Managing  Committee  of  the  American 
School  of  Classical  Studies  in  Rome,  1895- 
96.  American  Journal  of  Archceology, 
Second  Series,  I  (1897),  5-12. 

Report  of  the  Director  of  the  American  School 
of  Classical  Studies  in  Rome,  1895-96.  Ibid., 
17-50. 

Report  of  the  Chairman  of  the  Managing  Com- 
mittee of  the  American  School  of  Classical 
Studies  in  Rome,  1896-97.    Ibid.,  120-136. 

Report  of  the  Chairman  of  the  Managing  Com- 
mittee of  the  American  School  of  Classical 
Studies  in  Rome,  1897-98.  Ibid.,  II  (1898), 
504-513. 

The  Work  and  Mission  of  the  American  School 
of  Classical  Studies  in  Rome.  Address  De- 
Hvered  at  the  Classical  Conference  held  at 
Ann  Arbor,  March  31  and  April  1,  1898. 
School  Review,  VI  (1898),  455-458. 

Report  of  the  Chairman  of  the  Managing  Com- 
mittee of  the  American  School  of  Classical 
Studies  in  Rome,  1898-99.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Archceology,  Second  Series,  III 
(1899),  687-701. 

The  Qui-Clause  with  dignus.  Latin  Leaflet, 
I,  No.  24,  1901. 

Characterizing  Clauses  in  Latin.  Ibid.,  No.  25. 

Should  the  Thesis  for  the  Doctor's  Degree  be 
Printed?  Journal  of  the  Proceedings  and 
Addresses  of  the  Third  Annual  Conference 
of  the  Association  of  American  Universi- 
ties, 1902, 16-22. 

Hancock,  Arthur  A. 

Laplace  on  the  Variation  of  Latitude.  Popu- 
lar Astronomy,  II  (1895),  349-353. 

Harper,  Robert  Francis 

The  Tel-el-Amarna  Tablets  in  the  British  Mu- 
seum.   Biblical  World,  I  (1893),  50-52. 

The  Expedition  of  the  Babylonian  Exploration 
Fund:  Excavations  at  Niffer  during  the 
Season  of  1889.  I,  Ibid.,  57-62;  II,  Ibid., 
135-137. 


170 


Publications 


The  Decipherment  of  the  Assyro  -  Babylonian 

Inscriptions.     I,  Ibid:,  294^297;    II,  Ibid., 

371-373. 
Notes  from  London.    Ibid.,  II  (1893),  206-209. 
A  Sketch  of  the  Excavations  in  Babylonia  and 

Assyria.    Ibid.,  VIII  (1896),  23-29. 
Explorations  and  Adventures  on  the  Euphrates. 

Ibid.,  X  (1897),  309-310. 

Nebuchadnezzar,  King  of  Babylon.  Ibid.,  XIV 
(1899),  1-12. 

Haepee,  William  Rainey 

An  Inductive  Series  of  Text  Books.    General 

editor  of.    American  Book  Co. 

The  ^neid  (six  books)  and  Bucolics  of  Vir- 
gil. In  collaboration  with  Frank  Justus 
Miller.     12mo,  564.    1892. 

Xenophon's  Anabasis.  In  collaboration  with 
James  Wallace.    12mo,  575.    1893. 

An  Inductive  Greek  Primer.  In  collabora- 
tion with  Clarence  F.  Castle.  12mo,  416. 
1893. 

Ten  Orations  of  Cicero,  with  Selections 
from  the  Letters.  In  collaboration  with 
Frank  A.  Gallup.    12mo,  566.    1898. 

Biblical  Terms  in  the  Standard  Dictionary  of 
the  English  Language.  Editor  in  charge 
of.    1893-95. 

The  First  Hebrew  Story  of  Creation.  Biblical 
World,  III  (1894),  6-16. 

The  Origin  of  Man  and  His  First  State  of  In- 
nocence.   Ibid.,  97-108. 

Paradise  and  the  First  Sin:  Genesis  iii.  Ibid., 
176-188. 

The  Fratricide;  the  Cainite  Civilization;  Gene- 
sis iv.    Ibid.,  264-274. 

The  Long-Lived  Antediluvians:  Genesis  v. 
Ibid.,  326-335. 

The  Sons  of  God  and  the  Daughters  of  Men: 
Genesis  vi.    Ibid.,  440-448. 

Hebrew  Stories  of  the  Deluge.  Ibid.,  IV  (1894), 
20-31. 

The  Deluge  in  Other  Literatures  and  in  His- 
tory    Ibid.,  114-123. 

Some  General  Considerations  relating  to 
Genesis  i-xi.    Ibid.,  184-201. 


The  Human  Element  in  the  Early  Stories  of 

Genesis.    Ibid.,  266-278. 
The  Divine  Element  in  the  Early  Stories  of 

Genesis.    Ibid.,  349-358. 
A  Theory  of  the  Divine  and  Human  Elements 

in  Genesis  i-xi.    Ibid.,  407^20. 
The  Foreshadowings  of  the  Christ  in  the  Old 

Testament.    Ibid.,  VI  (1895),  401^11. 
Outline  Topics  in  the  History  of  the  Old  Tes- 
tament Prophecy.    Ibid.,  VII  (1896),  39-45; 

120-129;   199-206;  273-279;  352-358;  VIII 

(1896),  37-45;  221-228,  280-288;  364-375. 
The  Address  of  Acceptance  at  the  Dedication 

of  the  Haskell  Oriental    Museum.    Ibid., 

107-110. 
The  Statement  at  the  Laying  of  the  Corner 

Stone  of  the    Haskell  Oriental    Museum. 

Ibid.,  85-86. 
Child  Prophecies  of  Isaiah.    Ibid.,  417-422. 
The  Work  of  Isaiah.    Ibid.,  X  (1897),  48-57. 
Suggestions   Concerning    the    Original    Text 

and  Structure  of  Amos  1:3-2:5.   American 

Journal  of  Theology,  I  (1897),  141-145. 
The  Utterances  of  Amos  Arranged  Strophically. 

Biblical  World,    XII  (1898),  86-89;   17&- 

182;  251-256;  333-338. 
Shall  the  Theological  Curriculum  be  Modified? 

American  Journal  of  Theology,  III  (1899), 

45-66. 
The  Jews  in  Babylon.    Biblical  World,  XIV 

(1899),  104-111. 
The  Return  of  the  Jews  from  Exile.      Ibid.^ 

157-163. 
The  Priestly  Element  in  the  Old  Testament,  as 

Seen  in  the  Laws.    Ibid.,  258-266. 
The  University  and  Democracy.     Cosmopoli- 
tan, XXVI  (1899),  681-691. 
Shall  the  Theological  Curriculum  be  Modified 

and  How?  American  Journal  of  Theology, 

III  (1899),  45-66. 
The  Prospects  of  the  Small  College.    16mo, 

46.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1900. 
Constructive  Studies  in  the  Priestly  Element 

in  the  Old  Testament.    Ibid.,  XVII  (1901), 


LiTERAEY,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


171 


46-54;  121-134;  206-220;  366-381;  450-462; 
XVIII  (1901),  56-63:  120-130;  204-217;  297- 
307;  368-379;  468-487. 

Constructive  Studies  in  the  Literature  of  the 
Old  Testament :  The  Historical  Writings  of 
the  Priestly  School.  Ihid.,  XIX  (1902),  48- 
57;  134-145. 

Constructive  Studies  in  the  Literature  of  Wor- 
ship in  the  Old  Testament :  1.  The  Legal 
Literature:  The  Deuteronomic  Code  of 
Laws;  2.  The  Legal  Literature:  Ezekiel's 
Contribution;  3.  The  Legal  Literature:  The 
Priestly  Code;  4.  The  Historical  Writings 
of  the  Priestly  School.  Ibid.,  XIX  (1902), 
132-146;  199-208;  300-310;  443-455. 

Quarterly  Keports  of  the  President.  Quarterly 
Calendar  of  the  University  of  Chicago  and 
University  Record,  1892-1902. 

Hastings,  Charles  H. 

Bibliographies  published  in  the  Chautauquan  : 
The  Philippine  Problem,  XXX  (1899),  17-18; 
England  and  the  South  African  Republic, 
ibid.,  129-130;  Trusts,  ibid.,  237-238:  Bib- 
lical Interpretation,  or  the  Higher  Criticism, 
ibid.,  356-357;  Woman  Labor  and  Child 
Labor,  ibid.,  463-464;  College,  University, 
and  Social  Settlements,  ibid.,  571-572 ; 
Women's  Clubs,  ibid.,  XXXI  (1900),  14^15; 
China  and  the  Far  Eastern  Question,  ibid., 
123-124;  Systems  and  Forms  of  Colonial 
Government,  ibid.,  225-226. 

Heller,  Otto 

Some  Aspects  of  German  Education,  Pam- 
phlet published  by  the  Washington  Univer- 
sity Association.  Reprinted  in  Common- 
wealth, Vol.  IX,  1902. 

Henderson,  Charles  Richmond 

Catechism  for  Social  Observation.  8vo,  58. 
Boston,  D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.,  1894. 

The  Development  in  the  Epistles.  Bible 
Handbook  for  Young  People,  VIII.  16mo, 
196.  Philadelphia,  American  Baptist  Pub- 
lication Society,  1896. 


Science  in  Philanthropy.  Atlantic  Monthly, 
LXXXV  (1900),  24&-254. 

Plan  and  Budget  for  a  Small  College.  Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Sociology,  VII  (1902), 
721-748. 

ArbeitsgesSnge  der  Neger  in  den  Vereinigten- 
Staaten  von  Nord-Amerika.  Collected  for 
Professor  K.  Blicher's  Arbeit  und  Rhyth- 
mus,   pp.  217-233.    Leipzig,  Teubner,  1902. 

Henderson,  George 

The  University  Extension  Division  of  the  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago.  University  Extension 
World,  I  (1893),  27-29. 

Herrick,  Robert 

George  Eliot's  Silas  Mamer.  Edited  with  Notes 
and  Introduction.  8vo,  xxxix-|-224.  New 
York,  Longmans,  Green  &  Co.  (English 
Classics),  1895. 

The  Man  Who  Wins.  16mo,  125.  New  York, 
Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1896. 

Literary  Love  Letters  and  Other  Stories.  16mo, 
244.  New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons, 
1897. 

The  Gospel  of  Freedom.  8vo,  287.  New  York, 
The  Macmillan  Co.,  1898. 

Composition  and  Rhetoric  for  Schools.  In  col- 
laboration with  L.  T.  Damon.  12mo,  461. 
Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1899.  Re- 
vised edition,  12mo,  436, 1902. 

Hawthorne's  The  House  of  the  Seven  Gables. 
Edited  with  Notes  and  Introduction.  8vo, 
367.    Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1898. 

Love's  Dilemmas.  8vo,  193.  Chicago,  H.  S. 
Stone  &  Co.,  1898. 

The  Webb  of  Life.  8vo,  351.  New  York,  The 
Macmillan  Co.,  1900. 

The  Real  World.  8vo,  358.  New  York,  The 
Macmillan  Co.,  1901. 

Methods  of  Teaching  Rhetoric  and  English 
Composition.  8vo,  22.  Chicago,  Scott, 
Foresman  &  Co.,  1899.    Reissued  1902. 


172 


Publications 


Introduction  to  The  Abb6  Constantin  and  A 
Love  Match  by  Ludovic  Hal6vy,  17  pp. 
For  a  series  entitled  A  Century  of  French 
Romance,  edited  by  Edmund  Gosse.  New 
York,  D.  Appleton  &  Co.,  1903. 

English  Composition  and  the  Quarter  System. 
Educational  Review,  VIII  (1894),  382-387. 

The  University  of  Chicago.  Scribner's  Maga- 
zine, XVIII  (1895),  399^17. 

The  Polity  of  Nature.  Lippincott's,  LXVIII 
(1901),  458-471. 

The  Professor's  Choice.  Atlantic,  LXXXVII 
(1901),  723-732. 

Hessler,  John  C. 

Essentials  of  Chemistry  for  Secondary  Schools. 
In  collaboration  with  Albert  L.  Smith.  Chi- 
cago. 8vo,  XX + 405  +  96.  Boston,  Benj.  H. 
Sanborn  &  Co.,  1902. 

HoLST,  Hermann  Eduaed  von 

The  Need  of  Universities  in  the  United  States. 
Convocation  Address,  January,  1893.  Quar- 
terly Calendar  of  the  University  of  Chi- 
cago, II  (1893),  3-8.  Also  Educational 
Review,  V  (1893),  105-119. 

Nationalization  of  Education  and  the  Univer- 
sities.   Monist,  III  (1893),  493-509. 

Shall  the  Senate  Kule  the  Republic?  Forum, 
XVI  (1893),  263-271. 

Ought  the  United  States  Senate  to  be  Abol- 
ished?   Monist,  V  (1894),  1-21. 

Are  We  Awakened?  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,   II  (1894),  485-516. 

Hopkins,  Thomas  Cramer 

Geology  in  the  Colleges  and  Universities  of  the 
United  States.  Reprints  from  the  Report 
of  the  United  States  Commissioner  of  Edu- 
cation, 1893-94,  819-878. 

HouRWioH,  Isaac  A. 

The  Russian  -  American  Extradition  Treaty. 
Yale  Review,  III  (1894),  68-95. 


HowERTH,  Ira  Woods 

Are  the  Italians  a  Dangerous  Class  ?  Charities 
Review,  IV  (1894-95),  17-40. 

Sociology  in  Om:  Large  Universities.  Charities 
Review,  IV  (1894-95),  198-209. 

The  Coffee -House  as  a  Rival  of  the  Saloon. 
American  Magazine  of  Civics,  VI  (1895), 
589-602. 

Profit  -  Sharing  at  Ivorydale.  American  Jour- 
nal of  Sociology,  II  (1896-97),  43-57. 

A  Great  Social  Need.  Open  Court,  XII  (1898), 
224-235. 

An  Ethnic  View  of  Higher  Education.  Educa- 
tional Review,  XX  (1900),  345-356.  Also 
Proceedings  of  the  National  Educational 
Association,  1900,  465-473. 

Brinton's  Theory  of  the  Origin  of  Religion. 
Monist,  X  (1900),  293-298. 

Some  Characteristics  of  Professor  Huxley. 
Open  Court,  XV  (1901),  517-526. 

Education  and  Evolution.  Educational  Re- 
view, XXIII  (1902),  60-81. 

What  is  Religion  ?  International  Journal  of 
Ethics,  XIII  (1903),  185-206. 

Ingres,  Maxime 

Cours  complet  de  langue  franjaise.  8vo,  liii+ 
314.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1902. 

James,  Edmund  James 

The  Training  for  Citizenship.  National  Her- 
bart  Society,  Third  Yearbook,  1897,  101- 
116. 

The  Education  of  Business  Men.  Svo,  253. 
Chicago,  University  Press,  1898. 

The  Kindergarten  and  the  Public  Schools.  In 
Appendix  B,  pp.  195-204,  to  the  Report  of 
the  Educational  Commission  of  the  City  of 
Chicago,  appointed  by  the  Mayor.    1899. 

Commercial  Training  and  the  Public  High 
School.    Ibid.,  Appendix  C,  208-217. 


LiTEBABY,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


173 


Bibliography  of  Newspapers  Published  in 
Illinois  Prior  to  1860.  In  collaboration 
with  Milo  J.  Loveless.  Illinois  State  His- 
torical Society  Publications,  No.  1, 1899. 

Commercial  Education.  Monograph  13,  in 
Nicholas  Murray  Butler's  Monographs  on 
Education  in  the  United  States,  Vol.  II, 
653-703.  United  States  Commission  to  the 
Paris  Exhibition  of  1900,  Department  of 
Education.    Albany,  1900. 

Relation  of  the  College  and  University  to 
Higher  Commercial  Education.  Publica- 
tions of  the  American  Economic  Associa- 
tion, Series  III,  II  (1901),  114-165. 

Jameson,  John  Fbanklin 

The  Twenty-fifth  Anniversary  of  Johns  Hop- 
kins University.  Dial,  XXXII  (1902),  lia- 
146. 

The  Influence  of  Universities  upon  Historical 
Writing.  Convocation  address  of  December 
17,  1901.  University  of  Chicago  Record, 
VI  (1901),  291-300. 

Johnson,  Fbanklin 

The  Home  Missionaries.  (Poem.)  Privately 
printed.    1899. 

Baptism  the  Door  to  the  Lord's  Supper.  A 
chapter  in  Baptist  Principles  Reset,  by  Jere- 
miah B.  Jeter  and  others.  Richmond  Re- 
ligious Herald,  1901, 1902. 

Should  a  Divinity  School  Teach  the  Student 
What  to  Believe,  or  How  to  Think?  Uni- 
versity of  Chicago  Record,  I  (1897),  543-546. 


Judson,  Habby  Pbatt 

American  Politics:  A  Study  of  Four  Careers 

(Blaine,  Lamar,  Hayes,  Butler).    Review  of 

Reviews,  VII  (1893),  159-172. 
Work  and  Organization  of  the  University  of 

Chicago.    Education,  XVI  (1896),  278-289. 
Higher  Education  as  a  Training  for  Business. 

8vo,  54.      Philadelphia,    Henry    Altemus, 

1896. 

The  Latin  in  English.    12mo,  225.    New  York, 

Henry  Holt  &  Co.,  1896. 
The  Yoimg  American.    12mo,  265.   New  York, 

Maynard,  Merrill  &  Co.,  1897. 
The  Larger  Meaning  of  Colonial  Life.    New 

Unity,  XXXIV  (1897),  309-311. 
Imperial    Germany.      Chautauquan,    XXVI 

(1897),  149-154. 

The  Government  of  Illinois.    12mo,  265.    New 
York,  Maynard,  Merrill  &  Co.,  1900. 

Kent,  Chables  Fosteb 

The  Present  Status  of  College  Affiliation.   Uni- 
versity Extension  World,  I  (1893),  8-11. 

Bible  Study  in  the  West.   Ibid.,  II  (1893),  151- 

154. 
The   London    Oriental    Congress.      Biblical 

World,  I  (1893),  49. 

The  Present  and  Possibilities  of  Excavation  in 
Palestine.    Ibid.,  I  (1893),  220-225. 

The  Social  Philosophy  of  the  Royal  Prophet 
Isaiah.    Ibid.,  I  (1893),  248-262. 

The  Duties  of  Man  as  Taught  by  the  Book  of 
Proverbs.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1894),  198-208. 


Jonas,  Johannes  B.  E. 

Secondary  Education  in  France  Dm-ing  the 
Third  Republic.  A  translation  of  an  article 
by  Karl  Dorfeld.  School  Review,  IV  (1896), 
698-703. 

The  Differentiation  of  the  Secondary  Curric- 
ulum in  France.  Ibid.,  VIII  (1900),  244- 
253. 


Lagebgben,  Cabl  G. 

Nytt  och  Gammalt.  Betraktelser  i  religi5sa 
fimmen.  12mo.  Forsta  Hfiftet,  64;  andra 
Haftet,  64.  Minneapolis,  North  Star  Pub- 
lishing Co.,  1894, 1898. 

Wayland,  Charles  H.  Spurgeon:  His  Faith  and 
Works.  Translated  into  Swedish.  12mo, 
338.    Chicago,  E.  Wingren,  1892. 


174 


Publications 


Triumf singer:  Forty  English  Songs  C!ontribu- 
ted  to,  in  Swedish  Translation.  12mo,  40. 
American  Baptist  Publication  Society,  Chi- 
cago, 1900. 

Laing,  Gobdon  Jennings 

Masterpieces  of  Latin  Literature.  With  Bio- 
graphical Sketches  and  Notes.  8vo,  viii-f- 
487.    Boston,  Houghton,  Mifflin  &  Co.,  1903. 

Laughlin,  James  Laubence 

The  University  of  Chicago.   Nation,  L  V  (1892), 

216-217. 
The  National  Banking  System.   Chautauquan, 

XVI  (1892),  32-36. 
A  Monetary  Scientist's  Analysis.     Review  of 

Reviews,  VIII  (1893),  282-283. 
Monetary  Reform  in  Santo  Domingo.  Atlantic 

Monthly,  LXXIV  (1894),  107-113. 
Economic    Effects    of    Changes    of  Fashion. 

Chautauquan,  XIX  (1894),  9-13. 
Teaching  of  Economics.    Atlantic  Monthly, 

LXXVII  (1896),  682-688. 
Would  American  Free  Coinage  Double  the 

Price  of  Silver  in  the  Markets  of  the  World? 

II,  The  Negative  View.    Review  of  Reviews, 

XIV  (1896),  308-310. 
The  People's  Money-Government  versus  Bank 

Issues.    Bond  Record,  IV  (1896),  355-358. 
Facts  About  Money:    a  Reply.       Quarterly 

Journal  of  Economics,  X  (1896),  337-340. 
How  to  Assure  the  Maintenance  of  the  Gold 

Standard.    Review  of  Reviews,  XV  (1897), 

46-47. 
Municipal  Ownership.     Independent,  LXIX 

(1897),  571. 

Withdrawal  of  the  Treasury  Notes  of  1890. 

Journal  of  Political  Economy,  VI  (1898), 

248-249. 
Economics    and    Socialism.       Chautauquan, 

XXX  (1899),  252-256. 

War  and  Money:    Some  Lessons  of  1862.    At- 
lantic Monthly,  LXXXII  (1899),  47-54. 


Address  of  Welcome  to  Ambassador  von  Hol- 
leben,  January  24, 1 900.    University  Record. 

Trusts,  in  Case  of  Bryan's  Election.  Review 
of  Reviews,  XXII  (1900),  443-445. 

Economics  in  Schools.  Journal  of  Political 
Economy,  IX  (1901),  384-397. 

Address  at  the  Laying  of  the  Corner  Stone  of 
the  Press  Building.  University  Record,  VI 
(1901),  81-82. 

Higher  Commercial  Education.  Atlantic 
Monthly,  LXXXIX  (1901),  677-686. 

Lengfeld,  Felix 

An  Experiment  to  Illustrate  Chemical  Equi- 
librium.   School  Science,  I  (1901),  209. 

Moissan's  Work  with  the  Electric  Furnace. 
Ibid.,  359-362. 

Lewis,  Edwin  Hebbeet 

A  First  Book  in  Writing  English.  12mo,  x  -|- 
291.    New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1897. 

An  Introduction  to  the  Study  of  Literature. 
8vo,  XXX  -f  410.  New  York,  The  Macmillan 
Co.,  1899. 

Linn,  James  Webeb 

The  Second  Generation.    8vo,  304.    New  York, 

The  Macmillan  Co.,  1902. 
The  Chameleon.    8vo,  354.    New  York,  Mc- 

Clure,  Phillips  &  Co.,  1903. 

Lovett,  Robebt  Mobss 

Scott's  Marmion.  Edited  with  Notes  and  In- 
troduction. 12mo,  xxxviii  +  276.  New  York 
and  London,  Longmans,  Green  &  Co.,  1896. 

Shakspere's  Merchant  of  Venice.  Edited  with 
Notes  and  Introduction.  12mo,  172.  Chi- 
cago, Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1900. 

Lyon,  Elias  P. 

An  Improved  Form  of  Ktihne's  Artificial  Eye. 
School  Science,  I  (1901),  19^202. 


LiTEBAEY,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


175 


Manny,  Fbank  A, 

High  School  Extension.  School  Review,  V 
(1897),  171-177. 

Mathews,  Albeet  P. 

The  Nature  of  the  Nerve  Impulse.  Century 
Magazine,  LXIII  (1902),  788-792. 

Mathews,  Shaileb 

Studies  in  the  Gospel  of  Luke.  Sunday  School 
Times,  December  21,  1895;  June  13, 1896. 

From  Jenin  to  Nazareth.  Biblical  World,  X 
(1897),  174r-182;  259-271. 

The  Significance  of  the  Church  to  the  Social 
Movement.  American  Journal  of  Sociol- 
ogy, IV  (1899),  603-620. 

The  Church  and  Social  Unity.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  V  (1900),  456-469. 

The  French  Kevolution.  12mo,278.  New  York, 
Longmans,  Green  &  Co.,  1901. 

Meyeb,  John  Jacob 

Dreihundert  Gulden.    Sonntagsblatt  der  New 

Yorker  Staats  -  Zeitung,  October  2, 1898. 
Bilder  aus  dem  hauslichen  Leben:   Kindheit 

und  Jugend.      Ibid.,  December  11,  1898; 

Brautwerbung  und  Hochzeit,  December  25; 

Hausvaterstand,  January  1, 1899;  Tod  und 

Bestattung,  January  8. 

Christian  und  Wagner.  Ibid.,  January  15, 1899. 
Das  Grab  am  Kassakas.   Humoreske,  February 

19, 1899. 
Das  Urteil  des  Schemjatka  und  das  Urteil  Sol- 

omonis  auf  Altindisch.    Sonntagsblatt  der 

New  Yorker  Staats  -  Zeitung,    March  26, 

1899. 
^sopische  Fabeln  in  altbuddhistischer  Fas- 

simg.    Ibid.,  April  16,  1899. 
Finlands  gr5sster  Dichter.      Ibid.,  July  30, 

1899. 
Der  Dichter  Gnostikus  aus  dem  Norden.  Ibid., 

January  7,  1900. 
Das  Buch  der  Geburten.     Ibid.,  February  18, 

1900. 


Etwas  fiber  kubanische  Poesie.    Ibid.,  April  8, 

1900. 
Heiland  Tod.    Ibid.,  November  4,  1900. 

Asanka  Sudschata  Tangara.  Gedichte.  Lotos- 
Verlag,  Leipzig,  1903. 

Zwei  altindische  FreudenmSdchendichtimgen 
Die  Samayamatrika  des  Kshemendra  und 
das  Kuttanimatam  des  Damodaragupta. 
Uebersetzt  und  mit  einer  Einleitimg  und 
Anmerkungen  versehen.  Lotos  -  Verlag, 
Leipzig,  1903. 

Millee,  Fbank  Justus 

The  .Eneid  of  Virgil.  Six  Books.  In  collabo- 
ration with  W.  R.  Harper.  8vo,  x-f  461. 
New  York,  American  Book  Co.,  1892. 

The  JEneid  and  Bucolics  of  Virgil.  In  col- 
laboration with  W.  R.  Harper.  8vo,  x  +  564. 
New  York,  American  Book  Co.,  1893. 

Introduction  to  Roman  Life.  8vo,  10.  Mead- 
ville.  Flood  &  Vincent,  1897. 

Dido,  an  Epic  Tragedy.  8vo,  iv-|-88.  Boston, 
Silver,  Burdett  &  Co..  1900. 

Ovid.  Selected  Works  with  Notes  and  Vocab- 
ulary. 8vo,  528.  New  York,  American  Book 
Co.,  1900. 

Studies  in  the  Poetry  of  Italy.  I,  Roman. 
12mo,  168.  Cleveland,  Chautauqua  Press, 
1901. 

A  Second  Year  Latin  Book.  In  collaboration 
with  Charles  H.  Beeson.  8vo,500.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1902. 

MiLLIKAN,  RoBEBT  A. 

The  Teaching  of  Physics  in  Lower  College 
Classes.  8vo,  8.  Chicago,  Scott,  Foresman 
&  Co.,  1902. 

Moody,  William  Vaughn 

Milton's  Paradise  Lost,  Books  I-III.  Edited 
with  Notes  and  Introduction.  Boston, 
Houghton,  Mifflin  &  Co.,  1896. 

Bunyan's  Pilgrim's  Progress.  Edited  with 
Notes  and  Introduction.  Boston,  Hough- 
ton, Mifflin  &  Co.,  1897. 


176 


Publications 


Good  Friday  Night.  (Poem.)  Atlantic  Month- 
ly, XXXI  (1898),  700-701. 

Coleridge's  Ancient  Mariner,  and  Lowell's 
Vision  of  Sir  Launfal.  Edited  with  Notes 
and  Introduction.  16mo,  103.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1898. 

Scott's  Lay  of  the  Last  Minstrel.  Edited  with 
Notes  and  Introduction.  In  collaboration 
with  Mary  R.  Willard.  16mo,211.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1899. 

Scott's  Marmion.  Edited  with  Notes  and  In- 
troduction. In  collaboration  with  Mary  R. 
Willard.  16mo,  355.  Chicago,  Scott,  Fores- 
man &  Co.,  1899. 

Pope's  Iliad,  Books  I,  VI,  XXII,  XXIV.  Ed- 
ited with  Introduction  and  Notes.  In  col- 
laboration with  W.  W.  Cressy.  Chicago, 
Scott,  Foresman  &  Co.,  1899. 

Road  Hymn  for  the  Start.  (Poem.)  Atlantic 
Monthly,  LXXXIII  (1899),  840. 

An  Ode  in  Time  of  Hesitation.  Ibid.,  LXXXV 
(1900),  593-598. 

Gloucester  Moors.  (Poem.)  Scribner's  Maga- 
zine, XXVIII  (1900),  727-728. 

The  Masque  of  Judgment.  A  Masque  Drama 
in  Five  Acts  and  a  Prelude.  8vo,  vi  +  127. 
Boston,  Small,  Maynard  &  Co.,  1900. 

The  Brute.  (Poem.)  Atlantic  Monthly, 
LXXXVII  (1901),  88-90. 

On  a  Soldier  Fallen  in  the  Philippines.  (Poem.) 
Ibid.,  LXXXVII  (1901). 

Poems.  8vo,  106.  Boston,  Houghton,  Mifflin 
&  Co.,  1901. 

MooEE,  Ella  Adams 

Moral  Proportion  and  Fatalism  of  Passion  in 
Shakespeare's    Plays.     Poet -Lore,  Henry 

VII  (1895),  75-82;  Macbeth,  133-140;  Ham- 
let, 191-197;  Othello,  424^128;  King  Lear, 
487-491;  Romeo  and  Juliet,  551-555;  An- 
tony and  Cleopatra,   61^619;    Coriolanus, 

VIII  (1896),  86-90;  King  John,  139-145. 


MouLTON,  Forest  Ray 

An  Important  Method  of  Solving  Kepter's 
Equation.  Popular  Astronomy,  III  (1895), 
136-141. 

A  Method  of  Measuring  the  Distances,  Dimen- 
sions, and  Masses  of  Binary  Systems  by  the 
Use  of  the  Spectroscope.  Ibid.,  Ill  (1896), 
337-343. 

Some  Points  which  Need  to  be  Emphasized  in 
Teaching  General  Astronomy.  Ibid.,  IV 
(1897),  400-407. 

The  Problems  of  Three  Bodies.  Ibid.,  V  (1897), 
407-411. 

Where  Did  Mars  Get  its  Moons?    Ibid.,  IV 

(1897),  573-574. 
Perturbations  of  the  Heavenly  Bodies.     Ibid., 

VI  (1898),  88-101. 

MouLTON,  Richard  Green 

The  Modern  Reader's  Bible:  Additional  Series 
for  Young  Folks.  Biblical  Masterpieces, 
1897,  XX +  278;  Bible  Stories,  Old  Testa- 
ment, 1899,  xii  +  310;  Bible  Stories,  New 
Testament,  1899,  xii  + 130.  New  York,  The 
Macmillan  Co. 

A  Short  Introduction  to  the  Literature  of  the 
Bible.  8vo,  vi+374.  Boston,  D.  C.  Heath 
&Co.,190L 

MuLFiNGER,  George  A. 

Lenau  in  America.  A  Contribution  to  Lenau's 
Biography.  Americana  Germanica,  1(1897), 
No.  2,  7-61;  No.  3, 1-16. 

NoRDELL,  Philip  A. 

The  Story  of  the  Spies.  Biblical  World,  I 
(1893),  168-183. 

Payne,  "Walter  A. 

Extension  Work  at  the  University  of  Chicago 
Citizen,  IV  (1898),  103-106. 

University  Extension  and  the  Public  Library, 
University  Record,  VI  (1901),  217-221. 

The  University  and  the  People.  Ibid.,  VII 
(1902),  118-120. 


LiTEBABY,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


177 


Peice,  Iba  M. 

Assyro-Babylonian  Light  on  Israel's  History. 
Independent,  XLVI  (1894),  552-553. 

Side  Lights  and  Background  Articles.  A 
series  of  450  articles  on  "  The  Books  of  the 
Bible,  their  Literary  Character,  their  His- 
torical Background,  and  their  Chief  Teach- 
ings." Baptist  Union,  October,  1894-June, 
1903. 

James  Robinson  Boise.  Biblical  World,  V 
(1895),  410-416. 

Some  Queries  About  the  Book  of  Daniel.  Ibid., 
VI  (1895),  264^269. 

Preparations  for  the  Messiah.  A  series  of 
thirty  articles  treating  the  history  prepara- 
tory to  a  study  of  the  Messianic  features  of 
Old  Testament  and  the  Inter-Biblical  period. 
Baptist  Union,  October,  1895-April,  1896. 

The  Contributions  of  Archaeology  to  the  Un- 
derstanding of  the  Old  Testament.  Sunday 
School  Times,  XXXVIII  (1896),  195-196. 

"  Christ,"  "  Messianic  Prophecies,"  "  Incidents 
in  the  Old  Testament  Referred  to  Those  in 
the  New  Testament,"  "  Passages  Quoted  or 
Paraphrased  in  the  New  Testament  from  the 
Old,"  contributed  to  Nelson's  IlltLstrated 
Bible  Treasury,  1896. 

Important  Movements  in  Israel  Prior  to  1000 
B.  C.    Biblical  World,  VII  (1896),  472-482. 

Important  Movements  in  Israel  950  to  621 B.  C. 
Ibid.',  VIII  (1897),  429^42. 

The  University  of  Paris:  Biblical  Workers  in 

the  Theological  Faculty.    Ibid.,  XI  (1899), 

7-15. 
The  Book  of  Daniel.    Ibid.,  XII  (1899),  27-35. 
The  Exodus  Material  and  the  Use  Made  of  it 

in  the  Scriptures.    Ibid.,  XIII  (1901),  451- 

465. 

Sundry  Articles  on  Biblical  History  and  Arch- 
aeology in  The  Jewish  Enclycopedia.  New 
York,  Funk  &  Wagnalls,  1901. 

Articles  on  "Assyria"  and  "Babylonia"  in 
Biblical  Encyclopedia,  edited  by  W.  W. 
Davies.    Toledo,  O.,  1903. 


RiTOHEY,  GeOBGE  WiLLIS 

Photographing  the  Expanding  Nebulae  About 
the  New  Star  in  Perseus.  Photographic 
Times,  XXXIV  (1902),  127-130. 

RoBEBTSON,  Josephine  Chesteb 

List  of  Periodicals  Received  by  the  University 
of  Chicago.  8vo,  15.  Pamphlet.  Chicago, 
1900.  Also  in  The  University  of  Chicago 
Presidents  Report,  1898-9  (1900),  121-133. 

Joint  Editor  of  List  of  Serials  in  the  Public 
Libraries  of  Chicago  and  Evanston,  Com- 
piled by  the  Chicago  Library  Club.  8vo, 
x  +  185.    Pamphlet.    Chicago,  1901. 

Root,  Theophilus  Huntington 

The  Self -Consciousness  of  Jesus.  Biblical 
World,  II  (1893),  265-274;  353-362;  412-420! 

Schmidt -Wabtenberg,  Heinbich 

Runes.     Johnson's  Universal  Encyclopedia. 

New  Edition.    VII  (1895),  208-209. 
Germanistische  Studien   in   den  Vereinigten 

Staaten  von  Nord  Amerika.    Zeitschrift  fiir 

deutsche  Philologie,  XXVIII  (1896),  425- 

427. 

Schwill,  Feedinand 

General  History  of  Europe.  In  collaboration 
with  Oliver  J.  Thatcher.  8vo,  xiv-|-613. 
New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1900. 

See,  Thomas  J.  J. 

The  Services  of  Nathaniel  Bowditch  to  Ameri- 
can Astronomy.  Popular  Astronomy,  II 
(1895),  385-394. 

Foiuier's  Historical  Eulogy  on  Laplace.  Ibid.f 
III  (1895),  1-12. 

The  Services  of  Benjamin  Peirce  to  American 
Mathematics  and  Astronomy.    Ibid.,  49-57. 

Recent  Discoveries  Respecting  the  Origin  of 
the  Universe.  Atlantic  Monthly,  LXXX 
(1897),  484-492. 


178 


Publications 


Great  Explorers  of  the    Southern    Heavens. 

Ibid.,  LXXXI  (1898),  679-689. 
The   Future   of   Great    Telescopes.    Forum, 

XXV  (1898),  693-701. 

Shorey,  Paul 

To  Ancient    Greek    through    Modem?     No. 

Forum,  XVIII  (1895),  602-608. 
Can  We  Revive  the  Olympic  Games?    Ibid., 

XIX  (1895),  3ia-323. 
Present    Conditions    of  Literary  Production. 

Atlantic  Monthly,  LXXVIII  (1896),  156- 

168. 
Discipline  vs.  Dissipation  in  Secondary  Schools. 

School  Review,  V  (1897),  217-230. 
Plato  and  His  Republic.    Chautauquan,  XXV 

(1897),  592-596. 
Pope's  Iliad  of  Homer,  Books  I,  VI,  XXII,  and 

XXIV.  Edited  with  Introduction  and  Notes. 

16mo,  xxxii  +  142.    Boston,  D.  C.  Heath  & 

Co.,  1899. 

Small,  Albion  W. 

The  Sociological  Basis  of  Religious  Union  and 
Work.  A  paper  read  at  the  Liberal  Reli- 
gious Congress,  May,  1894.  Unity,  1894, 
179-181. 

Methods  of  Studying  Society.  Chautauquan, 
XXI  (1895),  52-56. 

American  Society.    Ibid.,  XXII  (1895),  15-19. 

The  Civic  Federation  of  Chicago.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  I  (1895),  75-103. 

Private  Business  is  a  Public  Trust.  Ibid.,  276- 
289. 

The  State  and  Semi-Public  Corporations.  Ibid., 

II  (1896),  399-410. 

Scholarship  and  Social  Agitation.    Ibid.,  564- 

582. 

The  Meaning  of  the  Social  Movement.    Ibid., 

III  (1897),  340-354. 

Fellowship,  the  Tactics  of  Progress.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Eighth  International  Conven- 
tion of  the  Baptist  Young  People's  Union, 
1898,  18-22. 


Some  Undeveloped  Resources  in  the  Christian 
Revelation.  Address  Delivered  at  the  An- 
niversary of  the  Newton  Theological  Insti- 
tute, June,  1898.  Pamphlet.  8vo,  23.  Chi- 
cago, 1898. 

Address  on  Behalf  of  the  University  Congre- 
gation at  the  Ceremony  of  Conferring  the 
Degree  of  Doctor  of  Laws  upon  William 
McKinley.  University  Record,  III  (1898), 
182-184. 

Academic  Freedom.  Arena,  XXII  (1899), 
463-472. 

The  Social  Responsibility  for  Crime.  Address 
Delivered  at  the  Meeting  of  the  Chicago 
Congregational  Club,  March  19, 1900.  Pam- 
phlet.   8vo,  9.    Printed  by  the  Club. 

Modem  Demands  upon  Theological  Educa- 
tion. Reform  Advocate,  XIX  (1900),  333- 
336. 

The  Chmrch  and  the  Social  Problem.  Inde- 
pendent, LIII  (1901),  537-539. 

The  Next  Step  in  College  Development.  Uni- 
versity Record,  VI  (1901),  35-38. 

Address  Delivered  at  the  Laying  of  the  Cor- 
ner-Stone of  the  Commons.    Ibid.,  85-86. 

The  Social  Mission  of  College  Women.  Inde- 
pendent, LIV  (1902),  261-266. 

Smith,  Alexander 

The  Value  of  Chemistry  as  Part  of  a  School  or 
College  Course.  Proceedings  of  the  Na- 
tional Educational  Association,  1897,  946- 
951. 

The  High  School  Course  in  Chemistry.  School 
Review,  V  (1897)  497-503. 

The  Articulation  of  School  and  College  Work 
in  the  Sciences.  Ibid.,  VII  (1899),  411^17; 
453-461;  527-538. 

Report  on  Chemistry  of  the  Committee  on  Col- 
lege Entrance  Requirements.  Proceedings 
of  the  Educational  Association,  1899,  794- 
800. 

The  Teaching  of  Chemistry  and  Physics.  8vo, 
1-129.  American  Teachers  Series.  New 
York,  Longmans,  Green  &  Co.,  1902. 


LiTEBABY,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


179 


Smith,  Arthur  M. 

Christian  Education.      8vo,  53.      Pamphlet. 

Honolulu,  1901. 
The  Life  and  Teachings  of  Jesus.     8vo,  29. 

Pamphlet.    Honolulu,  1901. 

Scares,  Theodore  G. 

Hebrew  Historiography.     Biblical  World,  II 

(1893),  178-188. 
A  Chronological    Discussion    of    the    Virgin 

Oracle  of  Isaiah.  Ibid.,  VI  (1895),  58-61. 
The  Religious  Ideas  of  Judaism  from  Ezra  to 

the  Maccabees.  Ibid.,  XIII  (1899),  380-388. 
Ezekiel's  Temple.  Ibid.,  XIV  (1899),  93-103. 
The  Import  of  the  Chronicles  as  a  Piece  of 

Religio  -  Historical  Literature.      American 

Journal  of  Theology,  III  (1899),  251-274. 

Sparks,  Edwin  Erle 

Temporary  Patriotism  or  Permanent  Results. 

Public  Opinion,  XX  (1896),  46-47. 
The  Preservation  of  Historical  Material  in  the 

Middle  West.  Dial,  XXII  (1897),  239-240. 
Topical  Reference  Lists  in  American  History. 

8vo,  110.    Smythe,  Columbus,  Ohio,  (1893) 

(1898). 

The  Sentimental  in  American  History  Teach- 
ing.   School  Review,  VII  (1898),  536-541. 

A  Fitting  Memorial  to  Justin  S.  Morrill.  The 
Independent,  LI  (1899),  536. 

Colloquialisms  in  American  History.  Self- 
Culture,  IX  (1899),  371-372. 

Salt  in  Early  American  History.  Chautau- 
quan,  XXXI  (1900),  382-387. 

Famous  Tours  of  the  Presidents.  World  Re- 
view, I  (1901),  323-329. 

A  Record  of  a  Lost  Empire  in  America.  Ibid., 
XXXIII  (1901),  478-487. 

Stagg,  Alonzo  a. 

A.  Scientific  and  Practical  Treatise  on  American 
Football.  In  collaboration  with  H.  L.  Wil- 
liams. 16vo,  274.  Hartford,  Lockwood  &. 
Brainard  Co.,  1893. 


Stabr,  Frederick 

Sketch  of  Paolo  Mantegazza.  Popular  Sci- 
ence Monthly,  XLIII  (1893),  549-551. 

Anthropology  at  the  World's  Fair.  Ibid., 
610-621. 

A  Visit  to  the  Keller  Institute  in  Denmark. 
Charities  Review,  III  (1893),  79-84. 

Costa  Rica  at  the  Exposition.  Science,  XXII 
(1893),  239. 

Sign  Language  in  Print.    Ibid.,  286. 

Photography  in  Anthropological  Work.  Amer- 
ican Annual  of  Photography,  VII  (1893), 
210-211. 

Notes  on  Color-Hearing.  American  Journal 
of  Psychology,  V  (1893),  416-418. 

What  is  Anthropology?  Chautauquan,  XIX 
(1894),  25-29. 

Notes  on  Current  Anthropological  Literature. 

Biblical  World,  V  (1895),  45-50. 
Archaeology  in  Denmark.    Popular  Science 

Monthly,  XLVII  (1895),  12-22. 
The  Growth  of  Anthropology.    Ibid.,  265-267. 
First  Steps  in  Human  Progress.    16mo,  305. 

Meadville,  Flood  &  Vincent,  1895. 
Aztec  Place  Names,  Their  Meaning  and  Mode 

of  Composition.    Translated  from  A.  de  la 

Rosa  and  A.  Penafiel.    Pamphlet,  8vo,  12. 

1895. 

Pygmy  Races  of  Men.  North  American 
Review,  CLXII  (1896),  414r-423. 

Bibliography  of  Iowa  Antiquities.  Proceed- 
ings of  Davenport  Academy  of  Sciences, 
VI  (1896),  1-24. 

Summary  of  the  Archaeology  of  Iowa.  Ibid., 
53-124. 

A  Shell  Sorget  from  Mexico.    Ibid.,  173-178. 

Popular 'Celebrations  in  Mexico.  Journal  of 
American  Folk-Lore,  IX  (1896),  161-169. 

The  Davenport  Academy  of  Sciences.  Pop- 
ular Science  Monthly,  LI  (1897),  83-98. 

Science  at  the  University  of  Chicago.  Ibid., 
784-805. 

Stone  Images  from  Tarascan  Territory,  Mexico. 
American  Anthropologist,  X  (1897),  45-47, 
2  plates. 


180 


Publications 


Study  of  the  Criminal  in  Mexico.  American 
Journal  of  Sociology,  III  (1897),  13-17. 

A  Study  of  the  Census  of  the  Pueblo  of  Co- 
chiti,  New  Mexico.  Proceedings  of  the 
Davenport  Academy  of  Sciences,  VII 
(1897),  33-44. 

Notched  Bones  from  Mexico.  Ibid.,  VII  (1898), 
101-107, 1  plate. 

A  Shell  Inscription  from  Tula,  Mexico.  Ibid., 
108-110 

Some  North  American  Spear-throwers.  Inter- 
nationales Archiv  filr  Ethnographic,  XI 
(1898),  233-235,  plate. 

The  Academy  of  National  Sciences  of  St. 
Louis.  Popular  Science  Monthly,  LII 
(1898),  629-647. 

Survivals  of  Paganism  in  Mexico.  Open  Court, 
XIII  (1899),  385-398. 

Holy  Week  in  Mexico.  Journal  of  American 
Folk-Lore,  XII  (1899),  161-165. 

Catalogue  of  a  Collection  of  Objects  Illustrat- 
ing the  Folklore  of  Mexico.  8vo,  132,  32 
figures.    London,  1899. 

Mexican  Paper.  American  Antiquarian, 
XXII  (1900),  301-309,  8  figures. 

Notes  upon  the  Ethnography  of  Southern 
Mexico.  Proceedings  of  the  Davenport 
Academy  of  Sciences,  VIII  (1900),  102-198, 
98  cuts  and  map. 

Talbot,  Maeion 

History,  Aims  and  Methods  of  the  Association 
of  Collegiate  Alumnae.  Published  by  the 
Association.    Chicago,  1893. 

Present  Day  Problems  in  the  Education  of 
Women.  Educational  Review,  XIV  (1897), 
248-258. 

The  Duty  and  the  Opportunity  of  the  Asso- 
ciation of  Collegiate  Alumnae.  Michigan 
Alumnus,  IV  (1897),  3-14. 

Considerations  on  the  College  Curriculum  for 
Women.  Association  of  Collegiate  Alum- 
nae Magazine,  Series  III,  No.  I  (1898),  26-29. 


Domestic  Science  in  the  Colleges.  Table  Talk, 
1895. 

A  Practical  Experiment  in  the  Study  of  Dieta- 
ries. Review  of  Reviews,  XIII  (1896),  300- 
302. 

Sanitary  Science  and  its  Place  in  the  Univer- 
sity. University  of  Chicago  Record,  I 
(1896),  457-458. 

Housekeeping  Schools  in  Belgium.  Boston 
Cooking  School  Magazine,  II  (1898),  322- 
324. 

Taebell,  Frank  Bigelow 

A  Signed  Proto  -  Corinthian  Lecythus  in  the 
Boston  Museum  of  Fine  Arts.  Revue 
arcMologique,  3'"«  s6rie,  XL  (1892),  41-46. 

Terry,  Benjamin 

Young  Men  in  Kecent  Educational  Progress. 

.     Young  Men's  Era,  1893. 

The  Place  of  the  Study  of  History  in  an  Edu- 
cation. Illinois  State  Normal  School  Vi- 
dette,  VII  (1894),  1-3. 

The  Professor  Studentward.  Denison  Quar- 
terly, IV  (1896),  26-38. 

Cosmopolitanism  and  Patriotism.  Proceed- 
ings of  the  Baptist  Congress,  Baptist 
Congress  Publishing  Company,  XIX  (1901), 
160-171. 

Thatcher,  Oliver  J. 

A  Short  History  of  Mediaeval  Europe.      8vo, 

325.     New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons, 

1897. 
A  General  History  of  Europa.  In  collaboration 

with  Ferdinand  Schwill.     8vo,  xiv  -f  613. 

New  York,  Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  1900. 

Tolman,  Albert  H. 

Natiural  Science  in  a  Literary  Education.  Pop' 
ular  Science  Monthly,  XLIX  (1896),  98-103. 

Triggs,  Oscar  Lovell 
Robert  Browning  as  the  Poet  of  Democracy. 
Poet 'Lore,  IV  (1892),  481-489. 


LiTEBABY,  Educational,  Miscellaneous 


181 


The  Socialistic  Thread  in  the  Life  and  Works 
of  William  Morris.  Ibid.,  V  (1893),  113-122; 
210-218. 

Walt  Whitmaxi.    Ibid.,  289-305. 

Browning  and  Whitman:  A  Study  in  Democ- 
racy. Dilletante  Library,  16mo,  xii  +  145. 
London,  Swan,  Sonnenschein  &  Co.,  1893. 
New  York,  The  Macmillan  Co.,  1893. 

Literature  and  the  Scientific  Spirit.  Poet- 
Lore,  VI  (1894),  113-126. 

Personality  in  Teaching  Literature.  Ibid.,  389- 
393. 

The  Aims  of  Literary  Study.  Dial,  XVIII 
(1895),  203-204. 

New  Ideas  in  Teaching  Literature.  Poet-Lore, 
VIII  (1896),  452-454. 

On  the  Study  and  Teaching  of  Literature. 
University  Record,  I  (1896),  337-339;  345- 
346. 

Democratic  Art.    Forum,  XXVI  (1898),  66-79. 

Democratic  Criticism.  Sewanee  Review,  VI 
(1898),  4ia^32. 

A  Century  of  American  Poetry.  Forum,  XXX 
(1901),  636-640. 

Chapters  in  the  History  of  the  Arts  and  Crafts 
Movement.  8vo,  198.  Chicago,  Industrial 
Art  League,  1902. 

Tufts,  James  Hayden 

James  Tufts:  A  Memorial.  Edited  by  James 
Hayden  Tufts.  Printed  for  the  editor  by 
the  University  of  Chicago  Press.  8vo,  145, 
1902. 

The  Relation  of  Philosophy  to  Other  Graduate 
Studies.  Handbook  of  Graduate  Courses, 
1898-1899,  xix-xxxi.  University  of  Chicago 
Press,  1898. 

Veblen,  Thoestein  B. 

The  Economic  Theory  of  Woman's  Dress. 
Popular  Science  Monthly,  XLVI  (1894), 
198-205. 

Arts  and  Crafts.  Journal  of  Political  Econo- 
my, XI  (1902),  108-111. 


VoTAW,  Clyde  Webeb 

The  Foimding  of  the  Christian  Church:  An 
Inductive  Study  in  Fifty  Lessons  of  the 
Primitive  Era  of  Christianity,  30-100,  A.  D. 
8vo,  344.  Hartford,  Conn.,  Student  Pub- 
lishing Co.,  1892. 

The  Primitive  Era  of  Christianity,  as  Recorded 
in  the  Acts  of  the  Apostles,  30^63  A.  D.  8vo, 
122.     Chicago,  University  Press,  1898. 

The  Life  of  Christ:  A  Sketch.  Progress,  HI 
(1898),  503-524. 

Present  Excavations  in  Palestine.  Biblical 
World,  XIV  (1899),  434r-443. 

The  Use  of  Books  in  Bible  Study.  Ibid.,  XVI 
(1900),  3-9. 

Books  for  New  Testament  Study.  In  collabo- 
ration with  Professor  Charles  F.  Bradley, 
8vo,  80.    Chicago,  University  Press,  1900. 

Walkeb,  Dean  A. 

Some  Notes  from  Palestine.    Biblical  World, 

II  (1893),  374-378. 
The  Vapor  Bath  of  Ghantur.    Recovery  of  a 

Roman  Milestone.    Ibid.,  Ill  (1894),  53-56. 

Wateeman,  Richabd,  Jr. 

Educational  Exhibits  at  the  World's  Fairs 
Since  1851.  Educational  Review,  V  (1893), 
120-129;  21&-231. 

The  International  Educational  Congresses  of 
1893.    Ibid.,  VI  (1893),  158-166. 

Educational  Exhibits  at  the  Columbian  Expo- 
sition.   Ibid.,  268-276. 

The  World's  Fair:  What  it  Offers  to  Univer- 
sity Extension  Students.  University  Ex- 
tension World,  II  (1893),  9-13. 


Webgeland,  Agnes  M. 

The    Latest    Criticism    of    America. 
XXXII  (1902),  117-121. 


Dial, 


Whitman,  Chables  O. 

A  Marine  Observatory  the  Prime  Need  of 
American  Biology.  Atlantic  Monthly, 
LXXI  (1893),  808-815. 


182 


Publications 


Wilkinson,  William  Cleaver 

Classic  Greek  Courses  in  English.  12mo,  314. 
New  York,  Chautauqua  Press,  1892. 

Jesus:  A  Biography  from  the  Birth  in  Bethle- 
hem to  the  Crucifixion  on  Calvary.  Book 
XII,  813-950.  People's  Bible  History.  4to, 
xxiv  + 1241.  Chicago,  Henry  O.  Shepard  & 
Co.,  1896. 

The  Epic  of  Paul.    A  Poem  in  XXIV  Books. 

8vo,  722.      New  York,  Funk  &  Wagnalls, 

1897. 
The  Epic  of  Saul.    New  edition,  revised  and 

enlarged.     8vo,  390.    New  York,  Funk  & 

Wagnalls,  1898. 
Foreign  Classics  in  English.     Six    volumes. 

New  York,  Funk  &  Wagnalls,  1900. 
Chrysalis  (Poem).    Century,  XLIX  (1895),  261. 
George  William  Curtis  (Poem).  Ibid,,  L  (1895), 

339. 
Glossary  of  Foreign  Expressions.    Standard 

Dictionary,  I  (1895),  2261-2264. 

WiLLETT,  Herbert  A. 
The  Keligion  of  Israel.    Progress,  III  (1898), 
472-501. 


The  Life  and  Teachings  of  Jesus.  1898.  Sec- 
ond and  third  editions,  1900  and  1902. 
Fleming  H.  Revell  &  Co. 

A  New  Vocation.  Christian  Quarterly,  New 
Series,  III  (1899),  433-443. 

The  Teachings  of  the  Books.  In  collaboration 
with  Dr.  James  M.  Campbell.  1899.  Second 
edition,  1901.    Fleming  H.  Revell  &  Co. 

Our  Plea  for  Union  and  the  Present  Crisis. 
Christian  Century  Co.,  1901. 

ZuEBLiN,  Charles 

The  Lecturer  and  Laborer.  University  Ex- 
tension, III  (1894),  213-216. 

Social  Christianity  in  England.  Methodist 
Review,  LXXIX  (1897),  51-64. 

Results  and  Prospects  of  University  Extension. 
Dial,  XXII  (1897),  207-208. 

Some  Municipal  Problems  and  Phenomena. 
Dial,  XXVIII  (1900),  283-285. 

A  Decade  of  Civic  Improvement.  Chautau- 
quan,  XXXVI  (1902),  174-177;  also  pam- 
phlet, 16mo,  16.  Chicago,  Chautauqua 
Press,  1903. 


INDEX 


Abbott,  F.  P.,  S7, 165 
Adams,  C.  C,  134 
Adams,  W.  S.,  95 
AUen,  B.  M.,  134 
Allen,  P.  S.,  65,  66 
Allen,  W.  H.,  18 
Almstedt,  H.  B.,  65,  66 
Ames,  E.  S.,  8, 10 
Anderson,  Galusha,  160 
Anderson,  Kate,  11 
Angell,  J.  R.,  6, 165 
Arnold,  J.  K.,  44 
Arnolt,  W.  Muss,  42,  48, 165 
Asada,  Eiji,  44 
Ashley,  M.  L.,  10 
Auten,  NelUe  M.,  37 

Bain,  H,  F.,  123 
Baird,  P.  C,  44 
Balch,  E,  A.,  28 
Baldwin,  J.  F.,  28 
Barker,  L.F.,  136, 165 
Barnard,  E.  E.,  87, 165 
Barnes,  C.  R.,  149, 165 
Barrows,  D.  P.,  35 
Barrows,  J.  H.,  38,  165 
Bftrta,  Alois,  44 
Batt,  Max,  66 
Baumgartner,  W.  J.,  134 
Baur,  George,  129, 146 
Bawden,  H.  H.,  10 
Bechtel,  E.  A.,  59 
Beckmann,  F.  E.,  62 
Beeson,  C.  H.,  165 
Behan,  W.  P.,  160 
Bellisle,  R.  de  Poyen,  62 
Bensley,  R.  R.,  137 
Bergeron,  Eugfene,  62 
Bemhard,  Adolph,  111 
Berry,  G.  R.,  43,  44 
Biddle,  H.  C,  111 
Blackburn,  F.  A.,  68, 165 
Blanchard,  F.  M.,  165 
Bliss,  G.  A.,  81 
Bolza,  Oskar,  75 
Bordes,  A.  B.  de,  62, 165 
Boyd,  C.  E.,  23 
Boyd,  J.  H.,  80 


Bowen,  Mary,  71 
Brace,  Edith  M.,  134 
Bray,  W.  L.,  151 
Breasted,  J.  H.,  30,  41, 166 
Breckinridge,    Sophonisba 

P.,  18,  23 
Bridge,  J.  L.,  113 
Bristol,  C.  L.,  130 
Brode,  H.  S.,  130 
Bronk,  IsabeUe,  62 
Brown,  G.  L.,  81 
Bruce,  P.  P.,  45 
Buck,  A.  F.,  9 
Buck,  C.  D.,  49 
Buckley,  Edmund,  38, 166 
Budgett,  S.  P.,  143 
Bulkley,  Julia  E.,  12 
Burchard,  H.  M.,  54 
Burgess,  T.  C,  54 
Burnham,  S.  W.,  86, 166 
Burton,  E.  D.,  46 
Bushnell,  C.  J.,  35 
Bushong,  F.  W.,  113 
Butler,  Nathaniel,  12, 166 
Butterworth,  Horace,  166 

Caldwell,  O.  W.,  151,  152 
Caldwell,  William,  166 
Capps,  Edward,  52, 166 
Carpenter,  F.I.,  69,  71, 167 
Case,  C.  D.,  157 
Case,  E.  C,  147 
Castle,  C.  F.,  167 
Catterall,  R.  C.  H.,  27,  28 
Chamberlain,  C.  J.,  149 
Chamberlin,  T.  C,  114, 167 
Child,  C.  M.,  127 
Cipriani,  Lisi,  62 
Clapp,  Cornelia  M.,  130 
Clark,  Hannah  B.,  85 
Clark,  H,  L.,  167 
Clark,  S.  H.,  167 
Clark,  W.  A.,  12 
Claypole,  Agnes  M.,  130 
Clement,  W.  K.,  59 
Cleveland,  F.  A.,  28 
Coffin,  F.  J.,  44 
Comparette,  T.  L.,  59 


Conrad,  A.  H.,  153 
Conrad,  Laetitia  M.,  39 
Cooke,  Elizabeth,  142 
Copeland,  E.  B.,  154 
Coulter,  J.  G.,  152 
Coulter,  J.  M.,  148, 167 
Cowles,  H.  C,  150, 152, 168 
Crabb,  W.  D.,  62 
Craig,  Wallace,  134 
Cross,  George,  157 
Crow,  Martha  F.,  167 
Cummings,  John,  16 
Curtiss,  R.  S.,  110 
Cutler,  W.  A.,  18 
Cutting,  S.  W.,  62, 168 

Dains,  F.  B.,  HI 
Damon,  L.  T.,  168 
Davenport,  C.  B.,  126, 168 
Davenport,  H.  J.,  16, 168 
Davies,  H.  E.,  156 
Davis,  Benjamin  M.,  138 
Davis,  Bradley  M.,  149 
Davis,  Katherine  B.,  16 
Derby,  I.  H.,  109 
Dewey,  John,  3, 12, 168 
Dickson,  L.  E.,  78,  81 
Dilthey,  Walter,  113 
Dixson,  Zella  A.,  168 
Donaldson,  H.  H.,  128, 143 
Downing,  E.  R.,  131 
Dunn,  A.  W.,  37 
Dunn,  Elizabeth  H.,  145 
Drew,  E.  R.,  104 

Earhart,  B.  F.,  104 
Eggert,  C.  E.,  66 
EUermann,  Ferdinand,  95 
EUwood,  C.  A.,  36 
Enteman,  Minnie  M.,  131 
Eycleshymer,  A.  C,  131, 136 

FeUows,  G.  E.,  27, 168 
Felton,  Katherine,  19 
Fenneman,  N.  M.,  123 
Fertig,  J.  W.,  28 
Findlay,  William,  81 
Fischer,  M.  H.,  141 
183 


Fish,  A.  L.,  19 
Fite,  Warner,  8 
Flickinger,  R.  C,  54 
Folin.O.  K.,  Ill 
Forrest,  J.  D.,  36 
Foster,  G.  B.,  157 
Fowler,  F.  H.,  50 
France,  WUmer  C,  54,  55 
Frank,  Tenny,  55,  59 
Franklin,  F,  Q.,  28 
Freund,  Ernst,  22 
Frye,  T.  C,  153 
Frost,  E.  B.,  92 

Gale,  H.  G.,  102, 104 
Garner,  J.  H.,  Ill 
Garrey,  W.  E.,  142 
Garrison,  G.  P.,  28 
Garrison,  W.  E.,  160 
Gates,  Errett,  160 
Gillespie,  William,  81 
Gillette,  J.  M.,  36 
Goode,  J.  P.,  125 
Goodspeed,  E.  J.,  47, 48, 168 
Goodspeed,  G.  S.,  25,  38,  40 
Gordon,  C.  H.,  124 
Gtordon,  Kate,  11 
Gordon,  W.  C,  161 
Gore,  W.  C,  10 
Gould,  E.  R.  L.,  16 
Graves,  Elma,  37 
Gray,  C.  D.,  44, 169 
Greeley,  A.  W.,  141, 142 
Gregory,  Emily  R.,  131 
Guyer,  M.  F.,  131 
Hale,  G.  E.,  83, 169 
Hale,  W.  G.,  55, 169 
Hamilton,  Alice,  145 
Hammond,  Eleanor  P.,  71 
Hancock,  A.  A.,  169 
Hancock,  Harris,  80 
Hardesty,  Irving,  138, 145 
Harding,  W.  F.,  19 
Hardy,  Sarah  M.,  19 
Harper  E.  H.,  132 
Harper,  R.  F.,  40, 169 
Harper,  W.  R.,  39, 170 
Harris,  Mary  B.,  50 


184 


Publications 


Harris,  N.  D.,  28 
Hastings,  C.  H.,  37, 171 
Hatai,  Shinkishi,  144 
Hatfield,  Ethel  G.,  23 
Hatfield,  H.R.,  15, 17 
Hayes,  E.  C,  36 
Hefferan,  Mary,  134, 156 
Hegner,  H.  F.,  37 
Heidel,  W.  A.,  9, 55 
Hektoen,  Ludvig,  154 
Hellems,  F.  B.  R.,  60 
HeUer,  Otto,  66, 171 
Henderson,  C.  R.,  31, 161, 171 
Henderson,  George,  171 
Henderson,  W.  E.,  113 
Hendrickson,  G.  L.,  58 
Herrick,  H.  M.,  48 
Her  rick,  J.  A.,  158 
Herrick,  Robert,  171 
Hesse,  B.  C,  111 
Hessler,  J.  C,  108, 112, 172 
Heuver,  Q.  D.,  48 
Hewes,  Amy,  37 
Hill,  William,  15 
Hoben,  T.  A.,  48 
Holferty,  G.  M.,  158 
Holmes,  S.  J.,  132 
Holmes,  W.  B.,  109 
Hoist.  H.  E.  von,  24, 172 
Hopkins,  T.C.,  124, 172 
Hourwich,  Isaac,  16, 172 
Howerth,  I.  W.,  34, 36, 172 
Howland,  G.  C,  61 
Hoxie,  R.  F.,  19 
Hulbert,  E.  B.,  158 
Hull,  G.  F.,  104 
HuUey,  Lincoln,  44 
Hunter,  G.  W.,  Jr.,  135 
Hussey,  G.  B.,  54 
Hutchinson,  J.  I.,  81 

Iddings,  J.  P.,  120 
Ikuta,  Massuo,  111 
Ingres,  Mazime,  172 
Inskeep,  Anna  L.,  23 
Irons,  E.  E.,  156 

James,  E.  J.,  21, 172 
Jameson,  J.  F.,  24, 173 
Jeffreys,  Elizabeth,  112 
Jenkins,  T.  A.,  61 
Jewett,  F.  B.,  103, 104 


Johnson,  Franklin,  159, 161, 

173 
Johnson,  H.  ?.,  132 
Johnson,  R.  H.,  135 
Johonnott,  E.  S.,  104 
Jonas,  J.  B.  E.,  66, 173 
Jones,  H.  E.,  44 
Jones,  Jessie  L.,  67 
Jones,  L.  W.,  109, 112 
Jordan,  E.  O.,  130, 154 
Judson,  H.  P.,  20, 173 

Kellor,  Frances  A.,  37 
Kelly,  F.  T.,  45 
Kent,  C.  F.,  173 
Kent,  N.  A.,  96 
Kern,  P.  O.,  65, 67 
Kimble,  R.  G.,  37 
King,  W.  L.  M.,  19 
Kinsley,  Carl,  103 
Klenze,  Camillo  von,  63 
Koch,  Waldemar,  141 
Kammel,  H.  B.,  124 
Kyes,  Preston,  137 

Lagergren,  C.  Q.,  173 
Laing,  G.  J.,  58, 174 
Land,  "W.  J.  G.,  153 
Laughlin,  J.  L.,  13, 174 
Laves,  Kurt,  93 
Lawson,  A.  A.,  152 
Lehmer,  D.  N.,  81 
Lengfeld,  FeUx,  109, 174 
Lewis,  E.  H.,  71, 174 
Life,  A.  C,  153 
Lillie,  F.  R.,  126, 132 
Lillie,  R.  S.,  132 
Lindholm,  S.  V.,  19 
Lingle,  D.J.,141 
Linn,  J.  W.,  174 
Linscott,  H.  F.,  50 
Livingston,  B.  E.,  151, 152 
Locy,  W.  A.,  133 
Loeb,  Jacques,  128, 138 
Logan,  W.  N.,  147 
Lovett,  R.  M.,  70, 174 
Lutz,  F.  E.,  135 
Lyon,  E.  P.,  140, 142, 174 
Lyon,  Florence  M.,  150, 152 

MacClintock,  S.  S.,  38 
MacClintock,  W.  D.,  67 


MacLean,  Anne  M.,  36| 
MacLennan,  S.  F.,  9, 10 
MacMillan,  D.  P.,  10 
Mahood,  E.  W.,  11 
Mall,  F.  P.,  128, 137 
Manly,  J.  M.,  67 
Mann,  C.  R.,  102 
Manny,  F.  A.,  175 
Maschke,  Heinrich,  76 
Mathews,  A.  P.,  141, 175 
Mathews,  Shailer,  46, 175 
Maxwell,  S.  S.,  142 
McCaleb,  W.  F.,  28 
McCallum,  W.  B.,  153 
McCaskill,  V.  E.,  133 
McClung,  C.  E.,  135 
McCoy,  H.  N.,  108, 112 
McDonald,  J.  H.,  82 
McKee,  R,  H.,  112 
McLean,  S.  J.,  17 
McPherson,  William,  112 
Mead,  A.  D.,  133 
Meade,  E.  S.,  19 
Mebane,  W.  N.,  45 
Meek,  Elizabeth  B.,  135 
Merrell,  W.  D.,  151, 152 
Merriam,  C.  E.,  22 
Meyer,  J.  J.,  50, 175 
Mezes,  S.  E.,  9 
Michelson,  A.  A.,  101 
Miller,  A.  C,  14 
Miller,  F.  J.,  175 
Miller,  J.  A.,  82 
MiUer,  M.  L.,  35,  36 
Millerd,  Clara  E.,  55 
Millikan,  R.  A.,  102, 175 
Million,  J.  W.,  19 
Millis,  H.  A.,  17 
Mitchell,  S.  A.,  100 
Mitchell,  S.  C,  23 
Mitchell,  W.  C,  16, 17 
Moenkhaus,  W.  J.,  135 
Moncrief,  J.  W.,  159 
Moncrieff,  W.  F.,  10 
Monroe,  Paul,  36 
Moody,  W.  v.,  70, 175 
Moore,  A.  W.,  8, 10 
Moore,  Anne,  142 
Moore,  C.  H.,  59 
Moore,  E.  C,  10,  38 
Moore,  E.  H.,  73 
Moore,  Ella  A.,  176 


Moore,  J.  H.,  36 
Moulton,  F.  R.,  94, 100, 176 
Moulton,  R.  G.,  72, 176 
Mulflnger,  G.  A.,  176 
Munson,  J.  P.,  133 

Nef,  J.  U.,  105 
Neff,  T.  L.,  61 
NeUson,  C.  H.,  142 
Nelson,  N.  L.  T.,  152 
Nordell,  P.  A.,  176 
Norlin,  George,  55 
Norman,  W.  W.,  143 
Northrup,  G.  W.,  157 

Osborn,  L.  D.,  158 
Overton,  J.  B.,  152 
Owen,  W.  B.,  54,  55 

Padan,  R.  S.,  17 
Parkhurst,  J.  A.,  96 
Paschal,  G.  W.,  55 
Payne,  W.  A.,  176J 
Pearce,  H.  J.,  11 
Peck,  P.  F.,  29 
Perrin,  J.  W.,  29 
Perry,  H.  F.,  88 
Pickel,  F.  W.,  135 
Pietsch,  Karl,  61 
Piatt,  Julia  B.,  135 
Prather,  J.  M.,  133, 138 
Pratt,  Alice  E.,  71 
Price,  I.  M.,  40, 177 
Putnam,  T.  M.,  82 

Ransom,  J.  B.,  112 
Raymond,  J.  H.,  34,  37 
Reese,  S.  C,  101 
Reichmann,  F.,104 
Revell,  D.  G.,  137 
Reynolds,  Myra,  68,  72 
Rickert,  Martha  E.,  72 
Ritchey,  G.  W.,  95, 177 
Robertson,  Josephine   C, 

177 
Robinson,  E.  G.,  157 
Rogers,  A.  K.,  11 
Root,  T.  H.,  48, 177 
Rullkoetter,  William,  29 

Salisbury,  R.  D.,  117 
Schaffner,  J.  H.,  153 
Schlicher,  J.  J.,  60 


Index 


185 


Schmidt,  Emanuel,  45 
Schmidt-Wartenberg,  H.,  64, 

177 
Schneider,  E.  A.,  109 
Schoemaker,  D.  M.,  145 
Schoolcraft,  H.  L.,  29 
Schub,  F.  O.,  67 
Schwartz,  S.  E.,  113 
Schwill,  Ferdinand,  26, 177 
Scofleld,  Cora  L.,  29 
Searles,  Helen  M.,  51 
See,  T.  J.  J.,  98, 177 
Seidenadel,  C.  W.,  54,  55 
SeUery,  G.  C,  29 
Sethre,  J.  O.,  29 
Seward,  O.  P.,  67 
Shambaugh,  G.  E.,  137 
Shepardson,  F.  W.,  26 
Shipley,  F.  W.,  60 
Shorey,  Paul,  51, 178 
Shull,  G.  H.,  153 
Sidey,  T.  K.,  60 
Sikes,  G.  C,  19 
Sinclair,  S.  B.,  13 
Skinner,  E.B.,  82 
Slaught,  H.  E.,  77,  82 
Slosson,  E.  E.,  113 
Small,  A.  W.,  30, 178 
Smedley,  F.  W.,  12 
Smith,  Alexander,  lOG,  178 
Smith,  A.  M.,  158, 179 


Smith,  G.  B.,  157 
Smith,  J.  M.  P.,  43,  45 
Smith,  R.  W.,  152 
Smith,  W.  E.,  113 
Snow,  Letitia  M.,  135, 154 
Soares,  T.  G.,  45, 179 
Sparks,  E.  E.,  26,  29, 179 
Spray,  Jessie  N.,  11 
Squires,  V.  P.,  72 
Starr,  Frederick,  33, 179 
Stagg,  A.  A.,  179 
Sterns,  W.  P.,  17 
Stevens,  F.  L.,  152 
Stevenson,  J.  H.,  45 
Stieglitz,  Julius,  106 
St.  John,  Wallace,  160 
Stokes,  H.  N.,  109 
Stone,  Isabelle,  104 
Stratton,  A.  W..  50 
Stratton,  S.  W.,  102 
Strong,  C.  A„  9 
Stuart,  H.  W.,  11, 19 
Sturges,  Mary  M.,  135 
Sturtevant,  E.  H.,  51 
Swearingen,  G.  C,  60 
Swartz,  S.  E.,  113 

Talbot,  Marion,  33, 180 
Tanner,  Amy  E.,  9, 11 
Tannreuter,  G.  W.,  135 
TarbeU,  F.  B.,  29,  52, 180 


Terry,  Benjamin,  24, 180 
Thatcher,  O.  J.,  25, 180 
Thomas,  W.  I.,  33,  37 
Thompson,  Helen  B.,  11, 145 
Thompson,  J.  W.,  27,  29 
Thurber,  C.  H.,  12 
Tibbetts,  W.  F.,  60 
Tolman,  A.  H.,  68, 180 
Tower,  W.  L.,  128 
Treadwell,  A.  L.,  134 
Triggs,  O.  L.,  71,  72, 180 
Tufts,  J.  H.,  5, 181 
Tunell,  G.  G.,  18 
Tunnicliff,  Helen  H.,  23 

Van  Deman,  Esther  B.,  61 
Vandewalker,  Nina  C,  38 
Van  Kirk,  Hiram,  158 
Veblen,  T.  B.,  15,  181 
Vincent,  G.  E.,  34,  37 
Vos,  B.  J.,  66 
Votaw,  C.  W.,  47,  49, 181 

Wadsworth,  F.  L.  O.,  96, 103 
WaUace,  Elizabeth,  23,  61 
Wallace,  M.  W.,  72 
Walker,  A.  T.,  59, 61 
Walker,  D.  A.,  45, 181 
Watas6,  Sho,  130 
Waterman,  Richard,  181 
Webb,  J.  E.,  154 


Webster,  R.  W.,  141, 143 
Welch,  Jeannette  C,  143 
Weller,  Stuart,  121 
Wells,  H.  G.,  155 
Wergeland,  Agnes  M.,  27, 

181 
West,  Max,  19,  35 
Wheeler,  H.  L.,  114 
Wheeler,  W.  M.,  129 
Wherry,  W.  B.,  156 
White,  H.  K.,  19 
Whitehead,  L.  G.,  11 
Whitford,  H.  N.,  151 
Whitman,  C.  O.,  125, 181 
Whitton,  R.  H.,  20 
Wilkinson,  W.  C,  182 
Willett,  H.  L.,  43,  45, 182 
WilHamson,  H.  P.,  61 
Willis,  H.  P.,  18 
Winston,  A.  P.,  20 
Wolcott  J,  D.,  59 
Wood,  F.  A.,  67 
Wood,  R.  W.,  114 
Wright,  W.  H.,  101 
Wyckoff,  C.  T,,  29 

Yoong,  Ella  P.,  12, 13 
Young,  J.  W.  A.,  77 

Zoethout,  W.  D.,  143 
Zueblin,  Charles,  32, 182 


AN  INITIAL  nNE  OF  25  CENT_^«„ 

OVERDUE. 


624383       ^^ 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CAUFORNIA  UBRARY 


